URIS LIBRARY 
 
Cornell University Library 
 PA 369.G65 1878 
 
 Syntax of the moods and tenses of the Gr 
 
 3 1924 012 550 285 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924012550285 
 
SYNTAX 
 
 THE MOODS AND TENSES 
 
 THE GREEK VERB. 
 
 WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, Ph.D., 
 in 
 
 BLIOT PKOFESSOE OF 6KEEK LUERATUEE m HAEVAED UNIYEESITT. 
 
 SEVENTH EDITION, REVISED. 
 
 ' BOSTON": 
 1 GINN AND HEATH. 
 
 3 1878. 
 
 URIS LIBRARY 
 
 APR 2 2 1987 
 
Entered according to Act of" CongreBS, in the year 1860, 
 
 By W. W. GOODWIN, 
 
 in tlie Clerk'B Office of the District Court of the District of Moasachusette. 
 
 University Press: Welch, Eigelow, & Ca, 
 Cahbridgs, 
 
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1860, 
 
 By W. W. GOODWIN, 
 
 in tlie Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of MaasaehusettB. 
 
PEEFACE 
 
 TO THE FIFTH EDITION. 
 
 Since the publication of the second edition of this work in 
 1865j several changes of expression and many corrections 
 have been made, which it is impossible to enumerate in full. 
 In preparing the fourth edition in 1870, and the fifth edition 
 in 1873, the work has been carefully revised ; several sections 
 and notes have been rewritten, and some notes have been 
 added. The only changes which can affect referenues made to 
 the earlier editions (besides those mentioned on page v.): will 
 be found in § 10, 1, Remark; § 11, Note 7 ; § 18, 1, Note; 
 § 19, Note 6 ; § 66, 2, Note 3 ; § 78, Note ; and § 114, 2, 
 Note : these have been added since the second edition was 
 printed. Changes of expression and additions will be found 
 in the Remark before § 12; § 18, 1 ; § 23, 2, Note 3 ; § 37, 
 1 ; § 45, Note 7 (a) ; § 69, 1 ; § 70, 1 ; § 86, Note 1 (J) ; 
 § 88, Remark ; and § 89, 2, Note 1 and Remark 1 ; not to 
 mention others of less importance. The most important change 
 made in the fifth edition will be found in the statement of the 
 classification of conditional sentences (§ 48). This has been 
 adopted to make clearer the position of the present and past 
 " general suppositions " which have the subjunctive and opta- 
 tive in Greek (§51), as opposed to the present and past " par- 
 ticular suppositions " which have the simple indicative (§ 49, 1 ). 
 This distinction of these two classes in protasis is a striking 
 peculiarity of Greek syntax ; most languages having a single 
 form of expression for both particular and general conditions 
 here, as the Greek has in other kinds of conditions. I can- 
 not state too distinctly, that the chief peculiarity of my classi- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 fication of conditional sentences consists in treating present 
 and past general conditions as closely allied to ordinary pres- 
 ent and past conditions (being actually united with them in 
 one class in most languages, and occasionally even in Greek), 
 and as only remotely connected, at least in sense, with the 
 externally similar forms of future conditions which have the 
 subjunctive and optative. This relation is especially obvious 
 when we see that iav iroifj as a general supposition is occa- 
 sionally represented by et noiei, whereas iav noifj in a future 
 condition is equivalent to tl iroirja-ei in the indicative. I have 
 explained this at greater length in the Philologus, VoL 
 XXVIII. pp. 741-745 (Gottingen, 1869), and in a paper 
 read before the American Philological Association in July, 
 1873. The change in § 48 has made necessary slight changes 
 of expression in § 12 ; § 13, 1 ; § 20 ; § 21, 1 j § 49, 1 ; § 51 ; 
 § 60 j § 61, 1 ; and § 62. An index to the examples which 
 have been added in the later editions is given on page 242. 
 
 Haktabd College, September, 1873. 
 
 The last-mentioned paper, in which the change in the 
 classification of conditional sentences made in the edition of 
 1873 is explained and the whole system is defended, may be 
 found in the Transactions of the American Philological Asso- 
 ciation for 1873, and in the Journal of Philology, Vol. V. 
 No. 10. 
 
 Septemter, 1875. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 In the first edition of the present work, published in 1860, 
 I attempted to give a plain and practical statement of the prin- 
 ciples which govern the relations of the Greek Moods and 
 Tenses. Although many of these principles were established 
 beyond dispute, there were others (and these often the most ele- 
 mentary) upon which scholars had long held the most opposite 
 opinions. Upon many of these latter points I presented new 
 views, which seemed to me to explain the phenomena of the 
 language more satisfactorily than any that had been advanced. 
 The favorable opinion of scholars has confirmed my belief, that 
 some such attempt as I have made was demanded by the ris- 
 ing standard of classical scholarship in this country, and has 
 given me reason to hope that my labor has not been entirely a 
 thankless one. 
 
 The progress in grammatical science in this century has 
 been made step by step, like that in every other science ; and 
 BO it must long continue to be. He who imagines that every 
 important principle of Greek and Latin syntax is as well un- 
 derstood and as clearly defined as the rules for addition and 
 multiplication in Arithmetic, has not yet begun to learn. It is 
 no disparagement of even the highest scholars, therefore, to say 
 that they have left much of the most important work to be 
 lone by their successors. 
 
 The vague notions so often expressed on the Greek Moods, 
 even by scholars of otherwise high attainments, are in strange 
 contrast with the accuracy demanded by scientific scholarship 
 in other departments. If the study of language is to retain its 
 present place (or indeed any prominent place) in the mental 
 
U PREFACE. 
 
 discipline of youth, it must be conducted on strictly scientific 
 principles, and above all with scientific acevracy. On no other 
 ground can we defend the course of elementary grammatical 
 training, which is the basis of all sound classical scholarship. 
 An elementary grammar should be as short as the best scholar 
 can make it, but it should be as accurate as a chapter in Geom- 
 etry. To those who cannot appreciate the importance of 
 accuracy in scholarship, or even distinguish it from pedantry, 
 to those who cannot see the superiority of the Greek in this 
 respect over Chinese or Choctaw, it is useless to speak ; but 
 surely no scholar can fail to see that an accurate knowledge of 
 the uses of the Greek Verb, with its variety of forms, each ex- 
 pressing its peculiar shade of meaning, must be indispensable 
 to one who would understand the marvellous power of the 
 Greek language to express the nicest distinctions of thought. 
 
 One great cause of the obscurity which has prevailed on this 
 subject is the tendency of so many scholars to treat Greek syn- 
 tax metaphysically rather than by the light of common sense. 
 Since Hermann's application of Kant's Categories of Modality 
 to the Greek Moods, this metaphysical tendency has been con- 
 spicuous in German grammatical treatises, and has affected 
 many of the grammars used in England and America more 
 than is generally supposed. The result of this is seen not 
 merely in the discovery of hidden meanings which no Greek 
 writer ever dreamed of, but more especially in the invention of 
 nice distinctions between similar or even precisely equivalent 
 expressions. A new era was introduced by Madvig, who has 
 earned the lasting gratitude of scholars by his efforts to restore 
 Greek syntax to the dominion of common sense. Madvig b 
 fully justified in boasting that he was the first to give fuU and 
 correct statements on such elementary matters as the meaning 
 of the Aorist Optative and Infinitive, and the construction of on 
 and as in oratio ohliqua; although Professor Sophocles dis- 
 tinctly recognized the same principles in his Grammar, published 
 later in the same year with Madvig's (1847). I can hardly 
 express my great indebtedness to Madvig's Syntax der griechi- 
 schen Sprache, and to his Bemerkungen uber eintge Puncte der 
 griechischen Wbrtfugungslehre (in a supplement to the PIdlolo' 
 (nu, Vol. IL). The works of this eminent scholar have aided 
 
FSEFACB. m 
 
 me not only Ly the material which they have afforded as a 
 basis for the present work, but also by the valuable suggestions 
 with which they abound. 
 
 Next to Madvig, I must acknowledge my obligations to 
 Kruger's Grieehische Sprachlehre, which has everywhere sup- 
 plied me with important details and most excellent examples. 
 I have been frequently indebted to the other grammarians, 
 who need not be specially mentioned. Baumlein's Unter- 
 tuchungen iiber die griechischen Modi reached me after the print- 
 ing of the first edition was begun. I have often been indebted 
 to his valuable collection of examples, and have derived many 
 hints from his special criticisms ; I regret that I cannot agree 
 with the general principles to which he refers the uses of each 
 mood, especially as his criticisms of the prevailing German the- 
 ories on this subject are most satisfactory and instructive. I am 
 indebted to the personal advice and suggestions of my learned 
 colleague. Professor Sophocles, in the preparation of both 
 editions, for information which no books could have supplied. 
 
 I must acknowledge the following special obligations. The 
 notes on the tenses of the Indicative in Chapter II. are based 
 mainly on Kriiger, § 53. The chapters on the Infinitive and 
 Participle are derived chiefly from Madvig's Syntax (Chapters 
 V. and VI.), and partly from Kriiger, § 55, § 56. The note 
 on the Future Optative after Sn-aw, &c. (§ 26, Note 1) contains 
 the substance of Madvig's Bemerkungen, pp. 27 - 29 ; and the 
 account of the various constructions that follow verbs of hin- 
 drance and prevention (§ 95, 2 and 3) is based on the same 
 work, pp. 47 - 66. The statement of the principles of indirect 
 discourse (Chapter IV. Section IV.) was written in nearly its 
 present form before Madvig's Syntax reached me ; and I was 
 strongly confirmed in the views there expressed, by finding 
 that they agreed almost exactly with those of Madvig. I was 
 anticipated by him in my statement of the occasional use of the 
 Present Optative to represent the Imperfect, and in my quota- 
 tion of Dem. in Onet. I. 869, 12 to illustrate it. I am entirely 
 indebted to him, however, for the statement of the important 
 principle explained in § 74, 2. 
 
 It remains to state what new material the present work pro- 
 fesses to ofifer to scholars. The most Important and most 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 radical innovation upon the ordinary system will be found in 
 the classification of conditional sentences (§ 48), with ita devel- 
 opment in the rules that follow. I have explained the grouads 
 of this classification at some length in the Proceedings of the 
 American Academy, Vol. VI. p. 363, and will therefore merely 
 allude to them here. The great difficulty (or rather the im- 
 possibiUty) of defining the force of the Subjunctive in protasis 
 as distinguished from the Present Indicative, has arisen from 
 neglect of the distinction between particular and general suppo- 
 sitions. When this is recognized, the distinction between the 
 Subjunctive and the Present Indicative is seen to be entirely 
 one of time; whereas all the common distinctions based on 
 possibility, certainty, &c. will apply only to select examples, 
 which of course are easily found to illustrate them. In the 
 first edition, I could not persuade myself to abandon the old 
 doctrines so completely as to exclude the common distinction 
 between the Subjunctive and the Optative in protasis, — that 
 the former implies a " prospect of decision," while the latter 
 does not. Subsequent experience has convinced me that there 
 is no more distinction between lav tovto n-otj and e< tovto n-oioii] 
 than between the English if he shall do this and if he should 
 do this ; and I think every one must see that here there is no 
 distinction but that of greater or less vividness of expression. 
 The simple fact that both could be expressed by the Latin si 
 hocfaciat is a strong support of this view. 
 
 The principles of conditional sentences being first settled, I 
 have attempted to carry out the analogy between these and 
 conditional relative sentences more completely. It seems to 
 me that it is only by adopting the classification of conditional 
 sentences which I have given, that the true nature of the anal- 
 ogous relative sentences can be made clear. (See § 60, § 61, 
 § 62.) Upon a right classification of conditional sentences 
 depends also the right understanding of the forms used to ex- 
 press a wish (§ 82, § 83). 
 
 The frequent use of the Subjunctive with ha, Sjra>r, &c., 
 after past tenses, instead of the Optative, of which I had never 
 seen a satisfactory explanation, is here explained on the prin- 
 ciple of oratio obliqua. (See § 44, 2; § 77, 2.) The ron- 
 Btruction of the Infinitive with verbs like xp^v and ?8tt, forming 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 an apodosis, is explained in the present edition on a new prin. 
 ciple, which (it is hoped) will remove many of the difficulties 
 which the old explanation did not reach. (See § 49, 2, Note 3 
 and Remarks.) In the first edition, the usual distinction be- 
 tween the constructions that follow ou nfj was adopted with 
 hesitation, including Elmsley's punctuation, by which the sec- 
 ond person of the Future in prohibitions with ov iifj is made 
 interrogative. In this edition both constructions are explained 
 more satisfactorily upon the same principle. (See § 89, 1 and 2, 
 with Notes and Remarks.) It is hoped that the new statement 
 of the force of the Perfect Infinitive, in § 18, 3, (a) and (6) of 
 this edition, will meet the difficulties which that tense presents. 
 The statement in the former edition was very defective. 
 
 It may seem strange to some that no general definitions of 
 the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative are attempted in the 
 first chapter. I have rather taken warning from the numerous 
 unsuccessful attempts that have been made to include all the 
 uses of these moods in comprehensive definitions, and have 
 preferred merely to illustrate their various uses by simple ex- 
 amples at the outset, leaving the explanations to their propei 
 place in the book. For one, I am not ashamed to admit that I 
 cannot propose a definition comprehensive enough to include 
 all the examples in § 1, § 2, or § 3, which shall still be limited 
 enough to be called a definition. 
 
 ■ Besides the special changes already mentioned, the work has 
 been subjected to a thorough revision, so that in many parts 
 the new edition might claim to be an entirely new work.* 
 
 • Notwithstanding the changes in the second edition, very few alterations 
 have been made in numbering the paragraphs or notes. The following are 
 the only changes (except a few omissions) which can afieot references al- 
 ready made to the first edition: — 5 18, 8 is subdivided into (o) and (6) ; § 18, 
 8, Eem. takes the place of § 18, 4, Note; § 24, Notes 1 and 2 are rearranged; 
 § 37, Note 2 is omitted, and N. 3 is changed to N. 2; § 45, N. 2 is subdivided 
 into (a) and (6); in 5 49, 2, N. 3, the present divisions (c), (d), and (e) were 
 included in (6); § 64, 1 and 2 are rearranged; in § 92, 2, Note 1 is changed to 
 Eemarli; 4 109, N. 9 was included in N. 3. 
 
 The following additions have been made in the second edition: — § 49, 2, 
 N. 6 (6); § BO, 1, Kern. 2; § 52, 2, Kern.; 5 53, N. 4; \ 64, Rem. 2; § 65, 8, 
 N. 2; § 65, 4; § 69, 5; § 71, Eem. 2; § 89, 2, Eem. 1 and 2; § 92, 2, N. 1; 
 § 95, 3, Eem.; § 108, N. 4 (i); § 112, 1, Rem.: § 112, 2, Eem.; 5 113, Eem. 
 after N. IC. The following have been materially changed in subject or in 
 substance in the second edition:— § 25, 1, N. 6 (6); § 41, N. 4; § 43, Eem.j 
 Kemarks 1 and 2 after 4 49, 2, N. 3; ^ 82, Rem. 2; § 89, 2, Notes 1 and 2. 
 
VI ' PREFACE. 
 
 Especially, the collection of examples has been revised and 
 ■ greatly enlarged, with the object of illustrating every variety 
 of each construction from as wide a range of classic authors as 
 possible. An index to these examples (more than 2,300 m 
 number) is added to this edition. This index includes those 
 which are merely cited, as well as those actually quoted, many 
 of the former being quite as important as the latter. In the 
 new edition, the matter printed in the two larger types has 
 been reduced, and made as concise as was consistent with 
 accuracy, while that printed in the smallest type has been 
 greatly increased. It should be understood that only the first- 
 mentioned portion of the work is intended for use as a gram- 
 matical text-book, while the notes and remarks in the smallest 
 type are intended only for reference : with this view, the latter 
 are often extended to a greater length than would otherwise 
 be justifiable. 
 
 The Dramatists are cited by Dindorf's lines, except the 
 fragments, which follow the numbers in Nauck's edition ; 
 Plato, by the pages of Stephanus ; and Demosthenes, by 
 Beiske's pages and lines. In the Index to the Examples, 
 however, the sections of Bekker's German editions of Demos- 
 thenes have been added in each case, to facilitate reference. 
 Other citations will be easily understood. 
 
 Cambbidge, June, 1865. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS. 
 
 PAsa 
 § 1. The five Moods ... .... 1 
 
 §§ 2-4. Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative . . . 1, 2 
 §§5-7. Imperative, Infinitive, Participle, and Verbal in -rf or 2,3 
 
 CHAPTER n. 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 § 8, 1. The seven Tenses 8 
 
 2. Primary and Secondary Tenses . . . S 
 
 § 9. Relative and absolute Time 8 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 A. In the Indicative. 
 
 § 10, 1. Present Indicative 4 
 
 2. Historic Present 6 
 
 § 11. Imperfect 6 
 
 B. Present in the Dependent Moods. 
 
 Rem. — Distinction between Present and Aorist . . 8 
 
 § 12. Present Subjunctive 9 
 
 § 13, 1. Present Optative, not in indirect discourse . . 10 
 2. Present Optative in indirect discourse : — 
 
 (a.) Representing a Present Indicative . . . 11 
 
 (6.) Representing Pres. Subj. (in questions of doubt) 11 
 
 § 14. Present Imperative 12 
 
 § 15. Present Infinitive : — 
 
 1. In its ordinary use (indefinite in time) . . .12 
 
 2. In indirect discourse 13 
 
 3. As Lnperfpct Infinitive 15 
 
 § 1 6. Present Participle : — 
 
 1. As Present 16 
 
 2. As Imperfect 1' 
 
Vm CONTENTS. 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 A. In the Indicative. 
 
 § 17, 1 Perfect Indicative . 18 
 
 2. Pluperfect Indicative 18 
 
 N. 2. Compound forms (ei/ni and ^v with Peif. Part) 18 
 
 B. Perfect in the Dependent Moods. 
 §18. Relations of the Perfect to the Present .... 19 
 
 1. Perfect Subjunctive and Optative .... 20 
 
 2. Perfect Imperative 21 
 
 3. Perfect Infinitive . . .... 22, 23 
 
 4. Perfect Participle . . .... 23 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 A. In the Indicative. 
 
 § 19. Aorist Indicative 24 
 
 N. 2. Distinction between Aorist and Imperfect . . 24 
 
 B. Aorist in the Dependent Moods. 
 
 § 20. Aorist Subjunctive 26 
 
 N. 1. Aonst Subjunctive as Puture Perfect . . 26, 27 
 
 § 21, 1. Aorist Optative not in indirect discourse . . 28 
 2. Aorist Optative in indirect discourse: — 
 (a.) Representing an Aorist Indicative . . .89 
 
 lb.) Representing an interrogative Aor. Subj. . . 29 
 
 § 22. Aorist Imperative .30 
 
 § 23. Aorist Infinitive : — 
 
 1. In its ordinary use 30 
 
 2. In indirect discourse 32 
 
 N. 2. After verbs of hoping, promising, &c. . . 32 
 
 § 24. Aorist Participle 34 
 
 N. 1. With 'Kavddva, ^6av<a, &0. .... 34 
 N. 2. With TrepiEidoK, eTrelSov, &c 35 
 
 Future. 
 
 § 25, 1. Future Indicative .36 
 
 N. 5. Future with force of Imperative . . . .37 
 
 N. 6. Future denoting present intention . . . 87 
 
 2. Periphrastic Future (with ii£K\a) . . . .38 
 
 § 26. Future Optative S8 
 
 N. 1. After Siras and /ir) 89 
 
 § 27. Future Infinitive 41 
 
 N. 1. Distinction between Future and Present or Aorist 41 
 N. 2. Future used for Present or Aorist . . .41, 42 
 N. 3. Future after verbs of hoping, promising, &c. • . 43 
 
 § 28. Future Participle 43 
 
 § 29. Future Perfect 43 
 
CONTENTS. VS. 
 
 N. 3. Expressed by Perfect Participle and t<rofuu . 44 
 N. 6. In the dependent moods 44 
 
 Gnomic and Iterative Tenses. 
 
 § SO, 1. Gnomic Aoris"- and Perfect 45 
 
 N. 5. Gnomic Aorist in Infinitive and Participle . 46, 47 
 
 N. 6. Gnomic Perfect in Infinitive . . . .47 
 
 2. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with av . . . 47 
 
 Notes. — Iterative Aorist in -o-koi', -o-Ko/iT/K . . 47,48 
 
 Dependence of Moods and Tenses. 
 
 §31,1-2. General Rules 48 
 
 Distinction between Primary and Secondary Tenses : — 
 
 § 32. In the Indicative 49, 50 
 
 § 33. In the Subjunctive and Imperative .... 50 
 
 §34. In the Optative 50-58 
 
 § 35. In the Lmnitive and Participle 53, 54 
 
 CHAPTEE III. 
 
 THE PAETICLE 'AN. 
 
 §36,1-2. Two uses of &, • ^* 
 
 § 37, 1. 'Av not used with the Present and Perfect Indicative . 65 
 
 2. "Av with Future Indicative in early Poets . . 65 
 N. 1. In Attic Greek (rare) 56 
 
 3. 'Aw with Secondary Tenses of the Indicative . . 56 
 § 38, 1. 'Av with the Subjunctive in Protasis, &o. . . .66 
 
 2. 'Av with the Subjunctive in Apodosis (Epic) . . 57 
 
 § 39. 'Av with the Optative . _. 57 
 
 § 40. 'Av not used with the Imperative .... 57 
 § 41. 'Av with the Infinitive and Participle . . . 57-61 
 
 1. Present 68 
 
 2. Perfect 59 
 
 3. Aorist 59 
 
 4. Future 60 
 
 §42,1-4. Position and repetition of av . . • .61-64 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 USE OF THE MOODS. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 Final and Object Clauses after 'iva, 'Or, 'Oirur, 
 'Oippa, AND M^. 
 
 §43. Classification 65-67 
 
 N. 2. Negative Particle 6' 
 
X CONTENTS. 
 
 A. Pure Final Clauses. 
 J4i, 1. Subjunctive and Optative after ii/a, a>s, oB-oir, /i^, &c. 67 
 N. 1. Future Indicative after ottios, &c. • ' ci ,« 
 N. 2 and 3. 'Av in Final Clauses . . • l^ 
 
 2. Subjunctive after secondary tenses • , * ' '70 
 
 3, Secondary tenses of the Indicative after ira, &c. . 72 
 
 B. aauses wilh'Ona>s and'Oitat nfj after Verbs of Striving, &o. 
 
 § 45. Future Indicative, &c. after oiras • • • • '« ^^ 
 N. 2. Homeric construction after (l)pdCofuu, &c. • 76, 77 
 N. 7. Elliptical expressions . . • • 78, 79 
 N. 8 (and foot-note). Dawes's Canon on oTras, &c. 79, 80 
 
 C. Clauses with Mij after Verbs of Fearing, &c. 
 § 46. Subjunctive and Optative after ju^ . . . • 80 
 
 N. 1. Future Incucative after luj 82 
 
 N. 2. Elliptical expressions 8S 
 
 N. 5. Present and past tenses of the Indie, after ;iq 83-85 
 
 SECTION n. 
 CoNDiTiONAi, Sentences. 
 
 § 47, 1. Protasis and Apodosis explained . . . . 87 
 2. 'Kv or K€ in Protasis and Apodosjs . . . .87 
 3 (and Note). Negative particles 88 
 
 $48. Classification of Conditional Sentences . . . 88-92 
 
 I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences. 
 
 A. Present and Past Conditions. 
 
 49, 1. Simple Indicative in Protasis and Apodosis . . 92 
 N. 3. Future Indicative expressing joresenf intention 93 
 2. Secondary tenses of the Indie, (cond. not fulfilled) . 93 
 N. 2. Omission of &v in Apodosis . . . .96 
 
 N. 3. Verbs of necesstfy, &c. without ai», in Apod. 97-100 
 N. 6. Homeric Optative for Indicative . . . 101,102 
 
 B. Future Conditions. 
 
 § 50, 1. Subjunctive with iav in Protasis 102 
 
 N. 1. Future Indicative in Protasis . . . .103 
 
 N. 2. Homeric peculiarities 104 
 
 N. 3. El for iav with Subjunctive in Attic (rare) . 105 
 2. Optative in both Protasis and Apodosis . — 
 
 N. 1 . Omission of Sv in Apodosis 
 
 105 
 106 
 
 N. 2. 'Av with Optative in Protasis . . . .107 
 
 II. Present and Past General Suppositions. 
 
 t 51. Subiunotive and Optative in Protasis . . , 107 108 
 1?. 3. Indicative after ct TIC 109 
 
CONTENTS. 3d 
 
 Ellipsis and Substitution in Protasis or Apodosis. 
 § 52, 1. Protasis implied in another clause, or expressed in a 
 
 Participle or other word 110 
 
 N. 1 and 2. Ellipsis of Verb of the Protasis . 111,112 
 
 2. Protasis suppressed 112 
 
 N. Optative with aw like Imperat. or Put. Ind. . 113 
 
 §53. Apodosis expressed in Infinitive or Participle . .113 
 
 Notes. — Ellipsis of the Apodosis . . . 114-116 
 
 Mixed Constructions. — Irregularities. 
 §54,1-3. Protasis and Apodosis differing in forui . 116-119 
 §55,1. Two or more Protases with the same Apodosis . . 119 
 2. Apodosis in a dependent construction . . . 119 
 §56. E< after verbs expressing toonrfer, iWi^raa^ion, &o. . .120 
 § 57. Ae in Apodosis 121 
 
 SECTION ni. 
 
 Relative and Temporal Sentences. 
 
 § 58, 1. Relative and Temporal Words 121 
 
 2. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent . . . 121, 122 
 
 3. Negative particles .122 
 
 A. Relative with a Definite Antecedent. 
 § 59. Indicative after Relative with Definite Antecedent . 122 
 N. 1. Other constructions 123 
 
 B. Relative wiih an Indefinite Antecedent. 
 §60,1,2. Conditional Relative &xp\ame:di . . . 123-125 
 3. 'hv in Conditional Relative clauses . . . .125 
 § 61. Four forms of Conditional Relative clauses correspond- 
 ing to the four forms of ordinary protasis . 125-129 
 
 1. Simple Indicative (like § 49, 1) . . . . . 125 
 
 2. Secondary tenses of the Indicative (like § 49, 2) . 126 
 
 3. Subjunctive (like § 50, 1) 127 
 
 4. Optative (like § 50, 2) . . . ... 128 
 
 § 62. Conditional Relative clauses with general suppositions : — 
 
 Subjunctive and Optative (Cke § 51) . . .129 
 
 N. 1. Indicative in these sentences (after ooris) . 131 
 
 N. 3. Subjunctive in Homeric similes .... 132 
 
 § 63, 1. Relative without Sv, with the Subjunctive . . 133 
 
 2, 3, 4. Peculiarities in Cond. Relative clauses . 133 - 135 
 
 5. Parenthetical Relative clauses (o « jro/ ia-rlv) . 135 
 
 Assimilation in Conditional Relative Clauses. 
 § 64, 1. Assimilation after Subjunctive or Optative _ . . 135 
 2. Assimilation after secondary tenses of Indicative . 136 
 
 Relative Clauses expressing a Purpose or Result. 
 § 65, 1. Future Indicative after Relatives .... 137 
 
Xll CONTENTS 
 
 N. 2. Subjunctive and Optative in Homer • • *-'^ 
 
 N. 5. Relative clauses expressing a resuZ/ . • ' ' „ 
 
 2. Future Indicative after e<j) 4> ^'t'' ¥" • * ' 11^ 
 
 3. Indicative after (oorf ^^" 
 
 4. Causal Relative Sentences ^^^ 
 
 Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before 
 
 that. 
 
 A. 'Eas,'EtTT€,'Axpi, Mf'xpt, EtVoKf , 'O0pa, UntU. 
 
 § 66, 1. 'Emr, &c. with past tenses of Indicative . . • 142 
 
 2. 'Ecus Sv, &c. with Subj. 'East, &c. with Optative 142, 143 
 
 3. 'Eios, &c. with secondary tenses of Indicative . . 143 
 
 4. "Etar, &c. with Subj. and Opt. after general statements 144 
 
 B. npiv, Until, Before thai, 
 \ 67. Finite Moods and Infinitive after irplv .... 144 
 
 1. Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative after itpiv . 146 
 
 2. Infinitive after jrpiv (see § 106) 145 
 
 17. 3. Ilp\v rj, TTpoTcpov ij, npoaBfv tj . . . . 146 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 Indirect Discourse. 
 
 $ 68, 1. Direct and Indirect Quotations distinguished . . 147 
 
 2. Manner of introducing Indirect Quotations . . 147 
 
 3. Indirect Questions 147 
 
 General Principles. 
 
 § 69, 1. Principles of Indirect Quotations after on and at, 
 
 and of Indirect Questions 148 
 
 2. Secondary tenses of the Indicative .... 148 
 
 3. Infinitive and Participle 148 
 
 4. 'Ai/ in Indirect Discourse 149 
 
 5. Negative particles in Indirect Discourse . . . 149 
 
 Indirect Quotation of Simple Sentences. 
 
 § 70. Indicative and Optative after on or its, and in Indirect 
 Questions : — 
 
 1. Indicative after primary tenses 149 
 
 2. Optative or Indicative after secondary tenses . . 160 
 Rem. 1 and 2. Both Moods in the same quotation . 151, 162 
 N. 1. (a.) Imperfect and Pluperfect retained . . 152 
 
 (J.) Present Optative as Imperfect . . .153 
 
 N. 3. Independent Ojitative (often with yap) . . 154 
 
 § 71. Interrogative Subjunctive in Indirect Questions . 154, 155 
 
 §72. Indicative or Optative with OK in Indirect Discourse . 156 
 
 §73,1. Infinitive, with or without dw, in Indirect Discourse . 157 
 
 2. Participle, with or without av, in Indirect Discourse 1 59 
 
CONTENTS. Xili 
 
 Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences. 
 
 S 74, 1. Quotation of dependent clauses with a Subjunctive, or 
 
 a Present, Perfect, or Future Indicative . . 160 
 
 N. 1. Mixed constructions 162 
 
 2. Quotation of dependent clauses with Imperfect, Plu- 
 perfect, or Aorist Indicative . . . .164 
 § 75. Dependent clauses with secondary tenses of Indicative 165 
 § 76. Dependent clauses with Optative 165 
 
 Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Quotation. 
 
 § 77, 1. (a.) Clauses depending on an Infinitive after verbs of 
 commanding, &c. — (6.) Causal sentences stating a 
 cause assigned by others. — (c.) Clauses ' after el or 
 tav, in case that. — (rf.) Relative and temporal 
 clauses expressing a past intention. — (e.) Relative 
 sentences containing the thought of another . .166 
 2. Same principle applied to clauses after ira, on-mr, &c. 169 
 
 'Ojrmr and 'O in Indirect Quotations. 
 
 § 78, 1. 'OTTiBr for oTj or ffls. 2. Homeric o for ort . .170 
 
 Note. — 'O^owt/ca and owexa for on . . . 171 
 
 § 79. 'On before Direct Quotations 171 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 Causal Sentences. 
 
 § 80. Causal particles . . . . . . . .171 
 
 §81,1. Indicative in Causal sentences 171 
 
 2. Optative after secondary tenses, to express a cause 
 
 assigned by others . 1 72 
 
 jN. 1. Cause expressed by an Apodosis . . .173 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 Expression of a Wish. 
 
 Rem. — Two classes of Wishes . . . .173 
 
 §82. Optative in Wishes 173,174 
 
 §83,1. Secondary tenses of Indicative in Wishes . . 176 
 2. 'a^eXov with the Infinitive 176,177 
 
 Rem. — Greek and Latin expressions compared . 177 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 
 Impebative and Subjunctive in Commands, Exhor- 
 tations, AND Prohibitions. 
 
 § 84. Imperative 178 
 
 §85. First person of Subjunctive in exhortations . _ . ^ . 179 
 § 86. Pres. Imperat. or Aor. Subj. in prohibitions with /i^ . 180 
 
C0NTEHT8. 
 
 SECTION vni. 
 
 Subjunctive (like Fut. Ind.) m Indepeneent Sentences. 
 — Interrogative Subjunctive. — Ow nn with Subjunc- 
 tive AND Future Indicative. 
 
 § 87. Independent Subjunctive in Homer .... 181 
 Note. — With Sv, in apodosis . . • ^ • • 1^2 
 
 § 88. Interrogative Subjunctive (with or without fiovXti) . 182 
 
 § 89. Double Negative, oi ftfj: — 
 
 1. With Subj. (rarelj Fut. Ind.), as emphatic Future . 184 
 5. With Future Indicative in prohibitions . . • 185 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 g 90. Infinitive as a Verbal Noun 188 
 
 I 91. Infinitive as Subject 188 
 
 § 92. Infinitive as Object : — 
 
 1. Not in indirect discourse 189 
 
 2. In indirect discourse 192 
 
 N. 3. Infinitive after ^Relatives (by assimilation} . 193 
 
 § 93, 1 and 2. Infin. after Adjectives and Adverbs . . 193-195 
 § 94. Infinitive (with Article) after Prepositions . . . 197 
 § 95, 1. Infinitive as Genitive or Dative 197 
 
 2. Two constructions after verbs of hindrance, &c. . 198 
 N. 1. Negative particles. Double Negative, /tn oi . 200 
 
 3. Infinitive with t6 iu], after expressions implying jire- 
 
 vention, omission, or denial 201 
 
 § 96. Infinitive and its adjuncts preceded by to . . . 202 
 
 § 97. Infinitive expressing a purpose . . . . . 203 
 
 N. 4. Infin. after Comparative and ij, than , . 304 
 
 § 98, 1. Infinitive after &<m (result) 205 
 
 2. Infin. ailer more (condition or purpose) . . . 205 
 N. 1. 'Qs iar &(rre, with Infinitive .... 206 
 
 § 99. Infinitive after i^ a or i<l>' art 207 
 
 § 100. Absolute Infinitive' (generaily with at or otrov) . . 207 
 N. 1. 'OXiyov (8«i»), almost, littk sJiori of . . . 208 
 N. 2. 'Ekuv eti/at, to vvv tivat, &c. .... 208 
 
 §101. Infinitive used imperatively 208 
 
 I 102. Infinitive in wishes (like the Optative) . , . 209 
 
 §103. IxAnitive in laws, treaties, proclamations. Sec . . 209 
 § 104. Infinitive expressing surprise or indignation . . . 209 
 
 § 105. Infinitive in narration 210 
 
 I 106, Infinitive after Trpi'i; 210 211 
 
 Notes. — npiv ij, vporepov jf, npoaBev ij, wapos . 211, 212 
 Kem. — Tenses of the Infinitive 212 
 
CONTENTS. X7 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 §107. Three uses of the Participle 213 
 
 § 108, 1. Participle as Adjective 213 
 
 2. Participle (as Adjective) used substantively . . 213 
 § 109. Partic. defining the circumstances of an action : — 
 
 1-4. I'ime, meaiis, manner, caicse, Sco 216 
 
 5-7. Purpose, condition, opposition, &o 217 
 
 8. Attendant circumstances 218 
 
 Notes 1-5. Adverbs, &c. with Part, of § 109 . 218 - 221 
 
 N. 7. (a.) Partic. in Eel. or Interrog. sentences . 221 
 
 (6.) Ti itaBav ; Ti TraBav I wherefore? . . 221,222 
 
 g 110, 1-. Genitive Absolute 222 
 
 2. Accusative Absolute 224 
 
 § 111. Gren. or Accus. Absol. and ordinary Partic. combined 225 
 § 112. Participle with verbs (like Infinitive) : — 
 
 1. With verbs signifjang to begin, to cease, &c. . . 226 
 
 2. With diarEXeo), Xai/dava), Tvyp^avo), (^ddvo), &c. . . 227 
 § 113. Partic. in indirect discourse (alter verbs signifying to «ee, 
 
 to perceive, to know, &c.) 229 
 
 N. 1. Participle with brjKos (<jiavep6s) fifu . . . 830 
 K. 6. Participle with avvmSa and (rvyyiyvaa-Ka . .230 
 N. 10. 'Os with these Participles . . . 231, 232 
 
 CHAPTER Vn. 
 
 VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -Teas. 
 
 § 114. Two .constructions of the Verbal in -re'or: — 
 
 1. Personal construction 233 
 
 2. Impersonal construction .... 233, 234 
 
 Appendix I 235 
 
 Appendix n. 240 
 
 Index to Examples 243 
 
 English Index 257 
 
 Greez Index. 261 
 
CHAPTER I. 
 
 GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS. 
 
 § I . The Greek verb has five Moods, the Indicative, 
 Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive. The 
 first four, as opposed to the Infinitive, are called finite 
 moods. 
 
 § 3. The Indicative is used in simple, absolute as- 
 sertions; as ypacftei, he writes; eypa^ev, he wrote; ypayjrei, 
 he will write ; jeypatfyev, he has written. 
 
 The Indicative is used also to express various other 
 relations, ■which the following examples will illus- 
 trate : — 
 
 Eltovto oKrides eVri, xo'V*"! \f this is true, I rejoice. 'Eltypa-^fv, 
 ri\6ov av,ifhe had leritten, I should have come. Ei tovto notritrft, 
 Ka\S>s e|ei, if he shall do this, it will be well. ''EmiuXfirai Sircos tovto 
 yevrjiTeTai, he takes care that this shall happen. E'l6e fi,( eKTftvas, 
 i)S fi^TTOTE ToCro iiroirjaa, that thou hadst killed me, that I might 
 never have done this ! EMe tovto oKTjBts rjv, that this were true. 
 Ae'yfi as tovto oKjiBes co'Tiv, he says that this is true. Emev on roOro 
 Trpd^fi, he said that he would do this. 'EpcoTo. ri iypa\jraiiev, he 
 asks what we wrote. 
 
 These constructions will be explained in Chapter IV. They are 
 sufficient to show the impossibility of including all the uses of the 
 Indicative in one definition. Any definition which is to include 
 these must be comprehensive enough to include even the Imperfect 
 and Pluperfect Subjunctive in Latin ; for ei eypa^ev, rfKBov av is 
 equivalent to si scripsisset, venissem. It would be equally impossible 
 to give a single definition sufficiently precise to be of any use in 
 practice, including all the uses of the Subjunctive or Optative. 
 
 § 3. The various uses of the Subjunctive — in 
 clauses denoting a purpose or object, after iva, fir/, &c. ; 
 m conditional, relative, and temporal sentences ; and 
 
2 GENEEAL YJV.W OF THE MOODS. [§ "■ 
 
 m certain independent sentences — may be seen by the 
 
 following examples : — 
 
 'EpxfTM Iva TovTo 'is 71, he is coming that he may see this. *o0«Tat 
 nfi TovTo yevijTui., he fears lest this may happen. 'Eav tovto irouw 
 ^oiXrirai, Swijo-fTai, if he shaU wish to do this, he wiU be able. 
 'O Ti hv Tvoiciv p o u X i; T a t Sui/ijo-f rat, whatever he shall wish to do he will 
 be able (to do). 'Edu n irou'iv ^oiXriTai, tovto icoici, if he (ever) 
 wishes to do anything, he (always) does it. "O ti Sk ■noieiv PovXr/Tai 
 noiei, whatever he vnshes (at any time) to do he (always) does. 'Orav 
 toSto TToielv /SouXjjT-at, Svvri<TtTai., when he shall wish to do this, he 
 will be able. 'Otov noifiv n ^ouXijtoi, Troiel, whenever he wishes to 
 do anything, he (always) does it. 'liojiev, let its go. M^ BavfiaaijTe, 
 do not wonder. Oi /iij tovto yivrjrai, this will (surely) not happen. 
 Ti e t TT <B ; what shall I say f 
 
 §4. The Yarious uses of the Optative — in clauses 
 denoting a purpose or object after iva, fjL% &c. ; in con- 
 ditional, relative, and temporal sentences ; in indirect 
 quotations and questions ; and in independent sentences 
 (in apodosis with av, or in expressions of a wish) — 
 may be seen by the following examples : — 
 
 'HXflfi' tva TOVTO I Sot, he came that he might .lee this. 'Ei^o^hto /tij 
 tovto ye vol to, he feared lest this might happen. Ei tovto noiiiv 
 ^ouXoiro, bvvaiT av, if he should ivish to do this, he wouldbe able. 
 'O T( noieiv /SouXoiro bvvaiT av, whatever he should wish to do, he 
 would be able (to do). Et n iroLciv ^ovXoito, tovt eTroi'ct, if he 
 (ever) wished to do anything, he (always) did it. *0 ti Trotftv 
 jSoiiXotTo firoUi, whatever he wished (at anytime) to do he (always) 
 did. "Ore ToiiTo-noieiv fiov\oiTO, Sivair av, whenever he shonii 
 wish to do this, he would be able. 'Ore iroiftv ti /SovXoiro, iiroUi, 
 whenever he wished to do anylhing,he (always) did it. Eiir€v ort roiiro 
 TTOioir], he said that he was doing this. EiTTt k oti Touro iroiijafitv, 
 he said that he had done this. Elntv oti tovto Troiijc-ot, he said that 
 he would do thii. 'tipaTav ti tt o t o i t; (irotfiaetev ot iioiriaoi), they 
 asked what he was doing (had done, or would do) . 
 
 AvvaiT liv TOVTO noieiv, he would be able to do this. Ei6e nfj Tavra 
 naa-voiev, that they may not suffer these things! 'attoXoito, 
 may he perish I M^ tovto yevoiTO, may this not happen ! 
 
 Note. For a discussion of the relation of the Optative to the 
 Subjunctive, see Appendix. 
 
 S 5. The Imperative is used to express a command, 
 exhortation, entreaty, or prohibition. 
 
 § 6. The tifinitive expresses the simple idea of the 
 
S 9-J USE OF THE TENSES. 3 
 
 verb without restriction of person or number, and may 
 be considered as a verbal noun with many attributes of 
 a verb. 
 
 § 7. To the Moods may be added the Participle, 
 and the Verbal in ^ea or -riov. Both are verbal ad- 
 jectives. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES. 
 
 § 8. 1. There are seven Tenses, — the Present, Im- 
 perfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, Aorist, Future, and Future 
 Perfect. The Imperfect and Pluperfect occur only in 
 the Indicative ; the Futures are wanting in the Sub- 
 junctive and Imperative. 
 
 2. These tenses are divided into primary/ and second- 
 ary ; the primary tenses being those which refer to pres- 
 ent or future time, and the secondary being those which 
 refer to past time. 
 
 The primary tenses of the Indicative are the Present, 
 Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect. The secondary 
 tenses are the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. 
 
 Note. This distinction will be more fully explained at the end 
 of this chapter, §§ 31-35. 
 
 § 9. In speaking of the time denoted by any verb, Tpe must 
 distinguish between time which is present, past, or future with 
 reference to the time of the speaker or writer (that is, time 
 absolutely present, &c.), and time which is present, past, or 
 future with reference to the time of some other verb with which 
 the verb in question is connected (that is, time relatively pres- 
 ent, &c.). Thus, when we say toCto aKrjSis ia-nv, this is true, 
 iarir denotes time present with reference to the time of speak- 
 
USE OF THE TEN8KS. 
 
 [§9. 
 
 ing : but when we say IXe^f toCt-o a\jj0h eivai, or 'U^ev on tovto 
 a\ri6es eVni/ (or f'r,), he Said that this was true (i. e. he said 
 "this is true "), we use the Present tense ; but this tense here 
 denotes time present with reference to the time of the leading 
 verb, i'Xf^f, or time absolutely past and only relatively present. 
 The same distinction is seen between the Future in toCto 
 yfnijo-erat, this wiU happen, and in IXfle tovto ■Yfvr)aea6ai or on 
 ytvri<rcTai. (ycvrja-oiTo), he said that this would happen ; where the 
 Future in the first case denotes time absolutely future, in the 
 other cases time only relatively future, which may even be 
 absolutely past. Again, in toSto eyevero, this happened, the 
 Aorist is absolutely past ; but in eXt^t tovto yevia-Bai, or iXc^ev 
 on TOVTO cyevcTo (or yivoiTo'), he Said that this had happened, it 
 denotes time past with reference to the time of ?Xf|ei/, which 
 makes it doubly past. 
 
 It is to be noticed as a special distinction between the Greek 
 and English idioms, that the Greek oftener uses its tenses to 
 denote merely relative time. Thus, in the examples given 
 above, we translate the Greek Presents ehai and eo-ri after 
 %\e^e by our Imperfect was ; the Futures yevfia-fa-Sai and yexij- 
 o-fTOt by would happen ; and the Aorists yevfo-Bai and iyivcTo by 
 had happened. This principle is especially observed in the 
 Indicative, Optative, and Infinitive in indirect quotations ; in 
 final and object clauses after Iva, mras, &c. ; and usually in the 
 Participle. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 A. In the Indicative. 
 
 § 10. 1. The Present Indicative represents an action 
 as going on now ; as ypd^co, I write, or lam writing. 
 
 Remark. A single important exception occure when the Present 
 Indicative in indirect discoui-se denotes time present relatively to 
 the leading verb. See above, § 9 ; and § 70, 2. 
 
 Note 1. As the limits of such an action on either side of 
 the present moment are not defined, the Present may express 
 a eiutomary or repeated action, or a general truth. E. g. 
 
S 10 1.] PEESENT INDICATIVE. 5 
 
 nXoioK fts A^Xoji 'Adrivaloi n e iiirov a- iv , the A thenians send a sMp 
 to Delos (every year). Plat. Phaed. 58 A. TUrti roi Kopos v^piv, 
 oT-av KQKip oX0of cTnjrai, satiety begets insolence, whenever prospaity 
 ^follows the wicked. Theogn. 153. 'Ev xpova iiroipQ Ivei to rapfios 
 avOpamoia-tv. Aesch. Agam. 857. 
 
 Note 2. The Present denotes merely the contirmance of 
 an action, without reference to its completion : sometimes, how- 
 ever, it is directly implied by the context that the action is not 
 to be completed, so that the Present denotes an attempted ac- 
 tion. Especially, SiSm/ij, in the sense I offer, and velBa, I try 
 to persuade, are used in this sense. E. g. 
 
 NOk S' afxa T avTiKa ttoXXo Si Sol, he offers many things. H. IX, 
 519. lIel6ov<Ti ifids hvavrla Koi rots vojiols kqi t^ hiKaia \jrri^itra- 
 a-dai, they are trying to persuade you to vote contrary both to the laws 
 and to justice. Isae. de Cleon. Hered. § 26. 
 
 This signification is much more common in the Imperfect. See 
 § 11, N. 2, and the examples. 
 
 Note 3. The Present is often used with expressions denot- 
 ing past time, especially ttoKm, in the sense of a Perfect and 
 Present combined. E. g. 
 
 KetTOc Ixvcvm jroXai, I have been tracking him a long time (and 
 still continue it). Soph. Aj. 20. Oi iraKai aai Xe'y co on ravrov <i>r]ia 
 flvai ; i. e. have I not long ago told you, (and do I not stilt repeat,) 
 that I call it the same thing f Plat. Gorg. 489 C. So DoXui' xP"""" 
 
 TOVTO IT Q la. 
 
 So in Latin, Jam dudum loquor. 
 
 Note 4. The Presents ij/cu, / am come, and o'xoiuu, I am 
 gone, are used in the sense of the Perfect. An approach to 
 the signification of the Perfect is sometimes found in such 
 Presents as (pevya, in the sense F am banished, &\c<rKOfiat, lam 
 captured, pi<da and xparia, lam victorious, ^TTdo/ioi, lam con- 
 quered, dSiKea, I have been unjust (lam SSikos). So t/cm and 
 Udvo) in Homer, with oXXv/iai and similar verbs and sometimes 
 rUra in the Tragedians. E. g. 
 
 ee/JioTo/cXijr rJKO) irapa (re, I, Themistocles, am come to thee. Thuc. 
 I, 137. Otx^rai els SXa Slav, he is gone to the divine sea H. XV, 
 223. 'IXi'ou &Xi<rKoij.evov, Ilium having been captured. Thuc. VI, 2, 
 So IIdt. I, 85. El Tidvra ravra iXvfiaiveTO rois oKois, eas aveTpeijre, 
 tI Arjiioa^devris ddiKfi; Dem. Cor. 327, 1. nipyav oWv/ttvaiv iv'i 
 vaviTiv e/Sai/, / embarked after the towers had been destroyed. EiJR. Iph. 
 T. 1108. So dvoiyopivris dvptjs, Hdt. I, 9 °H8« ri'icTf* ae, ihil 
 teaman is iky mother. Eur. Ion. 1560. 
 
6 trSE OF THE TENSES. [§ l**) 1 
 
 Note 5. The Greek, like other languages, often allows the 
 use of the Present of such verbs as I hear, I ham, I say, ezen 
 when their action is strictly finished before the moment at 
 which they are used. E. g. 
 
 OJ SiMAtOTOt (rratndCoviTiv, a>9 wvveav6iie6a,the Sicilian are at 
 discord, as we learn. Thuc. VI, 16. 'Etti TrdXfis, ins eya> d/cog 
 alaBdvo/iai, ^XXo/xeo livai ^leyaXas. ThuC. VI, 20. 
 
 Note 6. The Present eliu, I am going, through all its 
 moods, is used like a Future. Its compounds are sometimes 
 used in the same sense. (The Poets, especially Homer, some- 
 times use ti/u as a Present.) E. g. 
 
 Sfu varcaas c i /*' ijro yaiav, I shall go. II. XVIU, 333. E i /t i vakat 
 fTT cKciva, I shaU recur to that. Plat. Phaed. 100 B. 'AXX' cicrci^tt, 
 trov 8' oi (ppovTtS). Arist. Nub. 125. *Q (j>i\', tyi) fuv aire (fit, avas 
 Kal Kfiva <j)v\d^<ov. Od. XVII, 593. 
 
 (As Present.) Olos 8* dor^p eio-i /icr aarpdai, wKrbt dftoXya, 
 as a star moves, &c. IL XXn, 317. 
 
 Note 7. In animated language the Present often refers to 
 the future, to express likelihood, intention, or danger. E. g. 
 
 yievofiep ems &v cKaaroi Kara noKeis \i](j>dS>iiev ; shall we waitt 
 Thuc. VL 77. Ei St cprjinv ovTos, dfi^aTw. xdyoi Kara/Sai'voi, and 
 I will take any seat. Dem. F. L. 351, 4. Sir il 6 ipxiiuvot, 5 ertpov 
 Trpoo-doK&iicvi art thou he thai should come, or do we look for 
 another f Matth. Evang. XI, 3. 'An-oXXvuat, / shall perish. 
 (See§17, N. 6.) 
 
 2. The Present is often used in narration for tbe 
 Aorist, to give a more lively statement of a past event. 
 This is called the Historic Present. E. g. 
 
 BovXqv ittiTe^varai aims jiri SKta-dcUv'ABTjvaiot, he contrives a 
 plan to prevent the Athenians from collecting. Hdt. I, 63. KeXcvci 
 trep.'^at &v8pas ' .... diroiTTeWovffiv ovv, Koi ir^pX avTwv 6 
 BriiiujroKKfjs Kpv(pa7rfH'jrei. Thuc. I, 91. Aapciou Kot Ilapvo-dridot 
 TraiSfs yiyvovTai Svo. Xen. An. I, 1, 1. 
 
 Note. The Historic Present is not found in Homer. 
 
 §11. The Imperfect represents an action as going 
 on in past time ; as eypa^ov, I was writing. 
 
 Note I. The Imperfect is thus a Present transferred to 
 the past, and it retains all the peculiarities of the Present 
 
§ 11.] IMPERFECT. 7 
 
 whicli are not inconsistent with the change to past time. Thna 
 the Imperfect denotes customary or repeated action, as opposed 
 to the Aorist, which denotes the simple occurrence of an action. 
 (See § 19, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 EttI KeK/)07ror f) KxriKij Kara TrSKeis mxeiTO, /cot oi ^vvrjea-av 
 ^ovK€v(r6fi€vot, aXV avroi eKatrrot eiroXirevovTO Kal e/SouXfu- 
 ovro. EtteiS^ Se Qrja-eiis e)3ao"tXcu(7ci', es ttjv vvv iroXtv ovtrav 
 ^vvaKia-e jravras. Thuc. II, 15. (Here the Imperfects refer to 
 the state of the country or the customs, the Aorists to single actions ; 
 f^aa-iXfva-e, became king, ^vvcpKure, collected into one state.) 
 
 Note 2. The Imperfect, like the Present (§ 10, N. 2), 
 sometimes denotes attempted action, heing in this case strictly 
 an Imperfect tense. So especially eSidow and eirtiSov. E. g. 
 
 *iX»7r7ros 'AXovvrjo-ov eblSov, Philip offered Halonnesus (ht. tried 
 to. give it). Aesch. Cor. § 83. "Ekgo-tos eireiBev avrov viroa-TTJvai 
 rriv apxriv, each one tried to persuade him to undertake the command. 
 XeN. An. VI, 1, 19. Kvfia ioraT dcipofifvov, Kara 8' spf e ni/Xeioii/a, 
 and was about to overpower the son ofPeteus. H. XXI, 327. "E/oii- 
 itBovto nap' ovk tKbidovros rijv avX^f, he tried to hire the yard of one 
 who refused to let it. Hdt. I, 68. Ile'p.\jravT€s es SdpSir xpvabv 
 aveovTo, they wanted to buy gold. Hdt. 1,69. ''E,Tie6vp,ritTf rrfs 
 T(KavlhoSf Koi avrriv npotreK&atv aveerOf he tried to buy it. Hdt. HI, 
 139, A eirpdo-a-ero ovk ey€vero, what was attempted did not 
 happen. Thuc. VI, 74. So irpocreTiSci, she wanted to add. Aeist. 
 Nub. 63. 
 
 Note 3. When the Present has the force of the Perfect 
 (§ 10, 1, N. 4), the Imperfect has regularly the force of a Plu- 
 perfect. (See § 17, N. 3). E. g. 
 
 'O ox\os KOTO diav r/Kev, the crowd were come to look on. Thuc 
 VI, 31. 'Esrei mx^o vi;l JlvXovSe, after thou wast gone by ship to 
 Pylos. Od. XVI," 24. 
 
 Note 4. The Imperfect sometimes denotes likelihood, in- 
 tention, or danger in past time. (See § 10, 1, N. 7.) E. g. 
 
 'lErreiSri ra ifrevSea-dai. ajraiWvTO, when he was on the point of 
 ruin through hit deceit. Antiphon. de Caed. Herod. § 37. Kai toljl 
 f6vr)aKf TCKv, ancoWiprfv 8' iym, and my children were about to 
 die, and I was about to perish. EuR. Here. F. 538. 
 
 Note 5. The Imperfect is sometimes found in simple narration, 
 where the Aorist would be expected, especially in Homer. The 
 meaning of the verb often makes it indifferent which of the two is 
 used. Thus ^Ivov and j35 are used without any perceptible differ- 
 ence in II. I, 437, 439; so ^aKKero and /SaXero, II, 43, 45; 0!JKev 
 and Ti6ei, XXIII, 653, 656 ; 8S/cf and SiSov, VII, 303, 305 ; fXmfv and 
 \emc, n, 106, 107; compare also /lia-rvWoit and ajmjo-ai', 1, 465, 466. 
 
8 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ H. 
 
 Herodotus and Thucydides use eXcyov and cKeKevov as Aorists. 
 Compare eXfyoi/, Thuc- I, 72, with tlirov and fXc|f, I, 79. 
 
 Note 6. The Imperfect sometimes expresses a ./^^ which ia 
 either the result of a previous discussion, or one that is_ just reec^- 
 nized as a fact by the speaker or writer, having previously besn 
 denied, overlooked, or misunderstood. In the latter ease, the 
 particle apa is often joined to the verb. E. g. 
 
 'O TTOiroi, oix apa ndvra vo^/ioves ouSe SUaioi^a-av iairjKCDU ijyv- 
 ropes rjSe ptSovres, i. e. thej/ are not, as I once imagined. Od. XIII, 
 209. OvK Spa povvov ej) v ipihav yevos, dXX' eVi yalav clai dva, there 
 is not after all merely one race of discords, hut there are two on earth. 
 Hes. Op. 1. "OS' §v apa 6 ^vWa^atv pf, tUs is then the one who 
 seized me. Soph. Phil. 978. Ou av povos ap' ^ad' etto^; are 
 you not then the only epops (as J thought) f Akist. Av. 280. 'Hv ^ 
 povaiKT] avTi<TTpocf)OS Trjs yvpvatTTiKrjs, el pep,vrf(Tai, music then, (as we 
 proved) corresponds to gymnastics. Plat. Rep. VII, 522 A. Ai- 
 a<fi6epovpev ineivo, o ra pev hiKaia /ScXtiok iylyvero, ra 8e aSiKa 
 airwWvTo, we shall destroy that which (as we proved) becomes better 
 by justice and is ruined by injustice. Plat. Crit. 4 7 D. 'Ap' oii robt 
 rjv TO Sevbpov, icf)' oirep ^yef rjpas ; is not this after all the tree to 
 which you were bringing us? Plat. Phaedr. 230 A. 
 
 Note 7. The Greek sometimes uses an idiom like the Encjlish 
 he was the one who did it for he is the one who did it ; as r/v 6 ttjv 
 yvMprjv ravTqv emav Heio'avSpos. TlIUC. VIII, 68 ; ris r/v 6 fioridrjaas 
 Tois Bv^avTWLs Koi erdxras airovs; Dem. Cor. 255, 2. (See Note 6.) 
 
 B. The Present in the Dependent Moods. 
 
 Remark. The distinction of time which marks the Present 
 and Aorist in the Indicative is retained in the Optative and 
 Infinitive of indirect discourse, and usually in the Participles. 
 
 But in all other constructions, this distinction of time dis- 
 appears in the dependent moods, and the Present and Aoiist 
 differ only in this, that the Present denotes a continued or 
 repeated action, while the Aorist denotes the simple occurrence 
 of an action, the time being determined by the construction. 
 In these cases the Present and Aorist are the tenses chiefly 
 used ; the Perfect is seldom required (§ 18, 1, N.), and the 
 Future is exceptional (§ 27, Notes). It must be remembered 
 that the Greek distinction between the Present and Aorist in 
 the Subjunctive and Optative is one which the Latin could not 
 express ; the Present, for example, being the only form found 
 in the Latin Subjunctive to express a condition which the 
 Greek can express by the Present or Aorist Optative, and some- 
 times by the Present or Aorist Subjunctive, each with some 
 
§ 12.] PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 9 
 
 peculiar meaning. Thus d tovto irotolr,, if he should do this 
 {nabitually), « Trotijo-eie, (simply) if he should do this, and 
 somefimes eav tovto iroifi (or iroirjaji), if he {ever) does this, 
 may each be translated by si hoc faciat. 
 
 This distinction, although in general strictly observed, was 
 sometimes neglected even by the best authors : we occasionally 
 find, for example, the Present Subjunctive where the Aorist 
 would have expressed the idea more exactly, and vice versa. 
 In other examples the two seem to be used in nearly the same 
 sense. (See Xen. Cyr. V, 5, 13.) These are to be considered 
 merely as exceptions ; when, however, the Aorist is wanting, 
 OS in «/ii, the Present regularly takes the place of both. 
 
 § 19. The Present Subjunctive denotes a continued 
 or repeated action, tlie time of which is determined as 
 follows : — 
 
 (a.) In clauses denoting a purpose after 'Iva, ottw^, 
 &c., or the object o{ fear after /j-v, it refers to time fvr 
 ture relatively to that of the leading verb. 
 
 (6.) In conditional sentences, — in ordinary protasis 
 (§ 50, 1), the Subjunctive refers simply to the future ; 
 if the supposition is general (depending on a verb of 
 'present time which expresses a repeated action or a 
 general truth), the Subjunctive is indefinite in its time, 
 but is expressed in English by the Present. This ap- 
 plies also to all conditional relative and temporal sen- 
 tences. 
 
 (c.) In Independent sentences (in exhortations, pro- 
 hibitions, questions of doubt, &c.) the Subjunctive 
 refers to the future. E. g. 
 
 Ca.) AoKei \ioi KaraKava-ai ray dfia^as, iva fir) to. ^(vyrj rjfiav arpa- 
 TTjyij, aWa nopevmneda OTrg &v rj arpaTia avpn^iprj, it seems 
 good to me to burn the wagons, that our leasts of burden may not be 
 iur generals, and that we may go on whithersoever it may be best for 
 the army. Xen. An. HI, 2, 27. Kal yap ^aaiKeiis alpelrai, ovx Iva 
 iavTov Ka\S>s fTTt/ieX^rai, dXX' Iva Kal oi iXofievoi Si' airov ev 
 trpdrrcaa-i. Xen. Mem. HI, 2, 3. 
 
 (6.) *Av 8e TK avQuTTTjTai, weipaao/ieSa x"poticr^m, but if any 
 eae shall stand opposed to us. we will try to subdue him. Xen An 
 1* 
 
10 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 12. 
 
 Vn, 3, 11. K*|/ wSXe/ios jj, cas hv tV aWov ? ;[<a;iei' orrpanvtaeai, 
 crov re Koi t&v <rS>v atf>e^6iif6a, and if there shall be war, so long as we 
 shall be able, &c. Id. Hell. IV, 1, 38. 'AXX' ^ hv yiyvi>>TKa> fie\Ti- 
 OTO ipa, but I will speak as I shall think best. Thuc. VI, 9. ^ OSr &v 
 SovXi; irotfia-aaSai ^iKovs, ayadov Tt \eye jrfpi aiirav npbs Tovs mray 
 yeWovras, whomsoever you shall wish, &c. Isoc. Demon, p. 9 C. § 33. 
 Airas Xoyor, av airfj to npaypara, iidraiSv Tt <J3aip€Tai Koi Ktvoy, all 
 speech, if (wherever) dUeds are wanting, appears vain and useless. Desi. 
 01. n, 21, 20. Ivp.paxfiv rou'roiv eOeXova-tv diravres, our &v opSxri 
 irapco-K€va<rpevovs, all are willing to be allied to those whom they see 
 prepared. Id. Phil. I, 42, 1. 
 
 (c.) n.fi6mp,eda Trdvres' (jyevya/iev triiv iniva\ (J>i\tjv is warpida 
 ydiav, let us all be persuaded ; let us fly, &c. H. 11, 139. T/ ^S ; ri 
 8 pi); what shall I sayf what shall I dof Has ovv irepi rovrav 
 nota/iev; how then shall we act about thist Fl,AT. Fhileb. 63 A. 
 
 See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 
 
 § 13. 1. The Present Optative, when it is not in 
 indirect discourse, denotes a continued or repeated ac- 
 tion, the time of which is determined as follows : — 
 
 (a.) In clauses denoting a purpose after 'iva, oiras^, 
 Ac, or the object oi fear after A"7, it refers to time fu- 
 ture relatively to that of the leading verb. 
 
 (ft.) In conditional sentences, — in ordinary protasis 
 (§ 50, 2), the Optative refers to the future (only more 
 vaguely than the Subjunctive) ; if the supposition is 
 general (depending on a verb of past time which ex- 
 presses a repeated action or general truth), the Optative 
 refers to indefinite past time. This applies also to all 
 conditional relative and temporal sentences. 
 
 (c.) In independent sentences (that is, in expressions 
 of a wish, and in Apodosis with av) the Optative refers 
 to the future. E. g. 
 
 (a.) TovTov iiredipti, Iva ev npaTTot, he desired this in order that 
 he might be in prosperity. 'Ei^o|3«™ pi, toZto jroiolev, he feared lest 
 they should do this (habiluaUy). ArjXos ?v im6xjp.S,v Spxftv, 5»ro>r TrXrio. 
 Aap^ivot, emBvpav^ Se TipaaSai, Iva TrXei'o) K(pbaivoi- (btKos Tt 
 f^oiS\fTo eivai To'ts piyurra hvvap4voK, Iva abiKav pfi SiSuin SUnv. 
 Xen. An. n, G, 21. (Here the Aorist Optative would have re- 
 ferred to single ads of receiving, getting gain, and suffering punish- 
 ment, while the present refers to a succession of cases, and to a whole 
 course of conduot.) 
 
§ 13, 2.J PRESENT OPTATIVE. 11 
 
 (6.) Ou yap hv eiraivoiri /u, cJ ef cXauvot/ut rois tvepyeras, 
 for he tvould not praise me, if I should banish my benefactors. Xen. 
 An. VII, 7, 11. Etijs (jtoprirbs ovk hv, el irpaa-crois KoKas, you would 
 not be endurable, if you should be in prosperity (at any time). Aesch. 
 Prom. 979. Hois yap av tis, n ye /xij eiria-TaiTo, ravTa a-o(f>bs cti^; 
 for how could any one be wise in that which he did not understand f 
 (i. e. ei Tii'o iifi imaraiTo.) Xen. Mem. IV, 6, 7. 'AXX' et n fiif 
 ^ipoifiev, arpwev (f)epetv, but if we neglected to bring anything, he 
 always exhorted us to bring it. EuK. Ale. 755. Ouk ajreXoVero ?rt 
 avTov, el p,r) n dvayKalov eijj, he never left him, unless there was some 
 necessity for it. Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 40. 'Oitots lEvayopav 6paev, 
 c^ajSoCvro, whenever they saw Evagoras, they were afraid. Iboc. Evag. 
 193 D. § 24. 
 
 (c.) EWe roCro e'lj (utinam sit), O that this may be. EMe ii^ 
 ravra 7rdo-x,oiev, may they not suffer these things (habit tally). But 
 eWe p.^ jrdBoiev, may tn.'y not suffer (in a single case). Sue examples 
 of Apodosis with av above, under (6). 
 
 See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 
 
 2. In indirect quotations and questions, each tense 
 of the Optative denotes the same time, relatively to the 
 leading verb, which the tense (of any mood) whicli it 
 represents denoted in the direct discourse. (See § 69, 1.) 
 
 (a.) If tlierefore the Present Optative represents a 
 Present Indicative of the direct discourse, it denotes a 
 continued or repeated action, co'ntemporary witli that of 
 the leading verb (that is, relatively present). E. g. 
 
 JlepiKKrfV irpoTjyopeve, on 'Apx^^afios oi ^evos eirj, Pericles an- 
 nounced that Archidamus was his friend (i. e. he said ^evos /iot eariv). 
 ThuC. II, 13. 'Eymao-oK on Kevbs 6 (j)ofios e'irj, they learned that their 
 fear was groundless (i. e. they learned xeras ianv). Xen. An. II, 2, 
 21. ''EiruvBavcTo el oIkoIto i) x^P^i ^* asked whether the country wcut 
 inhabited (i. e. he asked the question, Is the country inhabited f). Xen. 
 Cyr. IV, i, 4. 
 
 (5.) But if it represents a Present Subjunctive of the 
 direct discourse, it denotes a continued or repeated 
 action, which is fuiure with reference to the leading 
 verb. B. g. 
 
 KX/ap;^as e/SowXevero, el iTep,rroiev nvas rj wavres to lev, Clear- 
 chus was deliberating whether they should send a few, or should all 
 go. Xen. An. I. 10, 5. (The question was, ire/iTrta/ucv nvas ij 
 navres t<a/iep; shall we send a few, or shall we all go f See § 88.) 
 
 Remark. Examples of the Present Optativi representing the 
 
12 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 13, 2. 
 
 Present Irdicative or Subjunctive in a dependent clause of the 
 direct disco irse, to which the same principles apply, may be found 
 under § 74, 1. 
 
 Note 1. It will be seen, by a comparison of the examples 
 under (a) and (J), that an ambiguity may sometimes arise from 
 uncertainty whether the Optative stands for the Present In- 
 dicative or for the Present Subjunctive in a qwstion of doubt 
 (§ 88). Thus iiyvoovv o T« TToioKK might mean they knew not 
 what they were doing (the Optative representing W iroiovfiev ; 
 what are we doing ?) or they knew not what to do (the Optative 
 representing ri iroiafKv ; what shall we do?). The context 
 must decide in each case. See § 71. 
 
 Note 2. In the few instances in which the Present Optative in 
 indirect quotations represents the Imperfect of the direct discourse, 
 it of course denotes time past relatively to the leading verb. See 
 § 70, 2, N. 1 (6). 
 
 § 14. The Present Imperatiye refers to a continued 
 or repeated action in future time ; as ^evye, begone; 
 ^aipovTcov, let them rejoice; fJ-rj vo/il^ere, do not believe. 
 
 § 15. The Present Infinitive has three distinct 
 uses : — 
 
 1. First, in its ordinary use (either with or without 
 the article), wlienever it is not in indirect discourse, it 
 denotes a continued or repeated action without regard to 
 time, unless its time is specially defined by the context. 
 E.g. 
 
 "Effort jiiveiv, it is possible to remain. 'E^eorai tovto Troifiv, it will 
 he possible to do this. Aeo/iai ifimv fiiveiv, I beg you to remain, Tt 
 TO Koikvov er* avrov ea-rat jSaSi'^etv ottoi jSouXerai, what will there be 
 to prevent him from going whither he pleases? Dem. 01. I, 12, 22. 
 'ExeXeuo-a avrov tovto ttoicIv,-! commanded him to do this. 'E|3ou- 
 Xei-o a-oif>6s f IV a I, he wished to be wise. AeiKoj- iari 'Keyetvyheis skilled 
 in spedcing. "Qpa I3a8i^eiv, it is time to be goi-^g. Ilav noiova-iv, 
 ware SiKiji' firi SiSovai, they do everything, so as to avoid bein^ 
 punished. Plat. (^org. 479 C. To ftiv ovv eVixifiSv Jo-mr <^ij(rai m 
 &v pq^iQV etvai, to S' o Tt 6f I it pamiv d7ro<j>aiv€(r6at, tout elvat 
 av/i^oiXov, some one may say that finding fault is easy, but that 
 showing what ought to be done is the duty of an adviser. Dem. 01. I, 
 13, 27. (Heije imniMV, an-o^aii/ecrflat, and rrpdrTetv belong under 
 this rule; efixu in both cases belongs under § 15, 2.) ()u irXeo- 
 
§ 15, 2.] PRESENT INFINITIVE. 13 
 
 Vf^las ev€Kfv TavT eirpa^fv, dWa ra SiKaiortpa rotis Brj^aiovs 5 v/iat 
 a^iovv, he did this not from love of gain, but because of the Thebans 
 making juster demands than you. Dem. Phil. 11, 69, 6. 'Eretxia-dri 
 de ^AToKdvrrj vrjaos^ tou fifj \rj(rTas KaKovpyf'iv ttiv 'Ev(3oiaVj in order to 
 prevent pirates from ravaging Euboea. Thug. II, 32. 
 
 Remark. The Infinitive in this its ordinary use has usually no 
 more reference to time than any verbal noun, and the distinction of 
 tense therefore disappears, the Present diflfering from the Aotist 
 only by expressing a continued or repealed action. An Infinitive 
 which in itself has no reference to time may, however, be referred 
 to some particular time, like any other verbal noun, by the verb on 
 which it depends, by some particle like more or npip,. or by some 
 other word in the sentence. Thus (Sore denoting a purpose refers 
 the Infinitive to the future : the Infinitive without atrrt expressing 
 a purpose is likewise future. After a large class of verbs, as those 
 of commanding, advising, desiring, asking, &c., whose signification 
 points to the future, the Infinitive necessarily denotes relative future 
 time. (For an irregular use of the Future Infinitive after such 
 verbs, see § 27, N. 2.) The time denoted by the Infinitive in any 
 of these constructions must be carefully distinguished from that 
 which it denotes in indirect discourse (§ 15, 2), where its tense is 
 fully preserved. 
 
 Note 1. For a discussion of the Infinitive with the article and 
 a subject, with reference to its time, see Appendix, 11. 
 
 Note 2. Xpaa>, avaipea, Beairl^ai, and other verbs signifying to 
 give an oracular response, are sometimes followed by the Present (as 
 well as the Aorist) Infinitive, where we might expect the Future on 
 the principle of indirect discourse (§ 15, 2, N. 1). These verbs here 
 take the ordinary construction of verbs of commanding, advising, and 
 warning. E. g. 
 
 AeyeTot 8e 'AXft/iaiWi rbv 'AiroKKa Tairijv rrfv yrjv XP?""' oIkcIv, 
 it is said that Apollo gave a response to Alcmaeon that he should in- 
 habit this land. Thuc. II, 102. The Future is sometimes found. 
 For the Aorist, see § 23, 1, N. 2. 
 
 2. Secondly, the Present Infinitive in indirect dis- 
 course is used to represent a Present Indicative of the 
 direct discourse, and therefore denotes a continued or 
 repeated action, which is contemporary with that of the 
 leading verb, that is, relatively present. B. g. 
 
 *);o-i ypd<f>€tv, he says that he is writing ; e<j)r] ypa(j)eiv,he said 
 that he was writing (i. e. he said '^ J am writing"); cj>fi(rei. ypar^etv, 
 he will say that he is (then} writing. 'Appaa-Tftv Trpotjyaa-l^eTat, he 
 pretends that he is sick. 'E§a>noa-ev dppaxTTe'iv rovrovi, he took his 
 oath that this man was sick. Dbm. F. L. 379, 15 and 17.. Oix e^?; 
 ai'Tos aK\' infivov o-TpaTJjyc'iv, he said that not he himself, but Nicias^ 
 
14 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 15, 2 
 
 was general ; i. e. he said, ovk iya aMs aW ixfivot arparriyei 
 Thuc. IV; 28. For the Present Infinitive witu ai> (.not included 
 here), see § 41. 
 
 Note 1. The Infinitiye is said to stand in indirect discourse, with 
 its tenses thus corresponding to the same tenses of the Indicative, 
 only when it depends upon verbs implying tJioughl or the expression 
 of thought (verba sentiendi et dedarandi), and when also the thought, 
 as originally conceived, would have been expressed by some tense 
 of the Indicative, which the corresponding tense of the Infinitive 
 can represent. Thus verbs of commanding, wishing, and others 
 enumerated in § 92, 1, although they may imply thought, yet never 
 introduce an indirect quotation in the sense here intended, as an 
 Infinitive after them never stands for an Indicative, but is merely 
 the ordinary Infinitive used as a verbal noun, without any definite 
 time. See § 73, 1, Remark; where the principle is stated in full, 
 BO as to include all the tenses and the Infinitive with av. 
 
 Note 2. Verbs and expressions signifying to hope, to expect, to 
 promise, and the like, after which the Future Infinitive stands 
 regularly in indirect discourse (as representing a Future Indicative 
 of the direct discourse), sometimes take the Present or the Aorist 
 Infinitive. E. g. 
 
 'Q/ioX(5yeiE Ka6' ijjuar iroXiTevfo'Sai, you agreed to live according 
 to us (the laws). Plat. Crit. 52 C. Ewweflou iTo\iT(ietr6ai. Id. 
 62 D. JIpo(Tayayo>v eyyvrjTas ^ fifiv 7ropeue<rflat, having giving 
 securities that he would go. Xen. Cyr. VI, 2, 39. 'EXjri'f" Suwaros 
 fivat npvftf, he hopes to be able to rule. Plat. Rep. IX, 573 C. 
 (But in Hdt. I, 30, iXirl^av elvai oXfiimraTos eTreipmra, means, he 
 asked, trusting that he was, elvai being a regular Present Infinitive of 
 indirect discourse. So I. 22, eXnl^au . . . . tivai koX tov Xeav rerpi- 
 aBai.) 
 
 In these cases the Infinitive seems to be used nearly as in § 15, 
 
 1, without regard to time. The Greek makes no more distinction 
 than the English between i\ni(ei tovto Troittr, he hopes to do this, 
 and e'Xjrifei tovto Troirjo-fiv, he hopes that he shall do this. Compare 
 i^apAv TOVTOV atpoXoyrjKevat TavTa TTOirjo'e iv with <l>da'K0VTfs fre atfioXty 
 •vriKfvai iroXireveaBai. Plat. Crit. 51 E and 52 D. The Future, 
 however, is the regular form (§ 27, N. 8). For the Aorist, see § 23, 
 
 2, N. 2. 
 
 Note 3. Even verbs of saying and thinking, — as Xcvib, when it 
 signifies to command, and SoKfi, it seems good, — may be followed by 
 the ordinary Infinitive of § 15, 1, referring to the future. Eutok is 
 very seldom followed by the Infinitive, except when it signifies to 
 command. (See § 92, 2, N. 1.) The context must distinguish these 
 2ases from indirect quotations. E. g. 
 
 Tourois tXfynv nXeXv, I told them to sail. Dem. F. L. 888, 4. 
 (Toil Tour iXfyov nXeiv would mean / said that they were sailing.) 
 Etjro)!' p,i)hiva irapievai tis Trjv dxpon'oXii/, having given orders that no 
 
§ 15, 3.] PKESENT INFINITIVE AS IMPERFECT. 15 
 
 one should pass into the citadel. Xen. Hell. V, 2, 29. Aoitft ^/iiv tovto 
 iroieti', it pleases us to do this. (But SoKti fwt vjiai' tiwto itoulv 
 means it seems to me that you are doing this, by § 15, 2.) 'ESo^e 
 in the sense it was resolved, introducing a resolution or enactment, is 
 followed by the Present or Aorist (not Future) Infinitive. 
 
 3. Tliirdly, the Present Infinitive belongs also to the 
 Imperfect, and is used in indirect discourse to repre- 
 B-ent an Imperfect Indicative of the direct discourse. 
 It here denotes continued or repeated action ■vrhich is 
 past with reference to the leading verb, thus supplying 
 the want of an Imperfect Infinitive. E. g. 
 
 Tivas ovv ei)^as {moKaji^aver tv^ftrOai t&u ^iKiititov St e<r7rtv- 
 Jei* ; what prayers then do you suppose Philip made when he was pour- 
 ing the libations f Dem. F. L. 381, 10. (Here the temporal clause 
 or" etnrevSev shows the past time denoted by eS;^eo-6ai.) Honp o'ea-Be 
 TrXeov iatxeas Bt]^aiav fj ^iKmTrov vfiav Kparelv ra iroXe^ua; do 
 you think that the superiority of the Phocians over the Thebang, or that 
 of Philip over you, was the greater in the war (the war being then 
 past) ? Dem. F. L. 387, 6. (Here the direct discourse would be 
 fKpaTovv and EKparet.) nSj yap oUo'Be Svo'XfpSis aKoveiv 'OXvvdl- 
 ovs, el ris ri \eyoi Kara feXiVwou (car ixeivovs tovs ^povovs, or* 
 'Av6cp.ovvTa avTots d(j}ifi, k. t. A.; .... hpa irpoaboxav avTovt 
 ToiavTa 7rficrf<r6ai (sc. oieaQe) ; . . . . 2p* o'leixBe, ore tovs Tvpdvvovs 
 i^i^aWe, (tovs BcttoXovs) Trpoa-SoKav k. t. \.; for how unwillingly 
 do you think the Olynthians used to hear it, if any one said anything 
 against Philip in those times when he was ceding Anthemus to them, 
 &c. ? Do you think they were expecting to suffer such things? Do 
 you think that the Thessalians, when he was expelling the despots, were 
 expecting, &c. ? Dem. Phil. H, p. 70, 25 to p. 71, 12. (The direct 
 discourse here was ttSs .... ^kovov, el ... . \eyoi ; and npoaehoKav ;) 
 Kat yap tovs eiri twv •jrpoyovatv ^jx&v Xeyovras aKovat tovt(o t« eBet 
 Xptja-Oat, I hear that they used to follow this custom. Dem. Ol. HI, 
 34, 17. Ta /lev jrpi "EXXi/for ovSe elvai ij eiTtK\r](ns avnj (sc. 
 SoKfi), in the times before Hellen this name does not appear to have 
 even existed. Thuc. I, 3. Again, in the same sentence of Thucydi- 
 des, TrapexeaBai, to have furnished. Mera Tavra ecjjr] tr^as ptev 
 SeiTTvelv, TOP Se Smxpari; ovk elcievai' tov ovv ' Ay ddava ttoX- 
 \dKi.s Ke'Keveiv iieTaweji^aardat tov SaxpdTri, I fie oiiK eav. Plat. 
 Symp. 1 76 C. (He said, eSeiirvov/iev, 6 8e 2. ovk ela^ei ' 6 ouv 'A. 
 eKi\fvev .... eya 8e ovk etav.) SvvTvyftv yap (e<f>ri) 'ArpeoTiba itapa 
 ^CKimrov iropevofjLeva, koI peT avTov yvvaia KoiwaMpia ^a8i(etv, 
 for he said that he had met (Aor.) Atresiidas coming from Philip, 
 and that there were toalMng mth him, &c. Dem. F. L. 439, 3. Tour 
 eyas (brip.i delv ipe pft \a8eiv, I say that this ought not to have escaped 
 my notice. Dem. Oor. 291, 27. (The direct discourse here 'vas tovt 
 idtieiuii^Xadeiv. § 49, 2, N. 3.) 
 
16 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 15, 3. 
 
 For the Imperfect Participle, see § 16, 2. 
 
 Remark 1. This use of the Present of the Infinitive as an Im- 
 perfect cannot be too carefully distinguished from its ordinarjr use 
 after past tenses, where we translate it by the Imperfect, as in eXcyt 
 7-0 arpdrevfia /iaxetrflat, he said that the army was fighting. But here 
 imx((T8ai refei-sto time jorese'n^ relatively to t\eyf\ whereas, if it had 
 been used as an Imperfect, it would have refen-ed to time past 
 rcla'ively to ?Xeye, as in eXeye to (rrparfvixa rfj nporepala fi.a)(e<T6ai, 
 he said that the army had been fighting on the day before. In the 
 former case the direct discourse was /xa;^ erat, in the latter it was 
 fp.dx^TO. Such an Imperfect Infinitive difiers from the Aorist in 
 the same construction only by expressing a continued or repeated 
 action (as in the Indicative) : it ^ives, in fact, the only means of 
 representing in the Infinitive what is usually expressed by X/yet on 
 fVoiei, he says that he was doing, diifering from Xeyet on iiToir]iTev, he 
 says that he did. (For the rare use of the Present Optative to 
 represent the Imperfect in the same way, see § 70, 2, N. 1, (ft).) It 
 must be observed, that this construction is never used unless the 
 context makes it certain that the Infinitive represents an Imper- 
 fect and not a Present, so that no ambiguity can arise. See the 
 examples. 
 
 Remark 2. This important distinction between the ordinary 
 Present Infinitive referring to the past (when it takes its time 
 from a past tense on which it depends), and the same tense used 
 as an Imperfect and referring to the past by its own signification, 
 seems to be overlooked by those who would call the former also a 
 case of Imperfect Infinitive. But in the former case t^tf tovto 
 iroifiv is translated he said that he was doing this merely to suit 
 the English idiom, whereas the Greeks used the Present because 
 the time was to be present (relatively to e(/)i)), the direct discourse 
 being ToiiTo iroiS) : in the other case, however, f</i7) roCro ■noifiv tj 
 irpoTepaia, he said that he had been doing this the day before, the Greela 
 used TToteXv as a regular Imperfect (relatively to e^ij), the direct 
 discourse being ToCro eiroiovv. So in Latin (Cic. Phil. VIII, 10), 
 Q., Scaevolam memoria teneo bello Marsico, cum esset suniJia 
 senectute, quotidie _/acere omnibus conveniendi potestatem sui. So 
 (Cic. de Off. I, 30), Q. Maximum accepimus facile celare, tace-e, 
 dissimulare, insidiari, praeripere hostiimi consilia. 
 
 The. frequency of such constructions and their principle hare 
 been often overlooked, from the fact that they occur only when t.ie 
 context prevents all possible ambiguity. 
 
 16. 1. The Present Participle regularly refers to a 
 continued or repeated action, which is contemporary 
 ■with that of the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 ToCto noiovcriv vopl^ovTfs K. t. X., they do this because they think, 
 &0. 'EjToiovv voiii^ovTis, they were doing it in the thought, &c. 
 ETToiijo-ax vo/iifoires, they did it lecause they thought, &'j. Iloim 
 
§ 16, 2.] PRESENT PAKTICIPLE. 17 
 
 iroviTiv vofii^ovTcs, they mill do it in the thought, &o. Tout iirpaxQr) 
 'K.ovavos <rTpaTr)yovvTos, these things were done when Conon was 
 general. Isoc. Evag. p. 200 C. § 56. (^TpaTrjyoivTos is present rela- 
 tively to eVpa;(fli7 ) Kai toioCto it pdrratv ti eVoi'ft; and in doing 
 such things what was he doing? Dbm. Phil. Ill, 114, 20. 
 
 Note. When the Present Participle is used like an ordinary 
 Adjective or Substantive (as in § 108), it occasionally refers to 
 time absolutely present, even when the leading verb is not present. 
 This must always be denoted by an adverb Eke vvv, or by some- 
 thing else in the context. K. g. 
 
 Triv vvv BoKuriav KaXovnevrjv aKjj<rav, they settled in the country 
 now called Boeotia. Thuc. I, 12. 'O Tolwii ^iXwrTror i^ apx^^i ovna> 
 ALaTTCLUovs O'TpaTrjyovvTOSi ovde roiv ovrav iv H-eppovrjao} vvv dirC' 
 arTa\ii€va>v, Seppiiov Kal Aopl<rKov iXap.Pav€, Philip then in the begin- 
 ning, when Diopeithes was not yet general, and when the soldiers who 
 ARE NOW in the Chersonese had not yet been sent out, seized upon 
 Senium and Doriscus. Dem. Phil. IH, 114, 15. (Here a-Tparrj- 
 yovvTos is present to the time of iXd/ifiave, while ovrav is present to 
 the time of speaking.) 
 
 2. The Present Participle is also used as an Imper- 
 fect, like the Present Infinitive. "With the Participle 
 this use is not confined (as it is with the Infinitive) to 
 indirect discourse. E. g. 
 
 Ot av fiirpea^evovTes koi irapovres KaTafiapTvprjaovo'tv, those 
 who were his colleagues on the embassy and who were present will 
 testify. Dem. F. L. 381, 5. (Here the embassy is referred to as a 
 well-known event in the past.) ^aivtrai, yap r/ vvv 'EXKas KoKovfievri 
 oi jraXai ^efialas olicov p,evi) , aWa jxeravaiTTdtTeis Tf ovtrai ra 
 nporepa, Kal paSias eKaaroi ttjv iaVTojv diro\e Ittovtcs, i. e. the 
 following things are evident, 'eXXos ov iraXat jie^aiois oJ/cfiTO, dXXa 
 fifTavaardaeis ^aav, kcu c/caarot ttjv eavratv diriXetTTOv. ThuC. I, 2. 
 Olda Tov "ZwKpdrqv beiKvvvTa rdis ^vvovaiv eavrov koKov Kayadov 
 ovra. OtSa de tcaKeivta o-at^povovvTf , core ^t^Kparei avvrjfjrrjv. 
 Xen. Mem. I, 2, 18. (The direct discourse here was iBeixw and 
 daaxppoveiTriv.y 
 
 The principles stated in § 15, 3, with Eemarks (cf. § 73, 1) in re- 
 gard to the Present Infinitive used as an Imperfect apply equally to 
 the Participle. 
 
 Kemaek. The rules for the time of the Infinitive and Participle 
 given in this chapter do not inchide the Infinitive and Participle 
 with av. For these see Chapter HI. § 41. 
 
18 use of the tenses. [§ ^^> ^' 
 
 Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 A. In the Indicative. 
 
 § 17. 1. The Perfect represents an action as already 
 finished at the present time ; as ^eypa^a, I have written 
 (that is, my writing is now finished'). 
 
 2. The Pluperfect represents an action as already 
 
 finished at some specified past time ; as iyeypa<})£tv, I 
 
 had written (that is, my writing was finished at some 
 
 specified past time'). 
 
 JJoTE I. The consideration that the Perfect, although it implies 
 the performance of the action in past time, yet states only that it 
 stands completed at the present time, will explain why the Perfect is 
 classed with the Present and Future among the primary tenses, that 
 is, the tenses ot present or future time. 
 
 Note 2. The Perfect Indicative and the Pluperfect may be 
 expressed by the Perfect Participle with the Present or Imperfect 
 of eluL Here, however, each part of the compound generally re- 
 tains its own signification, so that this form expresses more fully the 
 continuance of the result of the action down to the present time (in 
 the case of the Perfect), and down to the ^as( time referred to (in 
 the case of the Pluperfect). E. g. 
 
 IleTroiijKats imiv (or IJi;), he is (or was) in the condition of having 
 done, — he has done (or had done). *E;ioO ol vofMH ou fiovov dneyvm- 
 KOTfr flal fifj aSiKe'iv, aWa xaX KexeXf VKorej rawn/v t^v Sikt)* 
 "Kafi^avciv, it is the laws which have not only acquitted me of injustice, 
 bttt have commanded me to inflict this punishment. Lts. de Morte 
 Erat. p. 95, 4. § 34. Ovpavos yeyovats eoTi re jfai cr* corac, 
 heaven has been formed (and sldl exists), and will still continue. 
 Plat. Tim. 31 B. 
 
 Remark. The latter part of Note 2 of course does not apply to 
 cases where the compound form is the only one in use, as in the 
 third person plural of the Perfect and Pluperfect Passive and 
 Middle of mute and liquid verbs. 
 
 On the other hand, the simple form very often implies the con- 
 tinuance of the result of the action down to the present time, or 
 down to a specified past time; but not so distinctly as the com- 
 pound form, and nut tiecessarily. (See the last two examples.) 
 E.g. 
 
 Eirt/icXiSr oi 6eo\ !>v ol avBpemoi hlovrai KaTca-KtvaKatriv, the 
 Gods have carefuUy provided what men need. Xen. Mem. IV 3 3. 
 Tav irotTjruv timcs UTroS^KOs KaraXeXoinafriv, some of the poets have 
 left us maxims. Isoc. Nijocl. p. 15 B. § 3. 'Ax^Koa ^» ToSvo,xa, 
 
§ 18.] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT. 19 
 
 uvrifioveica 8' ou, / have heard the name, but I do not remember il. 
 Plat. Theaet. 144 B; "A a-oi rixrj KexprfKe, ravr' o^eiXcto, For- 
 tune has taken back what she has tent you. Menand. Fras. Incert. 
 No. 41. 
 
 Note 3. The -Perfect of many verbs has the signification of 
 a Present, which is usually explained by the peculiar meaning 
 of these verbs. Thus drnia-Kea/, to die, TeBvrjKcvai, to be dead; 
 icaXctv, to call, KeK\rj(rdat, to be called or named ; yiyvcirBai, to 
 become, ytyovevai, to be ; lufivfjo-Keiv, to remind, neiipjj<r6ai, 
 to remember; oiSa (novi), I know ; &c. 
 
 The Pluperfect of such verbs has the signification of the 
 Imperfect ; as o'8a, I know, ^deiv, I knew. (§ 29, N. 5.) 
 
 Note 4. In Homer and Herodotus the Pluperfect is sometimes 
 found in nearly the same sense as the Aorist. E. g. 
 
 Bc^X^Kct yXovTov Kara &e^i6v. H. V, 66. (Here two Aorists 
 foUow, referring to the same time as jSfjSX^dei.) Tavra as iirvdovro, 
 apfiearo PorjOecit, when they heard this,, they started to carry aid. 
 Hdt. IX, 61. 'AXXot 8e fiye/iovas exovrfsapiiearo irri tA ipov. Hdt 
 V J-H, 00. 
 
 Note 5. In epistles, the Perfect and Aorist are sometimes used 
 ■where we might expect the Present, the writer transferring himself 
 to the time of the reader. E. g. 
 
 'Airim-aKKa <rot TovSf Tov \6yov, I send you this speech. Isoc. De- 
 mon. § 2. MfT 'Apra/Sdfou, ov troi eirtp.^jfa, irpdao'f' Thug. I, 129. 
 (Here 6v eTrenyjfa refers to the man who was to carry the letter.) 
 So scripsi in Latin. 
 
 Note 6. The perfect sometimes refers to the future, to denote 
 the certainty or likelihood that an action will inunediately take 
 place, in a sense similar to that of the Present (§ 10, N. 7), but with 
 more emphasis, as the change in time is greater. E. g. 
 
 'OoT* el /»€ T6§a)u cyKpaTTjg al(rdji<reTai, oXa'Ka, I shall perish at 
 once. Soph. Phil. 75. K&v tovto viK&pev, itavS i\piv it tis aii\r ai . 
 Xen. An. I, 8, 12. So^eWi in Latin. 
 
 The Pluperfect can express the same certainty or likelihood 
 transferred to the past. 
 
 B. Perfect in the Dependent Moods. 
 
 § 1 8. As the Perfect Indicative represents an act as 
 finished at the present time, so the Perfect of any of the 
 dependent moods represents an act as finished at the 
 time (present, past, or future) at which the Present of 
 that mood would represent it as going on. 
 
20 USE OP THE TENSES. [§ 18, 1. 
 
 1. The Perfect Subjunctive and Optative are very 
 often expressed in the active, and 'almost always in 
 the passive and middle, by the Perfect Participle with 
 a> and eiTjv ; and can always be resolved into these. 
 Their time, therefore, in each case, can be seen by 
 applying the principles stated in §§ 12 and 13 to the 
 £B or e'lrjv. Where the Present would denote future 
 time, the Perfect denotes future-perfect time. E. g. 
 
 To xpovov yeyevrja-Bai noXvv beSocKa ftrj Tiva "KfiBrfv vfiiv weTTOirjKrj, 
 I fear lest the fact that a long time has passed may (when you come lo 
 decide the case) prove to have caused in you some forget/idness 
 Dem. F. L. 342, 10. (Ml) TToifj would mean lest it may cause, the 
 time being the same as before.) Xprj avra [a TeXevrqiravTa ixaTepov 
 7rcpifi€vei'\ aKovaait Iva TeXcoJS eKdrepos avTOtv OTretX^c^j? ra o(p€iX6- 
 lieva, we must hear tohat awaits each of them after death, that {when we 
 have finished) each may have fully received his deserts. Plat. Rep. X, 
 6 14 A. Tous p.iv aWovs, Kav dedajKores Syo'iv evdvi/as, rrjv aeiXoyiaP 
 6pm 7rpoTei.vop.€vovs, I see that other meti, even if they have already given 
 their accounts, — i. e. even if they are (in the state of) persons who 
 have given their accounts, — always offer a perpetual reckoning. Dem. 
 F.L. 341, 14. 'Avbpelov ye Travv vop.i^opev, os &v ^eirXrjyT] irarepa, 
 we always consider one who has beaten his father very manly. Arist. 
 Av. 1350. No/iov &7jo-iLV pijdevi Ta>v 'EWtjvcov vpas ^OTjQeiv os av prf 
 Trporepos ^c^oi/fljjKojs vpiv 17, i. e. to assist no one who shall not pre- 
 viously have assisted you. Dem. F. L. 345, 28. (*0s av pfj irporepoi 
 ^ar)6fi would moan who shall not previously assist you. The Aorist 
 ^orjdrjo-ri would diifer very little froiu the Perfect. See § 20, N. 2.) 
 
 ESft<rav pfi Xucrtro fjpiv efiTreTTToxcot, they feared lest madness 
 might prove to have fallen upon us. Xen. An. V, 7, 26. (Mij ipmirroi 
 would mean lest it might fall upon us.) Has ovk av olKTpoTara 
 ndvTtov c'ytl) Trenovdas ciijv, el ipe ^r](j)iaatiiTO elvai ^ivov ; how 
 should J not have suffered the most pitiable of all things, if they should 
 vote me to he an alien f Dem. Eubul. 1312, 17. (This could have 
 been expressed, with a very slight difference in meaning, Trmr ou 
 
 Trsjroxflais eo-Ofiai, Put. Perf., eoi/ ■^ri(j>io-o)VTai ; how shall I 
 
 not have suffered, &e.) Ei onovv nenovBii^s Uarepos ripav etrj , 
 ov Koi dptjioTepoi, av tovto iieirovBoipev ; if each of wi should have 
 suffered anything whatsoever, would not both of us have suffered it f 
 Plat. Hipp. M. 301 A. Cuk &v Sih ToCrrf y eUv ovk evOiis htSaKores, 
 this, at least, cannot be the reason why they did not pay it at once • i. e. 
 they would not (on inquiry) prove to have not paid It on this ac'coimi 
 Dem. Onet. I, 867, 1. ^ So Soph. Oed. T. 840. 'EKeye oVa ciyaBh 
 Kvpos Ilepo-as nenoirjKoi, he told how many serriccs Cm-us hai) 
 done the Persians. Hdt. III. 75. (neiroiiiKoi here roprospiits nfnnmi^e 
 of the direct discourse.) OSroi eXeyoi; las wevraKdtnoi airo'is eir/trar 
 tV ToO Ileipaims SebcKacrpevot. Ly3. in Philocr. p. 182, § 12. 
 (Here the direct discourse was rrevTaKicrioi elnv fit StKaa/ieVoi.) 
 
§ 18, 2.] PERFECT SUBJTINCTITE AND OPTATIVE. 21 
 
 Note. The Perfect Subjunctive in protasis (§ 50, 1) corresponds 
 exactly to the Latin Future Perfect Indicative ; but the Greek sel- 
 dom uses this cumbrous Perfect, preferring the less precise Aorist 
 (§ 20, N. 2). The Perfect Optative, in both protasis and apodosis, 
 corresponds to the Latin Perfect Subjunctive, but is seldom used. 
 
 The Perfect Optative can seldom be accurately expressed in 
 English. For when we use the English forms would have suffered 
 and should have suffered to translate the Perfect Optative, these are 
 merely vaguer expressions for will and shall have suffered. (See 
 the examples above.) / should have suffered is commonly past in 
 English, being equivalent to tnadov av ; but here it is future, and is 
 therefore liable to be misunderstood. There is no more reference 
 to past time, however, in the Perfect Optative with av, than there 
 is in the Future Perfect Indicative in such expressions as fmTrjv e/ioi 
 KeK^^ava-erai,, 1 shall have had my whipping for nothing (referring 
 to one received in his boyhood) ; Arist. Nub. 1436. 
 
 2. The Perfect Imperative may express a command 
 that something just done or about to be done shall be 
 decisive and final. It is thus equivalent to the Perfect 
 Participle with the Imperative of elfj,i. E. g. 
 
 lavra /iev Stj TavTr/ elpijaBm, let SO much have been thus said, i. e 
 let what has been thus said be sufficient. Plat. Crat. 401 D. But 
 ofxcas &e flprio-6(o oVi, is. r. X., stUl let as much as this (which follows) 
 be said (once for all), that, &c. Plat. Kep. X, 607 C. Hfpi tS>v 
 l&iov Toxira jioi npoeiprjO-Ba , let this have been said (once for all.) 
 by way of introduction. Isoc. Paneg. p. 43 D. § 14. TaCra TTfirala-Bto 
 re vfuv, Koi 'ia-as 'iKajms fx^i, let this be the end of the play i&o. Plat. 
 Euthyd. 278 D. Terax^'" ^l"-v Kara b-qfioKpariav o toiovtos avr\p, 
 let such a man remain where we have placed him, &e. Plat. Rep. 
 VTTT, 561 E. 'Airetpyaada 8fi ij/xiv avrri ij ■jvoXireia, let now this be 
 a sufficient description of this form of government. Id. 553 A. Me^P' 
 Tovhe a pi IT 6 m vpJav 17 BpaSyTr)!, at this point let the limit of ymir slug- 
 gishness be fixed. Thuc. I, 71. 
 
 This use seems to be confined to the third person singular of the 
 passive and middle. The third person plural in the same sense 
 could be expressed by the Perfect Participle with the Imperative of 
 elpi, as in Plat. Kep. VI, 502 A: ovtoi toivvv tovto 7rfweurp,ivot 
 fo-rav, grant then that these have been persuaded of this. 
 
 Note 1. On this principle the Perfect Imperative is used in 
 mathematical language, to imply that something is to be considered 
 as proved or assumed once for all, or that lines drawn or points 
 fixed are to remain as data for a following demonstration. E. g. 
 
 EiX)7<^fl<B ijriTrjsAB ruxov (rrip-eiov to A, Koi at^JipriirBa aitb 
 r^s Ar T.7 AA (ot; ij AE, let any point A be (assumed as) taken m thi 
 lint AB, 'and AE equal to AA as cut off from AF EucL. I, Pr. 9. 
 
22 USE OP THE TENSES. [§ 18, 2» 
 
 Note 2. The Perfect Imperative of the second^ person is rare^ 
 when it is used, it seems to be a little more emphatic than the Pre- 
 sent or Aoriat. £. g. 
 
 *H^ (Ti>T6vS€ SEdffo. n.V, 228. M^ n-e0<!j3i,o-5f. Thuo. "Vl, 
 17. M6vov trii fifiiv jriora 6emv TrsTroiijo-o koI St^tav Sos, only jnakt 
 us (immediately and once for all) solemn pledges and give the right 
 hand. Xen. Cyr. IV, 2, 7. nkrravao, stop 1 not another word I Dem, 
 Timoc. 721, 6. 
 
 Note 8. In verbs whose Perfect has the force of a Present 
 (§ 1 7, N. 3) the Perfect Imperative is the ordinary form, as jUiutiiro, 
 kckX^o-Bo), iaTora, reBvarai, laroj. The Perfect Imperative active 
 seems to have been used only in such verbs. Occasionally we find 
 the periphrastic form with the Participle and elfii, as eora Ju/«^e- 
 0ijKuta. Plat. Leg. V, 736 B. 
 
 3. (a.) The Perfect Infinitive in indirect discourse 
 represents a Perfect Indicative of the direct discourse, 
 and therefore denotes an action which is finished at the 
 time of the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 ^(Ti TQVTo neiT pa)(evai ^ he says thai he has done this j t<f>r] tovto 
 ireirpax€vat, he said that he had done this, (fjrjaei tovto jtc- 
 itpaxivai, he will say that he has done this (the direct discourse in 
 each case being iriirpa^^a). "EfjJTj xprjpaff iavra roiig Orj^aiovs 
 ejTiK€K7]pvyevai,he said that the Thebans had offered a reward for 
 his seizure. Dem. F. L. 347, 26. In Aeist. Nub. 1277, irpoa-- 
 KeK\fj<r6al pj>i SoK^is (according to Mss. Rav. & Ven.), you seem 
 to me to be sure to be summoned to court (to be as good as already sum- 
 moned), the Infinitive represents a Perfect Indicative referring to 
 the future (§ 1 7, N. 6). So k e k <o X B o- fl a t tdcS/tei. Thoc. U, 8. 
 
 (6.) In other constructions the Perfect Infinitive 
 represents an act as finished at the time at which the 
 Present in the same construction would represent it as 
 going on (§ 15, 1). B. g. 
 
 Ou jSouXeuf 0-flat tri apa, SKKa ;3c/3ovXeC(rdaf r^r yap 
 (jriov<ri)s vvKTos iravra ravra Set ■n-f'/rpaxdai, it is no longer time to 
 be deliberating, but (it is time) to have finished deliberating ; for all 
 this must be done (and finished) within the coming nigJit. Plat. Crit. 
 46 A. Kal iifjv ■nipi av ye rrpoa-eTa^art .... jrpoo-^icfi fic^KijKci/at , 
 and it is his duty to have attended (during his absence) to'the businest 
 about which you gave him instructions. Dem. F. L. 842, 28. (This 
 refers to an ambassador presenting his accounts on his return.) 
 SvvtTvyxave noK\axov SiA^ rriv imvoxaplav ra fiev SKXois t/i|3e- 
 
 fiXi)Ktvai TO S'avTovs fii$e^\ri<rdai, 6uo te irfpi p.iav 
 
 $yvripTtj<r6ai, it often befell them to have made an attack on one 
 tide and (at the same time) to have been attacked themselves on the 
 
S 18, 4.] PERFECT tNFINITITE. 23 
 
 ttCher, &0. ThPC. VII, 70. 'AwyKij yhp rh fieV fiiyurr alrmv ^817 
 KaraKexp^arBai fuxpa Se nm ■irapa\f\cl(jidai,, for it must be 
 that the most important subjects have been used up, and that only unim- 
 portant ones have been left. Isoc. Pan. p. 55 D. § 74. Ovk ijBeXov 
 sn^aiveiv Sta to KarairfwX^x^'^^ Vl V""!!^ they were unwUllng to 
 embark on account of having been terrified by the defeat. Thuc. VII, 
 72. To yap iroWa aTroXtuXcKe'vai Kara tqv ttoXc/iov ttjs ^fierepar 
 a/ieX«ai av ns Beirj diKaiais, t6 &e lifjTf jroKai tovto nfirovBevai 
 Tre^ijvei/ai te nva rjfiiv iTvpp.axiav tovtiov avTippoirov, ttjs reap 
 (Keivaiv eivoias eiepysTrjfi hv eymye Beijjv, for our having lost many 
 things during the war any one might justly charge upon our neglect ; 
 but our never having suffered this before and the fact that an alliance 
 has now appeared to us to make up for these losses I shoxdd consider a 
 benefaction, &c. Dem. 01. I, 12, 3. (Compare yey^injo-dfii in the 
 first^ example under § 18, 1.) 'EcjiBaa-av TrapoiKoSoiifja-avTes, aare 
 m)Ken p-riTe avTOi KiSKveaOai mt avrav, ixeivovs re Ka\ iravTaTratriv 
 
 azreo'TeprjKevai iT(pas airoTeixiirai,, i. e. they carried their 
 
 own wall beyond that of the Athenians, so as no longer to be themselves 
 interfered with by them, and so as to have effectually prevented them, 
 &C. Thug. VII, 6. 'ETre/icX^^?^ Koi ratv "Konr&v, aa-TC r&v irapovraiv 
 Tois avBpamoLS dyadav firjdiv fieii avev rrjs iroKfias elvai, ra Be TrXeiora 
 fiia TavTiji' yeyevija-dai . Isoc. Pan. p. 48 B. §38. TotaSra km 
 ToaavTa Karca-Kevatrav rjpLV, aare p.7]devL rav kirtyiyvopiviav UTrepjSoXijw 
 XeXeI(^5a«, they made such and so great acquisitions as to have no 
 possibility of surpassing them left to any one who should come after 
 them. Dbm. 01.- Ill, 35, 18. Aibojiev avrols irpoXna avyxeKo^Bai, 
 we allow them to have cut us up for nothing (i. e. we make no account 
 of their having done so). Aeist. Nub. 1426. 
 
 Note. The Perfect Infinitive is sometimes used like the Perfect 
 Imperative (§ 18, 2), signifying that the action is to be decisive and 
 permanent, and sometimes it seems to be merely more emphatic 
 than the Present or Aorist Infinitive. E. g. 
 
 E'ttov rriv dvpav KCKXeladai, they ordered that the door should be 
 shut and remain so. Xen. Hell. V, 4, 7. BovXa/ievos aymvi Ka\ 
 StKaaTrjpit^ uoi httopttr 6ai reap* vfuv on Tavavrla- ifiol Koi rovTOiS 
 wfTTpaKTai, 1. e. vyishmg to have it definitely and once for all settled in 
 your minds. Dbm. P. L. 410, 28. QeKoiaas npos nvKais irevrat- 
 Kivai, eager to fall before the gates'. Aesch. Sept. 462. 'nXavvev 
 eTTi Tovs Mevttipos, mot* exelvovs CKTrfTrX^p^^at Ka\ Tpix^LV fTTi ra 
 ojrXa, he marched against the soldiers of Menon, so that they were (once 
 for all) thoroughly frightened and ran to arms. Xkn. An. I, 5, 13. 
 (Here eKwevXrixSai is merely more emphatic than the Present would 
 have been.) 
 
 Eemark. The Perfect Infinitive belongs also to the Pluperfect, 
 and is occasionally used to represent that tense in indirect discourse. 
 This occurs chiefly (perhaps only) when the Infinitive is modified 
 by av. See the first example under § 41, 2. 
 
 4. The Perfect Participle in all its uses refers to au 
 
24 USE OP THE TENSES. [§ 19. 
 
 action as already finished at the time of the leading 
 verb. B. g. 
 
 'ETraivoCo-i rois elprjKOTas, they praise those who have spoken. 
 'Ewijvea-av Toiis eiprjKSTas, they praised those who had spoken. 
 'Ejr'aiw'a-oucri roiis elpriKoras, they will praise those who have (then) 
 spoken. 'ErreSet^a ovSiv d\r]6es d7ri;yyeX(cdra (AiVx'"")") , / showed 
 that Aeschinas had announced nothing that was true (i. e. / showed, 
 nidev oKrjdis airrj-yycXKcv). Dem. F. L. 396, 30. 
 
 AOEIST. 
 
 A. In the Indicative. 
 
 § 19. The Aorist Indicative expresses the simple 
 momentary occurrence of an action in past time ; as 
 eypa^a, I wrote. 
 
 This fundamental idea of simple occurrence remains the 
 essential characteristic of the Aorist through all the dependent 
 moods, however indefinite they may be in regard to time. 
 
 Note 1. The Aorist of verbs which denote a state or 
 condition generally expresses the entrance into that state or 
 condition. E. g. 
 
 Bao'tXevo), / am king, e^atrtKfvaa, I became king; ^px^i ^ hold 
 office, rfp^a, I obtained office; ttXoutq), ejrXoun;o"a, / became rich: Tj 
 
 aKr]6eia a-uvaxfi Kol oidenco ajroXf XoiTrfV • aK\a irapa fmiTor 
 
 TipoKparovs eKelvco cvvcoKrjo'e , slie was his wife in good jaith, and 
 
 has not even yet been divorced ; but she went to live with him, 
 
 &c. Dem. Onet. I, 873, 8. 
 
 Note 2. The Aorist dififers from the Imperfect by denoting the 
 momentary occurrence of an action or state, while the Luperfect 
 denotes a continuance or repetition of the same action or state. 
 This is especially obvious in the verbs mentioned in Note 1, as 
 sPaariXfvov, rjpxov, eVXoutouv, / tuas king, held office,.ieas rich. (See 
 especially the last example under N. 1.) The Aorist is therefore 
 the tense most common in narration, the Imperfect in description. 
 The Aorist may sometimes refer to a series of repetitions ; but it 
 refers to them collectively, as a single whole, while the Imperfect 
 refers to them sejoara^eZ;/, as individuals. So the Aorist may even 
 refer to a continued action, if (as a whole) it is viewed as a single 
 event in past time. E. g. 
 
 'Eyai fie ^\6ov, elSov, eviKYfira, I came, I saw, I conquend 
 (Veni, vidi, vici) App. Bell. Civ. 11, 91. So t/SaaiXeuo-e BUa 
 
§ 19. J AOB.IST IN THE DEPENDENT MOODS, 2S 
 
 ei i; may be used to mean he had a reign of ten years (which is now 
 viewed as a single past event) ; whereas ifiaalXeve S^ko eVij would 
 mean he continued to reign ten years. 
 
 NoTe 3. The distinction between the Imperfect and Aorist was 
 sometimes neglected, especially by the older writers. See § 11, 
 Note 5. 
 
 Note 4. (a.) The Aorist is sometimes found where we 
 should expect the Perfect or the Pluperfect ; the action being 
 simply referred to the past, without the more exact specifi- 
 cation afforded by. the Perfect and Pluperfect. E. g. 
 
 Tav oliceTav ohbiva KariXiTrfv, aW diravra ireirpaKfv. Ae- 
 BCHIN. Timarch. § 99. 'ErpajrovTO es tov Tlavopnov, oBcvirep avrjyd- 
 yovTo, they turned towards Panormus, whence they had set saii. 
 Thuc. II, 92. Kvpov Se fifTaminrfTCU ano rffs dpxns ^ airav 
 varpdiTriv fnoirjaev, of which he had once made him satrap. Xen. 
 An. 1, 1, 2. 
 
 (J.) Especially the Aorist is generally used, even where we 
 ihould expect the Pluperfect, after particles of time like cnti, 
 
 iireiSrj, i>s {wheri), ore, (tus, irplv, &C. E. g. 
 
 'EfffiS^ «TfXevTi)<rf dkupeios Koi (carecrTjj 'hpra^ep^ris, after Darius 
 lad died and Artaxerxes had become established. Xen. An. I, 1, 3. 
 Ov irp6a-6ev e^fveyKe'iv iroKpijirav jrpos 17/iar TrdXe/iOV, Trpiv Tovg 
 rrpaTijyois r)iiwv trvve'Xa^ov, before they had seized our generals, 
 Xj':n. An. Ill, 2, 29. Ol d* ore bq \ip,evos 7ro\v^ev6eos euros tKovrOf 
 chen they had entered. II. I, 432. So in Latin, postquam venit, after 
 ke had come. 
 
 Note 5. The Aorist is sometimes used in colloquial language 
 by the poets (especially the dramatists), when a momentary action, 
 which is just taking place, is to be expressed as if it had already 
 happened. E. g. 
 
 'Ettijxco-' epyov xai irpovoiav rpi eSov, I must approve youract, &c. 
 Soph. Aj. 536. "Ho-^ijv dneiXals, iy£\a<ra y(r6\oKop.7riais, I am 
 amused by your threats, I cannot help laughing, &c. Abist. Eq. 696. 
 
 Note 6. The Aorist sometimes refers vividly to the future, like 
 the Present or Perfect (§ 10, N. 7; § 17, N. 6) ; as dTrmXd/iiji/ el 
 fie \eii\reis, I perish if you leave me, Eur. Ale. 386. 
 
 So in questions with tI ov expressing surprise that something is 
 not already done, and implying an exhortation to do it ; as n oSv 
 oil Striyrja-a; why then do you not tell us the story? Plat. Prot. 
 310 A. See also xt odi/ ovk. eKaXea-a/ieu; Prot. 317 D. 
 
 B. Aorist in the Dependent Moods. 
 
 Remark. The Aorist of the dependent moods differs from 
 the Present as is explained in the Remaii before § 12. 
 
26 USE OP THE TENSES. [§ 20, 
 
 § 90. The Aorist Subjunctive denotes a single or 
 Tnomentary action, the time of which is determined by 
 the rules that apply to the time of the Present Subjunc- 
 tive, § 12 : — 
 
 That is, in clauses denoting a purpose or oljed, after 
 tj/ffl, ixrj, &c., it refers to time future relatively to the 
 leading verb ; in conditional sentences (including con- 
 ditional relative and temporal sentences), — in ordinary 
 protasis (§ 50, 1), the Subjunctive refers to the future ; 
 in general suppositions after verbs of present time (§ 51), 
 it refers to indefinite time represented as present. la 
 independent sentences it refers to t\\e future. B. g. 
 
 AeSotKa firl e7ri\a6a>fif6a Trjs oiKaSe dSou, I fear lest we may forget 
 iJie road home, Xen. An. HI, 2, 25. Atovofirai r^v y€(j>vpav Xfcrac, 
 i>s nfj 6ia/3^Tf dXX' a7ro\r](p6^Te, he intends to destroy the bridge, 
 that you may not pass over but be caught. Id. II, 4, 17. *Hv Trjv flpfivr/v 
 7rotri<Taiiie8a, fifra TroXX^s aa^aXclas tt)v iroXai oiKfjcroixfv, if we 
 shall make the peace, &c. Isoc. Pac. p. 163 A. § 20. 'Qs av eliria 
 ireidafieBa, let its obey as I shall direct. 11. IX, 704. "Hk e'yyir eXflj 
 6avaTos, oiSels /SouXtToi 6vrj(TKeiv, if death comes near (the moment that 
 death comes near), no one wants to die. EuR. Ale. 671. 'Oi» /lev &i> 
 i&H dyvara (so. o Kvmv), )(a\c7raLVfi- ov 8' av yviapipov (sc. 185), 
 doTTraff Toi, i. e. whomsoever the dog sees (at any time) . Plat. Rep. II, 
 376 A. ^AvaXoyia-wfieda Ta atfidXoyrjfieva rjfiiv, let us enumerate 
 the points which have been conceded by us. Plat. Prot. 332 D. 
 Mr/Siv (l>ofirj6^ s, fear not (in this case). (But /i?;8eV (/) o j3 o i , be not 
 timid.) Ti woirjae); what shall I do (in a single case)1 (But tI 
 TToiS); what sha.ll I do (generally)!) Ov fifj tovto eiTrjy, you will 
 not say this. Ov pi] yevrjrai, it will not happen. So in the Ho- 
 meric ovSc '18 a pat, nor shall J ever see. 
 
 See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 
 
 Note 1. "When the Aorist Subjunctive depends on artir 
 dav (iirdv, eTrfjv), after that, it is referred by the meaning of the 
 particle to a moment of time that precedes the action of the 
 leading verb, so that ineiSav tovto t8a>, i\eva-opat means after 
 I shall have seen this, I will come; and firetSav tovto tSm, 
 airipxopai, after / have seen this, I (always) depart. In such 
 cases it is to be translated by our Future Perfect, when the 
 leading verb is future ; and by our Perfect, when the leading 
 verb denotes a general truth and is translated by the Present 
 As the Subjunctive in this construction con never depend 
 
S 20.] AOEIST SUBJTINCTIVE AS I CTUKE PERFECT. 27 
 
 upon a verb expressing simply present time, it is obvious that 
 it can never refer to time absolutely past : we use the Perfect 
 Indicative in translating such Aorists after verbs expressing 
 general truths, merely because we use the Present in translat- 
 ing the leading verb, although that is properly not merely 
 present, but general in its time. 
 
 In like manner, after eW, n-ptV, and other particles signify- 
 ing until, before that, and even after the relative prvmoun 
 or idv, the Aorist Subjunctive may be translated by our Future 
 Perfect or Perfect, when the context shows that it refers 
 to a moment of time preceding that of the leading verb. 
 E.g.^ ^ 
 
 Xprj 8s, orav fiev TidtjcrSe rovs vo/itout, ottoIoi nves elaiv iTKOTrciv, 
 cneiSav Se O^ade, <l>vKa.TTfiv Koi xp^<^6ai, while you are enacting 
 laws, you must look to see of what kind they are ; but after you have 
 enacted them, you must guard and use them. Dem. Mid. 525, 11. 
 (Here the Present TiBrjcrde after Srav, while, refers to an action con- 
 tinuing through the time of the leading verb ; but BijaSe after 
 firfiSdv, after that, refers to time past relatively to the leading verb.) 
 TaCra, ineidav irepl Tov yevovs etTro), Tore, hy ^ovXijade aKoveiv, 
 ipw, when 1 shall have spoken about my birth, then, if you desire to 
 hear, I will speak of these things. Dem. Eubul. 1303, 25. (Here the 
 Aorist eoro), though absolutely future, denotes time past with refer- 
 ence to cpS.) 'ETreiSai' SiOTrpd^tofjat a Siofuu, -q^a, when I shall 
 have accomplished what I desire, I wilt come. Xen. An. II, 3, 29. 
 'EireiSav 8e Kpi^am yrj, avrjp ijpijfifVoi vi:o T^s sroXemy Xeyet eir 
 aiiToU eiraivov tov Trpeirovra, when they have covered them with earth, 
 &C. ThuC. n, 34. '"Ems av tra^rjTai to aKac^os, tote xph ^po6ipovi 
 €haf cntiSav be fj BiXarTa vnepirxVi paraios i] mrovbrj, as long as 
 it remains in safety (Present) ; — but the moment that the sea has over- 
 whelmed it (Aorist). Dem. Phil. HI, 128, 22. 'Emr hv cK/idflgs, 
 ex' e'Xn-i'Sa, until you have learnt filly, have hope. Soph. O. T. 834. 
 Mia 6e kXiVij Kevq (peperai tSiv d(j>avSiv, oi hv fifi evp€6airtv es 
 diaipeatv, and one bier is always carried empty, in honor of the miss- 
 ing, whose bodies have not been found. Thuc. II, 34. lis Siavoelrai, 
 a tiv aK\oi rg dptTrj Karair pd^acn, tovtodv la-opoipelv ; who ever 
 thinks of having an 'equal share in those things which others by their 
 valor have acquired f XEN.^Cyr. 11, 3, 5. Ildvd' to-' Sv c'k jroXe/io« 
 yiyvopivrjs elprjvtfs irpoedij, ravTa toij d/teX^cacriii djrdXXuTai, all 
 things which are (or have been) abandoned when peace is made are 
 always lost to those who abandoned them. Dem. P. L. 388, 9. 'Hk S' 
 apa Koi TOV ireipa a-<j)aXwa-iv, dincKmitravTcs oKKa eVXijpcoo-av tijv 
 Xpiiav, if they have been disappointed in anything, they always supply 
 the deficiency, &c. Thuc. I, 70. (See § 30, 1.) Oix' naia-opai, 
 vpif av o-e Tav tr&v idioiov aTrjO-a TeKvav, I will not cease before 1 
 havt (shali have:) madt %->u master of your children. Soph. 0. G 
 
28 USE OF THE TENSES [§ 20. 
 
 1040. Mij orimSe irpiv lidffrjs, do not groan untU you have heard. 
 Soph. Phil. 917. 
 
 Note 2. The use of the Aorist Subjunctive mentioned in Note 1 
 Bometuues seems to approach very near to that of the Perfect Sub- 
 junctive (§ 18, 1) ; and we often translate both by the same tense 
 in English. But with the Perfect, the idea of an action completed 
 at the time referred to is expressed by the tense of the verb, with- 
 out aid from any particle or from the context ; with the Aorist, the 
 idea of relative past time can come only fi'om the particle or the 
 context. (See § 18, 1, Note.) E. g. 
 
 'Ov fiiv hv XSri dyvara (o Kvaiv), X'^^^^"'^"^'' ' "" ^' "'' T"""?'/"" 
 (iS^), dcT7rd^€Tai, Kav firjdev TrtoTTore iir aijTov dyaOov TreTTOVorj, 
 whomsoever he sees whom he knows, he fawns upon, even if he has 
 hUlierto received no kindness from him. Plat. Rep. 11, 376 A. Com- 
 pare this with idv dyadov n irdBt] vwo tlvos, daitd^erai, if he ever 
 happens to receive any kindness from any one, he always fawns upon 
 him; and iireiSav dyaOov n ndBrj, doTraferai, after he has received 
 any kindness, he always fawns upon him. See examples under 
 § 18, 1. 
 
 §21. 1. The Aorist Optative, when it is not in in- 
 direct discourse, denotes a single or momentary action, 
 the time of which is determined by the rules that apply 
 to the time of the Present Optative, § 13, 1 : — 
 
 That is, in clauses denoting a purpose or object, after 
 'ivcu, oTTw?, ix-q, &c., it refers to time future relatively to 
 the leading verb ; in conditional sentences (including 
 conditional relative and temporal sentences), — in ordi- 
 nary protasis (§ 50, 2), the Optative I'efers to ihe future 
 (only more vaguely than the Subjunctive) ; in general 
 suppositions after verbs of past time (§ 51), it refers to 
 indefinite past time. In independent sentences it refers 
 to ^Q future. E. g. 
 
 itXtTTTTOS iv <j)6^<o rjv fi^ cK<j)vyoi TCI wpdy/iara aiiTov, Philip was 
 in fear lest the control' of affairs might escape him. Dem, Cor. 236, 19. 
 Ei e\6oi , irdvT &$ 'iSoi, if lie should go, he would see aU. Ei c X d o i , 
 mivff iapa, if ever {whenever) he went, he (always) saw all. OiS' 
 (I TrdvTfS e\6oicv llepiTai., TrXrjdei yf ou^ uirepiSaXoijif 6' &v roi/s 
 TToXefu'ouv, not even if all the Persians should come, shoidd we sur- 
 pass the enemy in numbers. Xen. Cyr. U, 1, 8. "Ort ?fta tov ficivou 
 yevotVTO, kol i^eirj Trpiis aKKovs ap)(0VTas dnUvai, iroXXot avTOV 
 dniXemov, but when they were come out of danger and it was in their 
 power (Present) to go to other commanders, (in all suck cases) many 
 Ufl him. Xen. An. II, 6, 12, "Ai/eu yap dpxivrwv oiSei &v oiiTe ieaXA» 
 
§ 21, 2.] AORIST OPTATIVE. 29 
 
 oCts dyadov yifoiTO, noOiing covldhe done, &c. Xen. An. HI, 1 38. 
 OvK olSa Ti av Tis ^ P ij o' <" '' o airois, / do not know tohai we any 
 one could make of them. Xen. An. Ill, 1, 40. EtSf trii Toiovroi av 
 (t>i\os rifuv yivoio, may you become a fiiend to us. Xen. Hull. IV, 
 1, 38. M^ yevoiTo, may it not happen. \ 
 
 See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 
 
 Note. When the Aorist Optative depends upon cVftSij or eVei, 
 afer that, it is referred by the meaning of the particle to a moment 
 of time preceding that of the leading verb, like the Aorist Sub- 
 junctive m § 20, N. 1, so that eirfi&q iSoi, anrjpxero means after he 
 had seen, he (always) went away. This gives the Aorist in transla- 
 tion the force of a Pluperfect. So after eas, until, and in the other 
 cases mentioned in § 20, N. 1. E. g. 
 
 Ous fieu ISoi evTaxTas tovras, rives re flcv r^pina, Koi iiTfi irvBoiTo , 
 fn^vfi, he asked any whom he saw marching in good order, who they 
 were ; and after he had ascertained, he praised them. Xbn. Cjt. V, 
 
 3, 55. Hepieiievofiev eKaarore ecus dvotx^etrj to fictr/Awr^ptoi/ ■ 
 eirei8rj de dvoix^^ Itj, eltr^etpev Trapa rbv ^coKparrj, we waited each 
 morning until the prison was opened (or had been opened) ; and after 
 it was opened, we went in to Socrates. Plat. Phaed. 59 D. OiSa- 
 fioSfV d<j>U(rav, irpiw jrapadelev avTois aptarrov, before they had 
 placed breakfast before them. Xen. An. IV, 5, 30. 
 
 2. From the general rule for mdirect discourse (§ 69, 
 1) we derive the following special rules : — 
 
 (a.) FirsI, if the Aorist Optative in indirect discourse 
 represents an Aorist Indicative of the direct discourse, 
 it denotes a momentary or sinffle action which is j>asi 
 with reference to the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 'E\c^av oTiTiiji'^fif cripds 6 jSatriXeus, they said that the king had 
 sent them (i. e. they said €n-E/ii|'c»' rjiids 6 ^atriKeis). Xen. Cyr. II, 
 
 4, 7. Tore eyvatrdri ori oi pdp^apot tov avBpa-rrov vnonep.\jratfy, 
 then it became known that the barbarians had sent the man. Xen. An. 
 n, 4, 22. 'EtoA^o Xeyeiv is TToXAa tqh/ ijiav Xa/3otf w, he dared to 
 say that they had taken much of my property. Dem. Aph. I, 828, 25. 
 'Hparav avTov el dpawXei ae lev, I asked him whether he had set 
 sail (i. e. / asked him the question, dveirXeva-as ;). Dem. Polycl. 1223, 
 21. ''EireipaiTa rlva (Sot, he asked whom he had seen (i. e. riva 
 elSes, whom did you see?). Hdt. I, 31. So I, 116: etpero KoBev 
 \a/3oi. 
 
 (J.) But if it represents an Aorist Subjunctive of the 
 direct discourse, it denotes a momentary or single action 
 which is future with refeience to the leading verb. 
 E.g. 
 
80 traE OP the tenses. [§ 21, 2, 
 
 02 'EmSafivioi rbv 6eov iirfjpovro tt wapaiotev Kopiv6toK ti]» 
 boXh/, they asked whether they should deliver up their city to the Co- 
 
 rinihians'r - '" '—>-'-- -• " ' _i.. _^>.., • .S«7/ 
 
 we 
 
 fV^,^...f. ,- . , 
 
 asked, nas iviyKW avrov; how can f endure Aim?). EuR. Hipp. 
 393. Atetrtairriae a-Koit&v o n airoKplvaiTo , he continued silent, 
 thinking what he should answer (i. e. thinking, ri airoKpivajiaii)- 
 Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 10. 
 
 Eemaek. Examples of the Aorist Optative representing the 
 Aorist Subjunctive in a dependent ' Huse of the direct discourse, to 
 which the same principles apply, maj be found under § 74, 1. The 
 Aorist Indicative is, however, generally retained in dependent 
 clauses of indirect quotations : see § 74, 2, with N. 1. 
 
 Note 1. It will be seen by a comparison of the examples 
 under («) and (5), as in § 13, 2, Note 1, that an ambiguity 
 may sometimes arise from uncertainty whether the Aorist 
 Optative stands for the Aorist Indicative, or for the Aorist 
 Subjunctive in a question of doubt. Thus, ijyvoovv on wotfi- 
 a-fiav might mean, they knew not what they had done (the 
 Optative representing ri tn-oi^o-nfif k ; what did we do ?), or they 
 knew not what they should do (the Optative representing ti 
 TTot^o-ujueK ; what shall we do?). The context must decide in 
 each case ; but in most cases the latter construction is intendp4. 
 (For the manner of avoiding a similar ambiguity, see § 74, 2, 
 N. 1.) 
 
 § 23. The Aorist Imperative refers to a momen- 
 tary or single action in future time ; as eiire fioi, tell 
 me ; Bore fioi tovto, give me this. 
 
 § 23. The Aorist Infinitive has two distinct uses, 
 corresponding to the first two uses of the Present In- 
 finitive (§ 15) : — 
 
 1. First, in its ordinary use (either with or without 
 the article), whenever it is not in indirect discourse, 
 it denotes a momentary or single action without regard 
 to time, unless its time is especially defined by the con- 
 text. E. g. 
 
 IlaKfws fVri fldi/oTos dvdaraTov ytviaSai, it is death for a city to 
 le [aid waste. Lycubg. in Leocr. p. 155, 35. § 61. 'Ocnrtp t<5» 
 
§ 2S, l.J , AOKIST INFINITIVE. 31 
 
 avSpSv Tois KoKots KayaBoXs alprr&Tepov iari KaKas airodave'iv fi f^K 
 al<T\pai, oiiTa Koi tS>v vokeav Tois VTripexoiirais Xuo-iTeXeij/ (ijyoCiTo) 
 i^ avSpumav a(j>aui<T6rjvai paWov Ij bovXais ocjidrjvai yevopJvais, 
 as it is preferable for honorable men to dis (Aor.) nobly rather than to 
 continue living (Pres.) in disgrace, so also they thought that it was 
 belter (Pres.) for the pre-eminent among stales to be (at once) made t > 
 disappear from the earth, than to be (once) seen to have fallen inl\ 
 slavery. Isoc. Paneg. p. 60 C. § 95. Ile/iTroucn!/ is tijv KepKvpav 
 Trpia^eis, Seo/iewot p,fi a(j)as irepwpav (f>6eipopevovs, aWa Tois re 
 ^evyovras ^vvaWc^at cr(j>iat koL roi' rau ^ap^dpav jroXepov 
 KaraXva-ai, asking them not to allow them to be destroyed, but to 
 bring about a reconciliation .... and to put an end to the war. Thuc. 
 I, 24. To yap yvavai emiTTriiJ,riv nov Xa^Eiv ianv, to learn is 
 to acquire knowledge. Plat. Theaet. 209 E. ndires to KaraXiireiv 
 avra irdvrav pAXiara d>eiyop^v, we all try most of all to avoid leaving 
 them behind. Xbn. Mem. II, 2, 3. Ou yap to jm] "Ka^elv riyaQa 
 ouTfl) ye ■)(aKe'iTov ao'Trep to Xa^ovra are prjBrjvaL "Kvirrjpov. Xen. 
 Cyr. Vll, 5, 82. Tou nieiv emdvpia, the desire of obtaining drink. 
 Thuc. VII, 84. KfXeuet avTov iXdclv, he commands him to go 
 'EkcXe uo-Ew avTov iXdelv, he commanded him to go. KeXeuiret airov 
 eXfleix, he mil command him to go. Ilpbs ra /xj/Sev eV Trjs Trpeo-jSfi'as 
 XajSeli', Tovs aix/iaXmrous eXicraTo, besides receiving nothing from 
 the embassy, he ransomed the captives. Dem. F. L. 412, 21. pi jrpo 
 TOU TOVS imKias aitoXka^Bai ^-i}<^laai.(T6e ^orjBeiv, if before tlie de- 
 struction of the Phocians you should vote to go to their assistance. 
 Dem. Cor. 236, 20. Toe ahias vpovypaijra, tov pi] Tiva fijr^o-ai 
 jroTE e'l orou ToaoiJTos woXe/ios KariaTr), that no one may ever ask the 
 reason, why, &c. Thuc. I, 23. Cf. Dem. Cor. 295, 13 ; Eur. Orest. 
 1529. 
 
 Eemakk. The Remark which follows § 15, 1 applies also to the 
 Aorist Infinitive. 
 
 Note 1. Eor a discussion of the time denoted by the Infinitive 
 when it has the article and also a subject, see Appendix, 11. 
 
 Note 2. Xpaa, draiplo), Bea-iriCm, and other verbs signifjang to 
 give an oracular response, ai-e sometimes followed by the Aorist (as 
 well as by the Present) Infinitive, which expresses the command, 
 advice, or warning given hy the oracle. These verbs here simply 
 take the ordinary construction of verbs of commanding and advising. 
 E.g. 
 
 Xpapevc^ Se Tffl KuXaw avelXfv 6 Beos, ev rfj tov Albs rg peyurrn 
 iopTTJ KaTaXafie'tv Ttjv 'ABrjvaiav aKporroXiv, that he should seize. 
 Thuc. I, 126. But we find dvetXev ea-ea-Bai in Thuc. I, 118. 
 'EKexp1'''o T^P Toia-i Sn-apTiriTijin, j) AaKe8aipx)va avauTTaTov yc- 
 via-Bai, rj tov ^amXia (T!f)kav djroXca-Bai. Hdt. VU, 220, 
 'EBea-TTia-e nopla-ai .... Koi ela-ibeiv. EuR. Iph. Taur. 1014. 
 So "E e t TT e 04 ... . voia-ca ijr' dpyaXerj (jiBla-Bai . . . . tj vira 
 Tpiifo-ai 8ap.rivai, Hie diviner told him that he must either die by 
 
32 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 23, 1 
 
 painful disease at home, or perish at the hands of the Trojans. U 
 Xin, 667. So after XRV'^I^'^'' Flat. Kep. HI, 415 C. 
 For the Present see § 15, 1. N. 2. 
 
 Note 3. The Present of mnds elfu, I am the cause, is often used 
 with reference to tho past, where logically a past tense should be 
 used ; as airiof eori rot)™ Bavflv, he is the cause of his death, instead 
 of oirtos ^v TovTco 6avelv, he was the cause of his death. This often 
 gives an ordinary Aorist Infinitive after tliis form the appearance 
 of a verb of past time, like the Aorist Infinitive in indirect discourse. 
 This will be explained in each case by mentally substituting a past 
 tense for the present. E. g. 
 
 AiTtot oSv fliri Koi vfiiv iroWSiv ^iri yjrev<r6ijvai Ka\ ifj aSiKat 
 yi TLvas ano\ia6ai, they are the cause why you were deceived 
 and some even perished (i. e. they caused you to he deceived and 
 some even to perish). Lys. de Arist. Bon. 156, 28. § 51. TeSvaa-iv' 
 oi di ^coiTes atrioi Bavetv. SoPH. Ant. 1173. "H fioi firjrpi fiep 
 Bavfiv fiovjj fieraiTios . SoPH. Trach. 1233. 
 
 For the construction of the Infinitive see § 92, 1, Note 2 (end). 
 
 2. Secondly, the Aorist Infinitive in indirect dis- 
 course is used to represent an Aorist Indicative of the 
 direct discourse, and therefore denotes a momentary or 
 single action, which is past relatively to the leading 
 verb. E. g. 
 
 ^ria\u rovTo noirja-at , he says that he did this (i. e. he says tovto 
 iiroirjaa). "Etprj tovto iroirjaai, he said that he had done this (i. e. 
 he said tovto iitoirjtra). <brjiTfi Touro noirjaai, he will say that he 
 did this (i. e. he will say tovto inoirja^ii). 'O Kvpus Xe'-ycrat yevl(T6ai 
 Kafi^va-ea, Cyrus is said to have been the son of Cnmbyses. Xen. Cyr. 
 I, 2, 1. TlaXatOTarot \syovTai iv fifpfi TLi/t ttjs ^mpa^ KuxXtuTrfS 
 olKTJa-ai, they are said to have settled. Thuc. VI, 2. Huav wonroi 
 aliTo'is fir) npodvfiuis <T<j>i<n nefiyj^ai & eirfjv^av, they were suspected 
 of not having sent them with alacrity what they did send. Thuc. 
 VI, 75. 
 
 Note 1. The principle stated, in § 15, 2, N. 1, will decide in 
 doubtful cases whether the Infinitive stands in indirect discourse or 
 in the construction of § 23, 1. 
 
 Note 2. Verbs and expressions signifying to hope, to ex- 
 pect, to promise, and the like, after which the Infinitive in 
 indirect discourse would naturally be in the Future (§ 27, N. 
 3), as representing a Future Indicative of the direct discourse, 
 sometimes take the Aorist (as well as the Present) Infinitive. 
 (See § 15, 2, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 'EtXjTfTo Kvios apeaOai. he was hoping to obtain glor^. D. XH 
 
§ 23, 2.] AOKIST INFINITIVE. 33 
 
 407. ndXtj/ efioK 5 Trapos oijTTOTe rfKiriirfv nadc^v. EuR. Here. F. 
 746. Ei yap KpaTfjareiav ra yaurtK(5, to ^¥f)yLov tjXitl^ov padiats 
 XeipiiiTa<r6ai,they hopedto subdue ithegium. Jhuc. IV, 24. OiiS 
 Hv iXms rjv avTa ,SeX -to) yevccrdai, there would not he even a hope of 
 their becoming better. Dem. Phil. I, 40, 18. 'Ek p,kv tov kokSh irpdr- 
 Tetv Tas TToXeis p-era^oKris rvj^e'iv ein to ^sXtlov sIkos eortv, e/c fie tov 
 TravTairacL .yeveaOai dvatTTUTOu Koi. TOiV Koivav iXTTidav aTe prjd^vat, 
 Lycukg. in Leoer. p. 155, 30. § 60. (Cf. below, fXTris e'/c tov KOKms 
 Trpd^ai /zeroTTf (Tei.- .) Y7ro(r)^6pevos pr] TrpoaOev Travaratrdat, irpXv 
 avToiis Karaydyoi oiKaSe, having promised not to stop until he had re- 
 stored them to their homes. Xen. An. I, 2, 2. 'YneirxeTo poi ^ovXei- 
 (TatrBai. Id. II, 3, 20. 'HTreiXijerav duonTe'ivai dnavTas Toiis iv 
 Tg oUia. Xen. Hell. V, 4, 7. 
 
 Note 3. In all the cases which belong under Note 2, the lead- 
 ing verb by its own signification refers to the future, so that the 
 expression is seldom ambiguous: thus ujrea-p^ero iroirja-ai can never 
 mean anything but he promised to do, although the Aorist Infinitive 
 apjiears to represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse, 
 contrary to § 15, 2, N. 1. The case is different, however, when the 
 Aorist Infinitive follows verbs whose signification has no reference 
 to the future, like vopl^a, otopm, or even <f)rjpi, and still appears to 
 represent a Future Indicative; e. g. where in Arist. Nub. 1141* 
 Sutda-aa-Bai <j>a(ri pot is said to mean, they .my they will bring an 
 action against me, while just below, vs. 1180, Brjo-nv to novraveld (jtaai 
 pot means, they say they idll deposit the Prytaneia. Still, unless we 
 decide to correct a large number of passages, against the authority 
 of the Mss. (which is actua;lly done by many critics, especially 
 Madvig), we must admit even this anomalous construction; al- 
 though it is to be considered strictly exceptional, and is, moreover, 
 very rare in comparison with the regular one with the Future or the 
 Aorist with ac. E. g. 
 
 *aro yap Tia-aa-dai dXetras, fir he said that he should punish the 
 offenders. Od. XX, 121. (In II. HI, 28, we have in most Mss. and 
 editions daro yap Tia-ea-dai oKiirrjv, in precisely the same sense. 
 Cf. II. TIT, 366.) Kai outm ov pepijfacrBai '\irplr]v (sc. diracpivaTo) • 
 napiO-ea-Bai yap /cat avTos Kai aXKovs a^eiv, and (he answered) 
 that Apries should not blame him ; fir he would not only be present 
 himself, but would bring others. Hdt. H, 162. (Notice the strange 
 transition from the Aorist (?) to the two Futures.) ^ijo-iv ov&k ttjv 
 Aws 'Eptv niSto aKTj^aarav ipitoimv irx^Belv.' Aesch. Sept. 429. 
 Olpai yap viv iKeTeCtrai raSe, I think of imploring. EuR. Iph. Aul. 
 462. (Here Hermann reads iKfTeiirew, by conjecture.) 'Empia-av 
 tmBepfvoi paStas KpaTrjaai, they thought they should gain the victory, 
 Thuc. II, 3. KopiCa, fjv imrevs yevtopai, av6pumot Trrrjvbs yevetrdai.. 
 Xen. Cyr. IV, 3, 15. Toiro fie oietqi o! paKurra yeveaBai, ei o-oi 
 
 * I find diKda-ea-eai here in Cod. Par. 2712, and by correction in 2820. 
 (1872.) 
 
34 USE OP THE TENSES. [§ 23, 4 
 
 Note 4. Verbs like Xeya or eiirov, when they signify to ccm- 
 mand, can bo followed by the Aorist (as well as the Present) Infini- 
 tive in its ordinary sense, refesring to the future ; as has beun stated 
 in § 15, 2, N. 3. E. g. 
 
 *Q ^iXoi, ^St) fiev Kev cyav emoiiu Koi afifuv jivtjirniptov is ofuKoii 
 aKovTio-ai, now I would command you to Join me in hurling, &c. 
 Od. XXn, 262. napaBovvai Xiyd, he tells us to give her up. 
 Akist. Av. 1679. 
 
 § 24. The Aorist Participle regularly refers to a 
 momentary or single action, which is past with refer- 
 ence to the time of its leading verb. E. g. 
 
 TuCra TToiijcravTts airtKBeiv jSouXowai, having done this, they 
 uish to go away. Tavra elnovrfs aTnjXBov, having said this, they 
 went away. Oi iroWoi (fmtvovrai ^vvcXBovres, not many appear 
 to have joined in the expedition- Tunc. I, 10. Boiuroi ol e| Api^s 
 a.va(rT,dvT£s Trjv BoiaTiav rnKqiTav, Boeotians who had been driven 
 from Ame settled Boeotia. Thuc. I, 12. 'Ai^ikcto bevpo to jrXoioi», 
 yvovTtiiV rStv Ke<ba\\r]V(av, avriirpaTTOvros tovtov, .... KaraTrXeiv, 
 the CephaUenians having determined to sail in, although this man op- 
 posed it. Dem. in Zenoth. 886, 1. (Here ■yvdj/roji' denotes time past 
 relatively to acpixeTo, and avTiirpaTToiTos time present relatively to 
 yvovTiov, which is its leading verb. See § 16, 1. 
 
 Note 1. When the Aorist Participle is used to contain the 
 leading idea of the expression, with \av6diia, to escape the 
 notice of, Tvy^dva, to happen, and <j>6dva>, to get the start oj 
 (§ 112, 2), it does not denote time past with reference to the 
 verb, but coincides with it in time. Thus tXaOov dirfXBovrtt 
 means they went away secretly ; ovk ?0fl;j(rai/ dTte\66vTes, no soon 
 er were they gone ; ctv^ov tia-eXfldwres, they came in by chance, or 
 they happened to come in. E. g. 
 
 OuS' &pa KipKTjv e\66vres e'X^flo/ifx, nor did we come without 
 Circe's knowledge. Od. XII, 17. 'E\a6ev [avr^f] Atpdevra wdvra 
 Koi Kora^X ex ^«' "'■<') everything took fire and loas consumed before 
 she knew it. Thuc. IV, 133.^ 'Ecjieri ope^dnevos, he aimed a blow 
 first. II. XVI, 322. Ov yap tj>Br) /ioi avfi^aaa ij arux'a, kol 
 inex^lprjcrav, for no sooner did this misfortune come upon mc, tJian they 
 'undertook, he. Dem. Eubul. 1319, 8. SxpoTta ou n-oXXiy Irux* /Jf'xpi 
 'la-OiMv nape'kdova-a, an army of no great size had by chance 
 marched as far as the Isthmus. Tiiuc. VI, 61. "Erv^e Se Kara tovto 
 Tov KMpov i\6av, and he happened to come just at that nick of lime. 
 Id. VII, 2. 'OXi'ya np6s to lUWovra rv^nv Trpd^avrcs (so. 
 ^yovvrai), they think they have chanced to accomplish only a litiU in 
 comparison with tlieir expectations. Id. I, 70. 
 
S 24] AOKISr PARTICIPLE. 35 
 
 Bou^oi/i>)i' fix \a6f1v avTov direXBrnv, I shoula Jke to get a\:ay 
 mthoui his knowing it. Xen. An. I, 3, 17. Tovs avdpirnovs X^o-o/ieK 
 fTTtTTf (TOXTes. Icl. VII, 3, 43. EuXaj3fi(r5at napaKc\ficre(T6e a\- 
 AijXoiff, fjif] irepa tov beovros (To^oiTfpoi, yexo/icxot X^trcTe hLa(^6apev- 
 res, lest, having become wiser than is proper, you shall become cor- 
 rupted before yoi. know it. Plat. Gorg. 487 D. (Here yevoixevoi is 
 an ordinary Aorist, past with reference to the phrase Xijo-eTe Stacjida- 
 pevres.) 'OinroTepos ke (^dgo'tx ope^ajicvos XP'"^ Kokov, whichever 
 shall first hit, &c. II. XXUl, 805. 
 
 The last four examples show that this use of the Participle was 
 allowed even when the whole expression referred to the future. 
 
 Note 2. A use of the Aorist Participle similar to that 
 noticed in Note 1 is found after ircpiopdoj and l(f>opda> {irepie'idov 
 and eweiSov) to allow, and occasionally after other verbs which 
 take the Participle in the sense of the Infinitive (§112, 1). 
 In this construction the Aorist Participle seems to express 
 merely a momentary action, the time being the same that the 
 Aorist Infinitive would denote if it were used in its place 
 (§ 23, 1). E. g. 
 
 IlpoaSe^opfvos tovs 'AOrivalovs KaTOKvfjoreiv Trepuielv avrfiv [r^v yrji'2 
 Tfir/deia-av, aveXx^v, expecting that they would be ummlling to allow their 
 land to be ravaged, &c. Thuc. II, 18. But in II, 20, we find the 
 Aorist Infinitive, rjXm^fv rifv yrjv ol< hv nfpubelv rprjB^vai, refer- 
 ring to precisely the same thing. M^ vrepii'Sijre ^p-eas Siatjidapev- 
 ras, do not allow us to be destroyed. Hdt. IV, 118. Oi) pij a-' e'yo) 
 rrepi6yfropai aweXdovra, I will by no means let you go. Akist. 
 Kan. 509. *ETXi)<rax ciriSelv .... iprjprfv pev t^x iroXiv yevopivrjv, 
 r^x Se x'"/""' "^"P^""/*'"'/''' • • • • awavra bk tov noKtpov itepi rrjV 
 iraTpiSa Tqv avTotv yiyvopevov. Isoc. Pan. p. 60 D. § 96. (Here 
 the Aorist Participle denotes the laying waste of the city (as a single 
 act), while the Presents denote the continuous ravaging of the coun- 
 try, and the gradual coming on of a state of war. This is precisely 
 the difference that there would be between the Present and Aorist 
 Infinitive in a similar construction. See note on the passage, added 
 to Felton's 3d ed. p. 99.) So irpaBivTa rX^xai, endured to be sold. 
 Aesch. Agam. 1041 ; and aveipas eVXa, Sept. 754. 
 
 Instances occur of the Aorist Participle in this sense even with 
 other verbs, denoting that in wliich the action of the verb consists ; 
 as ev y iiroirjaas avapvfia-as pe, you did well in reminding me. 
 Plat. Phaed. 60 C. So KaTa-^ri4>i(rap€voi, Apol. 30 D. 
 
 Remark. If a reference to the past is required in the Participle 
 with the verbs mentioned in Notes 1 and 2, the Perfect is used. 
 The Present can of course be used to denote a continued action or 
 ■tate. £. g. 
 
 'Eriyxavov ajrri 7rapei\r]<j>6Tes ttjv apxrjv, they happet,ed to hat* 
 
36 USE OP THE TENSES. L§ 24. 
 
 iust received their authority. Tiiuc. VI, 96. ''Eiiv t.9 rjiiKriK&s ti 
 Tvyxavji TTjV ttoKiv. Dkm. Cor. 268, 23. 'BXadoiteu f/fias avToi/i 
 n-aiStav ovSev Siacjjf povT e s. Plat. Crit. 49 B. 
 
 Note 3. In snf-h passages as uiyuiKoyTiaav rois 'Adrfvatots Tfix7 
 T€ 7r€ pLiXovres KOI va^ig Trapadovres (pofjov re ra^apevoi, 
 Tiruo. I, 108, the Aorist Participle is used in its ordinary sense, 
 being past with reference to tlie time of the heyinning of the peace 
 to which i>fi.o\oyr}trav refers. The meaning is, they obtained terms 
 of peace, on condition that they should first (i. e. before the peace 
 began) tear down their walls, &-c. (Such passages are Thuc. I, 101, 
 108, 115, 117. See Kriiger« Note on I, 108, and Madvig's Bemer- 
 hmgen, p. 46.) 
 
 Note 4. For the nse of the Aorist InfinitiTe and Participle with 
 av, see § 41, 3. For the Aorist Participle with €xa>, as a circumlo- 
 cution for the Perfect, as BavpAaat c;^co, see § 112, N. 7. For the 
 rare use of the Aorist Participle with 'daoiuu as a circumlocution for 
 the Future Perfect, see § 29, N. 4. 
 
 Future. 
 
 § 95. 1. Tlie Future denotes that an action -will 
 take place in time to come ; as ypa^co, I shall write, or 
 I shall be writing. 
 
 Note 1. The action of the Future is sometimes continued, 
 and sometimes momentary: thus e^a may mean either I shall 
 have, or / shall obtain ; Sp^a, I shall rule, or / shall obtain 
 power. E. g. 
 
 Jlpaypardovrai Siras ap^ov<Tiv , they take trouble to gain power. 
 Xen. Rep. Laced. XIV, 5. Aiatpfrtov olrives ap^ovaiv t€ koi 
 ap^ouTat, we must distinguish between those who are to rule and 
 those who are to be ruled. Plat. Kep. Ill, 412 B. 
 
 Note 2. The Future is sometimes used in a gnomic sense, to 
 denote that something will always happen when an occasion offers. 
 
 E. g. 
 
 'AvTip 6 <j)evyaiv Ka\ naXiv paxfi<rfrai. Men AND. Monost. 45. 
 
 Note 3. The Future is eoraetiraes used to express what will 
 hereafter be proved or recognized as a truth. This is analogous to 
 the use of the Imperfect, § 11, N. 6. E. tr. 
 
 $(\o(ro(/>as fiplu e err at 6 p.(X\av KoXor Kayadbi eo-eaSai (^uXaJ, he 
 toiU prove to be a philosopher. Plat. Rep. 11, 876 C. See Od. II. 270. 
 
 Note 4. The Future is sometimes used in juesticis of doubt, 
 where the Subjunctive is more common (§ 88). E. s;. 
 
§ 25, 1.] FTJTURB INDICATIVE. 37 
 
 Tj SiJTa bpaf-fv ; jiTjTip rj ^ove-ia-ofiev ; what can we dof shall 
 we kill our motherf Eur. El. 967. Ilol ns Tpi^erai; whither 
 shall one turn f Ae^ea-Be , ^ amtafitv ; will you receive Mm, or shall 
 we go away f Plat. Symp. 2 1 2 E. EtV e'y«' <tov <}>ei<roiiai ; Akist. 
 Acharu. 312. Ti oSv iroirjcroiiev; jrorepov eis rqv iroKiv ndvrae 
 TovTovs TvapaSe^ofifda ; what then shall we do f Are we to receive 
 all these into the stale? Plat. Rep. Ill, 397 D. 
 
 Note 5. (a.) The second person of the Future may express a 
 concession, permission, or obligation, and is often a mild form of 
 imperative. E. g. 
 
 Tipos Tavra ir panels ciov &v SeXris, you may act as you please. 
 OOPH. O. C. 956. ndvTws 8c TovTo hpaceis, but by all means do 
 this. Arist. Nub. 1352. So in the common imprecations, dn-oXelo-fif, 
 oi/iii|€irflf, may ■■you perish, &c. Xtipi S' ou ilraiae ts nore. EuR. 
 Med. 1320. 
 
 ^ (6.) A few instances occur in which the Future Indicative with 
 uri expresses a prohibition, like the Imperative or Subjunctive with 
 uH§86;. E.g. 
 
 Tavrrjv, av fioi xP^fSe (ruftjSoiXco, 0wXd|eTf t^v nla-rtv, Koi pfj 
 SuvXrja-fa-Be ei8eVai, it. i. X., if you follow my advice, keep this 
 faith, and do not wish to knoto, &c. Dem. Aristoc. 659, 15. 'Eax Se 
 cu (l>povTJT€, Koi vvvL TOVTO <f)av€p6v iroLrj(T€Te, Kal fiTjdf p,Laif a-uTtns 
 aSetav SaxTfre. Lys. Phil. § 13. (In the preceding examples 
 <j>vXd^fTe and jroi^a-fre belong under a.) Kai rd/ia Tcixr] p-ijT' 
 iyavap^ai TiviS Or) a- ova' 'Axaiois, lir)6' 6 \vpea>v c/ios. SoPH. Aj. 
 572. Sevov dBiKT/aeis /iijSfTroTe Kaipov \a^i>v. Menan. Mon. 
 397. So perhaps jirjbiv TmvS ipeis KaTa jrroXn/. Aesch. Sept. 
 250. 
 
 These examples are sometimes explained by supposing an ellipsis 
 of offtoj from the common construction mas fJ-r) tovto epeis (so. 
 o-Kon-fi)- See § 45, N. 7. 
 
 Remark. The use of the Future stated in Note 5 gives the 
 most satisfactory explanation of the Future with oi pf) in prohibi- 
 tions, especially in such expressions as ou /i^ XaX^o-eis, dXX* axoXou- 
 6r)(Tets ipe, do not prate, hut follow me, and ov pr/ jrpoo-oiVtis X^'P"' 
 ^^3' a^ei Tren-Xcoi/, do not bring your hand near me, nor touch mi 
 garments. See § 89, 2, with Notes. 
 
 Note 6. The Future sometimes denotes a present intention, 
 expectation, or necessity that something shall be done, in which 
 sense the periphrastic form with piWa is more common. E. g. 
 
 Ti dta(j>€povai Tav e^ dvdyKrjs KaKoiraOovvTOiv, et ye 7r€ivr]<T0V{rt 
 Koi 8iiffTj(Tov(ri Kal ptyrja-ovtri Kai dy pviTvrj<Tovaiv; i. e. if 
 they are to endure hunger and thirst, &c. Xen. Mem. II, 1, 17. 
 (Here ct pJWova-i rreiv^v xai Sii^^v, &c. would be more common, as 
 in the last example under § 25, 2.) Aipe nKrJKTpov, ei p»x^^ > ^oisa 
 your spur, if you are going to fight. 'Arist. Av. 759. The impDP 
 
38 DSE OF THE TENSES. [§ 25, I 
 
 tance of this distinction will be seen -wten we come to conditional 
 sentences. (See § 49, 1, N. 3.) 
 
 A still more emphatic reference to a present intention is found 
 in the question Ti Xe'lfis; what dost thou mean to say? often found 
 in tragedy; a&'Qfioi,, ri Xe'^eti; ^ yap eyyis iari irov ; EuK. Elec. 
 1124. 
 
 Note 7. For the Future Indicative and Infinitive, with Sv, 
 see § 37, 2, and § 41, 4. For tht= Future Indicative in protasis, 
 see § 50, 1, N. 1 ; in relative clauses expressing a purpose, &c., see 
 § 65, 1 and 2 ; with ov fixi, see § 89. 
 
 2. A periphrastic Future is formed by fiiXKfo and the 
 
 Present or Future (seldom the Aorist) Infinitive. This 
 
 form sometimes denotes mere futurity, aud sometimes 
 
 intention, expectation, or necessity. E. g. 
 
 Me'XXfi TovTo itpoTTfiv (or jrpd^eiv), he is about to do this, or he 
 intends to do this. So in Latin, facturus est for faciet. M e X X <■> vpMs 
 SiSd^eiv, odfv itoi ri Sia^oKri yeyovt. Plat. Apol. 21 B. AerjtTci 
 Tov TOLovTov TLVos del iirKTrdrov, ei /ieXXet t} iToKiTfla aw^€(rBai, 
 if the constitution is to be preserved. Plat. Kep. HI, 412 A. 
 
 Note 1. The Future Infinitive after /icXXu forms the only 
 regular exception to the general principle of the use of that 
 tense. (See § 27, N. 1.) The Future and the Present seem 
 to be used indiscriminately. 
 
 Note 2. The Imperfect (seldom the Aorist) of /icXXoi is 
 used to express a past intention or expectation. E. g. 
 
 KuKX(u\|r, ovK ap' efieXXts dvaKxiSos dvSpbs eralpovs eSjievat ev 
 a-irrji y\a(j}vp^, you surely were not intending to eat, &c. Od. IX, 475 
 'E/ieXXo'i/ <r' &pa Kivqa-eiv iyi>, I thought I shoxjdd start you oj. 
 Abist. Nub. 1301. See II. II. 36. 
 
 § 26. The Future Optative in classic Greek is used 
 only in indirect discourse after secondary tenses, to 
 represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. 
 Even here the Future Indicative is very often retained 
 in the indirect discourse. (See § 69.) E. g. 
 
 *Y7r«7ra)i' raXXa ort avrhs raKti -n pd^oi, a)^fTo, having suggested 
 as to what remained, that he would himself attend to the affairs there, 
 he departed. Tuuc. I, 90. (Here 7rpa|oi represents Trpd^a of the 
 direct discourse, which might have been expressed by npd^ei in 
 the indirect quotation. See in the same chapter of Thucydides, 
 iiroKpivdjifvoi on nep.ylrovatv , having r plied that they would sendt 
 
§ 2 6. J FUTURE OPTATIVE. 39 
 
 ■where n-eji^ouv mightiave been used.) Et riva ^evyovra 'Xri'jroiTo, 
 irporiyopfvfv on at woKeiiia xpriiroiTO. Xbn. Cyr. Ill, 1, 3. 
 (Here the announcement was ft nva 'Xrjyjrofi.at, as iroKeiiia xPW°H-"i-} 
 E\cyev on CTOipos fir) riye'i(r9at avrdis fir Tit AsXto, '4v6a iroWa 
 X^i/roii'TO. Xex. An. VII, 1, 33. AxpeBevris €(f) are ^vyypa-^at 
 vofiovs, Kaff ovcmvas 7ro\iT€v<TotvTO, having been chosen for the 
 ■purpose of making a code of laws, by which they were to govern. Xen. 
 Hell, n, 3, 11. (Here we have an indirect expression of the idea 
 of the persons who chose them, of which the direct form is found 
 just before (II, 3, 2), fSo^e TpiaKovra avdpas iXitrOat, oi Toiis TraTptovs 
 vofiovs ^vyypd^oviTi, Kad' our jroXiTfucrouin.) 
 
 Remark. The term indirect discourse here, a* elsewhere, miist 
 be. understood to include, not only all cases of ordinary indirect 
 quotation, introduced by on or as or by the Accusative and the 
 Infinitive, after verbs o{ saying and thinking, but also all dependent 
 clauses, in any sentence, which indirectly express the thoughts of 
 any other person than the writer or speaker, or even former thoughts 
 of the spejiker himself. (See § 68.) 
 
 Note 1. The Future Optative is sometimes used in final 
 and object clauses after secondary tenses ; but regularly only 
 with on-ffli or ojroir /it) after verbs of striving, &c., occasioually 
 ■with fi}\ (or oTTcos tirj) after verbs of fearing, and very rarely (if 
 ever) in pure final clauses. As these clauses express the pur- 
 pose or fear of some person, they are in indirect discourse 
 according to the Remark above. (See § 44, 2.) 
 
 (a.) The most common case of the Future Optative in sen- 
 tences of this class is ■with oiias or o%as fiij after secondary 
 tenses of verbs signifying to strive, to take care, and the like ; 
 the Future Indicative in this case being the most common 
 form in the construction after primary tenses, vyhich here cor- 
 responds to the direct discourse. Thus, if any one ever said 
 or thought, (TKOTTO) onas tovto yevxfireTai, I am taking care that 
 this shall happen, we can now say, referring to that thought, 
 £<r(£oVfi oiras tovto yevqa-oiTo, he was taking care that, this 
 should happen, changing the Future Indicative to the Future 
 Optative (§ 77). E. g. 
 
 *E(r(co7r« o Mfi/f/cX^s mvas fifi ea-otTo airais, aXX ecroiTO avr^ 
 Saris ^avTO. Tf yrj poTpo(j)r)a-oi koX TeXevrTjcravTa Bd'^oi avrov, 
 (cai f Iff Tov fTTf ira xpovov to. vofii^opeva airra tt o i ij (7 o t . ISAE. de 
 Menecl. Hered. § 10 (11). 'Ep.rixavo>p-eSa Snas p-r/Seis .... 
 yuma-oiTo, vop.iova-<. 8e jravrfs, K. r. X., we were strioing that no one 
 should know, &c., but that all should think, &c. Plat. Tim, 18 C 
 (Here the second verb, i/r/uofm, is retained in the Future ladicai 
 
40 USB OP THE TENSES. L§ ^^' 
 
 tive, while the other, yvaxrtTai, is changed «) the Optative.) See 
 alfO Plat. Tira. 18 E. Mi/8«V oiov SKKo ijir]xavaa-6ai, rj ottws . . . • 
 Se^oivTo. Plat. Kep. IV, 430 A.^ (See § 15, 3.) 'EmixfUIro 
 
 43. Other examples are Plat. Apol. 36 C ; Xen. Cyr. VUI, 
 1, 10, HeU. Vn, 5, 3 ; Isae. de PhUoet. Hered. p. 59, 41. § 35. 
 
 In this construction the Future Indicative is generally retained, 
 even after secondary tenses. See § 45. 
 
 (S.) Tlie Future Optative is seldom found with fiif or oitm 
 liri after secondary tenses of verbs of fearing, as here the 
 Future Indicative is not common after primary tenses. E. g. 
 
 Oi jiovov irepi lijs j3ao-dj/o« Km T^y SiKTjr eSfSoiKfi, aWa Koi nfflX 
 Tov ypafiiMaretoVj ottws firj viro tov Mfve^evov (rvWr](p6r](rqtro. 
 Isoc. Trapez. p. 363 B. § 22. (Here the fear was expressed origi- 
 nally by OTTfflS iJ-fj avWrj(j}dii(TeTai.) Kare^aKf to 'UpaKkcarSm Tfi^os, 
 ov TOVTO (bo^oviievos, firj tlvss .... ivopfv<TOLVTO enX rfiv eKcivo-j 
 bvvap,iv. XeN. HeU. VI, 4, 27. 'AXXa koX tovs Bfoiif an fSfiaas 
 wapaiuvhvvtveiv, liif ouk 6p6S>s avTO jroi^erots. Plat. Euthyphr. 
 15 D. 
 
 Here the Present or Aorist Optative, corresponding to the same 
 tenses of thu Subjunctive after primary tenses, is generally used. 
 See § iS. 
 
 (c.) In pure Final clauses (§ 44, 1) it would be difficult to find 
 an example of ojrmr with the Future Optative, in which the weight 
 of Mss. authority did not favor some other reading. Such is the 
 case in Xkn. Cyr. V, 4, 17, and in Dem. Phaenipp. 1040, 20. Still, 
 there can be little doubt of the propriety of such a construction, as 
 the Future Indicative with on-uj was m use (though rare) after 
 primary tenses. (§ 44, 1, N. 1.) 
 
 The single example cited for the use of the simple /lij with the 
 Future Optative in a pure final clause is Plat. Rep. HI, 393 E : 
 'Ayafiipvaiv rjypiaivev, ivTfWo/ievos vvv re dmivai KaX avdis iifj iXSeiv, 
 firj aiTW TO re aK^irrpov koX ra rov dead irrefip^Ta ova ejrapiceaot. 
 (Here there is another reading, iirapKeaeuv, of inferior authority, 
 which is adopted by Bekker.) If the reading iirapKecroi is retained 
 (as it is by most editors), it can be explained only by assuming that 
 Plato had in his mind as the direct discourse ufi ovk eVapKcVeu 
 We must remember that Plato is here paraphrasmg Homer (D. I, 
 •25-28), and by no means literally. The Homeric line is Mij vv 
 Toi ov xpai<Tp.Tj iTKrinTpov Koi aripjia Bfolo. 
 
 The other final particles, Iva and as, which seem never to take 
 the Future Indicative, of course do not allow the Future Optative. 
 (See § 44, 1, N 1.) 
 
 Note 2. Many authors, especially Thucydides, show a decided 
 preference for the Future Indicative, even where the Future Opta- 
 tive might be used. As the tense was restricted to indirect dis- 
 
S 27. j FUTURE INFINITIVE. 41 
 
 course, it was a less common form than the Present and A.orist, and 
 for that reason often avoided even when it was allowed. 
 
 § 97. The Future Infinitive denotes an action 
 which is future with reference to the leading verb. 
 E.g. 
 
 'Ea-fo-dal (ftTjcri, he mys (hat he mil be ; ecrca-dat e<f>ri, he said that he 
 would he ; eafaBai (j)rj(rfi, he will say that he will be. IloXXotis y« 
 caea-Bai %\eyov tovs i6e\ii<T0VTas, they said that there would be tnan) 
 who would be wUling. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 2, 26. 
 
 Note 1. The most common use of the Future Infinitive 
 is in indirect discourse, after verbs of saying, thinking, &c., to 
 represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. (See 
 the examples above.) In other constructions, the Present and 
 Aorist Infinitive, being indefinite in their time, can always 
 refer to the future if the context requires it (§§ 15, 1 ; 23, 1) ; 
 60 that it is seldom necessary to use the Future, unless 
 emphasis is particularly required. 
 
 Therefore, after verbs and expressions whose signification 
 refers a dependent Infinitive to the future, but which yet do 
 not introduce indirect discourse, as verbs of commanding, 
 wishing, &c. (§ 15, 2, N. 1), the Present or Aorist Infinitive 
 (not the Future) is regularly used. Thus the Greek would 
 express they wish to do this not by /Soi^oktoi toOto iroirjafiv, 
 but by /SouXoKTot TovTo iToieiv (or noiTitrai). See examples 
 under §§ 15, 1 and 23, 1. So, when the Infinitive follows 
 So-Tf and other particles which refer it to the future, or is used 
 to denote a purpose without any particle (§ 97), — and when 
 it is used as a noun with the article, even if it refers to future 
 time, — it is generally in the Present or Aorist, unless it is 
 intended to make the reference to the future especially em- 
 phatic. See examples in Chapter V. 
 
 A single regular exception to this principle is found in the 
 Future Infinitive after /icXXm (§ 25, 2). 
 
 Note 2. On the other hand, when it was desired to make 
 the reference to the future especially- prominent, the Future 
 Infinitive could be used in the cases mentioned in Note 1, 
 contrary to the general principle. 
 
 (a.) Thus we sometimes find the Future Infinitive aftei 
 
42 USE OP THE TENSES. [§ 27. 
 
 verbs and expressions signifying to wish, to he unwiUing, to 
 intend, to ask, to be able, and the like, where we should expect 
 the Present or Aorist. This was particularly a favorite con- 
 struction with Thucydides. E. g. 
 
 'ESerjBr/a-av 8e Koi rSiv Meyapiav vava) a<j)as ^viiirpoire iiyreiv 
 Thuc. I, 27. 'EfioiXovTO irpoTiiiaprjaea-dai. Id. VI, 57. Td 
 tTTofia aiiTov dicvooivTO K\jj<Teiv. Id. VII, 56. 'Ec/jtf/i""" M'" '"1^ 
 jraa-ris ap^etv, ^orjdetv 8e Spa evvpcnws /SouXd/iecot Tois iavrav 
 ^yyeviai koi lu/t/id^ou. Id. VI, 6. (Here ^oriBelv follows the rule.) 
 ToS rais vavaX prj adv/iLfiv imxciprfcrfLv, to prevent them from being 
 vnlhout spirit to attack them in ships. Id. VII, 21. Our' aiTOKa>\i- 
 treiv Sivaroi ovres. Id. Ill, 28. Ec ns fir tovto ava^dWercu jroi^- 
 o-etv Ta beovra-i if any one postpones doing his duty as far as this. 
 Dem. 01. Ill, 31, 1. (The ordinary construction would be ava^ciK- 
 Xerat iroLeiv or 7rot^o"at.) Ovre rav irpayovtov pefivrjadai [Bei'] oihe 
 rav \€y6vT<ov ave^fuQai, vSpov re 6r](T€iv Koi ypd^eiv, K.r.\, 
 Dem. F. L. 345, 27. (Here we have Sti Bfjcrcii).) IIoXXov Sea 
 epavTov ye dSiKrjaeiv kol kut epavToO epelv avTos. PlaT, Apol. 
 37 B. In Abist. Nub. 1130 we find, uras /SouXqo-frai k&v ep 
 AiyviTTa Tv^elv av paXKov ^ KpXvat KaKa)s^ perhaps he will wish thai 
 he might (if possible) find himself by some chance in Egypt, rather tlian 
 wish to Judge unfairly. (Here rvxelv av is used in nearly the same 
 sense as the Future in the second example. In this example and 
 some others here given there seems to be an approach to the con- 
 struction of indirect discourse.) 
 
 See also Thuc. IV, 115 and 121 ; V, 35 ; VTI, 11 ; VIU, 55 and 
 74. In several of these jiassages the Mss. vary between the Future 
 and Aorist, although the weight of authority is for the Future. See 
 Kriiger's Note on Thuc. I, 27, where the passages of Thucydides 
 are collected. 
 
 (i.) In like manner, the Future Infinitive is occasionally 
 used for the Present or Aorist, after more and in the other 
 constructions mentioned in Note 1, to make the idea of futui'ity 
 more prominent. E. g. 
 
 UpoKaXea-dpevos es \6yovs 'inmav, aare ijv ^i;8e>> dpeaKov Xeyi/, 
 troKtv avTov Karaa-Trjo-e iv e's to Tfip^os on condition that he 
 
 TO drpaves toC KaTopSaxre tv eniTpeij/avres, having committed to hope 
 what was uncertain in the prospect of succexs. Thuc. U, 42. (Here 
 KaTopOaicreiv is more explicit tlian the Present Karopdovv would be 
 TO d(jiaves toO KoropBovv would mean simply what was uncertain in 
 regard to success.) To pev ovv e$e\ey^eiv airov SappSy koI ,rdm 
 irioTf um, / have courage and great confidence as to my convicting him. 
 Djsm. F. L. 342, 2. (Here most of the ordinary Mss. read «|eXeyv«i>«.) 
 
§ 29.] FUTURE PERFECT. 43 
 
 Note 3. The Future Infinitive is the regular form aftef 
 verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, &c., since it stands here 
 in indirect discourse (§ 15, 2, N. 1). E. g. 
 
 Tpairiv S TkirtTo Sviibs vrjas ivnrpr\tTfiv Kreveeiv ff rjpaat 
 Armour. II. XV, 701. 'Yno t t(j\€TQ Koi Karevevaev dwae fi€vaL< 
 H. XIII, 368 Uaidd re a-ov npoaBoKa Toi dnovofrTria'fip . HdT. 
 1,42. Km TTpoa-SoKav xph Sea-iroa-eiv Zqvos Ttua ; AeSCH. Prom. 
 930. 'HXTTifev yap paxriv ea-fir&ai. TlIUC. IV, 71. 'Ev iXiridi 
 (OK TO. retxri aipfftrfiv. Id. VII, 46. Tok <TTpaTr)y6v irpotrioKW ravra 
 irpd^etv. Xen. An. Ill, 1, 14. 'E(C tovtov v7re<rxeTO pijxavqv 
 ■napk^eiv. Id. Cyr. VI, 1, 21. 2u yap ijrfcrxou (r]Triaeiv. Pl,AT. 
 Kep. IV, 42 7 E. So SiwfjLOToi ?! private LV, SoPH. Phil. 594. 
 
 Yet all of these verbs can take the Aorist or Present Infinitive 
 without apparent change of meaning. They form an intermediate 
 class between verbs which take the Infinitive in indirect discourse 
 and those which do not. For examples of the Present and Aorist, 
 see § 15, 2, N. 2 ; and § 23, 2, N. 2. 
 
 § SI 8. The Future Participle denotes an action 
 vrliich is future with reference to tlie leading verb. 
 E.g. 
 
 ToO.ro 7roti;o"o)i' epx^rat, rj\0ev or iXevtrerai, he comes, went, or 
 wUl come, for the purpose of doing this. Olba airov roCro Troi^o-oi'ra, 
 / know that he will do this : olSa roCro iroiijaoiv, I know that J shall 
 do this. So gSetj/ auroK roCro jrot^o-oKra, I knew that he would do 
 this. 
 
 Note. For the various uses of the Future Participle, and ex- 
 amples, see Chapter VI. 
 
 PuTUEE Perfect. 
 
 § 29. The Future Perfect denotes that an action 
 will bf already finished at some future time. It is thus 
 a Perfect transferred to the future. B. g. 
 
 Koi fie eav t^eXeylgi, ovk ax6eo'6r)iTopai troi, aKKa peyiaros evep- 
 yerns Trap' f'/ioi dvayeypdyjfei, you vnll have been enrolled as the 
 greatest benefactor. Plat. Gorg. 506 C. *Hv 8e pri yevrirai, ;xarij» 
 «/ioi KtKXava-eTat, aii 8' iyxavav Tedvrj§€is. J shall then have 
 had my whipping for nothing, and you mil have died. Akist. Nub- 
 1435 
 
 Note 1. The Future Perfect often denotes the conlin 
 
44 CUE OI" THE TENSES. [% 29. 
 
 nance of an action, or the permanence of its results, in future 
 time. E. g. 
 
 T^j Svvaiieas h diSiov toIs imyiyvofievms p-vfi/iTi KaraXfXei- 
 ^frai, the mejnory of our power will be left to our posteniy forever. 
 Thuc. n, 64. (Compare § 18, 2.) 
 
 Note 2. The Future Perfect sometimes denoteB the cer- 
 tainty or lilceUhood that an action will immediately take place, 
 which idea is still more vividly expressed by the Perfect (§ 17, 
 Note 6). 'E.g. 
 
 El 8e irapiKBoiV «9 oana-ovv Svvatro SiSa^ai, jrSs 6 vapav (bo^ot 
 XeXiaerai, all the present fear will be at once dispelled. Dem. 
 Symmor. 178, 17. (Here the inferior Mss. have Xt'Xvrat, which 
 would have the same force, like oXwXa quoted in § 17, N. 6.) 
 *pafe, (cal neiT pa^erai, speak, and it shall be no sooner said than 
 done. Arist. Plut. 1027. EvBiis 'Apialos d^cor^let, mcrrc <j>i\os 
 Tljuv oiJSets XeXcii/feTai. Xen. An. II, 4, 5. 
 
 Note 3. The Future Perfect can be expressed by the 
 Perfect Participle and co-o^at. In the active voice this com- 
 pound form is the only one in use, except in a few verbs 
 E.g. 
 
 'Av toCt' fiSm/ifj/, KoiTahlovTa itrofieBa fyvioKSrts koi Xoymn 
 fiaralmv oTrijXXay/iei/ot, we shall have already resolved to do our 
 duty and shall have been freed from vain reports. Dem. Phil. I, 54, 
 22. (See § 17, N. 2). 
 
 Note 4. A circumlocution with the Aorist Participle and 
 ia-ofiai. is sometimes found, especially in the poets. E. g. 
 
 Oij aiamria-as co-fij Sopn. O. T. 1146. Av7nj5«s tirei. SoPH. 
 C. 816. 
 
 Note 5. (a.) When the Perfect is used in the sense of a Present 
 (§ 17, N. 3), the Future Perfect is the regular Future of that tense. 
 E. g. ^ 
 
 KcKX^crojuae, fiffivrjo'ofiai, d^eor^^o), / shaU be naTned, I shall re* 
 fuember, I shall withdraw, &c. 
 
 (b.) With many other verbs, the Future Perfect differs very 
 slightly, if at all, from an ordinary Future. Thus, Trfnpaavfiai is the 
 regular Future Passive of irmpairKa. Still, where there is another 
 form, the Future Perfect is generally more emphatic, and may be 
 explained by Note 1 or Note 2. 
 
 Note 6. The Future Perfect of the dependent moods is rare, 
 except m the verbs referred to in Note 5. When it occure, it 
 presents no peculiarity, as it bears the same relation to the Indicative 
 which the corresponding forms of the Future would bear. L. g. 
 
§ 30, l.J GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 4A 
 
 TavTa (i^T]iTi) ireirpa^eaSai bvo'iv fj Tpimv r]jifpav, lie say> thai 
 the.^ things will have been accoviplished within two or three days. 
 Dem. F. L. 364, 18. (Here the direct discourse was Trenpa^eraL ) 
 
 Remark. It must be remembered that, in most cases in which 
 the Latin or the English would use a Future Perfect, the Greeks 
 use an Aorist or even Perfect Subjunctive. (See § 18, 1, and § 20, 
 N. 1, with the examples.) 
 
 Gnomic and Iteeatite Tenses. 
 
 § 30. 1. The Aorist and sometimes the Perfect In- 
 dicative are used in animated language to express 
 general truths. Tliese are called the gnomic Aorist and 
 the gnomic Perfect, and are usually to be translated by 
 our Present. 
 
 These tenses give a more vivid statement of general truths, 
 by employing a distinct case or several distinct cases in past 
 time to represent (as it were) all possible cases, and implying 
 that what has occurred will occur again under similar circum- 
 stances. E. g. 
 
 KdrSav' ofias S r dipyos avrjp 5 Tf jroXXa iopy&s, both, alike must 
 die. II. IX, 320. 'Oore koi SKkljiov avbpa (bofiel Koi d^fiXero 
 vUt]v, who terrifies, and snatches away. II. XVII, 177. (See Note 2.) 
 Bi'a 8e Koi jieya^av^ov f<r<j)a\fv iv xpo"^- PiND. Pyth. VIII, 20. 
 So(^oi 8e /leXXowTa rpiTalov avffxov ep-aOov, ov8' iwo KepSei /SXa/Sei'. 
 PmD. Nem. VII, 25. Kai irj <j)i\ov tis eKzav' ayvoias viro. Aesch. 
 Supp. 499. 'AXXo to TOiaira fls ytiv aaa^ Koi ^paxyv XP^""" 
 avTCX^'^ ""' <r(t>6Spa ye rjvdrjaev irn rais e\ni<Tiv, hv TvxVi ''"? 
 ypova 5e (j><o parai Kai irepX avra Karap pel. Dem. 01. H, 21, 1. 
 (See Note 2.) 'Hv Spa .... a(j)a\ii<Tiv, avreXiriiravTes aWa iirXfj- 
 paxrav Trjv j^pfiav, they supply the deficiency (as often as one occurs). 
 ThUC. I, 70. 'Hv Se Tts TOVT<av n rrapa^aivrj, irjfilav airois iiri- 
 6ea-av, i. e. they impose a penalty upon every one who transgresses. 
 Xen. Cyr. I, 2, 2. Aeivav t arjp.a Trviviidrav iKoip,i<Tf a-Tevovra 
 irovTov. Soph. Aj. 674. Mi' fip-epa tov fiiv KaBelXev vyjfodev, tov 
 8' rjp' avto. EUE. Ino. Fr. 424. "Orav o'EpoJS iyKparia-Tepos yevrirai, 
 SiacfiSelpei re jroXXa itai fiS'iKricrev. Plat. Symp. 188 A. "Oraw 
 Tts toCTTrep ovTos laxvo-fi, tj irpatTj] 7rpo0ao"£s Kai p.iKpov irraLana airavra 
 ai/ex"''''"''^ *"•"' Ste\va-fv. Dem. 01. II, 20, 27. EjrfiSui' Tit 
 irap efwv /iddrj, iav /liv /SouXtjt-qi, dvoSeSaKev 8 iyca irpaTTOjiai, 
 apyvpiov, iav 8c fir], e\6a>v fls Upov o/idcrar, ocou av <j)fi ti^ia (ivai to 
 uadripMTa, toctovtov KaTedrjKcv. Plat. Prot. 328 B. (Here the 
 Perfect and Aorist are used together, in nearly the same sense, he 
 pays.') IlaXXol Sia So^ov koi ttoXitoc^)' Siva/uv fuyaka KaKa weirovBa 
 
46 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 30. I 
 
 o-iv, i. e. many always have suffered, and many do suffer. Xej^. 
 Mem. IV, 2, 35. XA Se ^iij ijimiiiv avavrayaviaTia eluoia Ten 
 HTjTai. Thuc. II, 45. 
 
 Remark. The gnomic Perfect is not found in Homer. 
 
 Note 1. The sense, as well as the origin of the construo- 
 tion, is often made clearer by the addition of such words as 
 voWAkh, ^Sr,, or oO™. Such examples as these form a simplu 
 transition from the common to the gnomic use of these 
 tenses : — ' 
 
 IloXXa trrpaTojrfSa ^87 tire (rev in eKaaaovav, i. e. many cases 
 have already arisen, implying, it often happens. Thuc.II, 89^ MeX- 
 "Kav y larpos, rfi votra StSoiis XP""""' 'acoT' ^Sij /iSXW ij Tefiatv 
 Xpoa. Eur. Frag. 1057. UuXXaius ex""" "* ™®' TavayKcua vvv avpiuv 
 eTtXovTrja', (bote x"^^?"^^ rpecjieiv, i. e. cases have often occurred 
 in which such a man has become rich the next day, &c. Philem. Fr. 
 Inc. 29. 'Advp.ovvTes avSpes oviro) Tponawv e(TTr]<Tav. Plat. Crit. 
 108 C. Oiifieis eirXovTTjaev raxeas SUaios av. Menand. Col. Fr. 
 6. (Kriiger, § 53, 10, A. 2.) 
 
 Note 2. General truths are more commonly expressed in 
 Greek, as in English, by the Present. (See § 10, N. 1.) 
 Examples of the Prssent and Aorist, used in nearly the same 
 sense in the same sentence, are given under § 30, 1. The 
 gnomic Aorist is, however, commonly distinguished from the 
 Present, either by being more vivid, or by referring to an 
 action which is (by its own nature) momentary or sudden, 
 while the Present (as usual) implies duration. See the second 
 and sixth examples under § 30, 1. 
 
 Note 3. An Aorist resembling the gnomic Aorist is very 
 common in Homer, in similes depending on past tenses, where 
 it seems to stand by assimilation to the leading verb. It is 
 usually to be translated by the Present. E. g. 
 
 "HpHTE 8' ois ore Tis Spvs ijpiTrev, and he fell, as when an oak falls 
 (literally, as when an oak once fell). II. XVI, 389. 
 
 Note 4. It is very doubtful whether the Imperfect was ever 
 used in a gnomic sense, §o as to be translated by the Present. 
 
 Note 5. An instance of the gnomic Aorist in the Infinitive la 
 found in Soph. Aji 1082 : — 
 
 'Oirou 8' v/Spiff" Spav ff, & /SovXfrai, napj, 
 Tairriv i»d^iff ttji' ttoXiv XP°''V "■"" 
 '££ oiplonv Spafwvaav ft ^v86v irco-ctv. 
 
§ 30, 2.] GNOMIC AND ITEKATITE TENSES. 47 
 
 Here Tieafiv represents eireo-tv in the direct discourse ; the sense 
 being, believe that that city must at some time fall. (See Schneide- 
 win's note.) So probably in Plat. Phaedr. 232 B : fiyovixei/cp .... 
 Sia^opas yevo^evTjs Koivfiv a^<j)oT€poLS KaTaarrjvaL Trjv (7vp.<f>opdv, 
 
 Even the Aorist Participle seems to be occasionally used in the 
 same sense; as in Tiruc. VI, 16 : oldaTois toiovtovs Iv fikv t& kot' 
 avToiis ^lif Xvjrijpouy &vTas, rS>v fie meira avBpmnav trpocnroiijiriK 
 f uyyfKEi'as Ti(ri (cat lifj ovaav KaTa\i7r6vTas, I knoiv that such men, 
 although in their own lifetimes they are offensive, yet often leave to some 
 who come after them a desire to claim connexion with them, even where 
 there is no ground for it. 
 
 Note 6. The gnomic Perfect is found in the Infinitive in Dem. 
 01. II, 23, 14: c( Sen; aaxjipav fj SUaios, . . . . Trapefflcrdat Ka\ 
 ev ov^cuos eivai fiepei tqv tolovtov (<prja-lv), suck a man is always thrust 
 aside, and is of no account. 
 
 ■ 2. The Imperfect and Aorist are sometimes used 
 ■with the particle av to denote a customary action, 
 being equivalent to our phrase in narration, " he would 
 often do this" or " he used to do it." E. g. 
 
 Att/pcarmv av avTovs t'i \iyotev, I used to ask them (I would ask 
 them') what they said. Plat. Apol. 22 B. Ei tikes iSoicv Trrj roij 
 atftrnprns i-itiKpaTovvTas, avedapa-ria-av av, whenever any saw their 
 friends in any way victorious, they would be encouraged (i. e. they were 
 encouraged in all such cases'). Thtjc VII, 71. TIoXXoikis ^kou- 
 Ta/icv av n Kaxais i/xas ^ov\evaap,evovi fiiya wpayfia, we used very 
 often to hear you, &c. Arist. Lysist. 511. E? tu avra jrepl tov 
 dvTiXeyoi firi&ev e\aiv aa(j>es Xeyeiv, eVl Trjv VTrodeaiv ejravTJycv hv 
 iravra tov \6yov, he always brought the whole discussion back to the 
 main point. Xen. Mem. IV, 6, 13. "Gwote TrpotrjSXEif'eK rivas t&v iv 
 
 Tois ra^ea-i, totc piv flirtv hv, a nv&pes, K. T.\ rore 8' av ev 
 
 &\\oic &v ?Xf Iek. Xen. Cyr. VII, 1, 10. 
 
 Tliis construction must be carefully distinguished from that with 
 av in ordinary apodosis (§ 49, 2). For the iterative Imperfect 
 transferred to the Infinitive, see § 41, N. 3. 
 
 Note 1. (a.) The Ionic iterative Aorist in -itkov and 
 -a-Kopriv expresses the repetition of a momentary action; the 
 Imperfect with the same endings expresses the repetition of a 
 continued action. E. g. 
 
 "AXXouj pei» yap irdihas ipovs jrdSas &kvs *A;ftXXfir irepvao'x i '"' 
 Tiv eXea-KC. H. XXIV, 751. 'O/ctar eXflot 6 NeiXos im octoi 
 ir!)}ceas, apSea-Ke Atyvirrov r^v evepBe Me'p^tos. Hdt. II, 13. 
 
 (S.) In Homer, however, the iterative forms are sometimes 
 used in nearly or quite the same sense as the ordinary formg ; 
 thus fo-M in Homer does not differ from ^v. E. g 
 
48 USE OP THE TENSES. [§ 30, 2. 
 
 Aafjp avT (lios ea-KC KVvamSos, f" ttot erjv ye- 11. HI, 180. Or oi 
 vXjja-iov iff, ^uXiora de /uv (j>i\efcrKfi>. 0(1. VII, 171. 
 
 Note 2. Herodotus sometimes uses the iterative forms in -ir/toK 
 and -o-Ko>>;i' vith ai/, in the construction of § 30, 2. (He uses the 
 ■['.ierative Anrist in only two passages, in both with av.) E. g. 
 
 ^OLTcova-a KXaietTKC hv kcu. ohvp€<TK€TO. Hdt. in, 119.^ Es 
 rovTovs oKtos eK6ot 6 SkuXtjs, t-^c /lev CTpanrjV KaTa\f'nve(T ice tv ra 
 fpoaareita, i vtos 6e okok eXBoi es t6 Te'ij(OS .... Xd^cir-xe av 
 'EXX^vifio eVJ^ra. HdT. IV, 78. 
 
 Dependence op Moods and Tenses. 
 
 §351. 1. In dependent sentences, where the con- 
 ftniction allows either a Subjunctive or an Optative, 
 the Subjunctive is used if the leading verb is 'primary, 
 and the Optative if it is seoondary. (See § 8, 2.) E. g. 
 
 UpaTTova-tv a av ^oiXavrai, (hey do whatever they please: but 
 eirpoTTov a povXotvTo, they did whatever they pleased. 
 
 2. In like manner, where the construction allows 
 either an Indicative or an Optative, the Indicative 
 follows primary, and the Optative follows secondary 
 tenses. E. g. 
 
 AiyovcTLv oTi tovto jSouXovrat, they say that they wish for this , 
 tKe^av OTi tovto Pov\oivto, they said that they wished for this. 
 
 Note 1. To these fundamental rules we find one special 
 exception : — 
 
 In indirect discourse of all kinds (including sentences 
 denoting a purpose or o^'ect after "va, /«}, &c.), either an In- 
 dicative or a Subjunctive may depend upon a secondary 
 tense, in order tliat the mood and tense actually used by the 
 speaker may be retained in the indirect discourse. (See § 69.) 
 E. g. 
 
 'Einev on fiovXerai, for eiirev on ^ovXoiTo, he said that he 
 wished (i. e. he said ^ouXo^iai). 'Ec/jojSeiTo p,ri tovto yevr)Tai, for 
 i<j>ofie'iTo p.}) TOVTO yivoiTO, he feared lest it should happen (i. e. he 
 thought, cj>aPovpat /iij yf'»i;7-ai). (See § 44, 2.) 
 
 Note. 2. An only apparent exception to these rules occurs 
 when either an apodosis with av, or a verb expressing a wish, stands 
 ui a dependent sentence. In both these cases the form which would 
 
§ 32.J DEl'iiNDENCB OF MOODS AND TENSES. 49 
 
 have been required in the apodosis or in the wish, if it had been 
 independent, is retained without regard to the leading verb. It 
 wifl be obvious from the principles of such sentences (Chapter IV), 
 that a change of mood would in most cases change the whole 
 nature of the apodosis or wish. E. g. 
 
 *E-yo) ovK otS' OTTcttff av Tis cra^eoTepov inibe l^eievt T do not 
 hnow how any one could show this more clearly. Dem. Aph. I, 828, 
 23'. Aet yap eKcivt^ tovto ev t^ yvaip.7i 7rapaaT^(raif as vp^ls eK r^ff 
 dfjieXeias ravrtjs .... ttras hv opfiTitraiTe. Dem. Phil. I, 44, 25, 
 El 8' ufifly oKXn Tt •yi/<o<rf<r5f, o firj yevoiTO, r'lva outrBc amrjv ^XV" 
 f^nv; Dem. Aph. II, 842, 14. 
 
 The learner needs only to be warned not to attempt to apply the 
 rules § 31, 1, 2 to such cases as these. See § 44, 1, N. 3 (6). 
 
 Note 3. A few other unimportant exceptions will be noticed 
 as they occur. See, for example, § 44, 2, Note 2. 
 
 Remark. It is therefore of the highest importance to ascertain 
 which tenses (in aU the moorls) are to be considered primary, and 
 which secondary; that is, which are to be followed, in dependent 
 sentences, by the Indicative or Subjunctive, and which by the 
 Optative, where the rules of § 31 are applied. The general prin- 
 ciple, stated in § 8, 2, applies chiefly to the Indicative, and even 
 there not without some important modifications. 
 
 § 33. 1. In the Indicative the general rule holds, that the 
 Present, Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect are primary 
 tenses, and the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist are secondary 
 tenses. 
 
 2. But the historical Present is a secondary tense, as if 
 refers to the past ; and the gnomic Aorist is a primary tense, 
 as it refers to the present. 
 
 See the first example under § 10, 2, where an historical 
 Present is followed by the Optative ; and the sixth, seventh, 
 and eighth examples under § 30, 1, where gnomic Aorists are 
 followed by the Subjunctive. 
 
 3. (a.) The Imperfect Indicative in protasis or apodosis 
 denoting the non-fulfilment of a condition (§ 49, 2), when it 
 refers to present time, is a primary tense. E. g. 
 
 'Eypa<j)ov av rjXiKa vfias €v tt n i ij a- tn , el ev yhfiv, I would tell you 
 in my letter how great services I would render you, if I knew, &c 
 Dkm. F. L. 353, 24. Xlavv av i^o^oip.riv, fifj airoprj(ra(Ti \6yu>v. 
 Vlat. Symp. 193 E. 'Ec^o^ou/ii/i' av atf>6Spa Xfyeii', p-T) Sof tti, 
 K. T. X., i should be very much afraid to speak, lest I should seem, &c. 
 Plat. Theaet. 143 E. Tair &.v 7S1) Xeyfiv infx^ipovv, Iv elh^Ti 
 Dem. Aristocr. 623, 11. 
 
 3 » 
 
50 USE OP THE TENSES. [§ 32 
 
 (5.) On the other hand, the Aorist Indicative in the same 
 sense in protasis and apodosis, and also the Imperfect when it 
 refers to the past, are secondary tenses. E. g. 
 
 'AXXa Koi Toiis 8eois hv eSeuras irapaKivSweveiv, fir) ovk opdms avro 
 noirjo-ois- Tlat. Euthyph. 15 D. 'AXV oiSe fifra iroKKSiv ixaprv- 
 piov dnoSi8oi)s eiK^ ns hv kiritTTevev, iv ei tis yiyvoiTO &ia<\>opa, 
 KO/xtaaa-dai pabtais Trap' vplv dvvijrai. Dkm. Onet. I, 869, 18. 
 (Here the Subjunctive dvvrjrM will be explained by § 44, 2, but the 
 Optative shows that the leading verb is secondary.)* 
 
 § 33. All the tenses of the Subjunctive and Imperative 
 are primary, as they refer to present or future time. E. g. 
 
 'Eirea-d' oirrj av tis j/yrj rat, follow whithersoever anyone leads 
 the way, Thuc. II, 11. 
 
 § 3J:. As the Optative refers sometimes to \h& future and 
 sometimes to the past, it exerts upon a dependent verb some- 
 times the force of a primary, and sometimes that of a secondary 
 tense. 
 
 "When it refers to the past, as in general suppositions after 
 tl and relatives, depending on past tenses (§§ 51 and 62), it is 
 of Course secondary, like any other form which refers to past 
 time. 
 
 When it refers to the future, it is properly to be considered 
 primary. In many cases, however, a double construction is 
 allovyed : on the principle of assimilation the Greeks preferred 
 the Optative to the Subjunctive in certain clauses depending 
 
 * It is flifficiilt to determine the question whether the secondary tensea 
 of the Indicative in this construction (§ 32, 3) are primary or secondary in 
 their effect on the dependent verb, as sentences of nearly every class de- 
 pendinp: upon them take by assimilation a secondary tense of the Indica- 
 tive. (So in most final clauses, § 44, 3 ; in protasis after ei, § 49, 2 ; and 
 after relatives, ^ 64.) There remain only indirect quotations, and the few 
 eases of final clauses that do not take the Indicative by assimilation ; but 
 both of these have the peculiarity of allowing the Indicative and Subjunc- 
 tive, when the writer pleases, to stand as they were in the direct discourse, 
 instead of being changed to the Optative. Madvig {Bemerhingen, p. 20) 
 classes them all as primary forms, considering the two examples of the 
 Optative after the Aorist, quoted above, 4 32, 3 (6), as exceptions. But 
 these cannot bo accounted for on the supposition that both Aorist and 
 Imperfect are primary : they are, however, perfectly regular, if we con- 
 sider the present forms primary and the past tiorms secondary (as in other 
 cases) ; while the other examples in which the Indicative or Subjunctive 
 follows the past fortns may all bo explained on tlie principle of 4 31, 
 Note 1. 
 
§ 34.] DEPENDENCE OP MOODS AND lENSES. 51 
 
 on an Optative, the dependen! verb referring to the future like 
 the leading verb, imd differing little from a Subjunctive in 
 such a position. This assimilation takes place regularly in 
 protasis and conditional relative clauses depending on an 
 Optative ; but seldom in final and object clauses after Iva, oiras, 
 ■ Ml'. &c., and very rarely in indirect quotations or questions. 
 
 The three classes of sentences which may depend on an 
 Optative referring to the future are treated separately : — 
 
 1. (a.) In protasis and in conditional relative sentences 
 depending upon an Optative which refers to the future, the 
 Optative is regularly used to express a future condition, rather 
 than the Subjunctive. E. g. 
 
 'Eijjs (popriTos ovK &v, fl npda-a-ois KaXmf, you would he unendur- 
 able, if you should ever prosper. Aesch. Prom. 979. 'hvbpX Se k 
 OVK ft^fiE fieyas TeXafimjuos Alas, Ss Bvtjtos t eir) Km eSoi ArnirjTepos 
 aKTrjv. II. XIII, 321. USis yap av ns, a ye fir) eiricFTatTO, ravra 
 a-o(p6s eirj ; for how should any one be wise in those things which he did 
 not understand? Xkn. Mem. IV, 6, 7. Ae'oiro hv avrov jJveiv, co-re 
 (TV ane\6ois. Xen. Cyr. V, 3, 13. Ei arrodvri<rKoi fiev navra. Sera 
 Tov ^TJv /xeraXa/3ot, cVfiS^ Se djroBdvoi, jxevoi fv tovtko .... 
 2p' ov TToWfj avdyKT) Tf\evTS>VTa Trdma reBvdvai ; Pl.AT. Phaed. 72 C. 
 fls QTroXoiTo KOI aWos, o ns roiavrd ye pe(oi, may any other man 
 likewise perish, who shall do such things. Od. I, 47. Tedvairjv, ore fioi 
 lUfKen ravra /leXoi, may I die, when 1 (shall) no longer care for 
 these ! Mimn. Fr. I, 2. (Here orav /niKeri fieXrj might be used with- 
 out change of meaning. But on /ieXei, found in the passage as 
 quoted by Plutarch, would refer to the present in classic Greek.) 
 
 (S.) On the other hand, the dependent verb is sometimes in 
 the Subjunctive (or Future Indicative with cl), on the ground 
 that it follows a tense of future time. This happens especially 
 after the Optative with Sv used in its sense approaching that of 
 the Future Indicative (§ 52, 2, N ; § 54, 1, b.) E. g. 
 
 *iiv ovv p.d6T]S fioi Tovrov, ovK &v dnodoLrjv, if then you should 
 (sha/l) learn this for me, I would not pay, &c. Akist. Nub. 116. 'Hv 
 o"e d(j)€'Ktafiai, KdKiarT diroXolpj^v. Id. Ran. 586. 'Eyoj 5e ravnjp 
 fiev T7JV elpTjvrjv, ews av ets ^Adrjvaiayv \e LTrrjrat , ovSeiror av avfj.- 
 SouXfucrat/u iroiijiraaQai Tjj TrdXti, I would never advise the city to make 
 this peace, as long as a single Athenian shall be left. Dem. F. L. 345, 
 14. (Here etas \eiiroiTo would be the common form.) "Stirnep av 
 Vfiav eKOOTOs aiaxwdeijj t^v rd^iv X/TTfty riv av raxdfj ev rw TToXefxta, 
 as each one of you would be ashamed to leave the post at which he might 
 be placed in war. AESCHnf. Cor. § 7. (Here fjv raxdeir] would be 
 the more common expression.) TSk drrmordrtnv av eir, el ravra 
 hvvrfieis firi rrpd^ei Dkm. 01. 1, 16, 25. Many such examples may 
 be explained equally well by § 54, 1 (a). 
 
52 USE OF THE TENSES, [§ 34, 1. 
 
 Note. It will be understood that no assimilation to the Optative 
 can take place when the protasis (after «' or a relative) consists of a 
 present or past tense of the indicative, as in this case a change to 
 the Optative would involve a change of time. See § 64, Rem 2. 
 
 2, In final and object clauses after tva, Sntos, /x?}, &c., the 
 Subjunctive (or Future Indicative) is generally used when the 
 leading verb is an Optative referring to the future; the 
 Optative, however, sometimes occurs. The preference for the 
 Subjunctive here can be explained on the general principle 
 (§ 31, Note 1, and § 44, 2). E. g. 
 
 (Subj.) 'OKVoiriv av fls ra jrKoia iji^aiveiv, fiij Karabvari- <^o|3oi- 
 isifv S' av tSi fiyepiovi, eirecrBai, firi rjfias aydyfi o6ev ovx oiov re etrrat 
 e^e\6etv. Xen. An. 1, 3, 17. O'lofiai av vfias jieya omjaai to trrpd- 
 TevfiUf €t €7n^\rj6eLTjT€ ojras dvTi Tcttv aTroXaiKoTCitv its ra^tora trrpaTTj- 
 yoi Koi \o)(ayot dvTLKaTa<rTa6&(TLV' Xen. An, III, 1, 38. 
 
 (Opt.) Tleipiifirfv av firj irpoaa vii&v ctvai, Iva, ci jrou xaipos clri, 
 fiTKpaveiriv. Xen. Cyr. II, 4, 17. 'H (^vXax^ •yeXoia Tir av dmi- 
 votrOy el pr] fTvye cVi/ifAoIo OTTWff e^ioBev ri ftc^epotTO. Xen. 
 Oecon, VIl, 39. Other examples of the Optative are Aesch. 
 Eumen, 298 (eXdoi, oirms yeyoiTo) ; SoPH. Aj. 1221 (ottios npotrei- 
 TToipev) ; Soph. Phil. 325 ; JEuK. Hec. 839 ; Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 22. 
 
 Note. In relative sentences expressing a purpose the Future 
 Indicative is regularly retained, even after past tenses of the Indica- 
 tive. For exceptional cases of the Optative in this construction, 
 depending on the Optative with av, see § 65, 1, Notes 1 and 8. 
 
 3. In indirect quotations and questions, depending upon an 
 Optative which refers to the future, the Indicative is the only 
 form regularly used to represent an Indicative of the direct 
 discourse. But in indirect questions the Optative is sometimes 
 found representing a duMtative Sahjunclive of the direct 
 question (§ 88), E. g, 
 
 OiS' av CIS dvTfiTTOi i>s ov a-vpcfiepfi Tjj TrdXct. Dem. Megal. 202, 
 24, El ovv vvv diroScix^fir] riva xpfj {jyeXadat, . , . . ovK av 6jrd« ot 
 itoKlpioi %\6oiev ^ovKevetrBai fjpas Seot. Xen. An. UT, 2, 86. 
 
 OuK aw e^ois e^fXdiov 5 n XPV" •'■"wia, if you should idMraiD, 
 you would not know what to do with yourself. Plat. Grit. 45 B. Oix 
 av €;(oif ori\p^o-ato (raw™, dXX' iXtyytm'ijf av (cm x°<''P^'> ouK 'X""" 
 o Ti f iirots. Id. Gorg. 486 B. The direct questions here were n 
 Xpwpm ; — TL xp^creo/iat ; — ti ein-m j The Subjunctive can always 
 be retained in this construction, even after past tenses. See § 71, 
 
 Note. In Dem. Megal. 203, 12, we find a case of the Optative in 
 an indirect qiiotation : Ov yap t xtii/o' y av einoipfv-, i>s dvrdWd^aa-Bat 
 ^ov\olpf6 dvrmdKovs AoKtSaipoviovs dvA Oq^aiav There ai'S 
 
§ 35, 2.] DErENDENCE OP MOODS AND TENSES. 53 
 
 no other readings , and it is doubtful wTiether we must consider it as 
 an exceptional case of assimilation (we could not say this, that we 
 wished, &c.), or emend it, either by reading fiovXaficda (as proposed 
 by Madyig, Bemerk. p. 21), or by inserting av, which may easily have 
 been omitted in the Mss. before either avraKKi^ao-Oai or aj/riTriiAoif. 
 In Plat. Rep. VII, 515 D, we find in the best Mss. Ti tiv oUi a!n6p 
 elireiv, « tis aira Xc'yot oVi roTf /lev ewpa <l>Kvapias, viv 8e opdonpa 
 /SXeVoi, what do you think he would say, if any one should tell him 
 that all that time he had been seeing foolish phantoms, but that now he 
 sees more correctly f Some Mss. read ^XeVei. 
 
 _ In H. V, 85, TvSeiSriv ovk av yvoirjs ivoTepouTi lieretr), the Opta- 
 tive in the indirect question represents iieT€(TTi», bjit ouk av yvoirjt 
 here refers to the past, meaning you would not have known. (See 
 § 49, 2, N. 6.) 
 
 § 39. 1. The Present, Perfect, and the Futures in the 
 Infinitive and Participle regularly denote time which is merely 
 relative to that of the leading verb of the sentence. They are 
 therefore primary when that is primary, and secmidary when 
 that is secondary. E. g. 
 
 BouXcrat Xeyetv ri tovto i(TTiv, he wishes to tell what this is, 
 "ESouXcTO Xe'yeti/ ri toOto fir;, he wished to tell what this was. ^r]<nv 
 dkrjKoevai ri icrriv, he says he has heard what it is. 'Ecfiri aiajKoivai 
 ri eiij, he said he had heard what it was. ^rio\ TroLrjaetv 6 ti av 
 /3ouXijo-5e, he says he will do whatever you shall wish. 'Ecpri wot^- 
 aetv oTt/3ouXot(r6e, he said he would do whate^ you should wish. 
 
 Mevovcriv ^ovKofifvot ft£et>a( ri c'crrt. 'Epevov ^ov\6pfvoi tlSevai 
 ri €L7]. M.evova-iv dKrjKOores Tt itrriv. '''Epevov aKijKoores tl e'lrj. 
 M.evova'iv aKoviTopevoi Tt itrriv. 'Epevov dKava6p.evoi, ri e'/ij. 
 
 Note. When the Present Infinitive and Participle represent 
 the Imperfect (without av) they are secondary without regard to 
 the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 Has yap oltaBe SvirxfpSis OKOveiv, ei Ti'i ri X / y o t ; how unieill- 
 ingly do you think they heard it, when any one said anything ? See 
 this and the other examples under § 15, 3, and § 73, 2. 
 
 2. When the Aorist Infinitive in itself does not refer to any 
 definite time, it takes its time from the leading verb (like the 
 Present), and may be either primary or secondary. But when 
 it refers to time absolutely past, it is always a secondary tense. 
 E.g. 
 
 BouXeTQt yvStvai ri roCro itrriv, he wishes to learn what this is, 
 'EjSouXeto yvavai v-'. tovto tir), he wished to learn what this was, 
 (§ 23, 1.) 
 
 But d>ij(rt yvavai ri roSro eii), he says that he learned what thii 
 
54 THE PARTICLE 'AN. [§ 35, 2. 
 
 was (§ 23, 2). *E(j)ri yvmmi n tovto f ii; , he sou thai he had learned 
 what tills was. (Tvmvai. has the force of a primary tense in the first 
 example, that of a secondary tense in the others.) 
 
 3. The Aorist Participle refers to time past relatively to tlie 
 leading verb. It is therefore secondary when the leading 
 verb is past or present and the Participle refers to time 
 absolutely past ; but it may be primary when the leading verb 
 is future, if the Participle refers to lime absolutely future. 
 E. g. 
 
 'loTf ^fias e\66vTas "iva tovto iSoifiev, you know that we camt 
 thai we might see this. 'Yireirrmv TaWa on auTot Tanei irpa^oi, 
 »;(fTO. Thdc. I, 90. Tg fidariyi TUTrreV^w TrXijyas imo ktwvkos iv 
 dyopa, KTjpv^avTos lav evfKa fie Wei TiiTTTeaOcu. Plat. Leg. XI, 
 917 E. ■^ijttxav Selaas fifj SerjOelt] . . . rpecpei. AkisT. Vesp. 109. 
 
 4. The tenses of the Infinitive and Participle with an are 
 followed, in dependent clauses, by those constructions that 
 would have followed the finite moods which they represent, in 
 the same position. See § 41, § 32, 3, and § 34. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 THE PARTICLE "AN. 
 
 § 36. The adverb av (Epic kb, Doric tea) has two 
 uses, which must be carefully distinguished. 
 
 1. In one use, it denotes that the action of the verb 
 to which it is joined is dependent upon some condition, 
 expressed or implied. This is its force with the 
 secondary tenses of the Indicative, and with tlio 
 Optative, Infinitive, and Participle: with these it 
 forms an apodosis, and belongs strictly to the verb. 
 
 2. In its other use, it is joined regularly to el, if, and 
 U) all relatives and temporal particles, (and occasionally 
 to the final particles m, ottojs and o<f>pa,') when these 
 
§ 37, 2.] THE PAETICLE 'AN. 55 
 
 words are followed by the Subjunctive. Here it seems 
 to belong entirely to the relative or particle, with which 
 it often coalesces, as in eav, brav, e-TreiSav. 
 
 Remark 1. The rules, § 36, 1, 2, include only the constructions 
 which are in good use in Attic Greek. For the Epic use of av with 
 the Subjunctive in apodosis, see § 38, 2 ; for av with the Future In- 
 dicative, see § 37, 2. 
 
 Remark 2. There is no word or expression in English which can 
 be used to translate av. In its first use (§ 36, 1) we express it by 
 the mood of the verb which we use ; as jSoiJXoito Sv, he would mah. 
 In its second use, with'the Subjunctive, it has no force that can be 
 made perceptible in English. Its peculiar use can be understood 
 only by a study of the various constructions in which it occurs. 
 These are enumerated below, with references (when it is necessary) 
 to the more full explanation of each in Chapter IV. 
 
 § 37. 1. The Present and Perfect Indicative are 
 never used with av. 
 
 When this seems to occur, there is always a mixture of construc- 
 tions. Thus in Plat. Leg. IV, 712 E, iya 8e outoj vvv e^ai<f)VTis hv 
 ipwTTjSfXs ovTOis, oTTfp eiTTOv, ovK ^x^ cLTTelv, av was uscd With a view 
 to OVK &v e'Uoiiu or some such construction, for which oix exa> flirilv 
 was substituted : the meaning is, if J should swhlenly be asked, I 
 could not say, &c. So in Pi-AT. Men. 72 C, kuv fl jroXXal . . . elmv, 
 €V ye n eiSor Tairbv naa-ai exouo-i, i. e. even if they are many, still 
 (it would seem to follow that) they all have, &c. Examples like the 
 last are very common in Aristotle, who seems to use kclv el almost 
 like KOL el, without regard to the mood of the leading verb. 
 
 Remark. Constructions like those mentioned in § 42, 2, Note, 
 must not be referred to this head. For ovk av jioi hoKei eivai is 
 never ii would not seem to me to he ; but always, it does not seem to 
 me that it would he; av belonging to elvai. 
 
 2. The Future Indicative is often used with av or 
 Ke by the early poets, especially Homer. The addition 
 of av makes the Future more contingent than tliat 
 tense naturally is, giving it a force approaching that of 
 the Optative with av in apodosis (§ 39). E. g. 
 
 'AXX' iff, eyi) Se Ke Toi Xa/jiVmi/ /xiav oiTKorepaav Soxnu, oTTViefievai 
 KOI a-fiv KeK\rja-6at aKomv. II. XIV, 267. Kai Ke Tis 2)8' epeei 
 Tpdiwv xmeprjvopeovTcov, perhaps some one mil thus speak. II. IV, 17G. 
 O Se Kev KexoXaia-eTai, Sv Kev iKapat, and he will perhaps he angry 
 to whom I come. II. I, 139. El 8' aye, Toi/s av eyav ijnoijroimi ' o'l 
 Si mBeaBatv. D IX, 167. Hap ep^iye Ka\ SWoi, oi <e p-e Tip.!}- 
 
56 THE PARTICLE 'AN. [§ 37, 2. 
 
 aovai, 1. e. wh> will honor me when occasion offers. B. I, 174. E. 
 8' 'Obva-fiis iXSoi Kal lkoit h Trarpida yalav, atyjrd k f avv oj jraiSl ^iag 
 aitoTia-eTai avSpSv. Od. XVU, 539. (In this passage the Future 
 ■with Kc is used nearly in the sense of the Optative, corresponding to 
 the Optatives in the Protasis. ' AiroriafTai may also be Aorist Sub- 
 junctive, by § 38, 2.) Mutoy Si ris av epel. PiND. Nem. VII, 68. 
 Kov CT en <f)6viov o^o^ai al/ia. EuB. Elect. 484. (So the 
 Mas.) 
 
 Note I. The use of & with the Future Indicative in Attic Greek 
 is absolutely denied by many critics, and the number of the ex- 
 amples cited in support of it have been greatly diminished by the 
 more careful revision of the texts of the Attic writers. Still several 
 passages remain, even in the best prose, where we must either 
 emend the text against the authority of the Mas., or admit the con- 
 struction as a rare exception to the general rule. E. g. 
 
 AlyvTTTiovs Sc . . . . ovx opa irota dvvdp.€t ovfifxa^ca xpriirApLevoi 
 fmKKov av KoXdaeaBe Trjs vvv uiiv epm ovotjS' Xen. An. II, 5, 13, 
 'AjTurxvpnTa/ievoi 8i (ra<j)es av [KaTa<7Tij(TfTf] avTols (itto tov icrou 
 u/uv jioiXov irpoir(}>epea6at. Thuc. I, 140. (Here most editors read 
 Karaarria^aiTf, on the authority of inferior Mas.) *E</)i} ovv tow 
 ep(OTap.€vov fiTTfii', ovj( rjKeL^ cj>dvat^ ovd* av rj ^€i devpo^ nor will he be 
 likely to come hither. Plat. Rep. X, 615 I). (Here the only other 
 reading is rj^oi, which is of coui-se corrupt.) 'E^i; .... Xeymv 
 jrpos ifias i>s, fl Sia(pev§oiiir)v, ^8rj a v vpav oi vUls .... iravrcs 
 navrairaiTi biacpOaprjcrovTai. Id. Apol. 29 C. 
 
 The construction is perhaps less suspicious in the dramatic chorus, 
 which belongs to lyric poetry. See the last example under § 37, 2. 
 See § 41, 4, on the Future Infinitive and Participle with av. 
 
 Note 2. The form kc is much more common with the Future in 
 Homer than the form av. 
 
 3. The most common use of av with the Indicative 
 is with the secondary tenses, generally the Imperfect 
 and Aorist, in apodosis. It here denotes that the condi- 
 tion upon which the action of the verb depends is twt or 
 was not fulfilled. See § 49, 2. 
 
 Note. The Imperfect and Aoriat are aometimes used with 
 av in an iterative aenae ; which construction must not be con- 
 founded with that just mentioned. See § 30, 2. 
 
 § 38. 1. In Attic Greek the Subjunctive is used 
 with av only in the cases mentioned in § 36, 2 ; never 
 in independent sentences. See § 47, 2, § 50 1, § 51, 
 
§ 41'1 THE PARTICLE AN. 57 
 
 and § 60, 3. For the occasional use of av in final 
 clauses, see § 44, 1, Note 2. 
 
 2. In Epic poetry, when the Subjunctive is used 
 nearly in the sense of the Future Indicative (§ 87), 
 it sometimes takes /ce or av. The combination forms an 
 apodosis, with a protasis expressed' or understood, and 
 is nearly or quite equivalent to the Future Indicative 
 with av. B. g. 
 
 El fie K€ fifi Sa>tt>i7iv, eym Si Kfv avT&s c\afiai, and if they do not 
 give her up, I will take her myself. H. I, 137. (Cf. H. I, 324.) 
 See § 50, 1, Note 2 (a). 
 
 Note. This Epic use of « or Su with the Subjunctive must 
 not be confounded with the ordinary construction of § 38, 1. 
 In the latter the Sv is closely connected with the particle or 
 relative, whUe in the former it is joined with the verb, as it is 
 with the Indicative or Optative. It in fact bears more resem- 
 blance to the ordinary Optative with Sv in apodosis in Attic 
 Greek, than to any other Attic construction. 
 
 § 39. The Optative with av always forms an apo- 
 dosis, to which a protasis must be either expressed or 
 implied. It denotes what would happen, if the con- 
 dition (expressed or implied) upon which the action 
 of the verb depends should ever be fulfilled. See § 50, 
 2, and § 52, 2. 
 
 Kemare. Such constructions as are explained in § 44, 1, N. 3, 
 a, and § 74, 1, N. 2, are no exception to this rule, as there &» does 
 not belong to the verb. 
 
 Note. The Fviure Optative is not used with av. See § 26. 
 
 § 40. Tlie Imperative is never used with av. 
 
 Note. All passages formerly cited for av with the' Imperative 
 are now emended on Mss. authority, or otherwise satisfactorily ex- 
 plained. See Passow, or LiddeU and Scott, s. v. 'Av. 
 
 §41. The Infinitive and Participle can be used 
 with av in all cases in which a finite verb, if it stood in 
 their place, would be accompanied with av. This com 
 
 3* 
 
58 THE PAETICLE 'AN. [§ 41, 1. 
 
 bination always forms an apodosis (except in its itera- 
 tive sense, Note 3) : it can never form a protasis, as the 
 finite verb never has av joined to itself in protasis. (See 
 § 36, 2.) 
 
 Each tense of the Infinitive and Participle with av 
 forms the same kind of apodosis which the correspond- 
 ing tense of the Indicative or Optative would form in its 
 place. The context must decide whether the Lidicative 
 or the Optative is represented in each case. 
 
 1. The Present Infinitive and Participle (which represent 
 also the Imperfect, by § 15, 3, and § 16, 2), when they are 
 used with av, may be equivalent either to the Imperfect Indica- 
 tive with av or to the Present Optative with Sv. They can 
 represent no other form, as no other form of the Presont is 
 used with av in apodosis in the finite moods. E. g. 
 
 ^riaiv aiiTovs iXfvdepovs av eivai, fi tovto eirpa^av, lie says (hat 
 (hey would (now) be free, if they had done this (chai av representing 
 ijaav av, § 37, 3). ^ijtrly avTovs iXevdepovs av eivatj cl tovto 
 irpa^eiav, he says that they would Qiereafier) be free, if they should do 
 this (flvai av representing iir/o-av av, § 39). OlWfle yap rbv iraripa 
 OVK av (j)vXdTT€iv Ka\ Trjv Tijirfv Xanfiavtiv tSiv ^iXav; do you 
 think he would not have taken care and have received the payt 
 I)em. Timoth. 1194, 20. (Here the direct discourse would be 
 etjivXarTev av Kal iXdiJ.^avev.') Oi/iat yap av ovK dxapitrrais fioi 
 iXeiv, for I think it would not is a thankless labor ; 1. e. ovk av ex°^ 
 Xen. An. n, 3, 18. Maprvpia ixpavro, firj av ^vtrrpaTfiiftv, « 
 firi rt ^SiKow oh iir^ea-av, that they would not join in expeditions, unless 
 those against whom they were marching hail vn-onged them. Thuc. 
 Ill, 11. (Here ^varpareveiv av represents ^vvearpaTcvov dv.) 
 
 OiSa avTovs iXevBipovs av ovTas, el tovto eirpa^av, I know they 
 would (now) be free, if they had done this. OtSa avTovs c'Xeudcpovs 
 Sv ovras, tt tovto npd^fiav, I know they would (hereafter) be free, 
 if they should do this, (In the former ovtos av represents ^<rav av, 
 m the latter etria-av av.) Tav Xap.fiavovToiv diKijv ovtcs hv biRaias 
 (i. e. ?iiiev dv), whereas we should justly be among those who inflict 
 punishment. Dem. Eubul. 1300, 8. 'On-fp taxe p^ . . . . t^v IleXo- 
 TTOvvrja-ov nopBeiv, aSvvaTmv av SvTav (ipav) eVi/SoijAfiK, when you 
 would have been unable to bring aid (sc. i/Ae had done it). Thdc. I, 
 73. ndX\' av cxav crep' clmlv mp\ avT^s napoKema, although I 
 might be able (if I should wish) to say many other things about it, I 
 omit them. Dem. Cor. 313, 4 'AttA ■navrbsiiv i^ipatv Xo'you Straioti 
 firixdvripa ttoikiXov (i. e 6s w d)«pots), thou who tvouldsl derive, &o 
 Soi'H. O. C. 761. 
 
S 41, 3.] THE PARTICLE 'AN. 59 
 
 2. The Perfect Infinitive and Participle (which represent 
 also the Pluperfect, by § 18, 3, Rem.), when they ar« used 
 with at, may be equivalent either to the Pluperfect Indicative 
 with av or to the Perfect Optative with av. E. g. 
 
 El /jij Tas operas VTrep avrav cKeivas oJ MapaBmvi xal 2aXa)Xi« Tra- 
 pea-xovTOf .... Travra ravff vtto rav ^ap^dpai/ av eaXtoKevai 
 (sc. (fifjaeifv avTis), if those at Marathon and Salamis had not ex- 
 hibited those deeds of valor in their behalf, any one would say that all 
 these would have been captured by the barbarians. Dbm. F. L. 441, 
 21. Here ioKaiKevai av represents iaXanfaav av, Plup. Ind.) 'A\\' 
 miK av iiyoviiai avrovs hiKr}V d^tav de datKevai, el aKpoaxriifievoi. 
 avTciv KaTaijrr]<l>ia-aitTBe, but I do not believe they would (then) have 
 suffered sufficient punishment, if you after hearing them should con- 
 demn them. Lys. XXVII, § 9. (Here the protasis in the Optative 
 shows that SehmKevat av represents SeSmKores av ehv (§ 18, 1) ; but 
 if the protasis l<ad been el KaTeilfri(fiia-aa-6e, if you had condemned them, 
 SeSaxevai av would have represented e&eSaKca-av av, they would have 
 suffered.) See also, in § 8 of the same- oration, ovk av airoKaAevai 
 • .. . . aXka dedaicevai, ^Avdpanobtabets a v dtKaloiS KeKXriadaL 
 fiyeiTo. Xbn. Mem. I, 1, 16. (Here KeK\^<rdai av represents KexXij- 
 [levat. av eiev.') 
 
 These constructions are of course rare, as the forms of the finite 
 moods here represented themselves seldom occur. 
 
 3. The Aorist Infinitive and Participle with av may he 
 equivalent either to the Aorist Indicative with & or to the 
 Aorist Optative with av. E. g. 
 
 OuK &v Tiye'urff airov k&v iiTibpa\j,e'i.v; do you not believe that {if 
 this had been so') he would even have run thither f i. e. ovk av cne- 
 dpafiev ; Dkm. Aph. I, 831, 10. "Avev de a-fUTp,ov avK av pj>i fioKCi to 
 TotovTo lu^jSijwat yevea-dai (ovk hv ^vp.^rivai representing ovk av 
 (vve^rj), but "unless there had been an earthquake, it does not seem to 
 me that such a thing could have by any chance happened, Thuc. Ill, 
 89. Toils 'Adrjvaiovs ^iri^ev 'ia-'tos av erre^cXBelv Kal ti/v yrjv ovk 
 av Trepiidelv Tjir)6fivai, (i. e. loies av eire^eXdoiev koI ovk av nepd- 
 dotev). Id. II, 20. Ov8' av KpaTrja-ai, avTovs t^s yrjs ^yovfiai (i. e. 
 Kpartjo'emv av) . Id. VI, 3 7. 
 
 'AXXa padims av d(j)e6f)s, el kol perplas Ti Tovrav inoirjire, irpoet- 
 .Xei-o diToSavelv, whereas he might easily have been acquitted, &c. Xen» 
 Mem. IV, 4, 4. Kai el d-nrjxBrjaBe Sairep fjiiels, ev ia-pev pfj av 
 ijao'ov vp,as Xvirripovs ycvofievovs rols ^vfx,)MX0i.s, Kai dvayKa- 
 adevras av rj ap^eiv, K. r.X. (i. e. ovk av eyivea-Be, Koi rjvayKaa-driTe 
 av), if you had become odious as we have, we are sure that you would 
 have been no less oppressive to your allies, and that you would have 
 been forced, &c. Thuc I, 76. 'Opmv to Traparelx^apa &.it\ovv hv, (cai 
 I emKpaTr)a-eU ns . . . • paSims a v avro 'Kr]<pdev (i. e. paStws ai 
 tvTo \tj<pdeiri), seeing that it would easily be taken, &c. 'Id. VU, 4a 
 
60 THE PAKTICLB "AN. [§ 41, 3 
 
 O0T€ Swa oSre av yevd/ieva "KoytmounMnv, they relate things whu-h 
 are not real, and which never could happen (i. e. ovk av yeWTo)..Id. 
 VI, 88. 
 
 4. The Future Infinitive and Participle with &v would bo 
 equivalent to the Homeric construction of av with the Future 
 Indicative (§ 37, 2). As, however, av is not found in Homer 
 with either the Future Infinitive or the Future Participle 
 (see below, Note 2), this construction rests chiefly on the 
 authority of passages in Attic writers, and is subject to the 
 same doubt and suspicion as that of the Future Indicative 
 with &v in those writers. (See § 37, 2, Note 1.) In the 
 following passages it is stiU retained in the best editions, with 
 strong support from Mss. 
 
 No/itfoiTcff, ci TavTTjv irpdiTrjv XdjSotev, pahias av a<j>ifri roKXa 
 n-poo'x'iJp^o-fii'. Thvc. n, 80. (Here the direct discourse 
 would regularly have beer either in the Fut. Ind. without av, or in 
 the Aor. Opt. with av.) The same may be said of Tiiuc. V, 82, 
 vopi^av fieyuTTov av o'tjias ai(j>e\ri(Tetv. (Here one Ms. reads by 
 correction atptXijaai.) See also Thuc. VI, 66; VIE, 25 and 71. 
 2;^oX3 TToO" rj ^€iv devp a v s^rjv^ovv eya, I declared that I should be 
 very slow to come hither again. Soph. Ant. 390. 'A<j)UTt § p-ri a(j)ieTe, 
 as efiov ov< av 7rotT}(rovTos aX\a, ou8' el fieWco iroWdKis reSvavai. 
 Plat. Apol. 30 C. Tovs onovv av eK€LV<a jroiTja-ovras dvTjprjKOTss 4k 
 Trjs w6\f<os eo-ca-6e. Dem. F. L. 450', 27. (Here Cod. A. reads 
 TroiTjaavraS') 
 
 Note 1. As the Future Optative is never used with av (§ 39, 
 Note), this can never be represented by the Future Infinitive or 
 Participle with av. 
 
 Note 2. The Participle with i> or kS is not found in Homer or 
 Pindar. The Infinitive with av occurs in these poets very seldom, 
 and only in indirect discourse. E. g. 
 
 Kai 8' av ToiE SXXoutlv etjn) irapap.vBrjiraaBai. 11. IX, 684. 
 (The direct discourse is given in the words of Achilles in vs. 417, 
 Ka\ S hv . . • . irapajivBrjaraiii-qv^ 
 
 Note 3. The Infinitive with av sometimes represents an iterative 
 Imperfect or Aorist Indicative with av (§ 30, 2). This must he 
 carefully distinguished from an apodosis. E. g. 
 
 'KKoia \aKeSaifiovLovs Tdrf efi^dhdvras av Ka\ KaKOKravTac Tijv vaipaf 
 dvax''>pf^'' «'"■' oiKou irakiv, I hear that the Lacedaemonians at that 
 time, after invading and ravaging the country, used to return home 
 again. Dem. Phij. Ill, 123, 16. (Here dvax<opeiv av represents 
 avtxi>povv av in its iterative sense, they used to return.) 
 
I 42, 2.] THE PARTICLE 'AN. 61 
 
 Note 4. The Infinitive with ap commonly stands in indirect 
 discourse after a verb of saying or thinking, as in most of the ex- 
 amples given above. Occasionally, however, it is found in other 
 v!onstruetlous, where the simple Present or Aorist Infinitive is regu- 
 larly used. E. g. 
 
 Ta Se ivTos ovTas ixatcro, »<r« rjSurra av is vhap "^v^phv <T<jias 
 •avTovs pinretv , SO that they would most gladly have thrown themselves 
 into cold water. Th^C. II, 49. {"Qa-re plirrfiv would be the ordi- 
 nary expression here : with av it represents an Imperfect Indicative, 
 eppiTTTov av.) *Ek6iVous direarepijKeyai, el Koi Kparoiev, pf] av en acfyag 
 diroreixio-ai, to have deprived them of the power of ever again walling 
 them in, even if they should be victorious. Id. VII, 6. See § 27, N. 2 
 (a), for an example of ^ovXopat and the Infinitive with av. We 
 have given examples of verbs of hoping, &c. with the Present, 
 Aorist, and Future Infinitive; they sometimes take the Infinitive 
 with av, as a slight change from the Future ; as in Thuc. VII, 61 : 
 TO TTJs Tv^rjs Kav peff rjp^v eXirlaaVTes ffT^rat. (See § 27, N. 3.) 
 EXTTi'fai is found also with mi and the Future Optative in Thdo. 
 VI, 30; and with as and the Aorist Optative with av in V, 9. 
 
 Note 5. The Participle with av can never represent a protasis, 
 because there is no form of protasis in the finite moods in which av 
 is joined with the verb itself For examples of apparent violations 
 of this principle, incorrectly explained by Matthiae and others as 
 cases of the Participle with av in protasis, see § 42, 3, Note 1. 
 
 § 43. 1. When av is used with the Subjunctive, if it does 
 not coalesce with the relative or particle into one word (as in 
 idv, orav), it is separated from it only by such words as nev, 8e, 
 re, yap, &c. See examples under § 62. 
 
 2. "When Sv stands in apodosis with any verbal form, it may 
 be either placed near the verb, or attached to some more em- 
 phatic word in the sentence. 
 
 Particularly, it is very often placed directly after inter- 
 rogatives, negatives, adverbs of time, place, &c., and other 
 words which especially affect the sense of the sentence. E. g. 
 
 'AXXa Ti's 817 Semv depaireia e'lrj av fj oa-iorris; Plat. Euthyph. 13 
 D. 'AXX' o/iSj TO Ke(f>d\atov airav paSiios av emois. Id. 14 A. OvK 
 av 81J Tovb' avSpa pavr]! epvaaio peTe\6a>v, TvSeibrjV, os viiv ye av Koi Ait 
 irarpX pA.\oiTO. II. V, 456. liSts av tov alpv\a>TaTov, e^Bpov aXij/iO, 
 Tovs Tt hiaadpxas okeaaas ^aa^iXrjs, reXos Bavoipi Kavros. SoPH. Aj. 
 389. TaxicT av re ttoXiv oJ roioirot irepovs Ttelaavres ano\ifreiav, 
 
 Thuc. H, 63. 
 
 Note. For the sake of emphasis, Sv is often separated 
 from its verb by such words as oiopju, Sonea, <piiii, ol8a, &c. la 
 
62 THE PARTICLE "AN. ["§ 42, 2. 
 
 Buch cases care must be taken to connect the Sv with the verb 
 to which it really belongs. E. g. 
 
 Kai vxiv riSeas av fioi 8okS> Koivamrjo-ai, and now I think I 
 should gladly lake part {av belonging to Kotvavfia-ai). Xen. Cyr. 
 VIII, 7, 25. Ou8' av v/iels oi8' 3ti iiraviratrBe noXeiioivTfS, nor 
 would you (/ am sure) have ceased fghting, Dem. Phil. II, 72, 
 25. Ti ou>/ av, f^rjv, etrj 6 "Epmj; Plat. Symp. 202 D. This i^ 
 especially irregular in the expression ovk. olSa a v el, or ovk a v oiSa 
 el, followed by an Optative to which the av belongs ; as ovk otS' a » 
 el TTeia-aifiL, I do not know whether I could per.iuade him (sc. if I 
 should try). EuR. Med. 941. The more regular form would be 
 fiiK olba elneitraifii av. See Elmsley ad loc. (vs. 911). 
 
 3. 'ti.v is sometimes used twice, or even three times, with 
 the same verb. This may be done in a long sentence, to make 
 the conditional force felt through the whole, especially when 
 the connection is broken by intermediate clauses. It may also 
 be done in order to emphasize particular words with which it 
 is joined, and to make them prominent as being affected by the 
 contingency. E. g. 
 
 *floT* hv, el (rSevos Xd^otfjLi, brjXoiaai^' Av ot' aiiTois (jipova. 
 Soph. El. 333. Ovk av rjyeia-0^ avrov Kav eTridpaftelv , Dem. 
 Aph. I, 831, 10. Our' av eXovres avSis dvOaXolev av. Aesch. 
 Ag. 340, "aXXous -y av ovv olofieda ra fjfieTepa Xa^ovras Bel^ai av 
 (idXioTO €1 Ti \ieTpid^ojxev. Thuc. I, 76. (See § 42, 2, N.) Our 
 av KeXevtjatp , ovT av, el 6eXois en TrpdoaeLv, efwv y av q^etas dp^rjs 
 pera. SoPH, Ant. 69. Acyto Kaff eKatrrov boKelv dv pot tov avrov 
 dvdpa Trap* fjpMV eVt TrXfior* av e'l8rj kol perd ;fapiTQ>i/ /xdXtOT* av 
 evToaneXcos TO aoypa avTapKes Trape \€(rdaL. ThuC. II, 41, (Here 
 av IS used three times, belonging to irapixetrBai.) 'Ypmv Se epr/pos 
 (ov OVK a V iKavos oipai e ivai. ovt' av (piXov ux^eXijcrat oCt a v ej(6pov 
 dXe^aa-Oai. Xen. An. I, 3, 6, (Here dv is iised three times, be- 
 longing to elvai.) 
 
 Note 1. This principle, taken in connection with that 
 stated in § 42, 2, by showing that av can be joined to any 
 word in the sentence which it is important to emphasize, as 
 well as to its own verb, and even to both, explains many 
 cases in which dv and a Participle appear to form a protasis 
 (See § 41, Note 5.) If a Participle takes the place of a 
 protasis, it is of course one of the most important words in 
 the sentence, and one to which the particle av is especially 
 akely to be attached. The dv, however, does not qualify 
 euch a Particijile, any more than it does a negative or in- 
 
S 42, 4.] iHE PAETiCLE 'an. 63 
 
 terrogative with which it is connected for the same purpose ; 
 but it always belongs to the principal verb of the apodosis. 
 E.g. 
 
 No/ii<rar€ to re diavXov Koi t6 /ifaov Koi to irdm dxpi^is av $vy- 
 Kpi6ev iiaKuTT av l(T)(vfiv, believe that these, if they should be 
 unv.ed, would be especially strong. Thug. VI, 18. (Here ^yKpadev 
 alone (not with av) is equivalent to el ^vyKoadetq (§ 52, 1), and the 
 av is placed before it merely to emphasize it, as containing the pro- 
 tasis to the verb lavy(i.v-, to which this av, as well as the other, 
 belongs.) 'Ayavas av t'ls fioi So/cei, €(j>r], a iraTep, tt poemmv 
 fKao'Tois Ka\ &dXa irpoTidiXs pciKiaT av noLfiv cv aaKcladai,, it 
 seems to me, said he, father, that if any one should proclaim contests, 
 &c., he would cause, &c. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 18. (Here the protasis 
 impUed in the Participles is merely emphasized by av, which be- 
 longs to noieiv.) Aeyovros av Tivos 7ri(rT€vaai o'UaBe; (i. e. et 
 T« eKcycv, iir'uTTevcrav av ;) do you think they would have believed 
 it, if any one had told themf Dem. Phil. II, 71, 4. (Here too the 
 av stands near 'Kiyovros only to point it out as the protasis, to which 
 its own verb jnoTfCo-ai is the apodosis.) 
 
 In these cases, the protasis expressed by the Participle is affected 
 by the av, only as the ordinary protasis with ct is affected in the 
 example from Soph. El. 333, quoted above, under § 42,.3. 
 
 Note 2. 'Av is sometimes used elliptically without a verb, 
 when one can be supplied from the context. E. g. 
 
 OJ oIkItoi piyKovaiv aXK' ovK av rrpo rov (sc. eppcyKov), the slaves 
 are snoring; but they wouldn't have done so once. Arist. Nub. 5. 
 'Qs oSt av atTTav tS>vS av e^ciVoijui tm, o^t av TfKvoiai toXs fpois, 
 aripyav £/«us. SoPH. O. C. 1528. So 7r«5s yap av (sc. el'ij); how 
 could itf TTcos OVK av; and similar phrases; especially aairep av el 
 (also written as one word, aanepavei), in which the av belongs to 
 the verb that is understood after el; as (jio^ovpevos aairep av el 
 itais, fearing like a child (i. e. (jio^ovpevos aajrep av E0oj3^di; el ttoii 
 ^v). Plat. Gorg. 479 A. (See § 53, N. 3.) 
 
 In like manner av may be used with el in protasis, or with a con- 
 ditional relative, the verb being understood ; as in Xen. An. I, 3, 
 6: ais epov ovv lovros oirji av Kal ipels, ovra t^v ■yvm/iiji' ex^rt- 
 (That is, ojrn av Kal vp.eis trjre.) 
 
 Note 3. Kepetition of kc is rare ; yet it sometimes occurs, E. g. 
 T<5 K e paiK' ^ Kev eueive Koi eaavpevos irep oSoio, 
 "H <ce pe Tedvtjv'mv evi peyapouriv eKevnev. Od. IV, 733. 
 
 On the other hand, Homer sometimes joins av and Ke in th.3 same 
 sentence for emphasis. E. g. 
 
 ViaprepaX, &.s out' av Kev 'Aprjs ovoaaiTO pxreXBav, 
 OiSre k 'Adi^vairj Xaotrtrooy. 11. XHI, 127. 
 
 i. When an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses 
 
C4 THE PAKTICLE 'AN. [§ 42, 4. 
 
 with the same mood, Sv is generally used only in the first, and 
 understood in the others ; unless it is repeated for emphasis, or 
 for some other special reason. E. g. 
 
 Ou8' &v fVe, TjnKa bevpo air<m\fXv i^ovKojirfV, KaT(K&i\vfy,^ ovSk 
 Toiaiira \eyuv Tovrm Trpoairamv, i^ hv iJKUrd vftcts f|teAAfT 
 t$ievat. Dem. F. t. 367, 3. (Here au is understood with npo(re- 
 TUTTev.') OiJra) 8e Spmv oiSiv av 8id(}>opov Tov irepov jroioX, dW 
 fin ravTov aiKJjoTepot Xoiev. Plat. Rep. 11, 360 C. Ovkovv k&v, fl 
 Ttpos avTO TO (pas avayKa^oi avTov fiXkiteiv, a\yelv re av Ta ofifiara 
 Ka\ <f>evyfiv airoiTTpf<i>6jievov (oiei); Id. VII, 515 E. (This ex- 
 ample illustrates also the principle of § 42, 3, kuv belonging to the 
 Infinitives.) See also Xen. An. H, 5, 14. Hdvra ^pei 6 ilXiwwos, 
 jroXXot '\syovTos ep.ov kol OpvXovPTOs aei, t6 p-ev npayrov as av eis Kotvov 
 yvutprjv dnotpatvopevov, perd ravra S' as dyvoovvras htbdtTKOVTOs-, Tfkev- 
 TavTos de cos av irpbs ireirpaKoras avTovs Ka\ dvocnaiTdTovs dvdpdmovs 
 ovSev viroareWopevov. Dem. F. L. 390, 5. (The first av belongs to 
 dm<f)aiv6pr]v implied, as I should have declared it, if I had been speaking 
 to inform my colleagues ; in the following clause the same tense (iblha- 
 a-Kov) is implied, and av is not repeated ; in the third clause, on 
 the contrary, an Optative is implied, i>s av Xeyoifu, and therefore 
 the av again appears.) In Plat. Rep. Ill, 398 A, we find av used 
 with two co-ordinate Optatives, understood with a third, and 
 repeated again with a fourth to avoid confusion with a dependent 
 Optative. 'Av may be understood with au Optative e'ven in a 
 separate sentence, if the construction is continued from a sentence 
 in which dv is used with the Optative; as in Plat. Rep. I, 352 
 E: — 'Ead' oTCf av dWa 'iSois § o^flaX/Jois; Ov SrJTa. Ti Si; 
 aKoiaais aXXa> rj iiaiv ; So with Trpdrroi, Id. IV, 439 B. 
 
 Note. The Adverb rd^a, in the sense of perhaps, is often 
 joined with av, in which case the phrase rax dv is nearly 
 equivalent to lo-mr. This, however, cannot be used unless the 
 av would form an apodosis with the verb of the sentence, if the 
 rdxa were not joined with it. Thus rdx &v. ykvono means it 
 might perhaps happen. So rdx &v lyevrro means it would per- 
 haps have happened; but it can never (like lo-tos iykvtTo) mean 
 perhaps it happened. 
 
i 43.'] riNAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 65 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 USE OF THE MOODS. 
 
 This chapter includes all those constructions which 
 require any other form of the finite verb than the 
 simple Indicative expressing an absolute assertion (§ 2). 
 The Infinitive and Participle are included here only so 
 far as they are used in indirect discourse, or in Protasis 
 and Apodosis. 
 
 These constructions are divided into the following 
 classes : — 
 
 I. Pinal and Object Clauses after "va, m, oira^, 
 
 o(f>pa, and w. 
 n. Conditional Sentences. 
 
 III. Relative and Temporal iseniences, 
 
 IV. Indirect Discourse, including Indirect Quota- 
 
 tions and Questions. 
 
 V. Causal Sentences. 
 
 VI. Expressions of a Wish. 
 
 Vn. Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands, 
 
 •Exhortations, and Prohibitions. 
 Vni. Subjunctive (like the Future Indicative) in 
 Independent Sentences. — Interrogative Sub- 
 junctive. — Ov ixrj with the Subjunctive or 
 Future Indicative. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 FuTAL AND Object Clauses after "lea, 'Qi,"07ra)s,*0</)pa, 
 AND M^. 
 
 § 43. The clauses which depend upon the so 
 called final particles, "wa, ws, oirw?, oi>oa, that, in 
 
66 FOfAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [% 43. 
 
 order that, and m, lest, that not, may be divided into 
 three classes : — 
 
 A. Pure final clauses, in whicli the end, purpose, 
 or motive of the action of ani/ verb may be expressed, 
 after ani/ one of the final particles ; as e^x^r'iL^ 'iva 
 TovTo iSp, he is coming that he may see this; a-n-epxe- 
 rai fiT) TOVTO tSj7, he is departing that he may not see 
 this. 
 
 B. Object clauses with ottox; or otts)? firj after verbs 
 of striving, &c. ; as a-Koiret ottqj? yevrjaeTac, see that it 
 happens; a-KOTrei otto)? fir} yevr]<reTai, see that it does 
 not happen. These clauses express the direct object of 
 the verb of striving, &c., so that they, may stand in 
 apposition to an object accusative like tovto ; as aKoirei 
 TOVTO oTTcus /itTj (76 o'^^eTai,, scc to this, viz., that he does 
 not see you. They also imply the end or purpose of the 
 action of the leading verb, and to tliis extent they par- 
 take of the nature of final clauses. 
 
 C. Object clauses with /J-rj after verbs of fearing, 
 &c. ; as (po/Sov/jLai iJ,rj 'yevTjTai, I fear lest it may happen; 
 <J3o^ov/iai, fjirj TOVTO ejeveTo, I fear lest this happened. 
 These express simply the object of fear, without even 
 implying any purpose to prevent that object from being 
 realized. Thus if we say <t)o^ovfi,ai tovto, fiij kokS)'; 
 Trpa^co, I fear this, lest I may fall into misfortune, the 
 clause with firj merely explains tovto, the direct object 
 of ^o^ovfiai. 
 
 Remark. Although the object clauses of the dass B par- 
 take slightly of the nature of final clauses, sp that they some- 
 ■» times allow the same construction (the Subjunctive for the 
 Future Indicative, § 45), still the distinction between these 
 two classes is very strongly marked. An object clause, as we 
 have seen, can stand in apposition to a preceding ToCro; 
 whereas a final clause could stand in apposition to Tovrmi 
 
§ 44, 1.] PURE FINAL CLAUSES. 67 
 
 evexa, as fp^frm tovtov evfxa, iva fjiiiv 0ori6fi<Tr], he COmes for this 
 
 purpose, viz., that he may assist us. The two can be combined 
 in one sentence ; as attovbd^ti oirois 7r\ovTr}tT€i, Iva tqvs <^l\ovs 
 fv woiy, he is eager to he rich, that he may benefit his friends. 
 
 Care must be taken not to mistake the nature of an object 
 clause, when its subject is attracted by the leading verb ; as 
 VKvirtiv Tr^v TroXti; ottcof afa6rnT€Tai for tTKoiviiv ottcos i) TrdXts (rw^- 
 trcrat, to see that the city is saved. 
 
 Note 1. 'Ot^pa is found only in Epic and Lyric po- 
 etry. 
 
 Note 2. The regular negative adverb after 'va, as, mas, 
 and ii^pa is ivq ; but after /117, lest, ou is used. E. g. 
 
 ATrepx^Tai, Iva pj] tovto 181], he is departing that he may not see 
 this. ^ojSctT-ai pjj ov rouTO ■ye'j/ijrai, he is a/raid lest this may not 
 happen. This use of oi as the negative after f»^ seems to have no 
 other object than to avoid repetition of pi). Where, however, the 
 sentence is so long that this repetition would not be noticed, we find 
 jiiij repeated ; as in Xen. Mem. I, 2, 7 : idavpa^e S eins . . . . (^o- 
 jSoTro pr) 6 yevopevos kelKos KayaQos Ta ra peyiaTa evepyeTtjaavrt 
 p fj T^v peylaTjjV X^P'" ^^o'. 
 
 ' A. Pure Final Glauses. 
 
 § 44. 1. In pure final clauses the Subjunctive is 
 regularly used, if the leading verb is primary ; and tha 
 . Optative, if the leading Terb is secondary. E. g. 
 
 NCv 8* tp\faff hri Seiirvov, Iva ^vvdycopev "Aptja. H. II, 381. Sol 
 ff SSe pvrjirr^pcs imoKpivovrai, Iv elSfjs avros (ra dvpa, fidaJiri 8e 
 jravTfi 'Axaioi. Od. II, 111. Etiro) ti S^j-a koXK , Iv opyiCn irKiov; 
 Soph. O. R. 364. Kai yap fiaa-iKevs aipflrai, aix '"a iavrov KaXms 
 €7ripe\rJTat, aK\' Iva Kal oi ikopevot Bi avrbv fv wpdrraa i. 
 Xen. Mem. Ill, 2, 8. Aokci pot KaraKavaai ras dpd^as, iva /i^ ra 
 fcuyjj ^pav o-ToaTJiy^ ■ Xen. An. HI, 2, 27. "Qpvuff, tv ddavdroitn. 
 <j)6as (pepol i;6e ^poToitnv. Od. V, 2. UXos e/3ot;\cro ehm rois 
 peyiara Svvapevots, tva dSiKav pr} diSolr) SiKrjv. XEN. An. II, 6, 
 21. 
 
 BouXiji' 8' 'Apyetots {mo6rirr6p(d', rj th dvjjo-ei, as p^ wdvres o\av- 
 rai 68vo-(raphoio reoio. II. VIH, 36. Aiavoflrai Trjv yefjyvpav \va-ai, 
 ins pTj 8ta/3^7-f, dW ev pea-a djio\r]<l>drJTe. Xbn. An. II, 4, 17. 
 Ile<j}ve 8' lEijpvTov, o)S Avyeav XuTptoj/ piadov Trpdira-oiTO . PiND, 
 OI. XI (X), 34. Toi!ro« eveKU ^iXav aero 8eio'dai, i)S mivtpyavt 
 fX,oi. Xen. An. 1, 9, 21. 
 
68 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§44, 
 
 Tov 
 Od, 
 
 ov 8e fiCijo-T^per XoxtSo-iK, Sirais otto ^iXox oXijTai fg l6aKT]S. 
 XIV, 181. Medfs t6&' ayyoiviv, o-n-as TO Tiav fiddns. SOPH, 
 
 on-cBS 70US aiiroiis uoijjtos aipmvTai, ovB' tva Tins avTols r/ocovTai, 
 aXX" ii/a T-oif vofiois mi6a>VTaL. Xen . Mem. IV, 4, 1 6. 'Ev X* fp^ "^ 
 o-i.- tdrtK^v, oiras €ti TT^fta (j>iyoiiii. Od. XIV, 312. 'ETrpcff^fuotTO 
 iyKkr^jiara irotovp-fvoi, oiras iT<pi<Ti.v OTi jiiyiarq trpucpaa-is eiij row 
 TroXe/tiflx. Thuc. I, 126. 
 
 Kf^aXj KaTaveva-ofiai, o<ppa ireTroidris- H. I, 524. OpcTEO oij 
 yCv, ^eiKE, TToXivS' i/xeK o(f)pa at ■nkp.^a- Od. VI, 255. Aojiov 
 ^ep(re(j)6vas e'Xfle, o^p' ISolcr viov c'nvrjs. PiND. OL XI V , 30. 
 KvTap E/xoi yfpas avri^ eToijiaaar , o(j)pa /iij oios 'Apyeicov ayepaoTOS 
 em. H. I, 118. *Qr o fiev evfla KaritrxeT iirfiyopfvos irep odolo, o^p' 
 erapov BaiTTOi kcu cjrt KTcpea KTepiireiev . Od. HI, 284. 
 
 *AXXa o"u ftew vvv avTis aTrdoTtxf, /^^ Tt vorjtTTj ''Hpi; " e^i 8e Ke ravra 
 lie\ri<reTai, ocppa T e\ e (T a a . 11.1,522. Ov SrJT avTov a^fis Sevpo, firj 
 Tts dvapTrdarj; SoPH. Aj. 986. A«(riTeX«i eaaai fv ra irapovTi, /irj 
 Kai TovTov noKefiiov irpoaBafieBa. Xen. Cyr. II, 4, 12. Aiytrai 
 t'mfiv on amevai jSouXoiTo, /i^ d jrarrip ti Sj^Boito koi fj ttoXw li^l^- 
 ff>oi,To. Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 25. 
 
 Note 1. The Future Indicative sometimes (though rarely) 
 takes the place of the Subjunctive in pure final clauses, after 
 oiras and S(ppa (Swas fuj, o<j>pa /«J) ; — never after iva or ar, and 
 very seldom after the simple /«}. (MiJ with the Future is 
 commonly found only after verbs of the next two cla.«ses; 
 §§ 45, 46.) Here, as well as after verbs of striving and of 
 fearing, the Future differs from the Subjunctive only by being 
 a more vivid form of statement. E. g. 
 
 At6i he pLoKaKoiai Koi alp-vXioitri Tioyoicn deXyei, o^ios 'IOuktis eTriXij- 
 (TCTai. Od. I, 56. Ovde 8i* ev aX\o rpefjiovraL rj onas fiaxovvral 
 ifffp tS>v Tpe(ji6vra)v. Xen. Cyr. II, 1, 21. Xp^ dvafit^d^dv em Hiv 
 rpo^hu Toiis dvaypa(j>evTas, oirtos p^fj irpSrepov vii^ earai irpiv TrvdcVdai 
 Toie avBpas dnavras. AndoC de Myster. I, p. 6, 38. § 43. 'Ett' 
 avTovs Toi/s 7rpo\6yovs (tov Tpi^opat, oTTtur to irpSyrov ttjs Tpayoahias 
 pepos irpanoTov ^acravia. Arist. Ran. 1120. In Nub. 1466,'ojr<Bi 
 riffoXeir pereXBaiv (not per' f'poC e\6') is to be explained by § 45, N. 
 7. BdpiTVVOv 8e oi ^rop eVi (ppeirlv, o<f>pa Kai 'ExTtup ettTerai. D. 
 XVI, 242. So Od. IV, 163. "Qot' tiicdt fjpas p^ ^padiveiv (Wi, p^ 
 Kai Tis SyjfeTai yrmaiv iaas KareiTrrj. Arist. Eccles. 495. So pn 
 KcxoXaxrcrai, II. XX, 301. This construction is very rare in Attio 
 prose. 
 
 Note 2. The Particle &v (m) is sometimes joined with 
 
§ 44, 1.] PURE FINAL CLAUSES. 69 
 
 its, Swas, and oKJipa, before the Subjunctive in final clauses; 
 especially with as and o<f>pa in Homer. The av here is always 
 joinod to the particle, and (as in protasis) it adds nothing to 
 the sense which can be made perceptible in English. E. g. 
 
 Ilci^eo, as (Iv jioi Ttfirjv fieyaXrjv Koi Kvdos ^prjai, obey, that thou 
 mat/est gain for me great honor and glory. II. XVI, 84. (Here as 
 av ap-qai seems to be merely a weaker form of expression than las 
 aprjai would have been.) 'A\X' Mi, fif) p.' ipedi^f, traarfpos <S s Ke 
 virjai, that thou mayest go the more safely. H. I, 32. 'AX\' oJros p,kv 
 vvv (Tol ap.' eylrerai, 6(j)pa K€V ^vdrj a'olaiv 4vi ficyapoitriv. Od. Ill, 
 359. UpotrdeofieOa .... frvpnep'^ai^ripXv, ws av piv k^eXapev 
 in Trjs x'^Pts- Hdt. I, 36. 'A\X' taaapfv, <^iXoi, eKrjXov avTov, a s 
 &v els VTTvov ttS tTTj. SoPH. Phil. 825. TovTiXa^atv pov TO o-KidSeLov 
 imipex^ avaBev, o)s av pr/ p.' opSxriv oi 6eoL Arist. Av. 1508. 
 Kai (pare avrbv toiovtov flvat, ott as av (jiaivTjTai as KaXkiaTOS Koi 
 apiOTOS. Plat. Symp. 199 A. 'Av ys rivas vtrrmTevri fXfiOtpa 
 tjtpovfipaTa exovras prj iiriTpi^eiv avT^ apxfiv, (iroXfpovs KiveV) o tt u s 
 kv TovTovs ptra irpoipaa'eais ottoXXutj, that he may destroy them. 
 Plat. Rep. Vni, 567 A. 'Qs av p.a6rjs, avrdxtxua-ov. Xen. An. 
 n, 5, 16. See also An. VII, 4, 2; Aesc'h. Prom. 10 {as av), 824 
 (piras av), £umen. 573 (ottos av). 
 
 Note 8. (a.) Homer and Herodotus sometimes use av or xe in 
 final clauses with the same particles before the Optative, with no 
 apparent effect upon the verb. E. g. 
 
 Kai piv paKporepov ical irdtraova BrjKfv ISetrBai, as Kev iatKrjKeira-t 
 ^iXof irdvTecra-i yevoiTO. Od. VHl, 20. 'Bwripap 8' is TelxosUi 
 pooV vt 8' apa Zciis trwexes, o(ppa Kf 6a<T<Tov dXiVXoa reixta 6 fin. 
 II. XII, 25. 2u &€ pe irpoUis is iraTepa, o(j>p' av iXoipriv Saipi. 
 Od. XXIV, 334. Aiapvxa (apvatrfv), oKas av to o-TpaToirfSov 
 iSpvpevov Kara voitou Xa/3oi. Hdt. I, 75. Tavra 8e irepl iavTov 
 iaipvve rSi/Se etveKcv, o k o) f &v pfi opeovTfs oi o/x^XiK6S Xi/TTfOiaro 
 Kai iiri^ovXcioiev, dXX' frepolos ir(jn Boxeoi elvai prj opeaai, in 
 order that his campanions might not be offended by seeing him and plot 
 against him, but that he might appear to them to be of another nature by 
 their not seeing him. Id. I, 99. 
 
 (6.) Apart irom this use, however, the Optative can be re^larly 
 joined with av in any final clause, if it forms an apodom with the 
 verb, to which there is a protasis expressed or distinctly under.stood. 
 Such Optative with av can foUow prunary as well as secondary 
 tenses. (§ 31, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 ''RyeMa opxr/dpo'io, as K€V Tis ^ali} ydpov eppevai fKTos axoiav, 
 let him lead off the dance, so that any one who should hear without 
 would say there was a marriage. Od. XXIH, 134. 'As 8' &v 
 ijSio-TO TaCra (paivoiTO, airos ns avra rauTa Trapao-Kfuno-ci, ht. Juf 
 each one must acquire these things for himself, to cause that they would 
 appear most agreeable (if any one should experience them). Xen Cyr, 
 
70 PINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. \.§ 4i, 1 
 
 Vn, 5, 81. 'ESfflKf \P')}iaTa 'AvTa\KiSa, oTras Jiv,^ nXrjpaielvrot 
 vaVTtKOv mo AaKe8aiiiovia>v, oi 'ABr/valoi fiaWov r^f elpr]vr)S Ttpocr- 
 bioivTO. Xbn. Hell. IV, 8, 16. (Here vXripaeevTos vavTi.Koi,_ ij 
 the navy should he manned, stands as a protasis to the Optative 
 trpocrdeoii'TO av.) 
 
 Such sentences as Dem. Phil. H, 66, 15, as Se KtoXiaair' &v 
 cKflvov irpcLTTeiv TavTa, TraireXms dpySts ^X""^' ^"' '^^ '" '^"^ measures 
 by which you could prevent km from doing these things, you are wholly 
 inactive, are not final clauses, but relative sentences with an ante- 
 cedent implied. See § 65, 1, N. 4. 
 
 Remark. M i) , lest, can be followed by a verb with av only in a 
 regular apodosis after verbs of yeann<7, &c. (See § 46, N. 3.) 'Iva 
 is never used with av, except when it means where. A single case 
 of Lva with K£ in a final clause occurs, Od. XII, 156 : — 'AX\' tpea 
 jieu fyav, iva eldores rj K€ Odvtofiev, ^ K€v d\evdfi€VOL Bdvarov Koi 
 Krjpa (pvytofitv. But here the xc belongs not to ha, but to the 
 Subjunctives: see § 87, Note. 
 
 Note 4. A purpose can be expressed by a relative and the 
 Future Indicative (§ 65, 1), or by the Future Participle (§ 109, S). 
 For the use of ulore to express a purpose, see § 98, 2. 
 
 2. As all final clauses express the purpose or motive 
 of some person, they admit of the double construction of 
 indirect discourse (§ 77, 2) ; so that, instead of the Op- 
 tative after secondary tenses, we can have the mood and 
 tense which the person himself might have used when he 
 conceived the purpose in his own mind. That is, we 
 can say either ■^XOev lva iSoi, he came that he might see 
 (by § 44, 1) ; or rjxOev lva IBrj, because the person himself 
 would have saiS epxo/Ji.ai, iva iSto, I come that I may see. 
 
 Hence the Subjunctive in final clauses after second- 
 ary tenses is nearly as common as the more regular 
 Optative. E. g. 
 
 'EweKXaxracTO S' SkeBpov dvBpimois, lva rja-i Koi ((rao/ievoio'iv 
 doiSr). Od. VIII, 579. Kal eViVi/Sts af ovk fjyeipov , lva i)S ijSiara 
 8 lay us. Plat. Crlt. 43 B. nXoia KareKava-fv "va /«) Kvpos 
 ^tajijj . Xbn. An. I, 4, 18. ' Ax^iiv 8' au toi air o^da\fia,v e\ov, 
 fi np\v iirrffv, otjip' ev yiyvaxTKjis r)p.kv 6eov rjSe Kat avSpa. II. V, 
 127. 'Aptarei/s ^vvfl3oi\evev eKirXfCtrai, Sjrws eVi nXeov 6 (Tiros 
 avTia-XTI- Thuc. I, 65. 'HXflov iep(tTJifva6p.evQi, Snas /irj <T<f)i(n tA 
 'Attik6v (vaVTiKov) npo(ryfv6p.evov tiiiroStov yivrirai. Thuc. I, 31. 
 ''EXwpovv ix t5>v oiKimv, oiras ft^ Kara (j>S>s npo(r<l)e pavrat koi 
 a^ia-tv fK Tov 'iaov yiyvavrai, aXX' .... ijavovs <Jo-«. ThUC. 
 
8 44, 2.] StTBJUKCTITB AFTER SECONDARY TENSES. 71 
 
 II, 3. Tavras tva Kai\vr]9* ot vofioL (rvvrjyayov v^as, oiix tva Kvpias 
 Tvis ddiKovat Trot^re. Dem. F. L. 341, 12. Kat nfpt Tovratv e^vrf' 
 trdrfv, Iva /iij Toira 7rd6r)Tf. Dem. 01. Ill, 30, 10. (Here the pur 
 pose was conceived in the form, Iva firj raira TrdOma-iv.) 
 
 Remark. This principle applies equally well to the clauses 
 which follow Siras and ottois lifj after verbs of striving (§ 45), and 
 /iij after verbs of fearing, &c. (§ 46). 
 
 This is a favorite construction with certain authors, as Thucy- 
 dides ; who also, on the same principle, prefer the Indicative to the 
 Optative in ordinary indirect quotations after secondary tenses. 
 See § 70, 2, Remai-k 2.* 
 
 Note 1. This use of the Subjunctive instead of the Op- 
 tative makes the language more vivid, by introducing as nearly 
 as possible the exact words or thoughts of the person whose 
 purpose is thus stated. 
 
 As the two forms are equally correct (the only diiFerence 
 being that just stated), we find them both in the same sen- 
 tence, as we find the Indicative and Optative interchanged in 
 indirect quotations. (See § 70, 2, Eemark I.) E. g. 
 
 ''E^aKOctovs 'Koyddas i^eKptvav, ottojs rav re KTrtTroXwy cirjtyav 
 <j>vKaK(s, Kai ^v is dX\o ri Se'?;, ra^v ^vvearSiTes TrapayiyvavTai, 
 they selected them, that they might be guards of Epipolae, and that they 
 might be on hand if they should be needed for anything else. Thug. 
 VI, 96. MapavifTxov de ^pvKTOvs-, oira>s daacj)?! to ffrj^Cia to'is TroXeplois 
 5 leai /ifj /SoT/floJev, they raised f re-signals at the same time, in order 
 that the enemy's signals might be unintelligible to them, and that they 
 (the ene^mj) might not bring aid. Thuc. HI, 22. 
 
 The ordinary interpretation of the latter and similar passages, 
 proposed by Arnold, viz. " that the Subjunctive mood indicates the 
 immediate, and the Optative the remote consequence of the action 
 contained in the principal verbs, the second being a consequence of 
 the first," manifestly cannot apply to the first example. 
 
 Note 2. (a.) The use of the Optative for the Subjunctive in 
 final clauses after primary tenses is, on the other hand, very rare^ 
 and is to be viewed as a mere irregularity of construction. It oc- 
 curs chiefly in Homer. E. g. 
 
 "A§co t^V 'I^qkijj, tva fioi fitoTov ttoXvv aX<j>oi. Od. XVII, 250. 
 So II. I, 344, OTTTrms fia\eoi,VTO. 
 
 * Madvig remarks (Bemerhmgen, p. 12) that he finds in the first two 
 books of Thucydides no example of the Optative after ovas or pi) depend- 
 in}5 on a secondary tense of a verb of striving or fearing ; although he 
 cites ^yjeen examples of the Subjunctive from the same books. In pure 
 final clauses after secondary tenses, the usage in Thucydides is nearly 
 equally divided between the Subjunctive and the Optative. Xenaphon, 
 on the other hand, generally follows the rule, 4 44. !• 
 
72 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 44, 2. 
 
 (J.) Sometimes the Optative is used because the leading verb 
 implies a reference to tlie past as well as the present. E. g. 
 
 TovTou exci rhv rp&rrov 6 vouos, Iva /aj)8e ireia-Orjuai. firjd' i^airarrf 
 Srjvai yevu it' ein. ra &r\iua. Dem. Androt. 696, 17. (Here ex^i 
 implies also the past' existence of the law ; the idea being, the law 
 was made as it is, so thai it might not be possible, &o.) 
 
 3. The secondary tenses of the Indicative are used in 
 final clauses after 'Iva, sometimes after &)? or ottc*?, to 
 denote that the end or object is dependent upon some 
 unfulfilled condition, and therefore is not or was not 
 attained. This construction is peculiar to Attic Greek. 
 
 These tenses of the Indicative have here the same difference 
 in meaning as in conditional sentences (§ 49, 2), the Imperfect 
 referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in 
 past time, the Aorist and Pluperfect to past time. Thus tm 
 rovTo eirparrev means in order that he might be doing this (but 
 he is not doing it), or that he might have been doing this {but he 
 was not) ; 'va t-oSto tirpa^ev means that he might have done this 
 {but he did not) ; Iva tovto iireirpaxti. means that he might have 
 done this {but he has not). E. g. 
 
 OvK &v fcrx6p.r]V, k.t.X., iv' rj Tvcf>\6s re (cai kKvcdv iijjSev, in that 
 case I should not have forborne {to destroy my hearing), so that I 
 should be both blind and devoid of hearing (implying that really he is 
 not so). Soph. 0. T, 1387. 0eO, d)6i), ro /a^ to irpaypar avBpamois 
 fX^''" 'i>'<'>vfiv, iv' rjtrav p,ri8ev oJ Bfivoi Xoyoi, Alas! alas! that the 
 facts have no voice for men, so that words of eloquence might be as 
 nothing. EuR. Hippol. Frag. 442. 'Exprjv ela-KoKiaavras paprvpas 
 iToKKovs TrapaoTHJLrjvaadaL KcXevaai ras buidrjKas, tv* , ct n fyiyvero 
 ap.c[)(.ir0r]Tr)inpov, rjv els to ypd/ipara ravT tVai/fXfleii/. Dem. Aph. 
 
 II, 837, 11. (This implies that they did not have the will thus 
 sealed, so that it is not now possible to refer to it in case of dispute.) 
 'Exprjv avTovs ^rjTfiv, iva air i)W ay p,€ 6 a tovtov tov Sripayayov, 
 they ought to have made an investigation, in order that we might /lave 
 been already freed from this demagogue {but we have not been freed 
 prom him). Dinaech. in Demosth. p. 91, 24. 'EfijTijo-fv Sv pe roii 
 TraiSa, iv el pj] napeSlSovv pri^ev Slxaiov Xtyetv € 8 d k o u i/. Dem. Aph. 
 
 III, 849, 24. T( p' ov Xa^av cKTetvas evBvs, as eSciJa /iijjroTf 
 epavTov dv6pwnoia-iv evdev ^ ■yeyms ; tliat I might never have shown as 
 I have done. Soph. O. T. 1391. Ei yap p (mh yrjv ^ksv, as ptfre 
 6e6s pfjre ris aXXos ToiaS' eyeyrjBei, would thai he had sent me 
 tinder the earth, so that neither any God nor any one else should havt 
 rejoiced at these things {as they have done). Aksch. Prom. 152. (If 
 we read eirey^Sn, we must translate, might be rejoicing, as tliea 
 
§ 45.J SECO.^DART TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 73 
 
 are.) Tt S^r* .... ovk eppiyjr' i/iaVTrlv rrjirS' airo irirpas, OTTuif 
 Tav irdirrai) ituvav arrriWayrjv; why did I not throw myself ftom this 
 rock, that I might have heen freed from all my toils ? Id. 747. 
 
 Remark. This construction is especially common when a final 
 clause depends either upon an apodosis which contains a secondary 
 tense of the Indicative (§ 49, 2) implying the non-fulfilment of the 
 condition, as is the case in examples 1, 3, 4, and 5, above, or upoc 
 a verb expressing an unfulfilled wish, as in examples 2 and 7. In 
 these cases the Indicative seems to be used by a sort of assimila- 
 tion. 
 
 Note 1. The particle Sv is very rarely joined with the second- 
 ary tenses of the Indicative in final clauses. When it is used, it 
 denotes that the sentence is an apodosis (as well as a final clause), 
 with a protasis expressed or understood. E. g. 
 
 ZS)VTL eBei ^orfBelv, Siras on hiKaioTaros av koX 6(Tia>TaT0S t f i; Tt 
 ^av KOi T€\evTf}(ras arip.a}pr]Tos hv Kojcav &fiapTr]pdTaiv eylyvero, 
 i. e. that he might he exempt from punishment after death (as he would 
 be, if lie had so lived). Plat. Leg. XII, 959 B. 
 
 Note 2. The Indicative can never be used in this construction, 
 unless it is distinctly implied that the result is not (or was not) 
 attained, that is, unless the final clause refers either to the present 
 or to the past (as in the examples given above) : if it refers to the 
 future, it must be expressed in the ordinary way by the Subjunctive 
 or Optative, even although it depends on one of the class of verbs 
 mentioned above (Remark). Both constructions may occur in the 
 same sentence. E. g. 
 
 0^9 (rai/ ve(ov tqvs dyadovs) ^[lels av it^vKdrropev ev aKponoXetj 
 iva (iijdeif avTOvs di,€<j)6e ipev, dXV eTreidtj dtpiKoivro els t^v rj\i- • 
 Kiav, ;^p^o"t/iiot ylyvoLVTO rais TroXetrtv, we should have kept them 
 (in that ca-<e) in the Acropolis, that no one might corrupt them (as- 
 they are now corrupted), and that when (in the future) they should 
 becnme'of age they might become useful to their states. Plat. Men. 89 
 B. TaOr' av ^Brj "KeyiLv vphs vjxas eTtixeipovv, iv' flSiJT€, k.t.\., 1 
 ■ should (if that were .10) be now undertaking to say this to you, that you 
 might (hereafter) know, &e. Dem. Aristocr. 623, 11. See also the 
 examples under § 32, 3 (b.). 
 
 B. Object Clauses with "OTrmr and 'Ottos firi after Verbs of 
 Striving , SfC. 
 
 § 45. After verbs signifying to strive, to take care, to 
 effect, and the like, the Future Indicative is regularly 
 used with oTTft)? and oirm<; fir], if the leading verb is 
 primary. The Subjunctive also occurs, but mncli less 
 frequently than the Future. 
 4 
 
74 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 45 
 
 If the leading verb is secondary, the Future Optative 
 may be used, to correspond to the Future Lidicative 
 after primary tenses ; but generally the Future Indica- 
 tive is employed here also, on the principle of § 44, 2. 
 The other tenses of the Optative are sometimes used, to 
 correspond to the same tenses of the Subjunctive after 
 primary tenses ; or the Subjunctive itself may be em^ 
 ployed (§ 44, 2). E. g. 
 
 'E7ri/«e\fi7-ai cmas (or OTrmr /x^) ysvr^aeTai or ykvrfrai. Tie takes care 
 that it. may (or may not) happen. 'ETrt/ifXeiro oircos yey^orrai, yeiTj- 
 o-oiro, or yevoixo, he took care that it should happen. 
 
 (Fut.) "Qtrnep tov iroijikva 8ei ETrificXelirflat ojreor iraai rt %<Tov- 
 rai at oUs Koi ra imTfjSeia e ^oviriv, ovra Kai tov trrpaTTfyov iin- 
 fieXfiaBai bfl oiras traoi re oi arparicaTai eaovrai Koi ra CTrtTtjdeui 
 €^ou(rt, Kal, ov evcKa orpaTevovTatf TovTO ea-rai. Xen. Mem. Ill, 
 2, 1. Ka\6v t6 irapaaKevd^eiv oiras as jSeXrtorat ecrovrat Tav ttoXi- 
 rmv al i/rv;(ai. Plat. Gorg. 503 A. JAUpav npovmav f^"" Soxet ottos 
 6 vifios Kvpios ecrai Kai p.r]Te avyxvBrjaerai /iqr' av fifra- 
 woirjOfjcrerai; Dbm. Aristocr. 640, 10. KaXmr 8e bi)p.ayayyT](rfis, 
 tjv iTKOTrrjs oTTior oi j3eXT(0T0t pev ras rtpas e^ovaLv, oi S' aXXoi 
 /iijSci/ dbiKrja-ovrai. IsOC. NIcocl. p. 18 A. § 16. 'Opa OKcas p^ 
 aTroa'TrftTovrai. HdT. Ill, 36. Sot ^eXeroj oKtos prj are oyjfeTai. 
 Hdt. I, 9. *poi/Ttf' OTTcos prjbev ava^iov t^s npfis Tavrrjs iTpd§eis. 
 IsoC. Nioocl. p. 22 B. § 37. Ti ^dXtor' ev anaai. di.e<nrov8a<rrai rois 
 vopois ; OTTOiS pf] yevrjo-ovrai oi Trepi tiXX^Xous (jiovoi. Dem. Lept. 
 505, 9. Ael evXa^ftffOat^ paKifTTa pev QTras prj eyyevrjaeaOov., av 
 Se iyyivrjcrBov, onios ort Ta;(ioTa i kt e t pr) a € a 6 ov . Plat. Rep. 
 VIIl, 564 C. (For the force of the Future Perfect, see § 29, N. 1.) 
 
 (Subj.) *AXXou tov eVifieX^aet, rj 07ro>s OTt ^iXTiaroi TroXirat 
 wpev; Plat. Gorg. 515 B. ilapairKtva^taBai oiras(rvv6e& ayavi.- 
 ^(i>peSa. Xen. Cyr. I, 5, 14. Ov yap OTrats irXetovos a^ios yei/rjTat 
 cVtjLtfXftrat, aXX onas avTos ort TrXciara opata KapTroxrcTUt. 
 (Subj. and Fut. combined.) Xen Symp. VIII, 25. 
 
 (Fut. Opt.) 'E^rj virb TroXX^y eivipeKeias oirtos as eXdviora pev 
 SyjroiTOi €Xd)^toTa 8* dKoiJo"otro, eXti^ifrra 8* epotro. Xen. 
 Oecon. VII, 5. (Here the construction after a primary tense would 
 be, OTTcof oyjreTOi .... aKovcreTat .... epijrat.) *E7re/xfXetT0 on'os 
 prj aa-iTol woTf ea-oivro. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 1, 43. See the other ex- 
 amples of the Future Optative under § 26, Note 1 (a). 
 
 (Fut. Ind. after Secondary Tenses.) 'ETtpaaaov ojror tis /Soijfleia 
 ij^ei. TlIUC. Ill, 4. TlpoBvprjBivTos evhs EKaorou oiras ij vais irpo- 
 i^ei. Thuc. VI, 31. EiXa^ftff^ai napexeXtifO-de dXX^Xoir, OTTtos /iij 
 \ri<reTf 8i.a(ji6apevTfs. Plat. Gorg. 487 D. OiS' oiras opdri ttXeu- 
 (TfTat jrpoeiStro, dWa Ka6' avrhv oirmf eVi Totr e)(6po'is ?(7Ta« 
 irapta-Kevaa-ev. Dbm. F. L. 419, 28. 
 
 (Prea. or Aor. Opt.) 'En-t/ie'XfTo ouTtSv, ojrios tifi avSpdiroSa 8 1 a • 
 
§ 45.3 'OjTwr AFTER VERBS OF STRIVINO. 75 
 
 Tf\oitv.^ Xbn. Cjr. Vni, 1, 44. 'A.mKpimTO, on aiiT-i fie\oi 
 oiras KaXms fx"'- Xen. An. I, 8, 13. 'E/ie/iifX^<tft St airots oiras 6 
 mtraypeTtis cldeir) ous Seoi ■ni)imiv. Xen. Hell. Ill, 3, 9. 
 
 (Subj. after Secondary Tenses.) 'ETrpacnev oivtes TroXt/ios yevr)- 
 rai, XhuC. I, 57. Kirpau'aov oiras diroaTra'aiO'tv ^Adrjuaioiv ttjV 
 toKlv. Id. in, 70. ^Qveirai itap avTwv oircos p^fj d7ria> fxev eK MaKe- 
 Soiias, he bribed them to effect thai we should not leave Macedonia 
 Dem. Cor. 236, 12. (Subj. after Historic Present.) 
 
 It will thus be seen that the Future Indicative is the moSv 
 common construction in these sentences, after both 'primary and 
 secondary tenses ; the Future Optative, which is theoretically 
 the regular form after secondary tenses, being rarely used, for 
 the reason stated in § 26, Note 2. 
 
 For the distinction between these object clauses and final 
 clauses, see § 43, Remark. 
 
 Remark. "Ottim (like <ai) is originally a relative adverb, mean- 
 ing as. See Thuc. VH, 6 7, out-ois, o tt q> s Svvavrai, as they can. 
 Then it is used in indirect questions, in the sense of oro> TpoTrca, how, 
 in what way, and is followed by the Future Indicative ; as crximeiv 
 ojrws Tj n6\is aaBrjtreTai, to see how the city shall be saved. So 
 Toiff TTovrfptiis, oTToii pji 8ai(rov(rt difcrjv, 68ov deiKwaL, he shows them 
 how they can avoid suffering punishment (oTto rpona prj Smcroucri). 
 Dem. Timoc. 733, 20. (See below. Note '2.) Tlien, by a slight 
 modification in sense, it may denote also the object to which the 
 striving, &c., is directed ; so that a-KOTrfiv (or o-xon-eiv tovto) ottcos ij 
 TToXis ara>Bij<Tfriu may mean to see (to this, viz.) that the city shall be 
 saved. Here, however, the Subjunctive is sometimes allowed, as 
 the interrogative force of ottois is lost sight of, and its force as a 
 final particle, meaning in order that, begins to appear. E. g. 
 
 SK&irei onas pri f^apvos e<reL a vvv Xeyeiy, see that you do not 
 deny what you now say. Plat. Euthyd. 283 C. ^Keirreov eaAu 
 onas €\d)(LaTa pku rpavpara Xd^oi pev, as eXaxttrra 8i aatpara 
 dvSpmv dnofidXapev, we must see that we receive as few wounds as 
 possible, and that we lose as few men's lives as possible. Xen. An. IV, 
 6, 10.* 
 
 From this it becomes established as a final particle, and denotes 
 the purpose in ordinary final clauses. From the original force of 
 oiras as a relative, used in indirect questions in the sense of how, we 
 
 * Compare Dem. Megal. 207, 5, traoireiv i^ otou rponov pf) yevfj- 
 trovTai (<jii\oi), to see in what way they can be prevented from becoming 
 friends; and Thuc. I, 65, evpaaa-ev otiji axfieXia ns yev^a-frai, he 
 was effecting tkat, &c. ; quoted by Madvig, Syntax, p. 12.5, whose views in 
 the main are given in the text, above. See also Thuc. IV, 128, evpaa- 
 trtv oTta Tp&T'(d rdxjLtTTa To'is pev ^vp^rj<TeTai tSjv Se affaXXo^e- 
 Tai. 
 
76 PINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 45 
 
 must explain its occasional use in indirect quotations m the sense 
 of MS or oTi (§ 78). See also § 6S, 1, Rem. 
 
 Note 1. 'Onas in this construction sometimes (though rarelj.) 
 takes the particle &v when it is followed by the Subjunctive ; never, 
 when it is followed by the Future Indicative. Its use is the same 
 as in ordinary final clauses (§ 44, 1, N. 2). 
 
 When ai> is used with the Optative after a verb of striving, it 
 denotes an ordinary apodosis, as in § 44, 1, N. 3 (b), and oiras is 
 simply interrogative. E. g. 
 
 'H oKKov t(j)Lefievoi Sixda-ova-iv rj tovtov, ojriaE av fKaarot firjT 
 E^^Gxri TaWorpia firfre twv avruiv are putvraL; PlaT. Rep. IV, 43.> 
 E. 'Eav 8' e\6j], ixrixavririou, oirios tiv bia^vyrj Koi /ifi SS SiKtjv 6 
 eX^pos- Id. Gorg. 481 A.- MaWov ^ irpocrBev eia^ei avrovs ontos hu 
 KaX exovTfs rt o'Uabe dcjytKwvTai. Xen. An- VI, 1, 17. (Here 
 fVififXeia or some such word is understood as the subject of cla^fi.') 
 Skotto), ottqjs hv o)s paara Bidyotev, ^/zelf S' ^i* fiaXiara av cv<l>pai~ 
 voipeda Bewpevoi. airois, I try to see how they might (if they should 
 choose) live the easiest lives, &c. Xbn. Symp. VII, 2. So emiuXif 
 6ijvai oiras hv yivoiTo, Id. Cyr. I, 6, 7. 
 
 Note 2. (a.) The Homeric construction whicli most re- 
 sembles that of § 45 is found after such verbs as <l>pa^oiJuu, 
 /SouXcv'd), Xeiatra, or pfppr]pi(a, to consider, and netpda, to try. 
 Here oiras or as is used with the Subjunctive (sometimes with 
 id) after primary tenses, and with the Optative after secondary- 
 tenses. E. g. 
 
 Airol 8e <j>pa^a)peff orras Sx apurra yevrirai, let us ourselves 
 consider how the very best things may be done. Od. XHI, 365. *pa- 
 dopeB' (imperf.) ' hpyeioitriv Sir as ox aptara yivoiro. Od. HI, 
 129. $paft(r5ai o jr 77 (B s Ke purjarripas Kreivrjs. Od. I. 295. Ilepi- 
 ^pa^aipfBa jrafTfs vocttov, oiras eXBrja-ip, i. B. how he may come. 
 Od. I, 76. ^pda-<reTaL ws K€ verjrai, cVei 7roXv/i^;^ai'ds f oriv. Od. 
 I, 205. "A/ia 7rpoa"(7a> KaX oTTiVcfi) Xeixraei, ottcos ox* aptara yevrjrai, 
 i. e. he looks to see how, &c. II. Ill, 110. Mepprjpi^fv owas djro- 
 iioiaro nacrai vf/es. Od. IX, 554. Meppripi^e Kara <ppiva as 'AviX^a 
 ripria-rj (or Tifi^trei.'), i. e. how he might honor AckiUes. H. 11, 8. 
 BoijXevov oirtas &x apitrra yevoiTO. Od. IX. 420. Ufipa 7r cos jce» 
 8!) a-iju iraTplBa ydiav iKrjai, i. e. try to Jind means by which you 
 may go, &c. Od. IV. 545. nEi,.i5 as ke Tpwes VTreptbidKoi djro- 
 Xavrai. H. XXI, 459. 
 
 In some of these examples ottibs or as seems to be used as an in< 
 terrogative, meaning how,^ the Subjunctive of the direct question 
 being the common Homeric form explained in § 87. (For the Sub- 
 junctive with Ke, see § 87, Note.) But in other examples, especially 
 those with neipda, there is a nearer approach to the construction of 
 § 45. The two following examples will further illustrate the 
 Homeric usage:— fSij ydp juoi Ovfilis inecravra^ o(f)p' i<f>au,ivoi 
 
§4.5.] 'Onius AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING. 77 
 
 tpixiTiTiv, H. VI, 861; (ftpa^iado) firj ris oi diulvcov aelo /lap^'ijrut, 
 n. V, 411. See also'Od. VI. 113. 
 
 (6.) In Homer ojrtur takes the Future Indicative chiefly when it 
 is used merely as an indirect interrogative, with no reference to a 
 purpose, as in H. II, 252, oiSe ti ttm a-d(f)a iS/iec ottcos e(TTat rtiSe 
 epya, we do not yet even know certainly how these things are to be ; or 
 in Od. XTII, 376, (jypd^ev oiras iivrjtTTriptnu dvaL^eo'L •xeipas e^rj<7€ ls , 
 consider how you will lay hands on the shameless suitors. It may take 
 the Future (as well as other tenses) when it is used as a simple rela- 
 tive; as in li. I, 136, owas dma^iov earai, as shall be an equivalent. 
 (See Remark, above.) Oecasionally also we find the Future after 
 mtas in final clauses (§ 44, 1, N. 1). 
 
 Note 3. As many verbs of this class imply caution, they 
 may be followed by the simple fjij (without on-ffic), like verbs 
 of caution staA. fearing (§ 46). See especially 6pS> and axona. 
 Here, as elsewhere, /«) takes the Subjunctive more frequently 
 than the Future Indicative. E. g. 
 
 SKOTTfi Sri firi TOVTOi! avTou i^aiTr](rr)Tai Koi Koray eXatr?;. 
 •Dem. Mid. 563, 26. 'Opa ovv p.r] ti koi vvv ipyairriTai. Plat, 
 Symp. 213 D. "Opa fi^ TroXAmK (nduTa ^fiav x^^P'^" Sf^cf. 
 Xen. Cyr. IV, 1, 18. SKoVei, juij <roi Trpovoi y tov Bfov (j)v\aKTia. 
 Soph. O. C. 1180. "opa (tv, jitj vvv jiiv ns eixepfis Trapfjs- SoPH. 
 Phil. 519. 
 
 (See the corresponding use of on-mi fi^,'instead of p-f), after verbs 
 of fearing, &c., § 46, Note 2. It is often difficult to draw the line 
 between the two constructions of § 45 and § 46.) 
 
 Note 4. 'Sis is sometimes, though rarely, used instead of oTrmt 
 after verbs of striving. Here the Subjunctive is more common than 
 the Future Indicative. E. g. 
 
 'Empe\ovvTcu is ?X3 ouras- XeN. Oecon. XX, 8. 'fls Se (caXms 
 e^ei TCI vpiTepa, ep.oi /ifX^o-fi. Xen. Cyr. HI, 2, 13. 'ETfipeXrjBr; as 
 Tvxoiev irdvTav rav KaKwv. Id. VII, 3, 1 7. SireidovTfs a s Zfvis pryiroT 
 ap^fifv Beav. Aesch. Prom. 203. Occasionally we find the Sub- 
 junctive with av: to otra dv yva dyaBd flvai iTupiKfiadai its dv 
 Trpaxdfj' . . . . Ou rf)Epf4 Kapirov, fjV pf) Tis evipiKriTai ws dv 
 Taura ire paivrjTai.. Xen. Hipparch. IX, 2. (See above, N. 1.) 
 
 Note 5. Some verbs which are regularly followed by an 
 Infinitive of the object occasionally take an object clause with 
 oTTtas (rarely with other particles), in nearly or quite the same 
 sense : — 
 
 (a.) Verbs of exhorting, entreating, and commanding are 
 sometimes followed by Snas, and those oi forbidding hy mrat 
 luj, after tne analogy of verbs of striving. E. g. 
 
78 FINAL AND OiJJECT CLATTSES. [§ 45 
 
 At<ro-e<rSat 8/ fuf aurV Sirois vrjiiepna f ittt/, and implore hint 
 thyself to speak the truth. Od. Ill, 19. (Compare the regular con 
 struction, oiSe ae XiWo/xa^ fievfiv, II. I, 174.) Aia-trero 8' atel 
 'H(j)maTov KKvTocpyov ottcus \v<T€ lev 'Apr/a, he implored him to 
 liberate Ares. Od. VIII, S44. KeiVai t f'/i^K dyyei^ar evroXfiv, 
 ojTffls tAi» TraiSn 8ei§ei. SoPH. Aj. 567. ManeXevovrai owas 
 Tip.a>pri(T€Tai wavTas Tois toioutovs. Plat. Rep. VIII, 649 E. bo 
 TiapayyiWei oiros pfj ca-ovTat, Id. Ill, 415 B. 'Eiioiye aTrrjyo- 
 pcvtt ontos fif) TovTo a7roKpivoipr]v. (Fut. Opt.) Id. I, 33!) A. 
 'Airtiprjitevov avT^ ottcbj firibtv ipel t)V fiyeWai, when he is forbidden 
 to say award of what he believes. Id.I,337E. See Soph. Trach. 604. 
 
 In Od. XVn, 362, we find &TpvvfV as av irvpva xara pvTjarripas 
 ayfipoi, where the av is used with the particle as in the examples 
 under § 44, 1, N. 3 (a). 
 
 (J.) 'iva is used in the same sense in a single passage of the 
 Odyssey, III, 327 : — AiVo-eo-^ai 8e fuv avros Iva vjjptpris iviirir^, 
 and implore him yourself to speak the truth. 
 
 This use of Iva is not found in Attic Greek, but it reappears in 
 the later language. E. g. 
 
 'EvTo\fjV Katvrjv 8lS<oiu vfiiv, Iva ayairarf aXX^Xovr, a new com- 
 mandment I give unto you, that ye love one another. JoH. Evang. 
 XIII, 34. So iBerjdriv Iva ex^aXXaa-iv, Luc. IX, 40. So in Latin, 
 rogat ut liceat. ,j 
 
 (c.) A case of &s and the Subjunctive (instead of an object In-*' 
 finitive) after a verb implying a, promise is found in II. I, 558 : — 
 
 Tj cr' dim KaTavtvaai irrjTVfiov, as 'A^'X^a rip,r)(Tjis, oXio-jis hi 
 iroXeas iiTt vijvaXv 'Axatav, tliat you promised by your nod to honor- ' 
 Achilles, &c. 
 
 Note 6. (a.) On the other hand, some verbs which regularly 
 take orras are occasionally found with an Infinitive of the object, 
 sometimes with the article. (See § 46, N. 8.) E. g. 
 
 * Aet Tiva iirep-eXovTo trcfyaiv ainav 4v rais apj^als fivat, they always 
 took care that one of their own number should be in the offices (wliere 
 we should expect oTrcor ns earai or ecroiro). Thuc. VI, 54. OiS" 
 fTTCfieXrjdrjv tov dthatrKoKov ixoi Tiva yeveirdaL rav firtaTafxfvav, 
 Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 4. So the Infinitive with to, Mem. IV, 3, 1. 
 
 (6.) Verbs of this class can be followed by an indirect question 
 introduced by ci, whether. E. g. 
 
 El ^vp.TTovrjiTfcs Ka\ ^vepydtrfi (ricoVfi, see whether thou wUt assist 
 me, &c. Soph. Ant. 41. (See § 46, Note 6, c.) 
 
 Note 7. (a.) Both oiras and oirtoi fu^ are sometimes used 
 elliptically with the Future Indicative in exhortations and pro' 
 hibitions, depending on some Imperative like o-kottcc, take care, 
 understood. 'Owmr /iij allows also the Subjunctive. E. g. 
 
 "Ottcos avi)p eo-et (sc. CT/cuTrei), prove thyself a man. "Onas /iot, 
 
§ 45.] 'Ojrfflr AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING. 79 
 
 u avBpame, fifi e pels ot( eori to SmSfita Sir t^, see that you do not 
 tell me that tunce six are twelve. Plat. Rep. I, 337 A. 'Oiras oiv 
 fo-fo-df nvSpcs a|[ot Trjs i\fv8eplas (so. o-KOTreire) , pi'Ove yourselves men 
 imrthy of freedom. Xen. An. I, 7, 3. "OTrms yf, av rt Toirav ylyvr]- 
 Tat, TOVTOvs iTraiveaecrd e Kal Tip.Tj(reT€ Kal aTeipavaxreTe , 
 €fjL£ de iMTj ' Koi p.evTOL Kuv TL Ttov evaVTLav^ OTTias TovTQis opyieltrBf . 
 Dem. F. Ij. 355, 17. "OTTtos TOLVVV Trept tov noXeficw firjdev ipeis, 
 see therefore that you say nothing about the war. Id. 370, 22. "Owois 
 ye fifi c^aTrarricrji ij/ias. Plat. Prot. 313 C. (See § 46, N. 4.) 
 
 (b.) We occasionally find the Future Indicative with /117 in an 
 independent sentence, expressing a prohibition. This may be ex- 
 plained by supposing an ellipsis of on-iar from the construction just 
 mentioned (oTruf p.ri toSto epels becoffliiig 'iifj tovto ipfis) ', but it 
 seems more natural to consider it as an independent construction. 
 See § 25, 1, N. 5 (6), and the examples. 
 
 Remark. The construction of Note 7 (a) is confined almost 
 exclusively to the second person of the verb ; yet the first and third 
 persons are sometimes found. E. g. 
 
 Kal oir<i>f, mo-Trep ipayratri, Trpodvfias, ovTa (cai woielv ede\^- 
 <rov(Tiv. Dem. Chers. 99, 14. "Ottibs 8e to iTvp,^o\ov Xa^dvTfs 
 en-EiTO ir%.r]iriov <a6f8oviie0a. Arist. Ec'cles. 297, 
 
 Note 8. When an Aorist Subjunctive active or middle was to 
 be used with Sirms or Srras p.^ after a verb of striving, the second 
 Aorist was preferred to the first, if both forms were in use. This 
 arose from the great similarity in form between these first Aorists 
 and the Future Indicative (as ffovkevtrri and /SouXeucret, jSouXcuotjt-oi 
 and j3ou\eu<rcTai) : this made it natural for a writer, if he intended 
 to use the Subjunctive at all, to avoid those forms of it which were 
 nearly identical with the more regular Future Indicative. This of 
 course did not apply to the first Aorist Subjunctive passive, which 
 has no resemblance to the Future Indicative. The same remark 
 applies to the Subjunctive after ov pij, in the construction described 
 in § 89. In both constructions the Subjunctive differs from the 
 Futm-e only by being a less vivid form of expression.* 
 
 * The general rale, first laid down by Dawes (Misc. Crit. pp. 222 and 
 228), which declared the first Aorist Sabjanctive active and middle a sole- 
 cism after onas pi) and ov prj, was extended by others so as to include 
 Siras (withoa't prij, and the Greek authors were emended to conform to it. 
 As this rule has no other foundation than the accidental circumstance 
 mentioned in Note 8, it naturally fails in many cases, in some of which 
 even emendation is impossible. Thus in the example, KfXeuouiri ■npoara- 
 TfCcai oirais eK7r\ev(Tri r) (rrpaTid, Xen. An V, 6, 22, e/CTrXeuo-j 
 cannot he « mistake for eKTrXeuiret, as the Attic Future is cKTrXfiiropai 
 or eK7r\tV(rovpm. So in Soph. Phil. 381, ov prj nor is tt/v Sxiipov 
 cK7r\eva-r]S, no emendation is possible. See also Plat. Rep. X, 609 
 B. oil /iij anoXia-Ti, where the Future would be ajroXei. The rule of 
 
80 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 46 
 
 C. Ol^ect Glauses with /ni; after Verbs of Fearing, Sfc. 
 
 § 46. After verbs and phrases which express oi 
 imply /ear, caution, or danger. Mi i^^t ov that, is used 
 with the Subjimctive if the leading verb is primary, and 
 with the Optative if the leading verb is secondary. Bj 
 the principle of § 44, 2, the Subjunctive can also follow 
 secondary tenses, in order that the mood in which the 
 object of the fear originally occurred to the mind maj 
 be retained. 
 
 Mri (like the Latin we) denotes fear that something 
 
 may happen which is not desired ; fir) ov (ut = ne non') 
 
 denotes fear that something may not happen which i« 
 
 desired. B. g. 
 
 io^ovjiai jiT] yfvrjTai (vereor ne accidat), I fear that it may hap- 
 pen: (jioPoviiai fifi oi yewjToi (vereor ut aaciAaX), I fear that it may 
 not happen, tivv 8' alvais SfiSoiKa Kara cfipiva firj <t( irapeiirri . II. I, 
 S5o. Aci'Sm fifj 6r}pe(raiv eXiop Koi Kvppa yivcupat. Od. V, 473, 
 Oi ^o^fi pf) (T "hpyos mtrirfp Kap anoicrfivai SiXji- EuR. Or. 770. 
 IIoioi' i6vos oi SoKcl (^ofiovpfvov prj Ti irddij; Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 10. 
 ^povTi^Q) pf) KpdnoTov y ^01 myav. Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 39. *iiXa7-- 
 Topevos pfj do ^11 pavdaveiv ti. Id. IV, 2, 3. i^tboiKa pfj oiS' oaiov j] 
 dirayopeietv. Plat. Rep. II, 368 B. Ta jrfpi t^i ^^x^s jroXXqn 
 
 Dawes is now generally abandoned ; but most editors still hold to it (al 
 least in pnntice) so far as to exclude the prohibited forms with onoii 
 when it follows verbs of striving, &e., and with oi px). Even here, how- 
 ever, the rule is maintained only by chanfjing many passages against 
 Mss. authority. Tlius in Dem. 01. I, p. 9, 17, all Mss. except one read 
 vapa<TKtvdaa<rdai, oirais cvBivSe ^or)6r](TriTe , koi pf/ wdBrjTf toutow, 
 while nearly all editions have ^or]6rjiTiT€. In the Third Philippic of 
 Demosthenes two similar examples occur: p. 128, 25, oirais ptjSeis 
 dvaTpe-\jf€t, TovTo a-KOTreltrdai, v/here all Mss. have drarpex^j, which 
 Schaefer emended to dvaTpi^ft; and p. 12.5, 10, owms pr/ SovXtiaov- 
 0-11/ npaTTovTes, where the weight of Mss. authority decidedly favors 
 SovXevawcnv. For ou /i^, see § 89, 2, Rem. 2. 
 
 Whatever view is taken of these last examples, there certainly seema to 
 be no reason for extending thejule of Dawes to oTrur in pure final clau.ses 
 as in these the Future is used only by exception (§ 44, 1, N. 1). There 
 is no objection, therefore, to such sentences as tliese : — S>v evcKa emra- 
 Brivai, ona>s diroXava-aipev Ka\ oiras ycvrnpeda, Xkn. Cyr VII 
 5, 82; and ffc/cXijo-mw^ui^yayoi-, mas viropvijaa, kcu p4p^a,pai, 
 Thug. II. 60. So with on-ms apioroTrotijo-iBi'Tat, Thdc VII 39 
 In elliptical prohibitions with oTrwr pf, (^ 45, N. 7) the Subjunctive seems 
 to be allowed from the analogy of ordinary prohibitions (§ 86). 
 
§ 46.] Ml} AFTER VERBS OF FEARING. 81 
 
 BTtKmav napex^ei rois avBpinrois, jifj fVeiSaw dwoK'Kayfj tov crujuaros 
 oiiSafiov en rj, aWa Siafjide iprjTai t€ kcli aTToXXuijTai. Plat, 
 Phaed. 70 A. Ovkovv vvv Kai tovto Kivdvvos, fir) Xa/SoxTt Trpoordraff 
 avTav Tivas tovtwu, there is danger of this, that they may take, Sec. 
 Xkn. An. VII, 7, 31. Kivdvvos cVrt, nrj jueru^aXui'Tai Koi ye- 
 vaivrai jtiera Tmv TroXf/ii'toK. Isoc. Plataic. p. 303 E. § 38. 'Okvw foj 
 fioi 6 Ava-ias TajrfLvos <j)ai>!j. Plat. Phaedr. 25 7 C. EiiXg/SoB 6e fitj 
 (^avfis KaKos yeytis. SoPH. Trach. 1129. Ovbev bewoi etrovTOi jii) 
 fio7)6ea(Ti TavTTj. Hdt. VII, 235. 'YTroTTTeiofiev Koi vfias jir) ov 
 Koivoi aTTojS^Te. ThuC. IU, 53. Aifrp^wd/xci/os fir} KpopriKcos aKO- 
 n£p.fv. Plat. Theaet. 183 E. 
 
 AeLiras p.ri irajs oi epva-ataro vexpov 'Ap^aioi. II. V, 298. "AffTO 
 yap p^r] NvktI dorj dnoOvpta epdoi. H. XIV, 261. 'Eyoj yap rjpTjv 
 tKTreTrXrj-yjuevi; ^dj^a>, pr] pot to kclWos aXyos e^evpoi ttotc. SopH, 
 Trach. 25. "ESeia-av ofEWTives prj npotrdyoiev irpos to Ktpas koL 
 aVTOvs KaTaKo^eiav . Xkn, An. I, 10, 9. Ovksti etferiBevrOj 
 behoiKorrcs pri dnOTprjBeirjirav. Id. Ill, 4, 29. "'Ebeurav prj \vTTa 
 Tts &(T7rep Kvo'lv fiplv e'pneTTTaiKOi. Id. V, 7, 26. 'Ynanreva^as pr] 
 T^v Bvyarepa X e y o i , rjpeTo, having suspected that he might mention his 
 daughter. Xen. Cyr. V, 2, 9. 'Hdvprjadv nves, iwooipevoi pfi ra 
 fsrtrJjSeta ovk e;^otf i/ oTTodev Xap^dvoiev. Xkn. An. Ill, 5, 3, OvSels 
 yap KLvdvvos idoKci eivai, prj Tis avta TTOpevopEvav €k tov OTrttrBev ejfi- 
 anoiTo. Id. IV, 1, 6. 
 
 01 ^lOKaiies rds vrjcrovs ov< e^ovXovTO TrajXefii/, ScipalvoVTfs pfj 
 epnopLov yevavTat' Hdt. I, 165. Ta yap dcdtevai p^ Xayots ija-' 
 aovs <» O" t , To\prjp(os npos Ta epya e\wpovv. ThUC. Ill, 83. JlepLberis 
 yei^opevos prj tTrmXeva-coo-tv al v^ss. ThuC. Ill, 80. EbfLo-a p^ 
 Tpoiav ddpoiirrj xai Iucoikiot; jrdXiv. EuR. Hec. 1138. Oi Beaipfvoi, 
 fijtofiovvTo pr) Ti ndBrj. Xen. Symp. II, 11. A^Xos ^v ncuriv 
 (^Mvpos) oTi vTTfpitpo^elTO prj oi 6 ndiriros dwoddvrj . Xen. Cyr. I, 
 
 *'2- ... 
 
 It will be seen by the examples that the construction with p^ is 
 very often used when the leading verb only implies the fear, cau- 
 tion, or danger, as after vironTeia and okvS), On this principle we 
 must explain passages like H. X, 1 00 ; ovdi ti iSpev, pr) nms Ka\ 8ia 
 vvKTa pevoivria-ma-L pdxfirBai, where the idea is we know of no security 
 against their deciding tojight during the night, — implying we fear lest 
 they may. 
 
 Remark. These clauses with p-q, when they follow verbs of 
 caution like (fivKoTTopai, tiXa^ovpai, &c., partake of the nature o/ 
 final clauses to the same extent with the construction of § 45, since 
 they imply the end or purpose of the caution. (See § 43, Remark.) 
 On the other hand, when they follow (jjo^oipai and other verbs 
 expressing fear or danger, no purpose is expressed or implied, but 
 there is merely an apprehension that something will happen, or, in 
 some cases, that something is now taking place or has already 
 happened. We should hence expect that these verbs would follow 
 the analogy of verbs ot thinking, &c., and take either the Indicative 
 with as or the Infinitive, to denote the object of the fear. (ThLi 
 
82 PINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 46. 
 
 antuallj- happens in a few cases ; as 01! Ao0ov^eda *^"5''™°'"'^'"' 
 Thuc. V, 106; un <io|8oC as airoprjoeis, Xen. Cyr. V, 2, 12. See 
 below, Note 6.) StiU, verbs of fearing, when the object ot the 
 fear is future, as it commonly is, are closely connected in sense 
 with those like <l>v\dTTo,mii as they imply at least a desire 
 (though not a purpose) to prevent the result. Ihe Greeks 
 generally apply to both the same construction, and as tney say 
 <l>vXdTTo'iJUU lit) yivrjrai, they say also cjiofioviiai jirt yevr/rai. When 
 the object of the fear is already ^osi or actually /resent, so that no 
 desire of preventing a result can be implied, verbs of fearing are still 
 followed by /ifj as before; but now all analogy to final clauses dis- 
 appears, and the dependent verb is put in the proper tense of the 
 Indicative, as in ordinary object clauses after orj and as. (See be- 
 low. Note 5.) 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes, though seldom, /jij takes the Future 
 Indicative after verbs of fearing, &c. E. g. 
 
 io^ov/iai &e, /iri Ttvas ^Sovas fjSovatg evpr)(roji,ev ivavrlas. PlAT. 
 Phil. 13 A. iofiephv Koi <r(j)aK€pov, nf/ a<j>a\cis Kfitrofiai. Plat. 
 Kep. V, 451 A. 
 
 The Future seems to differ from the Subjunctive in these cases, 
 as in final clauses, only by expressing the result more vividly and 
 marking its futurity more strongly. Thus ^o^oiifmi p.ri cvpap^v 
 would not differ from (jto^ovpai p.r) fvpria-op-fv quoted above, ex- 
 cept in the manner of expression; just as iav p.r) evpapev would 
 differ from ft p,fi cvpfia-opifv. (See § 44, 1, N. 1.) For the rare use 
 of the Future Optative after verbs ot fearing, &c., see § 26, Note 
 1(6). 
 
 Note 2. Verbs denoting fear and caution are sometimes 
 followed by onas p,^, with the Future Indicative or the Sub- 
 junctive after primary tenses and the Optative after secondary 
 tenses, like verbs of striving, &c. Many verbs (like Spa and 
 o-KOTTffl) belong equally well to both classes (§§ 45, 46). It 
 will be noticed, that oiras /xij here is exactly equivalent to foj, 
 so that <j>ofiovpjii onais pfj yevij(rfTai (or ■yevTjrai) means I fear 
 that it will happen (not, I fear that it will not happen). (See 
 Note 6, a.) E. g. 
 
 Tov Saipovos Sedoix' owas prj rev^opai KaKoSalpovos- Arist. Eq. 
 112. Eiika^oipevoi ottojs ^i^ olxriiropai. Plat. Phaed. 91 C. A^- 
 fioiKo jr 0) r /i ij dvdyKT] yivtjTm, 1 fear that Viere may he a necesidty. 
 Dem. Phil. Ill, 130, 14. Ov (j)o^f'i, ojrwr pfj dv6<riov wpaypa 
 rvyxdvys irpdrrav; Plat. Euthyphr. 4 E. ^uXdrrou, ojrmt p)) els 
 rovmvriov i\6jis. Xen. Mom. Ill, 6, 16. 'HSe'ws hv (dpeyjnuui t&* 
 Mpa), ei p^ ^ojSoi'/xijv oirais pfi in adrov pt rpdnoiTO. Xen. Mem, 
 II, 9, 2. 
 
 NocE 3. The particle Sv is never used with /aij and the Sub- 
 
§ 46,] Ml} AFIEK VERBS OF FEIEING. 83 
 
 junctive. It is sometimes joined with an Optative depending upon 
 lir^ after verbs of fearing, in which case it always forms an apodosis 
 with the Optative. Such an Optative with av can of couree follow 
 primary as well as secondary tenses, by § 31, Note 2. (See § 44, 1, 
 N. 3, Rem.) E. g. 
 
 ^8oiKa yap fi^ Trpa \eyots &v rbv noOov Tov e^ ifiov, I feUT that 
 you might tell {if you should have an opportunity). Soph. Trach. 631. 
 (Cf. Philoct. 493.) OuTf irporrSoKia ovdcpia ^v pi) av ttote ol irohifuoi 
 c jTiTrXcufff lay. ThuC- II, 93. ''EKcivo evvoca pff \lav &v Ta)(y 
 a-a<f)povi<rdeir}v, lest {in that case) I should be very soon brought to 
 my senses. Xen. An. VI, 1, 28. 
 
 Note 4. M^ with the Subjunctive, and ottios prj with the 
 Future Indicative (seldom the Subjunctive), are sometimes 
 used elliptically, depending upon some verb of fear or caution 
 understood. (See § 45, N. 7, a.) This expresses an appre- 
 hension or anxiety, sometimes a mere suspicion. It is espe- 
 cially common in Plato. E. g. 
 
 'AXXa pr) oil TovT 3 ;^aXe7roi', Qiivarov <j}vy€tVf but (/ fear) lest this 
 may not be the difficult thing, to avoid death. Plat. Apol. 39 A. Mq 
 aypoiKoTfpov jj to akr/dts clTreiv, (/ fear) lest it may be too rude to 
 , speak the truth. Plat. Gorg. 462 E. 'AXXa fny ovx ovras eyrj , dXX' 
 dvayxalov ij eldora rideaOai rov Ti6epevov ra ovopara. Plat. Crat. 436 
 B. Otpoi ToKas, 6 Zeis oTras pfj p' oi/rerai. Arist. Av. 1494. 
 (This example belongs equally well under § 45, N. 7, a.) "On-ms 
 ovv p^ aTToXei poffriyovpevos. Xen. Cyr. I, 3, 18. AXX oTrtas pr\ 
 4v Tols ^oiypa(j>r]pao'Lv 17 tovto, to prj up$as diavepeiv, eVl de rols ovopaaiv 
 ov, aXX' avayKOLiov 1; aeX opdas. Plat. Crat. 430 E. 
 
 In Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 12, /i^ ovv, e(j>i], ov hvvapai iyaTaTrjs 
 BiKaioariinis f^y^a-aa-dat; (do you fear) I am not able to ex^ain,!ic.? 
 the Present Indicative belongs under Note 6 (a.) 
 
 Note 5. Verbs of fearing may refer to objects of fear 
 which are past or immediately present; so that no desire or 
 even possibility of preventing the result can be implied. (See 
 Rem. before Note 1.) Here, therefore, all analogy to final 
 dauses disappears, and pij is followed by the present and past 
 tenses of the Indicative, as on or &s would be in indirect 
 quotations. The following cases occur : — 
 
 (a.) Mi| with the Present Indicative expresses a fear that 
 
 something is now going on. E. g. 
 
 'Op&ptv pi) NtKi'as oieTot rt "Kiycai, let us be cautious lest Niciat 
 is thinking that he says something. Plat. Lach. 196 C. (Here tho 
 Subjunctive otijrat would have meant lest Nicias may think, refei^ 
 ring to tho future.) Ae8o«a pij wKrjyav Sect. AriS7. Nub. ■193 
 
S4 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 46 
 
 *opeio6t, /vij Sv<rKo\aT(p6v n mv SiaKfifiai rj h rZ TvpuaOet 
 /Sim, you are afraid lest I am now in a more peevish slate of inind, &c 
 (where the Subjunctive would have referred to the future, lesl'l 
 may be). Plat. Phaed. 84 E. 'En-iVxff, as hv ■n-povjepevvrjo-ai arl^ov, 
 fii) Tis iroKiT&v iv Tpljiif (j)avTd(eTai, K&fioX fiev tKBrj <^a\iKos a>i 
 doiXa yjfoyos. EuK. Pho'en. 92. (Here fifj (pavra^erai means lesl any 
 one IS now lo be seen; and /xij i\6ri, Lesl any report may come here- 
 after.') 'Ava^, <V<"' Toi, firi n koI BcrjKaTOV roilpyov toS', t) ^vvvoia 
 fiovXeiei TraXai. SoPH. Ant. 278. (The idea is, my mind has lorif/ 
 been anxious, lest '.his is the work of the Gods, iaTiv being understood 
 after M17.*) "Opa pri eKclvov KaXiei. Plat. Charm. 1 63 A. 'AXX' 
 flaoperrBa, pr} Tt kclI Karaaxerov Kpv(pT] KaXvirret KapSia dvpovpevrj, 
 dopovs TTapaiTTcixovTfs. SoPH. Ant. 1253. (The idea is, we shall 
 learn the result of our anxiety lest she is concealing, &c.t) 
 
 (J.) Mt; with the Perfect Indicative expresses a fear lest 
 something has already happened. The difference between 
 tliis and the Perfect Subjunctive is often very slight, the 
 latter expressing rather a fear that something may hereafter 
 prove to have happened. (See examples, § 18, 1.) E. g. 
 
 NCi/ Se ^Q^ovpeda, pi] dp<j}OT€pa)v apa rj papTrjKQpev , but now we 
 fear lest we haoe missed both at once. Thug. Ill, 53. (The Perfect 
 Subjunctive here would strictly have meant lest it may hereafter 
 prove that we have missed.) Ae'Soixa pi] Xi\r]6apev [rrjv elpr]VTiv\ 
 •eVl TToXXa ayovrec, I fear that we have been unconsciously enjoying a 
 peace borrowed at high interest. Dkm. F. L. 372, 1. ^o^ovpai pii 
 Xiiyois Ti(Ti ilfeuSfO'ii' eurcrv ^rjKapev. Pi,AT. Lys. 218 D. 
 
 * That this is the correct explanation of the passage, Soph. Ant. 278, 
 and that we need not emend it with Nauck, so as to read ToSpyov toS' rj, 
 ^vvvoia jSovXevet 7rd\ai, is evident from the Scholion on the passage : 
 *H (Tvvvoia pot )3ouXcu€rat (cai oierai p^ Koi d€r]\aTQV eori t6 jrpaypa. 
 So perhaps we should read pr] eXaviiei in Dem. Phil. Ill, 1 24, 25. 
 
 t In this passage, if anywhere, it would seem necessary to admit the 
 interrogative force usnallj- ascribed to prj, which would make it equivalent to 
 ti ou, whether not. But ht,re, as in ilie other passages quoted, it is plain 
 that the dependent clause after pt] expresses the object of an apprehension. 
 To establish » purely interrogative force in pf], it would seem necessary lo 
 find examples in which pi] not only follows a verb like oiSa, but also is 
 followed by a clause in which no object of apprehension is contained 
 (Such a sentence would be etaopfada pfj oi <jf)iXo4 fmo-tv, we shall learn 
 whether our friends are not living; but no such example can be found, ai 
 least in any classic writer. The Greeks would have said eiaopeaBa fl ot 
 (a(Tiv or €1 (maiv.) The use of el, whether, after verbs of fearing (Note 6, 
 c), usually adduced as an argument to prove the interrogative force of pn, 
 rather seems to show that, when the Greeks wished to intioduce an indi 
 rect question after verbs o' fearing, they had recourse to el, as in othel 
 cases. 
 
§ 46..J Mt) AVIIH THE INDICATIVE. 83 
 
 (c.) Mi; can be used with the Imperfect or the Aorist In- 
 dicathe, to express fear lest something happened in past time. 
 This can be expressed only in this way, as the Subjunctive 
 and Optative would refer to (relatively) future time. E. g. 
 
 Ae/dco /iij 8^ Trdvra dea vrjfiKprea e t tt f v , / Jear that all thai the 
 Goddess said was true. Od. V, 300. 'AX\' opa lifj irai^au eXeyev, 
 but be very careful lest he was speaking injeat. Plat. Theaet, 145 B. 
 (This implies a fear that he was speaking in jest.) 
 
 Note 6. (a.) As verbs of fearing, &c., imply thought, 
 they sometimes tike the construction of ordinary indirect dis- 
 course. Here i>s (and even on-mr), that, may be used to intro- 
 iuce the object of the fear, thus taking the place of /iij in the 
 common construction. ('Ot» seems to be used only in the case 
 mentioned in Note 7.) E. g. 
 
 'Avbpos fir] .(po^ov as airoprjO'eis a^lov, do not feat thai you will 
 le at a loss. Xbn. Cyr. V, 2, 12. (Here the direct discourse would 
 be d7ropr]<ra>, I shall be at a loss.^ M^ SeiVijTe i>s oiix rfhias KaSev- 
 &ri<reTe, do not fear that you wilt not sleep sweetly. Id. VI, 2, 30. 
 (Here fifj oix would be the ordinary expression.) Mij TpeVijs, onas 
 tre Tis dwoa-iraa-ei ^ia, lest any one shall tear you away by force. 
 Edr. Heracl. 248. M^ (pojSev prjT€ ep.e, ois treo Treipcofievos Xeya 
 \6yov Tovde, p.r\Te yvvdiKa rrfv efifjif, [jlt] tI tol e^ avTTJs yevT)Tai 
 SKd^oi, do not fear either that I am saying this to try you (Jos \iyai), 
 or lest any harm shall come (pf; yevijTat). Hdt. I, 9. (Here the two. 
 constructions after .<^o/3eC make the principle especially clear.) 
 
 In all these cases pi) or Snas prj would have been more regular, 
 and exactly equivalent to as and airms here. (See Note 2.) 
 
 (J.) "We also find the Future Infinitive after verbs of 
 fearing, standing in indirect discourse to represent a Future 
 Indicative of the direct discourse. (See § 73, 1, Rem.) 
 E. g. 
 
 Ov (j)o^ovpe6a ("Kao TaxTf aSai, we are not afraid that we shall 
 he defeated. Thuc. V, 105. (Here pfj with the Subjunctive or the 
 Future Indicative would have been more regular.) 
 
 (c.) Verbs oi fearing may also be followed by an indirect 
 question introduced by tt, whether, or by some other inter- 
 rogative particle. "Oirois used interrogatively in such sentences 
 is not to be confounded with onws in its use explained above 
 («)• E.g. 
 
 Oi SiSotKa el $iXi7r7ros fj, aXV «t t^s jrdXfOJS riduriKt rh tovs 
 ddiKovvras p.ia€lv koI TipapelaBoi, I have no fear (on the question') 
 
S6 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 46. 
 
 whether Philip is alive; but I have fear (about this), whether the cus- 
 tom of the city to hate and punish evil-doers is extinct. Dem. F. L. 
 434, 6. *d/3oy ei /iot (Sxriv o6j iya 8e\a. EuR. Heriicl. 791. *e- 
 pova-d <TOL viovs rjKO) \6yovs, 0d(3ft> jih e'i Tif btanoratv alcr67j(TCTai, 
 through fear whether any one will perceive it (where firj aladrjaerai or 
 auT6r]Tai might have been used, meaning lest any one shall perceive 
 it). Euu. Androm. 61. iofiowTai. o n o t irore ir po^T)(T(Tai if tov 
 ai'Spos bvvaiiis. Xen. Hell. VI, 1, 14. (The direct question would 
 be irol Trpoptia-eTai ;) T^i/ 6ebv 8' oirtos \dda 8e'8o«a, / am in fear 
 (about the question) how I shall escape the Goddess. Etjr. Iph. T. 
 995. (The direct question was ttSs \ddu>; § 88.) 
 
 Note 7. Verbs o( fearing may be followed by on, because, and 
 an ordinary causal sentence with the Indicative (§ 81). E. g. 
 
 OvK a^iou 8ia tovto ^o^etcr^at Toiis 7ro\€filovs, on TroWoi Tvy- 
 xdvova-iv ovres, to fear them, because they happen to be many. 
 IsOC. Archid. p. 128 C. § 60. ^^o^ovpcvrjs t^s iiTjTpbs, on rb 
 ytopiov itrvvBdveTo vofrabes fivai, Isoc. Aegin. p. 388 D. § 22. " 
 O T t fie ttoXKwv apxovai , p-rj cj)o^7j6^T€, dWa ttoXv fiaWov dia tovto 
 Bappfire, do not be afraid because they rule many, &c. Xen. Hell. 
 Ill, 5, 10. (M^ apxova-iv (pofie'iaBai. would mean to fear lest they 
 rule.) ^o^ovpxvos to KdctrQai Koi to TepvetrBai, on aky€tv6v, fearing 
 them, on the ground that they are painful. Plat. Gorg. 479 A. (But 
 for the analogy of the preceding examples, we might be inclined to 
 translate this yean'n^ that they are painful, like pfi aKyeivov.) 'E^o- 
 jSetro, ort 6<l>dT]oea6ai € peWe rd ^ao-iXeia olKodopeitf ap)(6fievos, he 
 was afraid, because he was about to be seen beginning to build the 
 palace. Xek. Cyr. Ill, 1, 1. 
 
 Note 8. (a.) Verbs of fearing may be followed by an Infinitive 
 (without prf), which is sometimes preceded by the article. Such an 
 Infinitive denotes the direct object of the fear, as in English, / fear 
 to go. E. g. 
 
 ^opovpai ovv 8ifXey;(€ii/ erf, pfj UTroXd/Sjjs, K. r.X., / am afraid to 
 refute you, lest you may suspect, &c. Plat. Goi^. 457 E. (Here 
 both constructions occur ) *o/3^creTai dSiKeii/, he will be afraid to 
 do iirrong. Xen. Cyr. VIH, 7, 15. (But (^o/S^o-erai /i^ aS«g, he 
 will fear that he may do wrong.) Il(<j>ptKa 'Epiviv TfXecrai t<U 
 Kardpas, I shudder at the idea of the Fury fulfilling the curses. Aesch. 
 Sept. 720. (But in 790, Tpia prj rfXtVij means I tremble lest sh« 
 may fulfil them.) See also Xen. An. I, 3, 17. t6 diro6vfi<rKfir 
 oiScis (^ojSfiTat, TO Be dSiKftv (po^eiTai. Plat. Gorg. 622 E. 
 
 See § 92, 1, Remark 2, and Note 3. 
 
 (6.) Verbs of caution may be followed by an Infinitive (wi(h or 
 without pfj), which is sometimes preceded by the article; the In- 
 finitive having the same meaning as a clause with /jij and the Sub- 
 junctive or Optative. E. g. 
 
 nS)t OVK S^iov aMv ye ^vXafatrdt-t roiovrov yeviirBai; why 
 
5 47, 2.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 87 
 
 ought Tie not to guard against hecoming smcA a man Jihnselff Xen. 
 Mem I, 5, 3. (Here yevecrBai is equivalent to ii}) yfinjTai.) iuXar- 
 TofitvosTo Xvir^o-ai rtva, taking care to offend no one. Dem. Cor. 
 ?13, 6. OvXaccretK /irideva nepaiovo'Bat. Thuc. VII, 17. *iiAaT7-o- 
 jifvov KoiiTpoopiyfuvov firj KaraiiT^vvai TavTrjv. HDem.] Aristog. I, 
 773, 1. (For /tij see § 95, 2, N. 1.) In Thuc. Vn, 77, 5, we find 
 the Infinitive with wcrre after ^vXacro-a). 
 
 (c.) KiVSui/OT eWt, the principal expression denoting rfanjrer which 
 takes fii} and a finite verb, is quite as regularly followed by the 
 Infinitive (wUhout fifj). E. g. 
 
 Oi (TfUKpbs kIvSvvos eiTTiv i^aTraTrjBrjvai, there is no little danger 
 of their being deceived. Plat. Crat. 436 B. 
 
 KivSweva is regularly followed by the Infinitive, by § 92, 1. 
 
 Kemabk. All the Infinitives referred to in Note 8 belong regu- 
 larly under the rule, § .12, 1. For the article before such Infinitives 
 see § 92, 1, Note 3. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 Conditional Sentences. 
 
 § 47. 1. In conditional sentences the clause con- 
 taining the condition is called the protasis, and that 
 containing the conclusion is called the apodosis. The 
 protasis is regularly introduced by the particle et, if, 
 negatively « /*'?• 
 
 . Note. a2 is tbe Doric form for el. It is sometimes used 
 also in Epic poetry, but only when kI immediately follows. 
 
 2. The adverb av (Epic ice or ksv, Doric ko) is regu- 
 larly joined with et in the protasis, when the verb is in 
 the Subjunctive (§ 50, 1) ; el with av (a) forming the 
 compound lav, av [a), or rjv. See § 38, 1.) The simple 
 el is used in the protasis with the Indicative and the 
 Optative. 
 
 The same adverb av is regularly ased in the apodosis 
 with the Optative (§ 50, 2), and also with the secondary 
 
88 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 47, 2, 
 
 tenses of the Indicative in the construction explained in 
 § 49, 2. (See § 37, 3, and § 39.) 
 
 3. The negative particle of the protasis is regularly 
 liT), that of the apodosis is ov. 
 
 Note. "When the last rule is violated, and tA is found in a 
 protasis, it is always closely connected with a particular word 
 (generally the verb), with which it forms a single negative 
 expression ; so that its negative force does not (like that of jirj) 
 affect the protasis as a whole. E. g. 
 
 XiavTms 8f]TT0V (ovras ?X^'), f"" ''^ f" '«'' "Axutoj ov (^rjTf eav re 
 <f>fiTe, if you deny it, as well as if you admit it. Plat. Apol. 25 B. 
 (Here iav firj (prjTe would mean unless you admit it.) El iikv ov 
 jroXXoi TjiTav, Kad' cKaarov av Trepi Toirav rjKovfTc, if there were only 
 a few, &c. Lys. Agorat. p. 135; § 62. Cf. p. 137; § 76. (Here 
 oil noXKoi are used together in the sense of oXi'yot.) T&vSe /liv ovSiv 
 Lcrov ifTTiv, ctye a(/>' r]^S>v -ye rav iv [j.€(ra ovdeis ovdeirore ap^e' 
 Tai, there is no fairness in this, if (it is the plan, that) no one is ever 
 to begin with us. Xen. Cyr. II, 2, 3. 
 
 The following example makes the difference between ou and fiij 
 particularly clear, ov affecting merely the verb, and /ir) affecting 
 the whole (including the ov) : « ^ij TJpo^evov ov^ vneSf^avro, 
 i<Ta>6rj(Tav av, if it had not been that they did not receive Proxenus, they 
 would have been saved. Dem. F. L. 364, 11. 
 
 When several clauses, introduced by fiev and Si, depend 
 upon a single «' which precedes them all, ou is used even more 
 frequently than pfj ; as such clauses have their own construc- 
 tion independently of the «', which merely introduces each of 
 them as a whole, not affecting the construction of particular 
 words. E. g. 
 
 AeLvov &u e'lrj, el oi p.ev eKeivav ^vpfia^ot eVi SouXem rfj avrau <pe- 
 povT€S ov K anepoviTLV, rjp^is d em to) avroi o'oi^eadat ov K apa dairavrj" 
 a-ofifv, it would be a hard thing, if (it is a fad that) their allies will not 
 refuse, &c., while we will not contribute. Thuc. I, 121. Efr ovk 
 aiVxpo", " rb pev 'hpyeltov irKriQos ovk i<j>o^ri6j] Ttjv AaKtSaipovlaiv 
 apxfjv, iipfls 8e ^ap^apov (pofirjiTeade ; is it not then disgraceful, if (it 
 is true, that) the Argive people did not fear, &c. Dem. Rhod. 197, 9. 
 
 Classiflcation of Conditional Sentences. 
 
 § 48. The supposition contained in a protasis may 
 be either particular or gener-al. A particular supposi- 
 
§ 48.J CLASSIFICATION OP CONDITIONS. 89 
 
 tion refers to a definite act or a definite series of acts. 
 A general supposition refers to any one of a class of 
 acts, which may occur (or may have occurred) on any 
 one of a series of possible occasions, — if having the 
 force of if ever or whenever. 
 
 The following examples contain particular suppositions : — 
 
 If he is {now) able to do this, he is doing it, el toCto ttokTk 
 
 Bvvarai, ttoici. If he was able to do this, he did it, ei tovto ttoi- 
 
 flv eSwaro, fTToUi. If he (shall) be able to do this, he will do it, 
 
 eav toUto noiftv SvvrjTai, iToi.fi(Tei. If he should be able to do this, 
 
 he would do it, el Toiiro'iroielv Si/vatro, troiolr] av. 
 The following contain general suppositions : — 
 If he is {ever) able to do this, he {always) does it, iav tovto 
 Toutv SvvjjTai, iToieZ If any one {ever) wishes to go, it is {always) 
 permitted, iav tis Pov\r]Tni Uvni, e^ea-Tiv. If he was {ever) able to 
 do this, he {always) did it, el tovto Troielv Bivairo, enoiei. If any 
 one {ever) wished to go, it was {always) permitted, e'l tis ^oi- 
 XoiTo Uvai, e^Tjv. If any one shall {ever) wish to go, it will {al- 
 ways) be permitted, iav tis levai /SovXiji-ai, del e^iaTai. If any 
 one should {ever) wish to go, it would {always) be permitted, ei 
 Tts levai ^ov\otTO, del &v i^eirj. 
 
 Although this distinction can logically apply to all suppositions 
 (present, past, and future), yet the Greek distinguishes the two 
 classes in construction only in present and past conditions, even 
 here excepting those which imply non-fulfilment of the condition. 
 Therefore all the classes under I., except A. 1, include hoth partic- 
 ular and general suppositions. 
 
 "I. Excluding from A. 1 the past and present general sup- 
 positions, which have a peculiar construction, we have four 
 forms of ordinary conditional sentences: — 
 
 A. If the protasis refers to the present or the past, the 
 question as to the fulfilment of the condition which it ex- 
 presses has been already decided {in point of fact) either 
 affiimatively or negatively ; the speaker, however, either may 
 or may not wish to imply by his form of statement how that 
 question has been decided. He will, therefore, state such a 
 condition in one of two ways : — 
 
90 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 4:8. 
 
 1. If he refers to a present or past cond;tion, expressing no 
 opinion as to its fulfilment, he may say if he is doing this, d 
 roiiTo rrpda-aret, — if he was doing it, el (Trpaatrev, — if he did it, 
 tl mpa^ev, — if he has done it, d ■ainpaxcv, — if he had already 
 done it, el iirenpaxfi- The apodosis, expressing the result of 
 the fulfilment of such a condition, may refer to the present, the 
 past, or the future. Thus we may say, 
 
 El Trpdrrcrei tovto, koKws ex^i, if he is doing this, it ts well. 
 
 El jrpda-a-fi tovto, ripAprrjKev, if he is doing this, he has erred. 
 
 Ei izpaaaei tovto, KaXas e|ei, if he is doing this, it will be well. 
 
 El (Trpa^e tovto, koXSs tx" i^^Pi^"' ^"'X^"' °^ '^?")' ?/^^ ''"^ this, it 
 is (was or will be) well; and so with the other tenses in the protasig. 
 (See § 49, 1.) 
 
 So in Latin, Si hocfacit, bene est; Si hoc fecit, bene eriu 
 
 2. If, on the other hand, he refers to a present or past con- 
 dition, wishing to imply that it is not or was not fulfilled, he 
 may say if he were now doing this, tl toCto eirpcura-ev ; or if he 
 had done this (although he did not di> it), ei enpa^ev. The 
 apodosis here denotes what would be or would have been the 
 result, if the false supposition in the protasis were a valid one. 
 The apodosis here contains the adverb Sv, which distinguishes 
 it from those forms of apodosis belonging under 1 in which past 
 tenses are used. Thus we may say. 
 
 El eirpaa-ae tovto, KoKas hv dxev, if he were (now) doing this, it 
 would be well. Ei cn-pao-o-s tovto, xaXas hv elxfv may also mean if he 
 had been doing this, it would have been well. 
 
 El eirpa^e tovto, koXSs &v evx^v (or av ei;^ei'), if he had done this, 
 it would have been well (or it would now be well). On the other 
 liand, fl cTrpa^c tovto, xaXas ta^fv (without av) would mean if he 
 did this, it was well. (See § 49, 2.) 
 
 In Latin : Si hocfaceret, bene esset; Si hocfecisset, benejuisset. 
 
 Kemaee 1. The Greek haa thus a special form (A, 2) implying 
 that a condition is not or was not fulfilled, and another (A, 1) im- 
 plying nothing whatever as to its fulfilment. There is no special 
 form implying that the condition is or was fulfilled, — a force often 
 erroneously assigned to the form A, 1. If this is to be expressed at 
 all, it must be done by the context, not by the form of the verb. 
 
 B. If the' protasis refers to the future, the question as to 
 the fulfilment of the condition is, of course, at present unde- 
 cided, and a speaker may state such a condition in either of 
 two ways (B, 1 and 2), which differ more in the form of state- 
 ment than in theb meaning : — 
 
§ 48.] CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONS. 91 
 
 1. He may say // he shall do this, eav irpaa-crri tovto (or, 
 still more vividly, el irpd^ei tovto), making a distinct .supposi- 
 tion of a future case. The natural apodosis to such a protasis 
 expresses what ivill be the result, if the condition shall be ful- 
 filled. We may therefore say, 
 
 'Eav irpaira-ri tovto, KoKas c^ei, if he do this, it loill be well; or « 
 (rpa|e( tovto, Kokas e|ei, if he .shall do this, it will be well. (See § 50, 
 I.) In Latin: Si hoc faciei (mare frequently si hoc fecerit), bene 
 erit ; rarely si hoc facial, bene erit. 
 
 2. He may also say, if he should do this, tl irpatraoi tovto, 
 still supposing a case in tlie future, but less distinctly and vividly 
 than before. The natural apodosis to such a protasis is a simi- 
 lar indefinite expression, it would be. "We can therefore say, 
 
 El rrpdao'oi tovto, kqXiSs au cx°'' if ^^ should do this, it would be 
 well. (See § 50, 2.) In Latin : Si hoc faciat, bene sit. 
 
 Remark 2. The two forms of protasis which the Greek ex- 
 presses by the Subjunctive (eav irpatrtrg tovto) and the Optative (ei 
 7rpd(r<Toi tovto) have only one equivalent form in Latin ; si hoc 
 facial meaning if he shall do this (c'di» tovto irpaacrrj), as well as if he 
 should do this {el tovto irpa<T(roi). (See § 50, 2, Kem. b ) But in 
 the former sense the Latin commonly employs the Future Indicar 
 tive, si hoc faciei (corresponding to el tovto jrpa^ei, if he shall do 
 this), or the Future Perfect, .si hoc fecerit, leaving the form si hoc 
 facial to represent the Greek el tovto itpdaaoi, if he should do this. 
 
 II. In general suppositions the two following classes are 
 distinguished in construction from the corresponding jt)arttcM/ar 
 suppositions (I. A, 1). 
 
 A. First, when the apodosis contains a verb of present 
 time, expressing a customary or repeated action or a general 
 truth, and the protasis refers to indefinite time represented in 
 English as present. We may then say, 
 
 'Edv Tis TOVTO Ttpdaari, KoK&s ex"' if ""^ ""* (ever) does this, it is 
 (ir, all such cases) well. 'Eai» roiro noieiv &ivr]Tai, irotcT, if he is 
 (ever) able to this, he (in all such cases) does it. 'Edv tis tovtov Trig, 
 aiTodv^a-Kei, if any one (ever) drinks of this, he dies. 
 
 B. Secondly, when the apodosis expresses a customary or 
 repealed action or a general truth in past time, and the pro- 
 tasis refers to indefinite past time. We may then say. 
 
 El Tis TOVTO irpaaa-oi, /eaXms elxev, if any one (ever) did this, it was 
 (in all such cases) well. El tovto noteiv SivaiTo, moiei, if he was 
 (ever) able to do this, he (always) did il. Ei tis tovtov ttIoi, aaeSvTf 
 aKtv, if any one (ever) drank of this, he died. 
 
92 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 48. 
 
 Remark 1. General suppositions referring to the future (see 
 p. 89), as well as those referring to the present or past with non- 
 fulfilment of the condition implied, not being distinguished by their 
 form from particular suppositions, are included under the rules of 
 § 49, 2 and § 50, 1 and 2. 
 
 Eemaek 2. Although the Latin occasionally agrees with the 
 Greek in the construction of general conditional sentences, — using 
 si facial and si faceret like iav vpaa-crrj and el irpdatrot above, — it 
 commonly agrees with the English in not distinguishing this class 
 from I, A, 1. 
 
 I. Pour Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences. 
 
 A. Present and Past Conditions. 
 § 49. 1. (^Particular Suppositions.^ When the 
 protasis in a particular supposition simply states a 
 present or a past condition, implying nothing as to the 
 trutli of the supposition, the verb is in one of the present 
 ov past tenses of the Indicative, after el. Any tense of 
 the Indicative may be used in the apodosis, to express 
 the result of the fulfilment of the condition. E. g. 
 
 El ifip6vTr]a-e, Kai fjirrpayjrev, if it thundered, it also lightened. (This 
 does not imply that the speaker has any knowledge or opinion on 
 the question whether it actually thundered.) Et 8' ovra tovto 
 iarXv, efiol fieX'Kei cj)i\ov clvai. II. I, 564. See I, 178. Et rore 
 Kovpos ea, vvv avre pe y^pas OTrafei. H. IV, 321. El 6(oi ti 
 bpma-iv aliTxpov, ovk elorlv 6eoi. EuK. Beller. Fr. 294. Et evu 
 ^aiSpov dyvoa, Kal ipavrov eViX«'Xi)(rftai " aXKa yap ovSerf pa eon 
 to4tu>', ;'/' / do not know Phaedrus, I have forgotten myself; but 
 neither of these is the case. Plat. Phaedr. 228 A. (See § 48, 1, A, 
 Rem. 1.) El pev (' AcrxXriinos) 6tov rjv, ovk tjv altrxpoKfpSrjS, « d' 
 alcrxpoKepSrjS, ovk ^ v 6fov. PlaT. Rep. Ill, 408 C. Ei ptjSev TOVTiav 
 irenoijjKas, ri (jjo^tjo-Ti ; 
 
 Note 1. The Imperative, the Subjunctive in exhortations 
 or prohibitions, or the Optative in loishes, may staud in the 
 apodosis. E. g. 
 
 'aXX' el SoKel <Toi, arelx^, if thou art resolved, go. SoPH. Ant. 
 98. (Here iav SoKrj would refer to the future, while fi go/tei is 
 strictly present in its time. Cf. Antig. 76.) 'AXX' ei 8oicf i, n-Xt a>- 
 pev, oppatrda Taxvs-Sopu. Phil. 526. 'aXX' ei nov irrcoxwv ye 
 6eot Kal ejiivves eiirii', ' A-vrivoov irpii yapoio rekoi Bavdroio Kiyr'v. 
 Od. XVII, 475. *A\X' El SoKfi o-'i ravd', viral ns ap^iXas Xuoi 
 Taxoi; but if this pleases you, let some one quickly loose the shoes, &c. 
 
§ 49, 2.] PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS. 93 
 
 Aesch. Agam. 944, Kokktt aTroXoifj'/i', 3av6[av « jitjj ij)i\a, 
 Arist. Ran. 579. In the last three examples the Optative ex- 
 f)resses a wish (§ 82), and must not be confounded with the Opta- 
 tive with av in apodosis (§ 50, 2). 
 
 Kemakk. a protasis of this class may also be followed by an 
 ajiodosis in the Optative with Sv, as el tovt oKrjBcs ianv, ijSf'at a v 
 dneXdoifii, if this is true, I should be glad to depart. But such an 
 apodosis always implies a protasis with an Optative, which is inde- 
 pendent of the one expressed; so that these examples belong under 
 the mixed constructions of § 54. See § 64, 1 (a). 
 
 Note 2. Under this head belong all cases of particular supposi- 
 tions referring to the present or the past in which the non-fulfilment 
 of the condition is not implied. We must be careful not to include 
 in this class the general suppositions explained in § 51 ; which requy-e 
 a Subjunctive or Optative in the protasis, although we commonly 
 translate them in English by the simple Indicative. 
 
 Note 3. The condition may still be present, even when 
 the Future Indicative stands in the protasis, if that tense ex- 
 presses merely a. present intention or necessity that something 
 shall happen hereafter ; as when el tovto Ttoi^a-ei means if he is 
 {now') about to do this, and not (as it does in an ordinary 
 future condition) if he shall do this. E. g. 
 
 Aipe w\tJKTpov, el fiaxei, raise your spur, if you are going tofght. 
 Arist. Av. 761. (Et naxel in protasis commonly means if you shall 
 fight, being equivalent to eav (idxn) Oi els r^v ^aaCKiKrjv Texvr]V 
 iraidevofievot . . . , tl diatpepovcri rSiV e^ ava.yKr]s KaK&na&ovvrtav , ei 
 ye ireLvrjaovat kol diylrrjo'Ova-L kol ptymaova l koI ay pvirvrj- 
 <T ov <r t KCii ToKka irdvra p.ox^^ (rovaiv exovres ; hoto do they di^er, 
 &c., if they are to suffer hunger, thirst, &e. (i. e. if it is necessary that 
 they should suffer) f Xen. Mem. 11, 1, 17. 'H viip eya p.iv ovk avrjp, 
 avTrj fi' dvrjp, el ravr dvarel T^Se Keitr erat Kparrj, if this is to pass 
 unpunished. Soph. Ant. 484. So el TioXffws 6a/ia, II, I, 61 ; and 
 el SmfiXridfja-oitai, EuR. Hec. 863. 
 
 This use of the Future must be carefully distinguished from that 
 found in future conditions, where it is equivalent to the Subjunctive. 
 (§ 50, 1, Note 1). The periphrastic form of the Future with juAXoi 
 and the Infinitive (§ 25, 2) is more common in this construction. 
 Here the tense of iieWa (as in el p-eXKovm tovto noieiv for ei roiiro 
 irotfia-ova-tv) shows that the condition is really present and not future- 
 So with the Latin periphrastic Future, si hoc facturus esz. 
 
 2. In sentences containing present or past conditions, 
 when it is implied tliat the condition of the protasis is 
 not or was not fulfilled, and when tlie apodosis expresses 
 
94 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [% 49, 2. 
 
 what would be (or would have been) the result if that 
 condition were (or had been) fulfilled, the secondary 
 tenses of the Indicative are used in both protasis and 
 apodosis. The apodosis regularly contains the adverb 
 av. 
 
 The Imperfect here refers to present time or to a con- 
 tinved or repeated action in past time, the Aorist to an 
 action simply occurring- in past time, and the (rare) 
 Pluperfect to an action completed in past or present 
 time. E. g. 
 
 El TovTo eirpaatrf, KoKas hv (Tx^v, ifhe were (raoio) doing (his, 
 it would he well (implying that he is not doing it). This may also 
 mean ifhe had been doing this, it would have been well (implying that 
 he was not doing it). The context must decide, in each case, to 
 which time the Imperfect refers. Ei tovto eirpa^i, Kokas &v 
 €tT\ev, ifhe had done this, it would have been well (implying that he 
 did not do it.) Et touto ETrfjrpdxf, RoKSis &v flx^v, if ke had 
 finished doing this (now, or at any past time), it would be well (imply- 
 ing either he has not, or he had not finished it). 
 
 TaCro ovK hv edvvavro iroieiv, et /i^ Koi SiaiTrj fierpia exP^*'^®' 
 they would not be able to do this, if they did not lead an abstemious 
 life. Xbn. Cyr. I, 2, 16. IIoXv &v dav/iaaroTepov tJv, el irip-aivTo, 
 ii would be much more wonderful, if they were honored. Plat. Rep. VI, 
 489 B. Ovx ovTa d' av TrpoOvp'tos eirt tov 3rdXe/xoi' vp.as TrapeKaXovVf 
 fl iiff Triv flpijvrjv tapav alaxpav ia-oiievrjv, 1 should not exhort you, did 
 I not see {as I do), &c. Isoc. Archid. p. 134 A. § 87. Ae'youm 
 iravra y exfi' Kal Tot €t firj fTvyx^vev avTols kmar^firj fvovaa, ouK 
 &v ofoi T ^(rav TOVTO iroirja-eiv, they tell everything as it is : and yet if 
 knowledge did not chance to be in them, they could not do this. Plat. 
 Phaed. 73 A. Ev laff ort ei n ip.ov eKxjhov, oiiSevos &v ovto fie 
 airoarfpiiv f(j)v\dTTov i>s d^i&pjiTos Kal Ti/i^s, if yo': cared for me 
 at all, you would take care, &c. Xen. Cyr. V, 5, 34. Ei fix) SarKrftrTos 
 TE eas XP'/M'*''''"' '"'"' alcrxpoKepS^s, ovk &v vcKpav BijKas dvetayts- 
 IIdt. I, 187. (This implies ajrXroros ei, thou art insatiable, and 
 avttoyts, thou didst open.) 
 
 Ou< fif vrjcrwv ixpaTfi, el fit) Tt icat vavTiKov tlx'v, he would not 
 have been master of the islands, ifhe had not had also some naval force 
 (implying vavnKov eJxev and vi)au>v eKparti, he had a navy, and he 
 was master of the islands). Thuc. I, 9, (TaOra) oiiK &.v irpoekeyev, 
 fl lit) iirltrrevev aKr]6ei!r(iv, he would not have declared these things 
 (referring to several), had he not been confident that he should speak 
 the truth. Xen. Mem. I, 1, 5. Ei ^crav &v8pfs dyaSol, as aii (pjis, 
 oiiK av TTOTf ToCra eiratryoK, if they had been good men, as you say, 
 they would never have sufiered these things (referring to several eases). 
 Plat. Gorg. 516 E. 
 
§ 49, 2.] SECONDARY TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 95 
 
 Km vv K ert nXe'ovat AvkIiov KTave Sios 'OSutrtrsur, ei /ifi Sp o^i 
 vol) ere (XEyas KopvBaioKos "ExTrnp, i. e. U lyases would have tilled still 
 more, had not Hector perceived Mm. II. V. 679. Kai vv xev ^la jravra 
 Kar€<^6iTO Kai ^live dvdpav, el jirf Tis fie 6eau 6\o(jivpaTO Kai a 
 fadaxrev. Od. IV, 363. Kai laons hv Sia ravT anedavov, el fifi 
 T) apxri 8ia raxetov KaTe\v6r). Plat. Apol. 32 D. Ti ttot av 
 etraOov vtt avraVy el 7r\ela> ^^povoi' eirer poirevdrjv; . . . . ei 
 Kare\ei<jidjiu fiev eviavaios, 1^ errj 8e 7rpo(re7reTpoirei6jjv vir' 
 avT&v, old' &v Ta fiLKpa ravra trap aiiTav aire'Ka^ov. Dem. Aph, I, 
 833, 12 — 19. Et TOLVVV 6 ^iXiTriros Tore ravTrjv eaxe rffv yvwfirjVj 
 oiSev av i>v wvX irenolrjKev enpa^ev, oiSe ToiTuv-n)v eKTrftraro 
 Svvafuv. Dem. Phil. I, 41, 18. (See below. Remark i ; and § 42, 
 
 El /i^ i/iety ^XBere, e iropevofieda fii» eVi ^amXea, if you had 
 not come, we should (now) be on our way to the King. (Aor. and Im- 
 perf.) Xen. An. II, 1,4. Ei yap c'/c tov irapeXrjXvSoTos XP"""" ''"' 
 biovra oSroi (rvve^oiXevirav, ovbev av vp.as vvv ehei ^ovkeveaBai, 
 if they had given the necessary advice in time past, there would noio be 
 no need of your deliberating. Dem. Phil. I, 40, 9. ToOto el dire- 
 Kpiva, LKavas &v ^Sr) napa croO t^w oaidTrjra i p.e p,a6r]Kii], if you had 
 answered this, I slwuld have already learned, &c. (implying dXX' ov 
 uep.a6T]Ka, but now I have not learned). Plat. Euthyph. 14 C. 
 homov b hv Tfv riplv en irepi rrjs noXeas btaXeyd^vai t^s ijpxTepas, el 
 firj wporepa tov aXXav Trjv elprjvr)v eiieiYolriTo. (Tliis implies oKXa Tjji' 
 elprjvTjv Trporepa ireTToirjTai.) ISOC. Phil. p. 93 C. § 56. Tav d8iKi/- 
 liaTiav av e fie fivrjTo r&v ahrov, ei ti •nepi epov y'eypa<f)ev, Dem. 
 Cor. 251, 28. 
 
 Different tenses can of course be used in the protasis and apodosis, 
 if the sense requires it. See especially the example quoted above 
 from Dem. Phil. I, p. 40, 9, and the preceding one. 
 
 This construction is the exact equivalent of the Latin Imperfect 
 and Pluperfect Subjunctive in protasis and apodosis. With regard 
 to the tenses, the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive represents the Greek 
 Imperfect Indicative referring to present time; while the Latin 
 Pluperfect Subjunctive represents the Greek Aorist and Pluperfect 
 Indicative, and also the Imperfect referring to past time. 
 
 Remark, (a.) It will be seen by the examples, that this 
 construction usually implies, not merely that the condition of 
 the protasis is not (or was not) fulfilled, but also that the 
 action of the apodosis does not (or did not) take place : thus, 
 el TovTo tnpa^ev, ea-adj) av, if he had done this, he would have 
 been saved, implies not merely that he did not do this, but also 
 that he was not saved. The denial of the apodosis is not, how- 
 ever, inferred as a necessary consequence from the denial of the 
 protasis, which would often be an illogical inference ; for (in 
 the example above) the person might have been saved in some 
 
96 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 49, 2. 
 
 other way, even if he did not do the thing referred to. Indeed, 
 where it is not implied that the action of the apodosis depends 
 as a result upon that of the protasis as its condition, tlxe action 
 of the apodosis is not denied : this happens when the pi-otasis 
 expresses a concession, introduced by koi el, even if, although, 
 or oiS' «', not even if; as km el tovto eirpa^ev, ccra>6ri av, even if he 
 had done this, he would have been saved, where it may be 
 implied that he was saved. 
 
 (b.) In this form of conditional sentence, therefore, the verb 
 of the protasis always (and the verb of the apodosis generally) 
 implies its opposite ; the Imperfect always implying a Present 
 or Imperfect, the Aorist an Aorist, and the Pluperfect usually 
 a Perfect or Pluperfect. Thus el eirpaaae, when it means if he 
 were doing, implies dXX' oi npaaaei, but really he is not doing ; 
 when it means if he had been doing, it implies aW ovk eTrpaa-a-e, 
 but really he was not doing : el pr) enpa^ev, if he had not done, 
 implies dXV eirpa^ev, but really he did do ; el fTrETroiifitfi tovto, if 
 he had already done this, implies either dXV oi neiroii]Kev, but 
 really he has not done it, or dW ov< tTren-otijKei, but really he had 
 not done it, according to the context. This principle wiU 
 show which tense of the Indicative is to be used in any given 
 case, in writing Greek. 
 
 The Aorist, however, is very often used here, as elsewhere, 
 where the Pluperfect would express the time intended mora 
 exactly (§ 19, N. 4) ; as in the sentence above quoted, oiSev 
 &v &v vvvX TTenoirjKeu eirpa^ev, where the Perfect irenoajKev shows 
 that the Pluperfect might have been used for tnpa^ev. 
 
 Note 1. In Homer, the Imperfect in this construction 
 refers to past time, and is to be translated by our Pluperfect. 
 E.g. 
 
 "'EvBa Ke Xotyos erj v koI apfi^ava epya yeuovro, el pr) tip' b^v voijerf 
 narrip dvSpav Te Beam re, then there would have been, &c. II. VIII, 
 130. El yap eya> raSe rjbe' evl (jipeai TrevKoXiprjinv, oi5k &v xnre^e(j)vye 
 Sruyos vSaros alna peedpa, if I had known, &c. Id. 366. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes Sv is omitted in the apodosis, although 
 the non-fulfilment of the condition is still implied. This merely 
 gives a more emphatic expression, as when we say it had been 
 for it would have been. The ai> can be omitted only when the 
 
S 49, 2.J APODOSIS WITHOUT 'AN. 97 
 
 context shows conclusively that the construction is not that of 
 § 49, 1. E. g. 
 
 Nai na Ala i/frxwo/ii/v ficvToi, cl utto TroXefimu ye ovtos e^r/ira- 
 rfidr/v, yes, by Zeus, I were indeed ashamed, if I had been deceived, 
 &C. XeN. An. VII, 6, 21. KaXoi/ riv avT^, €i ovk eyevvriBij 6 av- 
 6pamos eKfiKor, it had been good for that man, if he had not been born. 
 Matth. Evang. XXVI, 24. 
 
 Compare Verg. Aen. XI, 115: Aequius huic Turnum /tierat se 
 opponere morti, it had been more just, &c., where fuissei would have 
 been the regular form. 
 
 Note 3. (a.) An apodosis without av, but implying the 
 non-fulfilment of a condition, is often formed by an Infinitive 
 depending on the Imperfect of a verb denoting necessity, obli- 
 gation, propriety, possibility, or the like. This combination 
 merely expresses in other words what might have been ex- 
 pressed by the verb of the Infinitive in a past tense of the 
 Indicative with av. Thus ?8et o-e tovtov ^CKclv means you ought 
 to love him (or ought to have loved him), — implying, but you do 
 not love him (or did not love him), — and is equivalent to 
 TovTOv &v i(j)i\eis, fl ra Seovra iiroitis, you would love him (or 
 would have loved him), if you did (or had done) what you 
 ought. So «k6s ^v (Tf TovTo TToi^o-ai mcaus you would properly 
 have done this (but you did not), being equivalent to cixdrai 
 
 TOVT &v enolrja-as. 
 
 This construction occurs chiefly after the impersonal Imper- 
 fects XRW O"^ ^XP'i'j *^"> ^i'l"' ^"'fi "■poo'V*^"' *'*°f ?"! VP/iOTTiv 
 (decebat), ^v or v-nrjpxfv {it was possible), and ^v with nouns and 
 adjectives expressing necessity, propriety, &c. So when Ijv is 
 used with the verbal in -T-eov (equivalent to cScj with the Infini- 
 tive). When the Present Infinitive is used, the construction 
 refers to present time or to, continued or repeated action in past 
 time ; when the Aorist Infinitive is used, it refers to a single or 
 momentary action in past time. E. g. 
 
 El eV fjjik'as fiovvovs ((TTpaTrjKaTee 6 HepiTTis, XPV" airou Travrmv 
 TMV aWcav d7re;(o/ie)'oc outo) livai tVl Tr]V rifierdprip' Kai av iSr/Xiw 
 Taa-i as eVl Sxuflas iXavvfi, if the Persian were making his expedition 
 against us alone, he ought, letting alone all others, to be marching 
 directly into our country ; and then he would show that he !,ias march- 
 ing against Scythians. Hdt. IV, 118. Here xPn" "'"" ™fans he 
 would be marching into our country (like ijiev av), if he were doing whcU 
 would be expected under such circumstances,— implying that this 
 6 o 
 
98 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ ^^' ^' 
 
 condition is not fuWlIed. (See below, Kem. 1.) 'ExP ?", M'," oJ» 
 KaiSiKaiov ^ivTois tov irri^avov olo/iernvs 8«v \afieiv avrovs agioui 
 iniSeiKvivat Toirov, u.r, eai KaK&s Xe'yeiV cVfiSi? fe rovTO napiv- 
 Tff iKel^o nmolmv,K.r.X., i. 6. tha.^e who think they ought to receive the 
 crown would (if they did what is riqht and just) be skoimng that mey 
 deserve it themselves, and not be abusing me; but since now they ham 
 neglected the former and do the latter, &c. Dem. Cor. Iner. 1228, 
 28. Uiyhpim oSdi/ros roi elm reXevrfiaeiv p.e, xPn" °1,<^^ "''"/'■'' 
 7-a 7roi««- i,Cv Se iTT* alxMt, if he had said that J was to bekUledby 
 a tooth, then you would have to do as you now do. tiDT. 1, 39. ^ (bee 
 below, Rem. 1.) "ESei pev roif Xeyovras airavras tiijTe Trpos ex^pav 
 voceiirdat \6yi>v /j-^Siva /j-rjTC rrpos X"/""' '• ^- '** speakers ought not 
 to say a word out of regard either to enmity or to favor (and yet theg 
 do so). Dem. Chers. 90, 1. nortpov airfiv ixPV" '" ''^ QfTToKaiv 
 K(u AoXovav rd^fi crvy xaraKT acrBai ^iXiirnai Tr]V twv EXXiji'ciii' 
 apxf]v; i. e. ought she to have helped Philip acquire hw dominion over 
 the Greeks (so. as she would have done by your policy) ? Dem. Cor. 
 246, 1. 'E;Li£ ft piv iv aXKais Ti&iv jjpe'pats TjSiKrjtTe Tt tovtcov ISimrriv 
 ovra, iSi'a KaX SiKrjV n p o (r fj k e v avra Sidovai, i. e. he would properly 
 have given satisfaction by a private suit (as if he had said wpoariKoirras 
 l&ia SiKrjV &v fBiSov). Deji. Mid. 525, 3. Kai jroXXois Sofia, ms o Toy 
 T atv o"€ (rat^eiv el jjOekov avdKiiTKeiv xp^pf^ra, djueX^irat, 1. c. where- 
 as I might have saved you, if I had been willing to spend money, &c 
 Plat. Crit. 44 C. Ov yap evrju p,f] irapaKpovtrBevTwv vp5>v peivai 
 *tXiV7r<B, for Philip could not have remained, unless you had been 
 deceivek (implying he did remain). Dem. F. L. 379, 2. (See § 52, 
 1) Kal paKiara cIkos rjv vpas npoopaaSai airra xal pri paXaxSis, 
 ao-irep vvv, ^vp.paxf'iv. ThuC. VI, 78. (The orator adds, dXX 
 oijff vpeis vvv ye ttco ovS' ol aXXot eiri Tavra oypprjade.) Ki pev Totwv 
 alaxptiv Ti epe\\ov epyda-eadai, Odvarov dvr avrov irpoatpereov rfv 
 (i. e. npoaipela-dai eBei). Xen. Mem. II, 7, 10. So in Latin: Quem 
 patris loco, si uUa in te pietas esset, colere debebas. Cic. Phil. II, 38. 
 
 (b.) The Aorist and Imperfect of o(j>et\to (o^e'XXm) are 
 sometimes used with the Infinitive like XPV"' ^^^'> "^c.; as in II. 
 J, S53, TLpTjv Trep poi o<l)eWev*0'Kvp7itos eyyva\i^ai Zevi v'\j/i^pe~ 
 fierris • vvv S' oiSe pe tvt66v entrev, i. e. Zeus ought to have secured 
 me honor ; but now he has not honored me even a little. From 
 this comes the common use of this form in expressions of a 
 wish ; as m^sXe KCpor f^v, would that Gyrus were living (lit. 
 Cyrus ought to he living). This is an apodosis, implying as a 
 protasis if it were possible, or something similar. See § 83, 2. 
 
 (c.) Similar to this is the occasional use of e'jSouXo'/iijk (with- 
 out Sv) to express what some one wishes were now true (but 
 which is not true). E. g. 
 
 'E/SouXd/iijK nev ovv xai T^ii fiovXijv nai itit tKuXqatai opdat 
 
§ 49, 2.] AfODOfiis -WITHOUT 'an. 99 
 
 BtoiKtiadai Kai tovs vo/ioui lo-pfueti/, would that both the Senate 
 and i.e assemblies were rightly managed, and that the laws were in 
 force (implying tlie opposite of opflcit Sioiiceio-fiai and Itrxuiiv). 
 This is analogous to &(f>e\ev elrni, would that it were, and cSei that., 
 it ought to be (but is not). Aeschin. Cor. § 2. 'EfiovXafiriv fiiv 
 ovK epi^tiv (v6aht, would that I were not contending here (as I am). 
 Akist. Ran. UBS. See below, Bern. 2. 
 
 (d.) KivSuvcvo) is used with the Infinitive, as a periphrasis 
 for the verb of the Infinitive with Sv. E. g. 
 
 'H jrdXis eKivSvvfVO'e jracra Siafpdapfjvat, el avejios eVf ■)/«- 
 WTO, the city was in danger of being utterly destroyed, if a vnnd had 
 arisen. Thuc. Ill, 74. Et p-r) f^f(f>vyop.fv els AfX^oiy, eKivSvvei- 
 o-apev diroXeaBai, if we had not escaped to Delphi, we were in 
 danger of perishing (or there was danger that we shotdd perish) 
 Aeschin. Cor. § 123. (If the ineaning had been that there would 
 have been danger, we should have had tKivSweia-a/iev av.) 
 
 (e.) The Imperfect of pe\Ka> with the Infinitive may express 
 a past intention or expectation which was not realized, and so 
 take the place of the verb of the Infinitive with av. E. g. 
 
 'H iiaKa 8^ 'Aya/iepvouos (j>6i<Tea-dai, kokov oitov e/ieXXov, et 
 p.^ . . . eemes, i. e. / should have perished like A . (lit. 1 was to have 
 perished), if thou hadst not spoken. Od. XIII, 383. MeWev pev 
 nore oIkos o8' ax^vews Kol dfivfiav efi/ievai- vvv 8' erepais efioKopTO 
 Beoi. Od. I, 232. Ov tTV(TTpaTev(Teiv ep.eXKav, they would not have 
 joined him (in that case). Dem. F. L. 391, 11. So in Latin: 
 Hoc facturi erant, nisi venisset, they were to have done this, had he 
 not come. 
 
 So e<f)riu in Od. IV, 171 : Kal piv e<j)rjv eXSovra (pikrio'enev e^oxov 
 SWtuv, el vaiv vocrrou ebaxev (Zeis), i. e. / intended to love him (and 
 should, have done so) had Zeus granted us a return. 
 
 Remark 1. It will be seen that in the construction of Note 3 a 
 protasis is implied with the apodosis ; ?8ei (re tovtov (piXijaai being 
 strictly equivalent to tovtov av e'(j)lXriaas el to. Seovra enoirftras, you 
 would have loved him. if you had done what you ought, or simply you 
 should have loved him. (See § 52, 1.) This form therefore com- 
 monly stands as an apodosis with no other protasis exp-.-essed ; and 
 even if another is added (as in the first example under a), the im- 
 plied protasis always remains the prominent one. Especially, this 
 implied prota.sis expresses the condition, the non-fulfilment of which 
 prevents the action of the apodosis from taking place. The whole 
 expression xprjv tovto noieiv, &c. thus becomes the apodosis to the 
 expressed protasis, if one is added. In the third example under a 
 (Hdt. I, 39), the real apodosis may be you would then do from 
 necessity what you now do (implying that now you do not do it from 
 necessity) ; or we may perhaps explain XPV" bt^tter by Note 2. 
 
 In this construction the Infinitive (of course modified by the lead- 
 ing verb, as shown above) contains the main idea of the apodosis. 
 
100 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. L§ ^^» ^ 
 
 When the main idea is contained in the verb of necessity, &c., so 
 that the non-fulfilment of the condition of the protasis_ affects this 
 rather than the infinitiye, we have xpi" ""i « 8" ""' fpo'^'JK"' ""i ""•< 
 forming an ordinary apodosis (§ 49, 2). Thus fi to biovra oijtoi 
 trvvfPov\(V<rav, oiSiv tiv i/^ar vOv fSf i /3ouXeveirfiai, (/ (Aese men Aaa 
 (jriVen <Ae necessary advice, there would now be no need of your dehber-- 
 ating, implies but now there is need of your deliberating. Occasion- 
 ally both constructions can be used to express essentially j;he same 
 apodosis: thus inLYS. in Erat. § 32, we find, XP^" Sf <Tf , fmcptjaBa 
 Xpr/aros, toIs iicWovaiv dSixms an-odavei<T0ai lirivvTrjv ye pea 6 at, if 
 you had been an honest man, you ought to have become an informer in 
 behalf of those who were about to suffer death unjustly (implying but 
 you did not do so, ouk eyipov fir)PVTr)s) ; but in § 48, referring to the 
 same thing, the orator says, emep r/p dvfip ayadbs, e^priP &p ■np&rov 
 fxep jiff Trapapofiats apxetp, eireira ttj ^ov\^ pTjpvrfjp yepeadai, K.r. X., 
 if he had been a good man, it would have been his duty, &c. (implying 
 ovK eyprjp)- The latter construction, however, is very rare where 
 the former would be admissible. 
 
 The distinction between eS« o-e tovtov (j)iKe7p and tSet Sp ae tovtov 
 (fiCKe'ip would be expressed in Latin by te oportebai hunc amare and 
 te oporteret hunc amare. 
 
 Remark 2. The greatest difficulty in understanding the forms 
 explained in Note 3 is caused by the defect in the English verb 
 ought, which makes it impossible to translate them accurately. 
 Thus we translate ovk ebei ae tovto iroi^aai (or Troteip), non oportuit 
 te hoc faeere, you ought not to have done this, expressing the past 
 time by the tense of the Infinitive, which we should express by the 
 past tense of ought if there were one. (You oughted not to do this 
 would represent the Greek and Latin idiom. The vulgar ex- 
 pression you had n't ought comes very near it.) 
 
 A further trouble appeai-s when such phrases as ovk eSei a-e tovto 
 TTOieip refer to present time, meaning you ought not to be doing this 
 (as you are). The Imperfect here refers to present time, as it does 
 in the ordinary construction of § 49, 2. The Latin has the same 
 idiom, non oportebat te hoc faeere. But in English, owing to the 
 defect in the verb oupht, we are obliged to use the simple present; 
 BO that we cannot distinguish in translation betwaen eSei a-e (fnXelv, 
 oportebat te amare, and Set ae (jjiXeip, oportet te amare, — both be- 
 ing expressed by you ought to love, although the former implies but 
 you do not love, while the latter implies no condition. 
 
 It needs perhaps to be added, that the tenses of the infinitive here 
 express no time of themselves, but are used in the ordinary con- 
 structions of § 15, 1, and § 23, 1. The equivalent Latin forms 
 (faccre representing both Troiriv and voiT\aat) will make, this clear. 
 
 Remark 3. It must not be understood that the Imperfects e■j^p^v 
 thet, &c. with the Infinitive are always used in the construction of 
 Note 3. Thus ?8« he piveip, in Dem. F. L. 879, 14, means slmplj 
 hvX he u>T3 obliged to remain (and did remain). 
 
§ 49, 2.] SECOND A.RT TENSES OP THE INDICATIVE. 101 
 
 Note 4. (a.) In IT. XXIII, 526 kc is usen with a secondary 
 tense of the Indicative in protasis, apparently adding nothing to the 
 sense. (See § 50, 2. N. 2, 6.) 
 
 El de k' eri TrpcTepa ye vera 8p6fws afKJiOTepoKTiVf 
 T^ Kev fuv napi\a<riT ovb' dfitjtripuTTOv eBrjKev. 
 
 (5.) When Sv stands in the protasis with a secondary tense of the 
 Indicative in Attic Greek, the expression is so obviously an apodosis 
 at the same time, as to present no difficulty. 'Av can never coa- 
 lesce with fl to form idv m these sentences, as it always belongs to 
 the verb. E. g. 
 
 Ei Toimv rovTO laxvpov tjv &v tovtco TeKp,fipiov, Ktifiol yeviirda rtK/iij- 
 pwv, K. T.\.,if then this would have been a strong proof /or him, (sc. had 
 he had it to bring forward), so let it be also a proof for me, &c. Dem. 
 Timoth. 1201, 19. (This sentence properly belongs to the class of 
 § 49, 1 ; for the protasis really is if it is true that this wotdd have been 
 a proof, to which the apodosis in the Imperative corresponds.) In 
 Dem. Cor. 260, 2, koi tis ovk hv dircKTcive /ie diKalas, A ti tS>v inap- 
 yovrav TTJ TToXet, KaXav Xoyta povov Koraurxweiv €'jre)^€iprjfr' au; — ■ 
 if we retain the final av (wtich is strongly supported by Mss. autho- 
 rity), we must translate « imxelprjir av if it is true that I would 
 (under any circumstances) have undertaken, &c., and not simply if I 
 had undertaken (ei inexeipriiTa). See § 50, 2, Note 2, a; and § 
 63, 2. 
 
 Note 5. In some cases the Aorist is found in the apodosis refer- 
 ring to present time, after a protasis in the Imperfect; it always 
 denotes, however, a momentary or sudden occurrence, or some other 
 idea which the Imperfect would not express so well. E. g. 
 
 El pev ovv (TV fi€ rjpuiTas ti rav vvv S^, etirov hv, k.t.X., if then 
 you were asking me any one of the questions before us, I should (at 
 once) say, &c. Plat. Euthyph. 12 D. Ei eireOipeis tout/jj (rrj! 
 <ro(j)ias), Kal iya <re irvyxavov dveparmv, k.t.X., ti av pot dirf- 
 Kpiva; if you desired this kind of wisdom, and I happened to be asking 
 you, ^c, what should you reply f [Plat.] Theag. 123 B. See also 
 Plat. Prot. 318 A; Gorg. 447 D; Symp. 199 D. 
 
 Note 6. (a.) In a very few passages in Homer we find the Op- 
 tative with Ke in the apodosis referring to the past, where we should 
 expect a secondary tense of the Indicative. E. g. 
 
 Kai vv Kev hd' diro'KoiTO ava^ dvSpav Alvftaii, el pfj ap d^ii vorfirt 
 Aioy dvyoTrip 'AcppodiTj], Aeneas would have perished, had not Aphrodite 
 quickly perceived him. jl. V, 311. Kai vi Rev evff diroXoiTO Aprjt 
 dTos jToXepoio, el ptj 'Hept^oia 'Eppeq. e^rjyyeiXev. II. V, 388. (In 
 both these cases djraXeTo would be the regular form, in Homeric as 
 well as in Attic Greek.) So D. XVII, 70, ev8a Ke (jtepoi is used 
 for ev6a K e(j)epev, he would have carried. So II. V, 85, TuSt iSiji' 8' 
 avK &v yvoir/s iroTepouri pxTeirj, you would not have known to which 
 army he belonged: for the dependent Optative, see § 34, 3, Note. 
 
102 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 49, ". 
 
 (6.) The Imperfect Indicative is not used in Homer in the cou- 
 Btruction of § 49, 2 referring to present time. (See Note l^ « a 
 few cases where the Attic Greek would use that form, we tind tne 
 present Optative in Homer. E. g. 
 
 should ti^vi, ^ ^ /«,^,.i.,^,.,,«, ^v-.- . - - . - 
 
 80. In n. XXIU, 274, we find the Optative m both protasis and 
 apodosis, where the Attic Greek would use the Imperfect Indica- 
 tive: ei viv iiiX aXXw a^Xeuoifiec, ^ t hv iyia to. izpara Xa^aiv 
 KKuririvSe cj>e poifirtv, i. e. if we were now contending in honur of 
 another (than Patroclus), I should take the first prize and bear it to my 
 tent. The present Optative in Homer is used also in its regular 
 sense, refeiring to the Future (See § 50, 2.) The constructions 
 included in this note seem to be a relic of an ancient use of the 
 Optative in conditional sentences like that of the secondary tenses 
 of the Latin Subjunctive. (See Appendix I.) For the similar 
 Homeric use of the Present Optative in expressions of a wish, see 
 J 82, Rem. 2. 
 
 B. Future Conditions. 
 
 % 50. 1. When a supposed future case is stated dis- 
 tinctly and vividly (as in English, ^ I shall go'), the 
 protasis takes the Subjunctive witli lav, av (a), or -qv 
 (Epic ei Ke or al /ce). 
 
 The apodosis denotes what will be the result, if the 
 
 condition of the Protasis shall be fulfilled. It therefore 
 
 takes the Future Indicative, or some other future form, 
 
 like the Imperative. E. g. 
 
 'Edw Ti Xu/3a), Smo-o) o-oi, if I (shall) receive anything, I will give it to 
 you. ''Edv Ti \d^rjs, Sos jioi, if you receive anything, give it to me. El fie 
 Kfv &s €p§rjs KaL TOi nfidcovrai 'Apfotoi, yvuia'g eWftfl' oy 6' rj-ye/iovav 
 KaKos OS T€ vv Xofflv, but if you shall do thus and the Achaenns obey 
 you, you will then learn both which of the leaders and which of the 
 soldiers is bad. II. II, 364. (For ei k( see § 47, 2.) At k airbv 
 yvbiot VT}ixcpT€a TrdvT eVcTTOvra, eaata fjLtv j^alvdu re ^iTmvd re, eip-ara 
 ,y\d. Od. XVII, 549. So at Ke S£o-i, II. I, 128. (See § 47, 1, 
 Kote.) Ei (lev Kev Mfve'Kaov 'A\f ^avSpos Karanc (f>v^, airos (ireiff 
 'EXevr)V e)(iTco Koi KTriiiara ndvra, rifiels S' ev v!jfa-<ri vci>p,f6a jroi'- 
 ToiropoKnv • ei Se k' ' ttXi^avbpov ktc ivji ^avdos MeveXaor, Tpmas smiff 
 'EXe'i/i/i/ (cat KTfjiiaTa Trdvr diroSovvai. II. Ill, 281. Here e'yeVa, 
 vtiiptBa (Subj. in exhortation), and dn-oSoCrai (Infin. for Impera- 
 tive) aie in the apodosis. At ita rrjvos cXji Ktpaow rpdyov, alya tv 
 Xayn- Thboc. I, 4. *Av Si rts dv6ia-TiJTai, aiv u/itv ncipa- 
 
50, l.J SL-BJUNUTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIV1B. 103 
 
 a 6 lie 6 a ^(eipoCo-^ai, if any one shall stand opposed to «s, we will try 
 to overcome him. Xen. An. VII, 3, 11. *kv fif] vvv edeXa/iev exti 
 jroXf/if'iv air^, iv6d&' iaas dvayKacr6T](r6iie6a tovto noieiv, if we 
 shall not nrv) be willing to fight him there, we shall perhaps be forced to 
 do so here. Dem. Phil. I, 54, 20. Here vvv refers to time immedi- 
 ately following the present : if Dem. had meant if we are not now 
 willing, he would have said « jit] vvv eBeXofiev (§ 49, 1). *Hw 
 yap Tavra KaKas 6 pia6}p.e Oa, ap-eivov /3ouXeuo"o/Ae^a Kal irepi tojv 
 aWoiv. ISOC. Pac. p. 162 D. § 18. *'Hv de rrjv fiprjvrjv 7roi7jaaipe6a, 
 icai TOiovTovs Tjpas avT<,iis Trapdo-p^mpei', fifra TroXXijf d(T(j)aKfias ttjv 
 iToKiv OLK-qfj op.iV. lb. p. 163 A. § 20, 'Eai/ ovv irjs vvv, Trore eaei 
 oUoi; XeN. Cyr. V, 3, 27. Kai ypm aii-oij, eav & e rj n, and use 
 them, if there shall be any need. lb. V, 4, 80. 'Hi' piv trokepov 
 alpritrde, prjK£TL iJK€T€ SeOpo avcv OTrXfi)!', et (raxj^poveire' rfv be 
 elprjVTjs SoKTjre belfrdat, avev oirXoiV rJKeTS' ats de KoKats e^et Tci 
 vperepa, ^v (fjiXoi yevvrrS^, epol peXrjae l. lb. Ill, 2, 13. 'Eav 
 yap TL ere (jjava ;caK0i' irerroijjKas, opoXoySi ddtKelv ■ eav pevToi pnhev 
 <f)atvQ)pat KaKov TreiroiTjKOis prjde ^ovXrjdels, ov Ka\ (TV av 6/ioXoyn" 
 Iff IS pjjSev vtt' epov abiKelaOai ; lb V, 5, 13. (Here opoKoya must 
 be underetood as referring to the future, like opoXoyricreis. § 10, 1, 
 K. 7.) *Eai/ pf] Tj oi (^iXdcroc^o^ ^aa tXevcrma-tv ^ oi /Sao'tX^ff ^tXo- 
 cotfyTja-toaiv, ovk etrrt KaK&v Ttavka tuls TrdXeirtv, unless either the 
 philosophers shnll become kings or the kings philosophers, there is no 
 escape from troubles for states. Plat. Kep. V, 473 D. AtScoa-' exatv 
 KTetveiv eavTov, rjv Tabe \JA f V a- d 11 \eya>v. SoPH. Phil. 1342. 'Eaw 
 pr] fjplv ^e^orjdrj k6t€ s oxriv, ov bei rjpas aiiTols ^oijde'iv, if they 
 shall not have assisted us, there is no need of our assisting them. "Hv 
 ire Tov \oLTrov ttot a^eXw^at \povov, kclkutt aTToXoiprjv , 1. e. 
 may I perish, if I ever takethem away. Arist. Ran. 586. (See§34,l.) 
 
 Remark 1. It will be seen that the apodosis in this construction 
 may take any form of the verb that refers to the future, — the 
 Future Indicative, the Imperative, the Subjunctive in exhortations 
 and prohibitions, the Infinitive in any future sense, or the Optative 
 in vnshes. It may also contain a Present Indicative including^ a 
 reference to the future (like xph o^' S") f"" ^ Present merely used 
 emphatically for the Future, like opoKoya above quoted from Xbn 
 Cyr. V, 5. 13, or ■navKd iari. from Plat. Rep. 473 D. 
 
 Remark 2. The English (especially the colloquial language) 
 seldom expresses the important distinction between this form of 
 protasis and that of § 49, 1. Thus modern usage allows us to use 
 the inexact expression if he wishes, not merely for fi ^ovXerai. (if he 
 now wishes), but alse for eav Pov\r]Tai (if he shall wish). The sense, 
 however, generally makes the distinction clear. 
 
 Note 1. The Future Indicative with « is very often used 
 in the protasis in the same sense as the Subjunctive with iav, 
 Bometimes alternating with it in the same sentence. This ia 
 
104 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 50, 1 
 
 merely a more vivid form of expression than the Subjunctive, 
 both corresponding to the English if I shall do this, &c. E. g. 
 
 El 7ap 'AYtXXeir olos im Tpa,e<r(n nax^'^rai., oiti iiivwffjkovn 
 ■noUKia nr,\(Uua, if AchUles shall fight, &c. II. XX, 26. Ei 8e o-u y^ 
 ts v6\fnov TTwX^o-f oi, TiTc <t' oia piyrjdiiv irokfjiiv ye, Kai ei X ««- 
 paBi wvBriai. H. V, 350. E< 8e npbs Toiroiai. eTi T€\evTr]aeirov 
 fiiov eS, oStos ixe'ivos tov itv fijTfif SX/Sioy KeKKrjaBai a|to's e'oTi. Hdt. 
 I, 32. (See Rem. 1.) Ei p,fi KaBe^eis yXatrtrav, fffrm (TOiKUKa^ 
 EuE. Aeg. Frag. 5. Ei 8e yiii? to€t' iiribei^ei, nas xph \<^^B 'i 
 7rpoK\fi<Tft irpoaex^iv v/ias tov vovv; Dbm. Aph. I. 829, 28. E| 3 i/ifls 
 aWo Ti yva<Tea-6c, b p.fi yevolTO, riva oUcrde avrfiv -^vxriv i^fiv; 
 Dem. Aph. II, 842, 15. (Referring to the same tlung, p. 834, 24, 
 Demosthenes had said Av -yap airoi^iyj} fie ovtos, o p-r) yevoiro, ttip 
 €na>^e\lav 6(j)\rjo-a>.) *}iv iBeXiopcv airodvri<TKeiv VTrep rav fiiicaiW, 
 eidoKipri<ropev' el 8e <pofir)(T6iJ,ei9a Toiis kiuSvvovs, els noWas rapar 
 X09 KaraaTrj<Topei/ vpas avTovs. Isoc. Archid.. p. 138 A. § 107, 
 
 This use of the Future must not he confounded with its less com- 
 mon use in present conditions, § 49, 1, N. 3, where it is not equiva- 
 lent to the Subjunctive. 
 
 Note 2. In the Homeric language the following peculiari- 
 ties appear in this construction : — 
 
 (a.) The Subjunctive with Ke is sometimes used in the 
 apodosis instead of the Future Indicative, thus making the 
 apodosis correspond in form to the protasis. E. g. 
 
 E( 8e Ke pri Stigo-ti', f ■ym be xev avros c X m fi a i , and if he do not 
 give her up, I will take her myself. II. I, 324. (Compare I, 137.) 
 This gives a form of sentence analogous to that in which the 
 Optative is used in both protasis and apodosis. See § 87, Note. 
 (For the use of 84 in apodosis, see below, § 57.) 
 
 (6.) 'Hv is the only contraction of ci a» found in Homer. 
 The most common Homeric form is, however, ci ice (sometimes 
 efSe Ke). Ei av is rarely found, as II. IH, 288. 
 
 (c.) El Ke or at Ke is sometimes found even with the Future 
 Indicative in Homer. E. g. 
 
 Ai Kev avev ipeBev .... 'IXi'ou ire^tSijcrerat , ou8' e6f\r\<rt 
 tKiTepa-ai, tOTto rovTO. H. XV, 213. 
 For Ke (and even av) with the Future in apodosis, see § 37, 2. 
 
 (d.) The simple et (without Sv or Ke) is often used with tha 
 Subjunctive in Homer, apparently in the same sense as et Ke or 
 the Attic eav. E. g. 
 
 Et 8' av Tif palrjtri 6emv eVi oivotti TrdiTO, xXijo-o/iat ev irrrjBeiTtnf 
 exov ToKairevBea 6vp6v. Od. V, 221. OuSe noXivBe epxopai, ei p^ 
 irou Tt jrepi<ppaiv Ilnve\aireia eXdepev OTpivrjcriv. Od. XIV, 372. 
 
§ 50, 2.] OPTATIVE nx PROTASIS AND APODOSIS. 105 
 
 Note 3. (a.) The Homeric use of the simple « with the 
 Subjunctive continues in lyric poetry, and is found in the 
 chorus of the Attic drama, and even in some passages of tho 
 ordinary dialogue. E. g. 
 
 Tap' 
 
 fK 
 
 T aa-xav \6yov eVXAv aKoia-ji. PiND. Isth. IV, 16.* 
 
 (h.) In Attic prose, this construction is extremely rare, and its 
 existence is denied by many high authorities ; if we follow the Mss., 
 however, we must admit it in a few passages, as Thuc. VI, 21 : Ou" 
 vavTiKTis (TTpanas fwvov Sf i, aXXa fcat Trefov jroKiiv ^vfiTrKeiv, aX\as re 
 Koi 61 ^vtrrSio-iv at TroXett (j)oPrjdf'i(Tai,- (Here only a few of the 
 worst Mss. read ^v for el.) 
 
 Note 4. For the change from the Subjunctive to the Optative 
 after secondary tenses in indirect discourse, see § 74, 1. 
 
 2. When a supposed future case is stated less dis- 
 tinctly and vividly than it would be stated by the Sub- 
 junctive (as in English, if I should go"), the protasis 
 takes the Optative with el. 
 
 The apodosis here denotes what would he the result if 
 the condition of the protasis should be fulfilled, and 
 takes the Optative with av. E. g. 
 
 El tkdoi, iravT hv tSoi, if he should go, he would see all. Ei <r 
 uvTws edeXoi (piKeeiv KrjdoLTO re dvfi^, to) Kev rts Keivtav ye Kal 
 iK\e\ddaiTO yafioio, if she should be willing thus to love yt u, &c 
 Od. Ill, 223. 'H Kev yrjOfjirai Hpiafios IlpiapMi6 re jral&es, aXXoi 
 re Tpwes peya Kev Ke x,^polaTO 6vp^, el tTCJiaLV rdSe iravra irvdoiaro 
 liapvap,evouu- H. I, 255. (See § 47, 2.) 'AXX' ei /loi n 7ri6oio,T6 
 Kev noXii Kepbiov eirj. D. VII, 28. Eiijs (jtoprjTos ovK &v, ei irpatr- 
 (rois KoXms. Aesch. Prom. 979. Ei 8e' tu toiis Kparovvras tow 
 7r)^ri6ovs en dpeTTjV Trporpe^eieVj dficjiorepovs Slv 6vT](Te le. IsOC. 
 ad Nicocl. p. 16 C. §8. Ei ns rav cot (rvvovriov en apBeir) notetv 
 a crir 'rvy)(dvets evXoyav, nas ovk av dSXtatTaTos etrj; Isoc. Busir. p. 
 230 C. § 47. Oifie yap av M^Sokos fte o ^aaikeis enaivoiri, ei 
 e^eXavvoifii Toi/s evepyeras. Xen. An. VII, 7, 11. Ei /i^ SvvaTov 
 in airav I'ir] (radrivai, dnoKTe ivatfi' Av e/uivTov. Dkm. Enbul. 
 1820, 25. Ou8' ei ndvres eXBotev IIep(Tat, nXtiOei ye oix vnep^a- 
 Xotp-ed' &v Tovs TToXf/xious. Xen. Cyr. II, 1, 8. Ou TToXXi) S» 
 dXoyia eiij, el <^o/3oTro tov Bdvarov 6 TotovTos; Plat. Phaed. 68 
 B. OiKOS 8' avTos, el tjyBoyyfjV \d^ot, iraijJecrTaT &v Xe^etev 
 Aesch. Ag. 37. Ums oiv our hv oi/CTpoTora ndvrau eya nenovdai^ 
 
 a* 
 
106 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 50, 2. 
 
 fJiji/, fJ (V^ ^Tj^laaiVTO (hoL ^ivov; low t%en slouU I rwthavi 
 suffered (lit. be in the condition of having suffered) the most pitiable of 
 atl things, if they should vote me a foreigner? Dem. Eubul. 1312, 17. 
 (See § 18, 1, and examples of the Perfect Optative there quoted.) 
 
 Remark, (a.) This form of the conditional sentence must be 
 especially distinguished from that of § 49, 2 ; the more so, as we often 
 translate both etrj av and ?i/ av by the same Enghsh expression, tf 
 would be; although the latter implies that the supposition of the 
 protasis is a false one, while the former implies no opinion of the 
 speaker as to the truth of the supposition. 
 
 (6.) On the other hand, the distinction beween this form and that 
 of § 50, 1 is less marked, and it is often of slight importance which 
 of the two is used in a particular case. Thus it is often nearly in- 
 different in English whether we say if we shall go (or if we go), it 
 will be well, or if we should go, it would be well; in Greek, the former 
 is iav i\6atji,ev, xaXms e|», and the latter is el eXdoifuv, KaXas h> 
 fXoi. (See § 48, I, B, Rem. 2.) In writing Greek, this distinction 
 can generally be made, by first observing the form of the apodosis 
 in English ; if that is expressed by would, it should be translated by 
 the Greek Optative with ac ; if it is expressed by will, it should be 
 translated by the Future Indicative. (Other forms of the apodosis, 
 as the Imperative, will present no difficulty.) The form to be used 
 in the protasis will then appear from the rules for dependence of 
 Moods (§32 and § 34) ; the Optative will require another Optative 
 with el in the dependent protasis (i. e. the form of § 50, 2, « ?X 6 o i - 
 /lev, KoXms Aw ex<") ' while the future Indicative or any other 
 primary form will require a Subjunctive with edv, or a Future Indi- 
 cative with el (i. e. the form of § 50, 1, eav eXBafiev, icaXmi t^ei, 
 orti eXeviTOfieOa, xaXcSi e^ei). 
 
 In indirect discourse we oflen find an Optative in protasis, which 
 merely represents the same tense of the Subjunctive or Indicative 
 in the direct discourse. See § 69, 1 ; § 74, 1 ; and § 77. 
 
 Note 1. Cases of the omission of av in an apodosis of this class 
 are rare ; they occur chiefly in Homer, less frequently in the Attic 
 poets (even then chiefly in questions, and after such expressions as 
 ouK ea-ff oTTus), and seldom or never in Attic prose where the text 
 is beyond suspicion on other grounds. E. g. 
 
 'O 6e x^PM''^""' ^o^f X^'P"' TuSeiSi/s, jieya epyov, 8 oi) 8uo y Svhpt 
 <l>epoiev, which two men could nut lift (if they should try). II. V, 
 303. (See § 52, 2.) Teav, Zev, bivaaiv ris avSpav V7rep^a(ria Kara' 
 (r\oi; Soph. Ant. 605. 'A\X' virepTok^ov dv&pos (jipovrffia ris 
 Xe'yot; AesOH. Choeph. 594. "Ear ovv OTrmr 'AXkijotij es y^pas 
 fioXoi; Eur. Ale. 52. Ouk eo-fl' ottcds Xe^atfii to ijrevSlj xaXa. 
 AescH. Ag. 620. OvK etrriv ora fiei(ova p.oipav i/rt'^aiju' n <roi. 
 AesCH. Prom. 292. Tims ovv rdS , ois einoi ns, e^ripAprapes ; i. e. 
 as one might lay. EuR. Andr. 929. "Qimep etiroi tie rdjrot, as ont 
 would say Tot Oi. (?) Arist. Av. 180. 
 
§ 51. J 'an in PK0TASI8. 107 
 
 _ Note 2. (a.) The adverb av is sometimes used with the Opta> 
 tive in the prolasu, but only when the protasis is itself at the same 
 time an apodons^ with another protasis expressed or implied. This 
 is, of course, no exception to the general rule (§ 39) ; and it is to be 
 noticed that the av in this case Edways belongs strictly to the verb, 
 and never joins the el to form edv. E. g. 
 
 OvToi wavTe\as, oiS' ci fifj noitjvair' &v tovto, tiKaTa<j)pomiT6v 
 eanv, it is not wholly to be despised, ecen if you would not do this {if 
 an opportunity should occur). De.M. Phil. I, 44, 30. Kai eyo>, e'lmp 
 <tXX^ T(f avBpanraiv TVfidoinrjv &v, Kol aoi TTfidofiai, if J would trust 
 any other man (if he should give me his word), I trust you. Plat. 
 Prot. 329 B. Et ye /ajde SuOXov aKpaTrj Se^ai/icB' hv, was oiiK 
 a§wv avTov ye (j)v\d^aa6ai toiovtov yevitrBai ; if we would not take 
 even a slave who was intemperate (sc. if one should be offered), &c. 
 Xen. Mem. I, 5, 3. (Such conditioned sentences as the three pre- 
 ceding belong properly under § 49, 1. Compare the last example 
 under § 64, Rem.) See § 49, 2, N. 4, 6. 
 
 So occasionally in Homer; as II. V, 273, « toutco ke Xa^oi/ici', 
 apoLjieda (c« kKcos itrd'Kov, if we could (in any case) obtain these, we 
 should gain great glory; and D. I, 60, Et Kev Bavarov ye (piyotiiev, if 
 we woidd escape death (where el Bavarov <f>iyoipep would mean if we 
 should ever escape death). 
 
 (b.) Commonly, however, when et Ke occurs in Homer, xe belongs 
 to the el, and no force of an apodosis is perceptible. Here, as in 
 final clauses (§ 44, 1, K. 3, a), the Ke adds nothing to the sense that 
 can be expressed in English. E. g. 
 
 Uuf hv eyo) beotpi fier dBavaroitri Beolinv, eX Kev Aprjs oixotTO 
 Xpeos Koi SEtr/ioi' oKi^as. Od. VIII, 352. Tmv Kev rot -j^apiaaiTO 
 irarjip dnepeiai' Snoiva, el Kev e/ie ^aov neirvBoir' ejvl vijuirii' 
 'AyaiSi.. 11. VI, 49. 
 
 But if the Ke is separated from the el (except by p^v, fit, re, yap, 
 &c.), or if the sense shows clearly that it belongs to the verb, it is 
 the sign of an apodosis, as in the Homeric examples under (a). 
 See § 49, 2, N. 4, a. 
 
 Note 3. It foUows from § 26, that the Future Optative cannot 
 be used in protasis or apodosis, except in indirect discourse to rep- 
 resent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. 
 
 Note 4. For a rare Homeric use of the Optative for the Imper- 
 fect or Aorist Indicative, see § 49, 2, N. 6. 
 
 II. Present and Past General Suppositions. 
 
 §58. A present or past supposition is said to be 
 general, when tlie protasis refers indefinitely to any one 
 of a series or class of acts, and not to a definite act or 
 
108 CONDITIONAL SENTKNCES. ' [§ 51.' 
 
 a definite series of acts. The apodosis must express a 
 customary or repeated action or a general truth. 
 
 Here the protasis takes the Subjunctive with eav 
 after primary tenses, and the Optative with ei after 
 secondary tenses. The apodosis may take the Present 
 or Imperfect Indicative, or any other form which im- 
 plies repetition. E. g. 
 
 'Hv ■noTf Sacr/x6; ixi^rai, <ro\ rh yipas irokii fifi^ov (sc. lorTii'), if 
 ever a dioision comes, your prize is always much greater. II. I, 1(56. 
 'Hw iyyiis e\6^ 6dvaros, oideXs fioiXirai BvrjfTKeiv, if (or wheri) death 
 comes near, no one is (ever') willing to die. EuR. Ale. 671. 'Awas 
 Xoyos, av airfi tu irpaynara, lidraiAv n ^aivcTM Kol Kfvov, all speech, 
 if deeds are wanting, appears mere emptiness and vanity. Dem. 01. 
 II, 21, 20. AiarcXci fiurmv, oIk ijv n't rt avrov aSiKrj, dXX' fav nva 
 vTroitreva-j] jSeXWoi/a eavTOv elvai, he continues to, hate, not if any 
 one wrongs him, but if he ever suspects that any one is better than him- 
 self. Xkn. Cyr. V, 4, 35. EiXa/3oC Tat 8ta/3oXai, k&v ij/'euSfii daiv, 
 beware of slanders, even when they are false. Isoc. Demon, p. 5 
 C.§_17._ 
 
 Et 8e' Tivas 6opfV^ovjilvovs alaBoiTO, to a'lnov toutou ckottup 
 Karaa^ivvvvM rrfv rapaxfiv e'jreipoTo, whenever he saw any making a 
 disturbance, he always tried, &c. Xen. Cyr. V, 3, 55. Ouk mrekd- 
 nero tri avTov, fl /iri Ti dvayKalov etij, he never left him, unless there 
 was some' necessity for it. Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 40. Ei nt di/Teijro., 
 fvBiis TidvriKet, if any one refused, he was immediately put to death. 
 • Phdc. VIII, 66. Hv Tols fJLev 6<pda\p.ols eTTLKOvprjfia ttjs \i6vos, €i Tit 
 pi\av Ti €)(0}V npo rav 6(l>6a'Kfitov TTopevoiTO, twv 8e nodcap €i rts 
 KivoiTO. Xen. An. IV. 5, 13. 'AXX' c'i ti filj (pepotpev, &Tpvvei> 
 ^t'pft)/. Ede. Ale. 755. 'En-fiS^ 8e elSov airov Tdx^iora, cruXXa/SdiTfi 
 ayovatv avrtKpvs as dnoKTevovvres, ovirep Kai Toits dWovs dnefTthaTTOv, 
 ei Tiva Xrjorfjv rj Kaxovpyou avWd^otev, i. 6. where they had been 
 in the habit of killing any others whom they took. Lys. Aeor. p. 
 137, § 78. 
 
 The Optative in these examjiles, referring to past time, must 
 be especially distinguished from the Optative in ordinary protasis 
 (§ 50i 2), referring to the future. Ei and edv in this construction are 
 almost equivalent to Srt or Srav (which are the more common ex- 
 pressions), and the protasis has precisely the same construction as 
 the relative sentences of § 62. 
 
 The Present and Aorist Subjunctive and Optative here do not 
 differ except as explained in Remark before § 12. 
 
 Eemark. The gnomic Aorist, and the other gnomic and 
 iterative tenses of § 30, can be used in the apodosis of these 
 general propositions. The gnomic Aorist, as usual, is con- 
 Bidered & primary tense (§ 32, 2). E. g. 
 
§51.] GENERAL SUPPOSITIONS 109 
 
 Hv tr<pa\m(rtv^ avreXtria'avTes aWa eTrX^pavav ttju yp€tavj 
 if they fail, they always supply the deficiency, &c. Thuc. I, 70. *Hi> 
 fie Tis TovTtav rt wapa^aiv-jj, ^rjijiiav avTols €7T€ deaav, they 
 (^always) impose a penalty upon every one who transgresses. Xen. 
 Cyr. I, 2, 2. Et Tti^es Xboiev tttj tovs afjieTepovs iiriKparovvTas, 
 dveddparia-av av, whenever any saw their friends in any way 
 victorious, they would be encouraged (i. e. they were encouraged in all 
 such cases). Thuc. VII, 71. (See § 30, 2, and Xen. Mem. IV, 6, 
 13, there quoted.) 
 
 Note 1. The Optative in this construction is not found in 
 Homer, although it is very common in the pquivalent relative sen- 
 tences (§ 62). 
 
 Note 2. Here, as in ordinary protasis, the poets sometimes use 
 the simple el with the Subjunctive instead of idv. (See § 50, 1, N. 
 3.) E.g. 
 
 Emcp yap re x°Xov ye Kal air^iiap Karatei'^ri, 
 
 'AXXa ye Km peromtrBev exei kotov, o^pa TeXeaai]. H. I, 81. 
 
 El fie <l>vyij pev Krjpa TavrjXeyeos davdroio, 
 
 NtK^ffas 8* alxprjs dyXaov ev)(os eXrj, 
 Udvres ptv Ttpatrtv opas veoi 7j8e TraXatoX, 
 
 HoXXa fie Tepirva iraOav ep^eTai eis 'Ai'Siji/. Ttrt. XH, 35. 
 'AXX* avdpa, k e'X Tis jj (To<f)6s, to pavddveiv 
 ndXX' ala)(pbv oi&ev Kal to pfj Teiyeiv ayav. SoPH. Ant. 710. 
 
 Note 3. The Indicative is sometimes found in the place 
 of the Subjunctive or Optative in a general protasis of this 
 kind. Here the speaker merely refers to one of the many 
 cases in which the event may occur, as if it were the only 
 case, — that is, he states the supposition as if it were particular, 
 and not general. E. g. 
 
 El Tis Bio 5 to' irXiovs Tis fjpepas Xoyi^erai, pdratos itrnv, if 
 any one counts upon two or even more days, he is a fool. Soph. Trach. 
 944. 'EXevdepcas TroXnevopev, ov 8i opyrjs Tov ireXas, el Kaff rjbovijv t« 
 Bpa, expvres, i. e. not (having a habit of) being angry with our neigh- 
 bor, if he acLi in any case as he pleases. Thuc. II, 37. (Here the 
 Indicative bpa is used as if some particular act of some one neighbor, 
 and not any act of any neighbor, were in the speaker's mind.) Et 
 TLs n eVijpcBTa, direKpivovTo, if any one asked anything, they replied (to 
 all such). Thuc. VH, 10. 'E/ui'uet ovk eins xaxas Trdo'vav rjpvve- 
 TO, dXX' et ris eiepyeToiipevos dxdpia-Tos (jJaivoiTO.- Xen. Ages. 
 XI, 3. (Here, without any apparent reason, the writer changes 
 from the Indicative to the Optative.) See § 62. N. 1. 
 
 This use of the Indicative is exceptional in Greek, but it is the 
 regular construction in Latin and English. See § 48, II Rem. 2. 
 
110 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 52, 1. 
 
 Ellipsis and Substitution in Protasis or Apodosis. 
 
 § 52. I. Very often the protasis is not expressed 
 in its regular form with el or edv, but is either implied 
 in sometliing that precedes or follows, or expressed in 
 a participle, a preposition with its case, an adverb like 
 ouT-Q)?, or some other part of the sentence. 
 
 When a participle takes the place of a protasis, it is 
 always in the same tense in which the finite verb which 
 it represents would itself have stood after ei or eav, in 
 the Indicative, Subjunctive, or Optative. (See § 109, 
 6.) The Present participle stands for both Present and 
 Imperfect, and the Perfect for both Perfect and Pluper- 
 fect. (See § 16, 2 ; § 18, 3, Rem.) B. g. 
 
 Ovre ea-dlova-i TrXeto) rj bvvavrai <pepeiv, htappayeiev yap av' ovT 
 ap(pL€VvvvTaL TrXet'oj fj dvvavTat^(l)ep€iv^ aTTOTrvtyelev yap ai/, ihei/ do 
 not eat more than they can bear, for (if they should) they would burst, 
 &C. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 2, 21. AvtoI av eiropfvdrjtrav 3 oi aWof ra 
 6' UTTofuyia oIk rjv aXXr) fj Tavrrj eKffrjvm, they would have gone them- 
 selves where the others went; but the animals could not go otherwise 
 than as they did. Xen. An. IV, 2, 10. So ^ yap &v 'Ka^r/a-aio, 
 II. I, 232. 
 
 ToCto iTocovvTfs ev Trpd^ovcriv (i. e. iav iroiaxriv), if they shall do 
 this (habitually), they will prosper. Touto TroirjKTavres ev Trpd^ovam 
 (i. e. eav ir oiTja^ a (Tiv), if they shall (once) do this, they will prosper. 
 TovTo noioCvTis ev av irpaTToiev (i. e. ft no lolev), if they should do 
 this (habitually), they would prosper. ToCro iroifiaavres €v &v Trparroiev 
 (i. e. ei TTOi^o-aiei'), if they should (once) do tliis, they would prosper. 
 TovTo iroiovvTCi ev &v swpaTTov (i. e. cl eiroiovv), if they were doing 
 thui (or if they had been doing this), they would be in prosperity. Tovro 
 7roifi<TavTes iv hv tirparrov (i. e. fi (iroitjtrav), if tliey had done this, 
 they would be in prosperity. 
 
 Has S^ra SIktis otjcris 6 Zivs ovK atroXaXev Tovnarip' avrov 8ri<ras; 
 i. e. how is it that Zeus has not been destroyed, if Justice exists f Aeist. 
 Nub. 904. (Here Sikijs oifo-iji represents el diic?; eariv.) 'AXX' eMfie- 
 o-6a Sofiovs irapacTTei^ovTes (i. e. iav ■napatrreijfistpev), but we 
 shall know, if we shall enter the house. Soph. Ant. 1255. 2i dc ic X u' 00 )» 
 (i'o-Ei raxa (i. e. eav kKvjis), but you will soon know, if you listen. 
 Arist. Av. 1375. So p.^ paBitv, unless I learn, for eav tifi ndda>, 
 ■NT.iVv 7QQ v^! „,.. .-._' 'a'\ A.' ».s_' . ' ^i' ^ ! 
 
 f^ois (i. e. ri avvvaiois), such things would you suffer, if you should 
 
§ 52, 1.] ELUPSIS OK SUBSTITUTION IN PROTASIS. Ill 
 
 live with women. Aesch. Sept. 195. OiS' hi cnamrja-anu rifv arri* 
 6pS>v aTfi\ov<Tav atrTois (i. e. el op&jii). SoPH. Ant. 185. 'Adrjvaiau 
 8i TO avTO TOVTO iraOovTwv, bmXairiav av rrjv Siva/iiv flKd(f(rSiu 
 (qi/iai), but if the Athenians should ever suffer this (naBouriov = cl 
 vddoiev), I think it would be inferred that their power was twice as 
 great. Tnuc. I, 10. (Here nothing but the context shows that 
 iradovTKov does not represent ti (EiroBov, if they had ever suffered.) 
 yiaixfiav S' hv alTrjtTavTos jJKov ao'. (fieptov &v aprov, and if you ever 
 asked for something to eat, I used to cjme bringing you bread. Arist. 
 Nub. 1383. (Here alTi/cravTos represents el alriiaetas in a general 
 supposition, § 51. For tjkov av see § 30, 2, and § 42, 3.) npl* 
 yevitrBai j]Tvi<rTrimv av Tif aKovtra; (i. e. « ^Kovaev), before it hap- 
 pened, any one would have disbelieved such a thing, if he had heard it. 
 ThuC. Vn, 28. Ov yap &v p.eTaitel6eiv ip,as e^v'ii p.r) Toiavrris 
 oi!(rijs TTJs vnap^ovaris iiroXriyJAeas, for he would not be seeking to 
 change your minds, if such were not the prevailing opinion (i. e. « (xij 
 roiavrri ^v). Dem. Cor. 304, 1. M^ KaTj]yopi]a-avTos AiVp^iVou 
 p-Tjdev e§a> t^s ypa^rjS oiiS' hv ey!i> \6yov ov&eva eiroiovpriv erepov (i. e. 
 el iMTj KarqyoprjO'fv). lb. 236, 28. Ta avra &v eirpa^e Koi iTpmrri 
 X ax o Cera (i. e. ei wpmrrj eXaxev), it (the soul) would have done the 
 same, even if it had had the first choice by the lot. Plat. Kep. X, 620 D 
 SoThuc. VH, 13, 1. 
 
 To'/ieK eV iKcivat jroWaKis &v biiKvBrjirav, if it had depended w\ 
 Mm, they often would have been disbanded. Isoc. Pan. p. 70 B. § 142. 
 Aid ye v/ias avrovs iraXat Sv aTToKaXeiTe, if it had depended on your- 
 selves, you wo^dd long ago have been ruined. Dem. Cor. 242, 10. (So 
 Koff vpas.) naXat yap av eveKa ye yjrrjfjiiapdTaiv eBeda>Kei SIktjv, 
 for, if decrees were of any avail, he would long ago have suffered 
 punishment. Dem. 01. Ill, 32, 16. (Here the protasis is implied in 
 ev€Ka ^r]<jita-pdTa>v.) Ouro yap ovkcti tov XotTToC •ndu\Qip€V hv 
 KaK&s,for in that case we should no longer suffer. Dem. Phil. I, 44, 
 12. So cos ovT(o ireptyevop^vos Bv, Xen. An. I, 1, 10. Ou8* av 
 Bixalas es xaxov ireaoipi n. SoPH. Ant. 240. 
 
 In these cases the form of the apodosis wiU generally show what 
 form of protasis is implied. When the apodosis is itself expressed 
 by an Infinitive or Participle (§ 63), as in Thuc. I, 10, the form of 
 the protasis is shown only by the general sense of the passage. 
 
 Bemare:. The Future participle is not used in protasis to rep- 
 resent the Future Indicative, as it would denote time future rela- 
 tively to the time of the apodosis (§ 28), which the Future Indica- 
 tive in protasis does not do. The Present and Aorist participles, 
 representing the Present and Aorist Subjunctive, express future 
 conditions, thus making the Future participle unnecessary. The 
 Aorist participle in protasis can always represent an Aorist Subjunc 
 tive in the sense explained § 20, N. 1. 
 
 Note 1. An ellipsis- of the verb of the protasis takes p'oce 
 in the Homeric el 8' aye, for el 8e jSovXei, aye, and in such ex- 
 pressibns as « p.ii 8ia tovto, had it not been for this. E. g. 
 
112 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. L§ ^^' ^' 
 
 El' 8' &y€, TOi Ke(^aXg /toraveuo-o/uai. H. T, 524. E.' 8' ayt /ifiv, 
 nfipria-ai, ha yvaam Km ot&f, but if you wish, come now, try it. II. 1, 
 302. Kai fi ^rt hia rhv ■npvravtv, di>im<r€v av, and, had it not oeenjor 
 the Prytanis, he would have been thrown in. Plat. Gorg. olb ^. 
 (Compare S.d ye ip-is, Dem. Cor. 242, 10, quoted § 52, 1.) Ov yap 
 CDS el pfi Sm AaKeSaiiioviovs, oiiS' as el M npd|ffov ovx vneBi%avTO, 
 oiS' as el p-fj Si' 'VLyrjaiTtTTOv, oiS' as el pr) Sia to Koi rb, eaaOriaav av 
 of *MKeis, ovx oiJ™ Torf airriyyeiKev, for he did not then report that, if 
 U had not been for the Lacedaemonians, — or if they had not refused 
 to receive Proxenus, — or if it had not been for Hegesippus, — or if it 
 had not been for this and that, — the Phocians imuld have been saved. 
 Dem. F. L. 364, 12. So ft p^ Kpepatras, had I not done it by hanging 
 up, &c. Akist. Nub. 229. So in alternatives: see Note 2. (Cf. 
 § 53, Note 1.) 
 
 Note 2. In alternatives, el Si py, otherwise, regularly intro- 
 duces the latter clause, even when the former clause is negative. 
 Et de p-q is much more common than eav 8e pj, even when eai> 
 piv with the Subjunctive precedes. E. g. 
 
 Upbs ravra ptj tvwt' ' el 8e pfj , aavTov 'nor aiTtdaei, therefore do 
 not beat me ; but if you do, you will have yourself to blame for it. 
 Arist. Nub. 1433. HoKepov oxik e'iav iroieiV el be pij, Koi avroi 
 dvayKaa'6r](re<T6aL e^aa'av cftLkovs •jToieltrBai ovs ov ^ovKovrai, they said 
 that otherwise (ft 8e prj) they should be obliged, &o. Thuc. I, 28. 
 Ei-ffov (Tlavaayta) tov KrjpvKos prj Xelirea-Odt * el Be p^ , 7r6\epotf avT^ 
 SrrapTiaras npoayopeveiv, they ordered him not to be left behind by the 
 herald: and if he should be (ei 8f prf), (they told him) that the Spartans 
 declared war against him. 13. I, 131. 'Eav piv ti vpiv SokS} Xe'yftr 
 iXtjdes, ^vvopo'Koy{j<TaTe 'el he prj, navrl Xdyu avriTeivere. Plat. 
 Phaed. 91 C. So in Dem. Phil. Ill, p. 129, 14, eav pev velarire, . . . 
 el 8e pi], K'T.\. 
 
 2. The protasis is often altogether suppressed, leaving 
 only an Optative with av or an Indicative with av as an 
 apodosis. Here some indefinite or general protasis is 
 always implied; as if he pleased, if he could, if an 
 opportunity should offer, if it were necessary, if it were 
 true, if we should consider, if what is natural should 
 happen, &c. E. g. 
 
 'liras &v ovv ns eiriTiprjO-eie rots elprjpevots, perhaps some one 
 might (if he pleased) find fault with what has been said. Isoc. Areop. 
 p. 146 E. § 36. Tm oix Ax fiaa-iKrjas ma <rrap e^av ayopeiois, 
 therefore you should not take kings upon- your tongue and talk (i. e- 
 you would not, if you should do as you ought). H. ll, 250. ToCto our 
 Hv oiros ?X°' Xeyeii/ ov6' iptls jTeta-BelrjTe, neither would he be 
 
§ 53.] SUPPRESSION OF THE PROTASIS. 113 
 
 able to say this (if he should try), nor would you believe it. Dbm. 
 Andr. 598, 20. "HSe'cos 8' &v eyayy' epoiiirjv Atirrivjjv, but I would 
 gladly ask Leplines (if an opportunity should offer). Id. Lept. 496, 8. 
 Afi^dTo) CM oi etTraXoi vvv oix av eXddepoi, yivoivTo aa-fifvot, lei 
 him show that they would not now gladly become free (if they could). 
 Id. 01. II, 20, 18. Bao-iXfia oiKoSo/ieiK rjpxero, ms hv Uava diro/mxe- 
 trdai El?;, so that it might be strong enough to fight from (if it should be 
 necessary). Xen. Cyr. Ill, 1, 1. 
 
 Ou yap rjv Ti &v firoifiTe, for there was nothing that you could 
 have done (if you had tried). Dem. Cor. 240, 15. lioiav 8' av epyav 
 ij jrovmvrj KivSvvav direa-Tr]<rav; and from what acts, ^c, would they 
 ham shrunk (i e. if they had been required) f Isoc. Pan. p. 57 C. 
 § 83. noXXov yap &v rjv n^ia, for they would be worth much (if that 
 were true). Plat. Eep. II, 374 D. So liovKoip.riv av (veli'm), / 
 could wish (in a certain future case) ; ifiovXapriv av (vellem), / should 
 now wish (on a certain condition, not fulfilled). 
 
 Note. The Optative with Su, used in this way, often has 
 the force of a mild command or exhortation, and sometimes 
 a sense approaching that of the Future Indicative. E. g. 
 
 Aeyois av, you may speak (lit. you could speak, if you should desire 
 it), implying « jSovXoio. 2i pev Kopi^ois hv (reavrov g 6e\cis, you 
 may t(&e yourself off whither you please. Soph. Antig. 444. (This 
 is merely a milder expression than (co/iife.) KXuoii &v ^Si;, *oi|3f 
 npoaraTTJpie, i. 6. hear now. Id. El. 637. 'X.tapoXs av ela-a. Id. 
 PhiL 674. So Antig. 1339. IIoi ovv, ecprjv iya>, rpairoipeB' av 
 m; in what other direction then, said I, shall lue turn (lit. should we 
 turn, if we should vmh) 1 Plat. Euthyd. 290 A. Ovk &v pedeiftriv 
 Tov Opovov, I will not give up the throne. Arist. Kan. 830. 
 
 Remark. In such examples as Hdt. I, 2, 'eXXj/j/mi/ nvas (bam 
 Apira<rai ^vpaiirqv firjaav S hv ovToi Kp^Tfs, there is no excep- 
 tional use of the Optative with av referring to the past; but the 
 meaning is these would prove to be Cretans (if toe should examine the 
 case). So avrai 8e oiiK hv TroXXai cirj^av, these would notprooe (on 
 investigation) to have been many. Thuc. I, 9. 
 
 § 53. The apodosis may be expressed by an Infini- 
 tive or Participle, wliere the construction of the sentence 
 requires it; each tense of the Infinitive or Participle 
 representing its own tenses of the Indicative or Optative. 
 (The Present includes also the Imperfect, and the Per- 
 fect also the Pluperfect.) 
 
 If a finite verb in the apodosis would have taken av, 
 that particle is joined with the Infinitive or Participle. 
 The Prei^ent Infiuitive or Participle with av represents 
 
]14 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§53. 
 
 either an Imperfect Indicative with av, or a Present 
 Optative with av; the Perfect, either a Pluperfect Indic- 
 ative or a Perfect Optative ; and the Aorist, either an 
 J.omi Indicative or an J.om« Optative. (See § 41.) 
 The context must decide in each case, whether an In- 
 finitive or Participle with av represents the Indicative 
 or tlie Optative. E. g. 
 
 'H-yoC/iai, fi toiito Troicire, Trai/ra KoKSis tx^ «" i I believe that, ifymi 
 are doing this, all is well. 'Hyovnai, iav touto vroi^re, TraiiTa xaXus 
 f^eiv, Ibelieve that, if you (shall) do thin, all will be well. 'Hyoiifiai, 
 el TovTo TToioire, iravra koXSis av exeiv, I believe that, if you should 
 do this, all would be well. 'Hyoij/iai, d tovto evotrjcraTf, irdvra koKSis 
 Of ex ft y I I believe that, if you had done this, all would (now) be well. 
 Oida iiids, iav tovto noiriTf, ev jrpd^ovTas, I know that, if you do 
 this, you will prosper. ^KCfi^aTa Tav p^dtas diroKTivvvvTOiv koi dva- 
 ^t(oaKOfievatv y' hv, el oloi Te 7]€rav, considerations for those who 
 readily put men to death, and who would bring them to life again too, if 
 they could. Plat. Crit. 48 C. ('Ava^inxrKoiuvaiv av ^ dve^imaKOvro 
 av.) See the examples of ejich tense of the Infinitive and Participle 
 with nv, under § 41 and § 73. 
 
 nms yap oieadf Svaxepms aKoveiv 'OXvvBlovs, eX m ti Xeyot koto 
 HKi-irnov Kar exelvovs Tois xpo^o^s ; how unwillingly do you think 
 they heard it, if any one said anything against Philip in those times f 
 Dem. Phil. II, 70, 25. (Here axoveiv represents the Imperfect 
 rJKovov, § 15, 3.) For an example of the Perfect Infinitive with av, 
 representing the Pluperfect, see § 41, 2. 
 
 Note 1. The apodosis is sometimes omitted for effect, 
 when some such expression as it is well can be supplied, or 
 some other apodosis at once occurs to the reader. E. g. 
 
 'AW « nev SaxTova'i ye pas p.eya6vp,oi 'h.-)(aio\, aptrairres Kara Bvpxtv, 
 OTTOjy dvrd^iov ttrrat,, — el be Ke /xjj boiiinriv, eya> 8e Kev aiiTos eXcopat, 
 II. I. 135. (Here we must understand eS e^ei, it wUl be welt, or 
 something similar, after eo-Tui.) Ei nep yap k e6e\ri<nv 'OXufiTrios 
 da repo7r7]Tr]s e^ ede<ov oryc^cXi'^at • — 6 yap iroXv ^epraros eariv. 11. 
 I, 680. (Here we must understand he can do it after the protasis. 
 The following ydp refers to this suppressed apodosis.) El piv ryu 
 vpds iKavois bihatTKa oiovs hfl irpos dWrfkovs eivat * — ct de p^, Ka\ irapd 
 tS)v irpoyeyevrjpevav pavBdvere. Xen. Cjt. VIII, 7, 23. Compare 
 Aesch. Prom. 835. 
 
 Note 2. Very often the apodosis is not directly expressed 
 by the verb on which the protasis depends, but is merely im- 
 plied in the context. Here the form of the protasis is deter- 
 mined hy the implied apodosis. In such sentences « or ion 
 
§ 53.] ELLIPSIS OK STIBSTITtrTION IN APODOSIS. 115 
 
 may generally be translated by supposing that, or in cast that. 
 E.g. 
 
 ToiSvcKa vvv ra aa yovvaff tKavofjiai, at k i6 eXTjcBa Kelvov \vyp6p 
 oKtdpov ivurneiv, therefore I am now come to your knees, in case you 
 shall he willing to tell me of his sad death (i. e. that you may tell me, in 
 case you shall be mlling) . Od. Ill, 92. See Od. I, 94. (Here ixara- 
 fiai does not contain the apodosis to ai k ideXrjtrda, which is rather 
 implied in what follows.) Toii' vvv /iiv iivrjaatra Trape'ffo Kai \affc 
 yovvoiv, ai K€v 5ra)9 e$i\r](riv eVl Tptuttrtrtv dp^^at, grasp his knees, 
 m case he shall be vnlling to assist the Trojans (i. e. that you may cauie 
 Mm to assist them, if he shall be willing). II. I, 408. So nl' Kev Trms 
 /SovXerai (often explained as an indirect question), II. I, 66. Oukovv 
 CTI eWeineTai to rjv neifriofiev v^ar iis xph W°-^ cupelvai; is not 
 this then still left to us, — in ca-e we shall persuade you thai you must 
 let us go (sc. to have you do this) ? i. e. to have you let us go, if we 
 shall persuade you that you must? Plat. Kep. I, 327 C. 'Akov(tov koL 
 ijiov, edv aoi Tavra doKTJ , hear me also, in case the same shall please 
 you, i. e. that then you may assent to it. lb. II. 358 B. 'En koL vvv 
 dpas iroiQvvrai, ft tis stt lki^ pvKeverai Ilipa-ais, even to this day 
 they invoke curses, if there is any one who sends heralds to the Persians. 
 Isoc. Pan. p. 73 D. § 157. 'Ikctm irpos <re Sevp' a(j)iyiieda, eV Tiya 
 jrrfXti' <j>pd<Teias ^fiTw eilepov, we are come hither as suppliants to you, 
 in case you shoidd tell us of some fleecy cily (implying thinking that we 
 might go and live in such a city, if you should tell us of one). Akist. 
 Av. 120. Oi S' &KT(ipov, « dXaxroiiTo, and others pitied them, 
 in case they should be captured (i. e. thinking what they would suffer 
 if they should be captured). Xen. An. I. 4. 7. Upas rfjv iroXiv, el 
 c'irt/3oi;dotci/, e'xmpow, they marched towards the city, in case they 
 (the citizens) should rush out (i. e. that they might meet them, if they 
 should rush out). Thtjc. VI, 100. OiS' tjv tov roXefiou iripas ovS 
 OTTaXXay^ ^iXt7nra>, €1 fiij Qij^aiovs Kal QeTToKoi/s €)($povs TTOiTjae l€ 
 rjj TToXfi, i. e. Philip saw that he could neither end nor escape the war, 
 unless he should make the Thebans and Thessalians hostile to the city. 
 TsM. Cor. 276, 1. See Soph. O. C. 1770 ; Plat. Rip. IV, 434 A. 
 
 In the examples from Homer and Plato the protasis belongs under 
 § 50, 1, the implied apodosis referring to the future ; in the example 
 from Isocrates the protasis belongs under § 49, 1; in that from 
 Aristophanes, under § 50, 2, the implied apodosis being jn the 
 Optative with av or some equivalent form ; while in the next three 
 the protasis ha? been changed (on the principle of indirect discourse) 
 from ft dXtofrorrai, iav eiri^or^Bannv, and eav p.7] iroLrjo'ti} of the direct 
 discourse, on account of the past tense of the leading verb. Foi- a 
 further explanation of this construction, and other examples, see 
 § 77, 1. c. See also § 71, N. 1, and the examples, which are to be 
 explained on the principle of this note. 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the adverb av'stands alone to represent the 
 apodosis, when the verb to which it belongs can be easily supplied 
 from the context. In like manner el alone may represent the pro" 
 
116 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ ^3. 
 
 tasis. 'irfie expression &(nrfp &v « (sometimes written as one word, 
 aaire pavel, quasi) includes both cases. See § 42, 8, N. 2, with the 
 examples. „ , , ^ 
 
 'Q<rmp with the participle (§ 109, N. 9) generally belongs to an 
 apodosis understood. So m such expressions as wo-jrep « Xeyois, as 
 (it would he) if you should say. 
 
 Note 4. When ttXt/j' d is used for « fi^, unless, there is an 
 ellipsis of an apodosis after ttX^w. E. g. 
 
 Ovhk ra ovofiara olov Te avrSiv elSevat, jrX^v fi Tif Ktaftadcnroicht 
 TuyxoMt wK, i( is not possible to know even their names, except {it ii 
 possible) in case one happens to be a comedian. Plat. Apol. 18 C. 
 
 Ebmabk. Expressions of a wish like « yap yivoiro, that ii 
 might be, and ei yap iyivtro, that it had been, are protases with the 
 apodosis suppressed. See Rem. at the end of Sect. YL 
 
 Mixed Constructions. — Irregularities in Protasis or 
 Apodosis. 
 
 § 541. The regular forms of protasis and apodosis ex- 
 plained above (§§ 49, 50, 51) include by far the greater num- 
 ber of the examples found in the classic authors. Many cases 
 remain, however, in which the protasis and apodosis do not 
 belong to the same form. These admit of various explana- 
 tions : — 
 
 1. (a.) When an Indicative in the protasis (in either of the 
 constructions of § 49, 1 or 2) is followed by an Optative with 
 &v in the apodosis, the latter properly belongs to an implied 
 protasis in the Optative (on the principle of § 52, 2). Thus, in 
 
 the sentence c» TaCra ovrms Jx^t, ovk hv SiKaiios KoXd^otTO, if this 
 
 is so, he would not justly be punished, xoXa^oiro Sv belongs to a 
 protasis in the Optative, if justice should be done, implied in 
 biKoias ; while the protasis el ... . epfei belongs as a conditiou 
 to the expressed apodosis with its implied protasis. The sense 
 therefore is, if this is so, {the result is that) he would not b« 
 punished if justice should be done. The same principle applies 
 to a primary tense of the Indicative in protasis, followed by a 
 secondary tense with an in apodosis. 
 
 This is sometimes the meaning, when a Subjunctive or 
 Future Indicative (§ 50, 1) is in the protasis, with an Optativa 
 with av in the apodosis. (See the last two examples.'! E. g. 
 
5 54, 1.] MIXED CONSTETJCTIONS. 117 
 
 El Se Tts ddat'drav ye Kwr ovpavov etX^Xou^aff, ovk Si/ eywye 
 Seoicriv iiravpavloun jia^olfirjv, hut if thou art one of the immortals 
 come from heaven, I would not fight against the Gods of heaven. II. 
 VI, 128. (Here the principal protasis to fiaxoifiTiv av is implied, if 1 
 should have my choice,^ UoXKfj yap &v ev8aip.ovia eirj •jrepl rovs veovs, 
 €1 eis fieV fiovos avToiis bia(j>6e ip ft, ol S' aXXoi &(pe\ov(ri.v, for 
 there would (naturally) he great happiness, &c. Plat. Apol. 25 B. 
 "Got* et fioi Koi fietras f]yovp.evot fioWov irepav yrpoaetvai avra TroXepelv 
 eTTcitrdrjTe, ovk hv fiKorxup vvv tov ye adtKeiv alrlav (jie poifirjv, if 
 you were persuaded to make war by thinking, Sfc, I should not now 
 justly be charged with injustice. Thuc. II, 60. (Here a protasis 
 to <^epol}xr)v av is implied in elKortos.) Ei yhp oSt-oi opdas dTrearrj- 
 irav, ifieis &v ov ^peav ap^oire, for if these had a right to secede, 
 it would follow that your dominion is unjust. Id. Ill, 40. Ei vvv ye 
 dvtTTV)^oijpev, ttws Tavavri &v irpdrrovTes oil (rtju^olpeB' av; if 
 now we are unfortunate, how should we not be safe if we should do the 
 opposite? Arist. Ran. 1449. (Here Trpdrroi'T-f s = 1 1 TrpdrToi^eK is 
 the principal protasis to which the optative refers.) Ei tout-' cit€- 
 Xeipovu \iyeiv, ovk ta& Sorts ovk av eiKoras intTtfirjaeie'iioi, if 
 I were undertaking to say this (§ 49, 2) , every one would censure me 
 with reason (i. e. ei to. elKora iroirjaeiev). Dem. Cor. 296, 24. (Here 
 many Mss., and Dion. Hal. p. 1054, read eaeTiprjo-e, the ordinary 
 apodosis.) Ei fuibeva tSiv aWmv iTnreveii' ciaa-av, ovK hv btxaias 
 opyl^oia-6e avrols. Lys. Alcib. II, § 8. 
 
 KaiVot Tore tov 'Yvepe'tbrjV, eiTrep aKr]6ri fiov vvv KaTTfyopei, pShXov 
 S V elxoras ^ toi/S' eSiaxev, and yet, if he is now making true charges 
 against me, he would then have prosecuted Hypereides with much more 
 reason than this man. Dbm. Cor. 302, 24. (Here iSiaKev av refers 
 chiefly to the implied protasis, if he had done what was more reason- 
 able.) Such examples seldom occur. 
 
 OiJSe yap &v ttoXXoi yicjivpat S<Ttv, ex°'f*'' "" ""''" <j>vy6vTes 
 riptis aaBapev. Xen. An. H, 4, 19. (Here the implied protasis is 
 if we should wish to escape.) See An. V, 1, 9. 
 
 ipovptov ei itotijaovTat, t^s pev yrjs ^X<x7rToiev av n pepog, 
 ov pivTot iKavov ye earai KaXveiv rjpas, k.t.\., if they shall build a 
 fort, they might {under favorable circumstances) injure some part of 
 our land; but it wUl not be sufficient to prevent us, &c. Thuc. I, 142. 
 
 (J.) A Subjunctive or Future Indicative in the protasis 
 sometimes depends on an Optative with av in the apodosis, 
 when no other protasis can readily be supplied. This expresses 
 the protasis more vividly than the regular Optative. (See 
 § 50, 2, Eem. b, and § 34, 1, b.) It must be remembered also 
 that the Optative with av is sometimes merely a softened ex- 
 pression for the Future Indicative (§ 52, Note). E. g. 
 
 'EavToiTO TTotijo-ffl, (caXSs avex"') if I do this, it would be uxlL 
 (Here the irregularity is the same in English as in Greek : the regu- 
 
118 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 54, 1 
 
 lar form in both would be either eav tovto KOifi<rto, koK&s e|", yl <^ 
 this, it will be well; or el tovto -n-oifia-aifu, Kohas av ^xoi, if 1 should da^ 
 this, it would be well.) Kai ovtios &v SeivoraTa iravrav jr a 6 o i e v , ei 
 oStol 6;io'i/'i)<^Di KaT cKeivtov tou/ avSpav toU rpiaKovTa yevrjaovTai, 
 Lys. Agor. p. 139, 6. § 94. (Here we should expect d yevoivro.) 
 T£v aTOTTOTaraiv fieW &v e'li], el, a vw Svotav 6<l>\iaKa.va>v o/icDS enXa- 
 X«, ravTa guwjflfis fJ.!) irpd^fi. Dem. OI. I, 16, 25.^ *Yiv ovv iiaerjs 
 fioi TOVi'iiiKov TOVTOV \6yov, ov< &v diroSoirjv oiS' an offoKbv oidevt, 
 if you shall learn this for me, I will not (or / would not) pay even an 
 obol to any one. Arist. Nub. 116. (This and many other examples 
 might be explained equally well on either principle, a or 6.) 
 
 2. (a.) An Optative in the protasis sometimes depends 
 upon a primary tense of the Indicative or an Imperative in the 
 apodosis. This arises from the slight distinction between the 
 Subjunctive and Optative in protasis, as iav exjl and cl exoi, for 
 which the Latin has but one form, si habeat. (See § 48, I, B, 
 Rem. 2.) In fact, the irregularity in «' toCto yivoiro, mvra 
 Ka'KSst (|et, is precisely the same as in the English if this should 
 happen, all will he weU, where the more regular apodosis would 
 be all would he well, as in Greek, iravra xaKas av e;(ot. E. g. 
 
 *AX\* ct TLS fiot dvrjp dfX eitoiTO Koi oKKos, paKKov 6a\iTiopff Koi 
 6aptra\eaiTepov € a T a I . II. X, 222. El BeXotff y aKOTreiv Tas<j>vo-eLS 
 ray rav av6pa>iriov, evpi\aop,ev, k.t.X. Isoc. ad Nicocl. p. 23 D. 
 §45. El Ttff rdSe Trapa/Sati/o t, ei/ay^s eoTo). AesCHIN. Cor. § 110. 
 In such cases the Optative is a less animated form of expression than 
 the regular Subjunctive. 
 
 (J.) The Optative sometimes stands in the protasis, when 
 the apodosis contains a primary tense of a verb denoting 
 necessity, obligation, propriety, possibility, &c., with an Infinitive, 
 the two forming an' expression that is nearly equivalent in 
 sense to an Optative with av. E. g. 
 
 Ei yap etT^ffai'Suo nves tvavTioi vopot, ovk ap^oripois evi fiijTroV 
 ^\>r]<^i(Ta(T6ai, for if there should be two laws opposed to each other, 
 you could not surely vote for both. Dem. Timocr. 711, 8. (See § 63, 
 4, b.) This is analogous to the use of the Imperfect of the same 
 verbs, explained in § 49, 2, Note 3. There, for example, ivr)v avT^ 
 cX6civ, he could have gone, is nearly equivalent to rjXdtv av, and here 
 cvcJTiv aura f'Xfltii', he could go, is nearly equivalent to l\6oi av. 
 
 3. A few irregular constructions remain, which can be ex- 
 plained only as cases of anacoluthon, in which the speaker 
 adapts his apodosis to a form of protasis different from that 
 which ho has actually used. E. g. 
 
§ 55, 2.] • MIXED CONSTRUCTIONS. 119 
 
 'Eyo) piiv &v, el c;(o(;u(, o>s Ta;^io'Ta oirXa iiroioifijjv iraai Uefy- 
 a-ais. Xbn. C>ir. II, 1, 9. (Here inomiiir^v av is used as if ci flxov, 
 if I were able, had preceded. We should expect nowinriv av, which 
 is found in one Ms.) Ei jiev yap els yvvaiKa tTa>sppove<rrepav ^i(j>o! 
 fiedeipiev, d-Jo-xXe^^y fiv ^v (f>6vos. EuB. Orest. 1132, (Here we 
 should expect eii;.)' 
 
 Remark. The same apodosis, in either the Indicative or Opta- 
 tiye, may take one protasis in the Indicative referring to present or 
 past time, and another in the Optative referring to a supposed _/«(«re 
 case. E. g. 
 
 *E-ya) ovv 8eiva au eirjv elpyaa-fievos^ et, OTf fiev p,e ol ap\ovres erar- 
 Tov, Tore fiev efievovy tov de 6eov TarTovTos, At Trot /it Tr]v rd^iv, I 
 should therefore (prove to) have behaved outrageously, if when the state 
 authorities stationed me I stood my ground, but if now when God sta- 
 tions me I should desert my post. Plat. Apol. 28 E. (Here the 
 combination of the two acts is the future condition on which the 
 apodosis depends.) ''ETrev^qp.aL •natri tovtqls, el aXrjBri irpos vpas 
 eiTTOipt Kcu eiTTOv Koi TOT ev6vs ev t& Srjpta, eirv^iav poi dovvaij 
 i. e. if I should speak the truth and did speak it then, &c. Dem. Cor. 
 274, 28. El de pr^* etrri prjre rjv prjT av elTrelv e)^oi pTj6e\s prjdeiria 
 Koi Trjpepov, tI tov trvtiQovKov e\priv Troielv; but if there neither is nor 
 was (any such thing), and if no man yet even at this day could possibly 
 tell of any, what ought the statesman to have done (which was not 
 done) f lb. 291, 28. (See § 50, 2, N. 2, and § 49, 2, N. 3.) 
 
 § 55, 1. Two or more protases, not co-ordinate, may be- 
 long to one apodosis. E. g. 
 
 Koi yap av oStos n iraBr), raxeios vpeXs erepov ^iXhtttoi' iroimrere, 
 avTTep ovto} Trpoaex^re rots Trpdypaa-t tov vovv. Dem. Phil. I, 43, 
 12. El 8' ^t^^v veoi Slff Ka\ yepovTes, e'l tis k ^rj pdpTave, SittXou 
 |3t'ou \a)(6vTes e^mpBovpeff av. EuR. Suppl. 1084. JEi tis o-e ave- 
 potTo TOVTO, Tt etrrt ax^paj el aiira eiTres on OTpoyyvXoTrjs, e'l aroi 
 elirev airep eyia, elires drjTrov &v on (r)(rjpA Ti.- Plat. Men. 74 B, 
 
 2. It sometimes happens, that the apodosis is itself in a 
 dependent sentence (as in a final clause), which determines its 
 mood without reference to the preceding rules. In this case, 
 if the leading verb is in a secondary tense, so that the apodosis 
 takes the Optative, the protasis also takes the Optative by the 
 general rule (§ 31, 1), even if it would otherwise have the 
 Subjunctive. E. g. 
 
 Taira S' ewrei', 1v el pev (coi vvv jrpotrSoK^traijut avTov epelv, 
 anoXoyovpevos Trepl avrav dtaTpt^otpt, el de irapaXtiroipi, vvv 
 avTos EiTToi, and he said this, in order that, if on the one hand 1 
 should still expect him to tell it, I should waste time about it in my de- 
 fence; but if on the other hand I should omit it. he might now till it 
 
120 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ ^5, 2 
 
 Kmself. Dem. Aph. I, 830, 8. (If a pnmary tense stood for emev, wa 
 ehould have, e. g. raZra \eyfi, tv iav fiev TrpoadoKtitra) avrov epeiv, 
 Siarpi'^o), iav &€ irapaXijro), vvve'iTrjj-) 
 
 KEJtAEK. For the forms assumed by such sentences when con- 
 structed on the principle of indirect discourse, see § 77, 1. 
 
 § 56. After many verbs expressing wonder, delight, 
 contentment, indignation, disappointment, and similar 
 ideas, a protasis with el may be used where a causal 
 sentence would seem more natural. Such verbs are 
 especially davfia^a, ala-^wo/jLai, ayaTraa, and ayava- 
 
 KT€Q). B. g. 
 
 eaufiafo) 8' tymye et hijSeis vjiaiv iiijT evBvfiArai, fiijT opyl^trai, 
 ipS>v, K.T.X., I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry, 
 when he sees, &c. (lit. if no one is either concerned or angry, I wonder). 
 Dem. Phil. I, 52, 17. (See Rem. below.) 'AXX' eKtivo 6avp.a(u>, el 
 AaKfSaiiiovtots fiev ttote avrfipare, vvvi S' oKve'ire e^Uvai (tai piXKfTf 
 el(TCJ)(pfLv, but I wonder at this, thai you once opposed the Lacedaemo- 
 nians, but now are unwilling, &c. Id. 01. II, 25, 2. (The literal 
 meaning is, if (it is true that) you once opposed, §•«., then I wonder.) 
 OvK ayaira f i ft^ Sikt/j' tSaxev, aW e i fi^ kQ' XP""'? <rTC<^ava OTf- 
 <bavai8ri(TfTai, dyavaKrel, he is not content if he was not punished ; but 
 if he is not also to be crowned with a golden crown, he is indignant 
 Abschin. Cor. § 147. (Here the former protasis belongs under 
 § 49, 1, and the latter under § 49, 1, N. 3.) 
 
 Kat wff ahrfOuis dyavaKTca, el ovT(aa-\ a vow firi oios t €ipX eiirflv, 
 I am indignant that (or if) I am not able, &c. Plat. Lach. 1 94 A. 
 Ou Sij BavjUUTTOV eariv, el (TTparevopevos Kcu. jtovwv exeivos airros 
 vpS>v p.eW6vTav KoX y^j]^L^o^evo3v Koi trvvBavopAvtov irepiylyverat, it is 
 no wonder that he gets the advantage of you, &c. Dem. 01. U, 24, 23. 
 M;;de pevroi tovto fielov b6^i]Te ex^'*'» el oi Kvpelot irpoaBev avv fip.lv 
 TaTTopevoL vvv dtpetTTriKaa-Lv, i. «. do not be discontented, if (or that) the 
 Cyraeans'have now withdrawn. Xbn. An. Ill, 2, 17. 
 
 These verbs may also be followed by on and a causal sentence, 
 as in Plat. Theaet. 142 A, eOaipa^ov on ovx oios t rj evpelv. The 
 construction with el gives a milder or more polite form of expression, 
 putting the object of the wonder, &c. into the form of a supposition, 
 instead of stating it as a fact, as we should do in English. The forms 
 of protasis quoted above belong under § 49, 1. For the form some- 
 times assumed by these sentences on the principle of indirect dis 
 course, see § 77, 1, c. 
 
 Kemark. This construction must not be mistaken for that in 
 which El is used in the sense of whether, to introduce an indirect 
 question ; as, eirvdero el a-ii ■trapel-qs, he asked whether you were present 
 For this see § G8, 3, and § 70. 
 
§ 58, 2.J Al m AP0D0SI8. 121 
 
 § 57. The apodosis is sometimes introduced by the con- 
 junction 8e, as if the apodosis formed a sentence co-ordinate 
 with the protasis, instead of being (as it is) the leading sen- 
 tence. This is especially common in Homer and Herodotus, 
 and rare in Attic prose. It occurs when the apodosis is to be 
 emphatically opposed to the protasis. Instead of fie we some- 
 times find dWd or airdp. E. g. 
 
 Ei fie K€ fi^ SacocriVf eyio be Kev avTos eXafiaif hut if they do not give 
 it up, then I will lake it myself. II. I, 137. 'AXAa is found in II. I, 
 82, quoted § 51, N. 2. Ei Tiep yap t aWoi ye wepixTtivafieBa jrdn-es 
 )>r]ViTlv eV 'Apyfitov, troi S' ou Se'os eor' diroKeirBm. H. Xll, 245. Et 
 Je 6av6vT<av nep KaToKrjBovT (Iv 'Ai'fioo, avrap eyi) Koi KcWt (j>i\ov 
 ftepvf}tTOfi eralpov. II. XXH, 389. Et vpiv eoTi tovto fif] dvvarov 
 troifia-ai, vpees S e ext Koi vvv ck tov piarov r)pXv e^etrde. Hdt. VIII, 
 22. 'AXV ei fiTjSc' TouTo jSouXei ditoKpivaaOai, (riiSe Toiirrev6ev Xe'yf. 
 Xen. Cyr. V, 5, 21. 
 
 This fie in apodosis cannot be expressed in English ; as our ad- 
 verbs then, yet, still, &c., necessarily fail to give the force of the Greek 
 fie', which is always a conjunction. 
 
 Remark. Ae may be used in the same way tr introduce the 
 sentence upon which a relative clause depends, bee Remark be- 
 fore § 65. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 Relative and Temporal Sentences. 
 
 § 58. 1. Relative sentences may be introduced not 
 only by relative pronouns and pronominal adjectives, 
 but also by relative adverbs of time, place, or manner. 
 They include therefore all temporal clauses, except 
 those introduced by irplv and other particles meaning 
 until, which are treated separately (§ 66 and § 67). 
 
 2. Relative sentences may be divided into two 
 classes : — 
 
 First, those in which the antecedent of the relative is 
 definite ; that is, m which the relative pronouns refer to 
 definite persons or things, and the relative adverbs to 
 definite points of time, place, &c. 
 
122 RELATIVE AND TEMPOHAL SENTENCES. [§ 58, 2 
 
 Secondly, those in which the antecedent is indefinite,, 
 that is, in wliich no such definite persons, thingn, times, 
 or places are referred to. 
 
 Eoth the definite and the indefinite antecedent m.iy 
 be either expressed or understood. E. g. 
 
 (Definite Antecedents). Tavra & ex" °P?^' V" ««« '^**^ things 
 which I have ; or & €}(io opas. "Ore t'/SouXcro ^\6fv, (once) when he 
 tmshsd, he came. 
 
 (Indefinite Antecedents.) Uavra & &v ^niXavrai e^avmu, they 
 will have everything which they may want; or & &v ^oiXmvrai c^ovair, 
 they will have whatever they may want, 'Ore /SouXoito TJpxtTO, wheii- 
 ever he wished, he came. 
 
 3. When the antecedent is indefinite, the negatiye 
 particle of the relative clause is /*'? ; when the ante- 
 cedent is definite, ov is regularly used, unless the general 
 construction requires /i'7, as in prohibitions, wishes, <fec. 
 (See § 59, Note 1.) 
 
 A. Selative with a Definite Antecedent, 
 
 § 59. "When the relative refers to a definite ante- 
 cedent, expressed or understood, it has no effect upon 
 the mood of the following verb ; and it therefore takes 
 the Indicative, unless the general sense of the passage 
 requires some other construction. E. g. 
 
 Atyo) h oiba, Aeyw & TJKovaa, Ae^ta a aKrjKoa. ''EXe^av & tJkov- 
 trav. ndvra Xe'yfi a ■yew^o'erat. IIpdiTiTovinv a ^oiXoprat (or o)t 
 /SoiJXoi/Tai), they are doing what they please. (On the other hand, 
 irpdaaovaiv & av /SovXwi/rai (or as av ^ouXmi/rai,) they always do 
 whatever they please; the antecedent being indefinite.) Aeym ^ ouk 
 ayvoS), 1 am saying that of which 1 am not ignorant. 
 
 'AXX' OTf fin o CK Toio SvuScKanj yevfT r/its, Koi Tore 8^ wpbs 
 OXviiTtov "aav flcoi aliv eovres, H. I, 493. Ti's ectA' o \S>pos brJT, iv 
 eS ^t^riKapLfV. SoPH. O. C. 52. 'Eas ea-rl Kaipos, dvrika^ia-Bt 
 tSjv npayp,dT<M)v, i. e. now, while there is an opportunity, &c. Dem. 01. 
 I, 15, 6. (If the e.xhortation had been general, he might have said 
 tas av 3 Kaip6s, (on all occasions) so long as there is an opportunity, 
 § 62.) 'O be dva$as, las pev ^da-ipa ^v, em tov mnov ^yeV eire) 8e 
 Sfiara §», KaToXiiri)!' t^v timov eanevSe rreQ. Xbx. An. Ill, 4, 49. 
 So 11. I, 193, eas appaive. Oiirep &e koi t<5i» diroPatvovTav to n-Xf'oi> 
 T^s atnas e^opev, oSto» (cm Ka6' rjtrvxiav ti avT&v npotSajuv, wt 
 
S 60, 1.1 DEFINITE ANTECEDENT. 123 
 
 who are to hear t\t greater pari of the hlame, ka. Tnt'C. I, 83. 'Od^v 
 8 ovv parTa fiadtjireiTSe irepi avrav, ivrevBev vfias xai kya> TrpmroK 
 mipaao^mi ii&cKTKeiv. Dem. Apb. I, 814,4. (Here eWfSflfv reiere to 
 a particular point, at which he intends to begin.) Compare the 
 first example under Note 1 . *H 8^ Xoi'yia €py', ore il ix^oSoir^a-cu 
 i(j)^ (re IS "Hprj, or' hv p,' ipiBrjtm oiifiSeiois ijrifcra-iv, surely there will 
 he sad work, when you nhall impel me, &c. II. I, 518. (Here ore refers 
 to some time conceived as definite by the speaker; whereas or' at. 
 ipeSi/a-iv, whenever she shall provoke me, is indefinite, and belongs 
 under § 61, 3.) Nu| 8' etrrai ore drj arvytpos ydpos ai/ri/SoXijo-ct 
 ovXop-evtjs epeBev, T^y t€ Zevs oXjSov dnTjvpa, Od. XVHI, 272. 
 
 Note 1. When the sense requires it, these clauses admit 
 all the constructions allowed in independent sentences. E. g. 
 
 Ap^opai 8* evrevOev odev kol vpeis patrr hv p.d6oiT€ Kay a Ta^Ltri^ 
 av 8ibd$aiiii. Dem. Aph. HI, 846, 15. (Here the relative 
 clause contains an apodosis with av, with a protasis el dp^aipjjv im- 
 plied. This must not be confounded with the use of the Optative 
 without av, in the other class of relative sentences. See § 61, 4.) 
 Nuv 8e Tovro qvk eTToirjo'ev, ev a tov drjpov eriprjaev av, hut he did 
 not do this, in which he would have honored the people (if he had done 
 t(). Id. Mid. 536, 25. Eis KaXov vpXv 'Avutos o8€ irapexaOe^fTO, ^ 
 p,tTabS>p.fv TTjs fi/T^o-fiBs. Plat. Men. 89 E. (Subjunctive in 
 an exhortation.) Oi^Kovv a^iov toIs rav Karrjyopav \6yoLS irKTrcvtrai 
 /idWov ^ TOiff epyots Kal T^ xpovc^, ov vpeis tTa<\>e(TTaTov eKeyypv tov 
 iXriBovs vopicraTe. Lys. de Bon. Arist. p. 157, § 61. (Here the 
 Imperative vopla^are is used in a sort of exclamation after ov, where 
 orifinarily Sci vopi<rai would be used.) *Av yap airo(j)iyj) p.e oSror, o 
 p.JI ye'votTO, Tr)v ina^f\iav o^X^crm. Dem, Apn. I, 834, 25. 
 (Optative in a wish.) *E(rcrfTat rjpap or av ttot oXwXg 'iXios ipTj, 
 a day mil come when sacred Ilium will fall. H. VI, 448. (Here 
 oKoKri av is used like a Future Indicative, § 87, Note ; and the ante- 
 cedent of ore is definite. If av belonged to ore, the clause would be 
 a protasis, meaning when Ilium shall fall, a day will come.) 
 
 Note 2. The relative may be used to express a purpose (§ 65, 1), 
 or in a causal sense (§ 65, 4). The antecedent may then be either 
 definite or indefinite. 
 
 B. Relative with an Indefinite Antecedent. 
 
 § 60. 1, When the relative refers to an indefinite 
 antecedent, expressed or understood, the action of its 
 verb is not stated absolutely as a definite fact, but con- 
 ditionally as a supposed case; and such a relative sen- 
 tence has many of the essential qualities of a conditional 
 sentence. 
 
124 RELATIVE ANU TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 60. 1. 
 
 Thus, when we say & vojxl^d. ravra X/y«, he is saying what he 
 {actually) thinks, or & hdiiiCe rairu. HXcym he was saying what he 
 thought, the actions of TOfiifEt and iw^^C^ are stated as actual 
 facts, occurring at definite times; but when we say a &v vo,iLfy 
 (toCto) Xe'yf', he {always) says whatever he thinks, or & vo,xi^oi 
 {ravra) ^\ey€i>, he {always) said whatever he happened to he think- 
 ing, voiit^r, and voiii^oi do not state any such definite facts, but 
 rather what some one may think (or may have thought) on any 
 occasion on whicl he is (or was) in tlie habit of speaking. So, 
 when we say h i-o^iffi roCra Xe|fi, he will say what he {now) 
 thinks, miiiCei denotes a fact ; but when we say & hv vofiify Xe'^«, 
 he will say whatever he happens to he {then) thinking, pofii^r] 
 denotes merely a case supposed in the future. Again, — to 
 take the case in which the distinction is most liable to be 
 overlooked, — when we say d ovk olSa ovk oXojiai elbkvai, what 
 I do not know, I do not think that I know, ovk ol8a, as before, 
 denotes a simple fact, and its object, a, has a definite antece- 
 dent ; but when Socrates says & iiij olSa oiSe olanat elSevai, the 
 meaning is if there are any things which I do not know, I do 
 r.'H even think that Iknow them. In sentences like this, unless 
 a negative is used {firj being the sign of an indefinite, ov of a 
 definite antecedent), it is often difiicult to decide whether the 
 antecedent is definite or indefinite : thus h olha oXofuu elSivai 
 may mean either what I {actually) know, I think that Iknow, 
 or if there is anything which Iknow, I think that Iknow it. 
 
 The analogy of these indefinite relative clauses to conditional 
 sentences wiU be seen at once. The following examples will 
 make this clearer: — 
 
 "O Ti ^ovXfTai Saa-w, I mil give him whatever he {now) wishes. 
 El T-i /SouXfTQi, Smo-ffl, if he wishes anything, I will give it. (§ 49, 1.) 
 
 'O n efiovXero ebaxa av, I should have given him whatever he haa 
 wished- 'O ri fitj e'-ye'i/ero ovk &v einov, I should not have told what 
 had not happened. E?rie0ouXeTo, eSmita av, if he had wished any- 
 '.king, I should have given it. Ei ri fifj iyevcTo, ovk &v eiirov, if any- 
 thing had not happened, 1 should not have told it. (§ 49, 2.) 
 
 "O Tt (lv /SouXijT-at, Sio-o), I wiU give him whatever he shall wish, 
 'Edv n /3oiiXijT-at, Swaa, if he shall wish anything, I will give it. 
 (§^50,1.) 
 
 "O Ti fiovXoiTo 8oii)» av, I sliotdd give him whatever he migh 
 wish. Et TI. ^oiXoiTo, Soi^v av, if he shotild wis! anything, I shoiUu 
 give it. (§ 50, 2.) 
 
§ 61, 1.] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 123 
 
 'O n &v poi\rjTai SiSiu/ji, / (always) give Mm whatever he wishes. 
 'Otj/SouXoito iHlSovv, I always gave him whatever he wished. "Edt 
 Ti ^oiXr/rai, diSm/^i, if he ever wishes anything, I {alioays) give it. 
 El TL ffovkoiTo, iSlSovv, if he ever wished anything, I {alivays) gave it. 
 (§ 51.) 
 
 2. The relatiTe with an indefinite antecedent may 
 therefore be called the coTiditional relative, and tlia 
 clause in which it stands may be called the protasis 
 (like clauses with ei or eav^, and the antecedent clause 
 may be called the apodosis. 
 
 3. The particle av (Epic ««) is regularly joined with 
 all relative words, when they are followed by the Sub- 
 junctive. The particle here (as always in protasis) is 
 joined to the relative, never to the verb. (See § 38, 1, 
 and § 47, 2.) 
 
 Note. With ore, mroT-e, iwei, and iireiBri, av coalesces, forming 
 oral), oirorav, inav or ijtijv (Ionic ijiedv), and eVf(ddi<. In Homer, 
 where xe is generally used for av, we have ore ke, &c. (like « Kt), 
 where in Attic we have orav, &c. 'Ettijv, however, occurs often in 
 Homer. 
 
 Remark. The classification of common conditional sentences, 
 given in. § 48, applies equally to conditional relative sentences. 
 Tlie distinction between those containing general suppositions 
 (§ 62) and the corresponding forms containing particular supposi- 
 tions (§ 61, 1) is especially important. 
 
 § 61o We have four forms of the conditional rela- 
 tive sentence which correspond to the four forms of 
 ordinary protasis (§ 49, 1, 2, and § 50, 1, 2) : — 
 
 1. When the relative clause refers to a definite act 
 in the present or the past, and no opinion of the speaker 
 is implied as to the truth of the supposition, the verb 
 is put in one of the present or past tenses of the In- 
 dicative. (§ 49, 1.) 
 
 The antecedent clause can have any form allowed in 
 an apodosis (§ 49, 1, Note 1). B. g. 
 
 'a /lij oida, oidi oiojiai elbevai (like et riva jir] otSa). Plat. Apol. 
 
126 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 61, 1 
 
 21 D. (See above, § 60, 1.) Xp^<r0av o ti ^ovXovrai, let litem 
 deal with me as they please (i. e. ei ti ^oiXovrai). Arist. -Nub. 439. 
 'ETriaraiiat opav 6' & 8c i fte, kovx opav & /trj npevfi, I know how to 
 see anything vhich I ought to see, and not to see anything which I ought 
 not. Eur. Ino Fr. 417. ('A hei is nearly equivalent to e'i riva dei, 
 and & fifi irpeiTfi to ft riva fifj npeTTfi.) Toij irXeitrrovs evBaircp irretrov 
 cKaiTTOvs edayjrav- ots 8e prj evpiarKov, KfvoTd(j)iov aiiToU iTTOiria-av, 
 i. e. they raised a cenotaph for any of them whom they diii not find 
 (like eiTivas p.}) evpiaKov). Xen. An. VI, 4, 9. Ti yap; oorir Sajra- 
 VTjpos &v pj) avTaoKns eVtix, dXX' del tSv n'XiJO'ioi' SeiTaj, Kai\ap- 
 (Sdvui/ pfj SvvaTai cmoSiSovai, pf) \apfidvtov 8c rbv pfj StSovra piafl, 
 ov SoKsl a-oi KOL ovTos x«'^E'''o» ipiXos dvai ; (i. e. supposing a case, d 
 ns . , . . p^ avTapKris eariv, K. r. X.). Id. Mem. II, 6, 2. So ijTis 
 prjSapov ^vppaxei, Thuc. I, 35. 'A ns pf) irpoa-fSoKjja-fv, 
 oiiSe cj)v\d§aa-dai iyxiopet, there is no opportunity to guard against 
 what we did not expect (like cl' nva p^ wpoaeSoKrja-i t«)- Antiphon. 
 p. 131, 36. § 19. Eij Ta rrXoIa tow re dadevovvTas cMjSijSairai' nu 
 Twv (TKevwv oaa prj dvdyKTj ^ v c^etw (like ci Tiva tojv axevav pri dvdyicq 
 rjv exfiv), i. e. any of it which they did not need. Xex. An. V, 3, 1. 
 Avdpavnvs SUffydeipfv (ij 6d\a(r(Ta) oiroi pi] eSivavTO <p6^vai trpos 
 to pereiopa dvaSpapovTfs, i. e. if any were unable to escape soon enough 
 to the high land, so many the sea destroyed. Thuc. Ill, 89. Ois pev 
 aipea-is yeyivrfrai rnXXa evrvxovtn, ttoXX^ 'ivoia iroXc^i^a'ai ■ ei S 
 avayKoXov ^v, K.r.\.,for any who have had the choice given them, while 
 they are prosperous in other respects, it is great folly to go to war (L e. 
 cl Ticnv aipe<ns yeyevr]Tai). Tliuc. II, 61. HdvTfs 'urptv Xafiplav 
 ovre TVTTTOvTa ov$* dpird^ovTa tov aT^<j>avou ovS^ o)«os npofTi6v6* ottoi 
 pfi irpoariKev airm, nor going anyiohere at all where it was not laio- 
 fulfor hiin(i. e.einoi pfjTTpoo-riKfv). DuM. Mid. 536, 15. UStsovvol 
 dyadoi Tois dyaOois (f)i\oi ea-ovrai, oJ prjTf dirovTfS iroBfivoX dXXijXais 
 prjre jrapovTcs xpdav avrSiv exo""'' ; (i- e. ci /iij . . . c;(0U(rt). Plat. 
 Lys. 215 J3. NiKcp't; S' o Ti irdcnv vpiv fxc'XXci truvoiaav (i. e. cc « 
 ucXXci), may any plan prevail which will benefit you all. Dem. PhiL 
 1, 56. 7. So Soph. Ant. 375, 6i rdS' cpSct. 
 
 Note. Care must be taken here (as in conditional sentences, 
 §49, 1, Note 2), not to include under tliis* cliiss the genera/ suppo- 
 sitions of § 62, which require the Subjunctive or Optative. On the 
 other hand, the examples falling uniler § 62, Note 1, in which the 
 Indicative is allowed, might properly be placed here, as they state a 
 
 feneral supposition for emphasis as if it were a particular one (§ 5' 
 Tote 3). See also § 61, 3, Note. 
 
 2. When a relative clause, referring to the present or 
 the past, implies that the condition which it expresses 
 ig not or was not fulfilled (like a pi-otasis of the form 
 § 49, 2), its verb is put Li a secondary tense of the In 
 dicative. 
 
$ 61, 3.] CONDITIONAL KELATIVB SENTENCES. 127 
 
 The ancecedent clause also contains a secondary teuse 
 of the Indicative, implying the non-fulfilment of a con- 
 dition, which may be in an apodosis with av or a pro- 
 tasis (§ 49, 2), or in an expression of a wish (§ 83). 
 E.g. 
 
 *A }i.r] e^oiXero Sovvai, ovk h> (ScoKfv, he would not have given 
 what he had not rmshed to give (i. e. e'l riva /tfi e^ovXero dovvai, ovk hi 
 cdtBAcei'). * OvT€ yap av aiiTot €7r€)(€tpov^fV irpaTTCLv h fir] fiTriaTa- 
 fit 6a, ovTe Tols flWots eTreTpfirofiev, S>v ^p^ofiev, aXXo n npaTTeiv 5 
 *» Tt TrpaTTOvres op6ojs e^fXXov irpd^eLv* tovto 6* ^v &v, ov iirtoTrj' 
 jii/n eixov, for (if that were so) we should not be undertaking (as we 
 are) to do things which we did not understand, nor slwuld we permit 
 any others whom we were ruling to do anything else than what they 
 were likely to do properly ; and this would be whatever they had knowl- 
 edge of. Plat. Charm. 171 E. (Here a prj rjmo-TdfieOa = tt nva 
 firi rfmaTap.e6a, if there were any things which we did not know, — &v 
 ^pXO/iev = el Tivwv rjpx^Ofiev. — on efieWov = « n fjieWov, — and o5 
 fwiijTt]p.riv etj^ov ^ el Tivos el)(ov. It is implied that none of the cases 
 here supposed ever actually arose, as the whole passage refers to an 
 unfulfilled condition expressed in the preceding sentence.) Ej hi 
 oIkoi eZ^oi/ eKaaTOL rai bixas, Toirovt av airaWvaav olnves (jj'tkoi /laiKi- 
 crra rjaav 'A6i]vaia>v ra Sr//x&j, if each had their trials at home, they 
 yjould ruin any who were especially friendly, &c. Xen. Rep. Athen. 
 1, 16. (Here oirives rj(Tav, = el rives r/aav, forms a second protasis to 
 the apodosis airaXKvfrav av. See § 55, 1.) 
 
 E( ^evos eTvy\avov av, ^vveyiyvataKere drjirov av juot, el ev exelinf rrf 
 ^avjj re km ra rpoira eXeyov ev olanep ereO pa.p.pr)V, if I happened 
 to be a foreigner, you would surely pardon me, if I viere (now) address- 
 ing you in both the language and the manner in which I had been 
 brought up. Plat. Apol. 17 D. 'Or hi] eymy o(j)e\ov iidxapos vv rev 
 fltiuvai vlos avepos, ov KTedreao'CV eois eiri yrjpas eTfT/ieu, that I 
 were the son of some fortunate man, whom old age had found upon his 
 own estate (i. e. if old age had found any such man, would that I had 
 been his son). Od. I, 217. 
 
 So when the relative sentence depends on an indicative in a final 
 clause (§ 44, 3) ; as in Dem. Arist. 635, 15 : ravra ye drjirov irpoaijue 
 ypa-^ai, Iva 6t(0 irore rovpyov eirpdx^Orj, TOVTto raeKTOiv vo^uav VTTTJp^e 
 biKoia, he ought to have written it in this way, in order that any one by 
 whom the deed had been done might have his rights according to the 
 laws. (This implies that the law was not so written, so that the 
 case supposed in orm eirpaxOrj never arose.) 
 
 Kemark. All examples of this form fall equally well under the 
 general rule for assimilation, § 64, 2. 
 
 3. When the relative clause refers distinctly and viv- 
 idly to the future (like a protasis of the form § 50, 1), 
 
128 EELATITE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 61, 3. 
 
 and the verb of the antecedent clause also refers to 
 tlie future, the relative is joined with av (or ««) and 
 followed by the Subjunctive. E. g. 
 
 Tdav fjv K eSe\a>ni. ^'CKriv 7toif)<TOji aKomv Qlke el Ke Tiva i6t- 
 "Kaiit), whomsoever of these I may wish I shall make my wife. H. IX, 
 397. 'Ek yap 'Opiarao niris eaaeTm 'ArpeiSao, cmiroT &v f)^rj<rri re 
 KOI Tjs ififiperai ai'j/s, i. e. vengeance will come from Orestes, when 
 he shall grow up, &c. (lie eav woTt fj^fia-ri). Od. I, 40. Tote 8' avrt 
 IJiaxptTfTm, oirnore Kev fiiv dvfxos iv\ arijOeaiTiv avayi] Koi Oeos op(rt). 
 II. IX, 702. 'AXX- ayeS', ms Hv eyav f'lnto, jreiBaiada ■names, let U3 
 obey as I may direct, i. e. if I give any direction (fdv iras «7ro)), let us 
 obey it. D. II, 139. 'Hpe'ts avr oKoxovs tc (fiiXas koi y^jria rcKva 
 a^opev iv vijecrtriv, eirf/v nToKiedpov e\a>p,ev, when we shall have taken 
 the city. II. IV. 238. So evr hv nitrTOxriv, II. I, 242. OiiKovv, orav 
 8f) lifj aBiva, Tteirava-opjii, therefore, when I shall have no more 
 strength, 1 will cease. Soph. Ant. 91. Taura, i-neidav irepi roi yevovs 
 etTTs), epS>, I will speak of this, when I shall have spoken about my 
 birth. Dem. Eubul. 1303, 25. (See § 20, Note 1.) 'ETrfiSaw bia- 
 7r pd^afiai 5 deo^at, tj^co. Xen. An. II, 3, 29. Tiva oUaBe avrrjif 
 yj/v^fjv e^SLV, orav ip.e idrj rwv Trarpaaiv di7€<yTepr]p,tvov ; what feelings 
 do you think she will have, when (or if at any time) she shall see me, 
 &C.? Dkm. Apll. II, 842, 16. Toirav he 'ABrivaiovs (prifju de'iv elvai 
 TrevraKotTLovs, 6^y]S av Tivos vplv fjXtKias KoKas e\eLv hoKji^from whatever 
 age it shall seem good to you to take them (i. e. if from any particular 
 age, &c.) Id. Phil. I, 45, 27. Tmv Trpayparav roiis ^auXevop-evovs 
 (j}yei(Tdat Set), Iva ^ &v eKeivots boKjj ravra irpaTTrjTaL, in order that 
 whatever shall seem good to them shall be done. lb. 51, 19. OS ;ioi 
 (pofiov fieXaBpov e\it\s e'pjTaTelv, eios &v aiBrj wvp e(j>' earlas efi^s Aiyt- 
 a-Sos, so long as he shall kindle fire, &c. Aesch. Agam. 1435. 
 
 Note. The Future Indicative is rarely, if ever, used in condi- 
 tional relative clauses, as in common protasis (§ 50, 1, Note 1), in 
 the place of the Subjunctive ; as it would generally be ambiguous, 
 appearing as if the antecedent were definite. "Oo-ot ^ovX^iros-T-at, 
 Thuc. I, 22, is perhaps to be explained in this way. See Xen. 
 Cyr. I, 5, 13. In such examples as ^ pfj ns airos rrap^crai, un- 
 less he was to be present himself, the Future is used as it is in the 
 form of protasis explained § 49, 1, N. 3. 
 
 4. Wlien the relative clause refers to the future less 
 distinctly and vividly (like a protasis of the form § 50, 
 2), and the antecedent clause contains an Optative re- 
 ferring to the future, the relative is followed by the 
 Optative (without av"). 
 
 The Optative in the antecedent clause may be in an 
 
fl 
 
 § 62.] GENEBAL SUPPOSITIONS. 129 
 
 apodosis with av or a protasis (§ 50, 2), in an expres- 
 sion of a wish (§ 82), or in a final clause. E. g. 
 
 MaXa Kfi» dpaa-UKap8ws f'r), os Tore yr)6{j(T€iev lb!bv novov ov& 
 Akuxoito (i. e. ei ris yijfl^o-fie, fioKa Kev dpatrvKdpdws etrj), any one 
 who should then rejoice toould be very stout-hearted. 11. XIII, 343 
 So II. VI, 329 and 521 ; XIV, 247 : Akist. Nub. 1250. Ov/c tiv oii, 
 6p4-^aLS avdpa^ otrrts cOeXoi re Kal bvvairo (tov drrepiiKeiv rovs 
 eirixeipovvras dSiKelv <Te ; would you not support any man who shoula 
 he both willing and able, &c. ? Xen. Mem. 11, 9, 2. Tleivau <\>dyoi av 
 oirore |3 o u X o t r o , when he is hungry, he would eat whenever he might 
 tdsh (like d nore /Sou'Xoito). lb. 11, 1, 18. So Mem. I, 5, 4 ; 1, 7, 
 3 ; IV, 2, 20. Ilwff ovv av el^elrjs Trepl rovrov rov irpdyfiarosi ov irav- 
 rdiraaiv aireipoi f iijr ; how then could you knovi about that thing of 
 which you had no experience at all? Plat. Men. 92 C. *Ap' &v 
 ij'yoto ravra tra aval, a aoi i^eir) kolX dvoboaSai Koi Sovvai Ka\ dv(rai 
 ora /SouXoio deSiv; Id. Eiithyd. 302 A. Ti av iradelv {Svvairo), o 
 fi^ Kal v<l) avTov ndSoi; what could he suffer, unless he should suffer 
 it also from himself? (i. e. « /i;) ivdBoi). Plat. Lys. 214 E. 'o he 
 IT] dyanaTj, oiS* av <^(Xot (i. e, e'l rt )Lit) dyairtorj, ou3' av (jiiXol rovro), 
 b. 215 B. "Offft) Se npea-^vrepos yiyvoiro, pdWov del daird^oiro 
 hv {xphf'ara), the older he should grow, the more he would always cling 
 to it (i, e. ft rt wpeo-^vrepos yiyvoiro, rotroi poKXov darrd^oiro av). 
 Plat. Rep. VIII, 549 B. So III, 412 D ;' VIII, 557 B. ^fjaofifv 
 firjdeTTore firjhev hv p.ei^ov firjde eXarrov yevetrBai, ea>9 laov eirj avTo 
 eavra, so long as it should remain equal to itself. Plat. Theaet. 
 155 A. So /SouXot/ii/K Ke, . . . m juj e'irj, Od. XI, 489. 
 
 Et de jSovXoto rS)V (piXtav riva nporpeyj/ao-dai OTTore dTToBrjpoirjs 
 eiripeXela'dai raa/ amf, ri av jroioirjs ; Xen. Mem. II, 3,12. 'Eikotios 
 av KOI irapa Becov TrpaKTiKarepos eiij, oans p.ri OTrdre ev aTTOpots e'lrj rare 
 KoXaKevoi, dXX' ore ra apitrra tt parrot rdre paXtara rav Beav 
 fiep-v^ro. Id. Cyr. I, 6, 3, 'Qs diroXoiro Kal aXXos, o ris rotaiird 
 ye pe'^oi, that any other man might likewise perish who should do 
 the like (i. e. et ris roiaCra pe^oi). Od. I, 47, ^Kyi^vaaKe 8e1v roitv 
 iwriperas rovro dcKciv, i)S ndvra vopi^oiev irpeireiv airols irpdrreiv otj-a 
 6 ap)^aiv TV pofTrdrroL. Xen. Cyr. U, I, 31. 
 
 Kemark. AU these examples fall also under the general rule for 
 assimilation, § 64, 1. 
 
 § 69. A conditional relative sentence (like a pro- 
 tasis, § 51) may express a general supposition. This 
 happens when the verb of the antecedent clause denotes 
 a customary or repeated action or a general truth, whila 
 the relative clause refers indefinitely to any one of a 
 series or class of acts, and not to a definite act or a 
 definite series of acts. 
 
130 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 62. 
 
 Here the Subjunctive with 09 av, orav, &c. is used 
 after primary tfenses, and the Optative (without av) 
 after secondary tenses. E. g. 
 
 'K^Splis yap fiot Kfivos o/ias 'AtSao irvKriiTiv, or x' trtpov pev Kfvdji 
 ivi (fipetrlv, aWo 8c f'lTijjfor that man (i. e. any man) is hated by me 
 like the very gales of Hades, who conceals one thing in his mind and 
 speaks another. II. IX, 312. tiepfirampai ye pcv ol/Siv KKaletv or « 
 Bavjiai fiporav xai iroTpov ivianri, I am never at all indignant at 
 weeping for any mortal who may die, &c. Od. IV, 1 95. Km yap avp- 
 fiaj(€'iv TovTots edeXovaiv dnavres, ovs hv opaxri Trape<rKeva(Tpevovs, for 
 all men ere (^always) willing to be allies to those whom they see prepared. 
 Dkm. Phil. I, 42, 1. Kaiirfp rav avOpamav, iv a jiev av iroXcptixTi, 
 Tov irapovra (jroKepov) ae\ piyifTTov Kpivovroiv, although men always 
 consider the present war the greatest, so long as they are engaged in it. 
 ThuC, I, 21. Hopevovrai re yap ai ayeXai 3 &v avras ei dvvtoaiv ol 
 vopcls, vifiovTai re )(oipLa c^* OTToia av avras i<pt.w(Ttv , aire-xpvTai le 
 iiv hv avras ajreLpyaxTt' Ka\ rols Kaprrois eatri Toi/s vopeas xP^a-6ai 
 OVTOJS OTTcoff &v avToi ^ov\tiiVT at' avdpamoi 6e eV* ovdevas paWov 
 avvL(rTavTai 7) en\ tovtovs ovs &v a't(rda>VTai ap)(€iv avT»v i-nix^tpovv' 
 Tcs. Xen. Cjt. I, 1, 2. Nojuifo) npoirraTov epyov ftrai dlov 8ft, oj 
 &v op&v Tovs <j>iKovs e^anaTwiievovs pfj einTpeirr], i. e. siich as one ought 
 always to be, who, &c. Id. Hell. II, 3, 51. KaTa(j>p6vri{ns Se Qyyl- 
 yverai), ts hv Koi yvaprj irttrrevrj tcw evavriav irpoe^eLV, ripiv inrdp- 
 Xft- Thuc. II, 62. (Here the o refers to aE that precedes, as a 
 definite antecedent.) 
 
 Ov jiev yap pel^ov xXios avtpos, ofjypa k' eiftTiv, ^ o r* irotraiv Tt 
 pe^H KOI x.^piTiv. Od. VIU, 147. {"Oippa k enmv, so long as he 
 lives.) (Qcovs) Traparpoiiroja-* B.v8pamoi Xiaaop^voi, ore ksv tis vTrtp- 
 /31717 KOi dpapT-g. H. IX, 500. "Hpjcni yap T apcTTjS aitoaiwrat 
 evpvoTra Zeus dvepos, €vr av plv Kara dovXiov r/pap e\rjiTiv, Od. 
 XVII, 322. ^CKiei 8e (cmr irpoirrjfuiivfiv, €vt' av fieXXij pfya\a koku 
 ^ wdXi 7] eOvet ecrea$aL. Hdt. VI, 27. $evyouat yap Toi ^ot OpaiTfis, 
 orav TTcXac rjdrj tov 'AiSr/v fl<TopS>iTi Toi /3iov. SoPH. Ant. 580. 
 'HkiV &v 8' oiKoi yevavTai, Spaa-iv ovK dvatrxera. Arist. Pac. 
 1179. ETTEiSai' 8e i] ixcjiopa ^, Xapvaxas ayovinv apa^ai. . ThuC 
 H, 34. 'Kireidav 8c xpi^ao'i y^, dvfjp rjpijpevos vno Tijs jroXoor, 
 8s &v yvapy re 8ok^ pr) d^vveros fIvaL, Xc'yet cV airoXs eiraivov tod 
 irpinovTa. Ibid. 'Ems av aai^rjTai to (TKd(f)os, Tore xph TrpoOipovt 
 (ivaf iireiSav 8e rj 6d\aTTa vwf paxn , pdrmos r; (nrovSn. DeM. 
 Phil III, 128, 22. So ccrr' &v Sii(raaiv, Xkn. Mem. HI, 5, 6. 
 
 Oil nva yap rlea-KOV ijnxBovimv dv6pinra>v, av xaKOV oiSc pev eaSXbv, 
 3 Ws (T<pcas fio-a(f)iKoiTo, i. e. they were never in the habit of honor- 
 ing any one who came to them. Od. XXII, 414. Kai ofis pev iSo* 
 fVTaKTas (cai auovjj iovras, irpoaeXavvaiv auTois nves Tf eUv vjpaTa, Koi 
 cjTci irvdoiTo iiirjvd. Xen. Cyr. V, 3. 55. (Here ^piro and cVji/ci 
 denote the habit of Cyras.) Ka\ to'is pev 'Aflijrai'uis i)C|cro to vavriKon 
 an-6 Tys bairdvtjs ^v iKflvoi. iv pipe pole v, airoi 8c, Sirdre diroa-Ta'iev, 
 dnapaaKevai xai airetpot cs rbv woXtpov Kadiaravro, and the Athenian 
 
62.] CONDITIONA.I, RELATIVE SENTENCES. 131 
 
 navy continued to increase from the money which these contributed, and 
 they, whenever they revolted, always found themselves unprepared and 
 i'lexperienced for war. TiiDC. I, 99. 
 
 *E7rt Motpioff jSatrtXeoff, okcos e\6ot 6 Tforafios iii okto} irrj^eas, 
 apSeo-Kf Aiyunr^v rfiv evcpBe Mt'/iC^ios, i. e. tohenever the river rose. 
 Hot. II, 13. T^v 5e yovv rov €K<l)Qpe6iievov, okws yivoiro vi/^t e? 
 Tov Tiypit i^e<{)6peov, i. e. they carried it away every night. Id. II. 
 150. Ot fit (Kapes), oKwf Mivcas deoiro, inXripovv oi ras veas. Id. 
 I, 171. *E7r6i6^ de dvoL^Be Irj , ela-^eifieu napa rov ^oKparr], i. e, 
 each morning, when the prison was opened, &c. Plat. Phaed. 59 D. 
 Ore e^a rov SctvoO yevoivro, TroXXot avTov aireKemov, many (ahvays^ 
 left Mm, when they were out of danger. Xen. An. II, 6, 12. (If 
 iyivovro had been used, the whole sentence would refer to a particu- 
 lar case in which many left him.) 
 
 Remark. The gnomic Aorist, and the other gnomic and 
 iterative tenses of § 30, can be used in the antecedent clause of 
 these general propositions. The gnomic Aorist, as usual, is a 
 primary tense. (See § 32, 2.) E. g. 
 
 "Os K€ Beois €7r tTT el Brjrai, p.d\a r ckXvov avTov, whoever obeys 
 the Gods, to him they are ready to listen. II. I, 218. 'Orav ns aarrep 
 oirros I (T XV fT ji , fj Trparrj •jrpocpaa'is awavra dvej^aiTKre Kai die\v~ 
 trcv. Dem. 01. II, 20, 27. 'Ottotc Trpocr/SXe'i^ete nvas 7"mv eV rais 
 Ta^eai, elwev av, a avSpes, k.t.\., i. e. he used to say, &c. Xen. 
 Cyr. VII, 1, 10. (See § 30, 2.) OiV SXKore Trmworc -npos x^P'" 
 eik6p.j]v Xeyetv, o Ti av pr] Kal trvvoiaeLv Treneio-pevos at, I have never on 
 other occasions preferred to say anything in order to please, unless I 
 have been convinced that it would also be for your advantage. Dem. 
 Phil. I, 54, 27. (Here fiXo/iijx is used in a sense approaching that 
 of the gnomic Aorist, so as to be followed by a Suigunctive. Sea 
 
 § 30, i,Tsr. 1.) 
 
 Note 1. The Indicative is sometimes used instead of the 
 Subjunctive and Optative in relative sentences of this class. 
 (See § 51, N. 3.) Here the speaker refers to one of the cases 
 in which the event in question is liable to occur, as if it were 
 the only case, instead of referring indefinitely to all possible 
 cases alike (as when the Subjunctive or Optative is used). 
 This use of the Indicative occurs especially after the indefinite 
 relative oo-nr ; as the idea of indefiniteness, which is usually 
 expressed by the Subjunctive or Optative, is here sufficiently 
 expressed by the relative itself. E. g. 
 
 *'Ej(dp6s yap pot Ketvos opas 'AtSao TrvXrjo'iv 
 TiyvfTai, 6s nevltj e'lKav dirarriXia (3aff i. Od. XIV, 156. 
 Compare this with the first example (H. IX, 312) under § 6? 
 
132 EELATIVE AND TEMPOBAL SENTENCES. [§ 62 
 
 'E/iOi yap otTTis 7ra(Tav evBivatv noKtv 
 
 Mr] Ttav dpitTTOiv anrerat ^vKevixdrtaVf 
 
 *AXX* eK cpoliov Tov y\o)(T(rav eyKXetffas e^cij 
 
 KaKLfTTOs eivat viv re Koi Trakai doKel ' 
 
 Kai fiei^ov* ocrns dvTi ttjs avTov irdrpas 
 
 ^lAov vo/iifet, TOVTov ovdafiov }i.tyai. SoPH. Ant. 178. 
 
 (Here we might have had os av . . . . fifi aitTrjTai, dX\' .... ?X3' *'*" 
 is hv voixi^T], without any essential difference in meaning.) 
 
 Olrivfs TfpQs ras ^vp<j>opas yvaprj fX6v iJKiaTa Xvirovvrai, fpy^ oe 
 fidXiuTa dvTex°V(Tiv, ovtoi koi ii6Xea>v kol l&iaTair KpaTtcTToi cktiv. 
 Thuc. II, 64, So in the same chapter, oorts Xap^dvet. 'EOajrrov 
 TOV avTov TpoTTov (modovs f7rf\dpj3av€v ^ arparia^ theif con- 
 tinued to Imry in the same way as many as the amvy took tip. Xen. 
 An. VI, 5, 6. (Here fmXap^dvoi might have been i»ed.) "Oaris 
 d' d(l>tKveiTo raiv Traph ^airiXifOS Trpos avrovi jravras oTreTTf /AffCTO. 
 lb. I, 1, 5. "^Oirov de ;^iX6j tTTrdvtos irdw etrj, aiiTOS 8' ebvuaro irapar 
 tTKevdcrnadai^ dtairepTroiv exeXcvc Toits (jtikovs tTrnois ep^dWeip TmJTOv. 
 lb. I, 9, 27. (In the last two examples there is some Ms. authority 
 for the more regular d(f>iKvolTo and Wi/an-o.) See also An. I, 9, 13. 
 
 All these examples fall under the first class of conditional relative 
 sentences, § 61, 1. So in common protasis, § 51, N. 3. 
 
 Note 2. The Greek generally uses the Indicative in relative 
 clauses depending on general negative sentences, where in Latin a 
 Subjunctive is more common. E. g. 
 
 Ila^ ffjLOi §€ ouSelr p,L(rdocj)opel, o(rTis prj 'iKavos itrriv ta-a irovfiv ipoii 
 i e. no one who is hot able (no one unless he is able), nemo qui non 
 p^ssit. Xen. Hell. VI, 1. 5. These sentences are regular protases, 
 and belong under the rule of § 61, 1. (See Note 1.) 
 
 Note 3. (a.) In Homer, similes and comparisons are often 
 expressed by the Subjunctive after ins, &s re, ins ore, i>s or 
 (seldom, &s av, &c.), where we should expect the Present In- 
 dicative, which sometimes occurs. Besides the singular use oi 
 the Subjunctive in these expressions, the omission of & or «' is 
 especially to be noticed. (See § 63, 1.) E. g. 
 
 fis 8c yvvi) xXairia-i ^iXov notnv dp<pi7rfO'0v(ra, 
 Off re iris TTpotrdev ttoXlos Xh^v T€ iretTTjaiv, 
 Sis Odv(Tevs eXeeivov utt* otppvai daKpvov tl^fv, 
 Ulysses wept as a wife weeps, &c. Od. VIH, 523-531. 
 flff 8 or' OTTatpLvos Boperjs <f>op€ ijatv oKavdas 
 Ap TTfSioi/, TTUKii'ai de rrpbs dXXriXritnv e)(ovTai, 
 'fir TfjV &p ireXayof avepot <\>epov tv6a koX fv6a. Od. V, 828. 
 Off 8 or' &.V dfTTpditTri 'iT6ins''Hpr)s riVKopoio, .... 
 Qr TTUKiV fv (TTrjOeaiTiv difeorei/dxif 'Ayapcpvutv. H. X, 5-9. 
 Ol , &f t' dfirjT^pfS (vaDTioi aXXrjXoiaiv Sy/iov cXavvcDo-iv, ml 
 
§ 63, 2.] CONDITIONAL EELATrVE SENTENCES. 133 
 
 TpSfE Koi 'Axaioi tV aXX^Xoi<ri Bopovres Srjovv. H. XI, 67—71. Sea 
 idsoll. Xn, 167-iri 
 
 (b.) In many cases the Subjunctive or the Present Indica- 
 tive is followed by the gnomic Aorist in the same simile, the 
 Aorist being merely a more vivid form of expression than the 
 others. (See § 30, 1, Notes 2 and 3.) E. g. 
 
 'Qs b 0T€ Karrvos l^v els ovpavhv evpiiv Iktjtui 
 *AoT60s aiOop-evota-i Beciiv Se e fx^vis dvTJKev^ 
 
 TIa(Tt fl* edrjKe Trovov, r oWoiai 8e Krjde* e<prJK€v, 
 
 'Qi 'A^iXfiij Tpufcriri ttovov koi k^8e' eOrjKfv. H. XXI, 522. 
 
 'O 6* eV Kovirjat ^afiai TreVei', aiyetpos as, 
 *H pa T €v emjLiev^ eXfoff p-eyaXoLO jre^vKif 
 lieirj^ aTap t€ ol o^ot eir aKpoTarrj it e^vairiv 
 Ty}v pev ff dpparoTTTjyos dvqp aWiovL tndrjpa 
 'E^e'ra/i*, o(l)pa itvv Kapylrrj irepLKaWei ditppa' 
 *H pev T d^opevtj Kclrat woTapoio nap o)(6as ' 
 Tolov ap 'Av6efil87]if "Zipo^'urtov e^ivdpi^ev 
 Ai'of SioyfjTjr. H. IV, 482. 
 
 § 63. 1. (a.) In Homer, the relatives (like ti) often take 
 the Subjunctive without av or «', the sense being apparently the 
 Bame as when 3v is used. (§ 50, 1, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 'Otti pa>C ov ijjvaios, os ddavdroia-i ^a^'?'''". H- Vj 407. 
 'AvOpatnovs f<j>opa, Koi TiVuTot os ns dpaprrj . Od. XHI, 214. 
 Zei/s S' avTos vepei ok^ov *OXujLi7rtos avSpcanoKTiVj 
 'Eff^Xois ^8e KaKOLdtv, ojt<os e BeXrjatv, cKatrro). Od. "VT, 188. 
 Ov pfjv (rot TTOTc L(Tov t\(o ycpoff, oTTTTor* 'A;^atOi 
 Tpaav e KTre pa-axr' evvaiopevov irroXUdpov. H. I, 1^3. 
 Ou pev yap TTore <j)rj(ri xaKov Treia-eaSai OTTt'o'tro), 
 0(j>p^ dperrjv Trapej^axrt Oeoi Kal yovvar oputprj-, 
 SO long as the Gods shall supply valor, &c. Od. XVIII. 132. 
 
 (J.) The same omission of &v is not uncommon in the Attic 
 poets ; and even in prose a few exceptional cases occur, if we 
 follow the Mss. (§ 50, 1, N. 3). E. g. 
 
 Tepovra 8' opBovv <j>kavpov, os vios iritrrj. SoPH. O. C. 895. 'T&r 
 Se nripovwv p.a\ia-Ta Xviroio'' at cjyavSxr' aiOaiptTOL. Id. O. T. 1231. 
 Toto-t yap prjre aorea pTjre Tei\ea jj eKTitrpeva, .... kSjs ovk av tLrjrrav 
 ovToi apaxoi.; Hdt. IV, 46. (See § 63, 4, a.) 'ETnxaiptoy hv fipiy 
 ot pkv Ppaxe'is dpKatri pfj noWo'ts xP^^^ai, it being our national habit 
 not to use many words where few suffice. Thuc. IV, ] 7. (Yet the 
 sentence continues, irXcioari Si iv a av Kaipos s, k-t-X.) See §96,4, N. 
 
 2. The adverb av is sometimes used with the Optative or 
 Indicative in conditional relative clauses, when the relative 
 
134 EELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ (53, 2 
 
 clauae is itself an apodosis, with a protasis expressed or im- 
 plied. In Homer xe with the Optative sometimes occurs where 
 there is no apodosis, as in common protasis. (See § 50, 2, 
 N. 2,a,J.) E.g. 
 
 'E^ S>v av rtr tv Xeyav hia^aWoi, in rovrav avreis itela-fadm 
 (eipri), he said that they would form their opinion upon any slanders 
 which any good speaker might {if he pleased) chance to utter. Thuc. 
 Vn, 48. But in Od. II, 54, as Ke . . . . Soir] a k i64\oi, that he 
 might give her to any one he pleased, ^ k iOeXoi does not differ from 
 the ordinary <5 edtXoi^el nvi i6e\oi. In Dbm. Phil. I, 41, 3, olov 
 &v ^ov\oia-de is merely a conjectural emendation for olov Si» /3o«- 
 Xi/o-flf, which is a regular example illustrating § 62. "Ovriv an 
 vfifls els TavTrjv rrju ra^iv KaT€(rTT]<raT6, ovtos t&v latov airios rjv &v 
 Kaxav oamvnep Kai ovtos, any one soever whom you might have, ap- 
 pointed (if you had chosen) to this post would have been the cause of 
 as great calamities as this man has been. Dem. F. L. 350, 3. (With- 
 out the av after ovnva, this would havj been a regular example 
 under § 61, 2, SvTtva KaTctrrija-aTe being equivalent to el nva a\\ov 
 KaTfaTTjo-aTf, if you had appointed any one else (which you did not do). 
 With the av, it is itself an apodosis with a suppressed protasis; un- 
 less we can suppose that the av was used, hke « in the Homeric ex- 
 ample, without affecting the sense. See § 49, 2, N. 4.) 
 
 3. A conditional relative clause, lilse a common protasis, 
 may depend upon an Infinitive or Participle (with or without 
 av), or upon a final clause. See the last three examples under 
 § 61, 3. (Compare § 53 ; § 55, 2.) 
 
 4. The conditional relative clause may have a form different 
 from that of its apodosis. This happens under the same cir- 
 cumstances as in common protasis. (See § 54.) 
 
 (a.) An Indicative or Subjunctive in the relative clause may de- 
 pend upon an Optative with av in the apodosis, either when the 
 expressed apodosis belongs to an implied protasis (§ 54, 1, a), or 
 when the Optative with av is considered a primary tense, from its 
 resemblance in sense to the Future Indicative (54, 1, 6). See also 
 §34,1,6. E.g. 
 
 OvKOVV Kai TO vytalveiv koX tA votrelv, oTav aya6ov Ttvos aiTia yl- 
 yvr)Tai, dyaBa &v ft'ij, i. e. when they prove to be the causes of any good, 
 they would be good things (if we should accept your doctrine). Xkn. 
 iVIem. IV, 2. 32. So Mem. 11, 2, 3; and Plat. Pep. II, 379 B. 
 'Eym Sc ravTriy fiev t^w tlprjvrjv, eas av tls 'Adrivaimv Xf I'TTijrai, ouSe- 
 TTOT S)/'(ru^/3ouXeu<rai/m noirjaaaOai. TJ TrdXfi, / would never advise the 
 city to make this peace, so long as a single Athenian shall be left. Dem. 
 F. L, 345, 14. (Here etas Xe(7rotTo, SO long as one should be left, 
 would be more regular.) So Arist. Nub. 1151 ; Soph. El. 697. 
 
§ 64, 1."] CONDITIONAL KELATIVE SENTENCES. 135 
 
 (J.) The Optative (without av) in the relative clause occasionally 
 depends upon a.pnmary tense in the apodosis. This may arise from 
 the slight distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in such 
 sentences (§ 54,. 2, a) ; as in II. XIIl, 31 7, almi oi icra-e'iTm v^as cvi- 
 vptjaai, ore firi avTOS ye Kpoviav e/X;3aXoi aWoncvov boKbv vfifcrai, it will 
 be a hard task far him, unless the son of Kronos should hurl, &c. 
 (More regularly, ore /ce ft^ ifi^aXji , unless lie shall hurl, &c.) 
 
 The Optative in the llelative clause sometimes depends on a 
 verb of necessity, obligation, prupriety, possibility, &c. with an Iniini- 
 tive, the two forming an expression that is nearly equivalent in sense 
 to an Optative with av, which would be expected in their place 
 (§54,2,6). E.g. 
 
 'AXX' ov TToXis irTj]tTcit, ToCSe -j^pri kKviiv, we should obey any one 
 whom the state appoints {if the stale should appoint any one, we ought 
 to obey him}. Soph. Ant. 666. (Xpfj xXieiv is followed by the 
 Optative from its resemblance in sense to Stxaitas av kKvoi tis.) 
 AXXa Tov fiev avTov Xe-yetv a firf aa(pa)s eideir] (jieldeo'dai Set, i, e. we 
 ought to abstain, &c. ; like (jieiboiro civ tis. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 19. Ofis 
 6e TTOiTjaatrOat t(S ^ovXoiro trvvepyoiis irpodviiovs, rourov* r-avTciiratriv 
 ejuotye do/fei dyadols drjpaTeov eivai. lb. II, 4. 10. (Here d7)paT€ov 
 eivai = Orjpav fie ti/.) 'Y-nepopav ov Bwarov vp-av dvdpl off eideirj Kupiovs 
 ovTas o TL ^ovXetrOe aitra ^pqo'SaL. Id. Hell. VII, 3, 7. 
 
 5. The Indicative is generally used in Greek (as in Latin) 
 in parenthetical relative clauses, like o rt ttot iariv, whatever it 
 is (quidquid est), oo-tis ttot ia-riv (or eo-rat), &c. E. g. 
 
 Zeus, ooTis TTOT eoTiV, el ro^ airra (fiiXov KeicK-qpevto, tovto viv 
 irpoa-evviiTio, Zeus, whoever he may be, &c. Aesch. Agam. 160. 
 AovKevopev deals, o Ti ttot elalv Qeoi, EuR. Orest. 418, 
 
 The Subjunctive, however, sometimes occurs ; in which case the 
 expression belongs under §62 or §61, 3: as in Aeschin. Tim. § 127, 
 dXX* 6 irpotraylrdpevos avrav Koi ivapaTv^av, qcttis av y, Xdyoi' irapfj(€i. 
 So Dem. Phil. I, 47, 24. 
 
 Assimilation in Dependent Belative Clausen. 
 
 § 64. 1. "When a conditional relative clause referring to 
 the future depends on a Subjunctive or Optative referring to 
 the future, it regularly takes by assimilation the same mood 
 with its leading verb. Such a leading verb may be in pro- 
 tasis or apodosis, in another conditional relative clause, in 
 the expression of a wish (§ 82), or in a final clause. E. g. 
 
 'Eac Tives ot &v Svvavrai tovto jroLaa-i, icaXSr e^ei , if any who shall 
 be able do this, it will be well. Ei Tives ot SvvaivTO tovto woioUv, 
 Ka\as &» ?x<"> if "■^y "'*" should be able should do this, it would it 
 
136 EELATITB AND TEMPORAL SENlEJfCES. [§ 04, L 
 
 well, EMe jrdvTcs ol bvvaivTO tovto noioUv, that all who may be 
 able would do this. (Here the principle of aseimilation makes oi 
 &vvaivTo after an Optative preferable to oJ ai> 8vva>vTai, which would 
 express the same idea.) So in Latin : Si absurde canat is qui se 
 haberi ue/ji musicum, turpior sit. — Sic injurias fortuuae quasferre 
 negueas defugiendo relinquas. 
 J?or examples see § 61, 3 and 4. 
 
 2. When a conditional relative clause depends on a secondary 
 tense of the Indicative implying the non-fulfilment of a condi- 
 tion, it regularly takes a secondary tense of the Indicative by 
 assimilation. The leading Indicative may be in protasis or 
 apodosis (§ 49, 2), in another conditional relative clause 
 (§ 61, 2), in an expression of a wish (§ 83), or in a final clause 
 r?44, 3). E.g. 
 
 Et Tires 01 ibvvavTo tovto enpa^av, KokSis av ea~)(€v, if any who had 
 been able had done this, it would have been well. EMe navTcs oi i di- 
 van to TOVTO errpa^av, that all who had been able had done this. So 
 in Latin : Nam si solos eos dicei-es miseros quibus moriendum esset, 
 neminem tu quidem eorum qui viverent exciperes. 
 
 Remark 1. It will be seen that this principle of assimilation 
 accounts for the Indicative and Optative in a conditional relative 
 sentence, which have been already explained by the analogy of the 
 ordinary forms of protasis. (See § 61, 2 and 4.) In fact, wherever 
 this assimilation occurs, the relative clause stands as a protasis to its 
 antecedent clause, although the latter may be itself a protasis to 
 another apodosis. (See § 34.) Occasionally this principle is dis- 
 regarded, so that a Subjunctive depends on an Optative. (See the 
 examples under § 34, 1, b, and § 63, 4, a.) 
 
 Remakk 2. The Indicative in the construction of § 61, 1, refer- 
 ring simply to the present or past, cannot be afiected by assimila- 
 tion, as that would change its time. E. g. 
 
 MqT' ipm napeoTios yevoiTo, /itit' Iitov <f>povS>v, os Tab' epSct (i. e 
 ti Tis rdd" epSei). SoPH. Ant. 372. 
 
 Note 1. The principle of § 64 appKes only to conditional rel* 
 tive clauses. If the relative refers to a definite antecedent, so that 
 its verb denotes a, fact and not a supposition, the principle of assimi- 
 lation does not apply, and the Indicative (or any other construction 
 required by the sense, § 59, N. 1) is used. E. g. 
 
 El Ttav TToKcraitf oitri vvv TTioreuo/iei/, tovtois dni(TTT]0'atULeVj ols 
 8 oil xP^f'^Sa, Touroicri xP1o^<''-H-fo6a, a-a>6(lTiiiev an. AlilST. Ran. 
 1446. Eiff radaSwoTos Spav oooi' Trpodvfws (I, that thou couldsl 
 do as mmh as thou art eager to do. Euu. Horacl. 731. (If the Im- 
 perfect had been used by assimilation, the meaning would be cm 
 •>»«cA as thou wert (or mightest be) eager to do.) 
 
§ 65, 1.] ASSIMILATION. — Ac IN APODOSIS. 137 
 
 Note 2. Conditional relative clauses depending on a Sub- 
 junctive or Optative in a general supposition (§ 51, § 62) 
 are generally assimilated to the Subjunctive or Optative ; but 
 sometimes they talie the Indicative on the principle of § 62, 
 Note 1. E. g. 
 
 OiS', eTretSav cav hv TrpiTjTai Kvpios yevrjTai, ra Trpoborrj ov^^ovXto 
 TTEOi rav \oiirav en xpij^ai- Dem. Cor. 241, 15. See Plat. Kep. 
 VI, 508 C and D; Charm. 164 B. 'O 8e t6t( /idXiora ?;(aipei', mroV* 
 Ta^ttTTa Tvj(ovTas Z)V deoivTO aTTOTrejuTrot. Xen. Ages. IX, 2. 
 
 Airi'a fiev yap cVric, orav tls i/^iXw ;^p77(rd/iei/os Xnyta p.ff 7rapdo-)(r]Ta, 
 ntariv Siv Xeyet, eXeyxos Se, orav hv av e'lrr-r] Tis Koi roKrjd^s 6p.ov 
 fiei'li). Dem. Androt. 600, 5. (Here i>v Xe'-yfi and S>v av elwr) are 
 nearly equivalent.) 'E/cdXei be xai kripa cmore Tivas I'Soi toioCtov 
 noirjaavras o iravTas i^oiiXfro iroieiv. Xen. Cyr. II, 1, 30. (Here 
 /3oi5\otTo for e/SouXero would have corresponded to bioivro in the 
 second example quoted.) 
 
 Remark. The conjunction he is occasionally used to intro- 
 duce the clause on which a relative depends. Its force here is 
 the same as in apodosis. (See § 57.) E. g. 
 
 OtT; irep (|)uXX(ov yever)', Tolr) 5 e Ka\ avbpav- H. VI, 146. ETret re 6 
 jroXe/xoy KareaTiq^ ode ^atverai Ka\ ev TOVTta rrpoyvovs Tqv dvvap.tv, and 
 when the war broke out, (then) he appears, &c. Thuo. II, 65. yiexp^ 
 fiev ovv ol To^orat eL^ov re to. /SeXij avTols Ka\ OLoi re T]aav xp^<^^at, ol 
 8 e dvre'ixov, SO long as their archers both had their arrows and were 
 able to use them, they held out. Id. HI, 98. 'Qairep ol oTrXiTai, ovrto 
 de KOI oi TTfXTao-T-ai. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 5, 12. So (paivovrai 8e, Thuc. 
 I, 11 ; and iyiyvovro be, Aeschin. Cor. § 69. 
 
 Belative Clauses expressing a Purpose, Eesult, &c. 
 
 § 63. 1. The relative is used with the Future In- 
 dicative to denote a purpose or object. ■ B. g. 
 
 Upea-^etav be ■nip.Trei.v, rjTis ravr ipeX icai Trapearat rots irpa- 
 yjMKTiv, and to send an embassy to say these things, and to be present a! 
 the transaction. Dem. 01. I, 10, 1. 0rjn\ 817 be'iv rjfids irpos eerra 
 Xoiiy ■npeo'lietav irep.irei.v, ^ Tois fiev SiSdfei ravra, Tuiis be napo 
 ^vveZ. lb. n, 21, 10. 'ESo|f Tffl brjpw rpiaKovra avbpas e\e<j6ai, 01 
 Tovs narpiovs vofxovs ^vyypdyjrovtTL, Kad ovs noXiTevirovai . 
 Xen. Hell, n, 3, 2. Oi ydp ean jmh xpfjpara. oiroBev eKTi(TO,for I 
 have no money to pay thejine with. Plat. Apnl. 37 C. 
 
138 EELATITE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 65, 1. 
 
 The antecedent of the relative, in this ease, may be either definite 
 or indefinite ; but the negative particle is regularly fiij, as in final 
 clauses (§ 43, N. 2). 
 
 Remark. 'OTrmr as a relative is sometimes used in this construc- 
 tion in a way which illustrates its use as a final particle. (See § 45, 
 Kem.) E. g. 
 
 Tloifc Se ovTto Siuot Tuiv aav ivBefjiTei nrjhev, and act so that there 
 shall be nothing wanting on your part ; lit. act in that way by which, 
 &C. Hdt. Vn, 18. To oiJrcas eiriiTTaaOai dvBpamav aWav ■npoararci- 
 fLV OTTCDf e^ovo'i ivavTa ra eTTiTjjBeia^ . . . tovto OavfiaiTTOv c(^ati/fTO, 
 i. e. in such a way that they shall have, &c. Xkn. Cyr. I, 6, 7. So 
 Cyr. n, 4, 31. 
 
 Note. 1 . (a.) The Future Indicative is the only fi)rm regnlarly 
 used in prose after the relative in this sense. It is retained even 
 after secondary tenses, seldom being changed to the Future Optar 
 tive, which would here be expected by § 31, 2, and by the analog 
 of clauses with oirof (§ 45). The Future Optative, however, is 
 found in Soph. O. T. 796, e(pevyov ev6a fir)7roT dyj/otfiijv ovcidrj, — 
 and probably in' Plat. Rep. Ill, 416 C, <^aiij ai> tis Sciv koX tos olur)- 
 acts Koi T^v aWrfv ovfrlav roiavrrjv avTOts irapatTKevdaaadaL, tJtis fifire 
 roils fpyXaKas as dpla-Tovs eivai iravfToi. airovs, KOKOvpyelv re fiq 
 en a pot TTfpl Toiis aXXovs jroXtVar. 
 
 (6.) When, however, this Future is quoted indirectly after a past 
 tense, or depends upon a clause expressing a past purpose (which 
 is equivalent to standing in indirect discourse, § 26, N. 1), it is 
 sometimes changed to the Future Optative, like any other Future 
 Indicative. E. g. 
 
 'EtTKOTrei on'WS ea-oiro aira oorty (mvra re ■ynporpo^^coi Koi 
 TfKfVTTjaavTa da\^ot airov. IsAE. de. Menecl. Her. § 10. Alpedevrts 
 c^' a> re ^vyypd^ai Popovs, Kaff ovarii/as TroXiTevtroiifTo, having 
 been chosen with the condition that they should compile the laws by which 
 they were to govern. Xen. Hell. U, 3, 11. (This is a sort of indirect 
 quotation of the sentence which appears in its direct form in Hell. 
 n, 3, 2, the example under § 65, 1.) 
 
 Note 2. In Homer, the Future Indicative is sometimes used 
 in this sense ; as in Od. XIV, 333, iiraprias, o\ ^ piv irliitfrov- 
 a-iv. Sometimes the Optative with ice, as an apodosis, takes 
 the place of the Future ; as in Od. IV, 167, aXXoi. oX ksv d\d\- 
 Koi,ev. The more common Epic construction is, however, the 
 Subjunctive (generally with ice joined to the relative) after 
 primary tenses, and the Optative (Present or Aorist, never 
 Future), without «/, after secondary tenses. E. g. 
 E\kos S' IrjTrip fvipdtra-eTai, ^S' tVifl^n-ft 
 tdppax, a Kill iraiarjiTi p(\mvdu>v dbvvaav. H. IV, 191. 
 
§ 65, l.J RELATIYB CLAUSES EXPKESStNG A PURl OSE. 139 
 
 AXX ayfTf, (cXijToiir oTpivojifv, oi xe Tdx'(i"''a 
 'EXSoxt' es (tXio-i'jji' IIijXijiaSecD 'A^'X^os. II. IX, 165. 
 
 E/cdore, koL tiji^u aTroTiVifiev rjv tlu eotKew, 
 
 'H re KoX eaarofiemuri jut' adavdroKTi ff «' X j; t a t . H. IH, 459. 
 'AyyeXoK rjKav, is dyyei'Keie yvvaiKi. Od. XV, 458. 
 ndimjvev 6 dva -nvpyuv *A\ata)v^ ft Ttv iBolto 
 
 Hyefioyavj os tis ol dprjv irdpounv dfivvai. H. XII, 332. 
 
 Remark. It -will be noticed . that the earlier Greek here agreei 
 ■with the Latin (in using the Subjunctive and Optative), while the 
 Attic Greek differs from the Latin by using the more vivid Future 
 Indicative. 
 
 Note 3. (a.) The Attic Greek allows the Subjunctive in such 
 phrases as ej^et o n eiTrj/, he has something to say; where the irregu- 
 larity seems to be caused by the analogy of the common expression 
 ovK e)(ei oil (or ri) e iir.ij , equivalent to ovk olSev o n etirij, he knows 
 not what he shall say, which contains an indirect question (§ 71). 
 E.g. 
 
 TotovTov eSos napedotrav, aore • • . (Karipovs ^x^iv i^ oTs <^tXoT»- 
 u ij 6 m o- 1 K , that both may have things in which they may glory. Isoc. 
 Pan. p. 49 C. § 44. (Here there is no indirect question, for the 
 meaning is not that they may know in what they are to glory. See 
 note added to Felton's Isocrates, p. 135.) OiSei/ eti 8toio-« alrm, 
 idv fiovov e^Tj ora tiaXeyrjTai^ if only he shall hare some one to talk 
 with. Plat. Symp. 194 D. ToTi fiiWova-iv e^av o n fia^ipaiiTiv. 
 Xen. Oecon. VU, 20. (Compare djropfis-oTt Xe'-vfls and eijro/)eIs 
 o Ti \iyris in the same sentence. Plat. Ion. 535 B.) 
 
 (6.) The Present or Aorist Optative very rarely occurs in Attic 
 Greek after a past tense, but more frequently after another Opta- 
 tive. E. g. 
 
 'AvSpa ovSev cvtottov {ppSiv), ovx oortr dpKeireiev, oiS' oarit 
 v6<Tov KapvovTi (rvWd^oLTo, i. e. tohen I saw no one there to assist 
 me, &c. Soph. Phil. 281. Tovifiov Se TToiriTfiv &v oix evpois ert ^-qToiv 
 &v, oarts prjiia yemaiov Xdnoi, i. e. a poet to speak a noble word. 
 Aeist. Ran. 96. (Yet in vs. 98 we have the regular ooris ^Bly^t- 
 Tuj, depending on the same ovk av evpois.) So in Plat. Rep. Ill, 
 398 B, OS pipolro Kai Xe'yot, depending on ;(pQ)fiefla av. Tji fjtie- 
 Tepa TToXfi ovbev Aw evSii^atro ToaovTOV oiide notrjaeiev, vcj) oS iteiaBiv- 
 Tfs Tivas 'EXXiji'iai' eKftvco irpoc'iaGe, i. e. nothing so great, that you 
 wotdi be persuaded by it to sacrifice any of the Greeks to him. Dem. 
 Phil, n, 67, 20. 
 
 Note 4. 'Q,s as a relative, in the sense of by which (with an 
 antecedent like anything understood), is sometimes followed by an 
 Optative with av in apodosis, expressing a purpose or object. E. g. 
 
 'Or itfv av etiroiTf SiKaiovs Xdyour Kal \eyovTos aXXon (ruKetijre, 
 ajjicivov ^iKlirtov wapeaKeiairBe, as Si Ka\v(raiT &v eKetpov jrpar' 
 
140 EELATlvi; AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 65, 1. 
 
 Tttv TavTa l(^' &v iiTTi vvv, iravTfKas apyas exere, i. e. as to means 63 
 which you could make just speeches, Sfc, you are better prepared than 
 Philip ; but as to anything by which you could prevent him from doing 
 what he is now about, you are wholly inactive. Dem. Phil. II, 66, 15. 
 So at the end of the same oration, i>s 8' hv i^eraaBdri iioKutt' 
 dxpi/Smy, fiT) yeVotro, i. e. may nothing come upon us by which the truth 
 of what I say would be thoroughly tested. 
 
 Note 5. The relative with any tense of the Indicative, oi 
 even with the Optative and Sv, can be used to denote a resvlt, 
 where Stare might have been expected. (§ 65, 3). This 
 occurs chiefly after negatives, or interrogatives implying a 
 negative. E. g. 
 
 Ti's ovTtos fvrjBris earlv vjimv, ocrns ayvoc'i tov cxeldfu irokejutv 
 Sfvpo rjioDTa, hv a.niKr]aiyi.ev ; i. e. who of you is so simple as not to 
 know, &c. ? Dem. 01. I, 13, 16. (Here mart d-yraeic might have 
 been used.) Ti's ouroi noppat roiv itoKiTiKwv rfv npaypdrav, oo-tls ovk 
 fyyvs Tjvay KaiiBrj yevitrSai twv avpfftopav ; IsOC. Pan. p. 64 B. 
 § 113. Tiff ovras paSvpos earip, oaris ov pcTa(r\€ip ^ovX^aerai 
 ravTrjs rrjs arparelas ; lb. p. 79 D. § 185. Oudfi; av yevotro ovras 
 ddapdvTtvos, 6s &v pe Iveiev ev TJj biKaiotrvvri, no one would ever be- 
 come so adamantine that he would remain firm in justice. Plat. Eep. 
 II, 360 B. 
 
 2. '£(/)' a or ((ft' art, on condition that, which is commonly 
 followed by the Infinitive (§ 99), sometimes takes the Future 
 Indicative. E. g. 
 
 *E7rt TovTto 8e VTre^tarapai rrjs dpxTJs, i<f> Q>re vtt* ovhevos vpeatv 
 ap^opai, 1 withdrato upon this condition, that I shall be ruled, &c. 
 Hdt. Ill, 83. TovToiiTL h' Sv Triavvos earn KaTzjyaye, eV are oi dnoyo- 
 voL avTov lpo(j)dvTai, tS>v Beav 'iirovTai. Hdt. VII, 153. Kai rijv 
 Boiwrtay e^ekvjrov 'Adrjvalai irda-av, anovdas iroirjadfievoi e^* ^ Toiis 
 avdpas Ko piovvTai, Thuc. I, 113. Svv€^Tja-au e^' ^re c^taa"tw 
 CK HfXoirovvriirov iTTOCTirocSoi (cat pTjSevoTf en i^TjirovTai ain^s. Id. 
 I, 103. 
 
 It will be noticed here (as in Note 1) that the Future Indicative 
 generally remains unchanged even after a secondary tense. 
 
 3. flcne (sometimes <»?), so that, so as, is usually 
 followed by the Infinitive. (See § 98.) But when the 
 action of the verb expressing the result after mo-Te is 
 viewed chiefly as an independent fact, and not merely 
 as a result, the Indicative can be used. 
 
 The Infinitive is sometimes used even here, when the Indie- 
 
§ 65, 4.] CAUSAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 141 
 
 ative would seem more natural ; and it often makes quite aa 
 little difference which of the two is used, as it does in English 
 whether we say some are so strange as not to be ashamed [ovrat 
 Sraitoi &(m ovk alaxvvfadai, Dem. F. L. 439, 29), or some are so 
 strange that they are not ashamed (fiorrc ovk altrxinovrai). Here, 
 although both expressions have the same general meaning, the 
 former expresses the result merely as a result, while the latter 
 expresses it also (and more distinctly) as an independent fact. 
 E. g. 
 
 Ovruis dyvatfiovois ex^re^ &(tt€ iXirl^eTe aiira ;fp?j(rra yevrjaeadaLj 
 K.T.X. are you so senseless that you expect, &c. Dem. 01. II, 25, 19. 
 (Here ma-re i\mCeiv, so senseless as to expect, would merely make 
 the fact of their expecting less prominent.) Ovtws jjiuv Sokei navrbs 
 ai^ta eivai, aare Travres to KaTaXimlv avra ^Xiara cj)evyofi€v, so 
 that we all especially avoid, &c. Xen. Mem. II, 2, 3. Oip^^Kci/" axTB" 
 ol EXXijvcff ecj) povTi^ov. Id. An. 11, 3, 25. Ets tovt' ajrXTjaTias 
 t}Xdov, atar ovk i^rjpKe(rev avTois ej(£LV tt]V Kara yrjv apxrjv, aWu 
 Kai Tr^v Kara 6dkaTTav dwaptv ovtcos eTredvp.rja'av Xa^elv, aare Tovs 
 iTViiiid)(ovs TOVS fjiicripovs dcbicTTaa-av. Isoc. Panath. p. 254 A. 
 § 103. So after ais, § 98, 2, N. 1 : Ourta Brj ti KXeivfj eyei/cro, as koi 
 ndvTes ofEWrji/es ''Potajnos Tovvopa e ^e padov, i. e. SO that all the 
 Greeks came to know well the name ofWiodopis. Hdt. II, 135. 
 
 Note. As fitrrf in this construction has no effect whatever upon 
 the mood of the verb, it may be followed by any construction that 
 would be allowed in an independent sentence. (See § 59, N. 1.) 
 It may thus take an (^tative or Indicative ia apodosis with av, or 
 even an Imperative. E. g. 
 
 "Qot ovk av avTov yv<opi(raip,' hv elaiSoiv. EuR. Or. 379. 
 Uadoiu pev dvrebpiov, aitrr^, el ^povav eTrpaxrcrov, ov8 &v S)S' cyi- 
 yvoprjv KOKOS. SoPH. O. C. 271. QvrjTos S* 'Opearqs' wore /i?) "kiau 
 a-rivf. Id. El. 1172. So with ov pj) and the Subjunctive (89, 1) ; 
 ovTms imTeBvpTjKa aKovaai, aare . . . ov pij <tov airoXti^Ba. Plat 
 Phaedr. 227 D. 
 
 4. The relative has sometimes a causal signification, being 
 equivalent to on, because, and a personal pronoun or demon- 
 strative word. The verb is in the Indicative, as in ordinary 
 causal sentences (§ 81, 1). E. g. 
 
 OavpaoTov noieis, 6f rjplv ovbh SiSas, you do a strange thing in 
 giving us nothing (like oti a-v ovbev SiScos). Xen. Mem. II, 7, 13. 
 Ao'|ar dpad^s eivat, os ■ . . fxeXeve, having seemed to be unlearned, 
 because he commanded, &c. Hdt. I, 33. T^x prjripa epaKapi^ov, otoiv 
 T€Kva>v €Kvpri<r€ (like OTiToiaiv). Id. I, 31. EiSaipaiv i^aivfTO, i)g 
 dSems Ka\ yevvaias eVf XeuTo, i. e. because he died so fearlessly and 
 nobly (mj being equivalent to on ovras). Plat. Phaed. 58 E. 
 
142 RELATIVE AND TEMPORA^ SENTENCES. [§ 65, 4 
 
 TaXniTToopof fi, m nf]Tc 6eo\ jrarpaol elm firjO' iepd, i. e. since you 
 have no ancestral Gods, &c. Plat, iluthyd. 302 B. (See Remark.) 
 Ilwff Av opOats c/xou KaraytyvaxTKoiTe, to to irapa-nav irpos tovtovl p.Tj5ev 
 o-u/iiSoXaioK eoTiw; i. e. since I Jiave no contract at all, &c. Dem. 
 Apat. 903, 22. So Arist. Ran. 1459. 
 
 Remark. The ordinary negative particle of a causal relative 
 sentence is ou, a.s in the first example above. (See § 81.) But if a 
 cimditional force is combined with the causal, firj can be used. Thus 
 in the last examples above, in which pfj is used, a /iij Scot tlaiv 
 (besides its causal force) implies if, as it appears, you are without 
 ancestral Gods; and a lirjSiv eartv, if, as it appears, I haoe no con- 
 tract. The same comtination of a causal and a conditional force is 
 seen in the Latin siquidem. 
 
 Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before 
 that. 
 
 A. "Etot, "EcTTf, "Axpi, MixP'i Eio-OKe, '0<f>pa, Until. 
 
 § 66. 1. When la?, ecrre, a%/3f, M^XP''' ^"*1 o<bpa, 
 until, refer to a definite point of past time, at which the 
 action of the verb actually took place, they take the 
 Indicative. E. g. 
 
 N^X"" Ta^'") foT eV^X^ov fls TTora/iov, / swam on again, until I 
 came to a river. Od. VII, 280. Uivei, eas i 6 e p p.T) v' avrov ap.<i>i.^a<ra 
 d)Xo^ oivov. Eur. Ale. 758. Svvelpov amovres, tare iirX rdis (TKrjvais 
 eyhovTo. Xen. Cyr. VII, 5, 6. (So An. lU, 4, 49.) Kal raCra 
 eVoiouj/ /ie'xpi a-KOTOs eyeufTO. Id. An. IV, 2, 4. (So III, 4, 8.) 
 Qi lifv OprjiKas dvdpas eiraxfTo TvSi'os uior, o(j>pa SuioSeie' ene^vev. 
 II. X, 488. Hpx' tp^o, o(f>p' a(^iKOVTO Kara OTparov, j /ui/ dvayfi. 
 IL Xin, 329. "Hifv, o(j>pa luya a-ireoslKero. Od. V, 57. 
 
 Note 1. *Axp' of and p.^xP'- °^ ^^^ used in the same sense as 
 axpi and pexpi- E. g. 
 
 Tmv 8e ravra irpa^avrav axpi ov oSf o Xoyos iypaf^ern Tiai<f)Ovog 
 iTpe(rfivTaTos an t5>v dScX^uv tj)V apxrjv f'^s. Xen. Hell. VI, 4, 37. 
 Toils 'EXXijxar cmeXixraTO SovXcia;, ostrr' eXev9epovs eivai fxc'vpi oS 
 ndKiv avTiX avroiis KareSovXaxravTo. Plat. Menex. 245 A. 
 
 Note 2. Herodotus uses is 5 or es ov, until, like eag, with the 
 Indicative. E. g. 
 
 'AirtSeUmaav jraiSa warpis fKacrrov covra, h & direSt^av tSirdcrat 
 airdi. Hdt. H, 143. 'Es o5 Ai'xijr di/cvpc. I, 67. 
 
 2. When these particles refer to the future, they are 
 
§ 66, 3.] 'Eais, ETC. TVITH INDIC, SUB J., AND OPTATIVE. 143 
 
 joined vrith av or ice and take the Subjunctire, if the 
 leading verb is primary. (See § 61, 3.) But if such 
 clauses depend upon an Optative in protasis or apodosis, 
 or in a wish, they usually take the Optative (without 
 av) by assimilation. (See § 61, 4.) E. g. 
 
 yiax^aofiai avdi fievcav^ eias Ke reXos iroKefioLO Ki)(€i<at until T shall 
 come to an end of the war. 11.111,291. "Eas d' &v ovv irpos tov irapov 
 Tof fKiiddrjs, ex eXjriSa. SoPH. O. T. 834. 'ETriirxfs, eoT* av Koi 
 ra XoiTra irpoa-iiddtis, wait until you shall learn, &c. Absch. Prom. 
 697, Mexpi d* &v eyoi ,tJkq}, at (TTTOvdal pxvovTotv, Xen. An. 11, 3, 
 24. 'AXXd fieV, o<f)pa Kt rot jieKuibsa olvov tveiKa), hut wait, until 1 
 shall bring, &c. 11. VI, 258. So o<j)p' av riaaaiv, II. 1, 509. 
 
 Kal TO }i^v av i^oKelt^oiev, to de ttoKiv iyypaf^oiev, ecus o ri juaXicrra 
 avBpmreta ijBi} Beo^CKfj Trotrjcreiav, until they should make, &c. 
 Plat. Rep. VI, 50i C. EJ fie irdm OTrovSd^oi (payeiv, c'iTTOip,' av ort 
 irapd Tats yvvat^iv eortv, ea>s irapaTelvaifii tovtov, i. e. / would 
 tell him this, untU I put him to torture. Xkn. Cyr. 1, 3, 11. 
 
 Note 1. It will be seen by the examples, that the clause after 
 tas and other particles signifying until sometimes implies a future 
 purpose or object, the attainment of which is desired. When such a 
 sentence, implying a purpose or object which would have been 
 originally expressed by a Subjunctive, depends upon a past tense, 
 it generally takes the Optative (§ 31, 1) ; but the Subjunctive also 
 may be used, in order to retain the mood in which the purpose 
 would have been originally conceived (as in final clauses, § 44, 2). 
 For the general principle, see § 77. E. g. 
 
 ^irovdds eTToiTjaavTo, etos dirayyeXde irf to "Xexdevra sis AoKeSai-^ 
 fiova, they made a truce, (to continue) until what had been said should 
 be announced at Sparta. Xen. Hell. Ill, 2, 20. (Here emy av djray- 
 ycXdg might have been used; as in Thuc. 1, 90, cxeXevev (tovs 
 vpeafieis} imaxftv, cas &v to reixos tKavbv alpaxnv.) See § 77, 1, d. 
 
 Note 2. Homer uses els o Ke (or elaoKe), until, with the Sub- 
 <innctive, as Herodotus uses es o with the Indicative (§ 66, 1, N. 2); 
 as filfivere, els o k€v aarv p-eya Tlpidjioio eXoyp-ev, 11. 11. 332. Ets o 
 Ke may take the Optative, retaining Ke ; as in II. XV, 70. 
 
 Note 3. "Av is sometimes omitted after ecos, &c. (including irptv, 
 § 67, 1) when they take the Subjunctive, as in common protasis 
 and in relative sentences (§ 50, 1, N. 8 ; § 63, 1) ; after pexpi and 
 nplv this occurs even in Attic prose. Thus ear eya iidKa, Soph. 
 Aj. 1183; fiexpi ttXovs yewjrm, Thuc. I, 137: see Thuc. IV, 16; 
 Aeschin. Cor. § 60. 
 
 3. When the clause introduced by eo)?, &c., until, 
 refers to a result which was not attained in past time in 
 consequence of the non-fulfilment of a condition, it takes 
 asecondary tense of the Indicative. (See §68, 2.) E.g. 
 
144 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 66, 3. 
 
 'HS/cas &v TOVTO) iTi bieKeyoiirfv, ea>s avTa Tr)V tov ' hfix^iovos arre- 
 8 0) K a pfimv dvTi rr;! toC ZfjOov, I should gladly have continued to talk 
 with him, until I had given him, &c. Plat. Gorg. 506 B. Ouk Aw 
 fjTavojxrjv, eais aireiteLpaQriv r^ff tro^ias ravTrj(Tt. Id. Crat;. 396 C 
 *Ent<rx^v av, ecos ol TrXeiorot tuv eloidoTav yva^irju d7r€<f>rji/avT0f 
 .... rjo-vxlav &v rjyov, i. e. / should have waited until most of the reg'u- 
 lar speakers had declared their opinion, &o. Dkm. Phil. I, § 1. (For 
 av here, see § 42, 3.) 
 
 The leading verb must be an Indicative implying the non-fulfil- 
 ment of a condition. 
 
 4. When the clause introduced by eo*?, <fec., until, de- 
 pends upon a verb denoting a customary action or a 
 general truth, and refers indefinitely to any one of a 
 series of occasions, it takes av and the Subjunctive after 
 primary tenses, and the simple Optative after secondary 
 tenses. (See § 62.) E. g. 
 
 °A 8" Sv AiTVVTaKTa rj, dvdyKrj ravra df\ Trpdy/uiTa jraptp^eu/, eas &t, 
 Xaipav Xd&Tj, they must always make trouble, until they are put in 
 order. Xrn. Cyr. IV, 5, 37. 'Offdre &pa e'ir) dptarov, dve ficvev au- 
 Tovs eo'Te e ^(pdyotiv rt, as firj ^ovKip-ttoev. lb. VIII, 1, 44. Ilfpt- 
 epevofiev oZv eKaaTOTc, e(as dvoi)^d€lrj to Seap-toTfipLov, we waited 
 every day, until the pruon was opened. Plat. Phaed. 59 D. (This 
 may mean until the prison should be opened; § 66, 2, N 1.) 
 
 Note. "Aw is sometimes omitted after ta>s, &c. and trpiv, when 
 they take the Subjunctive in this sense, as well as in the other con- 
 struction (§ 66, 2, N. 3) ; as iv tw (ppovelu yap /xTjSti/ rjSioTos /Si'or, 
 «0E TO xalpfiv Kiu TO Xvne'io-BaL pdOjis. Sy>l>II. A]. 565. So o^pa Tf- 
 Xio-crrj, 11. I, 82; and is ov aTrodavaiai, Hdt. HI, 31. 
 
 Remark. When las and S(j>pa mean so long as, they are rela- 
 tives, and are included under §§ 58 - 64. 'Ocppa in all its senses is 
 confined to Epic and Lyric poetry. (See § 43, N. 1.) 
 
 B. Upiv, Until, Before that. 
 
 § 67. npi'i-, before, before that, until, besides taking the 
 Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative, on the same principles 
 with cae, &C. (§ 66), may also take the Infinitive (§ 106). 
 The question of choice between the Infinitive and the finite 
 moods generally depends on the nature of the leading clause. 
 
 nplv regularly takes the Subjunctive and Optative (when 
 they are allowed) only if the leading clause is negative or 
 
§ 67, 2.] CONSTRUCTIONS AFTER Uptv. 145 
 
 interrogative with a negative implied ; very seldom if that la 
 affirmative. It takes the Indicative after both negative and 
 affirmative clauses, but chiefly after negatives. 
 
 In Homer the Infinitive is the mood regularly used with 
 irpiv, after both affirmative and negative clauses ; in Attic 
 Greek it is regularly used after affirmatives, and seldom after 
 negatives. 
 
 1. The Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative after 
 irplv follow the rules already given for ecu?, &c. (§ 66). 
 E.g. 
 
 (Indie. § 66, 1.) Ovk tju aXi^rni ovbev, aXKa (pap/iaKoiv XP^'^9 
 KaTetTKeWovrOf irplv y eyti (r(l)La'iv edet^a Kpd<reLS 7]-nlaiv CLKetrparvav^ 
 uiU'd I showed them, &c. Aesch. Prom. 481. ndkiv tovto Tipvmi 
 oiiK iirav^Ke, nplv . . . . eXoiBopTjcre /xaV €V dUrf. Plat. Phaedr. 
 266 A. OuK Tj^tanrav veatTepov tl Troieiv es avTov, irpiv ye dfi avToii 
 amjp 'ApytXtos prjvvT^s yiyverai, until he becomex, &c. (Histor. 
 Pres.) ThuC. 1, 132. IloXXa eira6ev, ■npiv ye oi xpvaap,iruK.a Kovpa 
 XoXivov naWas ^veyxev. PiND. 01. XIII, 92. 'AcaXdXufe tt/jip 
 6p^. EuK. Me,l. 11 ; 3. 
 
 (Subj. and Opt. § 66, 2.) Ov Ka <re iya> X/yo) (eiSaipom), irptv 
 av TeXevTrjtravTa KoXas tqv aiava 7rv6a) pat. Hdt. 1, 32. Ovde 
 Xij^et, nplv av fj KopeffTj Keap, ^ . . . . eXj] tls dp^dv, Aesch- Prom. 
 165. Ov xp^ pe evdevbe d-rreXBelvi nplv Siv Ba diKrjv. XkN, An. V, 
 7, 5. 'AXX' ovnoT tycay av, nplv iBotp' 6p66v enos, pep<^opev(iiV av 
 Karaipairiv. SoPH. O. T. 505. So Theogn. 126, nplv netptjdfiris. 
 So nplv i^iKKvaeiev, depending on a protasis (ei fuj dveirf)., pLAT. 
 Kep. VII, 515 E. 'OXoio prjmo, nplv pddoip' el Kal ndXtv yvaprfv 
 p^Tolaeis. Soph. Pliil. 961. {npiv after Opt. in wish.) 'Anriyopeve 
 prj&iva ^dXXciv, nplv KCpoc epnXrjo-Be ir) Orfpav, until Cyrus should' 
 be sati^Jied. Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 14. (§ 66, 2, N. 1.) 
 
 (Indie. § 66, 3.) *E;^p^v ovv tovs aXXovs prj nporepov nepl twv 
 SpoXoyoviievtov avp^ovXeveiv, nplv nepl rav dp<l}ta^rjrdvpev(iiv rjpas 
 i&iSa^av, they ought not to have given advice, Sfc, until they had 
 instructed us, &c. Isoc. Paneg. p. 44 C. § 19. 
 
 (Subj. and Opt. § 66, 4.) 'Opaai tovs npecr^vrcpovs ov npoaSev 
 dniovras yaarpos evexa, nplv av d ^ u a* t v ol ap\ovTes. Xen. Cyr. I, 
 2, 8. Oh yap nporepov xarriyopos napa rols dKoiov(riv laxyei, nplv hv 
 6 (ftevyov ddwarrjo'Tj ras npoeiprjpevas aWlas dnoXiKraffSai., Aes- 
 CHLN. F. L. § 2. OvSapoOev d(j)i£trav, nplv napa6el(v avToU api- 
 a-Tov, before tiiey had placed before them. Xen. An. IV, 5,30. 
 
 (Subj. without av. § 66, 2, N. 3.) Mij anva^e, nplv paBris. Soril. 
 Phil. 917. So Od. X, 175 ; IIdt. 1, 136 ;• Plat. Phaed. 62 C. 
 
 2. For irpiv with the Infinitive, see § 106. 
 
 7 ' 
 
146 HELATITE AND TEMPOBAL SENTENCES. L^ 
 
 NOTE 1. In Homer, .piu is not found f^XS^^^-^^ 
 y- St. taiing ita place ; a few cases occur of the ^"Xeric construe- 
 out a.) and the bptative ; but the most common Hom?J?« «°?«t^^°- 
 tion, in sentences of aU kinds, is that with the Inhmtive (.S lUbJ. 
 
 ^''t.e- a.„;d,..a; .«W8«8- ^xo^^J^^r;^,:^^^ "SA:^! 
 
 43. Son.lZ588; XJLI,437. "n 0ao.,oi-yap_7ra.^ara8vo^o^efl ax^u- 
 utvoi ,rep f Is 'At'fiao SSpovs, 7vp\v fioprnpov npup e tt e KOv- ua. A, i ^o. 
 
 y ar" & witii the Subjunctive is found in Od. II, 374, and IV, 477. 
 
 Note 2. Upiv with the Infinitive after negative sentences is most 
 common in Homer (Note 1), rare in the Attic poets, and again more 
 frequent in Attic prose. (See Ki-Uger, Vol. H, p. 258.) For ex- 
 amples see § 106. 
 
 Examples of the Subjunctive or Optative with irplv after affirma- 
 tive sentences are very rare. One occurs in Iscc. Paneg. p. 44 A, 
 § 16 ; ocrris ouv oierai xoiis aWovs KOivj ti itpa^eiv ^yaSov, irpip ap 
 rove irpoeoTffiras airav SiaWd^rj, Xiav dTr\as ^^ei. 
 
 Note 3. Upiv ij, irporepov rj (^priitsquarn), and vp6a6fv ij may be 
 used in the same constructions aa npiv. Upiv ij is especially common 
 in Herodotus. E. g. 
 
 Ou yap 8f] wporepov diravetm}, irp\v rj (rcjicas VTroyeiplovs eiroiTj- 
 a-aro. Hdt. VI, 45. So Thuc. VI, 61. 'ASiKCfi dvairciOofievos 
 irpXv rj aTpfKeas eKp,d6ri. Hdt. VH, 10. Eu^fo lijjdefuav o{ avirrv- 
 ■)(ir\v TomvTrjv yfviirOai, ^ fuv vaio-fi, KaraiiTpe'^aaBm. Tr/v Evpdmtjv, 
 IT poTC pop rj eVi repfiaat Toiiri eKflvrjs ye vrjTai. Id. VII, 54. 
 npoTfpov ^ with Indie, Plat. Phaedr. 232 E. UpotrOev ^ <rv 
 ecjiaivov , TovT eKr]pv)(dr]. SoPH. O. T. 736. *AjrcKpiVaro on npo' 
 aOev atf diroOdvoiev ^ rd ojrXa napadoincraVf thai they would die 
 before they would give up their anns. ^Len. An. H, 1, 10, (See 
 §66,2.) 
 
 For examples of the Infinitive after all these expressions, see 
 § 106. Even varepov 7 is found with the Infinitive. 
 
 Note 4. IIpiV or irpiv tj is very often preceded by nponpov, 
 npdadiv, irdpos, or another npiv (used as an adverb), in the leading 
 clause. E. g. 
 
 Oil irpdrepov irpos ^pas top n6\epj>p e^i<^T)ptai, ir p\v ipopitrap, 
 K-T.\. Xen. An. Hi, 1, 16. Oil Toipvv dnoKptpoviiai TtpoTipop, 
 npip &p viduip.ai. Pi'AT. Euthyd. 295 C. Km oii npoaOtv ianfo-ap^ 
 jrpi V r) iTpos Tois ffffoir tS>p 'Aa-avpiiop eyevopro. Xen. Cyi". I 4 23. 
 
 For examples with the Infinitive, see § 106. 
 
 Note 5. When n-piV appears to be followed by a primarj' tense 
 of the Indicative, it is an adverb quiilifying the verb. E. <r. 
 
 tfiv S' iya> ov \i(Ta>- wpiv piv /cai y^poi cTrficrii;, i. e. snorter 
 thaU old aye come upon her. H. I, 29. 
 
S 68, 3.] UTDIKECT DISCOUKSE. 147 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 Indibect Discourse, including Indieect Quotations 
 AND Questions. 
 
 § 68. 1. The words or tlioughts of any person may 
 be quoted either directly or indirectly. 
 
 A direct quotation is one which gives the exact words 
 of the original speaker or writer. 
 
 An indirect quotation is one in which the words of 
 the original speaker conform to the construction -of 
 the sentence in which they are quoted. Thus the ex- 
 pression ravTa 0ov\o/j,ai, may be quoted either directly, 
 as Xeyei tk " ravra ^ovXofiai, or indirectly, as Xeyei rts 
 oTt Tuvra 0ov\eTai or Xeyei t« ravra ^ovXeadai, some 
 one gays that he wishes for these. 
 
 2. Indirect quotations may be introduced by on or 
 w? (negatively ori, ov, to? on) or by the Infinitive, as in 
 the example given above ; sometimes also by the Parti- 
 ciple (§ 73, 2). 
 
 3. Indirect questions follow the same rules as indirect 
 quotations, in regard to their moods and tenses. (For 
 examples see § 70.) 
 
 Note. The term indirect discourse must be understood to 
 apply to all clauses which express indirectly the words or 
 thoughts of any person (those of the speaker himself as well 
 as those of another), after verbs which imply thought or the 
 expression of thought {verba sentiendi et declarandi), and even 
 after such expressions as 8!j\6v ea-nv, aatpes eanv, &c. 
 
 The term may be further applied to any single dependent 
 clause in any sentence, which indirectly expresses the thought 
 of any other person than the speaker (or past thoughts of the 
 speaker himself), even when the preceding clauses are not in 
 indirect discourse. (See § 77.) 
 
148 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 69, 1. 
 
 General Principles of Indirect Discourse. 
 
 Remark. The following are the general principles of in- 
 direct discourse, the application of which to particular cases is 
 shown in §§ 70 - 77. 
 
 § 69. 1. In indirect quotations after on or «? and 
 in indirect questions, after primary tenses, eacli verb 
 retains both the mood and the tense of the direct dis- 
 course, no change being made except (when necessary) 
 in the person of the verb. 
 
 After secondary tenses, each primary tense of the 
 Indicative and each Subjunctive of the direct discourse 
 may be either changed to the same tense of the Opta- 
 tive or retained in its original mood and tense. The 
 Imperfect and Pluperfect, liaving no tenses in the Opta- 
 tive, are regularly retained in the Indicative. (See, 
 however, § 70, Note 1, 6.) The Aorist Indicative re- 
 mains unchanged when it belongs to a dependent clause 
 of the direct discourse (§ 74, 2) ; but it may be changed 
 to the Optative, like the primary tenses, when it be- 
 longs to the leading clause (§ 70, 2). The Indicative 
 with av belongs under § 69, 2. 
 
 2. All secondary tenses of the Indicative implying 
 non-fulfilment of a condition (§ 49, 2), and all Opta- 
 tives (with or without av'), are retained without change 
 in either mood or tense, after both primary and second- 
 ary tenses. 
 
 3. When, however, the verb on which the quotation 
 depends is followed by the Infinitive or Participle, tlie 
 leading verb of the quotation is changed to tlie corr^ 
 sponding tense of the Infinitive or Participle, after both 
 primary and secondary tenses {av being retained when 
 there is one), and the dependent verbs follow the pre- 
 ceding rules. (See § 73.) 
 
§ 70, 1.] SIMPLE SENTENCES. 149 
 
 4. The adrerb av is nerer joined with a verb in in- 
 direct discourse, unless it stood also in the direct form : 
 on the other hand, av is never omitted with a verb in 
 indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form. 
 When av is joined to a relative word or particle before 
 a Subjunctive in the direct discourse, it is regularly 
 dropped when the Subjunctive is changed to the 
 Optative in indirect discourse. (See, however, § 74, 1, 
 N. 2.) 
 
 5. The indirect discourse regularly retains the same 
 negative particle which would be used in the direct 
 form. But the Infinitive and Participle occasionally 
 take fi^ in indirect quotation, where ov would be used 
 in direct discourse. See examples under § 73. 
 
 Simple Sentences in Indirect Quotations after on or m? 
 and in Indirect Questions. 
 
 § 70. When the direct discourse is a simple sentence, 
 the verb of which stands in any tense of the Indicative 
 (without av), the principle of § 69, 1, gives the follow- 
 ing rules for indirect quotations after on or ta? and 
 for indirect questions : — 
 
 1. After primary tenses the verb stands in the M- 
 dicative, in the tense used in the direct discourse. 
 E. g. . _ ^ 
 
 A€yeioTiypdtj>fi,-hesaysthat?ieis writing^ Xcyei Sti typa^ev^ 
 he says that he was writing; Xtyti on yeypatfxv, he says that he has 
 written; Xeyct on eyeypa<f>ei, he says that he had written; Xtyei 
 OTL €y pa^jrev, he says that he wrote; Xcyet ort ypdyjreif he says thai 
 he shall write. 
 
 Adyei yap i>t oiSiv eariv dbiKarcpov (j>fiiir)S' Aeschin. Timarch. 
 § 125. Oiyap av tovto y e»rois, as '4\a6ev . Id. F. L. § 151 (160). 
 Eu 8* iVrf, OTi 7r\ei(rrov 8ta<l>€ pe t (jifjfirj koI avKocjiavTia. lb. § 145 
 (153). *AXX' evvoeiv \pr] tovtq jLtei/, yvvai\ art, e^u/icv. SoPH. 
 Ajlt. 61. Kai Tav8' as aXijdn Xeya, Km on outc eS66t} rj ^ij<j>os it 
 
150 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 70, 1 
 
 37ra<n nKdowr eyevovTO twv yjnj(j)i(rafieva)V, ndprvpas viuvna^iv 
 fiat, I will bring witnesses to show thai, &c. Dim. Eubul. 1303,^ 2. 
 
 'Epara Ti ^oiXavrat, he asks what they want; epara ti noi.r)<Toy 
 atv, he asks what they will do. 'EpaiTavres el Xria-Tal euriv, asking 
 whether they are pirates. Thuc. I, 5. Evfious- hv 8' c^'Kaarev, 
 ovK ex<' ^h""- Soph. Trach. 401. Ei giTuroi-^afir koI $v to- 
 yda-fi (TKonei. Id. Ant. 41. So EuR. Ale. 784 
 
 Rbmark. It ia to be noticed that indirect quesliom after primary 
 tenses take the Indicative in Greek, and not the Subjunctive as in 
 Latin. Thus, nescio quis sit, / know not who he is, in Greek is simply 
 ayvai) ri's cVrii/. This does not apply to indirect questioTS which 
 would require the Subjunctive in the direct form (§ 71). 
 
 2. After secondary tenses the verb may be either 
 changed to the Optative or retained in the Indicative. 
 The Optative is the more common form. In both 
 Indicative and Optative, the tense used in the direct 
 discourse must be retained. E. g. 
 
 'EXe^ev oTi ypa(j>oi {or on ypaijjfi), he said that he was writing ; 
 i. e. he said ypd(f>a>. "Eke^ev on yeypatftas eti; (or otl yiypa- 
 <j>fv), he said that he had written; i. e. he said yey paifia. 'EXf^iv on 
 ypdyjrot (or ort ypdifrei), he said that he should write; i. e. he said 
 ypd^a. 'EXe^fv ori ypd^eifv (or on eypayjrev), he said thai he had 
 wiitlen ; i. e. he said eypa^a. 
 
 (Optative.) 'EveVXi/o-e (jypoviipaTOS roiis 'ApKaSas, Xcymi' i)S fio- 
 VOLS fief avTOis narpis JleXoiTovvrjaos f'l'i;, ttXciotov 8e rai^ EWi^ftKuv 
 <f>vXov TO 'Ap/caSiKov eii; , koX (raipara fyKpaTia-Tara ex°'" Xkn. HelL 
 yil, 1, 23. (He said povots piv vplv . . . . ia-ri, jrXftcrTOK Sc . . . . 
 e'o-n, Koi arapara .... ex^ ' • these Indicatives might have been used 
 in the place of eiri, ei?j, and ex°'-) *EXeye de 6 IleXoiriSai on 
 ^Apyeioi Kai 'ApKdbes pdyn ^TTtjpevoi eiev vsro AaKedcupaviav. 
 lb. VII, 1, 35. (He said iJTTrfVTai, which might have been 
 retained.) So Hdt. I, 83. 'YjreiTruK roXXa on avTos raKeX 
 irpd^oi, S^fTo, having hinted that he would himself attend to the 
 affairs there. Thuc. I, 90. (He said T-dxei trpd^a, and Ti^d^ei 
 might have been used for npd^oi. Cf. dnoKpivapfvot on Trip^jfov- 
 a-iv, from the same chapter, quoted below.) For the Future Oji- 
 tative in general, see § 26. "O be eXirev on eo-o iki-o. Xbn. Cjt. 
 VII, 2, 19. (He said etrovrai.') 'EXe^av in 7rep\lreie ir(j)as i 
 'ivbav ^aa-iXevs, KeXeiiov ipardv e^ otov 6 noXepos elij, they said 
 that the king of the Indians had sent them, commanding them to ask 
 on what account there was war. lb. II, 4, 7. (They said errep- 
 \lrei/ fjpas, and the question to be asked was ex nVor ea-riv 6 jroXe- 
 pos i) "EXeyov &TL ovnoiirod' o^Tos 6 norapos SmjSarof -ye voir o ireCn 
 ft pii Tore, Ihey said that this river had never beet {eyivero) fordnbie 
 bxcept then. Id. An. I, 4, 18. ncjuixX^s nporjyopeve -ols 'AdijmUus, on 
 
§ 70, 2.} INDICATITE AND OPTATIVE. 15] 
 
 ApxtSapMT fuff oi ^e'vos eti;, ov jicvroi ori ncaxu ye rrfs Trokeas y4- 
 potTo, h^ snnounced that A. was his friend, but that he had not been 
 made hia /Hend to the injury of the state. THnc.11,13. (He said ^e i/ot 
 /ML £trTi>, oi fifvToi . . . eyevero.) So Hdt. I, 25. "'Eyvanrav on 
 Kcvos 6 (jtofios e'lT). Xen. An. II, 2, 21. npo'iSovres otl itroiro a 
 TTokefioSt e^ovXovTO rfiv XlXaraiav TrpoKaToKa^eiv* ThuC. II. 2. 'ETTCt- 
 poifiTjv airra dciKiniyaij on otoiro pev elvaL croi^off, eirj d' ov. Flat. 
 Apol. 21 6. 
 
 (Indicative.) 'EXpyoK on iXnl^ova-iv <re Ka\ tt}v ttSXiv c^etv 
 fioi x^P'") '^^y ■"'"^ ^""^^ they hoped, &c. Isoc. Phil. p. 87 A. § 23. 
 (They said eXnl^opev, which might have been changed to ekni^oKv.) 
 
 H/ce d' dyyeXXajf Tts e>s Toiis Trpvruvcis as 'EXareta Kare iXijTrrai , 
 some one had come with the report that Elatea had been taken. Dem. 
 Cor. 284, 21. (Here the Perf. Opt. might have been used.) Aft- 
 voiis \6yovs eToXpa nepl epov Xe'yftv, as kya to irpdyp elp\ Tovro 
 deBpaKQiS. Id. Mid. 548, 17. Alnatrdpevos yap pe a Roi Xeyetv hv 
 OKVTjaeis Ttff, Tov narepa as aire kt ova iya tov epavTov, k. r.X. Id, 
 Andr. 593, 14. ^avepas enrev on rj peu irokts a-<j>av TfT€lj(ia'Tai 
 ^Sij, he said that their city had already been fortified. Thuc. I, 91. 
 'AiTOKpivaptvoi on jre p\jrovatv npea^eis, fv6vs dTrrjWa^av. Id. I, 
 90. (Cf. on 7rpd|oi, quoted above from the same chaptef.) 
 
 Htdeorav on Toiis airfvcyKovras olKcras i^airi](Topev. Dem. Onet. 
 I, 870, 11. ('E|aiTij(rot/i€K might have been used.) '^roKpa Xeyeii/ 
 as imep vpav e\6povs efj} eavrov eiXKViTe Kal vvv ev Tois eaxarois 
 ea-Ti Kivhivots. Id- Andr. 611, 10. 
 
 (Indirect Questions.) 'Hparriffv airovTi noiolrj (ornTroiei), 
 he asked him what he was doing; i. e. he asked tI Trotf is; 'Hpamja-eu 
 avTov n ireTToirjKas elrj (or rt •jreiroir] k€v^, he asked him what he 
 had done j i. e. he asked n tt e tt o i ?/ k a s ; ' Hparrjacv avrov n Troirjffoi 
 (or n iToiija-ei.), he asked him what he should do; i. e. lie asked tI 
 TTOtrjaets ; 'Hptari/crei' aiirbv n TTOirja-eiev (or W eTroirja-ev^j he 
 asked him what he had done ; i. e. he asked ri inoirjo-as ; 
 
 "Hpero, ei ns ipov € t ij a-o^arepos, he asked whether any one was 
 wiser than I. Plat. Apol. 21 A. (The direct question was tim. 
 TLs tro^aTcpos "O n be TTotrfaoi ov dua-^prfve, but he did not 
 indicate what he would do. Xen. An. H, 1, 23. (The direct question 
 was rl TTOLTjtra ;) 'ETretptuTa, riva devrepov per sKeXvov t S o t , he 
 asked whom he had seen who came next to him. Hdt. I, 31. (The 
 direct question was riva €tSes;) E'lpeTo KoSev Xa/3ot tov iraXba, he 
 asked whence he had received the boy: Id. I, 116. 'Wpmraiv avrov el 
 ivanXevireiev, Tasked him whether he had set sail. Dem. Polycl. 
 1223, 20. (The direct question was avewKevaas ;) 
 
 'Hnopovv n irore Xe'yet, / was uncertain what he meant. PlAT. 
 Apol. 21 B. (Here Xe'yoi might have been used.) 'E/3ouXfuoi/5' 
 eSrot nV avrov KaTa\ei\jrov<riv, they were considering the question, 
 ichom they should leave here, Dem. F. L. 378, 23. 'Epmruvrui/ nvav 
 Uari airedavfv, jrapayyeXKeiv cKeXevev, K. r. X. Xen. Hell. H, 1, 4. 
 
 Kemare 1. After secondary tenses the Indicative and 
 
152 INDIBECT DISCOURSE. [§ 70, 2i 
 
 Optative are equally classic; the Optative being used when 
 the writer wishes to incorporate the quotation enthely into his 
 own sentence, and the Indicative, when he wishes to quote it 
 in the original words as far as the construction of his own 
 sentence allows. The Indicative here, like tlie Subjunctive in 
 final and object clauses after secondary tenses (§ 44, 2), is 
 merely a more vivid form of expression than the Optative. 
 We even find both moods in the same sentence, sometimes 
 when one verb is to be especially emphasized, and sometime* 
 when there is no apparent reason for the change. E. g. 
 
 OStoj IXtyov oT( Ku/iioc fikv Ti6vi}Kcv,'fi.pia'ios hk 7rf0evyiireV 
 T<3 vTaSiio fiTj, Kai Xe'yot, k. t. X. Xen. An. II, 1, 3. (Here 
 TtdvjiKfv contains the most important part of the message.) 'Ek 8e 
 TOVTOV i-nvvQavfTO rjhj) avTcav Ktxi oiroarfv o^bv dtrjXaaav, Ka\ el 
 OLKOLTO f] X^P^' ^^- Cyr. IV", 4, 4. ''EToXfia Xcyetw, as XP^^ "^^ 
 jra/iTToXXa e KTeriKev vjrep efxov Koi a>s TroXXa t&v efiSv Xd^oiev. Dem. 
 Aph. I, 828, 26. (See Rem. 2.) 'Ofioioi Tjaav Bavfia^eai Snoiiton 
 rpe'^ovrai ot'*'EWrjves koX tl iv v& ep^oiev. Xen. An. Ill, 5, 13, 
 
 Remark 2. The Perfect and Future were less familiar forms 
 than the other tenses of the Optative ; so that they were frequently 
 retained in the Indicative after secondary tenses, even when the 
 Present or the Aorist was changed to the Optative. (See the last 
 two examples under Rem. 1.) In indirect questions the Aorist In- 
 dicative was generally retained, for a reason explained in § 21, 2, 
 N. 1. Some writers, like Thucydides, preferred the moods and 
 tenses of the direct form, in all indirect discourse. (See § 44, 2, 
 Rem.) 
 
 Note 1. (a.) An Imperfect or Pluperfect of the direct 
 discourse is regularly retained in the Indicative, after both 
 primary and secondary tenses, for want of an Imperfect or 
 Pluperfect Optative. E. g. 
 
 ^H/efK ayyeXoi Xiytav OTi Tpijjpcis rJKove weptirXeovo'as, he came 
 saying that he had heard, &c. ; i. e. he said iJKovov. Xen. An. I, 2, 
 21, 'AKOvcraff Se Sevofpcav eXeyev OTi opdas ^t lavTO Koi avTo to 
 cpyov avTois fiapTvpotri, he said that tliey had accused him rightly, 
 and that the fact itself bore witness to them; i. e. he said opBm ijria 
 trdc (cai t6 tpyov v/juv fiapTvpel. lb. HI, 3, 12. Ei;(f yap Xfytix. 
 Koi OTL fiouoi Tciv *EX\r]Patv /SaaiXci avvepdxovro iv ttKaraiais, kqX 
 OTi VfTTepov oiidenore aTpaTevtraivTO en I ^aacXea {lie said fiovoi 
 avvefiaxop-tOa, . . . Kai . . . ouSeTrore earTpaTevtrdfieda). Xen. 
 Hell. VII, 1, 34. TovTcav txaiTTOv rip6p.r]v, 'OvrjTopa fuv Koi TijiOKpdTqv, 
 t" nvf! flev fidprvpes &v evavriov rijv upolK dniSocrav, airov S' "A^o- 
 /Sov, fi nvfs rraprjaav or" dircXdfi/Safcv, / asked each of these men, — 
 
§ 70, 2.] INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 153 
 
 Onetor and Timocrates, whether there were any witnesses before whom 
 they had paid the doiory ; and Aphobus, whether there had been any 
 present when he received it. Dem. Onet. I, 860, 10. (The two 
 questions were ela-l iiaprvpis nves ; and napijcrdv rives ;) 
 
 (6.) In a few cases the Present Optative is used after 
 secondary tenses to represent the Imperfect Indicative. The 
 Present may thus supply the want of an Imperfect Optative, 
 as the Present Infinitive and Participle supply the want of 
 Imperfects (§ 15, 3 and § 16, 2). This can be done only 
 when the context makes it perfectly clear that the Optative 
 represents an Imperfect, and not a Present. E. g. 
 
 Toy TiiJLayopav direKretvav, KaTTjyopovvTos rov Aeovros cos oiSre avamj- 
 rovv edeXoi cavra, fierd re UeXoniSov jrdi/ra ^ouXcuotro. Xen. 
 HeU. VII, 1, 38. (The words of Leon were ovrf ffva-Krjvovv rjdeXe 
 /inly perd T€ XleX. ivdvra i^ovXevero •') Ta Treirpaypeva dtrjyovvro, 
 on avToX pev eTTi rots jroXepiots nXeoteVy rrjv 6e dj/aipeaiv rmv vavayajv 
 irooard^aiev dvSpdcnv iKavots. lb. I, 7, 5. (The direct discourse 
 was avroi pev cirKeopcv, rr/v 8e dvalpeinv Trpoa-erd^apev.) Kat poi 
 Trdvres direKpivavro Kaff eKaarov, on ovde\s pdprvs Trapelij, Kopl- 
 ^oLTo 8e Xap^dvtav KaO' onotrovovv Seoiro "A(j>o^os Trap* auTMi/, they 
 replied, that no witness had been present, and that Aphobus had received 
 the money from them, taking it in such sums as he happened to want. 
 Dem. Onet. I, 869, 12. (The direct discourse vras oiSeXs pdprvs 
 Traprjv, e Kopl^ero 5c Xap^dvav Kaff oTFOtrovovv heoiro, Uapeirj con- 
 tains the answer to the question e'l rives Trapija-av in the preceding 
 sentence, which is quoted as the last example under a. The Im- 
 perfect in the question prevents the Optatives used in the reply 
 from being ambiguous.) So Plat. Rep. IV, 439 E. 
 
 Note 2. In indirect discourse after secondary tenses, each 
 tense of the Indicative or Optative is to be translated by itt 
 own past tense, to suit the English idiom. Thus eXnev on 
 ypdcfioi (or ypd<f>ti) \% he said that he was writing ; tvnev on 
 yfypatpiis tii/ (or yeypa^ev) is he said that he had writtni. 
 
 In a few cases the Greek uses the same idiom as the Eng- 
 lish, and allows the Imperfect or Pluperfect to stand irregu- 
 larly with on or as after a secondary tense, where regularly 
 the Present or Perfect (Optative or Indicative) would be re- 
 quired. In such cases the context must make it clear that 
 the tense represented is not an Imperfect or Pluperfect (Note 
 I, a). E. g. 
 
 "Ev TToXA^ dnopia rjaav ol "EWrfves. evvonvpevoi pev on fTTi rats 
 ^aaCKeas dipais r/arav, kvkXo) Se avTo'is . ■ . TioKeis iroXeHiiu iaav 
 
 7* 
 
154 INDIRECT DISCOUHSB. ['§ 70, 2 
 
 ayopav 8e ovdfir en vape^ecv efieWev, airelxo" 8e rrjs EXXaOo* 
 oil fjuitov T) jxipia crradia, ....irpovhehiiKfCrav 8e uuroui (cai » 
 ^dp^apoi, jwvoi 8e xaraXeXftfi^ei/oi ^aav ovSi irrTTfa ovStva 
 avfipaxov txovres. Xen. An. Ill, 1 , 2. (In all these cases the dh-ect 
 discourse would be in the Present or Perfect Indicative.) A.eyoa* 
 8' aiiTot yvStvai f <^' m exa>pft,itis said that he knew for what he wm 
 coming, Thuc. I, 134. (Here x<^P°''-l "'^ X^P" would be the regular 
 form.) 4ia Tov xS'Ctvbv avBpamov, oy rjfias bifhver, e^awaTwv xal 
 \eyiov cos (fyikadfivaios rj v Koi tclv ^dfjua Trparos KarciTTOt, 1. 6. saying 
 <j>t\adfivm6s el p. I Koi tAv 2dpa npSiTos KaTfijrov . Amst. Vesp. 
 283. (Here eipi is changed to ^v, and not to etj/ : Karemov could 
 have been changed only to KarfiVoi.) 
 
 In these examples the principle usually observed in indirect dis- 
 course, — that the tenses employed in the quotation denote relative 
 not absolute time (§ 9), — is given up, and the Imperfect and Plu- 
 perfect denote absolute time, as in causal sentences (§ 81, 1), See 
 § 81, 2, Rem. 
 
 Note 3. (a.) An indirect quotation, with its verb in the Opta- 
 tive after on or ms, is sometimes followed by an independent sen- 
 tence with an Optative, which continues the quotation as if it were 
 itself dependent on the on or is. Such sentences are generally 
 introduced by yap. E. g. 
 
 'Hkouok 8' tyayc nvav mr ouSe Tois "XifUvas koi ray ayopas en 
 dutaoLev avTa Kapnovadai' ra yap Koiva ra QeTTa\aiv airo Tovnav deal 
 dtoiKciv, for (as they said) they must administer, &c. Dem. 01. I, 15, 
 22. ' ArrfKpivavTO aira on divvara <T(j>liTiv eii; TroieiK d jrpoicaXf trat 
 &vev 'Adrjvalcov' 7rai8es yap a(l>Q>v Koi yvvalKes trap eKeivois eirja-av, 
 Thuc. H, 72. "EXeyov OTi navTos a|ia Xe'yot SevBr/s' ;^«/t6«' yap 
 eiJi, K.T.X. Xen. An. VH, 3, 13. 
 
 (b.) Such independent sentences with the Optative are sometimes 
 found even when no Optative precedes, in which case the context 
 always contains some allusion to another's thought or expression. 
 E.g. 
 
 'Yweaxero rhv av8p 'ApfaioTr rovbe ^jjX&o'eiv ayav' oToiTc p.t9 
 ftdXitrff eKovaiov \a0a}Vy el prj 3e\oi 8', aKovra, i. e. he thought (a5 he 
 said), &c. Soph. Phil. 617. 'AXXa yap oiSiv n ^aXXov ^v dddvarov, 
 dWa Kai avTo to els dvdpavov irmfia eXdelv dpxrj ?ji> aJTrj o\e6pou, 
 &a'Trep voaos' Koi raKanrtapovpevtj re 817 tovtov tov ^iov foJi;, Kai 
 reXeurao'd ye ev t^ xaXovpcva davdno ajroXXuoiTO, and (according 
 to the theory) it lives in misery, Sj-c, and finally perishes in what is 
 called death. Plat. Phaed. 95 D. (Plato is here merely stating 
 the views of others. For the Imperfects in the first sentence, see 
 § ] 1, Note 6.) 
 
 § 71. When a question in the direct form would be 
 expressed by an interrogative SvJyunctive (§ 88), indirect 
 
§ 71.] rtfTEEKOGATITE SUBJUNCTIVE. 155 
 
 questions after primary tenses retain the Subjimctive ; 
 after secondary tenses the Subjunctive may be cither 
 changed to the same tense of the Optative or retained 
 in its original form. E. g. 
 
 Upbs aficjioTepa diropci^ TavTt]v ff 07r<os exdcS Koi toW oirodev 
 8 1 o I K «5 , / am at a Ioks on both questions, how I shall give her a dowry 
 (irws Tainiv e'/cdm;), and whence 1 shall pay other expenses (rrodev 
 raXXa SloikH;). Dem. Aph. I, 834, 18. BouXeuofuu OTtms ere 
 a nob pa, I am trying to think how I shall escape you (jrms o-e arroSpm ;). 
 Xen. C3T. I, 4, 13. OvK €xta n X ey 01 , / know not what I shall say. 
 Dem. Phil. Ill, 124, 24. So in Latin, non habeo quid dicam. In 
 Aesch. Prom. 470, ovk e)(a> crdc^iff-fi' oto) . . . airaXXayra may be 
 explained on this principle as interrogatiTe ; or by § 65, 1, N. 3, as 
 a relative clause. Ov yap Sj) fit* aireipiav ye ov epfjfrets e\eiv o ti 
 ftirjis , for it is not surely through inexperience that you will declare 
 that you know not what to say (i. e. ti etTra;). Dem. F. L. 378, 4. 
 So T» 8(5 and off S(S. Xen. An. 1, 7, 7. Ta Se fWrn/iaTo ovk 018' 
 tl Xpva-dvTa tovtcd da, I do not know whether I shall give them, &c. 
 Id. Cyr. Vill, 4,'l6. 
 
 '£v 8^ 01 ^Top .... fieppfjpi^ev, rj o ye , < . roi'v p-^v dva<rT^(reieu, 
 i 8' 'Arpetdiji/ evapi^oi, r/e ;^oXoi' naiaeiev, ipT/Tvireif re 6vpov. 
 Q. I, 1 9 1 . (The direct questions were 7-oiis p.ev avaarfiaa, 'hrpei- 
 hrjv 8' evapi^a; — rje iravtra, iprjTvaa re;) KXrjpovs ndWov, 
 VTnroTepos drj irpoaOev df^e irj ^dXKeov ey^os, i. e. they shook the lots, to 
 decide which should first throw his spear, the question being irorepos 
 TrpoaBev d<j>g ; 11.111,317. 'ETrr/povTO, el irapaSolev KopivBiois rfiv 
 jrdXii», they asked lohether they should give up their city, the question 
 being irapaha pev rqv woXtu ; Thuc. I, 25. *Ej3ouXei;oi'To ei Ta 
 <rKevo(f)6pa €VTav6a ayoivro ^ dTTtoieu eVi to arpaToiredov. XeN". 
 An. 1,10,17. (So An. I, 10, 5.) 'Hiropeiori xP^'TO'to T9 rrpd- 
 
 Jpan, he was at a loss' how to act in the matter, i. e. n xPW"!'^^ > 
 d. Hell. VII, 4, 39. Ov* yap ei^ppev , . . , onas hpavres KCLKas 
 trpd§atpev, for we could not see how we should fare well, if we did 
 it. Soph. Ant. 272. 
 
 ' taropeoVTOs Se ;8a<riXeos o rt ;(p^(r7;T-ai ra irapeovrt wpfiypan, 
 EttwiXti^s ^\Se 01 is Xdyous. Hdt. VU, 213. 'Hto/j/jcte pev oirore- 
 pa<Te dLaKivdwevcrj x^pfjaaS' Thuc. I, 63. Oi HXaraiTJs cjSou- 
 AevovTO ftre KaTaKavtra(rtvaa'7repexovirLV,e'iT€Tia.Woxp^<rav- 
 raj, whether they should burn them as they were, or deal with them in 
 some other way. Id. 11, 4. "Ajrop^irai/T-ei ojrg KadoppiaravTai, eg 
 Hparriv ttjv vr)(Tov eirXevaav. Id. IV, 13. 
 
 Kbmark 1. The context must decide whether the Optative in 
 indirect questions represents a Subjunctive (§ 7ji) or an Indicative 
 (§ 70, 2). The distinction is especially important ivhen the Aorist 
 Optative is used (§ 21, 2, N. 1). See also § 74, 2, N. 1. 
 
 Bemabe 2. When the leading verb is in the Optative with 3t>, 
 
156 INDIRECT DISOOURSB. L§ ^^ 
 
 the Optative may be used in indirect questions of tlais class. Sp-b 
 examples in § 34, 3. 
 
 Note 1. The particle commonly used in the sense of whether in 
 indirect questions is ti, which can introduce a Subjunctive, as weU 
 as an Indicative or Optative. (See Xen. Cyr. VIII, 4, 16, quoted 
 above.) 'Edv cannot mean whether; and when this introduces a 
 clause resembling an indirect question, the expression is really a 
 protasis, with an apodosis suppressed or implied (§ 53, N. 2). E. g. 
 
 El Sf (Tot fiTf doKei, (TKeyjrai iav robe croi fihWov ap^fTKrj' tpruMi yap 
 cya TO v6tJLiij,ov SUmov elvai. Xbn. Mem. IV, 4, 12. (The meanmg 
 here is, but if that does not please you, examine, in case this shall suit 
 you better (that then you may adopt it) ; and not, look to see whether this 
 suits you better. It' tap apiaKji is an indirect question, it can represent 
 no form of direct question which includes the av. Even apecTK^ 
 alone could not be explained as an interrogative Subjunctive, by 
 § 88.) 'Eav dpetrKji in the passage just quoted is similar to iav 
 fvhei^i)fic6a in Plat. Rep. V, 455 B: Bou'Xfi ovv hfiipsBa tov ra 
 TotavTa dvTLheyovTOs dKo\ov6^(rai rjplv, idv jrcas fjijtels eKeiva evdet- 
 ^atfif 6a, on oiideu foriv €7riTrj8fVfia Idtov ; shall we then ask the one 
 V'ho makes such objections to follow us, in case we can in any way show 
 him that, &c. ? See Xen. An. II, 1, 8; and Arist. Nub. 535. 
 (Such sentences belong under § 53, N. 2. See also § 77, 1, c.) 
 
 Note 2. Ei ke with the Subjunctive in Homer sometimes forms 
 an indirect question, representing the Epic Subjunctive with lee in 
 the direct question. (See § 87, Note.) E. g. 
 
 MevfTf o(^pa idrjT at k ijfiptp V7re po'xv X^'^P^ Kpovlaiu; are you 
 waiting that you may see whether the son of Kronos will hold his hand 
 to protect youf II. IV, 249. (The direct question would be un-ep- 
 irxn Kf x"P" <■) Here the ke always belongs to the verb, so that this 
 Epic construction is no authority for the supposed Attic use of id» 
 and the Subjunctive in the same sense. See Note 1. 
 
 § 73. When the verb of the direct discourse stands 
 with av in tlie Indicative or Optative (forming an apo- 
 dosis), the same mood and tense are retained in indi- 
 rect quotations with oti and <b9 and in indirect questions, 
 after both primary and secondary tenses. (See § 69, 2.) 
 E.g. 
 
 Ae'yft on tovto &v iyivtro, he says that tJiii would halt happened: 
 iXeytv oTi Tovro &u iyevtro, he said that tJiis would have happened. 
 Af'yei (or ?Xf ys w) on oStos BiKaias &v Bdvoi, he says (or said) thai 
 this man would justly be put to death. 
 
 (ef/iiOToxXijr) direKpivaro, on otSt & v avrbs 2fpt0tos &i> imfuuTToi 
 iyivfTo oOt cKcivos 'AStjuaios, he replied that he should not havt 
 
J 73, l.J iNFrNiTivE. 157 
 
 become famotis himself if he had been a Seriphian, nor would the other 
 J he had been an Athenian. Plat. Rep. I, 330 A. 'Evvodrf, on 
 ^TTOv hv CTTaais eXrj ivos ap-j(OVTos ^ TroXXwv. Xen. An. VI, 1, 29. 
 AirsKaivaTO, otl irpoirdev hv diroddvotev iy ra OTrXa TrapaboirjiTav, 
 'b. II, 1, 10. (The direct discourse was TrpoaQev hv aivo6avoi- 
 uev.y HapeXdaiv tis Sfi^dra, i)s oi SeTToXoi vvv ovK hv iXevdepoi 
 yivoiVTO aap,(voi DkM. 01. II, 20, 18. OuS' eiSeWi ^j/tri tI ht 
 . voitAv vjxiv ^apitraiTo. Id. F. L. 356, 13. Ovk e)^Q} tls hv yevoi 
 yav. Aesch. Prom. 905. So 907. 'Hparav ci Solev hv Toirai 
 n TTUTTa. Xek. An. IV, 8, 7. 
 
 Note. The same rule applies when a secondaiy tense of the 
 Indicative in apodosis with av omitted (§ 49, 2, N. 2) is quoted. 
 E.g. 
 
 ("EXeyew) on .... Kpetrrov rj v air^ Tore dirnSaveiv, he said that it 
 were better'for him to die at once. Lys. X, p. 117, § 25. (The direct 
 discourse was KpetrTov rj v (xoi.) 
 
 § 73. 1. When the Infinitive is used in the indirect- 
 quotation of a simple sentence, which had its verb in 
 the Indicative (with or without av') or the Optative 
 (with av), tlie verb is changed in the quotation to the 
 same tense of the Infinitive, after both primary and 
 secondary tenses. If av was used in the direct dis- 
 course, it must be retained with the Infinitive. 
 
 The Present and Perfect Infinitive here represent the 
 Imperfect and Pluperfect (as well as the Present and 
 Perfect) Indicative. (§ 15, 3 ; § 18, 3, Rem.) E. g. 
 
 *ijo-i ypa(f>eiv, he says that he is writing ; t^r) ypacbeiv, he said that 
 le was vyi-iling ; (fsricret ypd<petv, he mil say that he is (then) writing. 
 (The direct discourse is here ypdcf/m.') iijcri (e<|n;) ypd^eiv av, el 
 fSvvaTO, he says (or said) that he should now be writing, if he were 
 able. (He says cypa(f>ov av.) ^rjtrX (.e<pri) ypd(j}ei,v hv, €i SvvaiTo, 
 lie says (or said) that he should write, if he should (ever) be able. (He 
 says y pd(\>oip.i av.) 
 
 *i)o-l ypdyj/ai, he says that he wrote ; ecfiri ypdyjfai, he said that he had 
 written ; (jyijo-ci ypdijrai,, he will say that he wrote. (He says typa-^a. 
 See § 23, 2.) *7)o-i (e'<;f»)) ypd-^ai hv, fi iSvvtjdri, he says (or said) 
 that he should have written, if he had been able. (He says eypayjra 
 oil.) 0r]aX (f<l>ri) ypd-^ai hv, fl dvvrjBeiri, he says (or said) that lie 
 should write, if he should (ever) be able. (He says ypd'^aip.i dv.) 
 
 *ijo-t (<\>t]aei) yfypa(l>evai, he says (or will say) that he lias written ; 
 tijiTf yeypa^e'vai, he said that he had written. (He says yeypa<jia.) 
 For the Perfect with av, see below. 
 
 *i;<ri ((j)rjtrti) ypdijfetv, he says (or will say) that he wUl torite ; f<j)tf 
 y/id^eif, lie said tJiat lie would wrile^ (He says yod^a.) 
 
158 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 73, 1. 
 
 (Present.) 'Appaa-rtlv 7rpo<f>a(rlCeTai, he pretends that he ts sick. 
 'R^m/ioa-ev appmareiv tovtovi, he took his oath that thii man wan 
 sick. Dem. F. L. 379, 15 and 17. Ouk ei^7 avrbs dW iKctvov 
 a-Tparriyelv, he said that not he himself, but Nicias, was general; 
 i, e. he said, ovk iya> aiVor dXV ixflvos (rTparrjyel. ThuC- Iv, 28. 
 Tiva^ TTOT ev-j^as VTToKafifictv^r ev^e aSat tov ^Iktmrov ot e<T7r€voep; 
 what prayers do you suppose Philip made, &c. ? Dem. F. L. 381, 10. 
 (Eijxe<T6ai here represents rjvxfTo: for other examples of the Im- 
 perfect, see § 15, 3.) Oipat yhp &v ovk axopiortof fiat exei") fof i 
 think it would not be a thankless labor ; i. e. ouk hv ex"'- -Sen. An. 
 n, 3, 18. Oieo-^f yap rbv narepa .... ovk &v (jiv^drTeiu Ka'i tjjv 
 TiHTjv \ap.^dveiv tS>v itcoKovfi^viav ^i\a>v, do you think thathe wovid 
 not have taken care and have received the pay, &c. ? i. e. ovk hv 
 ((jivXaTTcv Koi iXd/i^avev! Dem. Timoth. 1194, 20. (See 
 §41,1.) 
 
 ( Aorist.) KaTaa'x^^" (l>l<ri tovtovs, he says that he detained them. 
 Tout 8' aiXpaKarovs ovS' evdv ntjdfjvai (pijo'i. \v<Taadai, but he says 
 thai he did not even think of ransoming the prisoners. Dem. F. L. 353, 
 14 and 18. (He says Kareaxov, and oiS' ivc6vitfi8r]v.) 'O Kupos 
 Xiyerai yevecrdai Kafi^vaiai, Cyrus is said to have been the son of 
 Cambyses. Xkn. Cyr. I, 2, 1. Tois 'Adrjvatovs ^m^fv la-as av 
 tTre ^eXdelv Koi Trjv yrjv ovk &v ire piidelv Tp-rjOrfi/ai, he hoped that 
 the Athenians would perhaps march out, and not allow their land to 
 belaid wastes i.G.ta-oos hv eire^eXBoav Kai ovk &v Trepilboiev, 
 ThUC. II, 20. 'Air^eaav vop.iaavT€s prj hv ert iKavoi ye veaOdi 
 KcoXvaai rov rei)(i(Tii6v. Id. VI, 102. (Here ovk av yevoliieda would 
 be the direct form. (See § G9, 5.) Sol, 139. Ovk av ^yflo-6' avrbv 
 K&v ijri&pafieiv, do you not believe that (in that case) he would 
 have run thitherf i. e. ovk &v ijrihpap.€v; Dem. Aph. I, 831, 12. 
 (See § 41, 3.) 
 
 (Perfect.) ^ritriv avrbs alrios yeyev^frdai., he says, a'irios y e -y e - 
 vr]p.at. Dem. F. L. 352, 26. EtKofov rj BiaiKOVTa oi)(ea6at 7j Kara* 
 XTjifroficvuv Ti wpocXrjXaKcvai. Xen. An. I, 10, 16. (Their 
 thought was ij Siwkwv oi^eTai, ^ . . . jrpoeX^XaKei». See § 10, 
 N. 4.) *E0»; )(pr]p.a6' eavra Toiis Qrj^aiovs i7riK€Kr]pvx^vai, he said 
 that the Thebans had offered a reward for him. Dem. F. L. 347, 26. 
 For examples of the Perfect Infinitive with av, representing the 
 Pluperfect Indicative and the Perfect Optative, see § 41, 2. 
 
 (Future.) 'KitayyiWerai to. SUaia TTOi^o-eiv, he promisea to 
 do what is right. Dem. F. L. 356, 10. So H. I, 161. *E<^?; iinbi 
 i]p.fpa>v eiKouiv fj a^fiv AaxedaLfiOviovs feoirras fj avTov diroKTCvelv, 
 he said that within twenty days he would either bring them alive or kill 
 them where they were. Thuc. IV, 28. (Cleon said $ a^a . . . fj 
 ajTOKTevw.) Tavra (^rjcrl) ireir pd^t o'Bai dvoiv ij rpiiiv ifptpav, 
 he says that this will have been accomplished within two or three days. 
 Dem. F. L. 364, 18. (See § 29, Note 6.) For the rai-e Future In- 
 finitive with av, see § 41, 4. 
 
 Remark. For the meaning of each tense of the Infinitive in 
 indirect discourse, see § 15, 2; § 18, 8; § 23, 2; and § 27. It wili 
 
S 73, 2.] PARTICIPLE. 159 
 
 bo seen that these tenses (especially the Aorist) in this use differ 
 essentially from the same tenses in other consttuctions ; it is there- 
 fore important to ascertain in each case to which class the Infinitive 
 Belongs. This must be decided by the context ; but in general it 
 may be stated that an Infinitive stands in indirect discourse, when 
 it depends upon a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, 
 and when ako the thought, as originally conceived, would have been 
 expressed by some tense of the Indkalive (with or without av) or of 
 the Optative (with av), which can be transferred without change of 
 tense to the Infinitive. (See § 15, 2, N. 1, which appUes only tp 
 fce Infinitive without &.) Thus Xcym airov cXdelv means / say that 
 ie came ; but /SouXeTot e\6eiv means he wishes to come, where eXfltiK 
 18 merely an ordinary Infinitive, belonging under § 23, 1. In the . 
 former case eXfleiv represents rfKBev, but in the latter case it repre- 
 jents no form of the Aorist Indicative or Optative, and is therefore 
 not in indirect discourse. So with the Infinitive after all verbs of 
 commanding, advising, wishing, and others enumerated in § 92, 1. 
 
 2. When the Participle with the sense of the Infini- 
 tire (§ 113) is used in the indirect quotation of a 
 simple sentence, it follows the rules already given for 
 the InfinitiTB (§ 73, 1), in regard to its tense and the 
 use of av. E. g. 
 
 'AyyeXX« roirovs ipxafiivovs, he announces that they are com- 
 *''g! vyyeiXc roirovs e pxoficvovs, he announced that they were 
 coming. (The announcement is olroi epxovrai.') 'AyyeXXti 
 roirovs i\66vras, he announces that they came; ^yyciKf roirovt 
 i\66vras , he announced that they had come. (The announcement 
 is 5 X 6 o K .) 'AyytXXf I roirovt eXrjXvdoras, he announces that they 
 are come ; ^yyeCKe roirovs eXriXvdoras, he announced that they were 
 tome. (The announcement is i\rj\i6aa-iv.) 'AyyeXXf i (^yyciXe) 
 Tovro yevija-6fi€vov, he announces (or announced) that this is (or 
 was) about to happen. (He announces rovro yeVT]a-erai.) 
 
 Toll 7-f yap iiTix^ipriftainv impiov ov KaropBovvrcs xai rovs arpar 
 naras dx^ofievovs rrj fiovfj, they saw that they were not succeeding, 
 and that the soldiers were distressed; i. e. they saw, ov Karopdoviiev 
 Kai oi arpariavai axSovrai. ThcC. VII, 47. ^'Ep.pevop.tv oXs atpjy 
 Voytjirafiev Sixaiais ova-iv; do we abide by what we acknowledged to 
 ie just (i. e. Sixaia ea-rw) ? Plat. Crit. 50 A. JlavB' ivexa eoDToO 
 voicov i^ekrjKeyKrai, he has been proved to be doing everything for his 
 »wn interest. Dem. 01. II, 20, 12. Ai™ KCpov trrpareiovra 
 irparos ijyyeCKa, I first announced to him that Cyrus was marching 
 against him. Xkn. An. II, 3, 19. See Soph. O. T. 395. 
 
 E/irLarajjievQi koi rov ^dp^apov avrov irepl avra to TrXfica tr^a- 
 \evra, Kol TTpbs avrovs rovs Adrjvaiovs ttoXXo r]p.ds ^drj rois dpapr 
 rtifiaa-iv avTav fjiaKKov rj rij d(j)' vfimv Ti/uopla Trepiyfyfvr)fiiVOVS. 
 Thuc. I, 69. (The direct discourse would be o ^dp^apos • . . 
 talfta^ri, koi ^/lelg . . . nepiyeyemi^Ba.) So in the sjuue chapteTt 
 
160 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ '^^' 2' 
 
 rAv MrjSnv airoitcrnev fK TTfipaTcov yrjs em rriv TIc\ojr6vvr]<TOV iXBovra, 
 i. e, 6 M^Sor ^A^fv. Qv yap ^ieaav airbv re BvriKora, for they did 
 not know that he tvas dead (i. e. TiBvrfKev). Xen. An. I, 10, 16. 
 'ETreSet^a ovbtv a\T)6es dwrjyyeXKoTa aWa (^fvaKiuav6* v^asy I have 
 shown that he has reported nothing that is true, and that he deceived 
 you. (Perf. and Aor.) Dem. F. L. 396, 30. 
 
 El fu jfSeLv Kot rfjv trv^^iaxiav fxoi yevrja-ofievrjv, if I were sure that 
 I should obtain an alliance also (i. e. crvfiixaxia fiot yevfjo-frat). lb. 353, 
 25. So Xen. Hell. IV, 7, 3. 'O S' aurofjieiXav dfi^Xircpos, el8a>s oiiK 
 €s X*^P'^ dXX' is ocfyelXrjfia rrfv dperrjv aTTodaxrcdi', knowing that he shall 
 return the benefit, &c. Thuc. II, 40. Tvovres ovt dn-oKcaXvo-fii' bvva- 
 To\ owes , et t' dnop-ovcadrja-ovTai ttjs ^Vjx^da-eais, KifdwevaovTeSi 
 Ttoiovvrai onoKoylav. Id. Ill, 28. (The direct discourse would be 
 oCre dvvaToi eafiev, €i T d7TOiiovta6r]a'6fie6a, Kivbvvevo-oiiev,') 
 
 Eu 8' "laBi pj)8ev av fie tovtcov eni,xeipr]<ravTa ae netdciv, el 
 dvvaoTeiav [lovov TJ irXovrov eMpcav e^ avrav ye i/rjaofievov . IsOC. 
 Phil. p. 109 B. § 133 (Here /iijSev av emxeiprja-avra represents oiSev 
 &v enexelprjaa, § 69, 5; and yevr)(T6fj.evov represents yevr]iTeTcu,.) 
 ^Konavp.evQS ovv evpiarKov ovdafiSis av aXXtos tovto dtanpa^ap-evos, 
 I found that I could accomplish this (Siairpa^aiiirjv &v) in no other way. 
 Id. Antid. p. 311 C. § 7. 
 
 Oiras 8e ye Toiis woXefLlovs SvvaurBe xaxas ttoieix, ouk otaBa jxav- 
 Bavovras vfias jroXXas KaKovpyias, do you not know that you learned, 
 &o. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 28. (Here the Optative Sivata-Be, as weU aa 
 the whole context, shows that fiavBavovras represents iiiavBavert, 
 § 16, 2.) MefivrjiMU 8e fymyf /cai naU &v Kpiria riJSe ^vvovra ae, I 
 remember that you were with thli Critias. Plat. Charm. 156 A. 
 (^vvovra represents ^vvrjada.') See § 16, 2, and the examples. 
 
 Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences. 
 
 § 74. Wlien a compound sentence is to be indi- 
 rectly quoted, its leading verb is expressed according to 
 the rules given for simple sentences (§§ 70-73). 
 
 1. If the quotation depends on a primary tense, all 
 the dependent verbs of the original sentence retain the 
 moods and tenses of the direct discoiirse. 
 
 If the quotation depends on a secondary tense, aU 
 dependent verbs of the original sentence which in the 
 direct discourse stood in the Present, Perfect, or Future 
 Indicative, or in any tense of the Subjunctive, may (at 
 the pleasure of the writer) either be changed to the 
 
§74, 1. J OOMPOUND SENTENCES. 161 
 
 same tenses of the Optative, or retain both the moods 
 and tenses of the direct discourse. The Optative is 
 the more common form. B. g. 
 
 (After primary tenses.) *Xv 8' vjxeii Xf'yi/rf, iroir^treiv (jj>r\<TX) 
 fiT]T alaxyvvv firfT ddo^iav avra <j)e pel. Dkm. F. L. 354, 8. (Here 
 no change is made, except from jroii'/o-ei to noifia-eiv.) No/iifco yap, 
 av TovT dicpi^ais /xd^jjre, /xaXXoi/ vpas tovtols p-iv dir LCTT^aeiv 
 ipm 8e fioridrjo-etv. Id. Onet. I, 870, 27. 'Eav eKfivo fibaipxv, 
 OTi airavTa oaa TTanror' rj'KTria-a p.ev rtva irpd^etv uirsp rjpav KaO' T)pa)V 
 cvprjTat., . . . Katf pr) vvv e 6 sXapev fxet TroXe/ieZy avra^ evBdS' 'latas 
 dvayKa(r$rjor6 peda tovto vrotely, k. t X. 1(1. Pliil. I, 54, 18. IIpo- 
 ^eyto OTly OTTQTep av djTO KpivrjTai^ e^eXey^OtjOreraL. Plat. Euthyd, 
 275 E. See 1)em. Mid. 536, 1, where two such conditional sen- 
 tences depend on et irpi'hriKov yeyotro. (See § 34, 3.) 
 
 Opco fTol TQVTcov Seijcov, oTav iir iBv prjO'rj s <f>L\iav Trpos Ttva^ 
 TTOtelaSai, Xbn. Mem. II, 6, 29. napaSeiypa cracfiis KaTaarrjiraTe, 6i 
 ai/ at^iorijrat, Oavdro} ^rjfiiaaopiuov* TllUC. Ill, 40. Sei 
 § 73, 2. 
 
 (Opt. after secondary tenses.) Kwre on civSpa ciyoi ov elp§ai. Sect 
 he said that he wax bringing a man whom it was necessary to confine , 
 i. e. he said Mpa aya> ov flp^ai Sri. Xkn. Hell. V, 4, 8. 'Ave 
 Kplvaro OTL p,avddvoiev ol pavOdvovrts a ovk iiriCTTaivTO^ 1. e. Jit 
 replied., pavddvova-i a ouk eVioTavrai. Plat. Euthyd. 276 E. (Here 
 a has a definite antecedent, § 59, and is not conditional; it takes the 
 Optative only because it is in indirect discourse. So with Sv in the 
 preceding example.) 'AyrjcriXaos eXcyev on, ci B\a^epd Treirpaj^aii 
 eiri, iiKaios f'lrj (rjpwvirdai, i. e. he said ci f!Xafiepd iteTs pa^f, 
 biKams ka-Ti fTj/tioOo-flat. Xen. Hell. V, 2, 32. So An. VI, 6, 25. 
 
 £t Se Tiva <^evyQvTa \r}yjrotTO , Trporyyopevet otl o)s TroXe/xtu XPV 
 a-oiTo. Id. Cyr. HI. 1, 3. (This is a quotation of a conilitioua* 
 sentence belonging under § 50, 1, N. 1 ; 1 1 tiko \ij\j,'opai,, . . . xPW° 
 /uu.) Fvovres 8e . . . OTt, ei duxroiev evdvvas., K£i/(^vi ei'trote ' 
 airoKecrOai, iripirorvaiv Kai SiBd(TKov<Tiv Toiis 6i)/3ai'our as, el i,r) tTTpa' 
 Tevaotev , Kivdwevaoiev oi 'ApKades irdXiv XaKcovicrai. Id. HeK 
 Vll, 4, 34. (See § 32, 2.) *HiSfi yap on, el pdyijs ttoti dvijcroi, EC 
 TOVTcov avTa TrapacrTaTas \r)iTTeov eli) . Id. Cyr. VIU, 1, 10. 
 (The direct discourse was et n defjaei, . . . "kijirTeov eariv) 
 
 *E\oyi^ovro as, el imtj p.d\oivTO, diroaTrjaoLvTO al TreptotKiSe' 
 iroXftf. Id. Hell. VI, 4, 6. ('Eaw prj pa-)(ape6a, dnoiTTria'ovTai.^ 
 XprjpaS' VTCicr}(ve'LTO bixreiv, el roO irpdyparos alriavTO epe. Dem. 
 Mid. 548, 20. {Aaxra, edv alndtySe.) 'HyeiTo yap dirav TTOtrjtre tP- 
 avTov, £t Tis dpyipiov StSoir/. Lys. in Erat. p. 121, § 14. Et^avro 
 aaTTjpia 6vaeiv , ev6a Tzparov els cfjiKiav yrjv dtpLKOivTO. Xen. An. 
 V, 1, 1. (The dependent clause is found in the direct discourse in 111 
 2, 9 : doKel pot ev^aaSai ra Bea roiira Qvrreiv a-arrjpia ottov dv irpaTOf 
 els (f>iKiav yfjv d<f> txape 6 a.^ Toiro eTvpaypareieTO vopl^av, Saa 7^i 
 ndkeas IT p o\ d lii 1 , TrdvTa ravra ^e^aias e^eiv. Dem. Cor. 234, 5 
 ("Off &.V jrpoXdjSu, /Se^ai'ws e^a.) 'HXTrifox viro rm -iraiSar, eWeiS^ 
 
162 INDIRECT DISCOUKSB. [§ 74, 1, 
 
 reXcvrrja-etav rhv ^lov, ra<f)r)a-f(r6ai. Ly9. Agor. p. 133. § 45. 
 ('ETTfiSai/ TeKfVTtjcrajxev, TatfyrjO-oiieSa.) Knvtov ihi&aiTKev as outs) (itv 
 7T010VVTL jraaai avra ai TrdXets (j^iKiai eaoivro j et oe oovAovtrdai 
 ^ovKofievos tpavfpos e(roLTo, eXeycv iis fiia inaarri jioKKa npayfuna 
 Uavfj elr) Trape'xfi-v, Koi Kivbvvos fl'i) /*T (tai oi "EXXjjKfr, el raira 
 aiaOoivro, trvaralev. Xen. Hell. I V, 8, 2. 
 
 "En &€ yiyviiaKfiv €<j>a<Tav (pdovovvras fi-h avToiis, fi n (r(j)i(Ttv 
 ayaOov yiyvoiTO, i(l>r)bnficvovs 8, ei Tis (TVfKpopa ■TrpoamTtToi, 
 they said they knew that they were envious if any good came to 
 titem, hut pleased if any calamity befell thein. lb. V, 2, 2. (^dovflre 
 fievj iav Ti ijpXv ayadov yiyvrjrai^ efprjdeo'Oe 8\ edv tls (rvp-Cpopa 
 irpoo-jriffT-j. bee § 51.) Trjv alriav, fj npoSrjXos rjv in cKfivovs 
 ij^ova-a, (t n na6oi. Xapihr)p.os. 1>EM. Aristoc. 624, 20. 
 ("H^ei, iav Tt ivaBj] XapidrjiioS') See § 73, 2. 
 
 (Subj. and ludic. after secondary tenses.) 'EXeyoi' on axpa tc 
 itTTiv fvbov Ka\ 0£ TToXfptOL TToXXot, ol iraiov (Tiv Tovs ev8ov av' 
 BpmiTovs, then said that there was a height, &o. Xen. An. V, 2, 17. 
 (Here eUv and n-ai'oicv might have been used.) 
 
 'Eddut /ioi TavTJj jreipaadai, a^aiBrjvai, ei/dv/wvfieva on, iav /lev 
 \d6a, amdjia-ofiat, k.t.\. Lys. Erat. p. 121, § 15. (Here ti 
 Xd5oi/ii, (ra>$ri(roip.rjV might have been used.) ^diTKiov Tf, rjv a-a>6g 
 oiKaSc, Kara ye to avT<i bvvarov SiaWd^eiv 'Adrjvalovs Koi AoKf- 
 Saifiovlovs, djreVXeuo-fj'. Xen. Hell. I, 6, 7. (He said 5" irada, 
 which might have been changed to el traBel-q.) 'Yjri<TxovTo auroir, 
 ^v ijr\ noTiSaiav tcocriv 'Adtjualoi, is ttjv 'Xttlktiv ia^oKeiv. ThttC. 
 1,58. (*"Hv itiiaiv, icr^oKovp^v.') So ThUC. I, 137. Kal ovk e(l)aaav 
 livat, idv firf tls ainols xpr^iaTa StSu. . . 'O 6' vrrio'xeTQ dvdpl £KaoT^ 
 d(oo-€tv 7revT€ p,vds, iirdv els Ba^vXava rJKoJO't, ica\ tov fiiaOov 
 evTeXrj, fiixpi ^v icaTaaTrjajj Tovs^EWrjvas els ^Icoviav irdXiv. Xen. 
 An. I, 4, 12 and 13. 'Ecftrj xp^""", ■ • ■ ot av iXeyvddcri Sta^aK- 
 "Xovres TOV 'EXXiJi'mi', as vpohoTas ovras TiiiioprjOfjvat. lb. II, 5, 27. 
 
 Et fie p.rij Kai avrol ed)aa-av aiiTotv tovs avbpas dnoKTeveXv ovs 
 exovcri. C^vras- Thuc. 11, 5. ("Ex'itei' might have been used.) Ka- 
 Tao'xla'e IV Tas TruXas e^aa-av, elfijf SKOvres dvol^ovtrtv. Xen. An. 
 VU, 1, 16. (Et pfj dvot^oLev might have been used.) Airois romuTi; 
 dd^a TrapeiaTriKei, i>s, el p.ev TrpoTepov eit aXXiji/ TrdXtK laaiv, eKelvois 
 Kal *A6jjvc^ois TToXe firjo'ovaiv el 6* evddde Trparov dffyi^ovTai, 
 ovdevas oKXovs ToXfiijo-e iv , k.t.X. Ly8. Or. Fun. p. 192, § 22. 
 (T o O T o ) irpodrjXov ijv itrdfievov, el p.r] vp.eis KcoXucrcTe, it was 
 already manifest that this would be so, unless you should prevent it (i. e. 
 effi-ai, fi p,fi (cu)Xtfo-ETe). Aeschin. Cor. § 90. (KuXwo-oiTt might be 
 used ; and KaXioaire, representing idv fu) KmXioTjTe, is found m one 
 Ms. and many editions.) See § 73, 2. 
 
 Note 1. The dependent verbs in indirect discourse may 
 be changed to the Optative, even when the leading verb re- 
 tains the Indicative ; and sometimes (though rarely) a de- 
 pendent verb retains the Subjunctive or Indicative, when the 
 
§ 74, 1.^ COMPOUND SENTENCES. 163 
 
 leadi.ig verb is changed to the Optative. This often gives 
 rise to a great variety of constructions in the same sentence. 
 E. g. _^ ^ 
 
 ArjKoao-as on eToifxot el at nd)(€arBai, ei rts i^epxoiro. XeN. 
 Cyr. IV, 1, 1. (^"EToifioi el(riVj edv rts €^ep)(r)Tdi.^ Av<ravdpos chre 
 ort TvapatTTTovbovs v^ms €)(oi, Koi otl ov Trepi iroKiTetas vfiiv ear at 
 aWa Trepl traTrjpiaSj el /i^ Troiijaaid' a &r]pap.£vrjs KcXeuoi. Lys. in 
 !Erat. p. 127, § 74. (*E;^(», koI ou . . . earat, iav p,f} iroirjarjO^ a ©• 
 KeXeuet. There is no need of the emendations iroirjoreT and /ceXeuet.) 
 EdoKci 8^\ov eivai on alprjorovrat avTov, et ris eTri^jrrjipi^oi, 
 Xen. An. VI, 1, 25. OvK rjyvoei "Ev^ovXidr): on, el Xoyos a.TrodoB^'- 
 troiTOj Koi irapayevoLVTo p-oi iravres ol brjporaL, Koi r] ^T}(pos 
 diKaifOs boOeirff ovBafxov yevrjaovTai ol pera tovtov (rvvetTTrjKOTeS' 
 Dem. Kubul. 1303, 22. (Et a7roSo^i7aeTaE, Koi eav TrapayeVcavra/., sat 
 ylrj}(f>os doBfjj ouda/ioO yevrjtTovrai.^ 'Ayrfaikaos yuovs otl^ el p.ep pT]be~ 
 Tepa CTuXX^i^otTO, pLcOou oitberepos Xixrei toIs "KWrja-iv, dyopap 
 be ovderepos tt a p e | e t , OTrorepos t hv Kparrja-r] , oStos ej(6p6s 
 eo'Tai' ft 6e rro erepta (TvWrjyjroiTo, o^rds ye (J3Lkos ecotro, 
 K.T.X. Xen. Ages. II, 31. 
 
 "EXeyov OTi elKora doKoiev \eyeiv jSafrtXfi, koX rjKOiev ^yrjfiovas 
 exovres, 01 avTovSj eau aTrovdai yevtovTat, a^ovcriv evdev e^ov<ri 
 TO. iirvrriheia. Xen. An. II, 3, 6, 'ETri^pwra, iroia elrj rStv opetov 
 OTTodev ol X.akdaioi KaraQeovres Xtj i^ovraL . Id. Cyr. Ill, 2, 1. 
 TovTOLS irpovK eyov, OTt elpavevo-oio koi wdvTa pdWov Troi-qcois rj 
 dnoKpivoiOj et Tiff ri tre epcara. Plat. Rep. I, 337 A. ('Epwrci 
 in the direct discourse would belong under § 51, N. 3, the Futures 
 denoting a /ia&zV.) *EXe^as on fieyicrTOV ei-q p.a6e\v oirias del e^ep- 
 yd^eadai cKaara * el Se /*i7, ovde r^ff eirtpeXeias e(f>r}a6a odteXos ovbev 
 ylyvetrdai, el fin rty efcioTaiTo a he\ kcu as beX itoielv. Xen. Oecon. 
 XV, 2. 
 
 In Dem. Cor. 276, 23, we have both the constructions of § 74, 1 
 in the same sentence : el p.€v rovTO-TOiv eKeivov avpfidx(ov elarjyoiTo 
 Ttff, VTroyjfe o'BaL ro npaypa ev6p.i^e irdvras^ &v S* ^Adrjvaios tj 6 tovto 
 TToiaVf evTTopas Xrfo-etv. (Here el ela'r)yolTO represents eai/ eicrij- 
 yrJT-at, corresponding to edv rj.) 
 
 Note 2, According to the general rule (§ 69, 4), all relatives 
 and particles which take av and the Subjunctive lose the av when 
 such Subjunctives are changed to the Optative in indirect discourse 
 after secondary tenses. In a few cases, however, the au is irregu- 
 larly retained, even after the verb has been changed to the Opta- 
 tive. This must not be confounded with au belonging to the 
 Optative itself, making an apodosis. E. g. 
 
 OvK ea6* ooTiff ovx rfyelro rmv elBoTcav bUrji/ pe Xrjyjrea-Bai Trap' av' 
 iS>v, eireibdu rdxiora dvr]p elvai boKipaa-deirfV. I)em. Onet. I, 
 S65, 24. (The direct discourse was eireibav SoKi/iao-^Ji ^-nd the 
 regular indirect form would be either ineibr) boKip-aaOeiriv or iweibap 
 boKtpaaBa. Here the verb is changed, while the original particle 
 enetddv ifi retained.) See also § 77, 1, Note 3. 
 
164 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 74, 2 
 
 2. The Imperfect and Pluperfect remain in the In- 
 dicative unclianged, even after secondary tenses, in the 
 dependent (as well as in the leading) clauses of indirect 
 discourse, from the want of those tenses in the Optative. 
 (§ 70, 2, Note 1, a.) 
 
 The Aorist Indicative also regularly remains im- 
 changed after secondary tenses, when it stood in a 
 dependent clause of the direct discourse ; not being 
 changed to the Aorist Optative (as it may be when it 
 stood in the leading clause, § 70, 2). B. g. 
 
 'ErrKTretXat Se crtpiuiv avTols tovs l^opovs (ecjiairav) ctTTCti/, as Si' 
 fieu 7rp6a6ev enoiovv p.efi(f)oivTo avrois, that they sent them to say that 
 they blamed them for what they had done before; i. e. hv irpoaBet 
 eTTOielTe jiefKfiofieda vpXv, Xen. Hell. HI, 2, 6. 
 
 (Aorist Ind.) ^HATrtfov rour ^iKeKovs ravrrj^ oiis fiereire fiyjrav, 
 dTtavTrjaea-Bat, they hoped that the Sikels whom they had sent for 
 would meet them here. Thuc. VII, 80. 'AvreXeyov . . . Xtyoi/res /xn 
 diTTjyyeXdat tto) tqs a-770vbas, or i(T eircji'^av tovs OTrXiTas- Id. V, 
 49. (§ 69, 5.) "EXeyov as S^votpcov ot;^otTO as Sevdrjv oLKrjtxav koi a 
 iiirea'X^'ro avra dTroXTjyjrofifvoS' Xen". An. VII, 7, 55. "EKaarov 
 rjpofir]V, €1 rives eiev fidprvpes Si/ evavrlov Trjv TrpoLK aTTedoaau, 
 Dem. Onet. I, 869, 9. 
 
 Note 1. The Aorist Indicative is not changed to the Aorist 
 Optative in the case just mentioned, as the latter tense in such de- 
 pendent clauses generally represents the Aorist Subjunctive of the 
 direct discourse, so that confusion might arise. Thus €(j)i} a evpot 
 Saatiu means he said that he would give whatever he might find (a 
 fvpoi representing a &v evpa) ; but if a evpoi could also represent 
 & elpov, it miglit also mean he said that he would give what he 
 actually had found. In the leading clause the ambiguity is confined 
 to indirect questions ; and in these the Aorist Indicative is generally 
 retained for the same reason. (See § 70, 2, Rem. 2.) 
 
 When no ambiguity can arise from the change of an Aorist In- 
 dicative to the Optative, this tense may follow the general principla 
 (§ 69, 1), even in dependent clauses of a quotation. This occura 
 chiefly in causal sentences after oti, &c., 6ecau.se (§ 81, 2), in which 
 the Subjunctive can never be used. E. g. 
 
 E'pfE yap Xe'yfii/ mi Aa/ceSai/io'i/ioi hm rovTO ivo'Kfiir]<reiav avrois, on 
 OVK e6c\j)<raifv fier' ' tiyritriKiiov e\6elv eV avrov oiSe 6v(Tm e'd- 
 (Tciav aiiTov tv KvKibi. Xen. Hell. VII, 1. 34. (The direct discourse 
 was eTro\efir](rav fjp.lv, on qvk fjOeXfja-apev . . . ovbe Ovtrat, eid<ra 
 fie v.) ' ATTriyfj(ra<r6ai ((^affi) ms di/oo-iiBTaToi' p,ev eii/ flpya(rp,evos ore 
 rov ddcX(^£oO d IT o r d jLi o I rfiv K((^aKf)v, (ro<\>airarov h^ OTt rouy d)iXdKOU» 
 KarafuOiiras KaraXvo'eic rou d£cX(/>eoD Kpc/id/xcrov rbv vIkvv Udt 
 
t 76.] COMPOUND SENTENCES. 165 
 
 IT, 121, (Heie on KaTaKvtreLc represents on KareKvaa, because I 
 took down; ore dn-orH/ioi- (so the Mss.) may also be understood in a 
 causal sense, si7ice he 'had cut off. Madvig, however, reads on in 
 both clauses.) See also § 77, 1, e, and examples. 
 
 Note 2., The Imperfect or Pluperfect sometimes stands irregu- 
 larly in a dependent (as well as in the leading) clause, after a 
 secondary tense, to represent a Present or Perfect Indicative, which 
 would regularly be retained or changed to the Present or Perfect 
 Optative. Such clauses really abandon the construction of indirect 
 discourse. (See § 70, 2, N. 2 ; § 77, 1, N. 2.) E. g. 
 
 K\eyov oil KoKas Trjv''EWd5a e'Kevdepovu avTov^ fl ai/Bpas Sieipdei- 
 ptv ovTf ^elpat avraipopevovs oure »roXf(iiouf. ThuC. Ill, 32. (Ou 
 KoKSiS eXeu^fpoTy, el Stac^^eipets.) Oure yhp rols Oeois eiprj KaXcos 
 ^x^tv^ el Tois fieyaXais GvcriaLS paXkov fj rals piKpais e)(aLpov. Xex. 
 Mem. I, 3, 3. (Ei xatpova-iv.) Kai etftrj elvai Trap eavra ocrov p^ij ^ v 
 avr]\a)pevov. Dbm. Olymp. 1172, 1. ("Oaov pfj ecrriv avrjXapevov.) 
 A pev elXTjtpct Trjs jroXeas diroSoia-eiv (rjyovpT}v), I thought that he 
 would give back what he had taken from the city ; \. e. a e'i\xj^ev 
 amSaia-ei. Id. F. L. 388, 17. 
 
 § 73. When a dependent clause of the original sen- 
 tence contains a secondary tense of the Indicative im- 
 plying the non-fulfilment of a condition, the same mood 
 and tense are retained in the indirect discourse, after 
 both primary and secondary tenses. E. g. 
 
 'E8ok«, el p^ e(j>da<rav ^vWaPovres Toiis avSpas, 7rpoSo6rjvai hv rr)V 
 iroKiv. Thuc. VI, 61. (If e(^fla(rac had been changed to the Opta- 
 tive, the construction would have become that of § 76.) O'UaBe t6v 
 irarepa, el prj TipoBeov rjv ra ^i\a Km eSerjdr) oSros avrov . . . irapa- 
 tr^eXv TO vaiiXoVj edaai av irore, K. r. X., dXX' ovk &v cfyvXarreiv jcal rf/v 
 Tip^u \ap^dveiv, etos eKOpiaaro ra eavTov. Dem. Timoth. 1194, 
 1 3. ToiiTav e'inriv aKrjBes, o'leirff ovk av avrriv Xa^elv ; Id. Aph. I,' 
 831, 5. 'USeas &v vpav TTvBoiprjv^ riv av Trore yvapTjv irepi epov 
 elxtre, el pfj eiteTpiripapx^aa aXKa iiKeav toxoprjv. Id. Polycl. 
 1227, 2. 
 
 § 76. An Optative in a dependent clause of the 
 original sentence (as in the leading clause) is retained 
 vnthout change of mood or tense in all indirect dis- 
 course. E. g. 
 
 TSlnev on e\6oi &v els \6yovs, el opripovs X d j3 o i . XeN. Hell. Ill, 
 1, 20. 'Httoc &v 8id TovTO Tvyxdvetv (SoKet pot), ei' n. 8eota-6e Trap 
 avTmv. Xen. An. VI, 1, 26. 'EXfyex on ovk av irore Trpoolro, fVei 
 OTraf ^iXor ai' r?is eyevero, oOS' el en pev peiovs yevoivTO en be xd- 
 
166 INDIRECT DISCOTJESE. [§ 76. 
 
 Klov irpd^eiav. lb. I, 9, 10. Actviv av rt nadciv (ravTov ^ni^es, el 
 jridoivd' oStoi to ireirpayufva (7ot. Dem. F. L. 416, 11. 
 
 Remark. Sentences wliich belong under § 76 art, often trans- 
 lated like those which in the direct discourse were expressed by a 
 Future and a dependent Subjunctive, and which belong under § 74, 
 1. Thus e\eycii on eXOoi hv, ei tovto yivoiro (or eXe-yei/ eXfleiv hi, el 
 TovTO yevoiTo), as well as %\eyev on f\fV<roi,TO, et tovto yivoiTO (or 
 tXcyoB eKficretrBm, ei tovto yivoiTo), may be translated he said that he 
 would come if this should happen ; although in the first two sentences 
 tlie direct discourse was sXBoifu av, el tovto yevoiTo, I would come if 
 this should happen ; and in the last two, i\ei(T0juu, iav tovto yeinfrai, 
 I iviU come if this shall happen. 
 
 Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Discourse. 
 
 § 77. The principles which apply to dependent 
 clauses of indirect discourse (§ 74, 1 and 2) apply also 
 to any dependent clause in a sentence of any kind (even 
 when what precedes is not in indirect discourse), if such 
 a clause expresses indireetly the thought of any other 
 person than the speaker, or even a former thought of 
 the speaker himself. 
 
 After primary tenses this never affects the construc- 
 tion ; but after secondary tenses such a clause may 
 either take the Optative, in the tense in which the 
 thought would have been originally conceived, or retain 
 both the mood and the tense of the direct discourse. 
 Here, as in § 74, 2, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and 
 Aorist Indicative are retained unchanged. 
 
 1. This applies especially (a) to clauses depending on the 
 Infinitive which follows verbs of commanding, advising, wish- 
 ing, &a ; these verbs implying thought or the expression of 
 thought, ulthough the Infinitive after them is not in indirect 
 discourse. (See § 73, 1, Rem.) It applies also (6) to the 
 Optative (though not to the Indicative) in causal sentences in 
 which the speaker states the cause as one assigned hy other* 
 (81, 2) ; — (c) to clauses containing a protasis with the apodo- 
 sis implied in the context (§ 53, Note 2), or with the apodo* 
 
§ 77, 1.] SINGLE DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 167 
 
 sis expressed in a verb like Savfid^a, &c. (§ 56) ; — (d) to 
 temporal sentences expressing a past intention or expectation, 
 especially those introduced by eas and irpiv, until, after past 
 tenses (§ 66, 2, Note 1) ; — and sometimes (e) even to ordi- 
 nary relative sentences, which would otherwise take the In- 
 dicative. E. g. 
 
 (a.) 'E/SouXofTO fKdflv, eZ tovto yevoiTo, they wished to go, if this 
 should happen. (Here eav tovto yevijTai might be used, as the 
 form in which the wish would originally be conceived.) TaSarav 8e 
 Kat Tw^pvav fWXfUO'ei' o Ti hivaivTO "KafiovTOS fKToSiaKeiV (cai 
 ocTTts eixe Tas CTrofievas dyeXas, ewre TOVTCp Kal dfia irpo^ara ttoXXoi 
 €\avv€Lv, oTTt] Av avTQV TTVuddvTjTai ocra, as eiTi(T<^ayilri, Xen. Cyr. 
 VII, 3, 7. (Here o ti bvvatvTo represents o ti av hvvrfo-de in the 
 ilirect command, while ovu hv irvv6dvr)Tcu. represents own hv irvvBavrj.) 
 'EfioiXovTo yap trtjiioiv, ti Tiva X d /3 o i e v , virdpxtiv dvTi tS>v evSoi', ^w 
 apaTvxaai nves i^aypripivoi. Thuc. II, 5. ('Hk Xd^mfifj', and ^1/ 
 Tu;(<o(rt.) Oi 8' aXXot Orj^dioi, ovs eBei irapayeveodai, e'i ti p,}) ivpo- 
 Xapoirj Tols caeXriXvBoo'iv, eire^orjBovv. Ibid. ('Edw n pi) irpo- 
 
 UpoeiTTOV avTois prj vavpa^eiv KnpivoLois, rjv pr] tni Ke'pKvpav grXe- 
 aa-i Kai piWaaiv djrojSuiWii/. Id. 1, 45. ('H!/ pr) TrXejjTe (tai 
 ^X\i;Te.) Kal Trap^yyeiXaz' eireLdfj deiTrvrjO'eLav ovveo'Kevao-pevovs 
 Trdvras dvanaveadat, Kal eireodai rjviK av Tts TrapayyeXX?;. Xek. 
 An. Ill, 5, 18. (^EirtiSav demvfjo'riTe, and ijvW av tis jrapayyeXkrj.') 
 Jlepl avTav Kpi/cfja nepTrei, KeXevav . . . p^ dfpelvai irpiv hv avTo\ ttoKiv 
 Kopia-dwa-iv. Tuuc. I, 91. (IIpii/ KopiodeUv might have been 
 used.) Kal TToXXoKts TOLS *Adr]vaLOLS Trapjjvet, rjv apa TFOTe kutci y^v 
 ^laaBcaai, Kara^dvTas es avTov rats vdvat irpos diravTOS dvOioTaoOai, 
 Id. I, 91. (El ^latrBfUv might have been used.) 'H|iou» avroiis 
 fiyepovas O'tpav yeveaBai Kal Ilavoavla pi] eTriTpenetv^ ijv ttov j3id^^Tai, 
 Id. I, 95. (El TTou jSidfotTO might have been used.) 'A(J)ikvovv- 
 Tai as ^LTd\Krjv, ^ovXopevoi ireioai aiiTov^ el dvvaLVTO, orpaTeva'ai 
 €7rl TTjv Hot idacav. Id. li, 67. "ETOtpos ^if dirOTiveiv, el KOTayvoZev 
 aiiTov. Isoc. Trapez. 361 E. § 16. (This example nught be placed 
 also under c.) eIjtov prjdeva t&v oTria-dev KiveioQai, irplv av 6 wpooBtP 
 ^yfjTat, I commanded that no one, &c. Xen. Cyr. II, 2, 8. 
 
 QapriyyiWeTO yap avTois dexa pev oiis Qrjpapevrjs dveSci^f X^'P"" 
 Tovrjo-ai, deKU de ovs ol e<j)opoi KeXevotev. LyS. in Erat. p. 127, 
 § 76. {Oils dnidet^c, and 06s &v KeKivaaiv. See § 74, 2.) 'E(ei'X«uo-c 
 pe Tr)V e'jriaToX^w fjv eypayjfa oiicaSe dovvat, the letter which I had 
 written. XeN. Cyr. II, 2, 9. ("He ypd^aipi would mean whateoer 
 letter I might write, representing rjv &v ypd V'.'?*) ^° °^*'' ri\6ov, 
 Thuc. VII, 27. 
 
 (6.) 'ExaKi^oK oTt arpaTrjybs av o4k erre^dyoi, they abused him 
 because he did not lead them out (as they said). Thuc. II, 21. 
 See other examples under § 81, 2. See also § 81, 2, Rem. 
 (c.) 'QiKTupov, » dXcoo-oicro, they pitied them, in case the) 
 
168 INDIRECT DISCOtJKSE. [§ 77, 1. 
 
 sliould he captured: the idea in full is, Oiey pitied them, thinking of 
 what would befall them if they should be captured, Xen. An. I, 4, 7. 
 (Ej aXaaovTai might have been used.) AiSovrot 8' airm naimoWa 
 bapa Ti6i>av<TT0v, il oTreXdoi, dncKpiiiaTo, offering him many gifts, if 
 he would go away. Id. Ages. IV, 6. ('Eai/ aireKBji might have been 
 used.) <ti\aKas crviinifurei, owas (jjvXaTTOifV avrbv, (cai el tS>v dypiav 
 TKpavflri dtjolav, and (to be ready) in case any wild beasts s/wula 
 appear; his thought being iav n ^avij. Id. Cyr. I, 4, 7. See 
 other examples of the Optative under § 53, N. 2. 
 
 Hv de Tis eiTTjj rj e7rL^r}(f)ia-7j KLvelv ra ^prjpxiTaTavTaes aWo ri, 
 Sdvarov (ruiiav tneOevro, they set death as the penalty, if any one should 
 move, or put to vote a motion, to divert this money to any other purpose. 
 ThuC. II, 24. (El eiTTOi § eVfv|'i;<^i(rfiei' might have been used.) 
 TaXXa, ^v ert vavfia)(^e'iv oi ^AOijvaiOL To\p.T}(rai(rt, TrapeaKevd^ovro, i. e. 
 they made their other preparations, (j.o be ready) in case the Athenians 
 should dare, &c. Id. VII, 59. (Their thought was, we will he ready, 
 in case they shall dare, ^k toX^ijo-ojo-i.) So rjv laxriv, IV, 42. Oii to 
 "Koiiiov ffieWov e^eiv, el prj vavKparrjirovaiv, they were not likely 
 to have them (provisions) for the future (as they thought), unless they 
 should hold the sea. Id. VII, 60. See Lys. Agor. p. 131, § 15. 
 
 'E5au/iaff S' ei tls dpeTrjV iTrayyeWofievos dpyvpiov TrpdrroLTO , 
 he loondered that any demanded money, &o. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 7. 
 (But in I, 1, 13, we find i6avp,a^e S" fl fifj (fiavepov avrols etrTiv, he 
 wondered that it was not plain.) "E^aipov dyanav ft tis eda-oi, I re- 
 joiced, being content if any one would let it pass. Plat. Rep. V, 450 
 A. OvK rjaxvvdf] el tolovto kukov eirdyet Tta, he was not ashamed 
 thai he was bringing such a calamity on any one. Dem. Mid. 548, 24. 
 T(5 5e p.T]8ev- eavT<a (ruvetSdrt beivov eltTr]et, el irovrjptiiv epytouSo^ei Kot- 
 varvelv ra a-tamfia-ai, it seemed hard, if he was to appear to be impli- 
 cated. &c. ; he thought, Setvov etrriv, el d6|m (§ 49, 1, N. 3). Id. 
 F. L. 351, 18. (Here So|oi might have been used, like edtroi above.) 
 So Aeschin. Cor. § 10. Kai eyoj rov 'Evr]v6v epxiKapixra, el as dXrjStos 
 e-)(ei TavTtjv rfjv Te)(vrjv kol ovTOis efifieXoiS St6ao"Kct, I congratulated 
 him, if he really had this art (^as he thought). Plat. Apol. 20 B 
 (Here exoi and SiSao-xoi might have been used.) 
 
 ((/.) ^irovbas eiToir\(TavTO, ea>s dirayyeXQe'nj ra Xe^devra els 
 A-aKeSalpLova, they made a truce, {to continue) until what had been said 
 should be announced at Spai-ta; i. e. eas av djrayyfXflS, which 
 might have been retained. Xen. Hell. Ill, 2, 20. 'Qpo-f S' inX 
 KpaiTTvhv Boperjv, irp6 8e Kvp-ar ea^ev, eas o ye ^atrjKe(T(Tt <l>iXr]peTfioiai 
 jityetrj, until Ulysses should be among the Phaeacians ; L n. eais &i> 
 fiiy^. Od. V, 385. So etas Bepjxaivoa-o, Od. IX, 376. 'Kirrfyupeve 
 fjLTjdeva ^dWetv, jrp\v Kiipos e p-ttXtj ad e In drjpwv, until Cyr^lS should 
 be satisfied. Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 14. (His words were irp\v &v efi- 
 TrKrjo'Sjj.) Oi de p.evovTes earaaav, OTnrdre Trupyoff *A;(aiwi' aXXo? eVcX- 
 6a)v Tpaxov 6pp,t]<Teie Koi dp^eiav iroXZ/ioto, i. e. they stood wait- 
 ing for the time when, &c. II IV, 335. (Here ottotov 6pp.ri<rri, &c. 
 might be used.) So II. II, 794. npovKivrjirav to otI^oe, a>s navao- 
 fiivovs Tou 8i<i>y/ioC, eireX (r(^ar 'Lboi'v jrpoopfifjcravTas, when they 
 should see them, &c. Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 21. 
 
§ 77, 2.] SINGLE DEPENDENT CLATJSEa. 169 
 
 Oi yap &ri CT<})tas airlft 6 6fos Tijr anoixlris, irpiv hi\ arrlxavTai it 
 avTrjv Ai^iriv. Hdt. IV, 156. ('A.itUoivto might be used.) Oj 
 Se KopivOioi ov npocdvfirjSrjaav ^VfinXelVf Trpli/ ra *I(7^/xta, A rdre ^i', 
 SieopTdTaa-iv. ThUC. VIII, 9. 
 
 (e.) Kai gTff (rij^ia IbeaBm, o tti pa ol yap^poco vdpa TIpoiToio 
 ipe'poiTo, he asked to see the token, which (lie said) he was bringing 
 from Proetus, i. e. he said (pepopat. H. VI, 177. Karriyopeov rmv 
 AlyivrfTeav ra Treiroir] Koiev Trpodovres rrju'EWdda, i. e, they accused 
 them for what (as they said) they had done. Hdt. VI, 49. So ra 
 7r€TT0vda>s c'lrj, I, 44. KaXel tov Adtou, pvrjprjv TraXaiav (nreppdrav 
 fyouo"*, v(j) SiV SdvoL pev avroy, rrjv Se riicTOvaav X/ttoi, by which 
 (as she said) he had perished himself, and had left her the mother, &c. 
 Soph. O. T. 1245. (If the relative clause contained merely the 
 idea of the speaker, edane and IXiTre would be used. Here no am- 
 bijmity can arise from the use of the Aorist Optative. "See § 74, 2, 
 N. 1.) 
 
 Note 1. Causal sentences are usually constructed without re- 
 ference to this principle. See § 81, with Kem. 
 
 Note 2. The Imperfect and Pluperfect occasionally represent 
 the Present and Perfect Indicative in this construction, as in § 74, 2, 
 N. 2. Such clauses are simply not included in the indirect discourse. 
 E.g. 
 
 'Eroi/ior ^v, el pev tovtoiv ti eipyaoro, hiKjjV hovvai, el 8' ajroXw- 
 BeiTj, apxeiv, he was ready, if he had done any of these things, to be 
 punished ; but if he should be acquitted, to hold his command. Thuc. 
 VI, 29. (Eipyaaro represents eipyaapai, while el diroXvBeir) repre- 
 sents eav diTo\v65i.) 
 
 Note 3. 'Av is occasionally retained with relatives and temporal 
 particles in sentences of this kind, even when the Subjunctive to 
 which they belonged has been changed to the Optative. See § 74, 
 1, Note 2. E. g. 
 
 Tovs he Xap^dvovras rrjs opiXtas pitrQov avSpairoSiaras eavTwv dire- 
 KokeL, did TO dvayKoiov avrois eivai hcaXeyecrSai trap Z>v av Xd^oiev 
 TOV pitrdov, because they were obliged (as he said) to converse with those 
 from whom they received the pay. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 6. (Here &v av 
 Xdjioiev represents hv hv Xdfiaaiv.) Kai poi Tad' r/v jrpopprjTa, ... to 
 ^dppaxov TovTO (Tci^eiv epe, eas av dpTi^piiTTOv dppoaaipi irov. 
 Soph. Trach. 687. (See Schneidewin's note.) 'H^iovv airoi/s pa- 
 aTiyovv TOV eicdodevTa, eas &v Td\r]3fj 86 ^e lev avTots \eyeiv. ISOC. 
 Trap. 361 D. § 15. Halpeiv earjs hv kol ovk dtvoKpivaio, etas hv Ta air 
 eKelvxfS 6ppT)6evTa (TKe'^aio, you would not answer, until you should 
 have examined, &c. Plat. Phaed. 101 D. (The direct thought of 
 the person addressed would be, ems hv a-Ke\lr.a>pai.) See § 34, 1. 
 
 It is doubtful whether edv was ever used with the Optative in thia 
 way 
 
 2. Upon this principle (§ 77) final and object clauses with 
 
170 INDIRECT DISCOURSE, [§ "7, 2. 
 
 im, on-mr, /i^, &e., after secondary tenses, admit the double con- 
 struction of indirect discourse. This appears in the frequent 
 use of the Subjunctive or the Future Indicative instead of 
 the Optative in these sentences, after secondary tenses, when 
 either of these is the form in which the purpose would have 
 been originally conceived. Thus we may say either ^Xdtp iva 
 i8oi or rjX0£v Iva iSr/, he came that he might see; the latter 
 being allowed because the person referred to would himself 
 have said epxoiiai ha Xba>. See § 44, 2, § 45, and § 46, with 
 the examples. 
 
 Note. The principles of § 74 and § 77 apply to clauses which 
 depend upon final and object clauses, as these too are considered as 
 standing m indirect discourse. E. g. 
 
 'EXdoKTss is AaKeSaljiova (cnpaa-irov) Sjrais IroijiatraivTO Tifua- 
 piav, rjv ScTj. Thuc. I, 58. (Plere ei S/oi might have been used. 
 See § 55, 2.) 'E<^o(3etro yap pfj oi AaKtSaiiiuvioi acjjas, anoTt aa^Sa 
 dKOva'€Lau, ovKeTi dcl>ata'iv. Id. I, 91. (liere cyirorav aKova-ao'iv 
 is changed to oirore uKova-fiav, although d(j>S>aiv is retained by § 77, 
 2.) M-eya to beos eyei/ero prj irapaTrXeovTes oi XleXoTrovvrjtnot^ ei Kai &s 
 firj dtfvoovvTO pevciv, nopdatriv ras TToXfis, the fear loas great lesl 
 the Peloponnesians as they sailed by, even if under the circumstances 
 they had not been thinking of remaining, might destroy the cities. Id. 
 in, 33. (Here Suvuovvro is retained by § 74, 2.) 
 
 "Otto)? and"0 in Indirect Quotations. 
 
 § 78. 1. In a few cases oTrws is used in indirect quo- 
 tations where we should expect «»? or on. This occurs 
 chiefly in poetry. B. g. 
 
 Tout* avTO pi} poi tppd^', 7r<os oiiK et kukos- SopH, O. T. 548, 
 'Ai/a^, epS) pev ov^ Sirws rdxovs viro bioTrvovs iKdi'ta. Id. Ant. 223. 
 So Ant. 685 : oTrmr av pfj hiyfit- 'Avdnficrov oKias poi dpfiva eori 
 TiiVTa ovTUi TTtneopeva. Hdt. 1. 37, 8o 111, 115, So b-nas Truvra 
 (Trla-Tapai., I^LAT. Eutliyd. 296 E. 
 
 2, In a few passages in Homer we find o (the neuter 
 
 of 0?) used for brt. E, g. 
 
 Tiyi'cuo'Ka)!' o oi auTos iirfipeye xf^pas 'AnSKKav, knowing that Apollo 
 himself held over him his hands. II. V, 433, e' vv Kai ruitis XSp€v o 
 Tot irBivos ovK eiriiiKTov. II. VIII, 32. AfutrirfTf yap to ye jrdvrtr, 
 o poi yipas IpxfTai aWj], that my prize goes elsewhere. 11. I, 120- 
 So Od. XII, 295, 
 
§ 81, 1.] 'Oti before direct quotations. 171 
 
 Note. 'OBoii/sna and ovvexa in the tragedians, and ovveKa in Ho- 
 mer, are sometinifS used like ort or iis. that; as ayyeWe oBovveKa 
 TedvrjK 'Opcarrjs, SoPH. El. 47 ; ia6i Toiro, ovveKa "EXKrjves icr/iev. 
 Id. Phil. 232. See Soph. El. 1478, Trarh. 934 (^ovvcKa with Opt.); 
 and 11. XI, 21 ; Odyss. V, 216 ; XIII, 309. 
 
 'Oti before Direct Quotations. 
 
 § TO. Even direct quotations are sometimes introduced by 
 oTt, without further change in the construction. 'On thug 
 used cannot be expressed in English. E. g. 
 
 *0 8e aircKplvaTO on " OuS* el yevolnjjv, at Kvpe<, <rol y* av yroTt ^1 
 Bo|at/it." Xen. An. I, 6, 8. 'AireKpivaro oti "'Q deairoTa, oi fj, 
 K.T.X." Id. Cyr. VII, 3, 3. Eitte 8' on "Els Kaipov ijiteis," eij)!), 
 **07ra)ff T^ff blKTjs aKoiKTjjs-* lb. Ill, 1, 8. H ipovpey irpbs avrovSi on 
 " 'HdUei yap fjpas fj ttoXis, Kai ovK opdas Tiiv SUriv CKpipe," — Tavra § 
 ri epov/itv; Plat. Crit. 50 B. So Phaed. 60 A. See also Hot 
 II, 115. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 Causal Sentences. 
 
 § 80. Causal sentences express the cause or reason 
 
 of something stated in the leading sentence. They 
 
 may be introduced by oti, Sioti or SioTrep, olveKa or 
 
 o0ovv6Ka, and to?, because; or by eiret, eireiSri, oTe, 
 
 OTTOTs, eyre, and sometimes ottov, since, seeing that. 
 
 Remark. "On and as in this causal sense must not be con- 
 founded with ori and i>s, that, in indirect quotations; and iwfl, 
 fweiSri, ore, and oTTore must not be confounded with the same parti- 
 cles in temporal sentences. 
 
 §81. 1. Causal sentences regularly take the In- 
 dicative, after both primary and secondary tenses ; past 
 causes being expressed by the past tenses of the Indicor 
 tive. The negative particle is ov. E. g. 
 
 VLj/itTO yap ^avaav, on pa 6vrj(TK0VTas 6 para. II. I, 56. Xao/if 
 
172 CAUSAL SENTENCES. [§ 81, !• 
 
 pos, St' SptOTov 'AxaiSi/ oiSh tricras. H. I, 244. ^riiw^dpos Pan- 
 \fvs, irrel ovniavoX^iv avda-<r(is. H. I, 231. Ur, S ovras nXenTt 
 v6<f, iireX ou wapcXfitreai oiSc fic nelaeis. H- ^i}^^- , NoucoiJ 
 ava arparbv mpae Ka<r)V, oXeKovro de \aoi, ovvf Ka rbv Xpvariv i/Ti/iiJff 
 apirfipa 'ArpetSijE. II. I, 1 1. Kai rpi^pijs Se roi h^ (retrayiUvrj avdpairav 
 Sia Ti aXXo (pofiepov iari ^ on raxi Jr X f i ; 8ia Ti Se oXXo aXvwoi dXX^- 
 Xoii eio-iv oi ipitXeovres 5 8ic!ti fx rd^ei Ka6r)VTai; AEN. Oeo. VIJI, 
 8. Oi epoi (f)i\oL ovTcos exovres pep\ efiov SiaTeKovcriv, oil Sia to (hiXflv 
 epe, dWd Sioncp Koi avToi hvoiovrai jUXtuttoi yiywo-flai. Id. Mem. 
 IV, 8, 7. (See § 42, 2, Note.) npos ravTa Kpiarc pj]8ev, a s 6 irayff 
 opoiv Koi TrdvT aKovcou iravT dvairrva'aei xpovos, 1. e. Since time 
 develops all things. Soph. Hippon. Fr. 280. Ueya 8e to oyuoi) Tpa- 
 Arivai, eVel Kai Tois dr/piots vodos ns iyyiyveTai tSdv trvvTpocjxav. 
 Xen. Mem. II, 3, 4. "Ot' ovv irapaivoviT oibev es irKiov irotm, iKiTis 
 ddnypat. SoPH. O. T. 918. 'Ottotc ovv iroXir pev tos Idias ^vpxpopas 
 oia re ipfoeiv, els 8e eKaaros tcls CKflvrjs ddifaros (sc. f<TTt),7rasoi 
 Xpr] TidvTas dpvveiv avTJj ; ThuC. II, 60. "Ore Totwv Tovff ovTcas 
 € X ^ ^ T Trpotrr^KeL irpodvpais iQeXav aKoveiv Totv ^ovKopevav frvp^ovKeveiv, 
 Dbm. oi. I, 9, 3. For cute, since, see Soph. Aj. 715, O. C. 84; for 
 3jrou, see Hdt. I, 68. 
 
 2. When, however, it is implied that the cause is as- 
 signed by some other person than the speaker, the prin- 
 ciple of indirect discourse (§ 77, 1) applies to causal 
 sentences. 
 
 This has no effect upon the form after primary tenses ; 
 but after secondary tenses it allows the verb to stand in 
 the Optative, in the tense originally used by the person 
 who assigned the cause. E. g. 
 
 Tov IltpiK\ea ckoki^ov, oti orpaTijy&s av ouk iirt^ayoi, they abused 
 Pericles, because being general he did not lead them out. Thuc. II, 
 21 . (This states the reason assigned by the Athenians for reproach- 
 ing Pericles : if Thucydides had wished to assign the cause merely 
 on his own authority, he would have used oti ovk dne^ijyfv.') Tovs 
 avvovras cd^Kei jroieiv dnixfirOai rav dvoa-iav, e'jreijrcp ^yriaaivTO 
 priSiv av nore S>v npaTTOiev deois SioKaBelu, Xen. Mem. I, 4, 19. 
 (See § 74, 2, N. 1.) Oicrda kiraivktravra airov {'O/iripov) tov 'Ayape- 
 pvova, as ^atrikeis fir) dyaSis, because (^as he said) lie was a good 
 king. Id. Symp. IV, 6. So i>s eup^Koi, because (as he said) he 
 had found, Hdt. I, 44. 
 
 Remark. We should suppose that in causal sentences of the 
 second class (§81, 2) the mood and tense by which the cause would 
 have been originally stated might also be retained, as in ordinary 
 indirect discourse ; so that in the first example above (Thuc. II. 21) 
 on ov< kitt^dyti might also be used, in the same sense as Srt ovx 
 
§ 82 ] EXPRESSION OP A WISH. 173 
 
 iire^dyot. Tliis, however, seems to have been avoideil, to pre- 
 vent the ambiguity which would arise from the three forms, ene^riyevf 
 oTffdyoi, and eirf^ayei. It will be remembered that the first form, 
 which h the regular one in causal sentences of the first class (§81, 1), 
 is alloAted only by exception in indirect quotations (§ 70, 2, N. 2) ; 
 for in indirect discourse the tenses of the Indicative regularly de- 
 note time present, past, or future relatively to the leading verb ; while 
 in causal sentences (as in most other constructions) they regularly 
 denote time absolutely present, past, or future. (See § 9.) 
 
 Note 1. The Optative in causal sentences appears to have been 
 used only after on, as, and eVet. It is not found in Homer. 
 
 Note 2. If a cause is to be expressed by an apodosis in which 
 the Indicative or Optative with Sv is required, those forms can of 
 course follow the causal particles. E. g. 
 
 ^eo/iai ovv aov napaiielvai f]ju.v' as eya> oiS' &v ckos ^8iou axov- 
 oaifii, 5 o-oO, / beg you then to remain with us ; as there is not one whom 
 I should hear more gladly than you. Plat. Prot. 335 D. NOv 8» 
 cireiSri ovk e6e\eis xal efiol Tts d(7j^QXia eorl Koi ovk av oios r eirju aoi 
 napafieivat airoTtivovrL fiaKpoi/s Xoyovs — eXOeiv yap ttoi fie 5ei — eiyA' 
 CTTfl nai TavT hv Itras ovk drjdas aov tjkovov , lb. 335 C. 
 
 Note 3. For relative causal sentences, see § 65, 4. For the 
 causal use of the Participle, see § 109, 4. 
 
 SECTION VI.- 
 
 Expression op a Wish. 
 
 Remark. The Greek has one form to express a wish re- 
 ferring to & future object, and. another to express one referring 
 to a present or past object which (it is implied) is not or wai 
 not attained. To the former class belong such wishes as O 
 that he may come ! — that this may happen ! — Utinam veniat ; 
 to the latter, such as that this had happened! — that this 
 laere true ! — Utinam hoc factum esset, — Utinam hoc verum 
 esset. 
 
 § 82. If the wish refers to i\\Q future, the Optative is 
 used after the particles of wisliing eXde or el yap (nega- 
 
174 EXPRESSION OF A WISH. [§ 82. 
 
 tively, 64^6 Ml ^' y^P Mi or simply w)) that, if, 
 would that ( that not, &c.) . ElOe and el yap may, how- 
 ever, be omitted; and thus the Optative often stands 
 alone to express a wish. 
 
 The Present Optative refers to a continued or re- 
 peated action or state in the future ; the Aorist (which 
 is the most common) refers to a momentary or single 
 act in the future. E. g. 
 
 At yap efioi Toa-(rfivSe 6eol hivafuv napadetev, O that the Gods 
 viould clothe me with so much strength! Od. Ill, 205. kiff ovras, 
 Eu/xaie, (^I'Xoi/ Aii irarpi yevoto, mayest thou become in like manner 
 a friend to father Zeus. Od. XIV, 440. 'Ypiiv iiev 6co\ Solev 'OXvp,- 
 TTia Sw/xar e^opres eiC7repa"at UpLapoto jroKiVt €v 8* oiKa^ iKeadai, may 
 the Gods grant you, &c. D. I, 18. M^ pav aairovSl ye Kal axXniSs 
 d7roXo(/xi;K. II, XXII, 304. Tb pev vvv ravra 7rp^<reroiy rdirfp iv 
 Xfptrl «x"^' ""'y V" fa^ '^^ present continue to do what you now have 
 in hand. Hot. VII, 5. Q^<t(o irpvravfV, jj pTjKeri ^a7}v tyco, or may 
 I no longer live. Arist. Nub. 1255. Nikoj't) d" o ti jraa-iv vpiv 
 piWei mvoio-fiv, and may that opinion prevail, &c. Dbm. Phil. I, 
 55, 6. Tfdvaii)V, ore poi pr]Km ravra pJXoi. MiMNERM. I, 2. 
 ItKova-iov 8e vopi^otpi tok (ro(^oV. Plat. Phaedr. 279 C. 'O rrat, 
 ye'voio Trarpos ei'Tup^eoTf/jos. SoPH. Aj. 550. Ovrto viKriiraipi r 
 e'yo) Kal vopi^olprjv tTo(j;>6s, on this condition may I gain the prize 
 (in this case) and be {alway.t') considered wiie. Arist. Nub. 520. 
 (See Note 4.) EM', <a Xaa-re, 0i'Xos fipXv yevoto. Xex. Hell. IV, 
 1,38. El yap yevolprjv, tckvov, dvri <roO vexpas. EuR. Hippol. 
 1410. SvveveyKoi- pev ravra a>s ^ovXopeBa. ThuC. VI, 20. 
 AvTos del eVtOT^tret Kal airavra, &v eya ^ovXapai. — 'AXXa /3ouXi/- 
 6eir)s, may you only be wiliing ! Pi.at. Eutliyd. 296 D. &o eUv, 
 be it so, — well. 
 
 Mi^Ker' eireiT 'OSutr^t Kaprj apoimv eireif), prj8* en TTJKepd^^oio 
 Trarijp Ke K\rj pevos eirjv, then may tlie head of Ulysses no longer 
 remain on his shoulders, and no longer may I be called the father of 
 Telemachus. H. 11, 259. (See Rem. 1.) 
 
 From its use in wishes the Optative Mood (ey/cXi<riy evKTiKt)) 
 received its name. 
 
 Remark 1 . The Future Optative was not used in wishes in 
 classic Greelc. The Perfect was probably not used except in the 
 signification of the Present (§ 17, N. 8), as in the last example. If 
 such a phrase as eWe vcvik^koi, were used, it would mean O that il 
 may prove (liereafter) that he has been victorious! See § 18, 1. 
 
 Remark 2. In Homer we occasionally find the Present Optative 
 in a wish referring to present time, where later writers would have 
 used t\ie Imperfect Indicative. E. g. 
 
§ 82.] OPTATIVE, 175 
 
 El yap iyiav ovTio ye Ato; irais alyi6\oio 
 E 1 17 1> rjfuiTa Ttavra, tc Kot Si /if rroTvia 'Hpi/, 
 T loifnjv S* ws Tier* 'A&rjvairj Koi ^AjroWaVj 
 Off fvv ^fJ-iprj rjde kukov (pepei 'ApyeiottrtVj 
 
 that I were the son of Zeus, and that Hera were my mother, and that 
 
 1 were honored as Athene and Apollo are honored, &c. H. XIII, 825. 
 (Here rexoi is nearly equivalent to liijTrip etr) : cf. a rcKoCo'a, mother. 
 quoted under § 83, 1.) 
 
 G yepov, eW\ as Svfios ivi tTTTjdeo'a'i <l>i\onnv 
 Qs Toi yovi/ad* CTrotTO, ^trj fie rot epiredos eiTj' 
 *AXXa (Te yrjpas relpfi ofioitoi' • as oCJ>e\ev Tis 
 , AvSpSiv aXKos e\€iv, trii de KovporepoLat pereivai. 
 The idea is, that thy knees equalled thy heart in strength, &c. IL 
 IV, 313. At the end we have the more regular form, o^eXev nt 
 SKKos fX^iK, would that some other man had it (yrjpas). § 83, 2, N. 1. 
 £id* <U9 Ji^caoipi, ^LT] de pot epnebos eci;' 
 Tm kc rax' avrlja-eif pa^fs KOpyBaioXos "ExTap, 
 O that I were again so young, &c. II. VII, 157. ■ See VII, 133. 
 
 For a similar exceptional use in Homer of the Present Optative 
 in protasis, see § 49, 2, N. 6 (J). The optatives in the examples 
 quoted above may perhaps be explained as referring to the future, 
 and translated, O that I might be, &c. 
 
 Note 1. In the poets, especially Homer, the Optative without 
 t'6f or 61 yap sometimes expresses a concession or permission; and 
 sometimes an exhortation, in a sense approaching that of the Impera- 
 tive. E. g. 
 
 AvTis'Apyelrjv'EXivriv yifvfKaos ayoiTo, Menelaus may take iach 
 Argive Helen. II. IV, 19. TeOvairjs, a IIpoiT, ff KUKrave BeXXs- 
 poijbdn-ijx, either die, or kill Bellerophontes. II'. VI, 164. 'AXXa ns 
 AoXiov KoXeVfiE, let some one call Dolios. Od. IV, 735. So 
 Aesch. Prom. 1049 and 1051. 
 
 Note 2. The poets sometimes use the simple tl (without -6( at 
 yap) with the Optative in wishes. E. g. 
 
 'AXX' ei Ttr Koi TOutrSc peroixopfvos KaXeafiev. II. X, 111. 
 Et poi yevoiTO <l)66yyos ev ^pa^loaiv, EuR. Hec. 836. 
 
 Note 3. The poets, especially Homer, sometimes use i>s before 
 the Optative in wishes. This as cannot be expressed in English ; 
 and it is not to be translated so (as if it were written &s), or con- 
 founded with ovTas used"as in Note 4. E. g. 
 
 'Off aTToXotro Kai aWos, oris roiavrd ye pe^oi, that any other also 
 may perish, &c. Od. I, 47. See Od. XXI, 201. 'Qs 6 rdbc iropan 
 SXoir', ci poi 6epis rafi' avSav. SoPH. El. 126. 
 
 Note 4. OiIr<»r, thus, on this condition, may be prefixed to the 
 Optative in protestations, where a wish is expressed upon some con- 
 dition ; which conditicn is usually added m another clause. E. g. 
 
176 EXPRESSION OF A WISH. [§ 82. 
 
 Out Mr SvaurSe tovtisv, ixfj iT((>uhr)Te /if, may you enjoy these on this 
 condition, — do not neglect me. Dbm. Aph. 11, 842, 9- 
 
 Note 5. The OptatiTe in wishes belonging under this head never 
 takes the particle av. It" a wish is expressed in the form of an ordi- 
 nary apodosis, as nus hv oKoifoiv, how gladly I would perish (i. e. if 
 I could), it does not belong here, but under § 52, 2. 
 
 § 83. 1. If the wish refers to the present or the 
 past, and it is implied that its object is not or was not 
 attained, the secondary tenses of the Indicative are 
 used. The particles of wishing here cannot be omitte'd. 
 
 The distinction between the Imperfect and Aorist In- 
 dicative is the same as in protasis. (§ 49, 2) ; the Imper- 
 fect referring to present time or to a continued or 
 repeated action in past time, and the Aorist to a mo- 
 mentary or single action in past time. E. g. 
 
 '&.6frmno eVoi'd, would that he were now doing this, or would 
 that he had been doing this; eWf tovto cVoitjo-cv, would that he had 
 done this ; t16f rj v aKii\6h, would that it were true; tldt fifi eyivtro, 
 would that it had not happened. 
 
 EW f ?x * r I •" TfKovcra, ^eXriour (fipevas, would that thou, O 
 mother, hadst a better understanding. EuR. El. 1061. Et yap Toaav- 
 rrju Sivaiuv eix.""' would that I had so great power. Id. Ale. 1072. 
 EMe (roi, a HepiKKeis, Tore crvvtyevofiTiv. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 46. 
 'loi, fji}) ySs eVi ^evas Baveiv evpr/^fs, that thou hadst not chosen tn 
 die in a foreign land. Soph. O. C. 1713. 
 
 Remark. The Indicative cannot be used in wishes without e'dt 
 or el yap, as it would occasion ambiguity ; this cannot arise in the 
 case of the Optative, which is not regularly used in independent 
 sentences without av, except in wishes. The last example quoted 
 above shows that the Indicative with /x^ alone can be used in nega- 
 tive wishes. (This passage is often emended; see, howevei', Her- 
 mann's note on the passage, and on EuR. Iph. Aul. 575.) 
 
 2. The Aorist w(pe\ov and sometimes the Imperfect 
 a>(j)eWov of ocjjelXo}, debeo, may be used with the In- 
 finitive in wishes of this class, with the same meaning 
 as the secondary tenses of the Indicative. The Present 
 Infinitive is used when the wish refers to the present or 
 to continued or repeated past action, and the Aorist 
 (rarely the Perfect) whe)\ it refers to the past. 
 
S 83, 2.] 'QipeKov TVITH THE INFINITIVE. 177 
 
 "fl(l>e\ov or w(f)eWov may be preceded by the particles 
 of wishing, eiOe, el yap, or M (not ov). E. g. 
 
 "Hc^eXe TovTo neielv, would that he were (now) doing this (lit. 7ie 
 ought to be doing it), or would that he had (Jidbitually) done this 
 (lit. he ought to have done this). 'QipeKe tovto irotija-at, would that 
 he had done this. 
 
 Qv o(j>e\ov TpiTaTrjv Trep e'xav ev Sojfiao'l fio2pav vaieiv, ol S' av 
 8pfs crdot tfifievai. ot tot' oXovto, that I were living with even a 
 third part, Ifc, and that those men were safe who then peruhed, Orl. 
 IV, 97. M17 o(j)eXov viKav Toiab' eV acOXo), that I had not been 
 victorious in such a contest. Od.' XI, 548. ISee H. XVIII, 86, ai 
 o(j)€\€S aril piv avdi vaicLV, TlT]\evs Be dvrjrfjv dyayeadai. Trjif 
 oijjfX' ev vj]e<T(ri KaraKrapev 'Aprepis io), O thai Artemis had slain 
 her, kc. II. XIX, 59. '0\e<rdai w(pe\ov TrjB' rjpepa, OtJiat I had 
 perished on that day. Soph. O. T. 1157. E'lff Si(j>e\' 'Apyovs pfj 
 SianTdadai (TKd<j)os KoXx"" ^^ °""' Kvaveas SvpirXriydSas. EuR 
 Med. 1. Et yap a)(j>€\ov otoi re etvai 01 ttoXXoi to psyLOTa Kafca 
 i^epya^etrBai, O that the multitude were able, &c. Plat. Orit. 44 D 
 M^ TTor wdieXov Xtweiv ttju ^Kvpov, that I never had left Scyros 
 Soph. Phil. 969. AM' apa irdvTes "EKropos axjjeXeT di/Ti 605s en\ 
 vriva-l 7rf<bd(r6at, would that ye all had been slain instead of Hector. 
 H. XXIV, 253. 'AvBpos eireiT co(p€Wov dpeivovos elvai aKotris, 
 OS jJSij vepecrlv re Kai ai<Txeci. jroXX" dvdpaTrav, that I were the vAfe of 
 a better man, who knew, &c. II. VI, 350. (For 3S7, see § 64, 2.) 
 
 For the origin of this construction, see § 49, 2, N. 3 (b) and (c). 
 
 Note 1. The secondary tenses of the Indicative are not used in 
 Homer to express wishes ; &<pe\ov with the Infinitive being gener- 
 ally used when it is implied that the wish is not or was not fulfilled. 
 (See § 82, Bern. 2.) The latter construction is med chiefly by the 
 poets. . 
 
 Note 2. Neither the secondary tenses of the Indicative nor the 
 form with acjjeXov in wishes can (like the Optative) be preceded by 
 the simple et (without -6e or yap). 
 
 'Qs, used as in § 82, N. 3, often precedes a(j)e\ov, &c. in Homer, 
 and rarely in the Attic poets. E. g. 
 
 *HXu^cff ix iToKepov ; as a<j)e\€S avroff oKeaOai. H. lil, 428. 
 
 'Qs &4>^\\' 'EXeci/s OTTO <pv\ov oXeadai. Od. XIV, 68. 
 
 'Os irptv diSd^ai y a^eXes itiiros diappay^vcu. Arist. Ban. 955. 
 
 Kbsiark. Expressions of a wish with the Optative or In- 
 dicative after iWe, el yap, &c. were originally protases with the 
 apodosis suppressed. Thus, el ydp yevoiro, that it may happen 
 (lit if it would only happeri), implies an apodosis like eon)x4« ^ 
 8* L 
 
178 IMPERATIVE AND 8CBJUNCTITE IW COMMANDS [§ 83, 2. 
 
 ilqv, I should be fortunate, or I should rejoice ; el yap iyiviro, O 
 that it had happened, implies one like tii-rvxh' &" ?" Of *' ^"^^ 
 only happened, T should have been fortunate). It will be seen 
 that the use of the moods and tenses is precisely the same as 
 in the corresponding classes of protasis (§ 50, 2 ; § 49, 2). The 
 analogy with the Latin is the same as in protasis : — d yh^ 
 TovTo ■noioiT) (or iroirjaeiev), O si hoc faciat, that he may do this ; 
 tl yap TOVTO inoUi, O si hoc faceret, that he were doing this ; 
 tl yap TOVTO enoirjo-ev, O si hoc fecisset, that he had done this ; 
 el yap pij eytveTo, utinam ne factum esset, that it had not hap- 
 pened. 
 
 The form with &(j)e\ov and the Infinitive, on the other hand, 
 is an apodosis with a protasis implied.. See § 49, 2, N. 3, b. 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 
 Imperative and Subjunctiye in Commands, Exhoeta 
 
 TIONS, AND PeOHIBITIONS. 
 
 . § 84. The Imperative is used to express a com- 
 mand, an exhortation, or an entreaty. E. g. 
 
 Aeye, speak thou, ^edye, begone! 'EXfleVoi, let him come. Xai- 
 
 £6vTav, let them rejoice. "Epxea-dov K\ia-ir]v IlijXijiadcra 'AxAfjos. 
 [. 1, 322. Zev, Zev, Beiopbs riivSe irpayuiaTav- veyou. Aesch. 
 Choeph. 246. f tf t 
 
 Note 1. The Imperative is often emphasized by ayt (or 
 Syere), <f)ep€, or 'i6i, come. These words may be in the sin- 
 gular when the Imperative is in the plural, and in the second 
 person when the Imperative is in the third. E. g. 
 
 1 ^"f ',"■)" f'°' *"' T6vhe, <i>tkov reKor, oorir oS" etrrlv. H. Ill, 192. 
 
 AXX' aye pipvere iravTes, evKvripibes 'Axaiol. H. II, 331. Bdo-ic' t6i, 
 m,\e iveipe, Boti, ejrl v^as 'Axaiciv. II. II, 8. 'Ayt 8A dKoimre. 
 Aen. Apol. § U. 'AyeTe 8emvl,<raTe. Xen. Hell. V, 1, 18 *^p' 
 elne 87 poi. SoPH.Ant. 534. ^ipe Sf, poi robe ehe. Plat. Crat. 
 885 B. Idi drj Xe^ov ^piv npaTov tovto. Xen. Mom. Ill 3 3 
 
 161 mv ■napioTaaeov. AuiST. Ran. 1878. "ifl. mv X./3ai/o>T6» bkoA 
 Tit Kai Ttvo 8((r». lb. 87X. '^ 
 
§ 85.} SUBJUNCTIVE. 179 
 
 Bemark. *epe is not used in this way in Homer. 
 
 Note 2. The poets sometimes use the second person of the Im- 
 perative with ;r a r m hasty commands. E. g. 
 
 *AKouf TT a f , 7iear, every one! Arist. Thesm. 872. Xiipii ddpo 
 iras imrjpeTris' To^eve^ Traie ' tT<j}ej^86vriv tls iiol Sura). Id. Av, 1187. 
 *Aye dr] triana it as dvr]p. Id. Kan. 1125. 
 
 Note 3. Tlie Imperative is sometimes used in relative 
 clauses depending on an interrogative (usually o'o-5aJ, where 
 we should expect the relative clause to be completed by Sfi 
 with an Infinitive, and the Imperative to stand by itself. E. g. 
 
 'AX\' oTaB' o Spatrov ; ra crKeXei 6evf Tt)v ireTpav, but do you know 
 what to dof strike the rock with your leg! Arist. Av. 54. (We 
 should expect here olirS' a Sei Spairai; Spao-ov K.r. X., do you know 
 what to dof if so, do it: viz. strike the rock, &c.) Ola-d' o p.oi, a-ip- 
 irpa^ov , do you know what you must do for me f if so, do it. EoK. 
 Heracl. 451. Oladd wv a pot yev€ aOay ; deapa TOis ^evoia-t irpotrBes^ 
 do you know what must be done for me (a bet poi yfvea-dai) f let it be 
 done then (yevecrBai), viz. put chains on the strangers. Id. Iph. Taur. 
 1203. OlaS' CDS noirjaov; SoPH. O. T. 543. (Compare EuR. 
 Cycl. 131, 010-5' ovv Spacreis; dost tliou know what thou art to dof) 
 
 Note 4. The Imperative sometimes denotes a mere concession, 
 and sometimes a supposition (where something is supposed to be 
 true for argument's sake). E. g. 
 
 nXourei Te yap kot oIkov • iav 8' diTij Toirau to xo'P""' 'toKK' 
 iya KaTTVOv aKids ovK av TTpialprjv. SoPH. Ant. 1168. npoa-eiirdTa 
 Tivd (l>i\iKa>s o re apxcov Ka\ 6 iSiibtt;?, suppose that both the ruler and 
 the private man address, &c. Xen. Hier. VIII, 3. 
 
 § 85. The first person of the Subjunctive (usually 
 in the plural') is used in exhortations, supplying the 
 want of a first person to the Imperative. Aye 
 (aje-re) or (jiepe, come, often precedes. B. g. 
 
 'lapev, let us go, "iSapev, let us see. OixaSe nfp <rvv vrfvm vea>- 
 
 ?f6a, rovSe S' eapev, let us sail homeward with our ships, and leave 
 im. II. n, 236. 'aXX' ei SoKEi, jrXe oipev, oppaa-dai raxvs- SoPH. 
 Phil. 526. 'Entax^rov, pd6 lopev . lb. 539. 'ETriVxfS, ip^dXai- 
 p.ev els aWov Xoyow. EuR. El. 962. Tlapapev re ovv aajrep 
 Kvpos KfXeuet, d(Ticu>piv re 8i Z)v paKiara dvvrjaopeBa KarfX^iv a 
 bei, ?rape',YQ)fif K re fjpas alrois, k-tX. Xen. Cyr. VIII, I, 5. 
 'AXX' ayeO', ws av iyiav lavai, ireiBwpeBa irdvres. II. II, 139. 
 'kW aye St] Katvai. pfSi>pe6a6oipi&os oKKrjS. II. IV, 41S. *»pf 
 8ij biaiv€pdva>pev \6yavs. EuR. Androm. 333. AeCre (jiiKoi, rox 
 itlvov ipiopeea. Od. VIII, 133. 
 
180 IMPERATIVE ANP SUBJIIJMOirVB IN COMMANDS. [§ 85. 
 
 Note 1. The first person singular o{ the Subjunctive, when it is 
 nsed in this way, almait always takes aye (aytre) or (pipe, unles* 
 Bome other Imperative precedes. E. g. 
 
 'AXV ayf Sti to xPW"-'''' api.6 iirjcr a Koi Xdio/iat. Od. XITI, 
 215. 'aXX' aycd' Vjuv Tevx^ iveixa BaprixSrivai. Oil. XXH, 139. 
 8 a n- r 6 /if oVn raxurra, iv^Xas 'AiSao irfpri<ra>, bury me as 
 quickly as possible; let me pass the gates of Hades. II. XXIII, 71. 
 *€/j' aKoia-o), come, let me hear. Hdt. I, 11. Siya, rrvoas p.d6m' 
 (f>e pi npis ovs &d\a). EoR. Hero. F. 1059. 'E tt i a- x ^r' aldrfv rau 
 namOtv it/xdea. Id. Hippol. 567. Aiyf 87, if'». Plat. Rep. V, 
 457 C. 
 
 Note 2 The second and third persons of the Subjunctive are 
 not regularly used in affirmative exhortations, the Imperative being 
 the regular form in these persons. (For the Aorist Subjunctive 
 with fii) in prohibitions, see § 86.) 
 
 In some cases the Optative in wishes, in the second and third 
 persons, has almost the force of an exhortation. (§ 82, N. 1.) 
 
 In a few exceptional eases, we find even the second person of the 
 Subjunctive in exhortations, like the first person, but always accom- 
 panied hy (j)fpt. E.g. 
 
 *€p', a TcKvou, mvKai to rrjs vfj<rov liddr/s. SoPH. Phil. 300. 
 
 For the Future Indicative used eUiptically in exhortations after 
 Sira)!, see § 45, Note 7. 
 
 Remark. The preceding rules apply only to affirmative exhorta- 
 tions : these should be carefully distinguished from prohibitions with 
 fiT) (§ 86). The use of the Imperative in prohibitions is generally 
 confined to the Present tense. 
 
 § 86. In prohibitions, in the second and third per- 
 sons, the Present Imperative or the Aorist Subjunctive is 
 used after m and its compounds. The former expresses 
 a continued or repeated, the latter a single or momen- 
 tary prohibition. 
 
 In the first person (where the Imperative is wantmg) 
 the Present Subjunctive is allowed. E. g. 
 
 Mr) TToi'ei TOTJTo, do not do this (habitually); /ifj noifja-jjs touto, 
 do not do this (single act). 'E^auSa, pr) Kfv'Se v6a, im (tbo'pfv apdia. 
 II. I, 363. 'ATpfiSr), pfj \frevSc' fVio-rd/ierar (ra(ba flivfiv. II. fv, 
 404. 'Apyeioi,pfi ira n peSiere BoipiBos d\Krjs. II. IV, 234. EiVe 
 uni eipopcvtf vripfprea, /xtjS' ew iKevajis. Od. XV, 263. 'HSi; in)i 
 o-j) TTOiSi £7709 (fido, jiijS^ iitiKevde. Od. XVI, 168. Mjjkiti viv bnO 
 avdt \cyape6a, juijS' m SijpAw dp^aWapcBa epyov. II. II, 435 
 Yiuls de TD ya Tgde ^^ /Sapii; (crfToi- <TKJ)^jfI|a■6e, p}, evpov<r6t 
 
§ 87.] PROHIBITIONS. 181 
 
 injS aKitfmlavtti^rjTe. Aesch. Eumen. 800. *0i'/iij7-' oKKtiTe, 
 lir\T cKJyriT iiros kokov. Soph. O. C. 731. M^ BrjcrOe vofiov fiifhiva, 
 aKKa rotis ^XdiTTovTas ifiSr 'Xvcare. Dem. 01. Ill, 31, 11. (Here 
 Oea-Se would not be allowed by § 86 ; although Xuaare, in a mere 
 exhortation, is regular, by § 84.) M^ Kara roiis vo/ious biKavriTe' 
 lirj ^oridrjarjTf tm irevovBon 8eivd' fifj fvopKelrc. Id. Mid. 582, 
 15. Mrj IT p iji , nm, ll^Sa. Arist. Nub. 6 1 3. Kai /iTjdeir u jr o X d /b i; 
 Its ^ov\c(rdai\a6('tv. I'iOC. Phil. p. 101 A. § 93. Kai firjSfis oleaBo 
 fi dyvoclv. Id. Paneg- p. 55 C. § 73. 
 
 Note 1. (a.) With the exception of the first person (§ 86), the 
 Present Subjunctive is not used in prohibitions. 
 
 An elliptical use of the Subjunctive (sometimes the Present) after 
 fifj or oTrms /irj, with a verb of fearing understood, must not be con- 
 founded with this. (See § 46, N. 4!) 
 
 (ft.) The second person of the Aorist Imperative is very seldom 
 found in prohibitions ; the third person is less rare. E. g. 
 
 iATjd* Tj ^la ae firjdaficos viKrjaaTto. SOPH. Aj. 1334. yirjdi (Toi 
 HfXrjtraTa). Aesch. Prom. 332. So Prom. 1004. Kal /xi)8»e 
 ifiatu IT poa8oK7]adTUi aWtos- PlAT. Apol. 17 C. 
 
 M^ yfrfv<TOv, a Zed, tt/s eViouoTjs iXniSos- AkisT. Thes. 870. 
 
 Note 2. The first person singular even of the Aorist Subjunc- 
 tive in prohibitions is rare, and is found only in the poets. E. g. 
 
 M^ ore, yipov, Koi\r](rLV eya irapa vrjvat Kt;^ eto). II. I, 26. 'AXXci 
 fi' t(c yc T^o-Sf yijs itopOpevtrov as Tdxt<rTa, prj^ avTOV 6dva. SoPH. 
 Tr. 801. 'a ^«i/o4, lifi SfJT aSiKijflu. Id. O. C. 174. (This may 
 be explained also by § 46, N. 4.) 
 
 SECTION VIII. 
 
 Subjunctive (like Putuee Indicative) in Independent 
 Sentences. — Intebeogative Subjunctive. — Ov fiij 
 with Subjunctive and Future Indicative. 
 
 § 87. In the Homeric language the Subjunctive is 
 sometimes used in independent sentences, with the 
 force of a weak Future Indicative. B. g. 
 
 oil yap ira roiovs 'i8ov dvepas, owSe tS(op.at, for I never yet saw, 
 nor shall I (or can 7) ever see such men. L. I, 262. 'Y/*iv iv ifdvTfa^ 
 VI irfpiKKvra bap ovo/i^va, I will enumerate the gifts, &c. Q. IX, 
 
182 INDEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 87. 
 
 121. Auo-o/ioi es 'AiSao, Km iv veKVf<T<Ti (paeiva, I will descend to 
 Hades, and ehine among the dead (said by the Sun). Od. XII, 383. 
 (Here the Future Siaoiiai and the Subjunctive ^aeiva hardly differ 
 in their force.) Kai ttot-e tis einrja-iv, and some one will perhaps 
 nay. II. VI, 459. (In vs. 462, referring to the same thing, we have 
 S)S iroTe rii epeei.) Oiic ea-d' oJros dvrjp, oiS" ((TaeTai, oiibf yevr)- 
 rat, OS Kev TrjXefm^^at aa vih ^eipas enoia-fL. Od. XVI, 437. Mvrj- 
 (rofiai oiSe Xadafiat 'AffoXXiaTOf ixaToio, I will remember and will 
 not forget the far-shooting Apollo. Hymn, in ApoU. 1. 
 
 Kkmark. The Aorist is the tense usually found in this construc- 
 tion. The first person singular is the most common, and instances 
 of the second person are very rare. 
 
 Note. This Homeric Subjunctive, like the Future Indica- 
 tive, is sometimes joined with av or kc to form an apodosis. 
 This enabled the earlier language to express an apodosis with 
 a sense between that of the Optative with av and that of the 
 simple Future Indicative, which the Attic was unable to do. 
 (See § 38, 2.) E. g. 
 
 E* 5e Ke firi da)7j(Tiv, eyo) Be kcv avTos eXcofiai, hut if lie does not 
 give her up, I will take her myself II. I, 324. (Here iXafiai Ktv has 
 a shade of meaning between iXoi/irju xei/, I would take, and alp^a-o- 
 fiat, / wilt take, which neither the Attic Greek nor the English can 
 express.) Compare rjv )^' vfuv (Td(j)a eiTra, ore nporepot ye TrvOoifjiTjv, 
 Od. II, 43, with ^v x' W^" 'ri'j"' f 'I'oi, ore irporepos yeiridoio, II, 
 31, — both referring to the same thing. See also II. Ill, 54; and 
 VI, 448, the last example under § 59, N. 1. 
 
 § 88. The first person of the Subjunctiye is used in 
 questions of doubt, where the speaker asks himself or 
 another what he is to do. Tlie negative particle is /tt^. 
 In Attic Greek this Subjunctive is often introduced by 
 ^ovXei, or ^ovXeaOe (poetic 6eXeK or deXere^. E. g. 
 
 EtTTto TovTo ; shall I say this? or /SovXft e'lira toCto; do you wish 
 that I should say this f Mr; tovto noia/jifv, shall we not do this f Ti 
 iijro) ; or ti fioi\e<r6e f itto) ; what shall I say ? or what do you want 
 me to say f For the Future in such questions, see § 25, 1, N. 4. 
 
 Urj yap eyaj, (f>i\e tckvou, iw; rev Soifiafl" iKW/iat dvSpov o' Kpavafjp 
 'iSaKr)!/ Kara Kotpaveovmv r^H I6vs (rijs p-qTpos im koX crolo 8d/ioio ,• 
 U)A^^/^er ,sAaK /(70? (o w/iuse Aouse sW/ / come.' &c. Od. XV, 500. 'H 
 airbs Kev 6 a; (^ao-fiai Se p.e 6vp.hs avmyei. Od. XXI, 194. *Q Zeu 
 ri'Xe^o); ttoi (ppevmv e\6a, narep; SoPH. O. C. 310. 'Qfioi eyi), 
 Tra^Si; wa trrm; ttS Ke'Xo-to; EuK. llec. 1056. Tioi TpaTTwiiai,; 
 iroi jTopevBS) ; lb. 1099. Eijro) n row elaBoTav, a Sea-wora; 
 AbiST, Ran. 1. TtVo yap ftaprvpa /iei'^to 7rapao-x<")/*ai; Dem. 
 
S 88.] DfTEKEOGATlVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 18& 
 
 F. li. 416 7. Mi^S*, eav rt a>i/£juae, . . . epafxai oiroaov n'wXfi; Twosy 
 I not ask, &C. ? MijS' dnoKpivtafiai ovv^ tiu ris /xe ipayra vfos, eav 
 fldo; and may I not answer, kc. Xen. Mem. I. 2, 36. Mia-diacra- 
 Uf0a ovp KTjpvKa, rj auTos aKeiVoo; Plat. Rep. IX, 580 B. Mf- 
 6vovTa avdpa Travv trfjiodpa Se^e(7^e frvfiiroTrjv, rj dir tatfiev; wiU you 
 receive him, or shall we go away f Id. Symp. 21 2 E. 'Apa pifi aia^vv- 
 6aii,ev Tov Jlepa&v ^atrCKea p,ifir](7aiT6ai ; shall we then be ashamed 
 to imitate the king of the Persians? Xen. Oecon. IV, 4. 
 
 Hov S^ jSovXf £ Ka$i^6p€Voi dvayvS>p,evi where wilt thou that we 
 sit down and read? Plat. Phaedr. 228 E. (So 263 E.) BouXfi 
 ovv €7ricrK07ra>fi€v oirov ^brf rb dvvarou cart; Xen. Mem. Ill, 5, 1. 
 BovXfi Xa/3a)/iai drjra Kat Oiyto tI crov ; SoPH. Phil. 761. Bov- 
 \e(Tff ineiaireaaiiev ; Ede. Hec. 1042. OeXcts p,eiva>pev avrov 
 KdvaKov<TU3p,€v yoav ; SoPH. El. 81. Ti aoi deXeis d^r eiKaOoi ; 
 Id. O. T. 651. &e\eT€ Srjpaa'ap.eBa TlevBetcs 'Ayavf]V p-rjrep* €K 
 ^aK)(evfxaTaiv, x^P'" '"' """kti 6ap,ev; EuK. Baoch. 719. So with 
 KeXevere : *AXXa ttcSs ; etTTco KeXevere Koi ovK opyteiade ; do you 
 command me to speak, &c. ? Dem. Phil. HI, 123, 1. 
 
 In Plat. Hep. II, 372 E, we find ^ovKftrOe and a Subjunctive with 
 ci in protasis: ci 8' av /SouXeo-fie Koi (jAeyiiaivovirav jroXtv Beap^- 
 aafiev, ovdev a?ro/c6)Xvf t, i.e. if you will have us examine, &c. 
 (§ 49, 1.) 
 
 Remark. In this construction there is an implied appeal to some 
 person (sometimes to the speaker himself), so that |3ouXfi or some 
 similar word can always be understood, even if it is not expressed. 
 Homeric examples in which this is not the case fall naturally under 
 § 87. 
 
 In the later Greek the classic form deXere ema ; was developed 
 into fie'XfTc Iva (or OTrmj) f otm ; — from which comes the modern 
 Greek fleXf re va emio ; or va eOTO) ; will you have me speak ? 
 
 Note I. The third person of the Subjunctive is sometimes 
 used in que.»tions, but less frequently than the first. This 
 happens chiefly when a speaker refers to himself by t\s. Ex- 
 amples of the second person are very rare. E. g. 
 
 HoTepov <re ns, hitT^ivr), t^j TrJXemr ix^pov fi ifibv etvat <j>rj ; i. e. 
 shall we call you the city's enemy, or mine f Dem. Cor. 268, 28. Eira 
 ravB o^TQi Tretadoatrtv virep avTojv tre iroieiv, Koi to. ttIs arjs ttovtj- 
 pias epya e^' eavTovs dvahf ^avrai; i. e. are these men to believe, 
 &c. ; and are they to assume, &c. Id. Androt. 613, 3. Ti ris fivoi 
 TovToCJJrj; Id. F. L. 369, 12. BiiyaTfp,TrolTis<j>povTiBos e\6ri ; SoPH. 
 O. C. 170. IToI Tis ovv (hvyrj; Id Vj. 40.3. Ild^ei' ovv tis Tavrrjs 
 ap^r^rai iia)rns ; Pl.AT. Phil. 15 D. Ilms tls ireiBrjfai ; H. I, 
 150. {Jlois ovv er et'rrrjs on irvviaTaKpai RaKois; EuR. Here. F. 
 1417.) See Krtiger, Vol. I, § 54, 2 ; Notes 4 and 5. 
 
 Note 2. The Subjunctive is often used in the question 
 
184 DOUBLE NEGATIVE Ou /tlj. L§ ^^' 
 
 rt irada ; what will become of me ? or what harm will it do me. 
 literally, what shall I undergo ? E. g. 
 
 'SI fioi e'ytl), Ti jrada; n vv fwi /irjKUTTa yevrjTOi; Od. V, 465. So 
 II. XI, 404. Ti 71 a 6 to; ri 8e bpa ; ri 8c fiJi(ra>ii<u ; AesCH. Sept. 
 1057. Ti irdBa rXfuiaiv; Id. Pers. 912; Akist. Plut. 603. Ti 
 IT a 6 to; ri 8e iirjcrofiai; o'lfiot. SoPH. Track 973. To iLeWov, el xpfl, 
 TTfitroiiaf Ti yap wdBto ; I shall suffer what is to come, if it ni ust 
 he; for what harm can it do mef EuR. Phoen. 895. (The differ- 
 ence between this and the ordinary meaning of ncLtrxto is here seen.) 
 'afioXoyriKa- ti yap naSto; Plat. Euthyd. 302 D. So in th«! 
 plural, Hdt. IV, 118 ; Ti ydp ita.dtoii.ev firi ^ovKojieviov i/ieon/ Tt/iia- 
 pieiv ; 
 
 § 89. The double negative ov fii] is sometimes used 
 with the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative in inde- 
 pendent sentences, being equivalent to a strong single 
 negative. The compounds of both ov and /*»; can be 
 used here as well as the simple fbrms. 
 
 1. The Subjunctive (sometimes the Future Indicar 
 tive) with ov (jltj may have the force of an emphatic 
 Future with ov. Thus ov fir; tovto tyevrjTai (sometimes 
 ov firj TOVTO yevrja-eTaiy means this surely will not hap- 
 pen, being a little more emphatic than ov tovto yeinj' 
 aeTai. E. g. 
 
 (Aor. Subj.) Oil fiTj TTidriTaijhe wHl not oheT/. Soph. PhiL 103. 
 Ovre ydp yiyvcTCU oiJTe yeyovev ov8e ovv p.^ yeVT)Tai dWolov riQtts^ 
 for there is not, nor has there been, nor will there ever be, &c. Plat. 
 Kep. VI, 492 E. (liere oiSe fiij yevrirai is merely more emphatic 
 than the ordinary oii yevrjafrai.^ KaX rmvS' oKovaas ui n firi \ri<j>6a 
 fidXo). Absch. Sept. 38. 'AXV o5 nor c| t^ov ye /x^ wdBjis TcjSe. 
 Soph. El. 1029. Outoi a-' 'Axaiav, o'Sa, p.!) tis v^pitrri. Id. Aj. 
 560. 'AXX' oS rt p.i) (jtvy-qTe Xan/^i/pm 7ro8i. EuR. El. 1039. ToK 
 fiv KpaTr)tTtopev, ov prf tis ^p-w aXKos trrparos dvTitrr^ Kore dv6p&mtov. 
 Hdt. VII, 53. So I, 199. Ou /i^ ere Kpvyjfto jrpos ovTiva /3ovXo/iai 
 dcj)tKea^6ai. Xbn. Cyr. VII, 3, 13. Ot ye 'Appevioi ov pfj Se^tovrai 
 Toiis TToXe/xiovf. lb. m, 2, 8. *Av pivroi Ka66^peda oIkoi, oiSeVor' 
 oibev i]pXv oil fij) yevJjTai tSiv Seovrtov, Dkm. Phil. I, 53, 4. So 
 Phil. Ill, 130, 11. 
 
 (Pres. Stibj.) Hv -yap aira^ Si!o rj rpiav fjp^p&v Sbov dir6trxtap.ev, 
 ovKen p,fi fiuci/rai /SatriXeur ripds KaraXa/Sftn. Xen. An. II, 2, 12. 
 So ov pi) Bvvtovrai, Id. Hier. XI, 15. Upas raira KOKovpyet xai 
 avKO<l)dvTet, €t ti dvvatrai ' oiidev trov Trapiepai' dXX' oil firj olos T Jsj 
 but you will not be able. Plat. Bep. I. 341 B. 
 
§89,2.] DOUBLE NEGATIVE Oi firj. 183 
 
 (Fut. Ind.) OS a-oi /117 fieQi-^ofiai nore. SoPH. El. 1052. 
 Toil yap jroKijpoir ov jit) irore woir)(TfTf ffeXriovs- Aeschin. Cor. 
 § 177, Oij Toi fjLTjirare tr €< rav edpavav., a> yepov^ aKOVTa Tis a^et. 
 Soph. O. C. 176. So ovk oSv nrj oHomopria-cis, O. C. 848 ; and Hdt. 
 Ill, 62. Ma Tov 'AttoXXco ov pr] <r' eya Trepioyjropdne'hdovT (l. e. 
 jrepio^opai aireXSovra). Arist. Ran. 508. Eijrev on fj Snaprrj 
 gOScv pr] KCLKLOV olKietrai aurou aTTO^ai/ozTos. Xen. Hell, I, 6, 32, 
 (See § 70, 2; and below, Note 1.) 
 
 The Aorist Subjunctive is the most common form in this con- 
 struction. 
 
 Note 1. ol pfj with the Future Optative, representing a Future 
 Indicative of the direct discourse, occurs in an indirect quotation 
 after as ' 'Id r aWa irdvT eOeo'Tnaev, Kiii tctti Tpolas rrepyap as ov 
 pfj irore ne pcrotev, el prj rovde ayoLvro. SoPH. Phil. 611. (The 
 direct discourse was ov pii ttotc ttc pcreTt , e'ac prj TovSe ayr}cr6eJ) In 
 the lait example under § 89, 1, the Future Indicative is retained in 
 the same construction. The Future Infinitive can be used in the 
 same way; as, Ewre Teiptaias ov prj ttotc, cow Trjvbe yrjv oIkovvtosj 
 ev jipd^fiv TToXii/. EuK. Phoen. 1590. 
 
 Ou pTj with the Subjunctive occurs in a causal sentence after as, in 
 Arist. Av. 461: Aeyt 6apprjaas' i>s rds (rnovdas ov pi] irporepoD 
 napa^apeu. • 
 
 Note 2, This construction is often explained by supposing an 
 ellipsis of Seivov eariv or (pofios iariv between the ov and the pfj : 
 this is based on such passages as Xen. Mem. II, 1, 25, ov 0d/3os pri 
 (T€ dydya, there is no fear lest I may lead you, which with the ipo^os 
 omitted would be ou pi) <re ayayia. This theory, however, leaves the 
 following construction (§ 89, 2) entirely unexplained ; and the sup- 
 posed ellipsis fails to account for the meaning in many cases, as in 
 the first example under § 89, 1. 
 
 2, The second person of the Future Indicative (some- 
 times the Subjunctive) with ov /mtj may express a strong 
 prohibition. Thus ov fir/ \aXrja-eiis means «/om shall not 
 prate (or do Twt prate), being more emphatic than /".'? 
 \a\ei. E, g. 
 
 Uoioi ZeiJr ; ov pfj X tj p ^ o- f t s (XripfiaTis) ■ ouS' eari Zeis, i. e. stop 
 your nonsense.' Arist. Nub. 367. 'a jrai, ti Opofis ; ov pj\ irap' 
 o^Xo) ToSe yr/pva-fi , do not (/ beg you) speak out in this way before 
 the people. £uk. Hippol. 213. 'Q Bvyarfp, ou prj pvdov eVi ttoXXous 
 tpfls. Eur. Supp. 1066. Ou prj yvvaiKav beikov fiaoioe ls 
 Xoyow, do not adopt the cowardly language of women. EuR. Andr. 
 757. Ou p) e^fyepels tov vjtvw Karo^ov KOKKivfjar is KavaiTTri- 
 atis i^oirdha heivijv votrov, <b tckvov, do not wake him. SoPH. Trach. 
 978. Tiiroiilsi ov prj Kara ^Ij a- et, don't come down. AlusT. Vesp 
 S97. 
 
186 DOUBLE NEGATIVE Ou ;UJJ. [§ 89, 2 
 
 For the use of the future, see § 25, 1. N. 5. For the Subjunctive 
 in this construction, see below, Kem. 2. 
 
 Note 1. A prohibition thus begun by ol fu] may be con- 
 tinued by joiTjSe with another Future (or Subjunctive). An 
 affirmative command may be added by another Future or an 
 Imperative, after oKKa or be. E. g. 
 
 Oi) fir) koXeIs ji\ £v6pa>tf>, UfTeva), firfSi k are pets ToSvo/ui, do 
 not call to me, / implore you, nor speak my name. Arist. Ran. 298. 
 OOfijj Trpoo-oitrftr X^'P" /^ T ^ ' « i/' f ' neirKav, do not bring your 
 hand near me nor touch my garments. EuR. Hippol. 606. Ov fit) 
 irpotToitreis X^P"' ^axxe^O'eis S' laiv, fijjS' e ^ o ^ o p | e t fiaplav 
 Tiji' a-rjv e/ioi, do not bring your hand near me; but go and rage, and 
 do not wipe off your, folly on me. Id. Bacch. 343. 
 
 Ol) iifj XaAijo-fts (XaX^CTT/Oi "XX' dKoX'ovdrjiTeis ffiol, do not 
 prate, hut follow me. Arist. Nub. 505. Oi ^^ Biarpi^eis, dXXa 
 yeiaei r^s Bvpas, do not delay, but knock at the door. Id. Kan. 
 462. Ov fif] KJiXvaprjaeis e-)(uiv, to ^avBia, a}0^ apdfievos oto'ecs 
 nakiv TO. arpcofiaTa. lb. 524. Ov p^rj hv(T}iiVT]S eaei (j)i\ots, iravfffi 
 fie Bvfiov Ka\ ttclKiv a-rpc^eis Kapa, . . . Se'^ei fie Sapa Koi napai- 
 Ttjaet narpos, be not inimical to friends, but cease your rage, &c. 
 Eur. Med. 1151. Ou firj (rKwi^/'iyr ju7;fie Troirjo'Ti s airepoi TpvyoSal- 
 fiovei oiroi, dXX' e v d> ij /x e ( , do not scoff, nor do what these wretches 
 do; but keep silence! Arist. Nub. 296. (Here the Imperative is 
 used precisely Hke the Future with aWa or fie in the preceding ex- 
 amples.) 
 
 The Future in the clauses with oKKa or fie wiU be explained by 
 § 25, 1, N. 5 (a) ; in the clauses with p,r]be it may be explained by 
 § 25, 1, N. 5 (6), or we may consider the construction a continua- 
 tion of that with oi jiTj, the pfj being repeated without the ov. 
 
 Note 2. In a few cases oi with the Future is used interroga- 
 tively expressing an exhortation, followed by another Future with 
 fi7;Se or koi fifj expressing a prohibition. E. g. 
 
 Oi o-iy' avi^ei, fii/Se b(C\iav apcX{s), keep silence (lit. will you not 
 keep silence 1) and do not become a coward. Soph. Aj. 75. (Here 
 perhaps we should punctuate oi o-iy' dvc^ti; fujfie ficiXiai' apci. 
 See Rem. 1. But the first clause, although strictly interrogative, is 
 really an exhortation, and was so considered in the construction of 
 the following clause, where the Future is to be explained on the 
 principle of § 25, 1, N. 5 (6). Compare the examples under Note 
 1.) Oi flao-o-ov oio-eic, fijjS' djrio'T^o'eis e'/ioi, i. 6. extend your 
 hand, and do not distrust me. Id. Trach. 1183. Ovk et <tv t oiKOtit, 
 av T€ Kpeav Kara areyas, Koi p-rj to p.r]dev dXyos els fjJy oiaeTe . Id. 
 O. T. 637. 
 
 Remark 1. The examples under § 89, 2 and the notes are usu- 
 ally printed as interrogative, in accordance with the doctrine of 
 Elinsley, stated in his note to Eurip. Med. 1120 (1151) and in the 
 
J 89, 2.] DOTTBLE NEGATIVE Oil /llj. 187 
 
 Quarterly Keview for June, 1812. He explains oi fifj XaX^o-sirj 
 as meaning wrill you not stop prating f lit. will you not not prate f and 
 when a second clause in the Future with /irfSe or aWa follows, he 
 considers the interrogative force of oi to extend also to this. But 
 this explanation requires an entirely different theory to account for 
 the construction of § 89, 1 ; whereas the rules given above consider 
 the Subjunctive there a relic of the common Homeric Subjunctive 
 (§ 87), and explain the Future in § 89, 2 by the principle stated in 
 § 25, 1, N. 5, — oi fifj having the same force of a strong single negative 
 in both constructions. As to the examples in N. 1, tlie last one (where 
 the Imperative instead of the Future follows dWd) seems to be de- 
 cisive against the interrogative force commonly ascribed to the 
 Future in the others. The examples in N. 2 are the strongest sup- 
 port of Elmsley's theory, where the first clause is clearly interroga- 
 tive, at least originally ; but the force of the question as an exhortar 
 tion seems to have guided the construction of the sentence, which 
 is finished after the analogy of the examples in N. 1. The explana- 
 tion given above (N. 2) is supported by Absch. Sept. 250, oi <nya; 
 lirjSiv ravS' eptis Kara jrroKiv, will you not keep silence f (oi aiy avi- 
 ^i ;) say nothing of this kind through the city. 
 
 We may explain the examples in N. 2 as interrogative, by con- 
 sidering the first clause a que^tion with oi (implying an affirma- 
 tive answer) equivalent to an exhortation, and the second a 
 question with /xij (implying a ne<J[ative answer) equivalent to 
 a prohibition. Oi (riy dve^ei- iir/be SciXiW dpel ; wll thus mean, 
 will you not keep silence f and you will not become a coward, loill 
 you f 
 
 Remark 2. In modern editions of the classics the Subjunctive is 
 not found in the construction of § 89, 2. But in many of the exam- 
 ples quoted there and in the notes the first Aorist Subjunctive in 
 -a-ijs has been emended to the Future, against the authority of the 
 Mss., in conformity to Dawes's rule. (See § 45, N. 8, with foot- 
 note.) Thusi in the three examples from the Clouds, the Mss. have 
 the Subjunctive; and in the last (vs. 296) oi /iij aKayjrjjs could 
 not be changed to oi /iij o- it oi i/^ e 1 1 , as the Future of vKanra is 
 trxttiyfroiiat. Elmsley's emendation trKoyyjrei is therefore adopted by 
 most editors. But this seems too violent a change to allow in the 
 text, merely to sustain an arbitrary rule, which at best has nothing 
 but accident to rest on. If both constructions (§ 89, 1 and 2) are 
 explained on the same principle, there is no longer any reason for 
 objecting to the Subjunctive with oi jiri in prohibitions ; and it 
 seems most probable that both the Future and the Subjunctive were 
 allowed in both constructions, but that the Subjunctive was mow 
 common in that of § 89, 1, and the Future in that of § 89, 2. 
 
188 THE INFINITIVE. [§ ^^ 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 § 90. The Infinitive mood expresses the simple idea 
 of the verb, without limitation of number or person. 
 It has the force of a neuter verbal noun, and as such it 
 may take the neuter of the article in all its cases. 
 
 It has at the same time the attributes of a verb, so 
 that (even when it takes the article) it may have a 
 subject, object, and other adjuncts ; and, further, it is 
 qualified not by adjectives, but by adverbs. 
 
 § 91. The Infinitive may as nominative be the sub- 
 ject of a finite verb, or as accusative be the subject of 
 another Infinitive. The Infinitive is especially common 
 as the subject of an impersonal verb, or of ean. It may 
 also be a predicate nominative, or it may stand in appo- 
 sition with a substantive. 
 
 Such Infinitives stand regularly without the article ; 
 but if they are to be especially prominent as containing 
 the leading idea of the sentence, the article may be 
 used. E. g. 
 
 ^vve^ij avToi €\6e7u, it happened to him to go, Ovk fvetrri tovto 
 'jrotTJaat. A-bivarov eort tovto TTOirjaai. *E^^v fifvtiv. A« 
 avTov jiiveiv. Oi fiev yap n kokov fiairiXevcii,fv,JbrUisnohad 
 thing to be a king. Od. I, 392. Eis oitoras apurros, apLVvea-Bat 
 7r€pl iraTpr}s. II. XII, 243. 'Aft yap r)(ia Tois yipovaiv cv /lade lit, 
 AksCH. Ag. 584. noXii yap paov exovTas cjivXaTTctv ijKTi)<ra- 
 adai TravTa irifjivKev. Dem. 01. IE, 25, 24. (Compare 01. I, 16, 3: 
 AoKft tA <|)uXa|ai TayaOa tov KTrfO-aadai ^"^^''■'"'"epoK eivai.) 
 'HSv TToXXoiis €xSpoiis fx^^"! r*EM. F. L. 409, 25. AoKfi oiko- 
 vopov dyadov etcat ev oIkslv tov eavTou oI<ov. Xen, Oecon. I, 
 2. ^rja-l SeiK tovto 7roirj(rai, he says thai it is necessary to Jo this. 
 (Here Troiijo-ai as accus. is the subject of Seii» : for 8eli/, see § 92, 2.) 
 To yKilivai fViorij/uiji' rrov Xa/Seiv eWiV, to learn is to acquire knowl- 
 edge. Plat. Theaet. 209 E. To SUrjv biSovai. iroTfpov naa-xttt 
 
S 92, l.J INFINITIVE AS OBJECT. 189 
 
 Ti fOTiv 5 iToiftv; Plat. Gorg. 476 D. (In the last two exampltjs 
 the subject Infinitive has the article to emphasize it, while the pre- 
 dicate Infinitives stand alone.) Ovrot f)bv iari to ex^'" XPW"''''' 
 ovTois mt dviapov TO airo^dWeiv. Xbn. Cyr. VIII, 3, 42. (Com- 
 pare the two examples above from Demosthenes.) ToCto ea-ri to 
 d8iK€lv, TO TrXtoK Twv aWav ^rfTeiv ex""' P^AT. Gorg. 483 C. 
 'AXX' oifiati vvv }iiv eTna-KOTel Tovrois to, KaTopO ovv. Dem, 01. IT, 
 23, 27. To yap 6avarov Sf Sic vat ovdev aX\o (ariv ^ So tec iv (ro(j}6v 
 €ivai /ifj opTa- 8o<tlv yap elSevai iarlv a ovk oldev. PlaT. Apol. 
 29 A. 
 
 § 93. The Infinitive without the article may be the 
 object of a verb. It stands generally as an object accu- 
 sative, sometimes as an object genitive, and sometimes 
 as an accusative of kindred signification. The classes 
 of verbs after which the Infinitive is thus used must be 
 learned by practice ; but the Infinitive without a sub- 
 ject follows in general the same classes of verbs in 
 Greek as in English. The following, however, may be 
 specially mentioned : — 
 
 1. In general, any verb whose action directly implies 
 another action or state as its object, if such action or 
 state is to be expressed by a verb and not by a noun, 
 takes the Infinitive. Such are verbs signifying to teach, 
 to learn, to accustom, to desire, to ask, to advise, to entreat, 
 to exhort, to command, to persuade, to urge, to propose, to 
 compel, to need, to cause, to intend, to begin, to attempt, to 
 permit, to decide, to dare, to prefer, to choose, to pretend; 
 those expressing fear, unwillingness, eagerness, cau- 
 tion, neglect, danger, postponement, forbidding, hindrance, 
 escape, &c. ; and all implying ability, fitness, desert, 
 qualification, sufficiency, or their opposites. E. g. 
 
 ^i^dtTKOvariv avTov jSaXXciv, they teach him to shoot. EfiaSov tqvto 
 TToirjaoi^ they learned to do this. BouXerat iKdelv. Xlapatvovfiev a-oi 
 77€i6ea6ai- ^o^ovfiai fieveiv. Alpovvrai ttoXc/iciv. *H ttoKis kivSv- 
 vevei bia^dapTJvat. Avj/arai aTreKOelv. 'EKeXevtrev avTov Trepiixeival 
 lie. Aiop,ai vp-mv (rvyyva>p,rjv fioi cxciK. Eittc (TTpaTrjyoifS eXeaBat, he 
 proposed to choose generals. ' Airayoptvovinv airols p.ri tovto t, oifjirai. 
 (See below, § 95, 2 ) Tj K<oXifo-« airov jSaSiXciK onoi jSouXerai, what 
 viUl prevent him from marching, Ifc. ? "A^im Xajx^dveiv. 'A^iovrM 
 
190 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 92, 1. 
 
 6aveiv. Ov iritjyvKe SouAsueii', he is not born to be a slave. 'AvafiaK' 
 \fTm Tovra noieXv, he postpones doing this. 
 
 This use of the Infinitive is too common to need illustration by 
 more particular examples. 
 
 Remark I. The Infinitive in this construction is generally equiv- 
 alent to the English Infinitive after the same class of verbs ; and it 
 refers to indefinite or to future time. (See § 15, I.) The Present 
 and Aorist are the tenses usually found, with the distinction stated 
 in the Remark before § 12 : for the Perfect, see § 18, 3 (6) ; and fbi 
 the occasional use of the Future Infinitive (or even the Infinitive 
 with av) after some of these verbs, see § 27, N. 2. 
 
 Remark 2. Verbs ot fearing and caution are included in the list 
 given above, although they are generally followed by ft^, lest, and 
 the Subjunctive or Optative. (See § 46.) The Infinitive, however, 
 sometimes occurs ; and, when it is usfed, it belongs regularly under 
 the rule, § 92, 1. (See § 46, N. 8, a and 6.) 
 
 Verbs expressing danger take the Infinitive more frequently than 
 /iTj with the Subjunctive or Optative. (See § 46, N. 8, c.) 
 
 Note 1. Some verbs which do not regularly take an In- 
 finitive may be used in unusual significations, so as to allow an 
 Infinitive by § 92, 1. E. g. 
 
 Svvc^rja'av rots IlXaraic{)(rt wapaSovvai tr^Sr avrovs Koi to oirXa, 
 they made an agreement with the Plataeans to surrender, &e. Thuc. 
 II, 4. TiVt d' av Tis jiaXKov iria-Ttvcreie TrapaKaraBea-dai ^fniara ; 
 to whom would any one sooner dare to commit money? Xen. Mem. 
 IV, 4, 17. 'Ohipovrm oIkovSc veeaSai, they mourn to go home. XL 
 11,290. 'Ejreui^^/ii)(ra» 'Axo'oi aiSeio-^at Uprja. 11.1,22. 
 
 Note 2. "When a noun and a verb (especially iort) to- 
 gether form an expression equivalent to any of the verbs of 
 § 92, 1, they may take the Infinitive without the article. 
 Some other expressions with a similar force take the same 
 construction. E. g. 
 
 'Avdyxri eVrl rrdvras aireXdf'iv. KlvSvvos ^v aiirm iradeXv rt. 
 Otrar «Wt /ioi TOVTO Troirja-ai. $o^or eVriw aira iXSelv. "Apa^ 
 fv avTois ^v, KoXvpa ovtra (ras Triikas) re poadf'ivai, a wagon, which 
 prevented them from, shutting the gates. Thuc. IV, 6 7. So tVpyei/tTo 
 fie &Wots re aX\o6i KtdXvpaTa prj av ^rjdijvai , obstacles to their in- 
 crease.^ Id. I,^ 16. (See § 95, 2, N. lA Totr arpaTimrais <Sp/iij ive- 
 Treo-f eKTeix'taai rh X'^P^o"- M. IV, 4. Ou pdvTis flp\ Td(j)am} 
 yvStvai, I am not enough of a prophet to decide, &c. Eun. Hippol. 
 846. (Here the idea of ability is implied in pdvTn elpi) To ao-qbaXcs 
 (cai p,iveiv Ka\ diTe\6eiv al vr)fs Trapi^ova-iv. Thuc. VI, 18. (See 
 § 93, 1.) "i.jfpina ridaa-eveaOai ipvaiv, capable by nature oj 
 
S 92, l.J INFINITIVE AS OBJECT.' 191 
 
 heing tamud (=7r«<^UK.0Tu nda(reie(T6ai). Plat. Politic. 264 A. Tit 
 Hq)(avfj' fifj ovj(l ivdvra Karava\ai$7)vai els to rfdvavai ; (i. e. rt 
 KoKvirei fxr) oi);^t ivavra Karai/aXcD^qyat ;) Plat. Phaed. 72 D. Ae- 
 ioiKa iiTj iroKKa KOt ;;^a\c7ra cii avayxriv eXBa/iev Troitii', lest we may 
 come to the necessity of doing. Dem. 01. I, 13, 25. "Qpa airievai, 
 it is time to go away (like xph a-mivai,, we must go away). Plat. 
 Apol. 42 A. 'EXTTiSas ex^i tovto iroirjarai (=f\7riffi tovto ttoitj- 
 o-ai), he hopes to do this. But eXttii tov i\eXv, Thuc. II, 56. 
 Oi 6f fmi/rer amoi Bavelv, and the living are those who caused them 
 to die. Soph. Ant. 1173. We might also have mrioi tov tovtovs 
 Bavciv or atrtoi to tovtovs davelv. (See § 23, 1, N. 3.) So in phrases 
 like TToXXou (or /xiKpoS) Seoi iroifiv ti, I want much (or little) of doing 
 anything ; napa fuKpov ^\6ov woieiv n, they came within a little of do- 
 ing anything; where the idea of ability, inability, or sufficiency 
 appears : so in Thuc. VII, 70, ffpaxii yap djriXtvov SiaKoaiai yevi- 
 trOai. So ipiro^av tovt<o eiri^v eXBeiv (=^Ka>Xuet tovtov eXBeiv), it 
 prevents him from going; where tov iXdeiv may be used. (See § 94, 
 and § 95, 1 and 2.) 
 
 The Infinitive depending on a noun is generally an adnominal 
 genitive with the article tou. See § 94 and § 95, 1. 
 
 Note 3. Although the Infinitive depending on the verbs in- 
 cluded in § 92, 1 regularly stands without the article, yet to is some- 
 times prefixed to give the Infinitive still more the character of a 
 noun in the accusative. The Infinitive is sometimes placed for em- 
 phasis apart from the main construction, like a synecdochical accu- 
 sative. E. g. 
 
 Kai was Sfj TO dpxiKovs eivai av8pa>na>v waihcveis ; Xen. Oecon. 
 Xm, 4. (So n-aidcuu two tj.) To b' av ^vvoiKeiv tjS' 6/iou ri'j 
 &v yvvti SvvaiTo ; i. e. as to living vrith her, what woman could do it ? 
 Soph. Tr. 545. To Spav ovk ^deXria-av. Id. O. C. 442. 
 
 OvSeis ft hv 7rei<r€iev to iifj ovk iXBelv, no one could persuade me 
 not to go. Arist. Ran. 68. (For fiij ou, see § 95, 2, N. 1, 6.) So 
 Xkn. Hell. V, 2, 36. So 6e\^ei to lifj KTelvai avvfwnv (like 
 B-eio-Ei TO p.fi KTf'ivat), Aesch. Prom. 865. Compare Soph. Phil. 
 1253, ovSe Toi trfi ^(eipX ■neidofuu to 8pav, i. e. / do not trust your 
 hand for action (like ov Tteido/iai troi Tavra, I do not trust you in 
 this.) 
 
 Note 4. Other active verbs than those included in § 92, 1 may 
 take the Infinitive like an ordinary noun, as an object accusative. 
 Here, however, the Infinitive takes the article to. E. g. 
 
 Tb Te\evTrj(rai irdvrav ^ iteirpaip.evt) KareKpivcv, fate awarded 
 death to all. Isoc. Demon, p. 11 C. § 43. 
 
 Note 5. A few of the verbs included in § 92, 1, which govern 
 the genitive of a noun, allow also the genitive of the Infinitive with 
 TOV, as well as the simple Infinitive. (See § 95, 1.^ This appliei 
 chiefly to a/uX/«i, iiniifMop.ai, and to the verbs of hindrance, &c iip 
 cludiid in § 95, 2. E. g. 
 
192 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 92, 1. 
 
 'AfieXriaas Tov opylCeadat. Xen. Mem. 11, 3, 9. (But dne^<Tat 
 \eyeiv, Plat. Phaed. 98 D.) Most verbs oidedring and negleclmg 
 take only the simple Infinitive. 'En-t/xeXeofiat, which usually takes 
 on-mr with the Future Indicative (§ 45), allows also the simple In- 
 finitive (Thuc. VI, 54), and the Infinitive with tov (Xen. Mem. 
 m, 3, 11). See § 45, N. 6, a. 
 
 Remark. For the use of the Infinitive without to after verbs as 
 an accusative by synecdoche (usually found only after adjectives), 
 see § 93, 2, Note 3. 
 
 2. Another case in which the Infinitive appears as 
 the object of a verb occurs in indirect discourse, after 
 verbs implying thought or the expreggion of thought (verba 
 sentiendi et deolarandi) or equivalent expressions. Here 
 each tense of the Infinitive, instead of referring indefi- 
 nitely to the future (as in the former construction, § 92, 
 1), represents the corresponding tense of the Indicative 
 or Optative 
 
 Remask. For this construction see § 78, 1 ; where also exam- 
 ples of the Infinitive with av in indirect discourse are given. For 
 the distinction between the Infinitive in this construction and the 
 ordinary Infinitive (92, 1), see § 73, 1, Remark. For the Infini- 
 tive, not in indirect discourse, after some verbs which usually be- 
 long to this class, see § 15, 2, Notes 2 and 3 ; see also § 23, 2, Notes 
 2 and 3. 
 
 Note 1. Of the three common verbs signifjnng to say, ^truii is 
 regularly followed only by the Infinitive in indirect discourse, tlnov 
 only by oti or i>s and the Indicative or Optative, while Xlya allows 
 either construction. A singular exception in regard to er;roi> is 
 found in Eur. Phoen. 1590, quoted § 89, 1, N. 1. (See § 15, 2, 
 N. 3.) 
 
 Note 2. After many verbs of this class in the passive both a 
 personal and an impersonal construction are allowed : thus, we can 
 say X/yerat 6 KOpof yeveaBai, Cyrus is said to have been, or XeyfToi 
 TOV KCpoK yfvea-Bai, it is said that Cyrus was. Aoice'o) in the meanincr 
 / seem (videor) usually has the personal construction, as in English ; 
 as oJtos SoKfl elvai, he seems to be. When an Infinitive with av fol- 
 lows (§ 73, 1), it must be translated by an impersonal construction, 
 to suit the English idiom : thus, fioKf i tis &v (xeiv must be translated 
 it seems that some one would have, although ns is the subject of SokcI ; 
 '■a we cannot use would with our Infinitive, to translate ivtiv iti 
 (See § 42, 2, Note.) '* 
 
§ 93, 1.] INFINITIVK AFTER EBLATIVES, ETO. 193 
 
 Note 3. (a.) Wheif an indirect quotation has been intro- 
 duced by an Infinitive, a dependent relative or temporal clause 
 in the quotation sometimes takes the Infinitive by assimilation, 
 where we should expect an Indicative or Optative. The tem- 
 poral particles As, ore, enei, e'jmSi), as well as the relative pro- 
 nouns, are used in this construction. Herodotus also uses «', 
 if, and even Siori, because, in the same way. E. g. 
 
 MfTfl 8e,i>s ov irav€(T6ai,aKfa bl^-qcrOai (\eyovari),and aftenoardx, 
 when it did not cease, they say that they sought for remedies. Hdt. I, 
 94. (Here we should expect as ov< iiravero.) 'Qs S' aKovaai 
 Tovs irapovTas, Bopv^ov yevea-Bai ((jxitriv), they say that, when those 
 present heard it, there was a tumult. Dem. F. L. 402, 8. 'En-«Sij Si 
 yeve (rdat kiri rrj oiKia rjj *Aydda>vos, (^<l>r]^ dveay^evtjv KaraKafi^d' 
 veiv Trjv dipav. Plat. Symp. 174 D. See Rep. A, 614 B. A-tyerai 
 A\Kfiaia}vt, ore 8ri dXatrdaL aiiTov, tov 'AttoXXw TavTr)V rrfv yrjv 
 XP^o-ai o'lKciv. ThuC. II, 102. (See § 15, 1, N. 2.) Kal oaa av iut 
 CKelvav ^ovXeveo'daL, ovdeifos vtTTepop yvQifiij (l)avTJvai (e^atraw). 
 Id. I, 91. (Here e^ovXevovro would be the common form.) 'Hyou- 
 fievqs Bti dXijOelas ovk av irare ipaip.ev avrfj ^opbv KaK&v aKoKovOrjaai, 
 dW vyies re Kal hiKaiou t^6os, a kol (rto^poavvrjv eTreaSaL. Pl-VT, 
 Kep. VI, 490 C. 
 
 Et yap 8ff Seiv irdvTGiS nepideivai aXX^ re^ t^v ^ao'LXrjlrjv, (e(f>rj) 
 hiKaiorepov elvai M^dtoi' real 7repL^a\e1v tovto. HdT. I, 129. (Here ei 
 Se'ot or el Set would be the ordinary expression.) So Hdt. HI, 105 
 and 108; doubttiil, II, 64 and 172. See Kriiger's note on I, 129. 
 Ttfidv Se ^afiiovs €0i;, diori Ta<j>rj i/al oi t6v irdTTirov drjfiotrip vnh 
 ^a/iiav. Hdt. hi, 55. 
 
 (6.) In some cases, particularly when the provisions of a law are 
 quoted, a relative is used with the Infinitive, even when no Infini- 
 tive precedes. E. g. 
 
 "EBijKev i(j>' ols e^eXvai diroKnvvivai, he enacted on what conditiont 
 it is allowed to Mil. Dem. Lept. 505, 19. Kal 8io ravra, av tis dim- 
 KTelvrj Tiva, TTiv ^ovXfiv SiKa^eLV eypayj/e, Kal ov^ airep, av &\a, elvai, 
 and he did not enact what should be done if he should be convicted. 
 Dem. Aristocr. 629, 2. (Here elvai is the reading of the Cod. 2, 
 amply defended by the preceding example, in which all editora 
 allow e^elvai.) ^exa yap avSpas irpoeikovTO aiir^ ^Vfi,fiov\ovs, &vev 
 SiV fifj Kvpiov eivai dirdyeiv arpartav eK rijs iroXetas. TuuC. V, 63. 
 
 § 93. The Infinitive without the article may limit 
 the meaning of certain adjectives and adverbs. 
 
 1. Such are particularly adjectives denoting abilitr/, 
 fitness, desert, qualification, sufficienoy, readiness, and 
 
194 THE ESFINITIVh. [§ ^^> ^' 
 
 their opposites; and, in general, those denoting the 
 ■same relations as the verbs which govern the Infinitive 
 (§92,1). E.g. 
 
 Amarbii voie'iv, able to do. Af ivor Xiytiv, skilled in speaking. 
 'Alios «crri Toura \a^e^v, he deserves to receive this. 'Avd^tos dau/idfe- 
 fr$ai, unworthy to be admired. *A|ior TijMcrSai., worthy to be honored. 
 Oiix olos re ^v xoCro iSelv, he was not able to see this, npo'flu/ioi 
 Aeyeiv, eager to speak. 'EtoIhos Kivivvov iiroiievciv, ready tn endure 
 danger. 
 
 Qf/utoToicXea, iKavararov elneiv Ka\ yvtovai Koi irpa^ai. Lt8. 
 Or. Fun. p. 194, § 42. Toi' 8" fViT^Sftoj' Taiira iraBeiv e<jiri, the 
 people said that he was a suitable person to suffer this. Dem. Phil. HI, 
 126, 19. AJ yap evirpa^iai beivaX (TvyKpi^jfai ra Toiavra oveiStj. 
 Id. 01. n, 23, 29. Kvpiav CTroiria-av iiriiie\fia-6ai r^r eura^ias, they 
 gave it (the A reopagus) power to superintend good order. Isoc. Areop. 
 p. 147 D. § 39. Biijw 6c aSvvaToi rjaav ir po(r(j)e pe iv. Hdt. Ill, 
 138. MoKoKol Kaprepflv, too effeminate to endure. Plat. Bep. 
 VIII, 556 B. TaiTcivrj Vfiav f) htdvoia iy Kaprepflv a tyvart, your 
 minds are too dejected to persevere, &c. Thuc. II, 61. (In the last 
 two examples pakaxoi and Taneivij govern the Infinitive by the idea 
 of inability implied in them.) Xprnuira rropi^fiv eiiropwrarov yvvif. 
 Arist. Eccles. 236. Soijbiarcpoi hi) avji.<popas rds tS>v jreXas jrdines 
 litatpelv fj Tv)(as ras olkoOcv. Eujr. Alcmen. Fr. 103. *'E7ntm}[itiiv 
 X eye IK Tt (cal o-iyav. Plat. Phaedr. 276 A. ToXXa fvpijcrtit 
 vitovpyelv Svras r/pas oi kokovs. Abist. Pac. 430. 
 
 For examples of nouns followed by the Infinitive, see § 92, 1, N. 2. 
 
 Note 1. The use of the Infinitive after oios in the sense of 
 appropriate, likely, capable, and o cr o r in that of sufficient, with or 
 without their antecedents, is to be referred to this head. (Olos re, 
 Me, like Svxards, regularly takes the Infinitive.) E. g. 
 
 Ou yap 7K &pa tna to irfSiov apdeiv ,for it was not the proper season 
 for irrigating the land. Xen. An. II, 3, 13. TomuTas oiai ;(«fimvds 
 re tTTiytiv Kat depovs iKavas etvai, PlAT. Rep. Ill, 415 E. Totou- 
 Tos olos ireld e (r6ai. Id. Crit. 46 B. ^ep^pevoi ra avroiv €Ka(TTOi 
 '6<Tov ano^rjv, cultivating their own land to an extent sufficient to live 
 upon it. Thug. I, 2. 'EXeiTrcTO rrfs vvktos ootom fTKoraious difXBeiv 
 TO ireSiov, there was left enough of the night for crossing the plain 
 in the dark. Xkn. An. IV, 1, 5. "Ectflao-s too-ovtov Saov Ha^qm 
 avfyvcoKevai to \|'^0((r^a, it came so much in advance (of the other 
 ship), that Paches had already read the decree. Thuc. Ill, 49. (See 
 § 18, 3, ft.) Examples like the last strongly resemble those under 
 § 98, 1 in which &a-Te has toktovtos for its antecedent. 
 
 Other pronominal adjectives (as t-oiot, roido-Sf, TijiouTor, njXixoc, 
 iroioc) sometimes take an Infinitive in the same way. 
 
 Note 2. (a.) Certain impersonal verbs (like tvea-rt, irpinti, 
 npoirrikfi), which regularly talce an Infinitive as their subject 
 
4 93, 2.] INWINITIVE AFTEB ADJECTIVES, ETC. 195 
 
 (§ 91), are sometimes used in the Participle in a personal sense, in 
 which case they may be followed by the Infinitive, the Participle 
 having the force of one of the adjectives of § 93, 1. Thus to evovra 
 fljTeiv is equivalent to A tvean elirelv, what it is permitted to say; ra 
 -rpoafiKovra pnOfjvai is equivalent to & jrpoa^Kti prjBrjvai, what is proper 
 to be said, as if npoo-fiKet were a personal verb, and as if we could say 
 ravTa 7rpo(ri)K«, these things are becoming. E. g. 
 
 KartSav ro TrX^dos Tuv evdvTav elirelv. IsOC. Phil. p. 104 D. 
 § 110. Toi' fleoi' KaXei ouSei' TrpoonjKovr' iv ydois napaaTarflv, 
 she i? calling on the God who ought not to be present at lamentations. 
 Aesch. Agara. 1079. (UpocrjjKovTa is used like adjectives meaning 
 fit, proper, as if we could say Ss ov npoirrjKei Trapaorarcli/.) *pnf , 
 cVel TrpeTTtoi' ei^uff vpo ravbe ^auelv- SoPH. O. T. 9. So ri 
 flpXv T!apayye\6ivTa &i,e^eK6eiv (_ = & TraptjyyeXBtj fipZii 8ie^f\6etv). 
 Plat. Tim. 90 E. 
 
 (5.) In the same way certain adjectives, like Sixaios, iiriKai- 
 
 fios, eTTtT^Sfior, eTTi'do^os, may be used personally yi\th the 
 nfinitive ; as SUaios e'ort tovto iroieiv, it ii right for him to do this 
 (equivalent to SiKatov ea-Tiv avrov roiro ttouIji). E. g. 
 
 ^Tjpl Kot TToXXta pei^ovcov en tovt(jdv datpeav diKaios eivat ruy- 
 ydveiv, i. a. that it is right for me to receive, &c. Dem. Cor. 243, 6. 
 ESokovv eiTiTrj&ei.oi eliiai vire^atpedfi vat, they seemed to be con- 
 venient persons to be disposed of. Thuc. VIII, 70. OepajreieirBai 
 iiriKaipioi, important persons to be taken care of. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 2, 
 25. TdSe Toi c| avrioav iiriSo^a yeviadai, it is to be expected that 
 this tvill result from it. Hdt. I, 89. (IloXXoi eVi8o|oi roiiro rovro 
 ireitrea-Bat, it is to be expected that many will suffer this same thing, 
 Id. VI, 12, is an example of the Future Infinitive, § 27, N. 2. So 
 in English, many are likely to suffer.") 
 
 These examples resemble those under § 93, 2. 
 
 Note 3. Rarely the Infinitive with to is used after adjectives of 
 this class. (Compare § 92, 1, N. 3.) E. g. 
 
 To irpo(rra\aina>pelv ovdeis irpodv/ios rjv. Thuc. H, 53. 
 
 2. Any adjective may take the Infinitive ■without the 
 article as an accusative by synecdoche, showing in what 
 respect tlie adjective is applicable to its noun ; as 6eafia 
 aia-xpov opav, a sight disgraceful to look upon. 
 
 The Infinitive is here regularly active or middle, sel- 
 dom passive, even when the latter would seem more 
 natural ; as xaXeTroK iroielv, hard to do, seldom ^aXe- 
 vov TTotelcrOai, hard to he done. B. g. 
 
 Al(r}(pov yap robe y' eori (cal itrtrojiivoiai, 7Tv6ea6ai,i. S. disgrace- 
 
196 THE INFINITIVE. L§ ^^' ^' 
 
 ful for them to hear. n. II, 119. So II. I, 107 and 589. Toisy^ 
 tmep TovTav "Kiyovs eiioi jih avayKaioTarovs ir poetirflv riyov/ioi, vjut 
 de xpi<riliaTaTovs aKoitrai, i. e. most necessary for me to say, and 
 most useful for you to hear. Dem. Mid. 522, 18. 0o0epbs ■npotriro- 
 \(prj(rat,a terrible man to fight against. Id. 01. II, 24, 12. Olxia 
 I'ldla-Tij evdiatraa-dat, a house most pleasant to live in. Xen. Mem. 
 in, 8, 8. Ta xa5^"f(i>raTa eipe'iv, the things hardest to find: ra 
 paara cvTvyxiveiv, the things ea.^iest to obtain. lb. I, 6, 9. IIoXtTeia 
 YoXfirij a-viijv, a form of gooernment hard to tine under : avuiios 8e 
 (fiovapxla) x'^^^n '""' |3apuTaT-)j ^vvoiKria-ai. Pl.AT. Politic. 302 B 
 and E. Aoyoi Swarbs KaTavofja-at, a speech which it is possible to 
 understand. Id. Phaed. 90 D. 'O xpo""* ^pa-X"^ a^ias SiTiyrj- 
 aaa-dai, the time is too short for narrating it properly. Id. Menex. 
 239 B. 'H 686s emrriSeia wopfVop,evois (cat 'Keyeiv (cai aKoitiv, ■ 
 convenient both for speaking and for hearing. Id. Symp. 173 B. 
 Uorepov 8f Xoiaafrdai yjfvxporfpov (to trSaip) ; is the water there 
 colder for bathing f Xen. Mem. Ill, 13, 3._ 
 
 (Passive.) Viives ala-xpaX 6 pair 6 ai (instead of opav). Xen. 
 Cyneg. Ill, 3. "Eori 8' 6 \6yos (fuXairex^^l"'''' l"^"! p^6^vai If ovk 
 a(Tvp(f)opos. Isoc. Antid. p. 70, § 115. 
 
 Note 1. The Infinitive may be used after adverbs which corre- 
 spond to the adjectives just mentioned (§ 93, 2). E. g. 
 
 H&s av Tois p.iP eijvois KaWioTa tSeiv iroiolro rfiv e^eXoirti', to7s 
 8e tvap^eveai (^o/SepraToTa, in a manner most delightful for the friendly 
 to behold, and most terrible for the ill-disposed. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 3, 6. 
 
 Note 2. Certain nouns, which are equivalent in meaning to the 
 neuter of any of the adjectives which take the Infinitive, may them- 
 selves have the same construction. E. g. 
 
 QaviM lbf<Tdai,a wonderful thing to behold (Uke SavfiaaT&v IH- 
 aSai). 
 
 Note 3. (a.) In Homer verbs expressing excellence or fitness 
 sometimes take the Infinitive (as an accusative by synecdoche), 
 like the adjectives of § 93, 2. E. g. 
 
 'EicTopos rjde yvvrj, os apurTevecKe fidyeirdai , this is the wife of 
 Hector, who was the first infighting. II. VI, 460. 'OpjjkiKoiv e'icfraoTo 
 Spvidas yv&vai Kai avaiiripa p.v6rjiTaa-dat. Od. II, 158. Oi Trept 
 ficv ^ovXifv ^avaav, irepl 8' eore fidxf<rdat, ye who excel the Danai 
 in counsel and excel them in battle. II. I, 258. (Here /SovX^k and 
 fiaxfo-dai are alike in the accusative by synecdoche after jrepi . . . 
 
 COTE.) 
 
 (6.) Even in Attic Greek the Infinitive is sometimes used after 
 Vfrbs as a synecdoohical accusative. The Infinitives aKovfiv, aKova-ai, 
 in sound, and 6pav, Ibeiy, in appearance, especially, are used in thia 
 way. E. g. 
 
 Voxels oSv ri Sia0e'p6« alroiis l&eiv ;(dXicr<i>: ; do you think thai 
 
§ 95, 1.] INFINITIVE A3 GENITIVE OR DATIVE. 197 
 
 ihey differ at all in appearance from a brazier f Plat. Eep. VI, 495 
 £. Compare eupvTepos ISetOai, H. 111,194. 'AKovaai nayKaXtos 
 Ix") it u very fine m its sound. Dem. F. L. 355, 29. npaynara 
 Ttapl^ovtriv (pi miroi) iiriiieXetrBai, the horses will make troublp 
 about tending. Xen. Cyr. IV, 5, 46. 
 
 Note 4. The Homeric use of Sfidios, equal, like, with the In- 
 finitive is to be referred to the same principle. E. g. 
 
 AevKorepoi-j^iovog, Seieiv S' dveiiouriv 6/ioiot, (horses^ whiter than 
 snow, and like the winds in swiftness. II. X, 437. Ou yap di nt 
 o/toios iitiaitia-Qai iro(r\v §ei». L. XIV, 521. 
 
 § 94. The Infinitive as genitive, dative, or accusa- 
 ■ tive is very often governed by prepositions, or by adverbs 
 used as prepositions. In this case it always takes the 
 article tov, tw, or to, E. g. 
 
 Tovff yap "kayovs iTfpX tov TtficopTjo-aadai ^lKittttov 6p& yiyvo- 
 ftivovs, for I see thai the speeches are made about punishing Philip. 
 Dem. 01. Ill, 28, 6. Jlp6 tov tovs opKovs aTrodovvai, before tdh. 
 ing the oaths. Id. Cor. 234, 6. 'Ek tov vpos x^P'" Srip,riyop€tv 
 eviovs. Id. 01. m, 29, 18. Hpis ra prjSfv iKTtjsTrpeafidasXa^eiv, 
 besides receiving nothing for the embassy. Id. F. L. 412, 21. 'Ev t^ 
 TToKirqv Ttoitla-dai (XaplSrip.ov), in making Charidemus a citizen. 
 Id. Aristocr. 683, 22. "Ei'eKa roi) ttXcio) TToirja'ai ttjv virapxovtrav 
 ovaiav. Isoc. Demon, p. 6 A. § 19. 'Edav^a^ero eVi ™ evBipas 
 (fiv. Xen. Mem. IV, 8, 2. 'Ofims Sm to ^hos elvai ovk &v oUi 
 d8iKri6rivat, on account of being a stranger. lb. II, 1, 15. UdvTav 
 Sia(l>epa>» efjiaivfTo, xat els to tuxv navBdveiv & Sioi xai els to KtxKas 
 €Kaa-Ta woielv. Id. Cyr. I, 3, 1. 
 
 § 95. 1. The genitive and dative of the Infinitive, 
 
 with the article, may stand in most of the constmctions 
 
 belonging to those cases ; as in that of the adnominal 
 
 genitive, the genitive after comparatives, the genitive 
 
 after verbs and adjectives, the dative of manner, means, 
 
 &c., the dative after such verbs as inareva and after 
 
 adjectives denoting resemblance, <fec., and sometimes in 
 
 that of the genitive of cause or motive. E. g. 
 
 ToC IT I el V eitidvjiia, the desire to drink. Tliuc. VII, 84. Tlovovs 
 hi TOV (riv fiSecDS rjyepovas vopi^ere. Xen. Cyr. I, 5, 12. Els 
 fXjri'Sa ^\dov ToO eXelv (t^k ttoXiv), i, e. hope of taking the city. 
 ThuC. II, 5fi. (See § 92, 1, N. 2.) Ne'ois ro aiydv KpeiTTOv fori 
 TOV XaXflv MenAND, Monos. 387. IlapeKoXei eirip.eXeladat tov 
 its dpofi/wraray elvai.. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 55. So III, 8, 11 Sea 
 
198 THE INFINITIVE. ' [§ 95, 1 . 
 
 § 92, 1, N. 5. {'V.miukeoiuu usually takes mas with the Future In- 
 dicative', by § 45.) 'Eirea-xoiifv Toi baxpifiv, we ceafed to weep. 
 Plat. Phaed. 117 E. (See below, § 95, 2.) Kat yap ariBeis roi 
 KaraKoifiv Ttwo'r cta-iv, for they are unused to obeying any one. 
 Dem. 01. I, 15, 28. 
 
 OiSfKi Toiv irdvrav wXiov KfupaTjjKe <ti\imros ^ tm irporepos irpos 
 ToU npaypacri. yiyvtaBat. Id. Chers. 92, 21. 'AXXa r^ <f>av€pas 
 fivai TowvTos &v, by making it plain that he was such a man. Xen. 
 Mem. I, 2, 3. Ov yap 8ri t^ ye Koajiias C^v a^iov marfifiv, to trust 
 in an orderly life. Isoc. Antid. p. 315 A^§ 24. 'la-ov 8e tw irpo- 
 o-T€vetv. AescH. Agaiu. 253. Tm (rjv to-ri ti ivavriov, attrivep t^ 
 fyprjyopevai TO KadevSeiv. Plat. Phaed. 71 C. 
 
 Mivas TO XrjtTTtKbv KaSrjpei, Tov Tas irpoarodovs fiaWov tevai, avr^y 
 «n order that greater revenues might come in. Thuc. I, 4. 
 
 Note. It will be seen that the nominative and accusative of the 
 Infinitive (except the accusative after prepositions) regularly stand 
 without the article ; the genitive and dative regularly with the article. 
 The Infinitive after the verbs included in § 92, 1, however, gener- 
 ally stands without the article, whatever case it represents ; and 
 further, whenever any word which might govern a genitive or da- 
 tive of the Infinitive forms a part of an expression which is equiv- 
 alent to any of the verbs of § 92, 1, the simple Infinitive may be 
 used. (See § 92, 1, Note 2.) 
 
 2. After verbs and expressions which denote hin- 
 drance or freedom from anything, two constructions 
 are allowed, — that of the simple Infinitive (§ 92, 
 1), and that of the genitive of the Infinitive with tow 
 (§ 95, 1). 
 
 Thus we can say (a) elpyu a-e tovto iroieiv, and (b) tlpyn 
 <rt TOV TOVTO woKiv (both With the same meaning), Ae pre- 
 vents you from doing this. As the Inflnitive after such verbs 
 can take the negative iiij without affecting the sense, we have 
 a third and a fourth form, still with the same meaning : — 
 
 (c) eipy€i a-c firi tovto Troielu, and (rf) tipyei oe TOv p.fl tovto 
 iroitiv, he prevents you from doing this. For a fifth form with 
 the same meaning, see § 95, 3. (For the negative /xij, see 
 Note 1, a.) 
 
 If the leading verb is itself negative (or interrogative with a 
 negative implied), the double negative fiij ov is generally used 
 instead of ptri in the form (c) with the simple Infinitive, but 
 seldom (or never) in the form {d) with the genitive of the 
 Infinitive ; as oix (tpyti jt p,ri ov tovto ttouXv, he does not pre- 
 
§ 95, 2.] INFINITIVE AFTER VERBS OF HINDRANCE. 199 
 
 ven' you from doing this ; selaom (or never) rov fiij ov rmra 
 iroirw. See also § 95, 3. (For the double negative, see 
 Notti 1, 5.) E. g. 
 
 (a.) Ettc OiXwOov dirairefnrova'iv, oTrias eipyattri rovs eKcidev cttI' 
 fioridciv. Thuc. I, 62. El Toiro Tis (ipyei bpav okvos, if any 
 hesitation prevents you from doing this. Plat. Soph. 242 A. *AXXs>s 
 6f' Tras ■nopi^eaSaira tVirijSeta opKovs rjbt] /.aTexovras ijfms (r/Setv). 
 Xen. An. HI, 1, 20. KaKov fie ttolov elpye toxjt e^eidevat; SoPH. 
 
 0. T. 129. EvSoKifielv iijmoSav tr(j)ia-tv elvat. Plat. Euthyd. 
 305 D. naidos *£'pi)TOs, ov daveiv eppvarapriv. EUR. Ale. 11. Ton 
 <bl\mirov irapeXdtiv ovie e'Sivavro KtoKvirai, Dem. Pac. 62, 10. 
 Tfjv ISiav Ttjs yfjs ovdev /xe KoKvci X cy c i j/. Pl,AT. Phaed. 108 E. 
 
 (6.) To 5 8e Spairereveiv Seofiois d7relpyov<n ; XBIir. Mem. II, 
 
 1, 16. To yap yl^evdo^evov <j)cdvecr6at koX toO trvyyjfwprjs Tivos 
 Tvy)(dvfiv ipirohav pAXiara dvBpinrois yiyverai. Id. Cyr. Ill, 1, 9. 
 Eurev on KaXvaeie (Av) rov Kaiciv imovras- Id. An. I, 6, 2. 
 'Aire(rx6priv rov \a^eiv roC SiKaiW evexa. Dem. F. L. 410, 18. 
 
 (c.) Eipye firi ^Xaaravsiv. Plat. Phaedr. 251 B. 'Oirfp 
 t^X^ P'h "^^ ^eKoTTOvvrjrrov wopBelv , which prevented him from 
 ravaging the Peloponnesus. Th0C. I, 73. AtcicwXvo-c /i^ 8ta<j)6ei- 
 pai. Id. Ill, 49. 'EirfyivfTo KtoKv/iaTa pfj av^rjdrjvai. Id. I, 16, 
 (§ 92, 1, N. 2.) Ovrp-ovs y enavaa p,r\ npoaBe pKcaBai jiopovi 
 AesCH. Prom. 248. Tovfiov 0uXd^« a Svofia p,^ iraox^i'V kokHs. 
 Soph. O. C. 667. 
 
 Ov yap eoTi "EXXi/O'i ovSepla ckSvo'K p.r) ov Sovras )i6yov fivai 
 coils 8ov\ovs. Hot. VIII, 100. TLEpnovoi KrjpvKa^ VTToSt^dpevot 
 (Txr](Teiv rov 'Smapnryrriv pfj e^ifvat....Ov SuKaToi auriji/ lo-xeif 
 elol^Apyeioi prj ovK e^isvai. Id. IX, 12. " Qore ^evov y hv oitbev 
 ov6', (oairep aii vvv, viteKTpairolprjv prj ov o'vve Ka a^eiv. SoPH. O. 
 C. 565. Ti ipirobaiv prj ovx't v^pi^Cop^vovs dirodavflv ; Xen. An. 
 TTT, 1, 13. (Tl ipirnbwv here implies ovdev epirodatv.) Tivos &v Bcoio 
 firj ovx^^ Trdpirav evdalpaiv eivai; what would hinder you from being 
 perfectly happy f Id. Hell. IV, 1, 36. So Akist. Kan. 695. 
 
 ((/.) Ilaff yap dffKos byo avhpas e^€i Tov prj KaraSOvai, i. e. 
 ivHl keep twomenfrom sinking. Xen. An. HI, 5, 11. 'Ov ovSets ira 
 irpoBeis TQV p-rf ir\eav ex^^v dneTpdireTO. Thuc. I, 76. Et 8* &p* 
 epnohaiv ri awT^ tyevtro tov p^ (vBiis' TOTf SiKaaaardai. Dem. 
 Apatur. 900, 22. 'HTrt'oraro rrjv iroXiv piKpov dTToXtiroiJa'av tov pjj 
 TOis itrxdrais <Tvp<j)opais v t p iir e (t e'lv . IsOC. Antid. p. 73, § 122. 
 'AiroiTofiovvTes hv ipnobav ylyvoivro tov pi] opdv avroiis to oXok 
 arpdrcvpM. Xen. Cyr. II, 4, 23. ElBores on ev da-cfjaXei eiui tov 
 pr/Sev nadflv. lb. IH, 3, 31. (See Thuc. VI, 18, quoted § 92, 
 1, N. 2.) ToO de pfj (KaKaJff) irdax^ v aurol irdaav adeiav ^yere, 
 you were entirely free from fear of sujfi ring harm. Dem. F. L. 387, 
 17. ^"Evovtrqi ovBepids er diTotrTpo<j>fi! tov prj to ;^p^/iar' tx^tv 
 Spas, there being no longer any escape from the conclusion that you 
 have taken bribes. Id. Timoc. 702, 26. 
 
200 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 93, 2. 
 
 Remark. Ths last two examples show that /ifi can be joined 
 with the genitive of the Infinitive, even after nouns implying hin- 
 drance or freedom. In the two following the addition of ^^ is more 
 peculiar : — 
 
 'H airopla tov fi^ rjtruxdCfiv, the inability to rest. Thitc. II, 49. 
 "H TOV /u) ^vfiirXclv amaria, the distrust of sailing with them; i. e. the 
 unwillingness to sail, caused by distrust. Id. Ill, 75. 
 
 Note 1. (a.) The use of /i^ with the Infinitive in the 
 forms c and d is to be referred to the general principle, by 
 which the Infinitive after all verbs expressing a negative idea 
 (as those of denying, distrusting, concealing, forbidding, &c) 
 can always take the negative /iij, to strengthen the negation 
 implied in the leading verb. Thus we say apvArai fifi dXijdci 
 tivai toSto, he denies that this is true ; diniyopeve firiSeva tovto 
 irotelv, he forbade any one to do this. This negative may, how- 
 ever, be omitted without afiecting the sense. 
 
 (b.) An Infinitive which for any reason would regularly 
 take firi (either affecting the Infinitive itself, as an ordinary 
 negative, or strengthening a preceding negation, as in the case 
 just mentioned) generally takes the double negative /i^ oJ, if 
 the verb on which it depends is itself negative. Thus the 
 example given above, apveiTai fifi dXijdcs eivai tovto, becomes, if 
 we negative the leading verb, ovk dpveirai fitj ovk dXijdef eivai 
 TOVTO, he does not deny that this is true. So, when the original 
 fiij really negatives the Infinitive, as in Stxaiov eon p.ij tovtov 
 a(J3ievai, it is just not to acquit him, — if we negative the leading 
 verb, we shall have o u diKaiov eori p^ ov tovtov d<f)i€vai, it is 
 
 not just not to acquit him. See Plat. Rep. IV, 427 E, i>s 
 ov)( oiriov o-ot tv pfj oil fioriBf'iv SiKotoavvg. This applies also to 
 the Infinitive with t6 (§ 95, 3). 
 
 M^ ov is occasionally used before participles, and even before 
 nouns, on the same principle, to express an exception to a statement 
 containing a negative; as m Plat. Lys. 210 D, ovk apa lorl AiXov 
 ra AtKovvTi oiibev p.7j ovk dvTi(j)t\ovv, tmless it loves in return. Here, 
 if the negatives (ovk and ovSe'i/) were removed fix)m the leading 
 verb, we should have simply pfj durKfiiKovv (with the same meaning), 
 which would be the ordinary form with the participle, even after a 
 negative. So pfj ovk iovrts, unless they were. Hdt. VI, 9. So in 
 Dem. F. L. 379, 7, we find at re TrdXeis jroXXai koi ;(aXe7rai 'Ka^fiv, 
 uri ov xP'^'"f *"' ToXiopKi'^, the cities were many and difficult (== "oi 
 easy) to capture, except by Ion -^^ siege. 
 
§ 95, 3."j TA /ilj WITH THE INIINITIVE. 201 
 
 Hemare. M^ ou is very rarely found where the leading verb 
 iloes not at least imply a negative. In Xbn. An. II, 3, 11, aare 
 naaiv alaxiv^v <=lvai fifj ov mxnrovSa^civ, so that all were ashamed 
 not to Join heartuy in the work, the double negative may be explained 
 by the negative idea of unwillingness implied in alaxvvrjv. See also 
 the last example under N. 1. 
 
 Note 2. When the leading verb expressing hindrance, &e. is 
 itself negative, the form c, fu) ov with the Infinitive, is the most com- 
 mon. The form a, the Infinitive alone, is allowed after negative 
 (as well as aflirmative) verbs, as in Dem. Pac. 62, 10, quoted above 
 under a. The form 6, tou with the Infinitive (without ;*ij), is not 
 used after negative verbs, according to Madvig. 
 
 Even in the form c, we sometimes find the single negative fui (for 
 fiTj ou), even when the leading verb is negative. E. g. 
 
 Ou itdhiiv xpovo" /*' (irearxov fir) fie vavoroKeiv raxi- SoPH. Phil. 
 349. OvSe fi ofifiaros <l>povpav iraprfKde, rovde fiif \evtroeiv OToXoif. 
 Id. Traoh. 226. (Mij ou here is a conjecture.) 
 
 3. The Infinitive preceded by to firj is sometimes 
 used after verbs and expressions denoting hindrance, 
 and also after all expressions which even imply prevm 
 tion, omission, or denial. 
 
 This Infinitive with to is less closely connected than the 
 simple Infinitive with the leading verb, and often denotes 
 merely the resiUt of the prevention or omission of anything : it 
 may generally be explained as an accusative by synecdoche, or 
 sometimes as an object accusative (as after verbs of denial). 
 Here, as before (§ 95, 2), if the leading verb is itself negative, 
 or interrogative with a negative implied, /iij oi is generally 
 used instead of fi^. E. g. 
 
 T6v TrXetoToi' ofiCKov fipyov rh fiff irpoe^wvrag rav ottXcoi' to iyyn 
 TTJs TToXems KaKovpye'tv, they prevented them from injuring, &e. 
 Thuc. ni, 1. (This adds a, Jifih expression, e'pyei o-e to firf tovto 
 jToieij', to the four already given (§ 95, 2) as equivalents of the 
 'English, he prevents you from doing this.) To 8e fiff XeTjXaT^o-ai 
 Tiji/ jroXu» £o'x« To8e. Hdt. V, 101. ^6$os re §vyyfvfjs to fifj d8i- 
 Ke'iv ox^oci. Absch. Eum. 691. Outoi elotv fxovoi en fjfuv ffinodwu 
 TO fir) 0ri flvai ev6a TrdXat eotrevbofiev. Xen. An. IV, 8, 14. Ouk 
 airfoxof^v to fiff ovk fjri tovto i^Bfiv. Plat. Rep. I, 354 B. 
 OuK OTreoxovTo ovb^diro t&u ^t\(OV to firj ou^i 'n\eov€KTciv avrSav 
 reipaa-Bai,. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 32. Kifiava napa Tpeis d(f>eia-av 
 ijfricJMvs tA fiff davira (rffiimaai, i. e. they allowed Cimon by three 
 votes to escape the punishment of death. Dem. Aristocr. 688, 27 
 9* 
 
202 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 9^') "• 
 
 TpeU di fiovai yffrjipoi. Sifjv.yKcai t& furi davdrov T\\iTj(Tai, ana on,^ 
 three votes prevented you from condemning him to death (lit. matw the 
 difference as to condemning, &0.). lb. 676, 12. ^6^os yap dvd' vrrvov 
 napaa-TaTci t6 lifj j3f/3ai'ws /SXe'0a/ja o-v/i/SaXeiK virvm, i- e. stands 
 by to prevent my closing my eves, &c. Aksch. Agam. 15. 
 
 'Eirei irpoBvuewff , ovk evavrimcrofiai. to fif) ov ycymvelv nav oa-or 
 jrpoo-xpn'fff. Id. Prom. 78B. OiSiv yap avrc^ ravr ewapKecrei to firj 
 ov neaetv aTifias irrapxiT ovk avaax^rd, this will not suffice to pre- 
 vent him from falling, &c. lb. 918. AciVei p-h ou8' & ir poo-Bey _ijSf^» 
 TO p.ri ov fiapiarov elvai, they lack nothing of being heavily griev- 
 ous. Soph. O. T. 1232. M^rot, KaariyvrjTi], p.' dnpAtrys to p.ri otf 
 Save IV re ovv (to\,t6v davoiiTa 6' dyviaai, do not think me too mean 
 to die with thee, &c. Id. Ant. 544. (Cf. Ant. 22, and Oed. Col. 49.) 
 AuTiyv pr^v ov pLtrovvr eKeivijv t^v iroXtv to pfj ov peyaXrjv civai 
 <f>virei KevSaipona, i. e. not grudging the city its right to be great, &c. 
 Arist. Av. 36. (Compare /iiVijo-e'i' p.iv kvcti Kvppa yeviaBai, H. 
 XVII, 272 1 OuSfir avTiKcyei rb pr/ ov \f^fivoTi exaoTos ^yeZrot 
 jrXeioTou a^i w iiriaraadai, no one objects to saying, &c. Xen. Conv. 
 lU, 3. OuS' apvrjiTii eariv avTols to pfj ravff vnip ^CKitmov it par- 
 Tf IV, it is not even possible for them to deny that they did these things 
 in the interest of Philip. Dem. F. L. 392, 13. M17 iraptjs to fiq ov 
 (j>pda-ai, do not omit to speak of it. Soph. O. T. 283. OvSiva 
 tiJvaaOai KpvnTeiv to prj ov\ fjdecos &v Koi apoiv io'dlciv avT&v, that 
 no one is able to prevent people from knowing that he would gladly 
 even eat some of them raw. Xen. Hell. HI, 3, 6. 
 
 For p,fi ov, see § 95, 2, Note 1, (p.). 
 
 Note. The simple negative form tA /it) is sometimes found even 
 when the leading verb is negative, where regularly to p.^ ov would 
 be used. This is more common here than in the corresponding 
 case, § 95, 2, Note 2. E. g. 
 
 Ovk &v iaxoprjv tA pfj aTTOKXjjcTai Tovpbv adXiov Sipas. SoPH. 
 O. T. 1387. Ti'j (rov direXeltpBr) to firj 001 OKoXovBdv; Xen. 
 Cyr. V, 1 , 25. 'Akos 6' oiSev iirfipKetrav to pr/ vokiv pcv Sxnrfp o!» 
 fX* I iraBeiv. AbsCH. Agam. 1170. Ovk Sv ea-Ti prixav^ oi&epia t 6 
 fifi Kelvov c'lri/SouXeuctv fpoi. Hdt. I, 209. Kai <bnpi &pa<rat, 
 KovK dnapvovpai to prj. SoFH, Ant. 443. See also Dem. F. L. 
 392, 13, quoted above. 
 
 Kemark. To pfi and toS prj can of course be used with the In- 
 finitive as ordinary negatives. See examples, § 92, 1, N. S. So 
 inipekEiTai Tov prf diKriv dovvai, 
 
 § 96. The Infinitive with its subject^ object, or other 
 adjuncts (sometimes including dependent verbs) may 
 be preceded by the article to, the whole sentence stand- 
 ing as a single noun, either as the subject or object of a 
 
§ 97.] INFINITn'E EXPRESSING A PVRPOSE. 203 
 
 verb, as the object of a preposition, or in apposition 
 with a pronoun like tovto. E. g. 
 
 To fiev yap TroXXa airo\m\€Kevai Kara Tov noKefiov T^s ^jxeTepoM 
 dfuXeias av ns Bfii] StKaias- to be firjTe TraXai toOto ireirov6evai 
 ir€<f)Tjvevai re riva Tifuv avfifia^^tav TOVTtav dvTippoirov^ &v ^ov\6}ficda 
 Xpij<r6aL, T^s TUp' CKeivtav eiivoias eiepyeTtjii &v eyuye deirjv. Dem. OL 
 
 1, 12, 3.. 
 
 § 97. The Infinitive without the article often ex- 
 presses a. purpose. E. g. 
 
 Tpaav avhpa eKaarov (ei) iKolpeSa olvoxoeveiu, if we should 
 choose every man of the Trojans to be our cup-bearer. II. II, 127. So 
 H. I, 338, 80s ayeiv, and II, 107, 108. Tiji' e| 'Apfiov jrayou jSotiX^v 
 twetTTtjirat tTrip.eXeioBai Trjs fvKotrpias, i. e. jfbr the purpose of 
 guarding ycod order. Isoc. Areop. p. 147 B. § 37. Oi apxpvres, 06s 
 vp.£is £i\ca-9e apx^tv pov, the rulers, whom you chose to rule me. 
 Plat. Apol. 28 E. AcKa 6e rav veSiv irpo^irep'^av es tov psyav Xiiiiva 
 7r\ev<ral t€ koX Karao'Keyjraodaij Kai Ki]pv^ait K.r. X., i. e. they sent 
 them to sail and examine, and to proclaim, &c. Thuc. VI, 50. Tois 
 JjrTreaff napei\ovTo ne\oirovvri(Tiois ^va-rpaTfvfiv. Id. II, 12. 
 Svve^rjtrav Tols UXaratevoi Ivapadovvai o(l>ds avToiis Kai Ta o^rXa, 
 XpflfraarBai o n av fiovKaivTai, i. e. to do with them whatever they 
 pleased. Id. 11, 4. (For irapaSovvai see § 92, 1, N. 1.) Et jSovXoi- 
 fieSd TO emrpey^ai fj iraiSas iraiSeOcrai, tj ;fp^;iOTa diaa-Sioai, 
 K.T.X., if we should wish to intrust to any one either children to instruct 
 or money to keep, &c. Xen. Mem. I, 5, 2. At yvvcuKes irieiv (f>epov- 
 <rm, the women bringing them (something) to drink. Xen. Hell. VII, 
 
 2, 9. T^v 7ro\tv KaX tt)v axpav ^vXaTTe tv avToXs irapedaKav, they 
 delivered the city and the citadel to them to guard. lb. IV, 4, 16. *Or 
 yap hv vpds XaSji, toutov dcf>UTe tois Beois Ko\d{^eii>. Dem. F. L. 
 363, 25. 
 
 'H dvpa I] ip,^ av€(pKTO flatevat to Seop€v<f n c/xov. Xen. Hell. 
 V, 1, 14. OvK eixov dpyvpiov ivKTiTi^earBai., they had no money to 
 huy provisions. Id. An. VII, 1, 7. 'KpUTrapxaebore fjpepav dito\o- 
 yfjo-aBac, i. e. a day to defend himself in. Id. Hell. I, 7, 28. 'Epau- 
 TOV (rot ippe\eTdv irapexfiv ov irdw SeSoKrai. Plat. Phaedr. 228 E. 
 Ols cvfvbaipovija'ai re 6 ^ios opoias Kai cvTe\evT!i(rai ^vvtpe- 
 Tprtdri. Thuc. II, 44. 
 
 Here, as in § 93, 2, the Infinitive is generally active or middle, 
 even where the passive would seem more natural; as Kravelx epoi 
 vtv eSoaav, they gave her to me to be killed. EuB. Troad. 874. 
 
 Note 1. The Infinitive is thus used in prose chiefly after verbs 
 signifying to choose or appoint, to give or take (the Infinitive denot- 
 ing the purpose for which anything is given or taken), and also 
 after those signifying to send or bring. (See the examples.) With 
 the last class the Future Participle is more common. A final clause 
 after Iva, &c. may also be used in the same sense. 
 
204 THE INFINITIVE. L§ ^^' 
 
 In poetry the same construction sometimes occurs after verbs of 
 motion, like flfit, rJKo}, and fiaiva; and also aftei ftV'> eVf i/ii, 
 and irapeiiJii(lobe,to be at hand), expressed or understood. E. g 
 
 'AXXd Tis ei'ij fin-EiK 'Arpeibri ' Kyajiefivovi, Trotfiivi XaSw, 6«^ let 
 some one go to tell Agamemnon. Od. XIV, 496. (See Passow.^s. v. 
 fi/ii.) Brj 8c Beciv, and he started to run. H. II, 182. Ovhe tis 
 tanv aprjv Koi Aoiyow diivvai, nor is there any one to keep off curse 
 and ruin. II. XXIV, 4«9. UoXKoi 8' aS <roi 'Axaioi ivaipeptv St 
 K€ Sivrjai, i. e.for you to slay whomsoever you can. II. VI, 229. Oi) 
 yap eiT avrjp otos 'Oduccfis ea-Kfv, apriv ano oiKov dpvvai. Od. II, 
 59. MavBdveiv yap rJKoyLev, for we are come to learn. SoPH. O 
 C. 12. nXoKOftos oSe karaa-Te^eiv, here is my hair for you to 
 wreathe. EuR. Iph. Aul. M78. 
 
 Even in prose, the Infinitive occasionally occurs after tlp.1 in this 
 sense, as in Plat. Phaedr. 229 A, iKfijrda KaBl^eaOai (sc. foriv), 
 there is grass to sit upon. See also Xen. An. II, 1, 6, n-oXXai de leat 
 jTfXTai Kai apa^ai ^crav <j}fpea-6ai epqfioi, i. e. they were left to he 
 carried away (far fuel). See the last examples under § 97. 
 
 Note 2. As fio-r* is seldom used in Homer in its sense of 
 so as (§ 98, N. 3), the simple Infinitive may there express a 
 residt as well as a purpose. It thus follows many expressions 
 which would not allow it in Attic Greek. E. g. 
 
 Tis T tip trdxof 6eS>v epiSi ^vverjKc paxeuBai) i. e. who hrought 
 them into conflict, so as to contend? L. I, 8. So I, 151 ; and epi^e/u- 
 »ai, II, 214. 'aXX' ore Sfj koiXi; injCi jj^Bero rolai veecrBai, when 
 now their ship was loaded, so as {to be ready) to start. Od. XV, 
 457. Xepm^a 8' dpfpinoKos irpoxotf ijtix!^ve ^ipovaa, . . . . vi'^a- 
 vdai, i. e.for washing. Od. I, 138. 
 
 Note 3. In Homer and Herodotus we often find eivai intro- 
 duced to denote a purpose, where in Attic Greek a simple noun, as 
 a predicate accusative or nominative, connected directly with the 
 leading verb, would be sufficient. E. g. 
 
 QapriKa, tov ttotc oi Kivvpi;; Smxe ^eivrjiov ftvai, i. e. which they 
 gave him as a present (lit. to be a present). H. XI, 20. AiOov rtXrro 
 X"pi "■"X^'H' ■''"'' P ""Spfs nporepoi de(rav cp,p,fvai otpov dpovpiff, 
 which they had placed (to he) as a boundary. H. XXI, 405. Aaptio: 
 KaTatTTrjtras 'Apra<liepvea v7rap)(ov eivaL Sapdiaf. Hdt. V, 25. 
 
 So in the passive construction : — TiXav dn-tfiexflij jrdoTjs rijs 'nnov 
 tlvai tiTirapxos. Hdt. VII, 154. 
 
 Even in Attic prose this use of fivai sometimes occurs ; as in Dem. 
 Aph. Ill, 852, 12, Mi/rjpovcvova-w dfpfdfvra tovtov iXevdfpov dvai 
 TOTt, they remember his having been then manwnitled so as to be a free- 
 nian. So df^lT}aiv aiira 8T]p6o'ia €lvat, Thuc. II, 13, 
 
 Note 4. The use of the Infinitive after the comparative and n, 
 ''"an, Ls to be referred to this principle. E. g. 
 
S 98, 2.] rNFINITITE AFTER 'Qare. 205 
 
 'H avSpairlvri (pvais aadeveirrepa rj Xa/3eiv ri^yriv Z>v hv J/ aireipos, 
 human nature is too weak to acquire the art of those things of which it 
 has lio experience. Plat. Theaet. 149 C. To yap v6<rrjjui fiei^ov § 
 fpepetv, i. e. too great to bear. Soph. O. T. 1293. 
 
 'Qare is sometimes expressed before this Infinitive ; as in Xen. 
 Hell. IV, 8, 23,"'HHr5oiTo avrov fXarTa ej^ovra ivvafuv rj wcFTt Toiis 
 <l>i\ovs acjieXelv. 
 
 So, rarely, as in the sense of mcrre (§ 98, Note I); as in Cjrr. VI, 
 4, 17, Tas aaviSas fiei^ovs exovaiu rj as iroie'ivTi Km 6pav. 
 
 § 98. 1. The Infinitive is used after aare, so that, 
 to as, to express a result, E. g. 
 
 Hi/ TreTTOLdevpevos ovras atrre iraw piKpa KeKrrjp^vos iraw pabias 
 ?;( e 1 1» apKovvra, he had been educated so as very easily to have enough, 
 although he possessed very little. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 1. ^vai Si S 
 Kvpos Xcyerai ^tXort/iOTaTos, aa-re Kavra pev itovov avarXrivai, 
 irama he xivbuvov vnopelvai. 1(1. Cyr. I, 2, 1. 'Airexpr] yap av tois 
 yvatrdeitriv eppiveiv. a are p.rj8€pLav fipXv e t,vai irpos rovTov diafjyopdv, 
 so that we should have no difference with him. Dem. Aph. I, 813, 4. 
 IloXXar eXyrldas e^a dpKOvvras epeiv, atrre vpas p.TjT' diroXe iffydrj-' 
 vai Twv Trpaypdrav prjT dyvoij(rai, k.t.X. lb. 813, 20. Tolovtov 
 Wos fipiv irapeSoa-av, atTTf . . . (rvveXBelv is ravTov. Isoc. Fan, p. 
 49 B. § 43. See Pan. § 45, toitovtov eVrtv, Sore Kai tovto irfpiev 
 \rj<l)3ai. Ueitropai yap ov ToaovTov ovdiv atrre pri ov Ka\as 
 Oavelu. Soph. Ant. 97. 2u Se (r;^oXfif«s, &a'Te davpdC^ f c/ie. 
 Eur. Hec. 730. M?;S' f/ ^la ai prjhapas vuajiTdTa TO(r6v8f pio'elw 
 a(TT€ Trjv dtKijv iraTelv. SoPH. Aj. 1335. Aoytav Kai ^ovXevp-drav 
 Koivavov av ae TtoioivTO, &<ttc prjSe fv at \f\T]devai &v ^vKopeBa 
 elSevai, so that not a single one of the things we viish to know should 
 have escaped you. Xen. Cyr. Vif, 1, 40. (See § 18, 3, 6.) Auo-- 
 KoKla Koi pavta iroWdKis els rrjv dtdvoiav euirlirTwatv ovTuff &a'T€ Kai 
 Tas kiruTTTfpas iK^dWeiv. Id. Mem. Ill, 12, 6. 'AiroXtjipdivTos, 
 Sxrre pij hv bivatrOai iiraveXOftu oiKaSc. Dem. Chers. 98, 25. 
 (For Sivaa-Sai av see N. 4.) 
 See § 93, 1, Note 1, last example. 
 
 Remark. When the result is to be stated as an inde- 
 pendent fact, rather than merely as a result, the Indicative 
 is used after fiore. See § 65, 3. 
 
 2. The Infinitive after wo-re sometimes denotes a con- 
 dition, being equivalent to the Infinitive after e^ ea or 
 e^ w re ; and sometimes it denotes a purpose, like a 
 final cause. B. g. 
 
 Uoiovvrai Spokiyiav npbs HdxrjTa, fiore 'ABr/va ois e^e'ivai (hv 
 
206 THE INFINITITE. [§ 98) 2. 
 
 \(v<rat ircp, r&v MunXijj/aioii', they make, a treaty with Paches, to the 
 effect that thj Athenians shall be permitted, &c. Thuc. Ill, 28. (See 
 Th0C. Ill, 114, ^viifiaxia" enoirjaavTO etti Toicrde, axTre . . . . /i^ 
 <rTpaTeiei».) 'E^ov avTois tS>v \omS)V ap)(eiv EWr/vav, war 
 avToiis inraKovfiv fiatriKel, it being in their poiver to rule the rest of 
 the Greeks, on ccndition that they' should themselves serve the King. 
 DliM. Phil, n, 68; 12. Uav iroiovmv, Sxttc dUriv jirj bibovai, they 
 do everything, so that they may not suffer punishment. Plat. Gorg. 
 479 C. (Here Iva jirj wftL the Subjunctive might have been used.) 
 'E^ovXridrjcrav 'EXcva-Xva i^thiaxratrdai, Sxrre eivai a-(l>ia-i. itaraf^uyiji', 
 fl Sefia-fte. Xkn. Hell. II, 4, 8. Mrjxaval iroXXai ela-iv, St a- re dia- 
 ^f uyeiv 6avaTov, there are many devices for escaping death. Plat. 
 Apol. 39 A. (See § 92, 1, N. 2.) 
 
 Note 1. 'Os is sometimes used with the Infinitive instead 
 of Sore ; generally, however, to express a result, seldom to 
 express si purpose. E. g. 
 
 'Y-^\6v 5e ovra df] ri Xcyerat, q> s ras Kopv<f}as aiirov ov\ oia Tf 
 tlvai Ibiadai, and it (the mountain) is said to be so high, that it is not 
 possible to see its summits. Hdt. IV, 184. T^aviiaxfia-avrcs dvrliraKa 
 fifv Koi a s avTovs ixaTepovs a^ioiv viKau, and so that each thought 
 themselves the victors. Thuc. VII, 34. BiaaopLeOa, a s nXfOveKTovvrts 
 blKrjv firj dtSovat. Plat. Rep. II, 365 D. 'O Trnrufiof Tocrouros to 
 ^d6os, as liTjde rd dopara VTtepi\€iv tov ^ddovs. Xen. An. Ill, 5, 
 7. So II, 3, 10. iepovrai Kadava, i>s djro tov nOTafioii dpiaaaOat. 
 Id. Cyr. I, 2, 8. 'Ei/ tw d(r<|)aXeT rjbr) ea-ovrai, a ? p.rj8ev &v en KaKov 
 iraQelv. lb. VIII, 7, 27. (For Traeelv mi see N. 4.) 
 
 Note 2. The Infinitive with Sxttc or as is sometimes used where 
 we should expect a simple Infinitive, either after the adjectives and 
 adverbs included in § 93, or after the verbs and expressions which 
 talce the Infinitive of the object (§ 92, 1, and N. 2); and rarely 
 after those which regularly take an Infinitive as the subject (§ 91). 
 E.g. ^ 
 
 ll6Tepa naldls elcrt (ppovipMrcpoi Sore fiaBeiv to ^pa^oneva § 
 avSp€s ; i. e. are they wiser than men in learning, &c. ? Xen. Cyr. 
 IV, 3, 11. *OXtyo( €(rp.iu o)S eyKparf'is elvat aura>v. lb. IV, 5, 15, 
 (Cf. oXi'yai dp. we IV, too few to make a defence. Thuc. I, 50.) 
 •ifvxpdv (e'cTTi to vbap") more 'Kovaao-Bai, the water is cold for 
 bathing. Xen. Mem. Ill, 13, 3. (Cf. Xovcrao-dai \|?uxpoT«poi>, 
 and depp-oTcpov irieiv , in the same section.) 'Vr^fpiaafxevoi avroi 
 Trp&Toi Star re Trdufi itpoBvpiq dpiveiv, having voted to defend them, 
 &C. TnuC. VI, 88, Fas dudyKTjv Kodefrrafiev aa-re Kivbvvevetv. 
 Isoc. Archid. p. 126 C. § 51. (See § 92, 1, N, 2 ) So Svvafuv 
 Strre kyyevkaOai, Plat. Rep. IV, 433 B. 'EXfloi/rfr wpos avToiis 
 irel6ov(nv axTre perd a^mv ' kpyei enixf ip^(rai. ThuC. Ill, 102. 
 (In the same chapter, jreiBei 'Axapudvas ^orjOrjirai NaDirdicrca.) 
 
 ndi'i poi e'pJXrj(T€v uoTf e IS in at, it concerned me very much to 
 
§ 100.] INTINITITE AFTER *E0' ^ AND 'E</>' ^xe. 207 
 
 know. Xen. Cyr. VI, 3, 19. 'ASvvarov vfiiv &trTe TlparrayopM 
 Touif awfiaTepov 7iva iXetrdai.. Flat. Frot. 338 C. So Xen. 
 Mem. I, 3, 6. 
 
 Note 3. In Homer & a- re is generally used like Sirn-cp, in the 
 sense of as. It occurs with the Infinitive, in the sense of so as, only 
 twice : II. IX, 42 ; Od. XVII, 21. 'Of, so as, so that, is not found 
 in Homer, who generally uses the simple Infinitive where later 
 writers would insert more or o)s. (See § 97, N. 2.) 
 
 Note 4. The Infinitive after Sore may take the adverb Sv to 
 form fin apodosis, whenever an Indicative or Optative, if used in 
 the place of the Infinitive, would have required an av. (See § 65, 
 3, Note.) The Infinitive with av here, as in indirect quotations, fol 
 lows the general rule stated in § 41. (See example m § 41, N. 4 ; 
 and the last examples under § 98, 1 and § 98, 2, N. 1.) 
 
 Note 5. It will be seen that the Freseut and Aorist are the 
 tenses of the Infinitive regularly used after aim. For the perfect 
 see § 18, 3, and Note; and for the Future, § 27, N. 2 (J). 
 
 § 99. The Infinitive is used after e^ m and e^' mre, 
 on condition that, for the purpose of. E. g. 
 
 EiTrei/ 0T( (nre[(ra(rBat ^ovXoito, €<f> a firjre avrbs rovs ^EXXiyvas 
 aSiKclv iiTjTe fKclvovs Kaleiv ray otxias, Xa/i^avfiv re TamTrjSeia 
 oaav SfOiVTO. Xbn. An. IV, 4, 6. HSos &v oSrot ideXoi to aXKoTpta 
 AirofTTepeiv id) ^ KOKoio^os ciuai; Id. Ages. IV, 1. 'A(j>ieiuv (re, 
 erri rovTa p^vroi, 6<^' a>rc fnjKeri <f}i\oa-o<l>eiv . PlaT. Apol. 29 
 C. Aipe6cvTes i^' ^re Jvyypai/^ai vojiovs, Kaff ov(mvas iroXiTfi- 
 (ToivTo Xen. Hell. II, 3, 11. (For noKiTciaoivro, see § 65, 1, N. 
 1.) 'E^' 97-e ^orjef)(reiv. Aeschin. Cor. § 1 14. See § 27, N. 2 (6). 
 
 For the Future Indicative after i<^ a and e^' ^re, especially in 
 Herodotus and Thucydides, see § 65, 2. 
 
 § 100. The Infinitive may stand absolutely in par- 
 enthetical phrases, sometimes alone, but generally pre- 
 ceded by «? or oaov. B. g. 
 
 To AeXra lari KorappuTov re Koi vcaarl, a! \6y<oel7r€iv, ava- 
 
 member, &c. Id. II, 125. 'Qs fiev wv iv i\axi(rTca Sj/Xmo-at, ttSw 
 eipijrat ■ .... as 8e ev nXeovi Xdyffl 8>/XS(7ai, 2)8e fX"' ^^' ^' ^^" 
 Mera 8f, oil woWm Xdyo) elnelv, XP°^°^ Sie'c^u. Id. I, 61. Kal 
 foyov, ins ejTot eiTrelv, rj oiSfi/os irpoaSfovrai. q $pax^os ■nami. Pl-AT. 
 Gorg. 450 D. 'Oi St (tvvtoiuds tlneiv, to speak concisely- Xen. 
 Oec. XII, 19. 'Qi 8e iTvvfKovTi flireXv. Id. Mem. HI, 8, .0 
 
208 THE INFINITITE. § 100. 
 
 Eur. Ale. 801. 'Qs 7rp6s ufi" eip^a-dat, i. e. between us. PjLAT. 
 Kep. X, 595 B. Oi8' iya> -^iya tovtovs, iSs y« diaKomvs etvat 
 t-dXemt. Plat. Gorg. 517 B. 'Oo-ov ye /le fide vat, at least as far as 
 1 know. Id. Theaet. 145 A. 
 
 So &)s e'/iol SoKt'iv or e'ftoi SokcTi', like as i/ioi SoKei, as it seems 
 to me; 6\iyov Selv, to want little, i. e. almost. (See N. 1.) 
 
 Remark. The force of as in this construction can hardly be ex- 
 pressed in English, although it resembles that of as used for wore 
 in § 98, 2, Note 1. That it is not a demonstrative, as uught be sup- 
 posed from the translation of as einfiv, so to speak, is plain from such 
 expressions as as avvrojias elTteiv, to speak concisely. 
 
 Note 1. In the phrase iXiyov Selr (lit. to want little), little 
 short of, almost, Seiv is ' often omitted, so that the genitive 
 iXiyov stands alone in the sense of almost. E. g. 
 
 'OXiyov (ppovSos yeyivrffmi, I am almost gone. Arist. Nub. 722. 
 The full form is found at the beginning of Dem. PhU. lU, — UoK- 
 \&i/ \6yav yiyvoiiivav oXiyou heXv xaff iKaanp/ exxXijo'tai'i i. e. in 
 almost every meeting. 
 
 Note 2. In the phrase ek&v tip at (sometimes ri ixitv 
 tivai), willing or willingly, tlvai appears to be superfluous : the 
 phrase ia used chiefly in negative sentences. Eixat appears 
 superfluous also in such expressions as to vvv eivai, at present, t6 
 rtififpou eivai, to-day, and to ijr tKeivois elvai, as far as depends 
 on them. E. g. 
 
 'Exav yap elvai oiSev i^evo-o^ai, willingly I will tell no falsehood. 
 Plat. Symp. 215 A. Oiix afirjv ye kot cipxas uiro aov exovros eivai 
 t^awaTri6t]<rea6ai. Id. Gorg. 499 C. ('Avdyici) e^eiv) Tfjv a^|revSt^a>> 
 Koi T 6 eKovras eivai p.y)bap/Q Trpoa-dexeadai ro ^jtevdos. Id. Hep. VI, 
 485 C. 'Ajroxpri inoi to iniv elvat ravr' elprjKevai. IsOC. Antid. p. 
 119, § 270. To eV" eKeivois elvai airaXaKeire. Xkn. Hell. Ill, 5, 9. 
 T6 /lev Ttijiepov elvai xPV'^<">'6ai aurg, to use it to-day. Plat. Crat 
 396 E. Kara tovto elvai, in this respect. Id. Prot. 317 A. 
 
 Similar is the expression tiji» Trpmnji/ elvai (for tijk jrpcoTj/K), at 
 first, in Hdt. I, 153. So ir ira'Xaia eivat, considering their an- 
 tiquity. Thuc. I, 21. 
 
 § 101. Tho Infinitive is sometimes used in the 
 sense of the Imperative, especially in Homer. E. g. 
 
 T^ vvv fin 7roT€ KaX aii yvvaiKi nep ^mos elvai- pi) oi pvSov ^Travra 
 t i<ftav(TKepev, ov K ev eifijs, dWa tA piv <j)a<rdat, t6 Se /cat Kf 
 
S 104.] DfFiNITlVE USED IMPERATIVELY, ETC. 209 
 
 Kpiifiiievov eivai, now therefore be thou never indulgent to thy wife, &c. 
 Od. XI, 441. So n. I, 20, 582; II, 10 : Hdt. I, 32 {imax^eiv /iijSe 
 KoKffui): Aesch. Prom. 712. 2i de tos nvKas avol^as vntKBtlv 
 Koi firfiyf(r6ai, and do you, having opened Hie gates, rush out and 
 press on. Thuc. V, 9. 
 
 Remark. It will be noticed that, when the Infinitive stands 
 for the Imperative, its subject is in the nominative, but in the 
 four constructions that follow (§§ 102-105) its subject is in the 
 accusative. 
 
 § 103. The Infinitive is sometimes used for the 
 
 Optative in the expression of a wish referring to the 
 
 future. This occurs chiefly in poetry. E. g. 
 
 Zev irarep, ij Aian-a X a x f ' " 5 TuSeos uidv, Father Zeus, may the 
 lot fall on Ajax or on the son of Tydeus. II. VU, 179, 'Ep/tS '/iTro- 
 Xatc, tav yuvaiKa Tav ifiav ovra fi' dnoSovBat rdv t ifuniTOv fiaripa, 
 O thai I could sell my wife and my mother at this rate! Akist. 
 Acham. 816. Qtoi iroXirai, ftri fi€ Sov\fias rv;(ci)>. Aesch. Sept. 
 253. 
 
 § 103. In laws, treaties, proclamations, and formal 
 commands, the Infinitive is often used in the leading 
 sentences, depending on some word like eSo^e or 8e- 
 SoKTUi, be it enacted, or xekeveTai, it is commanded; 
 which may be either understood, or expressed in a pre- 
 ceding sentence. E. g. 
 
 Ta/ilas 8e tSiv UpSiv xprniarmv aipetirBai p,cv ex tS>v jifyltrrtav 
 rtprjp.dT(OV ' Trjv 8e aipeo'iv rovrav Kai rrjv boKip-arriav ylyvfo-Qai 
 KaBdiTfp fj tS>v OTparrir/av iylyvfTo, and (be it enacted) that treasurers 
 of the sacred funds be chosen, &c. Plat. Leg. 759 E. So in most 
 of the laws (genuine or spurious) standing as quotations in the text 
 of the Orators, as in Dem. Aristocr. 627, 21: Aixd^ciK 8e t^v (v 
 'Apeia irdyip <j)6vov Kal TpavfUiTos ck Trpovolas, k. t. X. 'Ettj 8e civ at 
 Tas (TTTovSas nevTf]KovTa, and that the treaty shall continue fifty years. 
 Thuc. V, 18. 'A/coiJeT-e Xtw' rails oTrXiVas vvvpevi dveXop,evovs d&nXa 
 d-iriivai irdXtv oiKaSe. Abist. Av. 448. 
 
 § 104. The Infinitive, with or without to, is used 
 in expressions of surprise or indignation. E. g. 
 
 To bf pTjde Kvvrjv oiKoSfv eXdelv fp.e top KaKohatpov e^ovra, but to 
 think tliat I, vrretched fellow, should have come from home without even 
 my cap! Abist. Nub. 268. Tovtov 8e v^pi^eiv; dvanvelv de; 
 
210 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 104 
 
 ov eX Tty f^ pjv, ayairav eSti. Dem. Mid. 582, 2. Trjs fxapias • ri 
 Aia Ko/iifeii/, gjira TjiKiKovTovi, what foUyl to believe in Zeus, now 
 you are so big 1 Akist. Nub. 819. 
 
 Compare Vebg. Aen. I, 37 : Mene Incepto desistere victam. 
 
 § 105. In narration the Infinitive often appears to 
 stand for the Indicative. It depends, however, on some 
 word like Xeyerai, it is said, expressed (or at least im- 
 plied) in something that precedes. E. g. 
 
 * AiTLKonevovs de Toiis ^otviKas es 8rj ro*Apyoff tovto, diaTidetrdat 
 Tov tpoprov, and {they say) that the Phoenicians, when now they were 
 come to this Argos, were setting out their cargo for sale. Hdt. I, 1. 
 (Here StanOeadat is an Imperfect Infinitive, § 15, 3.) " 'AXX*, a 
 nai," <j)dvai t6v 'Aarvdyrjv, " ouk axSo]i^voi ravra 7r€pnr\ava>iif6a." 
 * . . . " ' AXXa KUL ire," ^dvai tov Kvpov, " Spa}*' k.t.\, , . . Kai tov 
 AoTvdyTjv evepeo'daiy " Kal TiVt djj <rv TeKpxiLpofievos \eyeis ;'* 
 ""On a-e," (jjdvai, " 6p£," k.t.X. . . . Tlpos ravra 8e tov 'AorudyT/i' 
 clirelv, K.T.X. . . . Kai rov Kvpov tlireXv, k.t.X. Xbn. Cyr. I, 3, 5 
 and 6. (Here aU these Infinitives, and twelve others which follow, 
 depend on Xeyerai in § 4.) Kai rbv KcXcia-ai Sovvai, and he com- 
 manded him to give it. Id. I, 3, 9. So in Hdt. I, 24 the story of 
 Arion and the dolphin is told in this construction, the Infinitives 
 all depending on a single Xeyouo-t at the beginning. See § 101, 
 lEiermik.. 
 
 § 106. ITpiv, before, before that, until, besides tak- 
 ing the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative, like «»? 
 (§ 66), is also followed by the Lifinitive. 
 
 For the use of the finite moods after irpiv, see § 67. 
 
 1. In Homer the Infinitive follows irpiv after both 
 aflBrmative and negative sentences. E. g. 
 
 Naie Se UrjSaiov wplv i\3eiv vlas 'A)(aiai>. II. XIH, 172. 
 opf^djifvos irpiv oirda-ai, ov8' a(j>dp,aprfv. II. XVI, 322. 2d)mi» 
 8t Trpiv jTfp rpofios eXXa/Sr ^alSi/ia yvia, np\v TroXf/iov t i d c e i k 
 TToXe/ioio re fiepftepa tpya, before they saw the war, &c. H. VIII, 452. 
 (See Note 4.) *t«y« irpiv irep opiKov doXXio'dij/ifi'ai dvSp&v. 
 II. XV, 588. *H K ?rt TToXXoi yaiav oSa^ fl\ov irpiv 'iXiov cioafbt- 
 KcirOai. H. XXII, 1 7. 'AXXa ol aira Zeis 6Xi<rfi€ ffiriv irpiv ripiv irrjua 
 (j^vTfvaai. Od. IV, 668. Aid' &(j>fXX' ... oKXoS' oXeirdai irpiv eXdeiv. 
 Od. XVIII, 402. Ou Xrj^to irpiv Tpaas aSiji/ c'Xdcrat jroXf/ioio. II. 
 XIX, 423. OiiSe ri 6vp^ ripirero irpiv TToXe/iov ord^ia Svafvai 
 ai/iaroei'Tos. II. XIX, 813. Did' aTroX^-yct irpiv xpoos dvSpcjcoio 
 DifXBfiv. II. XX, 100. Ou ^' ajroTpe\jreis irpiv x"^''^ liayta-a- 
 
5 106, 2.] INFINITIVE AFTER Ilpiv. 211 
 
 IT 6 at. n. XX, 257. MnS' avrios urracr cucio itpiv n kokov 7r(tBitm 
 
 n. XX, 198. 
 
 See § 67, Note 1. 
 
 2. Writers later than Homer use the Infinitive after 
 •rrpiv chiefly when the leading sentence is affirmative. 
 E.g. ^ 
 
 Ilpiv av rrapdvai ineivov is ttju 'XTTiKriv, viifKS Kaipos eort irpo- 
 BioBffirai h Trjv Boianav, before he comes into Attica, &c. lioT. VUT, 
 143. Oioi' evpev Tetra'apaKovra kol oKToa trapOkvoivi, irptv pea-ov ^pap 
 iXeiVj aKvraTov yapov. PiND. Pyth. IX, 196. Uplv viiv ra irXeiov 
 io-Topetv, eK r^crd' eSpas e^e\de, before seeking further, &c. SoPH. O. 
 O. 36. 'AiroTrefiirovo'Lv ovv avT^v irpiv aKovtrai. Thuc. II, 12. So 
 II, 13, npiu etr^aXe'iv els t^v 'ArrtK^w. *A<f>i€(rau ra ^eXrj ttoXu nptv 
 f^iKvela-Bai. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 3, 60. Uph pev ovv E;(fo-flat rh 
 axpa pvSev fSeiirBc eip^wjr. lb. Ill, 2, 12. 'Hpfls roivvv Meacr^vriv 
 cL\ope> irp\v Heptras \a^eiv Trjv ^otriKeiav koX Kpar^o-at rrjs 
 }]Treipov, xal jrpiv olKiaOrjvai Tivas rai» iroXeiov rav 'EXXriviSav. 
 Isoc. Ai'chid. p. 121 A. § 26. Kai nplv ff prjvas yeyovevai, airi- 
 Saxe. Plat. Prot. 320 A. 'AitaXopeirB' up', ei kokov ■npotroliropfv 
 V£OV TToXauu , irplv t6^ e^r)VT\riKcvai, we are ruined then, if we shall 
 add a new calamity to the former one, before we shall have exhausted 
 that. Eur. Med. 79. (See § 18, 3.) 
 
 Note 1. The InfinitiTe after irplv was probably not accompa- 
 nied by dv. (See Boiiger's note on Hdt. I, 140.) 
 
 Note 2. npiv with the Infinitive after negative sentences is rare 
 in the Attic poets, but more frequent in the Attic prose. (See 
 §67, Note 2.) E.g. 
 
 OvK &v p^deiTo, irpiv xaff rjSovfiv xXvetv. SoPH. Tr. 197. HpXv 
 I8eiv 8', oiScXs pavris rStv peKKovrav, o ti irpd^et. Id. Aj. 1418. So 
 Aesch. Sept. 1048, Agam. 1067 ; Aeist. Av. 964. Kal 6i' airi ov 
 irpiv Tra(r)^€ IV, a\\^ cVftdi^ ev t^ f/>yw etrpev, rov$ ^vppd)(ovs ToiitrSt 
 jrapeKaUtrare. Thuc. I, 68. So I, 39; V, 10; VII, 50. OiSe yap 
 TOVTwv irpXv padelv ou8<is rfnicrraTo. Xen. Cyr. IV, 3, 10. AiJti; ij 
 yuv^, Trpiv pev as *A^oj3oi> eK6eiv, plav ijpcpav ovk ixqpfvirev. Dem. 
 Ouet. I, 873, 10. 
 
 Note 3. Up\v ij, irpdrepou ^ (priusquam), irpoaBev ij, and 
 even va-repov 7, /ike irpiv, may be followed by the Infinitive. (See 
 § 67, Note 3.) E. g. 
 
 Oi 8e Aiyuirriot, wp\v pev ^ ^appiTi\ov a^iayv ^airiXfvaai, 
 ivopi^ov iavToiis jrparovs yfvetrdai ndvrtov dvOpamav. Hdt. II, 2. 
 Eiri Toiis.TTopireas Trpdrepov rj alaSeirBai avToiig cvBvs fxapijaif, 
 before they perceived them. Thuc. VI, 58. So I, 69. Ilpii' 8e ava- 
 (Tr^i/at, eretriv van pov eKarov ^ ai/rovs oiKrjcrai, ILdppiKov irep^av^ 
 re; es SeXtvovvra, i. e. a hundred years after their own settlement Id. 
 VI, 4. 
 
212 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 106, 2. 
 
 In Hdt. VI, 108 we find the Infinitive depending on <f>da.va> rj, the 
 verb implying irpdrepov or itpiv : — (pOairiTe av i^avSpanoSurBepres rj 
 riva irvSeaBai r/iieav, you would be reduced to slavery before any of us 
 would hear of it. 
 
 Note 4. Hpiv or irpXv rj is very often preceded by irporepov, 
 vpoa-dev, rrdpos, or another irpiv (used as an adverb), qualify- 
 ing the leading verb. (See § 67, Note 4.) E. g. 
 
 *A7rodvfiiTKov(n irpore pov npXv drjXot ylyvea'dai oiot fj<rav, Xex. 
 Cyr. V, 2, 9. Kal &p.o(rav fiij irpiv is 0a>Kauiv rj^eiv icpXv ^ rhv /»«• 
 hpov TovTov avaweiprfvevai. Hdt. I, 165. TLdpos S oiiK eaaerai oXXoir, 
 Tcplv ye . . . vo) neiprj6rjvai. H. V, 220. M^ irplv rapd^s, rrplv toS 
 fv 6i<T6ai, TiKvov. EuK. Here. F. 605. 
 
 Note 5. Ilapo;, in the sense of irplv, is used in Homer with 
 the Infinitive, but never with the other moods. E. g. 
 
 TcKva aypoTM e^eiXovTO irapos nereriva yevf<r6at, Od. XVI, 
 218. OiSe oi vTTVos Trmrev ejrt fi\f<bdpoi<ri TT d p o s KaraXi^ai airav 
 ra. Od. XXni, 309. 
 
 Remark. The rules for the tenses of the Infinitive are 
 given in Chapter Second. It will be seen from a comparison 
 of these, that the Present and Aorist are the only tenses ordi- 
 narily used in constructions in which the Infinitive in itself 
 has no reference to time, that is, in all except indirect dis- 
 course. In indirect discourse each tense has its own force, as 
 in the Indicative ; but in other constructions the Perfect is 
 used only in the cases mentioned in § 18, 3, b, and Note ; and 
 the Future only in the few cases mentioned in § 27, Note 2, a 
 and b. (See § 27, Note 1.) 
 
S 108, 2.] THE FABTICIFLE. 219 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 THE PAETICIPLB. 
 
 § 107. The Participle has three distinct uses : — 
 first, it may express a simple attribute, like an ordinary 
 adjective (§ 108) ; secondly, it may define the circum- 
 stances under which the action of the sentence takes 
 place (§§ 109 - 111) ; thirdly, it- may form part of the 
 predicate with certain verbs, often having a force re- 
 sembling that of the Infinitive (§§ 112, 113). 
 
 Bemakk. As the Infinitive may be considered as a verbal noun, 
 80 the Participle is always a verbal adjective ; both alike retaining 
 all the attributes of a verb which are consistent with their nature. 
 See § 90. 
 
 § 108. 1. The Participle, like any other adjective, 
 may qualify a noun. 
 
 Li such expressions it must often be translated by a 
 finite verb and a relative, especially when the Participle 
 is preceded by the article. E. g. 
 
 noXts KoX/Cet bia^ipovira, a city excelling in beauty. 'Ayfip ko- 
 \ais Ttfiraihevjievos, a man who has been well educated. Oiirpi- 
 tr^cLg 01 TTapa ^iKinTrov ireficfydevresj the ambassadors who had been 
 sentjrom Philip. 'ApSpes oJ tovto nottiaovTes, men who will do this. 
 
 'Ell rn Meo-o-ijuia wore ovo-tj yfj, in the land which was once Mes- 
 senia. See §16,2. Srparevovo'ti/ eVi ras \i£Kov i/^irous naXovpivas, 
 they sail against the so-called Aeolian islands, lit. the islands called 
 those of Aeolus. Thtjc. Ill, 88. Al Spurrai Soxovaai elvai (fma-eis, 
 the natures t^hich seem to be best. Xen. Mem. IV, 1, 3. At wpo rod 
 rrrofiaTos VT]ej pavp.axovtTai. ThuC. VH, 23. Toj/ KareiXij^ora 
 KiVdwov Trjv n'oXu>. Dem. Cor. 301, 28. 
 
 2. The Participle preceded by the article may be 
 used substantivelt/, like any other adjective. It is then 
 equivalent to eKelvoi o? (he who) and a finite verb in 
 the tense of the Participle. E. g. 
 
214 THE PAETICIPLB. [§ 108. 
 
 OJ KparovvTes, the conquerors. Oi 7rcjr«(r/if toj, Uiose rtho have hee' 
 convinced. OStos e<m 6 rovro jrot^tras, this is the one who did it. 
 Olroi ela-iv ol vfias iravras dS iK^trovres, these are the men who wiU 
 wrong you all. 
 
 yiapa Tois iplaTots SoKovcrtv ewai, among those who seem to be heSt. 
 Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 6. 'Hvie 6 iiev tt/v yvmiirjv TavTijv flirav Ilfiaav- 
 8pos, and Peisander was the one who gave this opinion. Thuc. VIII, 
 68. ToiE 'ApicdScBK (r(f)eTepotg oval ^vp-jxaxois Trpocljrov, they pro- 
 claimed to those of the Arcadians who were their allies. Id. V, 64. 
 A<f)€KTeov eyai (jyrjfii elfai (rovratv) ra aoiSpoveiv dvvrjaofievt^^jor 
 one who is to be able to be discreet. Xen. Symp. IV, 26. 
 
 Note 1. When the Participle, in either of these construc- 
 tions, refers to a purpose or intention, it is generally Future, 
 rarely Present. E. g. 
 
 NofioK hrjjioiria tov ravra K<a\v(Tovra redfivrai tovtovi, they have 
 publicly enacted this law, which is to prevent these things. Dem. Mid. 
 530, 10. Toil' ipyaaojjiivav ivovrav, there being men in the country 
 to cultivate it. Xen. An. II, 4, 22. (See § 110, 1.) 'O fiyr/a-o- 
 fievos ouSf Ij firrai there wili be nobody who will lead us. lb. II, 4, 5. 
 HoWovs e^op-eif Toits iroiiitos avvayo>ui^op.evovs ^fHv. IsoC. Pac. 
 p. 186 D. § 139. 
 
 See the more common use of the Future Participle to express a 
 purpose, § 109, 5. 
 
 Note 2. Participles, like adjectives, are occasionally used 
 substantively even without the article, in an indefinite sense ; 
 but generally only in the plural. E. g. 
 
 'En-Xet bmScKa rpirjpcK f^""' *"■' I'oXXas vavs KCKTrifiivovr, he 
 sailed with twelve triremes against men who had many ships. Xen. 
 Hell. V, 1, 19. "Orav iro\e novvrmv jroXir <SXi5, whenever a city oJ 
 belligei-ents is taken. Id. Cyr. VII, 5, 73. Mtra ravra a<jiiKvoviiTat 
 fioi airayyeWovres ori d Trarrip d^eiTot, there come messengers 
 announcing, &c. Isoc. Trapez. p. 360 C. § 11. EiSer vovv e^ovTa 
 "KvTTovpfvov Koi xaipovra ; did you ever .tee a man of sense (sc. tivo) 
 grieved and rejoicing ? Plat. (lorg. 498 A. 
 
 Note 3. In the poets, the Participle with the article sometimes 
 becomes so completely a substantive, that it is followed by an ad- 
 nominal genitive rather than by the case which its verbal force 
 would require. A few expressions like oi irpotrriKovrcs, relatives, and 
 TO avix(f)€pov or ra av^<bepovTa, gain, advantage, are used in the s?.me 
 ■way even in prose. L. g. 
 
 'O ineivm, TtK&v, his father. EuR. El. 335. (We should expect 
 6 tKfivov TcKaiv.) Ta p.iKpa trvji-^ipovra T^r TrdXfoir, the small ad' 
 vantages of the state. Dem. Cor. 234, 26. BaaiKeas 7rao(rn<ai>Tci 
 Tiw. Thuc. I, 128. 
 
S 108.] PARTICIPLE AS ADJECTIVE. ' 215 
 
 Note 4. (a.) In the poets and in Thucydides, the neuter singu- 
 lar of the Present Participle with the article is sometimes used in 
 the sense of an abstract verbal noun, where we should expect the 
 Infinitive with the article. E. g. 
 
 'Ei/ Tffl fifi /xf Xf TMKTt d^vvfTarepoi e<rnvTat, in the want of practice, 
 &c. Thuc. I, 142. (Here we should expect iv ™ iifj lieXeTav.) 
 Vvtara to fiee Sedtos avTov tovs ivavTwvs /xfiXXov ^oj3^0"OV, to Se 
 Oapcrovv . . . . aSeearepov e(r6p.fvov. Id. I, 36. (Here to SeStost 
 fear, is used like to SeSievai, and tA Bapa-ovv, courage, like to Bapa-flr 
 or TO 6dp(Tos.) Meto toC bpafievov, with action. Id. V, 102. Kal 
 ce y eltra^a ' t6 yap voaovv Trowel (re ^p.irapafTTdTr)v \a^fiv. 
 Soph. Phil. 6 74. (tA voaoiv = ij voo-os.) To yap voBovv eKaarot 
 tKpaBciv 6i\av ovK &v /ledelTO, irpiv Kaff ijSov^v liKieiv. SoPH. Trach. 
 196. 
 
 Compare the use of the neuter singular of an adjective for the 
 corresponding abstract noun ; as to koXov, beauty, for to koXKos. 
 
 (J.) A similar construction sometimes occurs when a Participle 
 and a noun are used instead of an Infinitive and a noun, where in 
 English we generally use a finite verb. E. g. 
 
 MfTo 8e S6\a)va oixdp,evov e\afie vepeais pfyaKt) Kpoto'ov,!. B. 
 after Solon was gone. Hdt. I, 34. Tfj TrdXfi oCte iro\ep.ov KOKms 
 •rvji^avTOi ovTe tTTatTfias iranroTe amos eyevero, i. 6. the cause of a 
 disastrous result of any war (like tou n-dXE^ov nva xaxas a-uii^^vai). 
 Xbn. Mem. I, 2, 63. So c's rjikiov KUTabivra, H. I, 601. 
 
 Bemakk. Such expressions as to Kparovv Trjs iroXcas, the ruling 
 part of the state, t& SoidCov t^s ^vxqs, &c. must not be confounded 
 with the examples belonging under Notes 3 and 4. They are 
 merely cases of the partitive genitive after a participle used as a 
 noun. 
 
 Note 5. Some Present Participles are occasionally used like 
 predicate adjectives after elpi or ylyvopm. Such are especially hia- 
 ^tpav, e^av (with an adverb), TrpoariKOtv, irpeivtav, 8eou, i^ov, and 
 (Tvpfjjepov. E. g. 
 
 Ti ttot' eo-Tiv o^os tKeivov dia<j>€ poav; in what is this man different 
 from that onef Plat. Gorg. 500 C. 2v p,(j) e pov ^v ttj noKei^itwas 
 advantageous to the state. Dem. F. L. 364, 25. So after virdpxa in 
 Demosthenes ; as tovto fiev yap virapxeiv vfids tldoras rjyovpaL, for 1 
 think you are aware of this. Cor. 257, 25. 
 
 Note 6. The poets sometimes use a Present or Aorist Parti- 
 ciple with eipi as a periphrasis for the simple form of the verb In 
 prose each part of such expressions has its ordinary meaning. E. g. 
 
 'Av 5 6e\ov<ra, irdvT ipou Kopl^erai, whatever she wants, she 
 always obtains from me. Soph. O. T. 580. (Here^ 5eXouo-a is used 
 for deXj;.) Ovk fls o\c6pov; m (Titt>7rr)<Tas ea-fi; lb. 1146. II 
 rouTO oiiK EffTi yiyvojiivov vap rjp.'iv; or is not this something that 
 
216 ' THE PARTICIPLE. [§ lOS. 
 
 happens among US f Plat. Phileb. 39 C. 'Hr yap 6 eefuoroicX^t 
 fiffiaioTaTa bfj (fivaeias ia-xvv hr)\a>(Tas, Koi . ■ . a^ios BavjiOiTai, 
 Themisiocles was one who manifested, &c. Thuc. I, 138. 
 
 For the use of the Perfect Participle in the same way, see § 17, 
 Note 2. For the Aorist Participle with fx<^ as a periphrasis for the 
 Perfect Indicative, see below, § 112, Note 7. 
 
 § 109. The Participle is used to define the eircum- 
 stanees under which an action takes place. It may in 
 this sense be connected with any substantive in the 
 sentence, and agree with it in case. 
 
 The relations expressed by the participle in this use 
 are the following : — 
 
 1. Time, the various tenses of the Participle denoting 
 
 various points of time, which are of course all referred 
 
 to that of the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 TavTa etTraiv ajr^eij when he had said this, he departed* * Airfivrrja'a 
 ^iKijTTTtf airt6vTi, I met Philip as he was departing. ToCro wtrrotrj- 
 KoTfr aTrfXeva^ovrai. Tavra eirparre arparriySiv, he did these things 
 while he was general. Tavra jrpd^ei irrpaTTiyav, he teUl do these 
 things when he is general. Tvpavvfva-as 8e en; Tpia 'hnrias ex^P" 
 irt6(Tirov8os is 'Slyeiov. Thuc. VI. 59. 
 
 2. Means. B. g. 
 
 Aijtfo/xevoi fSo-iK, they live by plunder. Xen. Cyr. HI, 2, 25. 
 Touff "EXXt/i/aff efii'Sa^aw, ov rpoirov hioiKovvres ras avrStv irarpiBas 
 KaX wpbs ots rro\eiiovvTes iieya\T)v &v r^v 'EXXdSa iroi^<r€iav. Isoc. 
 Panath. p. 241 D. § 44. Ou yiip dWorpiois vpXv xP'^f'^vois irapa- 
 8eiyfjLaaiv aXX' oiKeiots, evSaifioo'iv e^eari yevetr&ai, by using not foreign 
 but domestic examples, &c. I>£M. OL III, 85, 1. (So often xpiipevos 
 with the dative.) 
 
 3. Manner, and similar relations, including manner 
 of employment, &c. E. g. 
 
 TlpoeiKcTO pa^ov rols vopois e ppiva>v anodavctv rj napavopau 
 (rp/. he preferred to die abiding by the laws, rather than to live disobey- 
 ing them. Xen. Mem. IV, 4,4. 'Apjrao-awras to OTrXa nopeve- 
 a-dai, to march having snatched up their arms (i. e. eagerly). Dem. 01. 
 HI, 34, 8. TovTo eiroirjo'tv ^aBa>v, he did tliis secretly. (See below, 
 N. 8.) 'AneBrjp^i. Tpn)papxi>v, he was absent on duty as trierarch. 
 
 4. Cause or ground of action. E. g. 
 
§ 109, 7.j PARTICIPLK EXPRESSING CADSE, ETC. 217 
 
 Aeya be tov8^ evsKa^ ^ovXofievos 86^at trol oirep ifioi, and 1 
 ipeak for thii reason, because I wish, &c. Plat. Phaed. 102 D. 
 *\.nflxovTo KepBtav, alaxpa vo^l^oyres eivai, because they believed 
 them to be base. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 22. T/ yap &v jSotiXo/xevot 
 audpei fro(^ot ws aXijOas betnroras dp-eivovs avrau (fjeityoLev, with what 
 object in view, &c. (i. e. wishing what) ? Plat. Phaed. 63 A. (See 
 below, Note 7.) 
 
 For the Participle with as, used to express a cause assigned by 
 another, see below, Note 4. 
 
 5. Purpose, object, or intention, expressed by the Fu- 
 ture Participle, rarely by the Present. E. g. 
 
 ^H\de \v(rop€vos diyarpa, he came to ransom his daughter. H. 
 I. 13. napfXijXvda a-v iifiov\ev(ra>v, I have risen to give my advice. 
 IsOC. Archid. § 1. 'E/SouXeutrai/ro vlpirtiv is AaKe8aipj>va Trpiafiea 
 ravrd re epovvras KoX Avaavdpov aiT^aovras ctti ras vavs, in 
 order to say this, and to ask for Lysander as admiral. Xen. Hell. II, 
 1, 6. EcH/ els TToKepov (j] irUTpis) ayrj Tpai$rj(r6pevov rj diroda' 
 VQvp.evov, TTOtrjTeov ravra, even if it lead any one into war to be 
 wounded or to perish. Plat. Crit. 51 B. 
 
 Ktv)^ov yap at fiev (yrjes) ctti Kaplas olxopevai, . . , TrepiayyeX' 
 Xova-ai fioriSeiv, for some of the ships happened to be gone towards 
 Caria, in order to give them notice to send aid. Thuc. I, 116. So 
 apvipfvoi, n. I, 159. (The Present here seems to express an attend- 
 ant circumstance, rather than a mere purpose.) 
 
 6. Condition, the Participle standing for the protasis 
 of a conditional sentence, and its tenses representing 
 the various forms of protasis expressed by the Indica- 
 tive, Subjunctive, or Optative (§ 52, 1). B. g. 
 
 OiEi <ri 'AXkijutiv mrip 'AS/t^rou airoBavciv av, fi 'A;(iXXea narpcSitX^ 
 eirairodavetv, pr] otopevovs dddvuTOv pvriprjv dpeTjjs irtpt, eavrajv 
 c(7ea-6ai, do you think that Alcestis would have died for Admetus, Sj'C, 
 if they had not believed, &c. Plat. Symp. 208 D. (Here pij olopi- 
 vovs is equivalent to « pi) &ovro.) Ov yap av airols epeKev pij tovto 
 viToXap^avovtriv, for it would not have concerned them, unless 
 they had had this idea. Dem. Phil. Ill, 122, 21. (Here /Z17 ijroXa/i.- 
 ^dvova-iv is equivalent to el pfj tovto vTieXap^avov.) 'AorpiBi' &» 
 fKOoip alBipos irphs dvroKas Kal.yrjs evepdf, dwaros av dpatrai rdde, 
 if I should be able to do this (« SwaTos eLrjv). EuB. Phoen. 604. 
 
 See other examples under § 52, 1. 
 
 7. Opposition, or limitation, where the Participle is 
 often to be translated by although. E. g. 
 
 OStos 8e Koi peTaiTep<j>8^vai <jid<rKav vnro Tov naTpiis, Kci i\6oir 
 10 
 
218 THE PAETICIPLB. [§ 109, 7 
 
 tls rr/v oiKiav, eltreXSiiv fih o4 (jiTia-iv, Ar]fio(f>SivTOS 8" aKovirai ypamia- 
 Ttiov avayiyv&iTKovTOs, Ka\ Trpcii,ae\r]\v6a>s Koi airavra oioifif. Ao- 
 y-qfievos TTpos rhv warepa, and this man, although he admits thai hd 
 was summoned, and although he did go to the house, yel denies that he 
 went in, Ij-c, although he had previously gone in and arranged every- 
 thing vM, my father. Dem. Aph. II, 839, 29. 'OXiya hvvap,evot 
 irpoopav TTfpi toB piXKovros TToXXa Imx^ipovp^v npaTT^iv, although we 
 are able to foresee few things, &c. Xkn. Cyr. Ill, 2, 15. 
 
 The Participle in this sense is very often accompanied by Kalirep 
 and other particles. See below, Note 5. 
 
 8. Any attendant ciroumstanoe, the Participle being 
 merely descriptive. B. g. 
 
 Kat 7r apa\a^6vTes Toiis BotcoTovs iffrpdrevtrav cVl ^aprrtiKov, and 
 having taken the Boeotians with them, they marched against Pharsalus. 
 ThuC. I, 111. IlapayyiWcL tm KKeapxcp Xa^ovrt ^Keiv o(rov rjv 
 avT^ (TTpdrevpa. Xen. An. I, 2, 1, Ep^erai MavBdvrj tov TLvpov rov 
 uiAvexouo-a, Mandane comes with her son Cyrus. Id. Cyr. I, 8, 1, 
 (See below, N. 8.) 
 
 Note 1. (a.) The adverbs Tore, ^hrj (rrfrf ^817), ivravBa, fira, 
 eirftra, and ovras are often joined to the verb of the sentence in 
 which the temporal Participle stands. E. g. 
 
 'EKeXfuew auroi' (Tvvhia^avra tit f it a ovtok aTraXXdrTfo-flai, he com- 
 manded that, after he had joined them in crossing, he should then retire 
 as he proposed. XEIf. An. VII, 1, 2. Iin6opev<av be rav Sapiav mi 
 fTyovTtav Trjv Zayn^rfU, evdavra oi ZayKKdioi i^orjSeov avT^. Hdt. 
 VI, 23. 'ATro^uyo)!/ fie Ka\, toutous, CTparriyos outoj 'AOrjvaiav 
 aiTt8ex6ri, and having escaped these also, he was then chosen general 
 of the Athenians. Id. VI, 104. 
 
 (6.) Efra, eireira, and ovras sometimes refer in the same way to a 
 Participle expressing opposition or limitation; in which case they 
 may be translated by nevertheless, after all. E. g. 
 
 UdvTtov 8' ctTtmaiTaTov eort, rrfKiKavTr^v aweXdwroff paprvpiav 
 ovrta s oietrOat dew etK^ irLoreveudai irap vpiv, that, although they 
 have destroyed so important a piece of evidence, they after all think, 
 &c. Dem. Aph. II, 837, 10. Atira p-evr &v waBots, el 'AdqvaCe 
 d<j)iK6p€iios, ov T^s 'EXXdSos irKeiarri iarlv efoucria Toi) Xf'yfii', 
 i ire IT a ai) evravda tovtov p6vus oTiJx^o'ais, if, aWiough you are come 
 to Athens, you should after all be tlie only one to fail in obtaining this. 
 Plat. Gorg. 461 E. 
 
 (c.) Ovras, 81a toCt-o, and 8ii ravra sometimes refer in the same 
 way to a Participle denoting a cause. E. g. 
 
 No^ifoJi' apeivovas Kol KpeiTTOus TroXXmn j3apj3dp<Bv v/ms elvai, 
 did TovTo irpoa-iXafiov. Xen. An. I, 7, 3. 
 
109.] THE PARTICIPLE. 219 
 
 NOTNS 2. The Adverbs Sfia, /lera^u, ev6vs, avTixa, and efai'^wiji 
 are often connected (in position and in sense) with the temporal 
 Participle, although grammatically they qualify the verb of the sen ■ 
 tence. E. g. 
 
 'A /to frpoiav iirta-KmretTO ei n Svvarov eir] tovs jroXep'our arrSevea-Te- 
 povs iroiMc, as he advanced, he looked at the same lime to see whether it 
 was possible, kc Xen. Cyr. V, 2, 22. "A/xa KaraXafiovTcs TrpocreKeaTo 
 crrf)i, as soon as they had overtaken them, they pressed hard upon them. 
 Hdt. IX, 57. NcAffiiff fi€Ta^v dpvtro-aiv cVautrdro, pai/rrjl'tv e/zsrodiov 
 yevoiiipovi Necho stopped while digging (the canal), &c. Id. II, 158, 
 noXXa;^oi) Stj p,f iirctrx^ \eyovTa fiera^i, it often checked me while 
 speaking. Pz.at, Apol. 40 B. 'Einmvco atrKijO'ei eidiis vioi ovTfs to 
 dvSpeiov iieTep)(ovTaL, by toilsome discipline, even while they are still 
 young, &c. ThuC II, 39. Tm Se^ia Kepq fvBvs ano^f^rjKOTi oi Ko- 
 plvdioi emKeivTo, the Corinthians pressed upon the right wing, as soon 
 as it was disembarked. Id. IV, 43. 'Ap^diievos eidiis Kadia-Ta/ievov, 
 beginning as soon as it (the war) broke out. Id. I, 1. Aiowa-ov Xeyou- 
 <ri as avTLKa ysvofievov is tqv p.7jpbv eveppdyjraTo Zevs, they say of 
 Dionysus that, as soon as' he was born, Zeus sewed him into his thigh. 
 Hdt. II, 146. Tfjif ylrv)(Tjv BeapStv i^ai<^v7is dnodavovTOS eKauTov, 
 viewing the soul of each one the moment that he is dead. Plat. Gorg. 
 523 E. 
 
 Note 3. (a.) 'Ate, oioi/, or oia, as, inasmuch as, are used 
 to emphasize a Participle denoting the cause or ground of an 
 action. Here the cause assigned is stated merely on the au- 
 thority of the speaker or writer. (See N. 4.) E. g. 
 
 'O he Kupor, are Trais (ov Kai (jyiXoKoXos kol <l>t\oTiiios, 7J8eTO Tjj 
 oToXg, but Cyrus, inasmuch as he was a child, &c. Xen. Cyr. I, 3, 3. 
 So are \rj<p6evTa>v, Thuc. VH, 85. MaXa be ;^dXe7rSs itopevop.evoi, 
 Ola 8-q ev WKTi re kol <I>6^c^ diriovTes, els Aiyotrdeva d<f>LKVovtTai, 
 inasmuch as they were departing by night, &c. Xen. Hell. Yl, 4, 26. 
 
 In Herodotus wore is used in the same sense; as in I, 8, aaTt 
 •avra vojil^av, inasmuch as he believed this. See Thuc. VH, 24. 
 
 (J.) 'Qa-irep with the Participle occasionally seems to have the 
 t,ame force as Sre or olov ; as in EuK. Hippol. 1307, 6 8' aairep av 
 d^Kaws oiiK e(j>etnreTo Aoyois, inasmuch as he was just, &c. 
 
 For the common use of &a-7rep with the Participle, see Note 9. 
 
 Note 4. (a) 'flr maybe prefixed to many of the Parti- 
 uples of § 109, especially those denoting a cause or a pur- 
 pose. It shows that the Participle expresses the idea of the 
 subject of the leading verb, or that of some other person promi- 
 nently mentioned in the sentence ; without implying that it ii 
 also the idea of the speaker or writer. E. g. 
 
220 THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 109. 
 
 Ti» UepixKea iv alrlq. (txov as ireiaavra tr^m TroKeftciv Koi iC 
 cKeivov Tois ^vjU^opals ireptweirTaKOTts, they found fault toilh 
 Pericles, on the ground that he had persuaded them to engage in the 
 war, and that through him they had met tuith the calamities. Thuc. 
 II. 59. (Here Thucydides himself is not responsible for the state- 
 ments made by the Participles ; as he would be if i>s wer" omitted.) 
 See § 111. 'AyavoKTovmv as fiiyoKav tivSsv direaTeprjiicva., they are 
 indignant, because (as tliey allege) they have been deprived, &c. Plat. 
 Rep. I, 329 A. BaatXct X^P'" i^airiv, a>s St' cKfivov Tvxovo'ai t!Is 
 avTovojiias TouTTjf, i. e. they thank him because (as they believe) they 
 have obtained this independence through him. Isoc. Pan. p. 77 C. 
 § 175. Oi iiiv biaiKOVTts Toiis Koff aiiroiis as itdvras vixavTfS, oi 8' 
 dpira^ovTfs o>s 781) iravT€s viKavres, one side pursuing those opposed 
 to them, thinking that they were victorious over all ; and the other tide 
 proceeding to plunder, thinking that they were all victorious. Xen. An. 
 I, 10,4. TrjV 7tpd<j)a<Tiv fiToiflTO i)S nuriSas Pov^ofievos eK^akeiv, 
 he made his pretence, (apparently') wishing to drive out the Pisidians. 
 lb. I, 2, 1. EXe-yc dappeiv ws KaTaa-Ti]aop.€vav Tovrav els rh 
 hiov, he said he took courage, on the ground that these matters were 
 about to be settled, lia. lb. I,. 3, 8. (See § 110, 1, N. 1.) 'as yap 
 t IS orav Tifpl Stv fire fixjiBritrav aKovere, for you hear them as men who 
 (as you believe) know about what they were sent for. Dem. F. L. 342, 
 25. Ot ^hdr\v(uot TrapetTKevd^ovTO as iro\e prjaovres, the Athenians 
 prepared unth the (avowed) intention of going to war. Thdc. II, 7. 
 SvSXapPdvei Kvpov its diTOKTevav, he seizes Cyrus vnih the (oDOioed) 
 object of putting him to death. Xen. An. I, 1, 3. 
 
 It is a common mistake to suppose that as implies that the Parti- 
 ciple does not express the idea of the speaker or writer. It implies 
 nothing whatever on this point, which is determined (if at all) by the 
 context. 
 
 (J.) 'Qs may also be used before Participles with verbs of know- 
 ing, &c., included in § 113. (See § 113, N. 10.) 
 
 Note 5. (a.) The Participle expressing opposition or limitation 
 is often strengthened by Kaiwep or koI (after a negative, by ovbe or 
 ^i)8c, with or without nep), Kai Tavra, and that too, "Ojuor, neverthe- 
 less, may be connected with the Participle (like Sp.a, &c. N. 2), be- 
 longing, however, grammatically to the leading verb. E. g. 
 
 "ExTopa Kai pefiaara lidxris (rxfia-ea-dat oia. II. IX, 655. 'Ettoj- 
 KTeipw 8e vw SioTTjvov epnas, Kalirep ovra 8u(rpevij, although he is 
 my enemy. Soph. Aj. 122. Ovk &v n-poHoiriv, ovSe wep irpda-trav 
 KOKas. Eur. Phoen. 1624. rvraiKt neidov, )xi;8e toKtiOtj itXuoif. 
 Id. Hipp. Fr. 443. UeiBov yvvai^\, Kaiirep ov a-repyav o/aas. 
 Aesch. Sept. 712. (Here Sfms qualifies ireiOov; although, as usual, 
 it is joined with the Participle for emphasis.) "ASiKeir on avipa 
 ijpXv Tov airovbaioTaTov 8ia(j>6flpeis yfXaK dvaireidav, Kal Tavra oSru 
 traiKefuov ovra ra ytXart. Xen. Cyr. H, 2, 16. 
 
 (h.) In Homer, the two parts of Kai . . irep are generally sepa- 
 
§ 109.] THE PAKTICIPLE. 221 
 
 rated by the Partitiple, or by some emphatic word connected with 
 it. Kat is here very often omitted, so that ^IT^p stands alone in the 
 sense of all}.ough. 
 Both of these uses are found also in the At ac poets. E. g. 
 
 Toi' fih eireiT eiatre, xai axvi/uvni nep ii jlpov, lee^aBai. H. VITI, 
 125. Kal Kparepos nep eiav^ pxvhrta TpiTorr^ m fioiprj- U. XV, 195. 
 TerXafli, lirjrep ep,fi, Koi avd<TXfO KrjSofiivr) irtp, jaq tre (^I'Xijw jr€/> 
 covo-av iv o^BdKfioiaiv ISa/uu Beivopivijv rare S oil ti Sw^cro/uii 
 axyviuvos TTcp p^paicr^cii'. H. I, 586. 
 
 Kdya a iKvoipai, Ka\ yvvfj nep ova' ■Sfias- EuR. Orest. 680. 
 Td(poi> yap aMi xal KaTa<TKa(f>as iya, yw^ jiep ovara, r^Se pr]xav^(r<r- 
 |ia^. Ajisch. Sept. 1037. 
 
 Bemabe. KaiTOt was very seldom used like Kcuirep with the Par- 
 ticiple, its only regular use being with finite verbs. E. g. 
 
 Ov8e fioi ifi/ieXtios ro UtrraKeiov vep,tTai, xaiToi cro^ov napa 
 ifuoTos elpriiuvov. SiMON. Fr. 5 (apud Plat. Prot. 339 C). 
 
 Note 6. The Participle &v is sometiicas omitted after the parti- 
 cles mentioned in the last three notes, leaving an adjective or a 
 noun standing by itself. E. g. 
 
 AvToiis els T^v ^oXireiav ov Trapabe^ofieda^ cire Tvpavvldos Vfivifrds 
 (sc. ovras). Plat. Bep. VIII, 568 B. Ai™ fTnTtjSfvovinv i)S dvay 
 Koiov aXX' ovx as dyaOov (so. ov), they practise it on the ground that it 
 is necessary, and not on the ground that Uis a good thing. lb. II, 358 
 C, *H ;>^v m Zeis, Kaiirep aiBddrjS (f>pevav, furai Tcnreivos- Aesch. 
 Prom. 907. 
 
 Note 7. (a.) The Participle with any of the meanings included 
 in § 109 may stand in relative or interrogative clauses. Such ex- 
 pressions can seldom be translated literally into English. E. g. 
 
 Tt 8e xai dc 3 tores o'Sobpa ovras eTreiyeoCe ; what do you fear, 
 that you are in such great haste f Xen. Hell. I, 7, 26. Ti &v elirwv 
 ae Tis 6p6S)s irpotreiiroi ; what could one call yon, so as to give you the 
 right name f Dem. Cor. 232, 20. TSiv vo/uov aneipoi yiyvovrai xai 
 tS)U Xoymi', oft del xp^l'^evov 6p,iKe'iv rols dvBpamois, which one must 
 use in his intercourse with men. Plat. Gorg. 484 D. 
 
 (S.) Here belong ri /ladav ; and rt ira6av ; both of which hav« 
 the general foi-ce of wherefore ? Ti fiaBav tovto iroie'i ; however, 
 usually signifies what put it into his head to do this f or with what idea 
 does he do thisf and nitaBav tovto voiel; wnat has happened to him 
 that he does this f E. g. 
 
 Ti TOVTO ji aOav irpotriypa^ev ; with what idea rfW he add this to 
 the lawf Dem. Lept. 495, 20. Ti iraOovoat, e'mep Ned)eXa( y 
 fl&iv dXridms, 6vr]Tdi.s et^aa-i yvvm^iv ; what has happened to them thai 
 they resemble mortal women ? Akist. Nub. 340. 
 
 These phrases may be used even in dependent sentences, ti be- 
 coming o Tt, and the whole phrase meaning because. E. g. 
 
222 THE PAETICIPLB. [§ 109, 
 
 Ti dfior cl/ii iraBeiv i) arroT'uTai, on fiaBmv ev T& pla ovx ^cux^a* 
 fjyov ; what do I deserve to suffer, ^c. for not keeping quiet f i. e. for 
 the idea which came into my head, in consequence of which I did not 
 keep quiet. Plat. Apol. 36 B. So Plat. Euthyd. 283 E, and 299 
 A. (See Matthiae, § 567.) 
 
 Note 8. Certain Participles, when they agree with the subject 
 of a verb, have almost the force of adverbs. Such are apxof'fvos., 
 ai first; TfXfvrav, finally ; diaXtirav, after an interval; ipipiavf 
 hastily; avv<ras, quickly; \a6av, secretly; Karareivas, ear- 
 nestly; evav, continually ; (ji$d<r as, quickly, (See Passow or Lid- 
 dell and Scott, under npxio, &c.) 
 
 'Exav, aya>v, (^epatv, and \a^i>v may often be translated 
 with. (See example under § 109, 8.) 
 
 Note 9. "Oo-Trsp with the Participle generally belongs 
 to an implied apodoais, to which the Participle forms the pro- 
 tasis (§ 109, 6). Here &(nrep means simply as, and the Parti- 
 ciple is translated with an if prefixed. (See § 53, N. 3.) 
 E.g. 
 
 Q<rjrep ijbr) (ra<j)Sis elSores, ouk iOeKer anoiciv, you are unwilling 
 to hear, as if you already knew well (i. e. as you would be if you 
 knew). Isoc. Pac. p. 160 C. § 9. (Here fidores = «( gSeire, § 52, 
 1.) ATTi^tTQJi/ oXi'yoi Trpos ttoXXos fivptddas, wairep ev aKXorptais 
 ■Jnixaic p-eWovrts KivSmeisiv, as if they had been about to risk the 
 lives of others (i. e. S)cnrep wn-rjVToiv av, cl epcXXov). Id. Pan. p. 58 B. 
 § 86. So lb. p. 78 C. § 179, SxTTiep jrpos rov Ai'a ttjv x«>pav veuo- 
 fxevos, aW ov irpus Toils dvdpQJTTOvs Tas tTvvdrjKas noiovfievos, OS 
 (he would have done) if he had been dividing the counb-y with Zeus, 
 and not making a treaty, with men. 
 
 That fio-irep moans simply as (not as if) is seen when a verb with 
 « follows ; as in Sio-rrrp et Xeyots, as if you should say. See also D. 
 II, 780, ia-av, ms ei Tf irvpl p^floiw Traera vipoiro, i. c. their march 
 was as (it would be) if the whole land should be covered with fre. 
 
 § 1 10. 1. If a Participle, denoting any of the rela- 
 tions included in § 109, belongs to a substantive wMch 
 is not connected with the main construction of the sen- 
 tence, both the substantive and the Participle are put 
 in the genitive, called absolute. E. 
 
 &• 
 
 Tavr' iirpaxBr) "Kovavos <tt parriyovvTos , these things were 
 done -when Conon was general. Isoo. Kvag. p. 200 C. § 56. 'Aii'wTo 
 Sfipo TO ir\oXov, yvovTav Tmv K((j)a\\rivwv, aVTinpaTTOVTos rov- 
 rov, . . . KarairXflv, the Cephallenians having determined I" sail in, 
 vlthouyh this man opposed it. Dem. Zenoth. 836, 1. (For the tenses 
 
§ 110, 1.] GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. 223 
 
 of the Participles, see § 24.) 'kBrpialav 8e ro alth tovto iia66vTav, 
 hm\atriav av r^v bvvajuv eiKa^ea-Bai (pijiaC), i. e. if the Athenians 
 thoidd ever suffer, &c. Thuc. I, 10. (See § 52, 1.) 'OXijt yap t^i 
 iroXetoc IjriTpf TTOfieKT)! ra crTpanj-y^, fieyoKa to. re ayaOa Karop- 
 BovvTos avTov Koi TCL KaKa diajxaprdvovTOS cIkos yiyvetrOai, 
 Xen. Mem. Ill, 1, 3. 
 
 Note 1. The Participle in the genitive absolute may be accom- 
 panied by all the particles mentioned in § 109, Notes 1-9, with the 
 same force as in other constructions. It may also stand in the relar 
 tive and interrogative sentences of § 109, N. 7. E. g. 
 
 Kal avTOv p-era^i) ravra Xeyoi/Tos 6 KXeivias tTV\€V ajroKptvap-e- 
 vos, while he was saying this, &c. Plat. Euthyd. 275 E. 'E/c fie 
 Toirmv (v8vs eKYjpvTTOV e^tivai Travras Orjfiaiovs, i>s tS>v Tvpawav 
 TsdvemTav, because (as they said) the tyrants were dead. Xen. 
 Hell. V, 4, 9. (See § 109, N. 4.) 'AiriXoyritraTo on ovx i>s tois 
 ^EWtjo'i iro\e prja'ovTiav a(l>S)v clttoi, that he said what he did, not 
 because they intended to be at war with the Greeks. Id. An. V, 6, 3. 
 So A)ff iin^avKevovTos Ti(T(7a<j)epvovs rais iroXeat, on the ground thai T, 
 was plotting ; An. I, 1, 6. 'fls av n-poo-oiVovror (so. e'/ioC) ras 
 Xcipaf 1 ■ • • 8i8ao-(ce, since (as you may feel sure) I will not lay hands 
 on you, teach me. Id. Mem. II, 6, 32. Kvpos de dTroplrjai evei^cro, 
 are j(p6j/ov eyyivopevov a'v)(yQv, inasmuch as a long time intervened, 
 Hdt. I, 190. (See § 109, N. 3.) 'Hi/ yap dSivaros, Stare arjiro- 
 p,4vov Tov firjpov. Id. VI, 136. Oi "EWrjves ovras TjyavdKnjtrav, 
 aairep oXijt r^f 'EXXdSos iretropBrjpevTjs, as if the whole of Greece had 
 been devastated (i. e. as they would have been, if it had been devas- 
 tated). Isoc. Helen, p. 217 D. § 49. 
 
 For the genitive absolute after o>i, in connection with verbs of 
 knowing, &c., see § 113, Note 10. 
 
 Note 2. A Participle sometimes. stands alone in the genitive ab- 
 solute, when a noun or pronoun can easily be supplied from the 
 context, or when some general word (like diBpitirav, Trpayfidrav) is 
 understood. E. g. 
 
 Ot fie TToXeptot, TTpoaLovTcav, ritas pev fiav)^a^ov, but the enemy, as 
 they (men before mentioned) came on, for a time kept quiet. Xen. 
 An. V, 4, 16. So iirayopevav avrovs, ThuC. I, 3. Outo) 6' e'ydi/- 
 rmv, fiKos, ic.T.X., and things being so (sc. Trpaypdrav), &c. Xen. 
 An. in, 2, 10. OiiK i^aiToipfvos, ovk ' &pcj>i.KTvoviKds SUac iira- 
 yovTiov , OVK iiTayyfWopkvtav, ovdap&s ey& TTpoBedcoKa rrpf els 
 vuds evvotav. Dem. Cor. 331, 30. (Here dvBpaijrav is understood 
 with enayoiTaiU and eirayyeWopevcDv.) 
 
 So when the Participle denotes a state of the weather; as uovtoi 
 iroXXm, when it was raining heavily. Xen. Hell. I, 1 , 16. (In such 
 cases the Participle is masculine, Aios being understood. See Arist. 
 Nub. 370, vovra; and II. XII, 25, ve 8' apaZfvs.) 
 
 Note 3. A passive Participle may stacl in the genitive absolute 
 
224 THE PARTICIPLE [§ ilf, !• 
 
 ■with a clause introduced by Sri. If the subject of such a clause is 
 plural, the Participle is itself sometimes plural, by a kind of attrac- 
 tion. E. g. 
 
 2a(^(0$ 8r)\a}d evTOs oTt iv rats vava\ TWt EWrjvtov ra TTpayfiara 
 eyevero, it having heen clearly shown, thai, &c. Thuc. I, 74. In I, 
 116 we find taayyt'KBdvToiv on <^oimtraai VTJis eV" airovs jr\tov- 
 tnv, it having been announced, that, &c. 
 
 Note 4. The Participle &v is rarely omitted, leaving a noun and 
 an adjective alone in the genitive absolute. E. g. 
 'Qs €fiov fiovTjs ire\as (sc. ovarjs). SoPH. O. C. 83. 
 
 Note 5. The genitive absolute is regularly used only when a 
 new subject is introduced into the sentence (§ 110, 1), and not 
 when the Participle can be joined with any substantive already be- 
 longing to the construction. Yet this rule is sometimes violated, in 
 order to give greater prominence to a participial clause. E. g. 
 
 Aia^eff-r/KOTos ^3i) UtpttcKeovs, riyyfXSrj avra on Meyapa d^/onj- 
 
 K€. Thuc. 1, 114. 
 
 2. The Participles of impersonal verbs stand in the 
 ctcousative absolute, in the neuter' singular, when other 
 participles would stand in the genitive absolute. Such 
 are oeov, e^ov, irapov, irpocTrfKov, Trap6j(pv, /leXov, fiera- 
 /leXov, BoKovv, Bo^av, and the like ; also passive Parti- 
 ciples used impersonally (as Trpoara^dev, elprj/j.evov') ; 
 and such expressions as aBvvarov ov, it being impossible, 
 composed of an adjective and ov. E. g. 
 
 Oi d* ov ^07j6fi(ravTes, deov, vytels diT^\6ov; and did those icho 
 brought no aid ivhen it was necessary escape safe and sound f Plat. 
 Aleib. I, 115 B. 'AttXSs St \i7ras e^ov (sc. <j>epeiv), ouK oio-ta 
 &t7r\as- EuK. Iph. Taur. 688. Tlap€)(ov 8e TTjS^Airlrjs nafnjs apx^^v 
 fvireretos, aWo n alprjo-eadf ; IIdt. V, 49. Eu Sc irapatrxo", and 
 when an opportunity offers. Thuc. I, 120. Oi irpoarjKov, im- 
 properly. Id. IV, 95. 2ui<Sd|ax ra ttot/ji kqi rtj piTp\, yapfl Tqv 
 Kua|apou Ovyaripa. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 5, 28. Elpripevov Kiuioi" 
 civat 5 n &v TO it\tj6os rav ^vppa)(av \^7)(^iotjtui. Thuc. V, 30. So 
 SeSoypevov, I, 125; yfypappevov, V, 56; and TrpotrrtTaypevov, PlaT. 
 Leg. X, 902 D. Kni evBevSe jrdXti/, it po<rTax6iv poi mo Toi) 8^jttoo 
 Mevava ayein fli 'EW^oTroi/roi', aj(apr)V. Dem. Polyel. 1210, 5. 
 UapsKeXeiiovTo re, dSivarov ov iv wkt\ oXXo) tw orjpijvai. ThuC. 
 VIl, 44. 'Eycoy, ecftr; 6 KCpoj, otpat, apa pev avvayopfvovTav ripatv. 
 Spa be Koi aio-YpoK hv t6 avriKtyeiv, k.t.X. Xen. Cyr. II, 2, 20. 
 (The genitive belongs under § 110, 1. See § 111 ) 'Avrmap,- 
 VKtva^eTO ippa>peva>s, as pcixj]! en Serj(rov, on the ground that fjter* 
 
§ 111.] ACCUSATrVB ABSOLUTE. 225 
 
 would slW, he need of a battle. lb. VI, 1, 26. (See Bemark, below.) 
 Ot Se TptaKOVTOy as e^bv ^8ij auTois rvpavveiv aSeur, TTOoeiTrov, k. r-X., 
 i. 6. thinking that it was now in their power, &c. Id. Hell. II, 4, 1. 'H 
 yap vofts Baimiv cr<^', aitppprjTov TrdXei (sc. ov), when it is forbidden 
 to the city. Sofe. Ant. 44. 
 
 Remake. The accusative absolute may take the same particles 
 as the genitive absolute (§ 110, 1, Note 1). It may aJao omit the 
 Participle ov. (See the last two examples, above.) 
 
 Note 1. Even the Participles of personal verbs sometimes stand 
 with their nouns in the accusative absolute, in all genders and num- 
 bers, if they are preceded by its (used as in § 109, Note 4), or by 
 &(nTep, as if. E. g. 
 
 Ai'o Kai Toiis vict; oi iraripes aith tS>v iromfpav av6pairav ttpyoixriv, 
 as TTiv fiev Tav xprjffTav ofitXiav aaKrjffiv ovtrav ttjs dpeTrjSi ttju 
 de tS)v irovijpav KaTa\vtrtv (sc. ovtrav). Xen. Mem. I, 2, 20. ^iKovg 
 KTavrai mc fiaqdav Seofievoi, rav S dSeXKJjav dp.e\ov<nv, &(T7rfp ck 
 TToXiTav fjiev yiyvojjLivovs (fttXovs, e^ dde\^av Seavyiyvofievovsj 
 as iffrien^ were made from fellow-citizens, and were not made from 
 brothers.^myU, S, 3. Meytarov ovrai SiaKcladai ras yva/ias i/imv, ms 
 SKooTou eKovra TTOoBvfuos o Ti &v dejj iroirjaovTa. Dem. Sym. 182, 
 3. (See § 113, N. 10, c.) 
 
 Note 2. The accusative absolute used personally without ms or 
 &a-jrep is very rare. It occurs chiefly with the neuter of Participles 
 which are regularly impersonal. E. g. 
 
 TIpo(rTJKov avT^ roC xX^pov p,epos oaovirep ipoi. IsAE. V, § 12. 
 Tavra Se yiv6p.€va, nevdea p^ydKa roiis AlyvTrriovs KaTaKafifiavei. 
 Hdt. II, 66. ''HSt; dp<l>aT€poi9 'pev doKovv dva)^ap€iv, KvpaOev di 
 ovdev , WKTOS re firiyevopei/Tjs, ol pev ^aKchoves . . . f\aipovv sir otKOV- 
 Thuc. IV, 125. Aofavra 8« ravra xat jrepavdevra, ra crrpa- 
 Tfvpara dirrjXBe. Xen. Hell. HI, 2, 19. Ad|ai> fiiiiv Taira occurs 
 in Plat. Prot. 314 C, where we may supply jroiflv. 
 
 § 1 1 1. As the Participle in the genitive (or accusative) 
 absolute denotes the same relations {time, cause, &c.) as the 
 Participle in its ordinary construction (§ 109), both may be 
 used in the same sentence, and be connected by conjunctions. 
 When several Participles denoting these relations occur in 
 any sentence, those which belong to substantives already con- 
 nected with the main construction agree with those substan- 
 tives in case, while those which refer to some ^ew subject 
 stand with that subject in the genitive absolute ; any which 
 are impersonal standing in the accusative absolute. E. g. 
 
 Ol ^<v 'EXXijvcf OT/)a^ei/rei napftrKtva^ovro a>c ravrg npoaiivTOt 
 10* O 
 
226 THE PAKTICIPLB. [§ HI' 
 
 (so. roO /SomXecor) Koi 8f^o>evot, they prepared themselves with a 
 view to his (ihe King's) coming up and to receiving him. Xkn. An. I, 
 10,6. T^s yap ifirroplas ovk ova-rjs, oW emiiiyvvvTes aSeat 
 aW^Xois, . • ■ veiiofievoi re ra iavrSv, . . . a8r]\bv hv OTrdre nt 
 tweXOav Koi a.Tet,xi(TTWv Spa Svtwv oKXos d<f>aipTiafTai, Tfs re Koff 
 riliepav avayKaiov rpixfirjs navTa\ov hv rjyovp.evoi emKpamv, ov 
 XaXeirSs diraviaravTO. ThUC. I, 2. Kai iravra Siairpa^ap,evos ev 
 rg eKKKrjo-ig. (K\ea>v), Koi yjfritpia-aiievav '&.6i)vai<ov aiira tov ttKovv, 
 rS>v re iv llvKt^ tTTparmiav iva npo(re\6iievos , Tr]V avayayrjv 8ii 
 rdxovs iirouiTo. Id. IV, 29. 'AXKiliiddrjs toIs Ue\cmovvria-ioK Siro- 
 TTTos © 1/ , Koi diT avTcav dcfyiKo fjLevrj s eTTtOToX^s (oar airoKTeivatf wro- 
 Xi>p" 77apa TuT<ra(l)epvj]V. Id. VIH, 45. 
 
 See the examples collected by Kriiger, Vol. I, § 56, 14, 2 ; and 
 his note to Thuc. IV, 5, 1. 
 
 § 113. The Participle may be joined with certam 
 verbs to restrict their meaning to particular actions, 
 in a sense which often resembles that of the Infinitive 
 (§ 92, 1). Such a Participle may agree in case with 
 either the subject or the object of the verb. 
 
 1. The Participle is thus used especially with verbs signi- 
 fying to begin, to continue, to endure, to persevere, to cease (or 
 caiise to cease), to repent, to be weary of, to be pleased, dis- 
 pleased, or asJiamed, to represent (as in a poem), to find. 
 
 Further, after verbs signifying to overlook or to allow {ntpuf 
 pda>, icjiopdo), with jrepul&ov and . cTrciSov, sometimes etSov) the 
 Participle is used in the sense of the object Infinitive, the Pres- 
 ent and Aorist Participles differing merely as the same tenses 
 of the Infinitive would differ in similar constructions (§ 15, 1 ; 
 § 23, 1). See § 24, Note 2. E. g. 
 
 (a.) "Ap^opat \iyav, I will begin to speak. Plat. Symp. 1 86 B. 
 TLavaaiXiyov IT a, cease speaking. EuR. Hippol. 706. (So airtiTTcIn 
 \iyav.) Ovk dvc^opai (S<ra, J shall not endure to live. lb. 865. 
 T^K ^t\o<ro(j>lav Travaov ravra Xiyovaav, caitse phUosophy to stop 
 saying this. Plat. Grorg. 482 A. Kai iya rois fpayrairi x<"'pa> 
 diroKpivoiicvos, I like to answer, &o. Id. Prot. Sls D. Ta pin 
 pa xalpov voa-TTjanvTi, they rejoiced in his return. Od. XIX, 463. 
 y!js AioXiSos ;(aXf7rc3r ecfiepev djreoTf DTjue'vos, he took it hardly 
 
 Sforparras /lere/icXoiTo aTro&fScoKdres, they repented oj having given 
 them up. Thuc. V, 35. ntTroiijice Toiis tv 'AiSou t6v del xP"'^* 
 ripapovp,ivovs, he has represented those in Hades as suffering 
 
8 112, 2.] PAETICIPLE -WITH VERBS. 227 
 
 punisliment. Plat. Gorg. 525 E. ESpev S' evuvrma KpovlSifV artp 
 ^lievov ahXwv, she found Mm sitting apart. H. I^ 4as. So I, 27. 
 
 (6.) M^ nepuSiofiev i^piirde'ta-au tj)V AaKehaifiova Kol xara- 
 4>povri6fla-av, let us not allow Lacedaemon to he insulted and despised. 
 Isoc. ArcUd. 138 A. §, 108. Mij p.' ISeTv davond' in aarmv, not lu 
 see me killed. Ede. Orest. 746. iX^al o-e tpaaav, that thou shouldst 
 take courage to do. Soph. El. 943. See examples in § 24, N. 2. 
 
 Remask. In Herodotus sreipao/iat is often used with the Parti- 
 ciple in the same way ; as ovK kireipaTo iiriiyv 6 KCpos, Cyrus did 
 not attempt to app'mch, I, 77. So I, 84; VI, 50. 
 
 'Ai7o&fiicmp,i and irapatrKcva^ia, in the meaning to render, may take 
 the Participle as well as the Infinitive; as in Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 18, apu 
 KOL TamTriheia pakitrra exovras dirobei^eiu kol ra o-aijLuzra tiptura 
 e^ovTas TrapatTKevcKTetv. So Aeist. Plut. 210, ^Xsttqvt* aTTO- 
 Sfifm o-e, / loill make you see. See these two verbs in Liddell and 
 Scott's Lexicon. 
 
 2. The Participle used with the following verbs contains 
 the leading idea of the expression: diare'heio, to continue, 
 \av6dva>, to escape the notice of, rvyxova, to happen, <j>6dva>, 
 to anticipate, to get the start of, Qtxop.ai, to be gone, and 6api- 
 f<o, to he wont or to he frequent. 
 
 So in poetry with ku/)«'<o, to happen ; and in Herodotus 
 with avp.iriwra, to happen, and with ttoWo: ei/u, ttoXXo; eyKeip,ai, or 
 navrmts ytyvop,at, to be urgent ; and in Homer with ;3^ for ejSij. 
 E. g. 
 
 Aiare\ev<rt ro p^XP^ epev alel eovres iXevBepoi, they still remain 
 free. Hdt. VII, 111. "Oirrp/ evvoiav ex<i>veya SiareXm, as much 
 good vnU as I continually bear. Dem. Cor. §1. ^E\adev (avTr)v) 
 a<\>6ivTa Travra Kol KaTat^\€X^^^ra, everything took fire and was 
 consumed before she knew it. Thuc. IV, 133. (See § 24, Note 1.) 
 ^ovka i-oC TraiSbs e\dvdave ^6a-Ka>v,he was unconsciously supporting 
 the murderer of his son. Hdt. I, 44. (See Rem. below.) 'IEitvxov 
 cv rfi dyop^ ottXitoi KadevSovres, soldiers happened to be sleeping 
 in the market-place, Thtjc. IV, 113. Kara debv yap riva ervxov 
 KaSrjpevos ivravda, I happened to be sitting there. Plat. Euthyd. 
 272 E. Oi S' OVK eCJiOaaav irvddfievot tov TTokepov, koX . . . r]Kov, 
 they no sooner heard of the war than they came. &o. Isoc. Paneg. 58 
 B. § 86. ''E<p8r]aav TroXXm oi SKvSai tovs Xlc'poas eVi ttjv. ye(j)vpav 
 aTTiKopevot, the Scythians came to the bridge much before the Per- 
 sians. Hdt. IV, 136. Avtoi <p6ri(rovTai tovto Spdcravresjthey 
 will be the first to do this for themselves. Plat. Rep. II, 375 C. (See 
 § 24, N. 1.) ^ Bdvovai err avrd Karatpevy ovres , they are the 
 first to rim to them. Akschin. Cor. § 248. Oi;^fTai (j>eiyaiv, he has 
 takenflight. yipa ^tvaiv c)Xf'o,he was gone on an embassy. X£N> 
 
228 THE PAKTICIPLE. [§ 1 12, i.. 
 
 Cyr. V, 1 , 3. 00 n « o ^ » f <S /x e » d i ye (9af«ff i-. ^e Aarf no( 6een «.seii 
 to being thus cared for. Od. VIU, 451. Oi BaiiiCfis Kara^aivai 
 «r Tw neipaio, you do not come dotim very often. 1'i.at. Rup. 1, 
 
 328 C. , , 1 • , 
 
 ToCtov o'cr5' fifSi/ Kvpel; dost thou know whether he is perchance 
 living? Sorn. Phil. 444. HoXXos fjv Xtacro/if i/oy 6 ^f'lvos, the 
 stranger entreated urgently. Hdt. IX, 91. TfXo>v 8e ttoXXoi em- 
 «iTo Xt'yiBv ToiaSf, a»<i Geion spofe urgently as follows. Id. VII, 
 158. Torf iravToioi eyevovro 'SkvOui Seonevoi Tatv'liiivav'McrmTov 
 nopov, they begged them in every way (lit. they took every form in 
 begging them). Id. VII, 10. SweimrrmKei ipis fovaa, there had 
 happened to be a quarrel. Id. I, 82. Brj (pevyav, he took flight. IL 
 II, 665. (See § 97, N. 1.) 
 
 Remark. AavBdva being an active verb, meaning to escape the 
 notice of, must have an object expressed or understood. When no 
 object is expressed, sometimes iravras is understood, and sometimes 
 a reflexive referring to the subject. Thus f\a6e tovto Troifjo-as may 
 mean either he did this without any one's knowing it (sc. icavras), or 
 he did this unconsciously (sc. iavrov). 
 
 Note 1. 'Apxea, to be suffcient, and ixavos, rjdlav, Kpfiiramv, or 
 jifXrlmv eiiil are sometimes useJ in a personal construction with the 
 Participle (like fi^Xos fi>i, &c., § 113, N. 1), where we should ex- 
 pect an impersonal construction with the Infinitive. E. g. 
 
 'A 
 
 Ant. 
 
 y . . 
 
 amiaavTfS. Dem. Aristoc. 641, 9. 
 
 Note 2. As avt vo/uat, «o endure, may govern either the ac- 
 cusative or the genitive, it may take a Participle in either case 
 agreeing with the object. Thus we may say either ivex'^Tal riva 
 \eyovTa, or avixirai Tivoi XeyovToi, he endures any one's say- 
 ing. 
 
 Note 3. Tlie phrase oiix &v^davois (or ovk &v <f>6avoiTe), you 
 could not be too soon, is used with the Participle as an exhortation, 
 meaning the sooner the better. The third person, ovk &v (jiBavoi, 
 is sometimes used, meaning, it might as well happen now as ever (jbr 
 it must happen). See Passow. 
 
 Note 4. The Participle &v is sometimes omitted in the construo- 
 tionsof§112. E. g. 
 
 El be n Tvyxavfi, irfbis (so. Sw.) Plat. GrOrg. 502 B. 
 
 Note 5. li.av6av<o is sometimes followed by on. and a finite verb, 
 as in Xkn. Mem. Ill, 5, 24. When it is used impersrnally, it regu 
 larly takes on. 
 
 Note 6. Some verbs of this class are followed by the Infinitive 
 u well as by the Participle ; generally, however, with some differ 
 
J 113.] PARTICIPLE WITH TERES. 229 
 
 ence in meining. Thus al(rx>Jvoiiai \eyav means I am ashamed to 
 say (but do say) ; alcr^vyojiai, Xeynv means / am ashamed to say 
 {and therefore do not say) . So airoKdiiva tovto iroiav, I am weary 
 of doing this; but artoKafiva tovto iroielv, I cease to do this through 
 weariness. (See Passow, or LiddeU and Scott, under these words ; 
 and Passow under ap^o)uu) See nepuSelv ttjv yrjv TfiriBrjvai, 
 Thuc. n, 20; and jrfptiSfii' avTrjv T/irideia-av, II, 18; where it is 
 difficult to detect any diflerence in meaning. See, however, Krii- 
 ger's note on I, 35. 
 
 Note 7. The Aorist (seldom the Perfect) Participle may be 
 joined with the subject of e^a, forming a periphrastic Perfect. This 
 18 especially common in Sophocles and Eiiripides. E. g. 
 
 Tov uev TrpoTLiras 1 Tov 8* a.TiiJ.d<ras ^X"* SoPH. Ant. 22, So 
 EtTK. Med. 33 and 90. IloXXa )(pr]fuiTa ixojifv dvjjpiraKSrts. 
 Xbn. An. I, 3, 14. 
 
 For a similar periphrasis to express the Future Perfect, see § 29, 
 Note 4 ; and § 108, Note 6. 
 
 Note 8. The Participles ^ovXafievot, 6e\av, fi86ii€vos, 
 irpoahexo^P'fvos, and eXirofievos gometimes agree in ease 
 with a dative, which depends on tJ/ii or on a verb signifying to 
 come or to happen ; the whole forming a periphrasis for the 
 verb of the Participle. E. g. 
 
 'EoTii/ avrS ^ov\6p.€V(f, it is to him imshing it, i. e. ^e wishes it. 
 Kai Trpoade^ofxevc^ p.oi ra tijs opyrjs vfiStv is f/xe yeyivrjTat, i. e. 
 J have been expecting the manifestations of your anger towards me. 
 Thtjc. n, 60. 
 
 § 1 1 3. The Participle is used also with many verbs 
 sigaifying to see, to perceive, to Jcnow, to hear or learn, to 
 remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove, to ac- 
 hnowledge, and with ayyeWa>, to announce. The Parti- 
 ciple here resembles the Infinitive in indirect discourse 
 (§ 92, 2), each tense representing the corresponding 
 tense of the Indicative or Optative. 
 
 The Participle may belong to either the subject or the 
 
 oly'eet of these verbs, and agree with it in case. E. g. 
 
 yiepmjpai •irbv tovto noir)(ravTa, I remember that he did this; 
 /if/ivrinai Tov'o irotij a- as, J remember that I did this. (In the first 
 case iirohja-ev is represented ; in the second, inolri<ra.') OiSe tovtovs 
 ev irpd^ovTas, he knows that they will prosper ; oi8e avTos ev irpd^ov, 
 he knows that he himself will prosper. C^ei^a to€to;' i)(6phv ivra, 1 
 
230 THE PARTICIPLE. [§ US' 
 
 shall prove tliat lie is an enemy; SeixdrjireTai oStos cx^pos &v,he will 
 be proved to be an enemy. 
 
 For other examples see § 78, 2 ; where examples of the Participle 
 with av after these verbs may be found. See aJso § 41. 
 
 Note 1. The Participle is used in the same way with 
 Srj'Kos elixi and cfiavepos ei/xt. E. g. 
 
 A^Xoj t' ^1) olofievos, K.T.\.,it was evident that he thought, &c. 
 Xen. An. n, 5, 27. (This is equivalent to S^Xok ^v oti o'oito. 
 See § 112, N. 1.) See below, Note 7. '\ni.Koiifvoi ficv <pavfpol 
 tla-i (s'Oaa-iv iroKiv, it is evident that they came to the city Oasis. 
 PIdt. Ill, 26. So with (jyavepov Troteto'. as <l)avepbv naaiv enoirja-av 
 oix ISia TToXep-ovvres, they made it evident to cul that they were not 
 fighting for themselves. 1 ycdrg. Leocr. p. 154, § 50. 
 
 Note 2. When any ol these verbs has for its object an accusar 
 live of the reflexive pronoun referring to its subject, the Participle 
 ugrees with the reflexive. Thus we may have Sei^a enavrov toSto 
 itfTroirjKoTa, I shall show that I have done this, for 8ci^a> tovto ire- 
 
 Note 3. If the Participle of an impersonal verb ia used in 
 this construction, it must stand in the neuter singular (of 
 course without a noun). The following example includes this 
 and also the ordinary construction : — 
 
 II«pa(ro/iat Sel^ai Koi fierbv Trjs TToKeas flfuv (cai ncTTOvBoTa 
 ifiavrbv ou;^l irpoarjKovra, I shall try to show not only that we have 
 rights in the city, but also thai I have suffered, &c. Dem. Eubul. 1299 
 4. (The direct discourse is/xtTtortT^i TroXecBi ijiiiv, KoiniirovBa 
 avTos.) See § 111. 
 
 Note 4. Some verbs which regularly take the Infinitive in in- 
 direct discourse (§ 92, 2) occasionSly take the Participle. E. g. 
 
 Nofiife avSpa ayadov diroKTe ivav, think that you are putting to 
 death a good man. Xen. An. VI, 6, 24. 
 
 Note 5. The Participle &v may be omitted here, as well as after 
 the verbs of § 112. 
 
 Note 6. When o-ivotSa and tTvyyiyvacrKa) are followed 
 by a dative of the reflexive pronoun referring to the subject of 
 the verb, the Participle can stand either in the dative agreeing 
 with the reflexive, or in the nominative agreeing with the Sub- 
 ject; as uivoiia efiavT^ ^SiKijfif ko) (or r/ Siktj iiivos), lam con- 
 scious (to myself) that I have hfen wronged. 
 
 Note ''. The verbs included in § 113 may also be followed by 
 a clause with otj, instead of the more regular Participle. When 
 
§ 113. J 'Of WITH THE PARTICIPLE. 231 
 
 S^Xov eVi IV and ipavepov etma are used impersonally, they regularly 
 take a clause with ot-i. (See § 112, N. 5.) 
 
 Note 8. Most of these verbs are also found with the Infinitive. 
 (See Passow, or LiddeU and Scott.) But oiSa takes the Infinitive 
 only when it means to know how. Thus otSa tovto iroie'iv means 
 / know how to do this, but oiSa roOro tt o t m v means / know, that I am 
 doing this. 
 
 Note 9. Verbs signifying to remember or to know may be fol- 
 lowed by ore (when) and the Indicative, if a particular occasion is 
 referred to with emphasis. E. g. 
 
 El yap p.eft.vr](Tai or eyto aoi cme)tpivajXT]v, far if you remember (the 
 time) when I answered you, &c. Plat. Men. 79 D. Olad' or* 
 Xpvceois ifpdvrj aitu oTrXoiff. !EUB. Hec. 112. 
 
 Note 10. (a.) 'Qs is sometimes prefixed to the Participle in 
 connection with the verbs of § 113. It implies that the Participle 
 expresses the idea of the subject of the leading verb, or that of some 
 other person prominently mentioned in the sentence. (See § 109, 
 N. 4.) When this is also implied by the context (as it usually is in 
 such sentences), the as merely adds emphasis to the expression. Thus 
 iitBi ravra ovrats ej(ovTa means know that this is so; but 'icrdi as ravra 
 ovras e](ovTa means know that you may assume this to be so. E. g. 
 
 'Q s itrjSh e I S o T ' i(r5i p,' hv dvKTTopels, understand (that yon must 
 look upon) me as knowing nothing of what you seek. Soph. Phil. 
 2.53. *Sls p.rjK€T OUT a Keivov eu (pdei i/oet, think of him as no longer 
 living. lb. 415. 'Qs Tair eVioro) hpa>p,iv', ov p.iX'KovT en, under- 
 stand that you may assume these things to be going on, &c. lb. 567. 
 Qs pri'piTo\Ti<Ta>v icrB i Trjv ifir]!/ ippeva, be assured that you xmll not 
 buy me ojf from my determination. Soph. Ant. 1063. ArjKols S as 
 Ti arip,avav viov, you show that you have something new in your mind 
 to disclose. lb. 242. A^Xoj rjv Kvpos a s (TrreiSav, it was evident (by 
 the conduct of Cyrus) that Cyrus was in haste. Xen. An. I, 5, 9. 
 narepa top trbv dyysXav as ovK er* ovra, (he comes) to announce that 
 your father is no more. Soph. O. T. 956. (In vs. 959, the messenger 
 himself says ev lad' enfivov Bavdtnpov ^e^rjitoTa.) 
 
 The force of as here can seldom be expressed in English. 
 
 (J.) The Participle thus joined with as may stand with its sub- 
 stantive in the genitive or accusative absolute. This sometimes 
 happens even when the substantive would naturally be the object 
 of the verb of knounng, &c., so that if the as were omitted, the ac- 
 cusative would be used (as in a). E. g. 
 
 'Qs hb* i\6vTav ravh* eirio'TaffBai tre ^pfj, you must understand 
 that this is so. Soph. Aj. 281. Here the genitive absolute has at 
 first the appearance of a dependent clause ; but ins does not mean 
 that, and the literal translation would be, this being so (as you may 
 assume), you must understand it to be so. (See Schueidewin's note 
 
232 THE PAKTICIPLE. [§ 113. 
 
 on the passage.) 'Or roivvv Svtuiv ravhi croi fiaBelv irapa, since this 
 is so, you may learn it, i. e. you may learn that Ms is so. Absch. 
 Prom. 760. 'Qs jroXe'fiov Svtos jra/S' vfimv airayyeXa ; shall I an- 
 nounce from you that there is war ? lit. assuming that there is war, 
 shall I announce it from you? Xen. An. II, 1, 21. 'Q,s iraw fioi 
 hoKovv, . . . OUT-IBS 'utBi, Icnow that I think so very decidedly, lit. sim:e 
 (as you must understand) this seems good to me, be sure of it. Id. 
 Mem. IV, 2, SO. 
 
 (c.) We sometimer find the Participle with is even after verbs 
 and expressions which do not regularly take the Participle by § 113. 
 E.g. 
 
 'Qs €fwv ovv toi/TO? OTTi; hv Koi vficls, ovTa Trjv yvafirjv t^^ere, he 
 of this opinion, that I shaU go, &c. Xen. An. I, 3, 6. So Thuc. VII, 
 15. 'Orav is jreTo/aeroi (v ™ vTrva SiavoSivrai, when in their sleep 
 they fancy themselves flying Plat. Theaet. 158 B. 'Oi roivvv fiij 
 OLKovarofievtav , ovras dtavoelade, make up your minds then that we 
 shall not hear, lit. since then (as you must know) we shall not hear, so 
 make up your minds. Plat Rep. I, 327 C. 'S2s <TTpaTT)yT)trovTa 
 ifte fitihfis \eyeTto, let no one speak of me as likely to be the general, 
 Xbn. An. I, 3, 15. OvTo) iK'mSiuxv, i>s t&x Sv, €i tv^oi, km tovtoiv 
 KUKfivav a-vfi^avrav, let us look at the case, assuming that both this 
 and that might perhaps happen if chance should have it so. Dem. 
 Aristoc. 638, 25. (Literally, sincf (ax we may assume) both this and 
 that might perhaps happen if it shomd chance t-< b.: sc, W us look at it 
 in this light.) For av, see §41,3. 
 
 Remark. The examples included m Tihte 1<! \V\ \ir*l ('.^ hJctig 
 properly under § 109, N. 4. (See aJao S i 10, 1, V. V ; t\4 \fce 'wt 
 example under § 110, 2, N. 1.) 
 
§ 114, 2.] VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -«or. 233 
 
 CHAPTER VII, 
 
 VERBAL ADJECTIATES IN -T609. 
 
 § 114. The verbal in -reo? is used both in & per- 
 sonal and an impersonal construction. 
 
 1. In the personal construction the verbal is always 
 passive in sense ; expressing necessity (like the Latin 
 Participle in -dus') and agreeing with its subject in case. 
 E.g. 
 
 'OtpeXriTfa (rot 17 noKis itrri, the city must be henefited by you. 
 Xen. Mem. Ill, 6, 3. "AXXas (i/air) eR t5>v ^viiiia\av fxeTanfji- 
 TTTeas clvai, ((<j>ri), he said that others must be sent for. Thuc. VI, 25. 
 Ov yap irpo T^y dXrjdelas Tifir/Tcos dvfip,d\\' o Xeya prjTeov. Plat. 
 Kep. X, 595 C. So VIII, 561 C. ^pa^ovres o>s oii frfpi TreptOTrreij 
 (ittI 1) 'EK\as diroWvpivri. IIdt. VII, 168. 
 
 Note. The substantive denoting the agent is here in the dative, 
 as in the impersonal construction. 
 
 2. In the impersonal construction (which is the most 
 common) the verbal stands in the neuter of the nom- 
 inative singular (sometimes plural) with eart' expressed 
 or understood, and is regularly active in sense. The 
 expression is equivalent to Set, it is necessary, with the 
 Infinitive active or middle of the verb from which the 
 verbal is derived. 
 
 Active verbals of this class may tjke an object in the 
 same case which would follow their verbs. The agent 
 is generally expressed by the dative, sometimes by the 
 accusative. E. g. 
 
 TavTa fiplv (or ^fiar) TroiTjTtoy earl, we must do this, equivalent 
 to ravra jjpas Set jroifjaat. (See Rem. 2.) Ola-Tiov rdSe, it is 
 necessary to bear these things. EuR. Orest. 769. 'AiraWaxTeov 
 avTov (tov <ra)paTos\ xal avTTJ ttj ^jn^xV Oeareou avrd ra Trpdypara, 
 Plat. Fhaed. 66 E. (Aet diraWuTTcardai airov, koX TJj ■<jfV}(g 
 
234 VEEBALS IN -T-f'or. [§ 114, 2. 
 
 Beaadat ra irpdy^ora.) (firnii Sfj BixV ^orjBtjTcov elvai toU irpa- 
 yuaaiv iifuv, that you must give assistance in two ways. Dem. 01. 1, 14, 6. 
 Ti 6.V avT^ TTOtrjTeov eit] ; what would Tie be obliged to do 1 Xbst. 
 Mem. I, 7, 2. 'E^cjliaavTO iro\efir)Tia elvai (==Seiv TroKf/iflv), 
 they voted that they must go to war. Thuc. I, 88. Tfiv x^P'^"' ^S ?s 
 avTois op^natxivois iroXe firjTca rjv. Id. VI, 50. Ovre fiiadoipO' 
 prjTfov aWovs tj Toils CTpaffVofievovs, oSrefifBc ktc ov rav izpa- 
 ypariov TrXeloaiv rj 7rei/raKt(T;(iXtotf. Id. VIII, 65. (Here both the 
 accusative and the dative of the agent are found.) See Rem. 2. 
 Hfilv 8e ^vppaxoi ayadott oils ov irapadoTea Tols ^ Adrjvalats eoriv, 
 ovde dUais Koi Xoyois diaKptrea p^ Xoyo) kol (^juap) aiiToiis ^ X a - 
 TTTopevovs', dWa Tipaprjrea eV rdxct Koi navrl adevei (=ouff oi 
 del ripds Trapadovvai^ K.T.X.y Id. I, 86. 'ireov hv etrj deatrop^vovSi 
 it would be best for us to go and see her. Xbn. Mem. Ill, 11, 1. 
 ('H/ias is understood.) Ovdevi rpoTro) f^aptv cKovras ddtiajreov eivai. 
 Plat. Crit. 49 A. 'Arap oi yvvaiKwv ovSenor c(rd' ijrri^rea ^/ilw 
 (^olyvvatKmv Sei fjTTcicrdai), but we must never be beaten by women. 
 Arist. Lys. 450. So Soph. Ant. 678. 
 
 Note. A sentence sometimes begins with an impersonal verbal 
 in -reov and is continued with an infinitive, the latter depending on 
 8ei implied in the verbal. E. g. 
 
 navraxov TroiijTeoi/ a &v Kekevri f) irSKis naX T] Trarpls, 5 ireiBeiv 
 avrriv. Plat. Crit. 51 B. 
 
 Eemark 1. Tlie same impersonal construction is found in 
 Latin, but very seldom with verbs which take an object accusa- 
 tive ; as Eundum est tibi (Ireov ea-rl <toi), — Mor'endum est omnibus, 
 — Belto utendum est nobis (ra no\epco xpriariov i(rnv rjpTtv), we must 
 employ war. See Madvig's Latin Grammar, § 421, a and 6). 
 
 Remark 2. The dative and the accusative of the agent are both 
 allowed with the verbal in -rt'oK (or -Tea) ; although in the equiva- 
 lent construction of del with the Infinitive the accusative is the only 
 form regularly used. Thus we can say tovto ij/t» » itoufrtov oi rovro 
 q/iat irou}r«>i>, but only rovro ^fias Stl jrouiv. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 I. On the Relations of the Greek Optative to thh 
 
 Subjunctive and the Indicative.* 
 
 From the time of the Alexandrian grammarians a special mood 
 called the Optative (eyieKuns evKTiKri) has been recognized in Greek 
 as distinct from the Subjunctive (cyxXto-is viroraKTiKri). The an- 
 cient classification has been called in question in later times, and 
 many grammarians of high authority have adopted or favored a 
 union of the Subjunctive and Optative in one mood, to be called 
 the Subjunctive or Conjunctive, in which the Subjunctive (com- 
 monly so called) is to supply the primary tenses, and the forma 
 commonly assigned to the Optative the secondary tense. Thus the 
 Present Optative would be called an Imperfect Subjunctive; Troui 
 and iroioT/ui, for example, being supposed to bear the same relation 
 to each other asfaciam anifacerem in Latin. 
 
 This was first reduced to a systematic form by Kiihner, who, in- 
 deed discards the common names Subjunctive and Optative (except 
 as explanatory terms), and adopts the cumbrous expressions " Con- 
 junctive of the primary tenses " and " Conjunctive of the secondary 
 tenses." Rost, in his Griechische Grammatik, § 118, says : " The so- 
 called Optative is nothing but a peculiar form of the Subjunctive, 
 and stands to the Greek Subjunctive in the same relation as in 
 other languages the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive to the 
 Present and Perfect." jDonaldson in his New Cratylus (p. 617, 2d 
 ed.) says : " It has long been felt by scholars on syntactical grounds, 
 that, considered in th^ir relations to each other and to the other 
 moods, they [the Subjunctive and Optative] must be regarded as 
 difiering in tense only." Again (p. 618) : " These moods have no 
 right to a separate classification." Crosby, in his Grammar, § 591, 
 says of this classification, that " it deserves the attention of the 
 student, although it is questionable whether it is best to discard the 
 old phraseology." 
 
 As the classification of Kiihner has been introduced into many 
 elementary grammars, so that many boys are now taught to call the 
 tenses commonly known as the Present and Perfect Optative by 
 the strange names of Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, the 
 
 * Reprinted, with a few changes, from the Proceedings of the American 
 Academy of Arts and Sciences for Jaa. 8, 1861 : Vol. Y. pp. 96 - 102. 
 
236 APPENDIX. 
 
 qnesftwn becomes not merely of theore'acal, but eminantly of prac- 
 tical importance. In fact it meets every student, and more espe- 
 cially every teacher of Greek grammar, the moment he reaches the 
 paradigm of the regular verb. If it were merely a question of con- 
 venience, therefore, it would be highly important to nave it settled, 
 for the sake of uniformity. 
 
 The question What shall constitute a distinct mood in any Ian- 
 gi'joge t must be settled to some extent arbitrarily. No precise rule 
 will meet all cases ; yet we may safely maintain that, when any 
 series of verbal forms in which the chief tenses are represented ex- 
 hibits a closer connection in form and use among its members than 
 it bears as a whole to any corresponding series, it is entitled to the 
 rank of an independent mood. That this is true of the Latin Sub- 
 junctive is clear; and it is equally clear that the Imperfect and 
 Pluperfect of that mood have sufficiently strong bonds of connection 
 with the Present and Perfect to prevent them from being marked 
 oif as a distinct mood. A merely superficial view of the relation of 
 the Greek Subjunctive and Optative might lead us to the idea that 
 the two combined would form a mood similar to the Latin Subjunc- 
 tive, thus simplifying the Greek conjugation and introducing a new 
 analogy with the Latin. But it is this fatal error of carrying the 
 analogy between the Greek and Latin further than the connection 
 of the two langua]»es warrants, which has thrown this whole subject 
 into confusion. When the Latin was looked upon as an oifspring 
 of the Greek, as the result of a union of the AeoUc dialect of Greece 
 with barbarian languages in Italy, the presumption was decidedly in 
 favor of such an analogy, and it would even have required strong 
 proof to convince us of any radical diiference in the modal systems 
 of the two languages. But the more correct views now entertained 
 of the origin of the Latin would rather lead us to believe that each 
 language developed its syntax, and especially its modal sjTstem, in- 
 dependently. The modal system of the parent language of the 
 Indo-European group is of course hopelessly unknown ; and yet the 
 comparison of the Latin and Greek verb with the Sanskrit (as the 
 oldest representative of the family) sometimes enables us to deter- 
 mine special points in regard to the primitive forms with an ap- 
 proach to certainty. Thus, to take the simplest case, when we find 
 asti in Sanskrit meaning js, we may be sure that some similar form 
 existed with that meaning in the parent language of the Sanskrit, 
 the Greek, the Latin, the German, &c., from which eori, est, ist, &c. 
 were derived. So when we find a JPotential mood in Sanskrit, 
 which presents striking analogies both to the Greek Optative and 
 to the Latin Subjunctive, and furthermore find the analogy extend- 
 ing even to the Gothic, we must conclude that the primitive lan- 
 guage contained the elements which the Greek developed into its 
 Optative, and the Latin into its Subjunctive. (See Bopp's Ver- 
 gleichende Grammatik, II. pp. 257 -"^SS.) Again, the absence in 
 later Sanskrit of any form corresponding to the Greek Subjunctive 
 might lead us to think that the Greek developed that mood by 
 
APPENDIX 237 
 
 itself; but in the Vedio dialect a few relics are found of a, true Sub- 
 junctive, with a long connecting-vowel as its characteristic; for 
 example, patdti, bearing the same relation to the Present Indicative 
 patati as j3ouXi;Tai to /SoiIXfrai. This seems to show that a similar 
 mood existed in the parent language. If this testimony can be 
 relied on, we must conclude, not only that the Latin and Greek 
 derived the rudiments of their modal forms from a common ances- 
 tor, but that they inherited them from a period anterior to the 
 separation of the Indian branch from the Indo-European family. 
 We should therefore expect to find that the elements are generally 
 the same in the two languages, but that the development is essen- 
 tially different ; and that the refinements in signification, for which 
 the Greek modal forms are especially conspicuous, have been for 
 the most part developed by each language within itself. 
 
 Let us now examine the forms themselves, to see how far a paral- 
 lel can be drawn betweeen the Greek and Latin moods. In clauses 
 expressing a purpose or object after Iva, ottcbs, &c., we certainly find 
 the Subjunctive and Optative used like primary and secondary 
 tenses of the same mood : thus where in Latin we have manet ui hoc 
 facial, and manebat ut hoc faceret, we have jUvei tva tovto votrj , and 
 ffifvev Iva TOVTO itoibi^. But even in this case of strongest resem- 
 blance there is no place for the Future Optative, which corresponds 
 to the Future Indicative. Again, in clauses expressing general sup- 
 positions after iav or cl, or after relatives or temporal particles, de- 
 pending on verbs which denote general truths or repeated actions, 
 a correlation of the Subjunctive and Optative is found, analogous 
 to that of the two divisions of the Latin Subjunctive ; for example, 
 in iav tovto itoifi 6av}ia(pv(Tiv, and ei tovto iroioirj eBavjia^ov, which 
 are sometimes represented in Latin by such forms as si hoc facial 
 mirantur, and si hoc faceret mirabantur, although generally the In- 
 dicative is preferred. Here, however, the analogy ceases, if we 
 except certain cases of indirect question hereafter to be noticed, 
 and a Homeric construction in relative sentences expressing a 
 purpose, which almost disappears from the more cultivated lan- 
 guage. 
 
 Let us turn now to the Optative in vnsJies; for here, if anywhere, 
 we may look for the primary meaning of this mood. From this use 
 it derives its name ; and especially this is its only regular use in 
 independent sentences, except in apodosis with Sv. Here some 
 have been so far misled by the supposed analogy of the Latin, as to 
 translate the Present Optative by the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive ; 
 but a slight examination will show that the Present and Aorist Op- 
 tative are here so far from being secondary tenses of the Subjunc- 
 tive, that they are equivalent to the Present Subjunctive in Latin, 
 and refer to the future, while the Greek Subjunctive cannot even 
 regularly stand in such expressions. Thus eWe eofv is uiinam sim, O 
 that I may be ; fidf yivoiro, utinam fat, that it may happen ; whereas 
 uiinam esset and utinam factttm esset correspond to tWt rfv and ti6* 
 iyivtTo. 
 
238 APPENDIX. 
 
 In ordinary protasis and apodosis the same relation is seen Ths 
 four Greek forms, eav TT 013, eai/ TTOt^o- 77, ei iroioiij, and el iroiij- 
 acie, find in the Latin Subjunctive only one equivalent, si facial. 
 (For the first two the Latin generally preferred the Future or 
 Future Perfect Indicative.) Here therefore the absurdity of classi- 
 fying the last two as secondary forms of the first two, in conformity 
 to a Latin analogy, is especially clear. What the Latin analogjr 
 would lead us to expect as secondary forms, the equivalents of si 
 fnceret and sifecisset, can be expressed in Greek only by the Indica- 
 tive. In apodosis the Optative with av is equivalent to the pri- 
 mary, not to the secondary, tenses of the Latin Subjunctive ; thus, 
 TToHjo-aijut av is equivalent to faciam (not ix> fecissem, which would be 
 (Voiijira av). Here likewise the Subjunctive cannot be used in 
 Attic Greek; This analogy between the Optative and the primary 
 tenses of the Latin Subjunctive might lead us even to the view that 
 the latter ought rather to be called an Optative, for which view 
 there are certainly much stronger reasons than for the opposite one 
 which we are considering. 
 
 An Homeric exception to the principles of the last two parar 
 graphs (explained in § 49, 2, Note 6, and § 82, Remark 2 of the 
 present work) has litde or no weight in this discussion; for, al- 
 though we find examples in which the Optative in conditional 
 sentences and wishes is used like the secondary tenses of the Latin 
 Subjunctive, the ordinary use of the Optative referring to the 
 future in those constructions is perfectly well established in the 
 Homeric language. It would be a mere gratuitous assumption to 
 maintain that the Exceptions (like H. V, 311 and 388) represent the 
 original idiom of the language. 
 
 In indirect quotations and questions the Optative is used after 
 past tenses, each tense of the Indicative or Subjunctive in tho 
 direct discourse being then changed to the corresponding tense ol 
 the Optative. Thus, elirev oi-t a divairo noirjaoi, he said that he would 
 do what he could, implies that the direct discourse was d av Siva- 
 fiai iroirja-a, I shall do what I may he able. Here the first Optative 
 IS the irrelative of the Subjunctive ; but it is quite as often the 
 correlative of the Indicative, as when we say emev Sti & Sivairo 
 woiotrj, he said that he was doing what he could, where the direct dis- 
 course is A bivaiiai Troiffl, / am doing what I am able. One tense 
 of the Optative, the Future, can never represent a Subjunctive, as 
 that mood has no corresponding tense ; but it always represents a 
 Future Indicative. Nothing more need be said to show the absurd- 
 ity of calling this tense a secondary tense of the Subjunctive. The 
 three remaining tenses of the Optative can with no more propriety 
 be called secondary tenses of the Subjunctive than of the Indicative, 
 for they represent both on precisely the same principles. This ig 
 especially obvious in regard to the Aorist, which has two distinct 
 meanings in indirect questions, — one when it represents an Aorist 
 Indicative, and another when it represents an Aorist Subjunctive, 
 the direct form. Thus, ^yi/oct W tt o t ^ cr c i e y may mean either ht 
 
APPENDIX. 239 
 
 hnno not what he had done, or he knew not what he should do ; as the 
 direct question may have been either ri iiroirjaa ; what did Idof or 
 ri iroirjaio ; (Aor. Subj.), what shall Idof Strangely enough, this 
 very class of sentences is supposed to furnish the most striking 
 analogy between the Latin Subjunctive and the Greek Subjunctive 
 and Optative combined. Non habet quo se vertat and non habebat quo 
 »e verteret are indeed equivalent to ovk e^ei otti; TpairriTai and ovk 
 nxov ojnj TpairoiTO, but a single example like ripaiTiav airou el ava- 
 irXeuo-fjei/, / asked him whether he had set sail (Dkm. in Polycl. p. 
 1223, 21), in which avairKeiaeiev represents an Aorist Indicative 
 (di/eVXfuo-ar ;) shows that the argument proves too much. Indirect 
 quotations and questions therefore afford us no more proof that the 
 Optative is a secondary form of the Subjunctive, than that it is a 
 secondary form of the Indicative. 
 
 Two tenses of the Indicative, the Imperfect and Pluperfect, have 
 no corresponding tenses in the Optative, so that these are regularly 
 retained in the Indieative in indirect discourae ; thus elnev on ijia- 
 ■j/ovTo means he said that they had been fighting, i. e. he said ifidxavTo. 
 A rare exception to the last principle shows conclusively the pro- 
 priety of the names commonly given to the tenses of the Optative. 
 The want of a tense in the Optative to represent the Imperfect 
 Indicative in examples like the last was naturally felt as a defect ; 
 and in the Infinitive and the Participle this want was supplied by 
 using the Present in a new sense to represent the Imperfect, the 
 peculiar use being always denoted by something in the context. 
 In a few instances we find the Present Optative used in the same 
 way to supply the want of an Imperfect, the context making it clear 
 that the tense is not used in its ordinary sense. Such an instance 
 is found in Dem. Onet. I, 869, 12 ; aneKpivavro otj oiSels pdprvs 
 jrapeirj, Kop.t^oiTO 8e \apl3dvaiv KaB' oiroaovovv deoiro *A0o^os 
 Trap' aiiTmv, they replied that no witness had been present, bvi that 
 Aphobus had received the money from them, taking it in such sums as 
 he happened to want. Here jrapeir] represents jraprjv, and Kopi^oiro 
 represents e'lcoftiffro, which would ordinarily be retained in such 
 a sentence. See § 70, 2, Note 1 (4) of the present work. If now the 
 name of Imperfect be given to the Present Optative in its ordinary 
 use, (when it represents a Present of the direct discourse, and is 
 merely translated by an Imperfect to suit the English idiom,) what 
 shall we call this true Imperfect Optative, which really repre- 
 sents an Imperfect Indicative, and stands where an Imperfect Indic- 
 ative is the regular form ? 
 
 We see than that the Optative was used in the whole class of con- 
 structions kr.own as oraiio obliqua, or indirect discourse, as the corre- 
 lative not merely of the Subjunctive, but also of the Indicative, and 
 that it possessed the power of expressing in an oblique form every 
 tense of both those moods in a manner of which the Latin presents 
 hardly a trace. In fact, this use of the Greek Optative presents 
 one of the most striking examples of the versatihty and flexibility 
 of the language, and of its wonderfiil adaptation to the expression 
 
240 APPENDIX 
 
 of the nicest shades of thought of which the human mind is capable. 
 This single use of the mood seems sufficient in itself to prevent us 
 from assigning to it the subordinate rank of a secondary form 
 attached to the Subjunctive. 
 
 II. On the Time denoted by the Tenses of the In- 
 finitive WHEN THET are PBBOEDED BY THE AkTICLE 
 AND HAVE A SCBJECT EXPRESSED. 
 
 The able and instructive treatise of Madvig on the two uses of 
 the Aorist Infinitive in Greek (in his Bemerkungen iiber einige 
 Puncte der griechischen Wortfugungslehre, published as a supplement 
 to his Syntax der griechischen Sprache) contains the earliest com- 
 plete statement of the ordinary uses of that tense. The same prin- 
 ciple, as far as it refers to indirect discourse, is clearly stated in 
 Sophocles's Greek Grammar (published in the same year, 1847). 
 But with these exceptions, no distinct statement had been made, 
 either in elementary grammars or in more elaborate treatises, of the 
 simple principle which distinguishes the use of the Aorist Infinitive 
 in /SouXfrai eWdv, he wishes to go, from that in ihtjaiv e\6eiv, he says 
 that he went. According to Madvig, however, the use of the Aorist 
 Infinitive as a past tense is not confined to indirect discourse, but 
 extends also to cases in which the Infinitive "has a subject ex- 
 pressed and at the same time is preceded by the article." This 
 principle was too hastily adopted, on Madvig's high authority, in 
 the first edition of the present work ; and, as there seemed no good 
 ground for distinguishing the Aorist from the Present Infinitive in 
 similar construction, the general principle was stated, that any tense 
 of the Infinitive could retain its designation of time (as In indirect 
 discourse) when it had at the same time the article and a subject. 
 The same class of sentences which seemed to confirm Madvig's view 
 of the Aorist furnished also examples of the Present, and the use of 
 this tense as an Imperfect made an exception here almost im- 
 possible. 
 
 A more careful review of all the examples quoted by Madvig, and 
 of all that I have met with in reading since adopting his principle, 
 has convinced me that the Aorist Infinitive here presents no pecu- 
 liarity, and that it differs from the Present only in the ordinary 
 way, by referring to a single or momentary act rather than to a 
 repeated or continued act. The single example quoted by Madvig 
 in his Syntax (§ 172) to support his principle Is Dem. F. L. p 360, 
 10, § 61 : tA liriSi/iiav rav n6\(a>v dXmvat TToXiopKif fuyurr6u fori 
 arifif lov rou 6ia roirovs iretcrSevTas avTous ravra naSelv, the fact 
 that no one of the cities was taken by siege is the greatest proof that they 
 
APPENDIX. 241 
 
 tuffered (hese things, &c. In the later treatise he adds Thuc. I, 
 41, TO 8i fijias UeXoTrowTjiriovs airois /ifj fio7]9ij<rai, — Xen. Mem. 
 1, 2, 1, Cyr. II, 2, 3, IV, 5, 12, — Dem. Chera. p. 105, 28; § 65,— 
 and Akist. Nub. 268. It will be seen that all these examples can 
 be explained by the ordinary principle of the Aorist Infinitive stated 
 above ; that is, the Infinitive is a mere verbal noun, designating no 
 time of itself, and is referred to special time only by the context, 
 which in these examples happens to refer it to the past. But when 
 the Infinitive with tov expresses a purpose (where Madvig himself 
 admits an exception), it is referred by the context or by the general 
 meaning of the passage to the fliture : so in the following example 
 from Dem. Cor. p. 236, 20, § 33, where on Madvig's principle the 
 Infinitive must refer to the past: ^v eu (j)oPa fiti, d npb tov tovs 
 *owceas drro\e<TBai iJ^ijc^iWht^e ^orfBeiv, CKCpvyoi ra npayfiar avTov, 
 lie was in fear lest, if before the Phocians should be destroyed you 
 should vote to assist them, he might lose control of the business. 
 
 Other cases in which the Aorist Infinitive might seem to retain 
 its force as a past tense are satisfactorily explained by Madvig. 
 On the whole, it would be difficult to establish an exception to the 
 general principle, that the Aorist Infinitive is a past tense only in 
 indirect discourse, when it represents an Aorist Indicative after 
 verbs at saying, thinking, &c. 
 
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES 
 
 ADDED IN THE THIRD AND TOUKTH EDITIONS. 
 
 Aeschikes. 
 
 Pago 
 
 HOMEE. 
 
 Page 
 
 Eepnb. IV, 434 A 
 
 Po«. 
 
 115 
 
 In Ctes. § 10 . 
 
 168 
 
 11. XI, 21 . 
 
 171 
 
 V, 450 A 
 
 168 
 
 \ 114 . 
 
 207 
 
 Odyss. II, 270 
 III, 92 . 
 
 36 
 115 
 
 
 
 
 
 IV, 167 
 
 138 
 
 Sophocles. 
 
 
 Aristophanes. 
 
 
 V, 216 . 
 
 171 
 
 Elect. 47 
 
 171 
 
 Vesp. 109 . 
 
 64 
 
 VI, 113 
 
 . 77 
 
 943 . 
 
 227 
 
 
 
 XI, 489 . 
 
 129 
 
 1478 
 
 171 
 
 
 
 XUI, 309 
 
 171 
 
 Oed. Col. 1770 . 
 Philoot. 232 . 
 
 116 
 171 
 
 Demosthenes. 
 
 
 
 
 Trachin. 934 . 
 
 171 
 
 De Falsa Leg;atione. 
 
 
 Plato. 
 
 
 
 
 p. 891, 11. § 159 
 
 99 
 
 Apol. 30 D . 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 
 
 Gorg. 498 A 
 
 214 
 
 Xenophon. 
 
 
 EUEIPIDES. 
 
 
 Protag. 310 A 
 
 313 C . 
 
 26 
 79 
 
 Mem. IV, 3, 1 
 
 7» 
 
 Alcest. 386 . 
 
 26 
 
 817 A 
 317 D . 
 
 208 
 26 
 
 
 
 ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES (1873). 
 
 Page 
 
 Aeschines, in Ctes. § 60 143 
 
 Demosthenes, De Corona, p. 255, 2, § 88 . . . 8 
 
 Herodotus, III, 31 144 
 
 Homer, II. I, 22 190 
 
 Plato, Men. 72 C 66 
 
 " Grit. 51 B 234 
 
 SoPHOCLKS, A. j. 1183 143 
 
 Thucydidks, IV^ 16 143 
 
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 Abschihes. 
 In Timarch. — 
 
 § 99 . 
 
 § 125 
 
 ^ 127 . 
 De Falsa Legat. — 
 
 M . . 
 
 ^ 145 (153) 
 
 § 151(160). 
 In Ctesiph. — 
 
 §2 . . 
 
 U • . 
 
 § 90 . 
 5 110 
 ^ 123 . 
 U47 . 
 § 177 . 
 § 248 
 
 Aeschylus, 
 Agam 15 
 37 . 
 160 
 
 253 . 
 
 340 
 
 684 . 
 
 620 
 
 857 . 
 
 944 
 
 1041 . 
 
 1067 
 
 1079 . 
 
 1170 
 
 1435 . 
 Gtioeph. 246 
 594 
 Eum. 298 
 
 573 . 
 
 691 . 
 
 800 . 
 Pers. 912 
 Prom 10 . 
 
 152 
 
 Page 
 
 25 
 149 
 135 
 
 145 
 149 
 149 
 
 61 
 
 137 
 
 7 
 
 162 
 
 118 
 
 99 
 120 
 185 
 227 
 
 202 
 
 105 
 
 135 
 
 198 
 
 63 
 
 188 
 
 106 
 
 6 
 
 92,93 
 
 35 
 
 211 
 
 ,195 
 
 202 
 
 128 
 
 178 
 
 106 
 
 62 
 
 69 
 
 201 
 
 181 
 
 184 
 
 69 
 
 72 
 
 Pngo 
 
 
 Phot 
 
 Prom. 165 . . 145 
 
 Appian. 
 
 203 . . 77 
 
 Bell. Civ. II, 91 . 24 
 
 248 . . 199 
 292 . . 106 
 332 . . 181 
 
 Aeistophahes. 
 Acharn. 312 . . 37 
 
 470 . . 155 
 
 816 
 
 209 
 
 481 . . 145 
 
 Aves, 86 
 
 . 202 
 
 697 . . 143 
 
 64 . 
 
 179 
 
 712 . . 209 
 
 120 
 
 . 115 
 
 747 . . 73 
 
 180 . 
 
 106 
 
 760 . . 232 
 
 280 
 
 8 
 
 786 . . 202 
 
 448 . 
 
 209 
 
 824 . . 69 
 
 461 
 
 . 185 
 
 835 . . 114 
 
 769 (761) . 
 
 37,93 
 
 866 . . 191 
 
 964 
 
 . 211 
 
 905 . . 157 
 
 1187 . 
 
 179 
 
 907 . 167, 221 
 
 1360 
 
 . 20 
 
 918 .. . 202 
 
 ■1376 . 
 
 110 
 
 930 . . 43 
 
 1494 
 
 . 83 
 
 979 11, 61, 106 
 
 1608 . 
 
 69 
 
 1004 . . 181 
 
 1679 
 
 34 
 
 1049 . . 175 
 
 Eccles. 236 
 
 194 
 
 1051 . . 175 
 
 297 . 
 
 79 
 
 Sept. 38 . . 184 
 195 . . Ill 
 
 496 
 Equit. 112 . 
 
 68 
 
 82 
 
 250 . 37, 187 
 253 . . 209 
 
 696. 
 698 . 
 
 25 
 105 
 
 429 . . 33 
 
 Lysistr. 450 
 
 234 
 
 462 . . 23 
 
 511 . 
 
 47 
 
 712 . . 220 
 
 Nubes, 6 . 
 
 63 
 
 720 . . 86 
 
 63 
 
 7 
 
 754 . . 35 
 
 116 . .5 
 
 1,118 
 
 790 . . 86 
 
 125 
 
 6 
 
 1037 . . 221 
 
 229 . 
 
 112 
 
 1048 . . 211 
 
 268 
 
 209 
 
 1057 . . 184 
 
 296 . 18 
 
 6,187 
 
 Suppl. 499 . . 46 
 Andocides. 
 
 340 
 367 . 
 370 
 
 221 
 186 
 223 
 
 Myst. I, 6, 38. § 43 68 
 
 439 . 
 
 126 
 
 Ahtiphon. 
 
 493 
 505 . 
 
 83 
 186 
 
 De Oaed. Herod. 
 
 520 
 
 174 
 
 p. 131, 36. 4 19 . 126 
 
 536 . 
 
 166 
 
 133, 40. § 87 . 7 
 
 613 
 
 181 
 
244 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 Nube9,723 
 792 
 819 
 901 
 1130 
 1141 
 1151 
 1260 
 1256 
 1277 
 1301 
 13S2 
 1383 
 1426 
 1433 
 1436 
 1466 
 Pac. 430 
 1179 
 Plut. 210 
 603 
 1027 
 Ran. 1 . 
 68 
 
 96&»8 
 
 298 
 
 462 . 
 
 608, 609 
 
 524 
 
 679 
 
 686 
 
 695 
 
 830 
 
 866 
 
 871 
 
 955 
 
 1120 
 
 1126 
 
 1378 
 
 1448 
 
 1449 
 
 1469 
 
 Tiesm. 372 
 
 870 
 
 Veep. 283 
 
 397 . 
 
 208 
 110 
 21C 
 110 
 42 
 33 
 184 
 129 
 174 
 
 37 
 . Ill 
 23 
 . 112 
 21,43 
 . 68 
 
 194 
 . 130 
 
 227 
 
 . 184 
 
 44 
 
 . 182 
 
 191 
 . 139 
 
 186 
 . 186 
 35, 186 
 . 186 
 93 
 51, 103 
 
 199 
 
 . 113 
 
 99 
 
 . 178 
 
 177 
 . 68 
 
 179 
 . 178 
 
 136 
 . 117 
 
 142 
 . 179 
 
 181 
 . 154 
 
 186 
 
 Demosthksbb. 
 Olynth. 
 
 I. p. 9, 3, § 1 . , 172 
 
 9, 17. § 2 . 80 
 
 10, 1. 4 2 . 137 
 
 12, 3. § 10 23, 203 
 
 12, 22. § 12 . 12 
 
 13, 16. ^ 15 . 140 
 13, 2B. ^16 . . 191 
 
 13, 27. i 16 . 12 
 
 14, 6. § 17 . 234 
 16, 6 J 20 . 122 
 16, 22. \ 22 . 164 
 
 I.p.15, 28. §23. 198 
 16, 3. § 23 . 188 
 16, 25. § 26 51, 118 
 
 II. p. 20, 12. § 8 . 169 
 
 20,18. §8 113,157 
 
 20, 27. § 9 45, 131 
 
 21, 1. § 10 . 45 
 21, 10. § 11 137 
 21,20. §12 10,108 
 23, 14. § 18 47 
 23, 27. § 20 . 189 
 
 23, 29. § 20 194 
 
 24, 12. § 22 . 196 
 
 24, 23. § 23 120 
 26, 2. § 24 . 120 
 26, 19. § 26 141 
 
 25, 24. § 26 . 188 
 m. p. 28, 6. § 1 . 197 
 
 29, 18. § 3 . 197 
 30, 10. § 6 71 
 
 31, 1. § 9 . 42 
 
 31, 11. § 10 181 
 
 32, 16. § 14 . Ill 
 34, 8. § 20 216 
 
 34, 17. § 21 . 15 
 
 35, 1. § 23 216 
 85, 18. § 25 . 23 
 
 Philipp. 
 I. p. 40, 1. § 1 . 144 
 40, 9. § 1 . 96 
 
 40, 18. § 2 . 83 
 
 41, 3. § 3 . 134 
 
 41, 18. § 6 . 95 
 
 42, 1. § 6 . 10, 130 
 
 43, 12. § 11 . H9 
 
 44, 12. § 15 . Ill 
 44, 26. § 17 . 49 
 
 44, 30. § 18 . 107 
 
 45, 27. § 21 . 128 
 47, 24. § 27 . 136 
 61, 19. § 39 . 128 
 
 62. 17. § 43 . 120 
 
 53, 4. § 44 . 184 
 
 64. 18. § 50 . 161 
 
 54, 20. i 50 . 103 
 54, 22. § 50 . 44 
 
 64, 27. § 51 . 181 
 
 65, 6 & 7. § 61 126, 
 
 174 
 n, p. 66, 15. § 3 70, 140 
 
 67, 20. 4 8 139 
 
 68, 12. § 11 206 
 
 69, 6. § 13 13 
 
 70, 25. § 20 114 
 
 70, 26. § 20 I „ ,, 
 10 71,12 j^^'^^ 
 
 71, 4. § 20 63 
 
 72, 26. § 29 62 
 74, 24. § 87 140 
 
 III. p. 110, in 208 
 
 UI.p.ll4, 15. §16 
 114, 20. § 15 
 
 122, 21. § 45 
 123, 1. § 46 
 
 123, 16. § 48 
 
 124, 25. § 64 
 
 124, 24. § 64 
 
 125, 10. § 66 
 • 126, 19. § 61 
 
 128,22.§69 
 
 128, 26. § 69 
 
 129, 14. § 71 
 
 130, 11. § 75 
 130, 14. § 75 
 
 De Corona, 
 p. 225, 13. § 1 
 232, 20. § 22 . 
 234, 6. § 26 
 234, 6. § 26 . 
 234, 26. § 28 
 236, 12. § 32 . 
 236, 19. § 33 
 236, 20. § 33 . 
 236, 28. § 34 
 
 240, 16. § 43 . 
 
 241, 16. § 47 
 
 242, 10. $ 49 . 
 
 243, 6. § 53 
 246, 1. § 63 . 
 261, 28. § 79 
 257, 26. § 95 . 
 260, 2. § 101 
 268, 23. § 123 . 
 268, 28. § 124 
 274, 28. § 141 . 
 276, 1. § 146 
 276, 23. § 148 . 
 284, 21. § 169 
 591,27. § 190. 
 291, 28. § 190 
 296, 13. § 201 . 
 296, 24. § 206 
 
 301, 28. §220. 
 
 302, 24. § 223 
 S04, 1. § 228 . 
 313, 4. § 268 
 SIS, 6. § 268 . 
 327, 1. § 303 
 331, 30. § 322 . 
 
 De Falsa Legatione. 
 p. 341, 12. § 1 
 
 341, 14. § 2 
 
 342, 2. § 3 . 
 342, 10. § 3 
 342, 25. 
 842, 28. 
 345, 14. 
 S45, 27. 
 347, 26. 
 
 n 
 
 17 
 217 
 183 
 
 60 
 
 84 
 155 
 
 80 
 
 194 
 
 27, 130 
 
 80 
 112 
 184 
 
 82 
 
 . 227 
 
 221 
 
 . 161 
 
 197 
 
 . 214 
 
 75 
 
 . 28 
 
 31,240 
 
 . Ill 
 
 113 
 
 . 187 
 
 111 
 
 . 195 
 
 98 
 
 . 95 
 
 215 
 
 . 101 
 
 36 
 
 . 183 
 
 119 
 
 . 115 
 
 163 
 
 . 151 
 
 16 
 
 . 119 
 
 31 
 
 . 117 
 
 213 
 
 . 117 
 
 111 
 
 . 68 
 
 87 
 
 6 
 
 228 
 
 71 
 
 20 
 . 42 
 
 20 
 . 22C 
 
 22 
 
 61, 134 
 
 20,43 
 
 22, 168 
 
INDEX 10 THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 245 
 
 p. 850, 3. § '29 . 131 
 351, 4. i 32 . 6 
 361, 18. 6 33 . 168 
 852,26.4 37 . 158 
 
 853. 14 & 18. §39 158 
 
 853, 24. §40 • 49 
 
 854, 8. § 41 . 161 
 
 855. 17. H5 • 79 
 
 855, 29. § 47 . 197 
 856, 10. I 48 . 158 
 856, 13. { 48 . 157 
 857, 3. § 51 . 64 
 860, 10. § 61 . 240 
 864, 11 & 12. & 74 88, 
 
 112 
 
 864. 18. i 74 45, 158 
 864, 25. § 75 . 215 
 869, 12. 4 88 ' . 183 
 870, 22. 1 94 . 79 
 872, 1. § 99 . 84 
 878, 4. § 120 . 155 
 878, 23. § 122 . 151 
 379, 2. § 123 . 98 
 379, 7. i 123 . 200 
 
 879. 15 & 17. §124 13, 
 
 158 
 
 881. 5. § 129 . 17 
 881, 10. § 130 IS, 158 
 
 887. 6. § 148 . 15 
 
 887, 17. § 149 . 199 
 888, 4. § 150 . 14 
 
 888, 9. § 161 . 27 
 888, 17. § 151 . 165 
 890, 5. § 156 . 64 
 892, 13. § 163 . 202 
 896, 30. § 177 24, 160 
 402, 8. § 195 . 193 
 
 409, 25. § 221 . 188 
 
 410, 18. § 223 . 199 
 410, 28. § 223 . 23 
 412, 21. § 229 31, 197 
 416, 7. §240 182,133 
 416, 11. § 240 . 166 
 419, 28. § 250 . 74 
 434, 6. § 289 . 86 
 439, 3. § 305 . 15 
 439, 29. § 309 . 141 
 441, 21. §812. 59 
 460, 27. § 342 . 60 
 
 De Pace, 
 p, 62, 10. § 20 199, 201 
 
 De Ghersoneso. 
 
 p. 90, 1. § 1 . . 98 
 
 92, 21. § 11 . 198 
 
 I 98, 25. § 85 , 205 
 
 99, 14. § 38 . 79 
 
 De STmmoriis. 
 
 p 178, 17. § 2 .44 
 
 182, 3. § 14. . 225 
 
 De Ehodiis. 
 
 
 p. 197, 9. § 23 
 
 . 88 
 
 De Megalopo 
 
 , 
 
 p. 202, 24. § 4 
 
 . 62 
 
 203, 12. § 5 . 
 
 52 
 
 207, 5. § 19 
 
 75 
 
 In Leptinem 
 
 
 p. 495, 20. § 127 
 
 . 221 
 
 496, 8. § 129 . 
 
 113 
 
 505, 9. § 157 
 
 74 
 
 606, 19. § 158 . 
 
 193 
 
 In Midiam. 
 
 
 p. 622, 18. § 24 
 
 196 
 
 625, 3. § 33 
 
 98 
 
 625, 11. § 34 
 
 27 
 
 630, 10. § 49 . 
 
 214 
 
 635, 15. § 64 
 
 126 
 
 636, 1. § 66 
 
 161 
 
 636, 25. § 69 
 
 123 
 
 648, 17. § 104 . 
 
 161 
 
 648, 20. § 104 
 
 161 
 
 548, 24. § 105 . 
 
 168 
 
 663, 26. § 151 
 
 77 
 
 582, 2. § 209 . 
 
 210 
 
 582, 16. § 211 
 
 181 
 
 In Androtionei 
 
 a. 
 
 p, 693, 14. § 2 
 
 161 
 
 596,17. 11 . 
 
 72 
 
 598, 20. 17 
 
 113 
 
 600, 6. § 22 . 
 
 187 
 
 611, 10. § 59 
 
 151 
 
 613, 3. § 64 . 
 
 183 
 
 In Aristooratei 
 
 n. 
 
 p. 623, 11. § 7 . 
 
 49, 73 
 
 624, 20. § 12 
 
 162 
 
 627, 21. § 22 . 
 
 209 
 
 629, 2. § 26 
 
 193 
 
 635, 15. § 48 . 
 
 127 
 
 638, 25. § 68 
 
 232 
 
 640, 10. § 62 . 
 
 74 
 
 641, 9. § 64 
 
 228 
 
 659, 15. § 117 . 
 
 37 
 
 676, 12. § 167 . 
 
 202 
 
 683, 22. § 188 
 
 197 
 
 688, 27. 205 . 
 
 201 
 
 In Timooraten 
 
 
 p.702, 26. §9 
 
 ' 199 
 
 711, 8. § 35 . 
 
 lis 
 
 721, 6. § 64 
 
 22 
 
 733, 20. § 106 . 
 
 75 
 
 In Aristog. I. 
 
 
 p. 773, 1. § 11 
 
 87 
 
 In Aphobum. 
 
 
 I,p.813,4. §1 . 
 
 205 
 
 813, 20. § i . 
 
 205 
 
 814, 4. § 8 
 
 123 
 
 828, 23. § 48 
 
 49 
 
 I, p. 828, 25, 26. §49 29, 
 
 152 
 
 829, 28. § 52 . 104 
 
 830, 8. § 53 . 120 
 
 831, 5. § 56 . 165 
 831, 10-12. §56 69, 
 
 62, 168 
 
 833, 12-19. § 63 96 
 
 834, 18. § 66 . 156 
 
 834, 24, 25. § 67 104, 
 
 123 
 
 II, p. 837, 10. § 5 . 218 
 
 837, 11. § 6 72 
 
 839, 29. § 14 . 218 
 842, 9. § 20 176 
 842, 14, 16. § 21 49, 
 104 
 842, 16. § 21 . 126 
 
 III, p. 846, 15. § 6 123 
 - 849, 24. § 17 72 
 
 862, 12. § 26 204 
 
 In Onetorem I. 
 
 p. 865, 24. § 7 . 163 
 
 867, 1. § 10 . 20 
 
 869, 9 & 10. § 19 153, 
 
 164 
 
 869, 12. § 20 153, 239 
 
 869, 18. § 20 . 60 
 
 870, 11. § 23 . 161 
 870, 27. § 25 . 161 
 873, 8. § 33 . 24 
 873, 10. § 33 . 211 
 
 In Zenothemin. 
 p. 886, 1. § 14 . 34, 222 
 
 In Apatnrinm. 
 p. 900, 22. § 26 . 199 
 903, 22. § 34 . 142 
 
 In Phaenippnm. 
 p. 1040, 20. § 6 . 40 
 
 In Olympiodorum. 
 p. 1172, 1. § 16 . 166 
 
 In Timotheum. 
 p. 1194, 13. § 35 . 165 
 1194, 20. § 35 68, 158 
 1201, 19. § 68 . 101 
 
 In Polyolem. 
 
 p. 1210, 5. § 12 . 224 
 
 1223, 20, 21. §66 29, 
 
 151, 239 
 
 1227, 2. § 67 . 165 
 
 De Coron. Trieraroh. 
 p. 1228, 28. § 8 . 98 
 
 In EubuUdeiu, 
 
 p. 1299, 4. § 1 . 230 
 
 1300, 8. § 3 . 58 
 
 1303, 2. § 11 ,, 160 
 
246 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPtBS. 
 
 p. 1803, 22. ( U . 163 
 1803, 25. 4 16 27, 123 
 1312, 17. \ 41 20, 106 
 1319, 8. ^ 65 . 34 
 1820, 25. § 70 . 105 
 
 DiHARCHUS. 
 
 In Demosth. p. 91, 24 72 
 
 Euclid. 
 1,8 . . .21 
 
 EURIFIDBS. 
 
 Alcest. 11 
 62 . 
 671 
 755 . 
 768 
 784 . 
 801 
 1072 . 
 Androm. 61 
 883 
 767 
 929 
 Baoch. 843 
 719 
 Cyol. 181 
 £lect. 126 . 
 83S 
 484 . 
 962 
 967 . 
 1039 
 1061 . 
 1124 
 Hecub. 112 
 730 
 836 
 839 
 863 
 1042 
 1056 
 1099 
 1138 
 Heracl. 248 
 461 
 731 
 791 
 
 Here. Fnr. 638 
 
 60S 
 
 746 
 
 1069 
 
 1417 
 
 Hippol. 846 
 
 893 . 
 667 
 60S . 
 1807 
 1410 . 
 Ion. 1660 . 
 
 11 
 
 199 
 106 
 26, 108 
 '^ 108 
 142 
 150 
 208 
 176 
 
 86 
 179 
 186 
 106 
 166 
 183 
 179 
 176 
 214 
 
 66 
 179 
 
 37 
 184 
 176 
 
 38 
 231 
 205 
 175 
 
 62 
 
 93 
 183 
 182 
 182 
 
 81 
 
 86 
 179 
 186 
 
 86 
 
 7 
 
 212 
 
 33 
 180 
 183 
 190 
 
 30 
 180 
 186 
 219 
 174 
 6 
 
 Iph. Aul. 462 
 1478 
 Iph. Taur. 688 
 996 
 1014 
 1108 
 1203 
 Med. 1 
 83 . 
 79 
 
 90 . 
 941 
 1161 (1120) 
 1173 
 1320 . 
 Orest. 379 . 
 418 . 
 680 . 
 746 . 
 
 769 . 
 
 770 . 
 1132 . 
 1629 . 
 
 Phoeniss. 92 
 604 . 
 896 
 1590 
 1624 . 
 Snppl. 1066 . 
 
 1034 
 Troad. 874 . 
 
 38 
 
 204 
 
 224 
 
 86 
 
 31 
 
 5 
 
 17J 
 
 177 
 
 229 
 
 211 
 
 229 
 
 186, 187 
 
 146 
 
 . 37 
 
 141 
 
 185 
 
 221 
 
 227 
 
 233 
 
 80 
 
 119 
 
 81 
 
 84 
 
 217 
 
 184 
 
 186 
 
 220 
 
 185 
 
 119 
 
 203 
 
 Aeg. Frag. 6 . .104 
 Alomen-Frag. 103 194 
 
 Beller. " 
 
 Ino, 
 
 294 92 
 
 417 126 
 
 424 46 
 
 442 72 
 
 443 220 
 Frag. Inoert. 1057 46 
 
 Hippal. 
 
 iippa 
 
 Herodotus. 
 
 Ill 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 11 
 
 22 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 80 
 
 31 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 82 
 
 32 
 
 83 
 
 34 
 
 . 210 
 
 113 
 
 . 219 
 
 6 
 
 . 74 
 
 86 
 
 . 180 
 
 14 
 
 . 210 
 
 151 
 
 . 14 
 
 29, 161 
 
 . 141 
 
 104 
 
 . 145 
 
 209 
 
 . 141 
 
 215 
 
 1,36 
 
 37 
 89 
 42 
 44 
 44 
 44 
 61 
 63 
 67 
 68 
 68 
 69 
 75 
 77 
 
 84 . 
 
 85 
 
 89 . 
 
 94 
 
 99 . 
 118 
 129 . 
 136 
 153 . 
 165 
 166 . 
 171 
 187 . 
 190 
 199 . 
 209 
 
 II, 2 . 
 13 
 
 16 . 
 26 
 
 64 . 
 66 
 
 115 . 
 121 
 126 . 
 136 
 143 . 
 146 
 150 . 
 168 
 162 . 
 172 
 
 III, 26 
 36 
 66 
 62 
 76 
 83 
 
 106 
 108 
 116 
 119 
 138 
 
 69 
 
 107 
 
 98,99 
 
 43 
 
 . 169 
 
 172 
 
 . 227 
 
 207 
 
 6 
 
 142 
 
 7 
 
 172 
 
 . 7 
 
 69 
 
 . 227 
 
 228 
 
 . 150 
 
 227 
 
 6 
 
 195 
 
 . 193 
 
 69 
 
 29, 161 
 
 193 
 
 145 
 
 208 
 
 81 
 
 212 
 
 131 
 
 94 
 
 223 
 
 184 
 
 202 
 
 211 
 
 47, 131 
 
 207 
 
 207 
 
 193 
 
 225 
 
 171 
 
 164 
 
 207 
 
 141 
 
 142 
 
 219 
 
 131 
 
 219 
 
 S3 
 
 193 
 
 230 
 
 74 
 
 193 
 
 185 
 
 20 
 
 140 
 
 193 
 
 193 
 
 170 
 
 48 
 
 194 
 
INDSX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 247 
 
 111,139 
 IV, 46 
 
 78 , 
 118 
 118 , 
 118 
 136 
 156 
 181 
 Y,25 . 
 49 
 
 101 . 
 VI, 9 
 12 
 23 
 27 
 46 
 49 
 60 
 
 101 
 
 108 
 
 136 
 
 vn, 6 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 18 
 
 63 
 
 61 
 
 111 
 
 163 
 
 161 
 
 168 
 
 168 
 
 213 
 
 Vill, 22 . 
 36 
 
 100. 
 
 113 
 IX, 12 . 
 
 91 
 
 67 . 
 
 61 
 
 Op. 1 
 
 M 
 
 13 
 18 
 20 
 26 
 27 
 28 
 20 
 32 
 66 
 
 Hesiod. 
 
 HOMBK. 
 
 Iliiid. 
 
 7 
 
 1,60 . 
 
 183 
 
 61 . 
 
 18 
 
 66 
 
 36 
 
 81 . 
 
 97 
 
 82 
 
 181 
 
 107 . 
 
 227 
 
 118 
 
 169 
 
 120 . 
 
 206 
 
 128 
 
 201 
 
 132 . 
 
 221 
 
 136 
 
 201 
 
 136 . 
 
 200 
 
 137 . 
 
 195 
 
 189 . 
 
 218 
 
 160 . 
 
 130 
 
 161 . 
 
 116 
 
 159 
 
 169 
 
 161 . 
 
 227 
 
 163 . 
 
 218 
 
 166 . 
 
 212 
 
 171 . 
 
 223 
 
 178 . 
 
 174 
 
 191 . 
 
 146 
 
 198 . 
 
 228 
 
 218 . 
 
 138 
 
 281 . 
 
 181 
 
 232 
 
 146 
 
 242 . 
 
 227 
 
 214 
 
 140 
 
 256 . 
 
 201 
 
 258 
 
 228 
 
 262 . 
 
 233 
 
 302 
 
 166 
 
 322 . 
 
 31 
 
 324 
 
 81 
 
 338 . 
 
 121 
 
 344 
 
 19 
 
 35S . 
 
 199 
 
 863 
 
 211 
 
 408 . 
 
 199 
 
 132 
 
 228 
 
 137, 439 
 
 219 
 
 465 . 
 
 19 
 
 493 . 
 
 
 498 . 
 
 8 
 
 609 . 
 
 618 
 
 
 622 . 
 
 
 624 
 
 201 
 172 
 217 
 171 
 209 
 181 
 227 
 10 
 
 665 . 
 668 , 
 661 . 
 680 . 
 682 . 
 686 
 689 . 
 601 . 
 
 116 
 
 11,3 . 
 
 69 
 
 8 . 
 
 171 
 
 10 . 
 
 67, 
 
 67, 
 
 107 
 
 93 
 
 116 
 
 109 
 
 121, 141 
 
 196 
 
 68 
 
 170 
 
 102 
 
 172 
 
 111 
 
 77 
 
 101, 161 
 
 56 
 
 , 183 
 
 201 
 
 , 217 
 
 168 
 
 . 133 
 
 108 
 
 66,78 
 
 92 
 
 . 165 
 
 122 
 
 . 181 
 
 172 
 
 . 110 
 
 128 
 
 . 172 
 
 105 
 
 . 196 
 
 181 
 
 . 112 
 
 178 
 
 101, 182 
 
 203 
 
 . 71 
 
 98 
 
 . 180 
 
 115 
 
 . 25 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 122 
 
 . 227 
 
 143 
 
 . 123 
 
 68 
 
 68, 112 
 
 80 
 
 78 
 
 92 
 
 . 114 
 
 209 
 
 . 221 
 
 196 
 
 . 216 
 
 76 
 
 . 178 
 
 209 
 
 II, 36 . . 
 
 38 
 
 43,45 
 
 . . 7 
 
 80. 
 
 loa- 
 
 106, 107 
 
 8 
 
 107, 108 . 
 
 203 
 
 119 . 
 
 . 196 
 
 127. . 
 
 203 
 
 139 . 
 
 10, 128, 179 
 
 182. 
 
 201 
 
 214 . 
 
 . 201 
 
 236. 
 
 . 179 
 
 260 . 
 
 . 112 
 
 262. 
 
 77 
 
 259 . 
 
 . 171 
 
 290. 
 
 190 
 
 322 . 
 
 . 113 
 
 331. 
 
 178 
 
 364 . 
 
 . 102 
 
 381 
 
 . 67 
 
 435 . 
 
 . 180 
 
 666. 
 
 228 
 
 780 . 
 
 . 222 
 
 791. 
 
 168 
 
 Ill, 28 . 
 
 . 33 
 
 61 
 
 182 
 
 110 . 
 
 . 76 
 
 180 
 
 18 
 
 192 . 
 
 . 178 
 
 191 
 
 197 
 
 281 . 
 
 . 102 
 
 288 
 
 101 
 
 291 . 
 
 . 143 
 
 817 
 
 165 
 
 366 . 
 
 . 33 
 
 128 
 
 177 
 
 169 . 
 
 . 139 
 
 IV 19 
 
 175 
 
 176 . 
 
 . 55 
 
 191 
 
 138 
 
 234 . 
 
 . 180 
 
 238 
 
 128 
 
 249 . 
 
 . Hi 
 
 313 
 
 175 
 
 321 . 
 
 . 92 
 
 335 
 
 168 
 
 401 . 
 
 . 180 
 
 418 
 
 179 
 
 182 . 
 
 . 133 
 
 V, 66 
 
 19 
 
 85 . 
 
 . 58, 101 
 
 127 
 
 . . 70 
 
 220 . 
 
 . 212 
 
 228 
 
 22 
 
 273 . 
 
 . 107 
 
 298 
 
 81 
 
 803 . 
 
 . 108 
 
 311 
 
 101 
 
 360 . 
 
 . 101 
 
 388 
 
 101 
 
 107 . 
 
 . c 133 
 
248 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 V,411 . 
 
 . . 77 
 
 XIII,172 . 
 
 210 
 
 1, 232 . 
 
 433 
 
 170 
 
 817 
 
 . 135 
 
 296 . 
 
 456 . 
 
 . 61 
 
 321 . 
 
 61 
 
 890 . 
 
 679 
 
 96 
 
 329 
 
 . 143 
 
 892 . 
 
 ■n, 49 . 
 
 . 107 
 
 343 . 
 
 129 
 
 n, 31 . . 
 
 128 
 
 117 
 
 868 
 
 . 43 
 
 43 . . 
 
 148 . 
 
 . 137 
 
 667 . 
 
 32 
 
 64 . 
 
 164 
 
 175 
 
 826 
 
 . 176 
 
 69. 
 
 177 . 
 
 . 169 
 
 XIV, 247 . 
 
 129 
 
 Ill . 
 
 229 
 
 204 
 
 261 
 
 . 81 
 
 168 . 
 
 268 . 
 
 . 143 
 
 267 . 
 
 65 
 
 374 '. 
 
 829 
 
 129 
 
 621 
 
 . 197 
 
 m, 19 
 
 350 . 
 
 . 177 
 
 XV, 70 . 
 
 143 
 
 129 . 
 
 861 
 
 77 
 
 196 
 
 . 221 
 
 205 
 
 448 . 
 
 . 123, 182 
 
 213 . 
 
 . 104 
 
 223 . 
 
 469 
 
 182 
 
 223 
 
 6 
 
 284 
 
 460 . 
 
 . 196 
 
 688 . 
 
 210 
 
 827 . . 
 
 621 
 
 129 
 
 701 
 
 . 43 
 
 859 
 
 VH, 28. 
 
 . 105 
 
 XVI, 84 . 
 
 69 
 
 IV, 97 , 
 
 303, 306 
 
 7 
 
 242 
 
 . 68 
 
 163 
 
 133. 
 
 . 176 
 
 322 . 
 
 . 34,210 
 
 171 . 
 
 167 . 
 
 175 
 
 389 
 
 . 46 
 
 
 179. 
 
 . 209 
 
 XVU, 70 . 
 
 101 
 
 195 . ' . ' 
 
 Vm, 32 . 
 
 170 
 
 177 . 
 
 . 46 
 
 363 
 
 36. 
 
 . 67 
 
 272 . 
 
 202 
 
 477 . 
 
 125 . 
 
 221 
 
 XVIII, 86 . 
 
 . 177 
 
 545 
 
 130. 
 
 . 96 
 
 333. 
 
 6 
 
 668 , 
 
 866 . 
 
 96 
 
 XIX, 69 
 
 . 177 
 
 733 
 
 452. 
 
 . 210 
 
 818 . 
 
 210 
 
 736 . 
 
 IX, 42 . 
 
 207 
 
 423 
 
 . 210 
 
 V. 2 . . 
 
 121. . 
 
 . 181 
 
 XX, 26 . 
 
 104 
 
 67 . 
 
 165 . 
 
 139 
 
 100 
 
 . 210 
 
 221 . 
 
 167. 
 
 . 65 
 
 198 . 
 
 211 
 
 800 . 
 
 812 . 
 
 130, 131 
 
 267 
 
 . 211 
 
 828 . 
 
 820. 
 
 . 46 
 
 801 . 
 
 68 
 
 885 . 
 
 897 . 
 
 128 
 
 XXI, 327 . 
 
 7 
 
 465 . 
 
 600. 
 
 . 130 
 
 405 . 
 
 204 
 
 473 . 
 
 619 
 
 5 
 
 459 . 
 
 . 76 
 
 VI, 188 . 
 
 68S . 
 
 . 146 
 
 622 . 
 
 133 
 
 255 . 
 
 666 
 
 220 
 
 680 . 
 
 . 146 
 
 VII, 171 . 
 
 684 . 
 
 702 . 
 
 704. 
 X, 6-9 . 
 100 . 
 Ill 
 
 60 
 
 XXII, 317 . 
 
 6 
 
 280 
 
 128 
 . 26 
 
 132 
 . 81 
 
 175 
 
 889 . 
 
 . 121 
 
 vm, 20 . 
 
 XXIII, 71 . 
 274 . 
 626 . 
 
 180 
 
 . 102 
 
 101 
 
 133. 
 147 . 
 844. 
 852 . 
 451. 
 
 623- rn . 
 
 679 . 
 
 222 . 
 
 . 118 
 
 653-656 
 
 7 
 
 437 
 
 197 
 
 805 . 
 
 86 
 
 488 . 
 
 . 142 
 
 XXIV, 253 . 
 
 . 177 
 
 XI, 20 
 
 204 
 
 489 
 
 204 
 
 IX, 876 
 
 67-71 . 
 
 . 133 
 
 751 . 
 
 . 47 
 
 420. 
 
 404 
 
 184 
 
 Odyssey. 
 
 
 476 . 
 
 XII, 26 . 
 
 69, 223 
 
 I, 40 
 
 . 128 
 
 654. 
 
 167-172 
 
 133 
 
 47 . . 61, 
 
 129, 178 
 
 X, 175 . 14 
 
 243 . 
 
 . 188 
 
 66 . . ' 
 
 . 68 
 
 XI, 441 . . 
 
 246 
 
 121 
 
 76 . . . 
 
 76 
 
 648 . 
 
 332. 
 
 . 139 
 
 94 
 
 . 116 
 
 XII, 17 . 
 
 407 
 
 82 
 
 138 . 
 
 204 
 
 ir.fi 
 
 437 . 
 
 . 146 
 
 205 
 
 76 sas - ' ' 
 
 XIII. 127 . 
 
 63 
 
 217 . 
 
 127 
 
 383 
 
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 249 
 
 XIII,209 
 214 . 
 215 
 365 . 
 376 
 
 XIV, 68 . 
 166 
 
 181 . 
 312 
 333 . 
 872 
 440 . 
 496 
 
 XV, 263 . 
 457 
 468 . 
 609 
 
 XVI, 24 . 
 168 
 218 . 
 437 
 
 xvn,2i . 
 
 260 
 
 322 . 
 
 362 
 
 475 . 
 
 589 
 
 549 . 
 
 693 
 XVni, 182 
 272 
 402 
 
 XIX, 463 
 
 XX, 121 . 
 
 XXI, 194 
 201 . 
 
 xxn, 139 
 
 262 . 
 414 
 
 XXIII, 43 . 
 134 
 309 . 
 
 XXIV, 334 
 
 Hymn, in ApoU. 
 
 ISAEUS. 
 
 Cleon. <t 26 . 
 Dicaeog. ^ 12 
 Menecl. ^ 10 . 
 Philoot. § 36 
 
 IsOCBATES, 
 
 Aeginet, 
 p. 838 D. § 22 
 
 Antid. 
 p. 70, 4115 . 
 73, 4 122 
 119, 4 270 
 
 8 
 
 133 
 
 180 
 
 76 
 
 77 
 
 177 
 
 131 
 
 68 
 
 68 
 
 138 
 
 104 
 
 174 
 
 204 
 
 180 
 
 204 
 
 139 
 
 182 
 
 7 
 
 ISO 
 
 212 
 
 182 
 
 207 
 
 71 
 
 130 
 
 78 
 
 92 
 
 66 
 
 102 
 
 6 
 
 133 
 
 123 
 
 210 
 
 226 
 
 33 
 
 182 
 
 175 
 
 ISO 
 
 34 
 
 130 
 
 146 
 
 69 
 
 212 
 
 69 
 
 1 182 
 
 5 
 
 226 
 
 19, 138 
 
 40 
 
 196 
 199 
 208 
 
 11 
 
 .. 311 C. § 7 . 
 315 A. § 24 
 
 Archid. 
 '. 116 A. § 1 . 
 121 A. i 26 . 
 126 C. § 61 
 128 C. i 60 . 
 134 A. 4 87 
 138 A. § 107 . 
 138 A. 4 108 
 
 P- 
 
 p. 146 E. § 36 
 147 B. § 37 . 
 147 D. § 39 
 
 Busir. 
 p. 230 C. § 47 
 
 Demon, 
 p. 2 6. § 2 . 
 6 C. § 17 
 6 A. § 19 . 
 9 C. § 33 
 11 C. § 43 . 
 Evag. 
 193 D. § 24 
 200 C. ^ 56 . 
 
 Helen. 
 p. 217 D. 5 49 
 
 Nicocl. 
 p. 15 B. § 3 . 
 16 C. § 8 
 18 A. 06 . 
 
 22 B. § 37 . 
 
 23 D. § 4S • 
 
 Pao. 
 p. 160 0. § 9 . 
 
 162 D. I 18 . 
 
 163 A. § 20 
 186 D. \ 139 . 
 
 Panathen. 
 p. 241 D. § 44 
 254 A. i 103 . 
 
 Panegyr. 
 p. 43 D. ^ 14 . 
 44 A. § 16 
 44 C. i 19 
 
 48 B 
 
 49 B. 
 49 0. 
 49 E. 
 65 C. , ._ 
 55 D. § 74 
 
 57 C. 4 S3 
 
 58 B. ^ 86 
 58 B. § 86 
 
 Us 
 
 §44 
 ^45 
 I 73 
 
 160 
 198 
 
 217 
 211 
 206 
 86 
 94 
 104 
 227 
 
 112 
 203 
 
 194 
 
 105 
 
 19 
 
 108 
 
 197 
 
 10 
 
 191 
 
 11 
 17, 222 
 
 223 
 
 18 
 
 105 
 
 74 
 
 74 
 
 118 
 
 222 
 
 103 
 
 26, 103 
 
 214 
 
 216 
 141 
 
 21 
 146 
 145 
 
 23 
 205 
 139 
 205 
 181 
 
 23 
 113 
 22? 
 227 
 
 p. 60 C. § 95 . 31 
 
 60 D. § 96 . 3S 
 
 64 B. ^ 113 . 140 
 
 70 B. ^ 142 . Ill 
 
 73 D. \ 157 . 115 
 
 77 C. § 175 . 220 
 
 78 C. § 179 . 222 
 
 79 D. § 185 . 140 
 
 Philipp. 
 
 p. 87 A. 4 23 . . 151 
 
 93 C. § 56 . 95 
 
 101 A. § 93 . . 181 
 
 104 D. § 110 . 195 
 
 109 B. \ 133 . 160 
 
 Plataic. 
 
 p. 303 E. § 38 . 81 
 
 Trapezit. 
 
 p. 360 C. 4 11 . 214 
 
 361 D. § 16 . 169 
 
 361 E. 4 16 . 167 
 
 363 B. 4 22 . 40 
 
 Ltcdrgub. 
 
 In Leocrat. 
 
 p. 154, ^ 50 . . 230 
 
 155, 4 60 . S3 
 155, § 61 . .30 
 
 Ly8IA3. 
 
 In Agorat. 
 
 p. 131, 4 15 . . 168 
 
 133, § 45 . 162 
 
 135, § 62 . .88 
 
 137, § 76 . 88 
 
 137, § 78 . . 108 
 
 139, § 94 . 118 
 
 In Aloib. U. 
 
 p. 145, § 8 . .117 
 
 De Arist. Bon. 
 
 p. 156, § 51 . .32 
 
 157, § 61 . 123 
 
 In Eratosth. 
 
 p. 121, §14 . . 161 
 
 123, § 32 . 100 
 
 •124, §48 . . 100 
 
 127, § 74 . 163 
 
 127, § 76 . . 167 
 
 De Morte Eratosth. 
 , 95, § 34 . 
 
 Or. Fnnebr. 
 . 192, § 22 . 
 194, § 42 
 
 Or. X. 
 .117, §25 . 
 
 Or. XXVIL 
 . 178, §§ 8, 9 
 
 18 
 
 162 
 194 
 
 157 
 
250 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 In Philocr. 
 
 p. 182, 5 12 . 
 
 , 20 
 
 182, § 13 
 
 37 
 
 M&N.iHDEE 
 
 . 
 
 Col. Fr. 6 . 
 
 . 46 
 
 Frag. Inceit 41 . 
 
 19 
 
 Monos. 46 
 
 . 36 
 
 887 . 
 
 197 
 
 397 . 
 
 . 37 
 
 MiMHSBraus. 
 
 1,2 . . 
 
 61, 174 
 
 Nov. Testam. 
 
 Matth. XI,3 . 
 
 6 
 
 XXVI, 24 . 
 
 97 
 
 Luo. IX,40 . 
 
 . 78 
 
 Joh. Xm, 34 . 
 
 78 
 
 Philemon 
 
 
 Frag. Inoert. 29 
 
 46 
 
 PiKDAB. 
 
 
 01. XI(X), 34 
 
 . 67 
 
 XIII, 92 . 
 
 146 
 
 XIV, SO . 
 
 . 68 
 
 Pyth. VIII, 20 . 
 
 46 
 
 IX, 196 
 
 . 211 
 
 Norn. VII, 28 . 
 VII, 68 
 
 46 
 
 . 66 
 
 Isthm. IV, 16 . 
 
 105 
 
 Plato. 
 
 
 Alcib.1, 115B . 
 
 224 
 
 Apol. 17 . 
 
 . 181 
 
 17 D. 
 
 127 
 
 18 . 
 
 . 116 
 
 20 B. 
 
 168 
 
 21 A . 
 
 . 161 
 
 21B . 
 
 88 
 
 21 B . 
 
 . 151 
 
 210. 
 
 161 
 
 21 D .1 
 
 24, 126 
 
 22 B. 
 
 47 
 
 26 B . 
 
 . 88 
 
 26 B 
 
 117 
 
 28 E . 
 
 . 119 
 
 28 E 
 
 203 
 
 29 A . 
 
 . 189 
 
 29 0. 
 
 66 
 
 29 . 
 
 . 207 
 
 30 0. 
 
 60 
 
 82 D . 
 
 . 96 
 
 SOB. 
 
 222 
 
 86 . 
 
 . 40 
 
 87 B. 
 
 42 
 
 87 . 
 
 . 187 
 
 39 A. 
 
 83 
 
 39 A . 
 
 . 206 
 
 40 B. 
 
 219 
 
 Apol. 42 A . 
 Charm. 166 A 
 
 163 A 
 
 164 B 
 171 E 
 
 Cratyl. 386 B 
 
 896 
 
 396 E 
 
 401 D 
 
 430 E 
 
 436 B 
 
 436 B 
 
 Orit. 43 B . 
 
 44 . 
 
 44 D . 
 
 46 B . 
 
 46 A . 
 
 48 B . 
 
 47 D . 
 
 48 . 
 
 49 A . 
 
 49 B . 
 60 A . 
 
 60 B . 
 
 61 B . 
 
 61 E . 
 
 62 . 
 62 D . 
 62 D . 
 
 Oritias, 108 
 Euthydem. 
 
 272 E . 
 276 E 
 276 E . 
 276 E 
 278 D . 
 283 
 283 E . 
 290 A 
 296 C . 
 296 D 
 296 E . 
 299 A 
 302 A . 
 302 B 
 302 D . 
 306 D 
 Euthyphr. 
 
 4E . 
 
 12 D 
 
 13 D . 
 
 14 A 
 14 . 
 16 D 
 
 Gorg. 447 D . 
 
 460 D 
 467 E . 
 
 461 E 
 
 462 E . 
 476 D 
 
 191 
 160 
 
 84 
 137 
 127 
 178 
 144 
 208 
 
 21 
 
 177 
 
 194 
 
 8 
 
 114 
 
 234 
 
 86 
 
 159 
 
 171 
 
 217 
 
 14 
 
 14 
 
 14 
 
 14 
 
 46 
 
 161 
 223 
 161 
 21 
 76 
 222 
 118 
 146 
 174 
 170 
 222 
 129 
 142 
 184 
 199 
 
 82 
 
 101 
 
 61 
 
 61 
 
 96 
 
 40,60 
 
 101 
 
 207 
 
 86 
 
 218 
 
 83 
 
 189 
 
 Gorg. 479 A . 
 
 479 A . 
 479 . 
 
 481 A . 
 
 482 A. 
 
 483 
 
 484 D . 
 
 486 B 
 
 487 D . 
 489 
 499 . 
 600 
 
 602 B . 
 
 603 A 
 606 B . 
 606 
 616 B . 
 616 E . 
 
 616 E . 
 
 617 B 
 
 622 E . 
 
 623 E 
 626 E . 
 
 Hipp. Maj. 
 
 301 A . 
 Ion. 636 B . 
 Lach. 194 A . 
 
 196 
 Leg. IV, 712 E 
 V, 736 B , 
 VI, 759 E 
 X, 902 D , 
 XI, 917 E 
 XU, 969 B , 
 Lya. 210 D . 
 
 214 E 
 216 B . 
 
 215 B 
 218 D . 
 
 Men. 74 B . 
 
 79 D . 
 
 89 B . 
 
 89 E . 
 
 92 C . 
 Menex. 239 B 
 246 A 
 Fhaed. 68 A . 
 
 68 E 
 
 69 D. 
 
 69 D 
 60 A . 
 60 
 
 62 . 
 
 63 A 
 
 66 E . 
 
 68 B 
 
 70 A. 
 
 71 
 
 72 . 
 72 D 
 
 . 63 
 
 86 
 
 12, 206 
 
 76 
 
 . 226 
 
 189 
 
 . 221 
 
 62 
 
 86,74 
 
 . 208 
 
 215 
 
 . 228 
 
 74 
 
 . 144 
 
 43 
 
 . 74 
 
 94 
 
 . 112 
 
 208 
 
 . 86 
 
 218 
 
 . 227 
 
 . 20 
 
 139 
 
 . 120 
 
 83 
 
 65 
 
 22 
 
 . 209 
 
 224 
 
 . 45 
 
 73 
 
 . 200 
 
 129 
 
 . 126 
 
 129 
 
 . 84 
 
 119 
 
 . 231 
 
 78 
 
 . 123 
 
 129 
 
 . 196 
 
 142 
 
 . 6 
 
 141 
 
 29, 131 
 
 144 
 
 . 171 
 
 85 
 
 . 145 
 
 217 
 
 . 239 
 
 106 
 
 . 81 
 
 198 
 
 . 61 
 
 191 
 
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 251 
 
 PhtKd. 73 A . 
 
 84 E 
 
 90 D . 
 
 91 G 
 91 . 
 95 D 
 98 D . 
 
 100 B 
 
 101 D . 
 
 102 D 
 108 E . 
 117 E 
 
 Phaedr. 227 D 
 228 A 
 228 E 
 
 228 E 
 
 229 A 
 
 230 A 
 232 B 
 232 E 
 251 B 
 257 C. 
 263 E 
 266 A 
 276 A 
 279 
 
 Phileb. 13 A . 
 16 D 
 39 C . 
 63 A 
 
 Politic. 264 A 
 302 B 
 
 Protag. 313 A 
 314 C 
 316 
 318 D 
 320 A 
 
 328 B 
 
 329 B 
 382 D 
 885 
 335 D 
 
 338 
 
 339 C 
 
 De Republic 
 I, 827 . 
 
 327 
 
 328 0. 
 829 A 
 330 A 
 837 A 
 837 A 
 337 E 
 339 A 
 841 B 
 352 E 
 354 B 
 
 U, 368 B 
 3&8C 
 
 94 
 
 84 
 196 
 
 82 
 112 
 164 
 192 
 6 
 169 
 217 
 199 
 198 
 141 
 
 92 
 
 183 
 
 203 
 
 204 
 
 8 
 
 47 
 146 
 199 
 
 81 
 183 
 145 
 194 
 174 
 
 82 
 183 
 216 
 
 10 
 191 
 196 
 101 
 .225 
 
 33 
 226 
 211 
 
 45 
 107 
 
 26 
 173 
 173 
 207 
 221 
 
 115 
 
 232 
 
 228 
 
 220 
 
 157 
 
 163 
 
 78 
 
 78 
 
 78 
 
 184 
 
 64 
 
 201 
 
 115 
 
 221 
 
 m. 
 
 II, 360 B 
 360 . 
 365 D 
 368 B . 
 372 E 
 374 D . 
 
 875 
 376 A . 
 
 876 
 879 B . 
 
 393 E . 
 
 397 D . 
 
 398 A . 
 39SB . 
 408 . 
 412 A . 
 412 B . 
 412 D . 
 415 B . 
 415 . 
 
 415 E . 
 
 416 G . 
 IV, 437 E . 
 
 427 E . 
 430 A . 
 433 B . 
 433 E . 
 439 B . 
 439 E . 
 451 A . 
 
 456 B . 
 
 457 . 
 473 D . 
 
 VI, 485 . 
 
 489 B . 
 
 490 . 
 492 E . 
 495 E . 
 501 . 
 602 A . 
 608 0, D 
 
 VU,515&. 
 515 E . 
 515 E . 
 622 A . 
 
 VIII, 549 B 
 649 E . 
 553 A 
 567 B . 
 561 
 661 E . 
 664 
 656 6 . 
 
 667 A 
 
 668 B . 
 
 IX, 573 . 
 680 B . 
 
 X, 695 B . 
 595 
 607 . 
 
 V, 
 
 140 
 64 
 
 206 
 80 
 
 183 
 
 113 
 
 227 
 
 26,28 
 
 36 
 
 134 
 40 
 87 
 64 
 
 139 
 92 
 
 129 
 
 78 
 
 32 
 
 194 
 
 188 
 
 43 
 
 200 
 
 40 
 
 206 
 
 76 
 
 64 
 
 153 
 
 82 
 
 156 
 
 180 
 
 103 
 
 208 
 
 94 
 
 193 
 
 184 
 
 197 
 
 143 
 
 21 
 
 137 
 
 53 
 
 64 
 
 145 
 
 8 
 
 129 
 
 78 
 
 21 
 
 129 
 
 233 
 
 21 
 
 74 
 
 194 
 
 69 
 
 221 
 
 14 
 
 183 
 
 208 
 
 233 
 
 21 
 
 X, 609 B 
 
 . 79 
 
 614 A . 
 
 20 
 
 . 614 B 
 
 . 193 
 
 615 D . 
 
 66 
 
 620 D 
 
 . Ill 
 
 Soph. 242 A 
 
 199 
 
 Symp. 178 B 
 
 . 196 
 
 174 D 
 
 193 
 
 175 0. 
 
 15 
 
 186 B 
 
 226 
 
 188 A 
 
 . 45 
 
 193 E 
 
 49 
 
 194 D 
 
 . 139 
 
 199 A 
 
 69 
 
 199 D 
 
 . 101 
 
 202 D 
 
 62 
 
 208 D 
 
 . 217 
 
 212 E 
 
 . 87, 183 
 
 213 D 
 
 . 77 
 
 216 A 
 
 208 
 
 Theaet 142 A 
 
 . 120 
 
 143 E 
 
 49 
 
 144 B 
 
 . 19 
 
 145 A 
 
 208 
 
 145 B 
 
 . 85 
 
 149 
 
 205 
 
 156 A 
 
 . 129 
 
 158 B 
 
 232 
 
 188 E 
 
 8 
 
 209 E 
 
 81, 188 
 
 Theag. 123 B 
 
 .'lOl 
 
 Tim. 18 . 
 
 39 
 
 18 E . 
 
 . 40 
 
 SIB . 
 
 18 
 
 90 E . 
 
 . 19S 
 
 SlMOmDBB. 
 
 Frag. 6 
 
 Aj 
 
 221 
 
 Sophocles. 
 
 i. 20 . 
 
 S 
 
 76 . 
 
 186 
 
 122 . 
 
 . 220 
 
 281 
 
 231 
 
 389 . 
 
 . 61 
 
 403 
 
 183 
 
 496 . 
 
 . 105 
 
 536 
 
 25 
 
 550 . 
 
 . 174 
 
 556 
 
 144 
 
 660 . 
 
 . 184 
 
 667 
 
 78 
 
 672 . . 
 
 . 87 
 
 674 
 
 45 
 
 715 . 
 
 . 172 
 
 986 
 
 68 
 
 1082 . 
 
 . 46 
 
 1221 
 
 62 
 
 1334 . 
 
 . 181 
 
 1335 
 
 20S 
 
252 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 Aj. 1418 
 
 . 211 
 
 Oed. Col. 667. 
 
 . 199 
 
 Phfl. 961 . 
 
 
 14S 
 
 Antig.22 . 
 
 202, 229 
 
 731 . 
 
 181 
 
 969 
 
 177 
 
 41 . 
 
 78, 160 
 
 761. 
 
 . 68 
 
 978 . 
 
 
 ' » 
 
 44 . 
 
 225 
 
 816 . 
 
 44 
 
 1263 
 
 
 . 191 
 
 61 
 
 . 149 
 
 848. 
 
 . 185 
 
 1342 . 
 
 
 103 
 
 69 . 
 
 62 
 
 956 
 
 37 
 
 Traoh. 25 
 
 
 . 81 
 
 76 
 
 . 92 
 
 1040. 
 
 . 27 
 
 196 . 
 
 
 21S 
 
 91 . 
 
 128 
 
 1180 
 
 77 
 
 197 
 
 
 . 211 
 
 97 
 
 . 206 
 
 1442. 
 
 . 106 
 
 226 . 
 
 
 201 
 
 98 . 
 
 92 
 
 1528 
 
 68 
 
 401 
 
 
 . 150 
 
 178 
 
 . 132 
 
 1713. 
 
 . 176 
 
 646 . 
 
 
 191 
 
 186 . 
 
 111 
 
 Oeil Tyr. 9 
 
 195 
 
 604 
 
 
 . 78 
 
 228 
 
 170 
 
 129 . 
 
 . 199 
 
 631 . 
 
 
 83 
 
 240 . 
 
 111 
 
 283 
 
 202 
 
 687 
 
 
 . 169 
 
 242 
 
 . 231 
 
 364 . 
 
 . 67 
 
 801 . 
 
 
 181 
 
 272 . 
 
 165 
 
 395 
 
 159 
 
 944 
 
 
 . 109 
 
 278 
 
 . 84 
 
 606 . 
 
 . 146 
 
 973 . 
 
 
 184 
 
 872 . 
 
 136 
 
 543 
 
 179 
 
 978 
 
 
 . 185 
 
 876 
 
 . 126 
 
 648 . 
 
 . 170 
 
 1129 . 
 
 
 81 
 
 S90 . 
 
 60 
 
 660 
 
 215 
 
 1183 
 
 
 . 186 
 
 443 
 
 . 202 
 
 637 . 
 
 . 186 
 
 1233 . 
 
 32 
 
 444 . 
 
 484 
 
 113 
 
 . 93 
 
 661 
 736 . 
 
 183 
 . 146 
 
 Hippon. Fr. 280 . 172 
 
 684 . 
 
 178 
 
 796 
 
 138 
 
 Theocbitus. 
 
 644 
 647 . 
 
 . 202 
 228 
 
 834 . 
 840 
 
 27, 143 
 20 
 
 Id. 1,4 . . . 102 
 
 680 
 
 . 130 
 
 918 . 
 
 . 172 
 
 Theoohis. 
 
 606 . 
 
 106 
 
 966, 959 
 
 231 
 
 Vs. 126 . . . 146 
 
 666 
 
 . 136 
 
 1146 . 
 
 44, 215 
 
 163 . . & 
 
 678 . 
 
 234 
 
 1167 
 
 177 
 
 
 686 
 
 . 170 
 
 1281 . 
 
 . 133 
 
 Thucydides. 
 
 710 . 
 
 109 
 
 1232 
 
 202 
 
 1,1 . . .219 
 2 , - - 17 
 
 1068 
 
 . 231 
 
 1246 . 
 
 . 169 
 
 1168 . 
 
 179 
 
 1293 
 
 205 
 
 2 
 
 
 . 226 
 
 1173 
 
 32, 191 
 
 1368 . 
 
 . 228 
 
 2 
 
 
 194 
 
 1253 . 
 
 84 
 
 1387 
 
 72, 202 
 
 3 
 
 
 16 
 
 1265 
 
 . 110 
 
 1391 . 
 
 . 72 
 
 3 
 
 
 233 
 
 1339 . 
 
 113 
 
 PhU. 75 . 
 
 19 
 
 4 
 
 
 . 198 
 
 Elect. 81 
 
 . 183 
 
 103. 
 
 . 184 
 
 6 
 
 
 160 
 
 833 . 
 
 62 
 
 253 . 
 
 231 
 
 9 
 
 
 . 94 
 
 637 
 
 . 113 
 
 281. 
 
 . 139 
 
 9 
 
 
 113 
 
 697 . 
 
 134 
 
 300 . 
 
 180 
 
 10 
 
 
 . 34 
 
 1029 
 
 . 184 
 
 325. 
 
 . 52 
 
 10 
 
 
 111, 223 
 
 1062 . 
 
 185 
 
 849 . 
 
 201 
 
 11 
 
 
 . 187 
 
 1172 
 
 . 141 
 
 881. 
 
 . 79 
 
 12 
 
 
 17 
 
 1206 . 
 
 68 
 
 416 . 
 
 231 
 
 12 
 
 
 . 34 
 
 Oed. Col.12 . 
 
 . 204 
 
 444. 
 
 . 228 
 
 16 
 
 
 190, 199 
 
 16 
 
 208 
 
 493 . 
 
 83 
 
 21 
 
 
 . 130 
 
 36 . 
 
 . 211 
 
 619. 
 
 . 77 
 
 21 
 
 
 208 
 
 49 
 
 202 
 
 626 . 
 
 . 92, 179 
 
 22 
 
 
 
 128 
 
 52 . 
 
 . 122 
 
 b39. 
 
 . 179 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 83 
 
 224 
 
 667 . 
 
 281 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 . 31 
 
 84 . 
 
 . 172 
 
 694. 
 
 . 43 
 
 25 
 
 
 
 . 80, 166 
 
 170 
 
 183 
 
 611 . 
 
 186 
 
 27 
 
 
 
 . 42 
 
 174 . 
 
 . 181 
 
 617. 
 
 . 164 
 
 28 
 
 
 
 112 
 
 176 
 
 185 
 
 674 . 
 
 113 
 
 31 
 
 
 
 . 70 
 
 271 . 
 
 . 141 
 
 674, 676 . 
 
 . 216 
 
 36 
 
 
 
 126 
 
 810 
 
 182 
 
 761 . 
 
 183 
 
 86 
 
 
 
 . 216 
 
 442 . 
 
 . 191 
 
 825. 
 
 . 69 
 
 89 
 
 
 
 211 
 
 666 
 
 199 
 
 917 . 
 
 28, 145 
 
 41 
 
 
 
 . 241 
 
INDEX TO "THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 253 
 
 I,« 
 
 
 , 
 
 . 167 
 
 n,2 . 
 
 60 . . „ 206 
 
 8 
 
 B7 . 
 
 
 . 78 
 
 a 
 
 B8 . 
 
 
 
 162 
 
 4 
 
 68 
 
 
 
 . 170 
 
 4 . 
 
 62 . 
 
 
 
 199 
 
 4 
 
 63 
 
 
 
 . 166 
 
 6 . 
 
 66 . 
 
 
 
 70 
 
 6(2 
 
 66 
 
 
 
 . 76 
 
 7 . 
 
 68 . 
 
 
 
 211 
 
 8 
 
 69 
 
 
 
 . 159 
 
 11 . 
 
 69 . 
 
 
 
 211 
 
 12 
 
 70 
 
 
 27 
 
 , 45, 109 
 
 12 . 
 
 70 . 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 13 
 
 72 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 13 . 
 
 78 . 
 
 
 
 58, 199 
 
 13 
 
 74 
 
 
 
 . 224 
 
 16 . 
 
 76 . 
 
 
 
 69 
 
 18 
 
 76 
 
 
 
 . 62 
 
 20 . 
 
 76 . 
 
 
 
 199 
 
 21 
 
 79 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 24 . 
 
 81 . 
 
 
 
 234 
 
 32 
 
 83 
 
 
 
 . 123 
 
 34(2 
 
 86,88 
 
 
 
 234 
 
 37 
 
 90 
 
 
 S8 
 
 64, 150 
 
 39 . 
 
 90 . 
 
 
 
 143 
 
 40 
 
 90 
 
 
 
 . 161 
 
 41 . 
 
 91 . 
 
 
 
 6,167 
 
 42 
 
 91 
 
 
 
 .151 
 
 44 . 
 
 91 . 
 
 
 
 170 
 
 46 
 
 91 
 
 
 
 . 193 
 
 49 . 
 
 96 . 
 
 
 
 167 
 
 49 
 
 99 
 
 
 
 . 131 
 
 53 . 
 
 101 . 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 56 
 
 103 
 
 
 
 . 140 
 
 69 . 
 
 108 . 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 60 
 
 Ill 
 
 
 
 . 218 
 
 60 . 
 
 lis . 
 
 
 
 140 
 
 60 
 
 114 
 
 
 
 . 224 
 
 60 . 
 
 116 . 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 61 
 
 116 
 
 
 
 . 217 
 
 61 . 
 
 116 . 
 
 
 
 224 
 
 62 
 
 117 
 
 
 
 . 36 
 
 63 . 
 
 118 . 
 
 
 
 81 
 
 64 
 
 120 
 
 
 
 . 224 
 
 64 . 
 
 121 . 
 
 
 
 88 
 
 65 
 
 126 
 
 
 
 . 224 
 
 67 . 
 
 126 . 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 72 
 
 126 
 
 
 
 . 68 
 
 80 . 
 
 128 . 
 
 
 
 214 
 
 89 
 
 129 
 
 
 
 . 19 
 
 92 . 
 
 131 . 
 
 
 
 112 
 
 93 
 
 132 
 
 
 
 . 145 
 
 102 . 
 
 134 . 
 
 
 
 154 
 
 m, 1 
 
 137 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 4. 
 
 137 . 
 
 
 
 143, 162 
 
 11 
 
 138 
 
 
 
 208,216 
 
 22. 
 
 140 . 
 
 
 
 66 
 
 26 
 
 142 
 
 
 
 . 117 
 
 28. 
 
 142 . 
 
 
 
 216 
 
 32 
 
 , 
 
 161 
 
 , , 
 
 . 33 
 
 , 
 
 70 
 
 , , 
 
 . 155 
 
 , 
 
 190 
 
 , , 
 
 . 203 
 
 , 
 
 162 
 
 examp.) 
 
 . 167 
 
 , 
 
 220 
 
 , , 
 
 . 22 
 
 , 
 
 60 
 
 , , 
 
 . 203 
 
 , 
 
 211 
 
 , , 
 
 11, 151 
 
 , 
 
 204 
 
 , , 
 
 . 211 
 
 , 
 
 7 
 
 
 85, 229 
 
 ' 85, 59, 
 
 158, 229 
 
 . 
 
 167, 172 
 
 , 
 
 168 
 
 , 
 
 . 13 
 
 examp.) 
 
 27, 130 
 
 , 
 
 . 109 
 
 , 
 
 219 
 
 , 
 
 . 160 
 
 , 
 
 62 
 
 , 
 
 . 42 
 
 
 203 
 
 , , 
 
 . 46 
 
 , 
 
 61 
 
 , 
 
 . 200 
 
 , 
 
 196 
 
 . 
 
 191, 197 
 
 , 
 
 220 
 
 , 
 
 . 80 
 
 , 
 
 117 
 
 , , 
 
 . 172 
 
 , 
 
 229 
 
 , 
 
 . 126 
 
 , 
 
 194 
 
 , , 
 
 . 130 
 
 , 
 
 61 
 
 , , 
 
 . 44 
 
 , 
 
 132 
 
 , , 
 
 . 137 
 
 , 
 
 167 
 
 , , 
 
 . 164 
 
 , 
 
 60 
 
 , , 
 
 . 46 
 
 , 
 
 25 
 
 , 
 
 . 83 
 
 • 
 
 13, 193 
 
 
 . 201 
 
 , 
 
 74 
 
 , 
 
 . 68 
 
 . 
 
 71 
 
 , , 
 
 . 42 
 
 , 
 
 42, 160 
 
 . 
 
 . 166 
 
 III, 33 
 
 170 
 
 34 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 40 
 
 . 117 
 
 40 . 
 
 . 161 
 
 49 
 
 194 
 
 49 . 
 
 . 199 
 
 63 
 
 81 
 
 63 . 
 
 . 84 
 
 70 
 
 75 
 
 74 . 
 
 . 99 
 
 76 
 
 200 
 
 80 . 
 
 . 81 
 
 83 
 
 81 
 
 88 . 
 
 . 213 
 
 89 
 
 59 
 
 89 . 
 
 . 126 
 
 98 
 
 137 
 
 102 . 
 
 . 206 
 
 114 
 
 206 
 
 IV, 4 . . 
 
 . 190 
 
 13 . 
 
 156 
 
 17 . 
 
 . 133 
 
 24 
 
 33 
 
 28 . 
 
 14, 158 
 
 28 
 
 158 
 
 29 . 
 
 . 226 
 
 86 
 
 208 
 
 42 . 
 
 . 168 
 
 43 
 
 219 
 
 67 . 
 
 . 190 
 
 71 
 
 43 
 
 96 . 
 
 . 224 
 
 113 
 
 227 
 
 116 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 121 
 
 42 
 
 126 . 
 
 . 225 
 
 128 
 
 76 
 
 133 . 
 
 34, 227 
 
 V, 9 . . 
 
 61 
 
 9 . . 
 
 . 209 
 
 10 
 
 211 
 
 18 . 
 
 . 209 
 
 30 
 
 224 
 
 35 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 85 
 
 226 
 
 49 . 
 
 . 164 
 
 66 
 
 224 
 
 63 . 
 
 . 193 
 
 64 
 
 214 
 
 82 . 
 
 . 60 
 
 102 
 
 215 
 
 105 . 
 
 82,86 
 
 VI, 2 . . 
 
 6 
 
 2 . . 
 
 . 32 
 
 4 
 
 211 
 
 6 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 16 . 
 
 6 
 
 16 
 
 47 
 
 17 . . 
 
 21 
 
254 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 VI, 18 . 
 
 . 63 
 
 \n, 70 
 
 23 
 
 18 
 
 190, 199 
 
 70. 
 
 . 191 
 
 20 . 
 
 6 
 
 71 
 
 . 47,109 
 
 20 
 
 174 
 
 72. 
 
 . .' 23 
 
 21 . 
 
 . 105 
 
 77 
 
 87 
 
 25 
 
 233 
 
 80. 
 
 . 164 
 
 29 . 
 
 . 169 
 
 84 
 
 . 81, 197 
 
 80 
 
 61 
 
 86. 
 
 . 219 
 
 81 . 
 
 7 
 
 vm, 9 
 
 169 
 
 31 
 
 74 
 
 25. 
 
 . 60 
 
 87 . 
 
 . 69 
 
 46 
 
 226 
 
 38 
 
 60 
 
 66. 
 
 . 42 
 
 60 . 
 
 . 203 
 
 65 
 
 234 
 
 60 
 
 234 
 
 66. 
 
 . 108 
 
 64 . 
 
 78, 192 
 
 68 
 
 . 8,214 
 
 67 
 
 42 
 
 70. 
 
 . 195 
 
 68 . 
 
 . 211 
 
 71 
 
 60 
 
 69 
 
 216 
 
 74. 
 
 . 42 
 
 61 . 
 61 
 
 . 84 
 
 42 
 
 Ttrtaehs. 
 
 61 . 
 
 . 148 
 
 XII, 85 . 
 
 . 109 
 
 61 
 66 . 
 
 74 
 
 165 
 . 60 
 
 7 
 
 Xenophok. 
 
 Anabasis. 
 
 76 . 
 
 . 32 
 
 I, 1, 1 • 
 
 6 
 
 77 
 
 6 
 
 J'? 
 
 25 
 
 78 . 
 
 . 98 
 
 }'l ■ 
 
 . 26 
 
 82 
 
 208 
 
 J'? 
 
 220 
 
 88 . 
 
 . 206 
 
 J'» • 
 
 . 132 
 
 96 
 
 86 
 
 i't 
 
 223 
 
 96 . 
 
 . 71 
 
 1,10. 
 
 . Ill 
 
 100 
 
 115 
 
 2,1 
 
 218 
 
 , 102 . 
 
 . 168 
 
 2, 1 . 
 
 . 220 
 
 
 
 2,2 
 
 33 
 
 r's 1 . 
 
 111 
 
 2,21. 
 
 . 162 
 
 2 . 
 
 . 34 
 
 8 6 
 
 62 
 
 6 
 
 87 
 
 sle . 
 
 . 63, 232 
 
 6 . 
 
 23,61 
 
 3,8 
 
 220 
 
 10 
 
 109 
 
 8,14. 
 
 . 229 
 
 11 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 8,16 
 
 232 
 
 13 
 
 111 
 
 8,17. 
 
 . 35 
 
 16 . 
 
 . 232 
 
 8,17 
 
 . 62, 86 
 
 17 
 
 87 
 
 4,7 . 
 
 . 115, 168 
 
 21 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 4, 12& 
 
 13 . 162 
 
 23 
 
 213 
 
 4,18 
 
 . 70 
 
 24 . 
 
 . 219 
 
 4,18 . 
 
 160 
 
 27 
 
 167 
 
 6,9 . 
 
 . 231 
 
 28 . 
 
 . Ill 
 
 6,13 . 
 
 23 
 
 34 
 
 206 
 
 6,2 . 
 
 . 199 
 
 39 . 
 
 . 80 
 
 6,8 
 
 171 
 
 42 
 
 69 
 
 7 8 . 
 
 . 79 
 
 44 . 
 
 . 224 
 
 7 3 . 
 
 218 
 
 46 
 
 43 
 
 J, 7 ■ 
 
 . 166 
 
 47 . 
 
 . 169 
 
 8,12 . 
 
 19 
 
 48 
 
 134 
 
 8,13. 
 
 . 75 
 
 60 . 
 
 . 211 
 
 9, 10 . 
 
 166 
 
 66 
 
 42 
 
 9,13. 
 
 . 132 
 
 69 . 
 
 . 168 
 
 9,21 . 
 
 67 
 
 60 
 
 163 
 
 9,27. 
 
 . 132 
 
 6] . 
 
 . 61 
 
 10,4 
 
 220 
 
 67 
 
 75 
 
 IP 5 . 
 
 . 11, 161 
 
 1, 10, 6 
 
 22« 
 
 lojo . 
 
 . 81 
 
 10,16 
 
 158 
 
 10,16 
 
 . 160 
 
 10,17 
 
 165 
 
 n, 1, 3 . 
 
 . 152 
 
 1,4 
 
 95 
 
 1,6 . 
 
 . 204 
 
 1,8 
 
 156 
 
 1,10. 
 
 . 146,157 
 
 1,21 
 
 232 
 
 1,23 . 
 
 151 
 
 2,12 
 
 184 
 
 2,21 . 
 
 . 11, 151 
 
 8,6 
 
 163 
 
 8,10. 
 
 . 206 
 
 8,11 
 
 201 
 
 8,13. 
 
 . 194 
 
 3,18 
 
 . 68, 158 
 
 8,19. 
 
 . 159 
 
 8,20 
 
 33 
 
 3,24. 
 
 . 143 
 
 3,25 
 
 141 
 
 3,29. 
 
 . 27, 128 
 
 4,5 
 
 44 
 
 4,5 . 
 
 . 214 
 
 4,17 
 
 . 26,67 
 
 4,19. 
 
 . 117 
 
 4,22 
 
 29 
 
 4,22. 
 
 . 214 
 
 6, 13 
 
 66 
 
 6,14. 
 
 . 64 
 
 6,16 
 
 69 
 
 6,27. 
 
 . 162 
 
 6,27 . 
 
 230 
 
 6,12. 
 
 . 28, 131 
 
 6,21 . 
 
 . 10,67 
 
 Ill, 1,2 
 
 . 164 
 
 1,13 . 
 
 199 
 
 1,14 
 
 . 43 
 
 i;i6 . 
 
 146 
 
 1,20 
 
 . 199 
 
 1,38 . 
 
 29 
 
 1,38 
 
 . 62 
 
 1,40 . 
 
 29 
 
 2,9 
 
 . 161 
 
 2,10 . 
 
 223 
 
 2,26 
 
 . 26 
 
 2,27 . 
 
 . 9,67 
 
 2,29 
 
 . 25 
 
 2,36 , 
 
 62 
 
 8,12 
 
 . 152 
 
 4,8 . 
 
 142 
 
 4,29 
 
 . 81 
 
 4,49 . 
 
 122, 142 
 
 5,8 
 
 . .' 81 
 
 6,7 . 
 
 208 
 
 6,11 
 
 . 199 
 
 6, 13 . 
 
 163 
 
 6,18 
 
 167 
 
INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 255 
 
 i\r, 1 6 . 
 
 194 
 
 i;6. . 
 
 . 81 
 
 2,4 . 
 
 142 
 
 2,10 
 
 . 110 
 
 4,6 . 
 
 207 
 
 6,13 
 
 . 108 
 
 6,30 . 
 
 . 29, 145 
 
 6,10 . 
 
 . 75 
 
 8 7 . 
 
 157 
 
 slu 
 
 . 201 
 
 V, 1, 1 . 
 
 161 
 
 ' 1 9 . 
 
 . 117 
 
 2; 17 . 
 
 162 
 
 3,1 . 
 
 . 126 
 
 4,16 . 
 
 223 
 
 S,B . 
 
 . 223 
 
 6,22 . 
 
 79 
 
 7,6 . 
 
 . 145 
 
 7,26 . 
 
 . 20,81 
 
 VI, 1, 17 
 
 . . 76 
 
 ' 1; 19 . 
 
 7 
 
 1,25 
 
 . 163 
 
 1,26 . 
 
 165 
 
 1,28 
 
 . 83 
 
 1,29 . 
 
 . . 157 
 
 4,9. 
 
 . 126 
 
 6,6 . 
 
 132 
 
 6,24 
 
 . 230 
 
 6,25 . 
 
 161 
 
 vn,i,2 
 
 . 218 
 
 1,7 . 
 
 203 
 
 1,16 
 
 . 162 
 
 1,33 . 
 
 39 
 
 3,11 
 
 9, 103 
 
 8,13 . 
 
 . 154 
 
 8,43 
 
 . 35 
 
 4)2 . 
 
 69 
 
 6,21 
 
 . 97 
 
 7 11 . 
 
 . 11, 105 
 
 7 31 
 
 . . 81 
 
 7,65 . 
 
 164 
 
 Cyropaedia. 
 
 1,1,2 ,. 
 
 . 130 
 
 2,1 
 
 . 82, 158 
 
 2 1 . 
 
 . 205 
 
 212 
 
 . 45, 109 
 
 2,8 . 
 
 . . 145 
 
 2,8 
 
 206 
 
 2,16 . 
 
 . 94 
 
 8;i 
 
 197 218 
 
 8,3 . 
 
 . 219 
 
 3, 5&6 
 
 210 
 
 3; 9 . 
 
 , 210 
 
 8,11 
 
 143 
 
 3,18 . 
 
 . 83 
 
 4,2 
 
 81 
 
 4,7 . 
 
 . 168 
 
 4,13 
 
 155 
 
 4,14 
 
 . 145, 168 
 
 4,21 . 
 
 168 
 
 1,4,23 . 
 4,25 
 6,12 . 
 5,13 
 6,14 . 
 6,3 
 6,7 . 
 6,7 
 6,10 
 6,18 
 6,18 . 
 6,19 
 6,22 . 
 6,?8 
 6,32 . 
 II, 1,8 
 1,9 . 
 1,21 
 1,30 
 1,31 
 2,3 . 
 2,8 
 2,9 . 
 2,16 
 2,20 
 3,6 
 4,7 . 
 4,10 
 4,12. 
 4,17 
 4,23. 
 4,31 
 111,1,1. 
 
 1,3. 
 
 1,8 
 
 1,9. 
 
 2,1 
 
 2,8. 
 
 2,12 
 
 2,13 
 
 2,16 
 
 2,26 
 
 2,26 
 
 3,31 
 
 3,60 
 
 IV, 1, 1 
 1,18 
 2,7 
 3,10 
 8,11 
 8,16 
 4,4 
 6,16 
 6,37 
 6,46 
 
 V, 1, 3 . 
 1,25 
 2,9 . 
 2,9 
 
 . 146 
 
 V, 2,12. 
 
 82, 85 
 
 68 
 
 2,22 . 
 
 210 
 
 . 197 
 
 3,13. 
 
 . 51 
 
 128 
 
 3,27 . 
 
 103 
 
 . 74 
 
 8,66. 
 
 . 29, ISO 
 
 129 
 
 8,55 . 
 
 108 
 
 . 76 
 
 4117. 
 
 . 40 
 
 138 
 
 4,30 . 
 
 103 
 
 . 80 
 
 4,36. 
 
 . 108 
 
 63 
 
 6,13 . 
 
 . 9,108 
 
 . 227 
 
 6,21. 
 
 . . 121 
 
 135 
 
 6,34 . 
 
 94 
 
 . 52 
 
 VI, 1, 21 
 
 . 48 
 
 160 
 
 1,26 . 
 
 226 
 
 . 201 
 
 l',40 
 
 . 205 
 
 28, 105 
 
 2,30 . 
 
 85 
 
 . 119 
 
 2,39 
 
 . 14 
 
 68 
 
 3,19 . 
 
 207 
 
 . 137 
 
 4 17 
 
 . 205 
 
 129 
 
 VU, 1, 10 . 
 
 . 47, 131 
 
 . 88 
 
 2,19 
 
 . 150 
 
 167 
 
 3 3 . 
 
 171 
 
 . 167 
 
 3 7 
 
 . 167 
 
 220 
 
 3,18 . 
 
 184 
 
 . 224 
 
 •3; 17 
 
 . 77 
 
 27 
 
 5,6 . 
 
 142 
 
 29, 150 
 
 6,73 
 
 . 214 
 
 135 
 
 6,81 . 
 
 69 
 
 . 68 
 
 6,82 
 
 . 31 
 
 62 
 
 6,82 . 
 
 80 
 
 . 199 
 
 VIII, 1,6 
 
 . 179 
 
 138 
 
 1,10 
 
 40 
 
 . 86 
 
 ilio 
 
 . 161 
 
 113 
 
 1,43 
 
 . 40, 74 
 
 39, 161 
 
 i;44 
 
 . 75, 144 
 
 68, 171 
 
 2,21 
 
 110 
 
 . 199 
 
 .2,25 
 
 . 195 
 
 163 
 
 8 5 
 
 196 
 
 . 184 
 
 3,42 
 
 . 189 
 
 211 
 
 4 16 
 
 165, 156 
 
 77, 103 
 
 5,12 
 
 . 137 
 
 218 
 
 6,28 
 
 224 
 
 . 216 
 
 7 15 
 
 . 86 
 
 41 
 
 7,23 
 
 114 
 
 . 199 
 
 7,25 
 
 . 62 
 
 211 
 
 7,27 
 
 206 
 
 . 163 
 
 Hellenica. 
 
 77 
 
 1,1,16 . 
 
 . '. 223 
 
 . 22 
 
 '6,7. 
 
 162 
 
 211 
 
 6,32 . 
 
 . 186 
 
 . 206 
 
 7;5. 
 
 163 
 
 33 
 
 7,26 . 
 
 . . 221 
 
 11, 152 
 
 7,28 
 
 203 
 
 206 
 
 II, 1, 4 . 
 
 . 151 
 
 . 144 
 
 1,6 
 
 217 
 
 197 
 
 3,2 . 
 
 39, 137, 138 
 
 227, 228 
 
 3,11 
 
 . 39, 138, 207 
 
 202 
 
 8,51. 
 
 . .130 
 
 . 81 
 
 4,1 
 
 225 
 
 212 
 
 4,8 . 
 
 . 206 
 
256 
 
 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 
 
 UI 1,20 . 
 
 1G5 
 
 I, 2, 7 . 
 
 67 
 
 2,6 
 
 . 164 
 
 2,' 7 
 
 . 168 
 
 2,13 . 
 
 226 
 
 2,18 . 
 
 17 
 
 2, 19 
 
 . 226 
 
 2,20 
 
 . 226 
 
 2,20 . 
 
 143, 168 
 
 2,22 . 
 
 217 
 
 8,6 
 
 . 202 
 
 2,86 
 
 . 183 
 
 8,9 . 
 
 76 
 
 2,46 . 
 
 176 
 
 6,9 
 
 . 208 
 
 2,65 
 
 . 197 
 
 6,10 . 
 
 86 
 
 2,63 . 
 
 218 
 
 IV, 1,36 . 
 
 . 199 
 
 3,3 
 
 . 165 
 
 1, 38 . 
 
 10 
 
 3,6 . 
 
 207 
 
 1,88 
 
 29, 174 
 
 4,19 . 
 
 . 172 
 
 4,15 . 
 
 203 
 
 6,2 . 
 
 203 
 
 7,3 
 
 . 160 
 
 6,3 
 
 87, 107 
 
 8,2 . 
 
 162 
 
 6,4 . 
 
 129 
 
 8,16 
 
 . 70 
 
 6,9 
 
 . 196 
 
 8,23 . 
 
 205 
 
 7,2 . 
 
 234 
 
 V 1, 14 
 
 . 203 
 
 7,8 
 
 . 129 
 
 1 18 . 
 
 178 
 
 n, 1, 15 . 
 
 . 197 
 
 1 19 . 
 
 . 214 
 
 1,16 . 
 
 . 199 
 
 2,2 . 
 
 162 
 
 1, 17 . 
 
 . 87,93 
 
 2,29 
 
 . 16 
 
 1,18 
 
 . 129 
 
 2,32 . 
 
 161 
 
 1,25 . 
 
 185 
 
 2,36 . 
 
 . 191 
 
 2,3 
 
 81, 141 
 
 4 7 . 
 
 • 23 
 
 2,3 . 
 
 134 
 
 417 
 
 . 33 
 
 3,8 
 
 . 226 
 
 4,8 . 
 
 161 
 
 3,4 . 
 
 172 
 
 4,9 
 
 . 223 
 
 3,9 
 
 . 192 
 
 VI, 1, 6 . 
 
 132 
 
 3, 12 . 
 
 129 
 
 • 1 U . 
 
 . 86 
 
 6,2 
 
 . 126 
 
 ile . . 
 
 161 
 
 6,29 . 
 
 161 
 
 4,26 
 
 . 219 
 
 6,32 
 
 . 223 
 
 4, 27 . 
 
 40 
 
 7, 10 . 
 
 98 
 
 VII, 1,23 
 
 1,84 . , 
 1,34 . 
 1, 36 . 
 
 . 160 
 162 
 
 . 164 
 150 
 
 7, 13 
 9,2 . 
 9.2 
 10,2 . 
 
 . 141 
 
 82 
 
 . 129 
 
 68 
 
 1,38 
 
 . 163 
 
 in, 1, 3 
 
 . 223 
 
 2, 9 . 
 
 203 
 
 2,1 . 
 
 74 
 
 3,7 
 
 . 136 
 
 2,3 
 
 9,67 
 
 4,34 . 
 
 161 
 
 I'K • 
 
 178 
 
 4,37 
 
 . 142 
 
 8,11 . 
 
 192, 197 
 
 4, 39 . 
 
 166 
 
 6,1 . 
 
 183 
 
 6,3 
 
 . 40 
 
 6,6 
 
 . 130 
 
 Memorabilia. 
 
 6,24 . 
 6,8 
 
 228 
 . 233 
 
 M 1,6 . . 
 
 94 
 
 6, 16 . 
 
 82 
 
 1,13 . 
 
 . 168 
 
 8,8 
 
 . 196 
 
 1, 16 . 
 
 69 
 
 8,10 . 
 
 207 
 
 2'1 
 
 . 206 
 
 11,1 
 
 . 234 
 
 11 ' • 
 
 198 
 
 12,6 . 
 
 206 
 
 8,6 
 
 . 169 
 
 13,3 
 
 196, 206 
 
 IV, 1, ! . 
 
 218 
 
 2,3 
 
 . 80 
 
 2,4 . 
 
 78 
 
 2,6 
 
 . 214 
 
 2,10 . 
 
 30 
 
 2, 12 
 
 . 83 
 
 2,20 . 
 
 129 
 
 2,30 
 
 . 232 
 
 2,32 . 
 
 134 
 
 2,86 
 
 . 46 
 
 2,39 . 
 
 80 
 
 2,40 
 
 n, 108 
 
 8,3 . 
 
 18 
 
 4,4. . 
 
 . 69 
 
 4,4 . 
 
 216 
 
 4,12 . 
 
 . 166 
 
 4,16 . 
 
 68 
 
 4,17 . 
 
 . 190 
 
 6,7 . 
 
 11 
 
 6,7 . 
 
 . 61 
 
 6,13 . 
 
 47, 109 
 
 8,2. 
 
 . 197 
 
 8,7 . 
 
 172 
 
 Ages. 11,31 
 IV, 1 
 
 . 163 
 
 207 
 
 IV, 6. 
 
 . 168 
 
 IX, 2 
 
 137 
 
 XI, 3 . 
 
 . 109 
 
 Apol. § 14 . 
 
 178 
 
 Cyneg. Ill, 3 . 
 Hier.TIII, 3 . 
 
 . 196 
 179 
 
 XI, 16 
 
 . 184 
 
 Hipp. IX, 2 . 
 
 77 
 
 Oecon. I, 2 . 
 
 . 188 
 
 IV, 4 . 
 
 183 
 
 VII, 6 . 
 
 . 74 
 
 vn, 20 . 
 
 139 
 
 VII, 39 
 
 . 62 
 
 VIII, 8 . 
 
 172 
 
 XII, 19 
 
 . 207 
 
 XIII, 4 . 
 
 191 
 
 XV, a. 
 
 . 163 
 
 XX, 8 . 
 Rep. Ath. 1, 16 
 
 77 
 
 . 127 
 
 Rep. T,an. XIV, e 
 
 36 
 
 Symp. II, 11 
 
 . 81 
 
 III, 3 . 
 
 202 
 
 IV, 6 
 
 . 172 
 
 IV, 26 . 
 
 214 
 
 VII, 2 
 
 . 76 
 
 Vm, 26 . 
 
 74 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 N. B. The figures refer to Pagei. 
 
 Absolute, Genitive, 222, 225, 232 ; Accusa- 
 tive, 2^, ij2t). 
 
 Antecedent, definite or indefinite, 121, 122, 
 123-125. 
 
 Aorist, Indicative, 24. Distinguished from 
 Imperf., 7, 8, ?4. Of verbs denoting a 
 state or condition, 24. Used for Perf. 
 or Pluperf., 26. Expressing a. momen- 
 tly action just taking place, 25. In 
 epistles, 25. In Final clauses, 72. In 
 Protasis and Apodosis (implying non- 
 fulfilment of condition), 93-102; how 
 distinguished from Imperf., 94, 96 (&) -, 
 how from Pluperf., 96 (6). With av in 
 Apod., 56, 93 - 96 j rarely referring to 
 present time, 101. Gnomic, 45 ; with iroA- 
 Aafcis or ijSr], 46 ; in Horn, similes, 46 ; a 
 primary tense, 49 ; see Aor. Inf. Itero' 
 tivCj w. avj 47 j iterative forms in -o-kov, 
 •frKOfj-Tjv (w. av, in Hdt,), 47, 48. 
 
 — , in dependent moods, 25 - 36. How 
 distinguished from Present, 8 (R.). See 
 Contents, Chap. II. ; and Bubj., Opt., 
 Imperat., and Infin. 
 
 , Subjunctive, 26 - 28. As Fut. Perf., 
 after eiretSdv^ &c., 26. How distinguished 
 from Perf. Subj,, 28. With jiti} in pro- 
 hibitions, 180. With ov ixrjj 184. 
 
 ■ , Optative, 28 - 30. After cttciS^, &c., 
 
 29. In indirect quotations and questions, 
 29, 30 ; ambiguity of, in indirect ques- 
 tions, 80. 
 
 -■ , Imperative, 30. Karely used in 
 prohibitions (for Aor. Subj.), 181. 
 
 ^— — , Infinitive, with, indef. time^ 3&-32. 
 After XP""*) fleo-irt^o), &c., 31 ; see Pres- 
 ent. After aiTtos etjitt, 32. In indirect 
 quotation, referring to the past^ 32, 33. 
 UBed for the Future: after verbs of 
 hoping^ promising.^ &c., 32 ; after verbs 
 of think ing, saying^ &c., 33. After Aey« 
 and eiTTOf, to command, 34. Primary 
 or secondary t&ise, 53. In a gnomic 
 
 sense, 46, 47. With av In apodosls, 69, 
 113, 114, 157 ; see 'Ac. 
 
 , Participle, 34 - 36. With KavQava^ 
 
 4>9dviat &c , coinciding with the verb in 
 time, 34 ; with irepiopdwy &c., 35. With 
 ojLioAo-yew, 36. With exw, as periphras- 
 tic Per., 229, With eo-ojuot, as peripnr. 
 Fut. Perf., 44. Primary or secondary 
 tense, 54. As protasis, equlv. to Aor. 
 Ind., Subj., or Opt., 110, 217. With ay 
 in apodosis (never in protasis), 69, 113, 
 114, 159 ; see 'Af. 
 
 Apodosis, defined, 87, 125 ; see Protasis. 
 
 Assimilation in conditional Relative clauses, 
 135, 136. 
 
 Causal sentences, 171 - 173 ; see Contents, 
 Chap. IT, Sect. V. Introduced by Rela- 
 tives, 141 ; negative particle in, 142. 
 Expressed by Participles, 216 ; by Part 
 W. 0)5, 219, 220. 
 
 Caution^ verbs of; see Fear, 
 
 Conditional sentences, 110-121 ; see Con- 
 tents, Chap. IT, Sect. II. Cond. Rela- 
 tive sentences, 125 - 137. 
 
 Danger, expressions of ; see Fear. 
 
 Dative after Terbals in -Teo>r, 233, 234. 
 
 Dependence of moods and tenses, 48 - 
 54. 
 
 Direct Quotations, distinguished from indi- 
 rect, 147 i introduced by on, 171. 
 
 Exhortations, Imperative In, 178. Subj. in, 
 179. Opt. in (poet.), 175. Fut. Ind. in, 
 
 w. oirws (so. o-KOTret), 78, 79. 
 
 Fear, caution, and danger, expreseioni 
 of, 80-87. Followed by fn/j w. Subj. or 
 Opt, 80, see Object clauses j by /xij w. 
 Fut. Ind. (seldom), 82 ; by /n^ w. Pres. 
 and Past tenses of Indie, 83 - 86 } ^y ^t 
 or oirus w. ludic. (aa in indir disoourse), 
 
258 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 85 J by Fu-t. Inf., 86 j by et, whetktTj 
 OTTw;, Aow, &c., 86 ; by a causal Beotence 
 with an, 86 -, by Infin., 86, 87, 190. 
 
 Final clauses {jpure\ after iva, oi;, ottus', 
 o0pa, and /i^, 67 - 73 ; distinguished from 
 object clauses, &c., 66, 67. Subj. and 
 Opt. in, 67. Fut. Ind. in, 68. Subj. in, 
 after secoDdary tenses, 70. Secondary 
 tenses of Indie, in, 72. 'A.v or xe in : 
 with Subj.. 69 ; w. Opt., 69, 70. 
 
 Final and Object clauses w. ottu; and on-ws 
 ju-ij, after verbs ot striving^ effecting^ &c., 
 73 - 80. Fut. Ind. in, 73, 74. Subj. or 
 Opt. in, 73, 74 ; Fut. Opt. 74, 39. 'Oirus 
 af w. Subj. in, 76. Homeric construction 
 in, 70, 77> M^ (without ottuO in, 77. 'O9 
 for oTTwff in, 77. After verbs of exhort- 
 ing^ forbidding^ kc , 77,78 5 rarely intro- 
 duced by tpo, 78 ; see Iva. 'Owws or 
 oirois jLi^ w. Fat. Ind., by ellipsis of the 
 leading verb, 78 (N. 7, a) ; /nj alone in 
 prohibitions, 79 (N. 7, h). Second Aor. 
 Subj. Act. and Mid. preferred in, 79 ; 
 Dawes'S Canon, 79, 80. See Object clauses 
 after ju.^. 
 
 Finite moods, 1. 
 
 Future, Indicative, 36 -S8. In gnomic 
 sense, 36. Expressing a general truth 
 hereafter to be recognized, 36. Like mild 
 imperative, 37. In prohibitions w. ju^, 
 37, 79. In Final clauses, w. oTrio?, 6<t>pa.f 
 fjLTJf 68. With oirid? or oirtag ju.17, after verbs 
 of striving^ qff'ectingj &c. 73. With on-ws 
 or oini>9 ft^, in exhortations and prohibi- 
 tions (sc. o-KOTrei), 78. With ^ij, afterverbs 
 of /earingr, 82. In Protasis w. el: ex- 
 pressing a future condition, 103 ; expr. a 
 present intention, &c., 93. In Rel. clauses 
 expr. a purpose, 137. With ov /i^, 184 - 
 187. With av : in Homer, 55 ; in Attic, 
 66. Periphrastic form of, w. /u.eMc», 38. 
 
 ■ ) Optative, in indirect quotation, 38. 
 
 After oTTto? or on-wy jujJ, 39^41, 73, 74. 
 
 . Infinitive, 41 - 43. After verbs of 
 
 saying, thinking, &c.,in indirect quota- 
 tion, 41. For Pres. or Aor. Inf., after 
 verbs of wishing, &c., after werre, and 
 even in other constructions, 42. Regu- 
 larly used after verbs of hoping, &c., 43. 
 With av (rarely), 60, Primary or second- 
 ary tense, 53. 
 
 ■ , Participle, 43. Expressing a pur- 
 pose, 217, 214. With av (rarely), 60. 
 Primary or secondary tense, 63. 
 
 Future Perfect, Indicative, 43-46. Com- 
 pound forms of: Perf. Part. w. eo-o/iai, 
 44 ; rarely Aor. Part. v. cfo-o/xat, 44, 216. 
 
 Often nearly = Fut., 44 In the depend- 
 ent moods, 44. 
 
 General and particular suppositions, how 
 
 distinguished, 88, 89. 
 Qenitive Absolute, 222, 225, 232. 
 Gnomic Aorist and Perf. See Aor. and 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Hindrance, verbs implying, w. Infln., 198- 
 
 202. See In&nitive. 
 Hoping, promising, &c., verbs ol^ w. Fut 
 
 lufin., 43 ; w. Fres. Infln., li ; w. Acr 
 
 Inf., 32, 33. 
 
 Imperative, 2. Tenses of^ see Present, Per- 
 feet, &c. Not used w. av, 67. In com- 
 mands, exhortations, &c., 178 ; w. aye, 
 4>epe, IBi, 178 } second person w. «■«?, 179. 
 After olcrd* o, &c., 179. In prohibitions 
 w. tLTf (Present, rarely Aor.), 180, 181. 
 
 Imperfect, 6-8. Distinguished firom Aor., 
 7, 8, 24. Dehoting attempted action, 7. 
 In sense of Pluperf. (when Pres. = Perf.), 
 7. Sometimes not distinguished from 
 Aor., 7, 8. Expressing past likelihood, 
 intention, or danger, 7. Expressing a 
 fact just recognized, 8. In Final clauses, 
 72. In Protasis or Apodosis (implying 
 non-fulfilment of condition), 93-102} 
 how distinguished from Aor., 94, 96 (6) ; 
 how from Pluperf., 96 (6) ; in Horn, usu- 
 ally past, 96. With av, in Apodosis, 66, 
 93 - 96. Iterative, w. ov, 47 j iterative 
 forms in -(tkov and -o'koju.i]!' (w. av^ in 
 Hdt.}, 47, 48. How expressed in Infin. 
 and Part. (Imperf. Inf. and Part), 16, 
 17. How expressed in Optative (Imperf. 
 Opt.), 163. 
 
 Indicative, 1. Tenses of, see Present, &;c. 
 Primary and secondary tenses of, 3, 49, 
 50. With av, see 'Av. Fut, in Final 
 and Object clauses after ottui;, &c. ; see 
 Future. Secondary tenses of, in Final 
 clauses, 72. Present and post tenses of, 
 after jn^, lest, 83 - 86. Present and past 
 tenses of, in Protasis, 92. Secondary 
 tenses of, in both Protasis and Apmlosis 
 {av in Apod.), 93-102 ; see 'Av. Fut. : 
 in Protasis, 103 -, in Apodosis, 102. Foi 
 Subj. mgeneral suppositions, 109. Aftei 
 Relative w. definite antecedent, 122. Id 
 causal Rel sentences, 141. In condi 
 tional Rel. sentences: present and past 
 tenses, 126 ; secondary tenses (implying 
 non-fulfilment of a condition). 126. Foi 
 Subj. and Opt. In general supposition! 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 259 
 
 after Kel., 131. In Kel. seDtences after a 
 general negative, 132. Secondary tenses 
 of^ incond. Kel. sentences, by assimila- 
 tion, 136. Future after Be]., expressing 
 a purpose, 137. Put. after i^' u and 
 €<t>' wre, 140. After wore, 140. After 
 Iw7, &c., until J 142 ; second, tenses, re- 
 ferring to a result not attained, 143. 
 After irpLVj 145 ; distinguished from In- 
 fin., 144, 145, 210. Id indirect quotation 
 after on and m, and in indir. questions, 
 14d, 150; may be retained even after 
 second, tenses, 151, 162 ; in depend- 
 ent clauses of indir. quot., 160 - 165. In 
 causal sentences, 171. Secondary tenses 
 of, in wisheB, 173, 176. Future after ov 
 jLi^, 186, 184 ; see Future. 
 
 Indirect Questions, 147 ; see Contents,Chap. 
 IV, Sect. IV. 
 
 Indirect Quotation, 147 - 171 ; see Contents, 
 Chap. IV, Sect: IV. Moods used in, see 
 Itkiicative, &c. Tenses used in, see Pres- 
 entj &c. ; and Contents, Chap. n. 
 
 Infinittre, 2, 183-212. Tenses of, 212; 
 see Present, &c., and Contents, Chap. II. 
 With av, see "Av. After verba of fearing, 
 86, 87, 190. In Apodosis, 113. In indi- 
 rect quotations, 147, 148, 157 -» 169. After 
 u^eKav in wishes, 176, 177. Fut. w. ov 
 /LL1}, in indir. quot., 186. See Contents, 
 Chap. V. 
 
 Interrogative Subj., 182-184. In indirect 
 questions, 154. 
 
 Iterative Imperfect and Aorist. See Im- 
 perfect and Aorist. 
 
 Moods, general view of, Chap. I. Use of, 
 Chap. rv. Constructions enumerated, 65; 
 see Indicative, &c. 
 
 Narration, Infln. in, 210. 
 
 Object clauses with ft-ij after Verbs of fear' 
 ingy &c., 66, 80. Subj. and Opt. in, 80, 
 M^ and (xij ou in, 80, 67. How related to 
 Final clauses, 66, 81. Fut. Ind. in, 82. 
 *Offws fi.-ri{— jLt^) in, 82. Mv) av w. Opt. 
 (in Apod.) in, 82, 83. M^ alone w. Subj., 
 by ellipsis of the leading verb, 83. M^ 
 w. present and past tenses of Indie, in, 
 83-85, foot-note f to 84. Other construc- 
 tions allowed in, see Ftar, caution, and 
 danger. 
 
 Optative, 2, 174. Its relations to the Indie, 
 and Subjunctive., Appendix L Tenses 
 ot, see Present, &c. ; when primary and 
 when jfcon^iy, 50-53. With Zi/o, ottu;, 
 
 &c., in pure Fin. clauses, 67. With ottwc 
 and oTTdis juif, after verbs of striving^ &c., 
 (seldom), 73, 74. With jllij, after verba 
 oi fearing, &c., 80. In Protasis w. et, 
 91 : in particular suppositions, 106 ; in 
 general suppos., 107, 108. In Apodosis 
 w. av, 57, 105, see'Av -. w. Protasis sup- 
 pressed, 112 ; as mild command or ex- 
 hortation, or resembling Fut. Ind., 113. 
 In conditional Bel. sentences : in par- 
 ticular suppositions, 128 ; in general 
 suppos., 129 ; by assimilation, 136. la 
 Kel. clauses expressing a purpose (Epic, 
 rarely Attic), 138. After ttoq, &c., until^ 
 142,143 ; implying a;3«rpo«e,113,166- 
 168 (d). After irpiv, 145. In indirect 
 quotations and questions, 148 ; see Con- 
 tents, Chap. IV, Sect. IV. In causal 
 sentences, 172. In wishes, 173, 174 ; ex- 
 pressing concession or exhortation, 175. 
 Future, 38 - 41 ; rarely w. ov /x^, after us 
 in indirect quotation, 186. 
 
 Participle, 3, 213-232. Tenses of, see 
 Present, &c. With av, see 'Ai/. Condi- 
 tional (as Protasis) representing Indie, 
 Subj., or Opt., 217, 110. As Apodosis 
 (with or without ac), 113. In indirect 
 quotation, 159, 229. See Contents, Chap. 
 VI. 
 
 Particular and general suppositions, how 
 distinguished, 88, 89. 
 
 Perfect Indicative, 18, 19. Why primary, 
 18. Compound form of, 18. Of certain 
 vprbs, in sense of Present, 19. In epis 
 ties, 19. Beferring to the future for em- 
 phasis (oAuAa), 19. Not used w. av, 56. 
 Gnomic, 45 -, see Perf. Infin. 
 
 in dependent moods, relations of to 
 
 Pres. of those moods, 19. Subj. and Opt., 
 20. Imperat., 21 : in mathematical lan- 
 guage, 21 ; second person of (rare), 22 , 
 in sense of Present, 22. Infin., 22 -. w. 
 tii^eXov in wishes, 176, 177 ; primary or 
 secondary tense, 53 ; w. av, 59 ; in a 
 gnomic sense, 47 } as Fluperf. Infin., 23 
 (Kem.), 69. Partic-, 23 ; primary or sec- 
 ondary, 63. 
 
 Pluperfect, 18, 19. Compound form of, 18. 
 Of certain verbs, in sense of Imperf., 19, 
 Sometimes nearly = Aor. (Horn, and 
 Hdt.), 19. Expressing past certainty, 
 &;c., 19. In Final clauses, 72. In Pro- 
 tasis and Apodosis, how distinguished 
 from Imperf. and Aor., 96 (6). With av, 
 in Apod., 66, 93, 94. How expressed in 
 Infin. and Partic, 23 (Kem.). 
 
260 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 Present, Indicative, 4. Expressing a gen- 
 eral truth, 4, 46 j an attempted action, 6. 
 With adverbs of past time (as TraAoi.), 5. 
 Of certain verbs, in sense of Perf., 5. Of 
 verbs signifying to hear, to learn, &c., 
 6. Of eljLtt, as Put., sometimes as Pres., 
 6. Expressing likelihood, intention, or 
 danger^ fl. Not used w. av, 55. Historic, 
 6 i a secondary tense, 49. 
 
 . , in dependent moods, 8-17. How 
 
 distinguished from the Aor., 8. See 
 Contents, Chap. II. } and Subj., Opt., 
 Imperat., and Infi.n. 
 
 , Subjunctive, 9, 10. In Jirst person, 
 
 in prohibitions w. ^^, ISOj see Aor. Subj. 
 With ou My 184. 
 
 , Optative, 10 - 12. In indirect quo- 
 tations and questions, 11 } ambiguity in 
 indirect questions, 12. 
 
 . , Imperative, 12. In prohibitions w. 
 
 jLtjJ, 180. See Aor. Subj. 
 
 — , Infinitive, three uses of, 12. With 
 
 indef. time, 12. After xP**^» tfetnrtfu, 
 &c., 13. In indirect quotation, 13. For 
 Fut., after verbs of hoping, &c., 14. Af- 
 ter keyia and etTTOc, to command, 14. 
 As Imperfect Infin., 15, 16. With dv in 
 Apodosis, 58, 113, 157 ; see "Av. With 
 av, representing iterative Imperf., 60. 
 Primary or secondary tense, 53. 
 
 — , Participle, 16, 17. As Imperf. Part., 
 
 17. Primary or secondary, 53. As Pro- 
 tasis (= Pres. Ind., Subj., or Opt.), 110, 
 217. With av, in Apod, (never In Prot.)» 
 58, 113, 159 ; see *Av. 
 
 Prevention, verbs implying, w. Inf., 198- 
 202. See Infinitive. 
 
 Primary and Secondary tenses, 3, 48 - 54 •, 
 see Tenses. 
 
 Prohibitions, Subj. and Imperat. in, 180 ; 
 Aor, Imperat. rare in, 181. Fut. Ind. in, 
 w. Sjtojs fiiq or /xij (so. o-KOTret), 78. See 
 oil ^i}. 
 
 Promiuing, verbs of j see Hoping. 
 
 Protasis and Apodosis, defined, 87. Moods 
 and tenses in, see indie, &c. ; Present, 
 &c. ; and Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. U. 
 
 Purpose, expressed by Final clause w. Iva, 
 &c., 67 i by Relat. w. Fut. Ind., 137 ; 
 by Bel. w. Subj. and Opt. In Hom. (rare- 
 ly in Attic), 133 ; by eu; w. Subj- and 
 Opt., 143, 167, 168 {d) ; by wore w. In- 
 fin., 206 ; by Inf. alone, 203 ; by Fut. 
 Fart., 214, 217. 
 
 Questions, of doubt, w. first pera. of Subj. 
 (sometimes w. ^ovAei or ddAei;), 182 ; 
 rarely w. third person of BubJ., 183 : see 
 
 Subjunctive. Indirect, 147 ; seelndireol 
 quotation. 
 
 Quotation, see Direct and Indirect. 
 
 Relative and Temporal sentences, 121-146; 
 see Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. III. Eela 
 tive with Infinitive, 193. 
 
 Secondary, see Tenses. 
 
 Similes (Homeric): Gnomic Aor. in, 46, 
 133 } Subj. (without dv) and Pres. Indie. 
 in, 133. 
 
 Subjunctive, 1. Its relations to the Opt, 
 Appendix 1. Tenses of ; see Pres., Perf., 
 and Aor. ; always primary, 50. With 
 dv or Ke, see 'Av. With iva, oiria^f &C. 
 in pure Final clauses, 67: after secondary 
 tenses, 70. With ottus and ottws /i^ after 
 verbs of striving, &c. (seldom), 73. 
 With /zTj after verbs of fearing^ &c., 80. 
 In Protasis w. iav (dv, ^v), 90, 91 ; in 
 particular suppositions, 102 ; in general 
 suppos., 107, 108} w. €t (without dv), see 
 'Av, In Apodosis w. Ke or dv (Horn.), 57, 
 182 } see 'Av. In conditional Relat. sen- 
 tences : in particular suppositions, 127 ; 
 in general suppo3.jl29; by assimHation, 
 135. In Homeric similes after wy, u? ore, 
 132. In Rel. causes expressing a purpose 
 (Epic), 138. After Iw?, &c., until^ 142, 
 143 i implying a purpose, 143, 167, 168 
 (d). After n-pi'v, 145. In indirect ques- 
 tions, representing Interrog. Subj., 154, 
 155. In indir. quotations, repres. de 
 pendent Subj., 148,160; may be changed 
 to Opt. or retained, after second, tenses, 
 148, 160, 166. First person of, in exhor 
 tatious, 179} see dye, ((>e'pe. Aor. in pro- 
 hibitions w. jLLi}, 180 ; Pres. only in first 
 person (rarely sing.), 180, 181. Inde 
 pendent (like Fut. Ind.) in Hom., ISl ; 
 w. ov or Ki, 182. Interrog. (in questions 
 of doubt), 182. With ov jll^, as strong 
 future, 184. 
 
 Temporal sentences, see Relative. With 
 ews, &c., until, 142-144. With irpCv, 
 144-147,210. 
 
 Tenses, enumeration of, 3. Primary and 
 secondary, 3, 48 - 54. Relative or abso- 
 lute time denoted by, 3, 4. Gnomic and 
 iterative, 45-43. Use of, see Contents 
 Chap. II. See also Present, &c. 
 
 Verbal in -Te'oy,3; see Contents, Chap. VU 
 
 Wish, expression of, 173-177 ; see Con- 
 tents, Chap. IV., Sect. VI. Ind and Opt 
 in, see Ind. and Opt. Latin and Qreelt 
 expressions of, compared, 177. Infin in 
 (poet.), 209. 
 
GEEEK INDEX. 
 
 N. B. The figures refer to Pages, 
 
 AyavoxTeu cl, 120. 
 
 'A-yairatai ei, 120. 
 
 Aye or oyerc w. Imperat., 178, 179, 180. 
 
 'ASueeca as Perf., 6. 
 
 Idtrxyvoftai with Part, and Inf., 228. Ai- 
 
 a\vvQtt.aL et, 120. 
 Altlo; eifii., w. Inf. (sometimes w. toO or 
 
 to'), 190, 191 J w. Aor. Inf., 32. 
 'Ajcoveiv, aKOvo-ai, in sound, 196. 
 'AALO'Koju.ai. as Perf., 5. 
 'AAAa or avrap (like hi) In Apodosis, 121, 
 
 137 (Rem.). 
 A/toi w. Partic, 219. 
 
 'Af (S), Adv., two uses of, in Apodosis and 
 in Protasis, 64. Not used w. Pres. and 
 Perf. Indie, 65. With Fut. Ind. : in 
 early poets, 65, 104 } in Attic, 66. With 
 secondary tenses of Ind. in Apodosis, 66, 
 87, 90, 94, 127*, omitted for emphasis, 96; 
 regularly omitted in Apod, formed by 
 InfiD. and exp^i/.eSet.&c, 97-100. With 
 Imperf. and Aor. Ind. in iterative sense, 
 47' With Subjunctive : in Protasis {lav, 
 av, or ^v)f 66, 87, 102, 108; in conditional 
 Kel. and Temporal clauses, 66, 125, 128, 
 130, 143, 144, 145; often omitted in Horn. 
 (rarely in Attic), 104, 105, 109, 133. In 
 Pinal clauses after as oirbi;, o^pa: w. 
 Subj., 68, 69; rarely w. Opt. 69, 70. 
 Omitted from idv, orav, 8; av, &c., 
 when the Subj. is changed to Opt 
 after past tenses, 149 ; rarely retained, 
 163, 169. Seldom w. us and Subj. 
 in Hom. similes, 132. Epic use of, w. 
 Subj. in Apodosis, 57, 104, 182. With 
 Optative, always forming Apodosis, 67, 
 105, 128, see Optative ; never w. Put. 
 Opt., 67 ; rarely omitted, 100. With an 
 Opt. lu Protasis which is also an Apod., 
 107, 133. Et KB w. Opt. in Horn., 107. 
 Ne^sr used w. Imperat., 57. With Infin. 
 and Part. : in Apodosis, 57-61, 113, 157, 
 169, 192, 232 ; never in Protasis, 62 ; use 
 
 of each tense with, see Present, Ac. With 
 Inf. for iterative Imperf. an.d Aor. w. 
 avj 60. Position of, 61, 62. Repetition 
 of, 62 - 64. Without a verb, 63. Tax* 
 av^perhapSj 64. 
 
 'Av (a), contracted for, edv. Bee 'Edv. 
 
 'Avaipeio, to give an oracular responae, 
 see Xpau. 
 
 'Avexoiiai w. Part., 228. 
 
 'ATTOKafivia w. Part, and Inf., 228. 
 
 'ApKeu w. Part., 228. 
 
 'Are, are Sri, w. Part., 219. 
 
 AvTiKa w. Part., 219. 
 
 'Axpi) see'Ews. 'Axpt o?, 142. 
 
 Be\T'uav w. Fart, 228. 
 
 BouAei or ^ovketrOe w. Interrog. Subj., 18SL 
 
 'BovKoiiii/ta ftoc touto ecrrbf, 229, 
 
 PeyofeVat, to 6e, 19. 
 
 Ae, in Apodosis, 12L In antecedent clansea, 
 
 137. 
 AeiKi/vjLit W. Part., 229. 
 Aeicoi/ eoTii^ et, 120. 
 A^Xos eifjn w. Part., 230. 
 AtaTe\eui w. Part., 227 ; see AavOavoom 
 ACSbtfii, to offer^ 6. Imperf. o^ 7* 
 AiKaios w. Inf., 195. 
 AiOTrep, 171. 
 AtoTt, 171 i w. Inf. (Hdt.), 193. 
 
 'Eoi' (et a;'), contracted av (S) or qj*, 66, 87, 
 104 ; w. Subj., 102, 108. 
 
 'EjSovAdju.ijj' with Infinitive in Apodosis, 
 without af, 98. 
 
 'ESet, exf^v (xP^**)) ^f^*'j s*^** trpotr^Kev 
 eiKOs ijc ripfj.0TT€v, Jjv or uTr^pxep, with 
 Infin. in Apodosis, without af, 97 - 100. 
 
 Et, I/, 87, 92, 93, 105, 108 ; see "Av. Sup* 
 posing that^ 115, 168. After Bavtid^'a^ 
 &c., 120. With Inf. (Hdt.), 193. Ei 
 yap, or CL, in wishes, 173-177. 
 
262 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 El, whether^ 120, 147, 161 ; after verbs 
 
 ot fearing. 86. 
 £i yd.(i in wishes, see £u 
 El £' aye, 111> 
 
 El 5e ju,^ in alteroatiTCB, 112. 
 Elfle in wishes, 173-177. 
 Eifcbf ijp in Apodosis, see'ESei. 
 EZfit fc *c ffoingr .■ as Future, 6 ; as Pres., 
 
 a i w. Inf., 204. 
 Elrai, expressing a purpose, 204. 
 EIttov, / commaaided^ w. Inf., 14, 34. 
 Ety 6 (for ewy) w. Indie. (Hdt), 142. 
 ElffOKfl w. Subj. and Opt, 143 ; see'Ews- 
 'Ekuv elf at, 203. 
 "Ei-eoTt, Partic. of, used personally w. Inf., 
 
 194, 195. 
 "Evriv in Apodosis, see'ESei. 
 'E$at0(^? w. Part,, 219. 
 'E^i* in Apodosis, see 'ESet. 
 ''Ettov or cTT^i', see 'Oral'. 
 'ETreap, lonic for eTr^v. 
 'ETret or cTreifi^ (temporal) ; w. Aor. Indie. 
 
 (not Pluperf.), 25 ; w. Aor. Opt., 29 i w. 
 
 Infln., 193. Causal, 171. 
 'EffetSai', w. Aor. Subj. as Fut. Perf., 26. 
 
 See 'Otov. 
 'EiriSofo? w. Inf. 195. 
 '"EiriKaXpio^ w. Inf., 195. 
 'ETTLjueXeo/^ai (eTriju.^Xo^ai), W. oirioc and 
 
 Fut. Ind., 73 } w. Inf., or Inf. w. tou, 
 
 192. 
 "ETTtT^Seto? w. Inf., 195. 
 'ETTtTpe'TTfa) w. Part., 226. 
 'Eore, un<t7, see 'Ews. 
 Eiflus w. Part., 219. 
 EvpLO-Ku w. Part., 226. 
 ■E07JI', in Homer, 99. 
 'E^' ^ or €0* ^Te, w. Fut. Ind,, 140; w Inf., 
 
 207. 
 'ExpV ^° Apodosis. See 'ESet. 
 "Exi"> w. Aor. or Perf. Part, as periphrastic 
 
 Perf., 229. 
 'Ew?, e<7Te, axP'i H-^XP^^ ettroKe, 5(^pa, un- 
 
 £z7, 142-144', expressing a purpose, 143, 
 
 167, 108. 
 'Etoc, oijipa, so /onjT as^ see Belatire. 
 
 •Hkw as Perf., 6. Imperf. of, T. 
 
 'Hp^oTTei' in Apodosis, see'Efiet. 
 ■HTTaoiwat, as Perf., 6. 
 
 ©aO/ia ifieVflai, 196. 
 
 ®avju.a^(t> ei, dai'^acrTtii' eo'Tti' ei, 120. 
 
 ©^Aets or eeAere w. Interrog. Subjunctive 
 
 (poet.), 182. 
 ^ttrirl^ia^ sec Xpaco. 
 
 'I5ci»', opai', in appearance, 198 
 
 *Wt w. Imperat., 178. 
 
 •Uavdi w. Part., 228. 
 
 'Ikw or i/eacw as Perf. (Horn.), 5. 
 
 'Ira; in Final clauses; w. Subj. and i^t., 
 
 67, 70 ; w. second, tenses of Indie 72. 
 
 Not used with av, 70 ; tra kc, 70. In 
 
 Object clauses after Ai'o-troftat (Horn.), 78} 
 
 similar coostr. in N. Tsst., 78. 
 , where, with dv, 70 (R.). 
 
 Ka, Doric for ks i see 'Ac. 
 
 Kat, Kotwep (/cat . . . wep), W. Fart., 220, 
 
 221. 
 KoiTot w. Part, (rare), 221. 
 K^ or KeV, see 'Ac. 
 KeKA^o-dai, fo Ae called, 19. 
 KifSui'euta) w. Inf. in Apodosis, 99. 
 
 Kpareb), see Nikcuj. 
 
 KpeiVo-idi/ w. Fart., 228. 
 Kupeu w. Part, (poet.), 227. 
 
 Aai'dar&i, (^dai/u, TVy^avia, StaTcAew, W 
 
 Part., 227 ; w. ^or. Part., 34. 
 Aeyo), /o commanif, w. Inf., 14, 34. 
 
 M^\X(>),w. Inf. as periphrastic Fut., 38; tense 
 of Inf with, 38. Imperf. of, w. Inf. : ex- 
 pressing past intention, &c., 38, 99; form- 
 ing Apodosis (without dv\ 99. 
 
 Mefitnj/xai, / remember, 19 ; w. Part., 229; 
 W. ore, 231. 
 
 McTofu w. Part., 219. 
 
 Me'xpt-i see'Ecu;. Mexpi o5, 142. 
 
 M^, lest, in Final clauses : w. Subj. and 
 Opt., 67, 70 ; rarely w. Fut Ind., 68. 
 After verbs of striving, be. (for on-u; /t^), 
 77. With Fut. Ind. in prohibitions, 37, 
 79, 187. After verbs of fearing^ &c. i 
 w. Subj. and Opt., 80 ; w. Fut. Ind., 82- 
 "With Subj. (by ellipsis of a verb of fectr- 
 ing), 83. With dv, 83. With pres&tt 
 and past tenses of Indie, 83-85 ; never 
 interrog., 84. With Fut. Opt. 39, 40. 
 
 , not, w. If a, OTTO}';, &c., In Final and 
 
 Object clause, 67. In Protasis, 88 la 
 Bel. clauses w. indej". anteoed,, 122, 124. 
 In wishes (with and without ei)i 174, 176. 
 In prohibitions, ISO. With interrog. Subj., 
 181. With Inf., after verbs implying na- 
 gation, 198, 200, 201. 
 
 Mil ou (double neg.) : w. Inf., 198, 200, 201,* 
 w. Part., 200 } before Nouus, 200. 
 
 NtKixb) and Kpare'w, AS Perf., 6. 
 Nofii^ta, olofiai, and ^rifi'., w. Awiit. IdC 
 referring to the future (0, 33. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 263 
 
 'O for on (in aom.), 170. 
 
 OlSa (novi), / knowy 19 ; see OtirBa, 
 
 OZojLtab w. Aor. Inf. for Put. (?), 33. 
 
 Olof w. Infin., 194. Olov, ola., ota. Sij, vr. 
 
 Part., 219. 
 OlvB" h Spairov i 179. 
 Olxoiuu. as Perf., 5. Imperf. of, 7. 
 'OAtYOV (Setf), almost^ 208. 
 •OAAwjuat as Perf. (Trag.), 6. 
 "OAuAa, i shall perish^ 19. 
 'OjLioioc w. lofin. (Horn.)) 197. 
 'OTTOTai', see Ora.v. 
 'OTTOTe, wAcTt, see Relative. Since (causal), 
 
 171. 
 'Otto)?, originally Rel. Adv., 75*, as indirect 
 
 inter.og., 75, 77, 85, 154. In order that^ 
 
 that, in Final clauses; w. Subj. and Opt., 
 
 67, 70 ; w. av and Subj., 68, 69 } w. Tut. 
 
 Ind., 68 } w. second tenses of ladle, 72. 
 
 After verba of striving^ &c. : w. Tut. 
 
 Ind. (sometimes Subj. and Opt.), 73 } w. 
 
 av and Subj, (rare), 76. That (like /x^), 
 
 after verbs of fearing, &c., 85. That 
 
 (like (t)5 or ort), in indirect quotations, 
 
 170. 
 'On-ws fLTJ (for ju.^), lest, that, after verbs of 
 
 fearingy &c., 82. 
 'Opav, ISelv, in appearance, 196. 
 'Oo-oj' or (ii? w. Absol. Infin. 207. 
 'O<7os w. Infin. 294. 
 *OoTts oiv ^j'OiTTts ttot' iarivy 134. 
 'Oral', oirdrai/, eTrdv or eTuJi' (eireav), and 
 
 ineiSdvy 55, 125^ 127, 129 ; see 'Av. 
 'Ore, u^en, see Relative. After /lejii^jbiat, 
 
 231. With Infin., 193. 
 
 , since (causal), 171. 
 
 'On, that, in indirect quotations, 147 . w. 
 
 Ind. and Opt., 148, 149, 150 ; vr. Ind. or 
 
 Opt. w. av, 156. Before direct quot., 171. 
 , because (causal), 171-173, see 
 
 Contents, Chap. lY., Sect. T.j after verbs 
 
 of fearing, 86. 
 
 'O Tt TTOT eOTlVj'OoTl? TTOT*. COTtV, &C , 134. 
 
 Ou, after ju.^, lest, 67, 80. In Apodosis, 88; 
 rarely in Protasis, 88 (N.). In Rcl. 
 clauses w. def. anteced., 122. In causal 
 Rel. clauses, 142 (R.). la indirect dis- 
 course, 149. 
 
 Oi/K av (ftOdvoi^ (tfiddvovre^, 22S. 
 
 OvK olSa av el, 62. 
 
 Oil fi-q, 184-187; see Contents, Chapter 
 lY., Section YIU. Davres's Canon on, 
 79, 80. 
 
 OiiveKa, because, 171. 
 
 OuTU9, unplying a Protasis, 110. With Opt. 
 in protestations, 175. Referring to a 
 Participle. 2I» 
 
 'Oi^eA.o;', see ' Q^eKov. 
 
 'oiftpa (Epic and Lyric), aaj^nal particle: 
 
 w. Subj. and Opt., 67 } w^ ay, 69. With 
 
 Fut. Ind., 68. 
 , as temporal particle, until, 142 ■• 
 
 144 ; see eus. So long as, see Relative. 
 
 IlaAai w. Present, 5. 
 
 naiTotos yiyvoftai (Ion.) w. Participle, 227. 
 
 Ilapo? (like wpiv) w. Inf. (Hom.), 212. 
 
 Has w. Imperat. (2d pers.), 179. 
 
 Uavfo w. Part., 226. 
 
 UeCBta, to try to persuade, 6. Imperfect 
 of, 7. 
 
 netpao/iat ff. Part. (Hdt.), 227. 
 
 nepiopob), w. Part., 226 ; w. Aor, Part., 36- 
 
 UioTsva w. Inf. and tu, 197. 
 
 UoAAd; eijui, iroAAos cyKetjitai, W. Part. 
 (Ion.), 227. 
 
 UpiiTEt, Partic. of, used personally w. In- 
 fin., 194, 195. 
 
 IIpLV, w. Ind., Subj., and Opt., 145, 146. 
 With Infin., 210-212. As Adverb, soon- 
 er, 146 (N. 5). 
 
 Upiv y ore (Horn.), 146. 
 
 llplv ri, 146, 211, 212. 
 
 HpoaSexofxevta fjLOL tovto i(mv, 229. 
 
 UpotrijKev in Apodosis, see 'ESet. 
 
 Hpotn^Kei, Partic. of, used personally vr. 
 Infin., 194, 195. 
 
 Upocrdef 71, 146, 211. 
 
 Hporepov ^, 146, 211. 
 
 Has yap av; IIus oiiK dv$ Jbc, 63. 
 
 SvvobSa, avyytyvtatTKOi, w. Fart., 230 
 
 Tax* «**» ®4. 
 
 TeBv^Kivai, to be dead, 19. 
 
 -T€os {-riov, -reo), Yerbal in, 8, 233, 234 \ 
 
 see Contents, Chapter YII. 
 Tt'Aefets; 38. 
 Tt ftaBiavi Ti vaBav; wherefore/ 2S1, 
 
 222. 
 T( ndBia ; 183, 184. 
 TiKTu (in tragedy) as Perf., 6. 
 To vvv elvat, 208. 
 Tvyxdvto w. Part., 227 i see AavBdvto. 
 
 *Y(rT€pov ^ w. Infin., 211. 
 
 9avep6<; elfit w. Part., 230. 9avepov iroUiw 
 
 w. Part, 230. 
 $epe w. Imperat., 178, 179, 180. 
 ^evybi as Perf., 6. 
 *77/xt w. Aor. Inf. for Put. (?), 33. 
 ^dapfaj w. Part., 227 ; see Aai'd'dfu. ^Bdim 
 
 ri V. Infin. (Hdt.), 212. 
 
264 
 
 GKEEK INDEX. 
 
 XpiiOi avaipeia, Betnrt^iaf \r, Pres* or Aor. 
 Inf., 13, 31 ; sometimea v. Fut. Inf., 13. 
 
 'Ot, originally Kel. Adv., 76 (R.). In order 
 that, thatj in Final clauses : w. Subj. 
 and Opt., 67, 70 ; w. av and Subj., 68, 69; 
 w. Put. Ind., 63 *, w. second, tenses of 
 Iodic, 72. Sometimes (for on-oi?) after 
 verbs of striving, &c., 77 (N. 4) ; Ho- 
 meric construction of, with Subj. or Opt, 
 76 (N. 2.}. Sometimes (for f;i4) after 
 verbs of fearing, 86. 
 
 , when, see Kelative With Infin., 
 
 193. 
 
 , that, in indirect quotation (like Srt), 
 
 147, 143, 149, 160. Once w. Sulj. for Fut. 
 Ind. (Horn.), 78, 171. 
 
 'Off, because, 171-173. 
 
 , in wishes; w. Opt., 175; w. u^eAov, 
 
 177. With Inf., 206, 207, 208. With 
 Fartic, 219, 220, 226, 231, 232 ; w. Fart 
 and av 232. 
 
 'Claitap w. Partic, 219, 222, 225. 
 
 'iloTrep av el (oKTn-epai'ei), 63, 113. 
 
 'Oart, so that, w. Indie, 140 With Int, 
 205 ; after verbs and adject, which com- 
 monly take Inf. alone, 206 (N. 2.), 206. 
 With Opt., Indie, or Inf. w. iv, 141, 207. 
 With Imperat., 141. 
 
 , in Homer, = StiriTep, as if, 207. In 
 
 Hdt., w. ParUc.,= are, 219, 223. 
 
 'Qt^eAoi* or u^eAAoi' in wishes, 98, ITS. 
 177. 
 
 THE KND. 
 
 Cambridge : Stereotyped and Printed by Welch, Bigelow, ft Co. 
 
GREEK. 
 
 GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMAR. By William W. 
 
 Goodwin, Ph. B., Eliot Frotessor of Greek Literature in Harrard University. 
 
 12mo. Half morocco. 262 pages 
 
 Tbe object of this Grammar is to state general principles clearly and distinctly, 
 witb. special regard to those who are preparing for college. In the sections on the 
 Moods are stated, for the first time In an elementary form, the principles which are 
 e^borated in detail in the author's " Syntax of the Greek Moods and Tenses." 
 
 GBEEK MOODS AND TENSES. The Sixth Edition. 
 
 By William W. Goodwin, Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard Uni- 
 versity. 1vol. 12mo. Cloth. 264 pages 
 
 This work was first published in 1860, and it appeared in a new form — much en- 
 larged and in great part rewritten — in 1865. In the present edition the whole has 
 been again revised j some sections and notes have been rewritten, and a few notes 
 have been added. The object of the work is to give a plain statement of the princi- 
 ples which govern the construction of the Greek Moods and Tenses, — the most im- 
 portant and the most difficult part of Greek Syntax. 
 
 GOODWIN'S GREEK BEADER. Consisting of Extracts 
 
 from Xenophon, Plato, Herodotus, and Thucydides ; being the full amount of 
 Greek Prose required for admission at Harvard. With Maps, Notes, References 
 to GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMAR, and paraUel References to CROSBY'S and 
 HADLEY'S GRAMMARS. Second edition, edited by Propessoe W. W. Good- 
 win, of Harvard College. 12mo. Half morocco. 384 pages .... 
 The revised edition contains the first and second books of the Anabasis (in place 
 of the third and fourth books of the former editions) with copious notes, the greater 
 part of the second book and an extract from the seventh of the Helleuica, with the 
 first chapter of the Memorabilia, of Xenophon ; the last part of the Apology, and the 
 beginning and end of the Phaedo, of Plato \ selections from the sixth, seventh, and 
 eighth books of Herodotus, and from the fourth book of Thucydides. 
 
 GOODWIN'S SELECTIONS FROM XENOPHON 
 
 AND HERODOTUS. With Notes adapted to Goodwin's Greek Grammar, 
 Parallel References to Crosby's and Hadley's Grammars, and copper-plate 
 Maps. Edited by Professor W. W. Goodwin and John Williams White, of 
 
 Harvard College. 12mo. Half morocco 408 pages 
 
 This book contains the first four books of the Anabasis, and the greater part of 
 the second book of the Hellenica, of Xenophon ; and extracts from the sixth, seventh, 
 and eighth books of Herodotus. It has been prepared for the use of those who from 
 want of time or for other reasons are unable to read the greater variety of selections 
 in Greek Prose which are contained in Goodwin's Greek Reader. 
 
 THE FIRST FOUR BOOKS OF THE ANABASIS 
 
 OF XENOPHON. Edited, with copious Notes and References to Goodwin's 
 Greek Grammar, Parallel Refe^nces to Crosby's and Hadley's Grammars, and 
 a copper-plate Map, by Professor W. W, Goodwin and John Willluhs White, 
 of Harvard College. 12mo, Half morocco. 240 pages 
 
 LEIGHTON'S GREEK LESSONS. Prepared to accompany 
 
 Goodwin's Greek Grammar. By R. F. Leighton, Master of Melrose High School. 
 
 12mo. Half morocco. 264 pages . 
 
 This work contains about one hundred lessons, with a progressive series of exer- 
 cises (both Greek and English), mainly selected from the first book of Xenophon's 
 Anabasis. The exercises on the Moods are sufl9.cient, it is believed, to develop the 
 general principles as stated in the Grammar. The text of four chapters of the 
 AnabaEiis is given entire, with notes and references. Full vocabularies accampauy 
 the book. 
 
 7 
 
LIDDEIiL & SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXI- 
 CON. Abridged from the new Oxford Edition. New Edition. With Appendix 
 of Proper and Geographical Names, by J. M. Whiton. Square 12mo. 836 pages. 
 
 Morocco back 
 
 Sheep binding 
 
 LIDBELL & SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXI- 
 CON. The sixth Oxford Edition unabridged. 4to. 1,881 pages. 
 
 Morocco back 
 
 Sheep binding 
 
 The English editions of Liddell & Scott are not stereotyped; but each has been, 
 thoroughly reTised, enlarged , and printed anew. The sixth edition, published in 1869^ 
 is larger by one eighth than the fifth, and contains 1,863 pages. It is an entirely dif- 
 ferent work from the first edition, the whole department of etymology having been 
 rewritten in the light of modern investigations, and the forms of the irregular verbs 
 being given in greater detail by the aid of Yeitch's Catalogue. No student of Greek 
 can afford to dispense with this invaluable Lexicon, the price of which is now for the 
 first time brought within the means of the great body of American scholars. 
 
 PLATO'S APOLOGY OP SOCRATES AND CRITO. 
 
 Edited by John Wjlliaus White, Ph. D., Assistant Professor of Greek in 
 
 Harvard University. 
 The basis of this work will be the German edition of Br- Christian Cron. (Platons 
 Tertheidigungsrede des Sokrates und Kriton. Sechste Auflage. Leipzig, Teubner, 
 1875.) To the matter contained in Dr. Cron's edition there will be added notes by 
 the Editor and from other sources, analyses, and extended references to Goodwin 
 and Hadley. The book will be for the class-room, and all matter not of direct value 
 to the student will be rigidly excluded. 
 
 THE OEDIPUS TYRANNUS OP SOPHOCLES. Ed- 
 
 ited, with an Introduction, Notes, and full explanation of the metres, by John 
 WnxuMS White, Ph. D., Assistant Professor of Greek in Harvard University. 
 12mo. Cloth. 219 pages 
 
 THE MEDEA OP EURIPIDES. Edited, with Notes and 
 
 an Introduction, by Frederic D. Allen, Ph. S., Professor in the University of 
 Cincinnati. 12mo. Cloth. Ill pages 
 
 SIDGWICK'S INTRODUCTION TO GREEK 
 
 PKOSE COMPOSITION. 12mo. Cloth. 280 pages 
 
 WHITE'S FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. Prepared 
 
 to accompany Goodwin's Oreek Grammar, and designed as an Introduction to 
 his Greek Reader. By John Williams White, Ph. D., Assistant Professor of 
 Greek in Harvard University. 12mo. Half morocco. 305 pages 
 A series of seventy-five lessons with progressive Greek-English and English'-Greek 
 
 exercises. Followed by a series of additional exercises on Forms, and complete 
 
 vocabularies. 
 
 WHITON'S SELECT ORATIONS OF LYSIAS, Com- 
 
 prising the Defence of Mantitheus, the Oration against EratostheneSj the 
 Reply to " The Overthrow of the Democracy," and the Ax«opagitio Oration 
 concerning the Sacred Olive-Trunk. Edited by James Morris Whiton, Ph.D. 
 12mo. 151 pages 
 
 The grammatical notes deal almost wholly with the syntax, — aa befits a work of 
 this grade, — and have been prepared with a special aim to elucidate the usage of 
 the verb. References are made, for the most part, to Goodwin's Greek Moods and 
 Tenses, and Goodwin's and Hadley 's Grammars. 
 
 TONGE'S ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON. Square 
 
 12mo. Cloth. 483 pages , ,